END OF VOLUME XXV.

Part 11. Published March, 1013.]

PROCEEDINGS

OF 'J'HK

§opI ^omti) of §iftonii

VOL. XXVI. (Ni.:\v Series).
PARTS I. AND TT.

F.dileii initio f/ie Authority of tliif Council.

ISSUED AUGl'Sr. 1013, and MARCH, 1Q14.

{(..ut„inini> I'.ipfrs rend befnre the Society .iiiriiif; IQIJ.

TlIK AUTIIOHH l(K TIIK SKVRRAI, PATKHM AUK SKVKIIAl.t.Y UKsriiNMI HI.K Koli
HOIINONKHS OK TIIK OPINIONS GIVKN AND FOR TIIK ACCHKAI V OK INK
STATKMKNIS MADK IIIKHKIS.

MKIJJOURNK :
KURD .t SON, I'KINTKRS. DRUMMOND STKKKT. CARLTON.

1914.

CONTENTS OF VOLUME XXVI.

Ak'i'. I.— Contrihutions to the Flora of Australia, No. 20. By Alfred

J. EwAKT, D.Sc, I'h.I)., and Bkktha Rees. (I'lates
I. and II.) ... ... ... . ... . I

11.— On Bitter, Pit and the Sensitivity of Apples to Poison. By
Alfred J. Ewart, D.Sc, Ph.D. 2iid Paper. (Plates
III. to V.) ... ... ... ... ... 12

III. On the Aofe and Physiographic Relations of the Older Ba-
salts of Greensborough and Kangaroo Ground, and of
certain Basalts at Bundoora and Ivanlioe. By J. T.
JursoN ... ... ... ... ... ... 45

1 v. — On the Occurrence of a Felsitic Dyke and Associated Brec-
cias at Sugar Loaf Hill (Mont Park), near Heidelberg. By
J. T. JuTSON and Frederick Chapman, A.L.S., &c.
(Plate VI., and one Text Figure) ... ... ... 57

v. — On Natica tasmanica, Tenison-Woods, and description of
a New Species of Natica. By G. B. Pritchabd, D.Sc,
F.G.S., and J. H. Gatliff. (Plate VII.) ... ... 63

VI. — On Some New Species and Varieties of Victorian Marine
Mollusca. By J. U. (Gatliff and C. J. Oabriel. (Plate
VIII.) ... ... ... ... ... ... 67

VII. — Additions to the Catalogue of Marine Shells of Victoria.

By J. H. Gatliff and C. J. Gabriel ... ... ... 71

VIII.— On Two New Species of Chaetogaster. By Olive B.

Daviks, M.Sc (Plate IX.) ... ... ... ... 88

IX. — New or Little-known Victorian Fossils in the National
Museum. (Part XVI.— Some Silurian Brachiopoda). By
Frederick Chapman, A.L.S., F.R.M.S. (Plates X. and
XI. ... ... ... ... ... ... 99

X. — Further Notes on Australian Hydroids. — II. By W. M.

Bale, F.R.M.S. (Plates XII. and XIII.) ... ... 114

XI.— On Eucalyptus polybractea, R. T. Baker. By R. T. Baker,

F.L.S. ... ... ... ... ... ... 148

XII.— Contributions to the Flora of Australia, No. 21. — The Flora
of the Northern Territory (Leguniinosae). By Alfred J.
Ewart, D.Sc, Ph.D., and Alexander Morrison, M.D.
(Plates XIV. and XV .. 165

Art. XIII.— Description of New and Rare Fossils obtained by Deep
Boring in the Mallee. (Part I. — Plantae ; and Rhizopoda to
Brachiopoda.) By Frederick Chapman, A.L.S., F.R.M.S.,
&c. (Plates XVI. to XIX.) ... .• 165

XIV.— A Revision of the Fossil Volutes of the Table Cape Beds,
Tasmania, with Descriptions of New Species and Varieties.
By C. B. Pritchard, D.Sc. F.G.S. (Plates XX. and XXI. » 192

XV — On the Estimation of the Position and Slope of the Foramen

Oecipitale Mao;nv;m. By L. W. G. Buchner ... ... 202

XVI.— On Australian and Tasmanian Coleoptera, with Description.s
of New Species — Part II. By Arthur M. Lea. (Plate
XXU.) ... ... ... ... ... ... 211

XVII. — On Bitter Pit and Sensitivity to Poisons. By Alfred J.

Ewart. 3rd Paper. (Plate XXIII.) ... ... ... 226

XVIII. — Notes on Amycterides, with Descriptions of New Specie.? —

Parti. By Eustace W. Ferguson, M.B.. Ch.M. ... 243

XIX. — On the Origin and Relationsliip of some Victorian Igneous

Ro<;ks. By H. S. Summers, D.Sc. (Six Text Figures) ... 256

XX. — Is Eucalyptus fruticetorum, F. v. M., identical with E.

polybractea, H. T. Raker ? By J. H. Maidkn ... 298

XXI. — Description of New and Rare Fossils obtained by Deep
Boring in the Mallee— Part II. — MoUusca. By F. Chap-
man, A.L.S., and C. J. Gabriel. (Plates XXIV. to
XXVIII.) ... ... ... ■■ 301

XXII. — On tbe Geology and Petrology of the District l)etweeii
Lilydale and Mount Dandenong. By Morris Morris,
M.Sc. (Plates XXIX. to XXXI.) ... 3:U

XXIU. — The Essentia! Oil from the leaves of Agonis flexunsa.

By R. E. Parky, B.Sc. (One Text Figure). ... ... 367

XXIV. — On a Volcanic Agglomerate, containing glaciated pebbles,
at Kangaroo Gully, near Bendigo. By Ernest W. Skeats,
D.Sc, A.R.CS., F.G.S. (Plate XXXII. and one Text
Figure). ... ... ... ... ... ... 373

XXV.— Physiograpliy of the Mnusficld District. By Charles

Fknnrk, H.Sc. (Sixteen Text I'Mgures). ... ... 386

Index .. ... ... ... ... ... ••• -i03

[Pkoc. Roy. Soc. Victukia, 26 (N.S) , I't. [., 1913.]

Akt. I. — dotitribiUlons to the Flora of AuatrdUa, No. 20}

ALFRED J. EWAHT, V).^g., Ph.D.

(Government Botanist of Victoria and Professor of Botany and
Plant Physiology in the University of Melbourne).

AND

BERTHA REES

(Lecturer on Botany, University of Melbourne).

(With Plates I.-Il.)
[Read 13th March, 1913] .

Amsinckia LYCOPSOIDKS, Lehii). (Boraginaceae).

Near }3enalla, Victoria, Huii. Mr. Little, M.L;C., 29/8/1912.

Not previously recorded as growing wild in Victoria. A native-
of California, but not yet suflficently established to be considered
naturalised.

Anthocekcis mvosotidea, F. v. M. (Solanaceae).
Jeparit, Victoria. W. K. A. Baker, 14/10/1912.

Bassia lanicuspis, F. v. M. (Chenopodiaceae).

xMildura, Victoria, H. B. Williamson. No. U80, September, 1912..

This is a new record for Victt)ria, but previous specimens (Murray
Biver, Wimmera. etc.) have been placed under Bassia diacantha
var. /oiKjispi/iea. This variety was (lueiied by Bentham, and can
undoul)tedly best be placed undei /i. hinlviispis. no special varietal
designation then being necessary.

Cakdamink hiksl'TA (C. parviflora), "Small-flowered Bitter Cress."'
(Cruciferae).

Mildura, Victoria. H. B. Williamson, 4/9/1912.

The form usual in Australia is glabrous, or rarely with a few
whitisli hairs at the base. This specimen is sparsely hairy on stem,
and leaves, with white, scattered, usually bifurcate, tri-radiate or
even stellate hairs.

No. 19 ill Prof. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. xxv. (n.s.), \x 105, 1912.

2 Etvart and lieen :

*

Celtis PHILIPPINENSIS, Bliiuco. (Zizyplius melastoinoides, Cunn.).
(Urticacejie).

Tropical Australia, A. Ciinningliain, 1818-1821.

This plant was in the Herbarium under the name Zizyphus melas-
iomoides, A. Cunn., but does not occur in Mueller's Census. In
Benth. Fl. Aust. Vol. 1, p. 412, and in the Index Kewensis, Z.
melastomoides, A. Cunn., is given as a ('fjfi- -s/^, but no definite,
specific name is given.

The specimen agrees closely with the type specimen of C. philippin
ensis, and hence must be placed as a synonym to that species.

Cyanostegia microphylla, S. Le Moore. (Verbeuaceae).
Spencer le Moore (Journal of Botany, vol. xli. 1903, page 100),
states that this new species is identical with the Elder Exporing
Expedition specimen marked by Mueller as C. rvrczaninowii.
Baron von Mueller under this name included 3 varieties. Variety
avgustifolia (C. angustifolia, Turcz.), var. laaceolata {G. lanceo-
lata, Turcz.), and var. dentata {C. mir.ropJnjlla, S. le Moore). All
three species appear to be distinct.

The full list of localities for G. microphylla will therefore be :—
Coolgardie district, L. C. Webster, 1897 and 1902, Menzies, Diels,
1903; Gnarlbine, Helms, Elder Exploring Expedition, 1891; South-
ern Cross and Parker's Range, E. Merrill, 1890; Yilgarn, near
Mt. Moore, King and Lefroy, 1899 ; between Victoria Springs, Ula-
ring, and Mt. Jackson, Young, October. 1873.
All are Western Australian localities.

Gytisus linifolius, Lam, "Flax Biooni.' (Leguniinosae).

Talbot, Victoria, G. Porter, 1885; Pakenham and Nar Xar
Goon, Victoria, J. W. Audas, November, 1912.

A native of the Mediterranean region. This plant has now evi-
dently established itself in various localities, and may be classed
as a iiaturalised alien in this State. It is often grown in gardens.

Dksmazeria acutifloha (Nees.), Dur. and Scliinz. (Bkizopykum
ACUTiFLORUM, Nees ; Eragrostis agutiflora). (Graniineae).

Identified by Professor Hitchcock.

Castlemaine, Victoria. J. P. McLennan, May, 1911; Hendigo,
Victoria, J. P. McLennan, November, 1911; Veterinary School
Grounds, Melbourne, October, 1912, L. C. Bartels: Raglan, Vic-
toria. H. ]{. Williamson. December, 1912.

Flora of Australia. 3

This grass is a native of South Africa, and apjjears to have natu-
ralised itself as an alien in Victoria. It appeal's to grow in dry
situations, but is apparently too stiff and harsh to be of much value-
as a gi-azing plant. It lias no injui'ioiis properties so fai- as is
Known.

DlUKls PUNCTATA, 8ni., var. ALBA. (Orchidaceae).

Sydenham, Victoria, P. H. H. St. John, October, 1912.

This is given in Bentham's Flora as D. alba, the chief distinc-
tion being the white flowers with smaller parts. The flowers may
vary from pure or nearly pure white to white with purple spots or
lines, or diffusely purple nearly all over, and some of the most
purple flowers were also the smallest. The plant is evidently a
variety oidy of D. punctata.

DoDONAKA TKiQUKTHA, Wendl. " Large-leaved Hopbush.''
(Sapindaceae).
Heathcote, Victoria, W. J. Stephens, December, 1912.
Recorded in Mueller's " Key to the System of Victorian Plants."
.as from the East only.

Eucalyptus Pkrkiniana, author ? (Myrtaceae).
The first published description of this plant is given by Rodway,
in the Papers and Proceedings of the Royal Society of Tasmania,
p. 181, 1893. Rodway gives the name as E. Perriniana, F.v.M..
and refers to the plant as being described at the meeting of the
Association for the Advancement of Science, Melbourne. 1890. Xo
such name is printed in the Proceedings, and in Mr. Perrin's paper
•on Tasmanian Eucalypts, a reference merely occuis to a specimen
No. 2, Avhich he thought would prove to be a new sjjecies. Tlie
species appears to be not merely Tasmanian, but also to grow in
Victoria and New South Wales — (Dargo High Plains, Victoria, Dr.
Heber Green, January, 1913; Tingiringi Mountain and Snowy
Mountains, New South Wales, W. Bauerlen). According to the
•Congress rules, the authority for the name Avould be Rodway, who
first published the name and description, although he assigned tlie
name to Bamn von Mueller, apparently being under the impi'essi<;in
tliat a name and description had been published in 1890.

Eucalyptus SMrniii, R. T. Baker. "Gully Gum." (Myitacpne).

Gippsland, Victoria, Mr. Howitt, March, 1879.

Previously placed as a variety of E. Stiutrtiana, F.v.M., near to
E . rosfrafa. The species will be an addition to the Flora of Vic-
toria.

Ewart and Rees

Galium Gaudichaudi, D.C. (Rubiaceae).

Bentham (Flora Aust., vol. iii. p. 446) gives this species as valid^
but suggests that it may not really be distinct from the New Zea-
land G. umhrosum. Baron von Mueller (Fragm. vol. ix. p. 188)-
accepted this suggestion. There seems, however, as good reason tO'
uphold (t. Gaudichaudi as in the case of any other species of Galium,
provided that the variety niuriculatum is transferred to G. um-
brosimi, with which it closely agrees, except as regards the surface
of the fruit. G. Gaudichaudi then includes a series of forms with,
narrow leaves, with recurved margins, showing an increasing ten-
dency to develop a rough hispid character. Both G. Gaudichaudi
and G. umhrosum may therefore be regarded as valid Victorian^
species of very distinct habit and facies, but closely related as.
regards flower and fruit. Both species are natives of Tasmania,
Victoria, South Australia and New South Wales, and G. Gaudi-
chaudi appears to be the commoner of the two. G. umhrosum
occurs in New Zealand, but not G. Gaudichaudi.

Gastkolobium Laytonii, J. White. (Leguiniimsae).

In Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.. 23, 1910, p. Ill, for "the under sur-
faces of the leaves covered with felt-like greyish hairs," read
" leaves practically glabrous on both surfaces." The shape of the
leaf varies from obtuse, or narrow oblong, to pointed cuneate on.
the same branch. Additional localities are Day Dawn, West Aus-
tralia, J. A. McClellan, 20/9/1912. A scrap of the same species-
without definite locality or number also exists among J. Drum-
mond's West Australian plants. It was included under G. crassi-
folium.

Gaudinia fkagilis, Beauv. (Graniineae).

Det. A. S. Hitchcock, Agrostologist to the Department of Agricul-
ture, U.S. America.

Warruambool, Victoria, H. Hauschildt, 1912.

A native of the Mediterranean region. An unrecorded introduced!
grass for Victoria, and may eventually become sufficiently estab-
lished to be considered naturalised.

Gnai'II.m.oides ULKiiNosiiM, A. (jray. (CompositMf-)

Mt. Alfi-ed, near Walwa, Victoria, A. J. Ewart, November. 1912.
Only recorded in Bai-on von Mueller's Key from the North-West.
and Soutli-West of Viitoria.

Flora of Australia. 5

GoMPHRKNA INVOLUCHATA, Ewait, 11. sp. ( Amarantacene).
A stiff, erect, apparently annual herb, the rigid cylindrical stems
softly hairy when young, more or less glabrous when older. Leaves
opposite, flat linear lanceolate, acute, densely hairy beneath, more
sparsely so on the upper surface, over an inch in length. Flowers
in hemispherical heads about tlnee-quarters incli diameter at the
■ends of the branches, surrounded In- an involucre of 10 to 2U linear
lanceolate leaves. Bracts and bracteoles, thin transparent scarious,
keeled, ovate pointecl, 7 mm. long. Perianth segments about 6 mm.
long, linear obtuse, very woolly on the back lieloAv the middle.
Anther tube longer than the ovary, the free portion flattened, the
sterile lobes between the anthers slightly longer than them, and
^ach divided into two short blunt lobes. Style tiliforiu. Stigma
bitid. One broAvn flattened sliglitly curved seed. Near Pine Creek,
Northern Territory, J. H. Niemann, April, 1904. The specimen
<'onsists of the heads only with a small portion of the stem, but the
plant is readily distinguished from G. canescens, R. Br., by the in-
volucre, the broader bracts and bracteoles, the blunt perianth seg-
ments very woolly on the back, and the flat bilobed free segments
of the staminal tube.

HovEA LONGIFOLIA, R. Br., var. ASPERA. (Leguminosae).

Victoria : Bogong Ranges and Mitta Mitta River, Dr. F. Mueller,
January, 1854; Snowy River, Dr. F. Mueller, February, 1854;
Munyang Mountains, Dr. F. Mueller. 1874; Grampians. Et. Eloy
Dalton, Warburton, G. Weindorfer. 1904; Yarra Junction. P. R.
H. St. John, 1910. New South \Yales : Bunberry, near Molong. J.
H. Maiden, August, 1897.

The roughness of the leases is so pronounced as to justify the
recognition of an additional variety of this species. Some speci-
anens of it have been placed under the variety " rosmarinifolia."
The variety " aspera," was first recognised by F. M. Reader in a
manuscript name, apparently unpublished.

Indigofera australis, Willd. " Austral Iiidi<jo." (Leguminosae).
Healesville, Victoria, (". Frencli. .Junr.. October, 1912.
A white flowered form.

IsOETES Dkummondii, A. Braun. (Rhizospermae).
Pine Mountain, between Tintaldra and Dalwa. I'jjper Murray.
Victoria, A. J. Ewart, November. 1912.

In pools on summit, in granite basins f>n bare rock.

6 Ewart and Rees :

Lactuca scariola, L. "Prickly Lettuce." (Corapositae).

Benalla. Victoria. W. B. Tiernan. January, 1913; Rutherglen,
Victoria, G. H. Adcock, January, 191-3.

A native of Europe and Central Asia, not previously recorded
for Victoria as a naturalised alien. It is an annual or biennial
weed of no economic value, and apt to be spread readily by it*
flat seed-like fruits, provided with a parachute mechanism of
pappus hairs.

LiMOSELLA AQUATICA, L. (Scrophulariaceae).
This little cosmopolitan plant varies somewhat in different parts
of the world. The Australian specimens usually have more or les*
linear leaves, as shown in Figure I. Occasionally, however, speci-
mens occur with oblong or almost spatliulate leaves (J. P. Eckert.
Murtoa. Victoria, 1912). and this is the common form in Europe
and Asia.

LiNARiA Pelisseriana, L. (Scrophulariaceae). " Pelisser's
Toad Flax."

Guy's Forest and various localities along tlie Upper Murray, and
Corryong and Cudgewa Valleys. Victoria. -A. J. Ewart, 6/11/1912.

LiNARiA VULGARIS, L. Couimon Toad Flax.
Nullawarre (Allansford), J. Carter, March, 191-3. A garden
plant previously recorded as a naturalised alien in the East of Vic-
toria, and now also recorded from the West.

MiCROCALA FiLiFORMis, H. and L. "Slender Microcala." (Geutianaceae).
Linton, Victoria. H. B. Williamson, No. 1484, November, 1912.

MicKOCALA i^UAURANGULARis, Griseb. " Quadrate Microcala."
Agricultural High School, Ballarat, E. J. Semmens, November,
1912; Wangaratta, Victoria, E. E. Pescott, September, 1901.

This interesting genus is small both in size and species. M. fili-
formis is native to the Mediterranean area extending from North
Germany to Asia, while M. quadrangulori^ is native to South
America, and also occurs in California, possibly as an introduction.
Externally tlie plant suggests the native Sebaea ovata, and the
Wangaratta specimen from Walter's collection was placed under
that species as a small form of *S^. ovata. The former has, however,
a cup-like quadrangular calyx, while the latter has the calyx divided
to the base.

Florti of A Hstndla. 7

Picbalily both .1/. fHifon/n's and M. qiKidiangudaris, whose seed?
are very minute, Iiave been introduced with imported seeds, and
have been growing in Victoria for some time, but overlooKea on
ac( ount of tlieir small size, or confused with Sehaea ovata.

MicKOMYRTUS MICKOPHYLLA, Beiith. (Myrtaceae).
Pine Mountain. Ijetween Tintaldra and Walwa, Victoria, k. J.
Ewart. 5/11/1912.

MoDOLiA MULTiFiUA, Aloench. "Red-flowered Creeping Mallow."
(Malvaceae)
Spreading along the I'pper Murray above Tholgolong, Victoria,
A. J. Ewart. November. 1912.

Myagrum PEBFOLlATUM, L. " Musk Weed." (Cruciferae).

Wimmera Shire, Victoria, J. R. Tovey. January, 1913.

A native of Europe and West Asia, naturalised in Victoria for
some years, but hitherto overlooked. Probably first appeared be-
tween 1900 and 1904, and "is now spread north over an area of
about ten miles from east to west, and five miles north to south, lying
twenty miles north of Horsham, and west of Yarranibiack Creek.'
^Dr. S. Cameron).

An allied plant Xeslia i^Myagrum) jjaniculatam is a troublesome
weed in Canada. The present species interferes with harvesting
by blocking the reaper, and it has been proclaimed for the whole
State.

Olkaria spkciosa, Hutetiinson. (Compositae).

Ill Curtis's Bot. Mag. Tab., 8118 (1907).

The locality given is Australia.

This plant was raised in the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, Eng-
land, from seed received in 1888 from the Botanic Gardt-ns, Mel-
bourne. We have received dried specimens, collected in the Gram-
pians, Victoria, by W. R. A. Baker, March, 1888, also from Hall's
Gap, Grampians, H. B. Williamson, December, 1902 and 1904,
which agree with the type specimen received from the Kew Her-
barium, thus giving a precise locality for the species. The species
may hence be added to the list of plants native to Victoria. The
leaves of the type specimen have rounded tips, but the leaves appear
to vary from round to pointed (Mr. Baker's specimen), and forms
with entirely pointed leaves appear to approach towards Olearia
mi/rsinoides, F.v.M. vai-. etiibescens. The relationship of this
variety to the above species needs further investigation.

Ewart avd Rees .

Pkksoonia junipkkina, Labill., var. skricea, Ewart and Rees,
n. var. (Proteaceae).

Grampians, Victoria, A. G. Campbell. 10/10/1911, and 27/1/
1912.

Differs from type speeimeu in being larger and more hairy.
Leaves rather more than one inch in length, and 1 — 1.5 lines broad,
and covered with short silky hairs, which are more conspicuous (ni
the younger parts.

Flowers are also larger, being 6 lines long as compared with
4 — 5 lines in P. juniperina.

PoTENTiLLA RKCiA, L. " Erect Potentil." (Ro.saceae).

^litta Mitta Valley, Noorongong District, Victoria, Mr. Paton,
December, 1912.

A native of Euroi)e and North Asia, previously recorded in Vic-
toria from the Western District. It is now evidently establishing
atself as a naturalised alien in Victoria.

Ranunculus sakdous, Crantz. (Ranunculaceae).

Port Franklin, December, 1912, H. B. Williamson, No. 1498,
"The moisture-loving Crowfoot."

The plant is a native of Europe, North Africa, and Asia Minor,
and is probably a garden escape. It has not previously been re-
corded as growing wild in Victoria, The present specimens from
the sea coast have the flowers a brighter, deeper yellow than usual,
and the fruits are smooth, as in the variety, angxdatus (formerly
recognised as a distinct species) instead of with a row of miniite
tubercles on each face of the fruit.

Rapistrum rugosum, All. "Giant Mustard or Tiunip-weed."

(Cruciferae).

Bacchus Marsh, Nictoiia. J. H. Tovey, Noveml)cr, 1910.

Naturalised in the Bacchus Match district in tultivated land and
Avaste places, and evidently intrtxliued with imjiorted seeds.

The plant is a native of South and Central Europe, where it is
conitnon in coin crops. It lias no known t'eononiii' value, and is a
freely seeding weed, troublesome on atcount of its seedlings foul-
ing the seed bed for the young c()rn. It is already recorded as a
naturalised alien in South Australia.

Flora of AudiuUa.

Rkksia, Ew;irt. iiov. gen. (Atn.-u-aiitjiceae-).
Flowers liennaphioditu, peiiiuith se^iut'iits ."). Iree. uveilapi'iii':
hut nearly equal; stamens 5, foriniiif^ a short stamina] tulje; anllirrs
two-celled, on long tilaments alternating with Hat iohes l)iti(l at tlio
•end, the lobes and stamens of nearly f(|ual length. Ovary onc-
celled, style long and slender, stigma capitate. Fruit a capsule,
.splitting by 'i apical boat-shaped valves of equal size and shape.
Seeds kidney shaped, moi-e than «)ne.

Rkksia kkkcta, Ewart, n. sp.

A herb, with slender but stiff and erect slightly hairy stems, bear-
ing terminal white scaly clusters of flowers in an irregularly dichotn-
mous cyme. Leaves opposite, sessile, about 5 lines long, linear
acuminate, each with a basal pair of small narrow pointed mem-
branous scaly stipules with entire or fringed edges.

Flowers each with a pair of nearly equal scaly bracts. Perianth
.segments 2^ to 3 lines long, with a clearly defined midrib, and free
from hairs on both sides. Seeds brown, slightly curved, flat on the
sides, minutely tuberculate. Four seeds in each ripe fruit.

Near Pine Creek, Northern Territory, J. H. Niemann, August,
1904.

This plant, in general appearance and habit, as well as in the
structure of the flower, appears to come between Alternanthera and
Gomphrena. It differs from both genera mainly in the dehiscent
■capsular fruit, with several insead of a single seed, and also from
Gomphrena in the capitate stigma. The long filaments and glabrous
perianth segments are also diagnostic features.

To jtlace a multiseminate genus among the uniseminate series of
the Amarantaceae may seem an abnoi-mality, but the plant appears
to have no other affinity to the series (Celosiaae) with several seeds
A few species of Celosia have in fact only one seed, and the reverse
is shown by Reesia. Possibly too much importance is attached to
the number of the seeds in the classification of tlie Amarantaceae.

Sknecio Daltoni, F. v. M. (Covnpositae).

This plant was recorded by the late Mr. C. Walter (Vict. Nat.
xvi., 1899, p. 99) as new to Victoria (North-West). The specimen
(Mallee, Victoria, C. French, Junr., October, 1898) proves to be
Senecio Jacohaea, the common Ragwort, a naturalised alien pro-
claimed for certain sliires.

10 Eivai't and Rees :

SiACJiYS AKVKNSis, L. "Woundwort or Stagger-weed.'" (Tiahiatae).

Pine Mountain, lietween Tintaldra and Walwa. Victoria, A. J.
Ewart. 5/11/1912. A naturalised alien.

Tunica pholifeba, Scop. (Caryophyllaceae).
Mt. Alfred, near Wahva, A. J. Ewart, November, 12tli, 1912.

Urena lobata, L. (Malvaceae).
Near Pine Creek, Northern Territory, J. H. Niemann, Augu.st.
1904.

Vkkbascum Blattahia, L. (Scrophulariaceae).
Common along Upper Murray, Victoria, A. J. Ewart, November,
1912. A long naturalised alien.

VVkstringia KREiMicoLA, A. Cunn. (Labiatae).

Ellam, between Jeparit and Rainbow, Victoria, W. K. A. Baker,
12/10/12.

This species was considered by Baron von Mueller to be a variety
ol' ]Ve>itriiif/in Ion i/i folia, F.v.M., and was omitted from his second-
Census of Austi-alian Plants. The general habit, pubescent calyx
and strongly revolute leaves readily distinguish it from the closely
allied W. longifolia, wiiich is a native of New South Wales only,
and has flat leaves and a glabrous calyx. 11'. cremicola was only
previously recorded in Victoria from the East.

Westkingia kigida, R. Bi-. (Labiatae).
Near Dimboola, Victoria, St. Eloy Dalton, 12/11/1899.
Ellam, between Jeparit and Rainbow, Victoria, W. l\. A. Baker,.
12/10/1912.

Zv<;oPHYLLUM OVATU.M, Ewart and White. (Journ. and Proc. Roy.
Soc. New South Wales, 1908, p. 197). (Zygnphyllnceae).

Mildura, Victoria. H. B. Williamson, September, 1912.

New to Victoria, and possibly often overlooked on account of
its small flowers, since when not in fruit it resembles Z. amino-
philum. In the original descriptioTi foi- " petals about half the
length of the sepals," read " petals from about half the length of
the sepals to nearly the same length." In rcganl to it Mr. William-
son writes : " It seems remarkable that I gathered at Mildura all the
Victorian ZygophitUums. The little annual 1468 seems to be one

''""•• l'-^ Vi,_-t..iN,. l!ii:{. i-l^,t.. I

l>n.r. I.'.S. \

Flora of Australia. 1 1

lift recorded for Victoria. The petals are white and iiiiiuite, and
the fruit not truncate, like Z. (tnnnophilum. Unfortunately, I got
only two specimens of it."

It is certainly curious that this Victorian plant should have l>een
first described from West Australian specimens, and possibly it
may be found in other Victorian (and possibly also South Austra-
lian) localities.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES L— IL

Plate I. — Limosella aquatica, L. (.Scrophulariaceae).

¥i^. 1. 2 and 8. — Flower niagnitied.

4. — Flower cut open.

5. — Stamens.

6. — Pollen grains.

7. — Ovary, Style and Stigma.

8 and 9.— Fruit.
10.— Fruiting Calyx.
11. — Fruit cut open.
12.— Seeds.

13 — Seed in longitudinal section.
14. — Seed in tranverse section.

Plate II. — Reesia erecta, Ewart. (Amarantaceae), n. gen. and

Fig. a. — Portion of plant.

b. — Leaves and stipules enlarged,
c. — Single flower with bracts (enlarged),
d. — Stamens and lobes (enlarged),
e. — Gynaecium.
f. — Fruit dehiscing,
ff.— Seed.

[Pboo. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.S.), Pt I., 1913].

Akt. 1 1. — On Bitter Pit and the Sensitivity of Apples
to Poison.

By ALFRED J. EWART, D.Sc, Ph.D.

(Prot'essor of Botany and Plant Physiology in the Melbourne University).

[2nd Paper.]

(With Plates III.-V.).

[Read 13th March, 1913.]

In the tirst papev^ a detailed account of the action of various
poisons on the pulp cells of apples was given, and their extreme
sensitivity to certain metallic poisons shown. Tliis sensitivity was
so great that it Avas possible to produce pitting in apples by quau-
ties of lead, meicui-y and copper so minute as to i)e incapable of
detection, even by delicate methods of technical analysis, at least
with the quantities of material available.

Many points still remained open, however, both in regard to the
influence of external conditions upon the sensitivity of apples to
poison, and also in regard to the bearing of the facts observed upon
the problem of bitter pit. In addition. Mr. McAlpine has recently
published a voluminous report on bitter pit. in whith he confidently
assumes that l)itter pit and poisoning have no iclationsliip.

The influence of temperature on poisoning.

It has long been known that at low temperatures or when in cool
storage, the development of bitter pit is retarded, and Scott (Phyto-
pathology, 1911. p. 32) found the same to be the case with the
development of the spots, which he concluded were due to spraying
Avith arsenate of lead. Hence it was of interest to determine the
influence of temperature upon the formation of pits by direct poison-
ing. The method used was as previously described. A}»))les wt-re
Hoated each in 1 litre of the poisonous solution after removing frag-
ments of the cuticle of approximately a scjuare millimetre in area,
from points 1 or more certtimetres apart around the periphery of the
apple. (See table I.)

1 I'roc. Ro.v. Soc. A'ictoria, vol. xxiv., 191-2, p. 367.

Bitter Pit in Apples.

IS

T3 c in 3

1_ « ^ 5 g^
^ £ .ti -^ j; -a

J; S

CI

1

a

1

'S

be

5£

1

o

c

a;
bt

^•5

r3

X

3

S

53

m

^

O

a

o

P4

-<

D^

K-

^2;

J2;

CO

00

g
o

1

g

i

&
S

TS

S3

i

CO

Pi

1.

5

be

'a
o

'o

CO

n
be

Ph

s-

1

a

«

01

^

'^

!-

S

1^

lO

s

M

5

2

1

O

t

s

g

<
s

1 ^

£

C^l

•?

Pi
P

.5

T3

=c

3

I £

= -S ^ --^

®

s s

o i
aj S

.1 a

i a 3

I— " u

.;= 5^ 'C

P S 5

H

^

■£

s

^q

1

X

9

<;

(N

1

cc

<

i

o

o

^

*fl

=

•Y

1

3

■»)

X

s

1'

i

^

p

■o

ii

yT

s

*

-l^ ,

^

>

.5

§

"^

<

Tt

«

pi

'

o .

li

9

■^

o

s^

as

as

14

Alfred J. Eivart

a '5

s :- cS ?;

a £

z g

o a; ct

w O
o «>

2 ^

c c ^

a. cs

« a 5

8 s

s to ^ a 01

J' °0 "^ 01 "S

j;:, to -e 3

o p

i;

^ 8

Bitter Pit in Apples. 16

With Statesman apples therefore, the mercurii' chh>ride eeases
to exert any poisonous action at 0 — 1 tleg. C in a concentration of
1 per million, but continues to show a poisonous action at 25 — 26
<ieg. C. in a concentration of 1 in 10 millions. Comparing all the
results, "\ve may say that a fall of temperature of 25 deg. C. lowers
the poisonous concentration 10 to 100 times.

Using copper sulphate and Yates' Pippin apples, the results were
obtained as given in Table II.

In this case copper sulphate in a coueeiitration of 1 in Id, 000
exercised about the same poisonous action at 0 — 1 deg. ('.. as a eon-
oentration of 1 per 1,000,000 did at 28— .30 deg. C, and the latter
concentration exercised no poisonous action at all at the lower tem-
perature. Under the conditions of the experiment therefore, copper
sulphate was a hundred times as poisonous to the pulp cells of apples
at 28—30 deg. C. as it was at 0—1 deg. C

The influence of diffusion.

Temperature exercises a most important influence upon tlie rate
of diffusion, and hence also upon the rate at which the poison in
solution would diffuse to the prepared spots on the apples tested
The rate at which the molecules of the dissolved substance reach tlie
receptive surface is an important factor in determining the concen-
tration at Avhich a poisonous action can be exercised.

Thus in the case of Yates' Pippin apples floated on mercuric chlo-
ride solution at 15 deg. C. for thiee days, the poisonous limit was
reached with a concentration of one gram in 10 million eubie
centimetres of water. On the other hand, if tlie poisonous solution
was allowed to trickle directly over three prepaied spots, three times
daily for three days, from a fine tube at a temperature of 11: — 15
deg. C, a slight poisonous action was still shown with a concentra-
tion of 1 gram in 1000,000,000 c.c of water.

Yates' Pippin. Mercuric chloride, 1 litre of solution run over
three prepared spots, three times in three days. Tempei ature
14 — 15 deg. C. Trickled directly over prepared spots from fine
tube.

1 per 1(X),0(X),()0(J - No distinct signs of poisoning, but aft-r

1 week in air, siipei-ficial browning
with Idacker rim to each prepared
spot.

1 per 10U.(KK>,(XM').(HK) - No signs of poisoning, and after one week
in air no distinct signs of poisoning
as compared with control treated
with pure distilled water.

16 Alfir(/ J. Eivurt:

The same experiinont as above was repeated, but the prepared
spots were surrounded by a square centimetre paraffin cell 2 — 3 mm.
deep through which solution trickled (see PI. 3). 1 litre was used
and trickled once daily through the cells and over three prepared
spots for seven days.

1 per - Slight superficiitl - After 7 days in air super-

100,(XX),000 browning ficiai browning extend-

ing up to 2 mm. deep.

1 per - No distinct signs - Faint to distinct superficial

],0C0,000,000 of poisoning browning.

1 per - No signs of p!>i- - No signs of poisoning.

10,000,000,000 soning

Even superficial browning under the microscope can be seen to
affect several successive layers of cells, one below the other, and even
in small pits the number of cells affected soon runs up to the
thousands. Since it must take a definite number of molecules even
of mercuric chloride to completely poison each cell, there must be a
limit to the dilution at which a perceptible poisonous action can be
exei-cised.

A litre of a 1 per 10,000,000,000 solution ccnitains ^^"(m °^ '^

milligram of mercuric chloiide, representing some —^ individual
molecules, and assuming that 1000 cells are exposed to the absorption
of poison, and that under tlie condition of the experiment at least

■XciOi ^^ TTTT "^'^ ^''^' molecules present are absorbed, then it would
require at least 10^ (one thousand million) molecules of mercuric
chloride to poison a single pulp cell of an apple such as Yates'
Pippin, whicli is one of the most resistant varieties. It is possible that
a lesser number of molecules, say, 10 to 100 millions, might be able to
arrest diastatic activity in a pulp coll without necessarily killing it.
To obtain some idea as to the intiuciice of diffusion and of convec-
tion currents upon the conveyance of poison, i.(>nq)ai ative experi-
ments were performed Avith applo* on water, and on melted 10 per
cent, gelatine allowed to set after adding poison. A preliminary
test showed that ordinary gelatine contains traces of poisonous
materials, but when well washed these are reduced to a mere trace.
The apples must of course be clean, and the gelatine sterilised by two
steam heatings, since fungi are able to develop on solutions
poisonous tf) apples.

Bitter Fit in Apples.

]7

PREPARED YATES PIPPEN. ALL AT 12-13'C. FOR 1 WEEK IN
2()0 CO. MERCURIC CHLORIDE.

1 per KRi.OOO.

In watery - Pits 2-5 mm.

solution. diameter and

2-3 mm. deep.

In well - Slight super-
washed and ticial brown-
sterilized ing to pits
1U% gela- 1 mm. diam-
tine. eter and

depth.

I per 1,000,00(1

Pits 2-3 mm.
diameter and
1-3 mm. deep.

1 per 10,0110,000

NoHj,<:i-J

From faint super- -No signs of
ficial browning to poisoning,
pits 1 mm. diam-
eter ami depth.

From no signs - From no signs - Fromnosigns

of poisoning of poisoning to of poisoning

to slight slight superfic- to slight

superficial ial browning. superficial

browning. browning.

At iirst sight this experiment would seem to show that tlie con-
veyance of poisons to the prepared spots took phice mainly by con-
vection and mixing movements, although the cylinders containing
licjuid were not disturljed, and were kept free from vibrations^
and kept at as unifoi'in a temperature as possible. Mercuric
chloride, however, coagulates gelatine in the presence of sodium
chloride, and although no salt was present, the mercury evidently
enters into combination with the gelatine, just as mercuric nitrate
will precipitate gelatine by itself, so that the diffusion of the mer-
cury is either stopped or very greatly retarded.

Hence to obtain a true diffusion comparison, agar and suljjhuric
acid were used. These do not enter into combination; the sulphuric-
acid diffuses as rapidly through agar as in stationary water, and
the agar when well washed exercises no poisonous action on the pulp
cells of prepared apples, while it has also the advantage of standing
high temperatures better without liquefying.

Both the water cylinders and the agar cylinders were kept free
from disturbance or vibration, the temperatures were kept as-
uniform as possible, the apples Avere picked Yates' Pippins all 15
centimetres diameter, and each with 15 prepared spots of 1 square
millimetre area, equidistant around the periphery. The 1 per
10,000 solution contained 1.8 grams of pure concentrated sulphric
acid to 9999 cubic centimetres of water, or to 9999 cc. of H per cent,
agar solution; 150 cc. being used to each apple.

3

18

Alfred J. Eivart :

YATES PIPPIN AND SULPHUKIC ACID.
Medium.

Exposure and
Temperature

'A days at

0°C-1°C

3 days at

io°c-irc

3 days at
29°C-30°C

Water.

Superficial brown-
ing to pits 1-3
mm. diameter,
and 1-2 mm.
deep

Pits 2-5 mm. dia-
meter and 2-3
mm. deep

Pits partly con-
fluent and 5-10
mm. deep

ASfar.

Superficial brown-
ing to pits 1-2
mm. diameter
and depth

Pits 1-3 mm. dia-
meter and 1-2
mm. deep

Pits partly con-
fluent and 5-8
mm. deep

Total liulk of Kates ot diffus-
jioisoried tissue ion of H;; SOi

0.002 C.c. - 1 at (t I'.

O.(J03 c.c. - 1.53 ;it lOT.

11.25 c.c. - 3.H:{at2;rO.

Hence it follows that in still water the poison reaches the prepared
areas mainly by diffusion, and hence the poisonous action is only
slightly decreased Avhen the acid reaches the apple by diffusion alone
through agar. In three days only a small portion of the acid
present could reach the prepared areas l)y diffusion, so that the
sensitivity of the pulp cells to sulphuric acid is fairly pronounced.
Furthermore, the comparison between the rates of dift'usion and
the bulk of poisoned tissue at different temperatuies, sliows cieaily
tliat the inci-eased poisonous action at the higher temperatures is
not merely a matter of diffusion, but is mainly ilue to tlie inlierent
sensitivity to poison being greater at the highei- trmperatuiL'.

The same is shown by the following test, in whith thiee experi-
ments were started at three preliminary temperatures (niii;' in all).
and of each set of three, one was subsequently kept in ;iir t'oi- four
days at 0 — 1 deg. C, one at 10 — 11 deg. ('., and one at .id dcir. ('.
During the preliminary immersal for Www days. \\\v apples wfie
all in a 1 per million solution of mercuric chloridi.', so that tlie pie-
pared spots in each set of three received tlie saiii- amount of |»oisoii
by diffusion, but during the subsequent exposures in air a i-on-
sistently greater poisonous action was I'xeiHiscd at tlie liigher tem-
peratures.

YATES PIPPIN IN 1 PEK MILLION HgCl^
'rreat.mentf' Snbse(|uei.t treatment for 4 .lavs in air.

Immersed for: OoC-Ioq. liioc.-uoc.

3daysat C'C'-lT. - Superficial brown- - Distinct but super-
Froni very faint ing only ficial browning

.superf i ci al on each ])repare(l

browning to no spot

signs of poison-
ing

;{oot;.
Pit.s 1-2 mm. diam-
eter superficial
to 1 mm. deep.

Bitter Pit in Apples.

19

Preliminary
treatment!

Immersed for :

3 days at l(fO.-
ll'^C. Faint to
no superfi c i a 1
browning

.3 days at 3U°C.
Brown spots 2-
4 mm. diameter

Subsequent treatment for 4 da>'8
IO'C.-11'C.

From superficial
browning to pits
1-2 mm. diame-
ter and 1 mm.
deep

Pit.5 3-5 mm. dia-
meter and depth.
Pit tissue jjale
brown, unshriv-
elled and con
taining some liv-
ing plasmolys-
able cells

Pit 1-2 mm. diam-
eter and 1 mm.

Pits 3-10 mm. di-
ameter and 5-H
mm. deep, and
broader below
surface than on
skin. Tissue
brown and part-
ly shrivelled

30X'.
Pits 1-3 mm.

di-

ameter and 1-
mm. deep

Pits 6-10 mm. di-
ameter and tj-js
mm. depth,
partly confluent.
Tissue dark
brown and shri-
velled

The influence of tenipei<iture upon the sensitivity to poison is
shown also by non-metallic poisons. Thus chlorot'oiia ])0uie<l over
the surface and then allowed to evaporate, produced brown pits
over the surface below the lenticels, and with a watery soluti(Mi the
following results were obtained : —

Yates' Pippin. Chloroform. All showing no distinct sui)Lificial

jsigns of poisoning after three days' inimersal.
temperature for four days and examined.

Then all

Concentration.

1 per 1000 c.c. (shaken
up and excess al-
lowed to slowly

0
1 per 10,000 c.c.

1 per 100,000 c.c

3UOC

- Pits superficial to

2 mm. diameter
and depth.

- Pits superficial to

1 mm. deep.

- No distinct signs

of poisoning.

Tomperattiros durinjf Ii

110-120C.

Faint to no super-
ficial poisoning.

No signs of poison-
ing.

No signs of poison-
ing.

No distinct
signs o f
poisoning

No signs of
poisoning

No signs C'f
poisoning

a distinct

Thus a solution of chloroform capable of exercising
poisonous action at 30 deg. C, was non-poisonous at 0 to 1 deg. C
The presence of chlorofoi-m appeared to retard the browning of the
affected cells, and Yates" Pippin appears to be 10 to 100 times as
resistant to chloroform as Jonathans. (1st Paper, p. 4()2).

In another experiment normal apples were immersed in puio
chloroform for short periods of time, and then kept in air for a
week at the temperatures given.

Yates' Pippin. Normal surface. Soaked in chloioforni, and
then kept in air for 1 week at 14—15 deg. ('.. and at 0-1 deg. ('.
The calvx and stalk ends clo.sed with riaraffin.

1 5i

20 Alfred J. Ewart :

Time of Inimersal in Chloroform.
Temperature !•> seconds 10<^ seconds 1000 seconds

0°C-1°C. - Several shallow - As before but pits - General browning-

pitsiipto5mm. slightly uiore over whole sur-

diaiueter and numerous. face from \ to-

1 mm. depth. 2 mm. deep.

14°C-15°C. - Several sunken - Numerous, larger - General brownings

pitsuptoSmm. and more deeply over whole sur-

diameter and sunken pits up to face from 2 to

2 mm. total 3 mm. depth, 8 mm. deep,
depth. partly confluent.

In this case the same amount of poison enters in each pair of
apples subsequently kept at different temperatures, but the poison-
ing action is less at the lower than at the higher temperature.

he poisonous action of cell contents and cell
products.

It has been suggested that the escape of the cell contents either by
bursting or by exudation might cause the poisoning of neighbour-
ing cells and the formation of bitter pit. Against this is the fact
that young apples may be punctured without any result beyond the-
production of a superficial scar or depression when adult, but it
seemed advisable to test the influence of the expressed sap and of
different cell products on living pulp cells.

The injliiencf of expressed sap on prepnred apples.

The sap was rapidly expressed by pressure, and sound prepared
apples floated in pure sap, in 20 cc. of sap to 80 water, and in 2 cc.
of sap to 98 water for two days. They were immediately examined
and also after five days in air, but no signs of poisoning was shown
on any of the prepared spots, either using Yates' sap on Yates'
apple, Sturmer sap on Sturmer apple, or Yates' sap on Sturmer
apple, or Sturmer sap on Yates' apple.

After two days the liquid develops micro-organisms, and after
three-four days' inunersal, superficial browning may he shown.
If the sap is boiled, sterilised vessels used, and the apples coated'
uith paraffin before preparing for inunersal, the expressed sap may
remain practically sterile for three or four days, and no signs of
poisoning were then shown in this time on any of the prepared
spots. Evidently, therefore, the unaltered sap of apples is not
poisonous to the pulp cells wlien applied to them externally.
Apparently the ectoplasmic membrane of the pulp cells has the same-
diosmotic relationships to the vacuolar contents as the vacuolar

Bitter Pit in Apples. 21

membrane has, so that a dissolvtMl sul)stance which is not poisonous
inside the cell is not poisonous outside it. This is the more sur-
prising because some of the cell contents when applied in pure form,
are capable of exercising a poisonous action. Possil)ly this may be
i\ question of ionization, of combination or of relative influence
on the surface tension of the ectoplasmic membrane, and hence oil
diosmosis. The acidity of the sap of the ripe Yates' Pippin apples
used was such that 2^ litres were equivalent to 10.6 grams of normal
sodium carbonate. This is witliin the limit of dilution for the
poisonous action of malic, citric and oxalic acids when used in
pure form, and with exposures of a week's duration. It has already
been shown that the poisonous action of a mixture of substances
may be much less than when each is applied singly, and apparently
it is this fact which explains partly at least, the practically non-
poisonous character of freshly extracted apple sap to pulp cells when
applied externally.

Alkali. — Since the protoplasm of the pulp cells is alkaline,
although the sap is acid, the vacuolar membrane must be able to
prevent the acid in the sap from entering the protoplasm, and we
should expect to find the protoplasm more resistant to alkalis pene-
trating from outside than to acid. This has already been shown to
be the case with ammonia and Jonathan apples, and it applies still
more with caustic potash and the more resistant Yates' Pippin.

CAUSTIC POTASH. PREPAKED YATES PIPPIN IMMERSED FOR
5 DAYS AT 3-1 8X\

Strength of Solution. Result.

5 grams per 1000 c.c. - Dark brown pits to each prepared spot, 1-2 mm.

diameter and depth.

1 gram per 1000 c.c. - Faint superficial browning to no signs of poisoning.

1 gram per 10,000 c.c. - No distinct signs of poisoning.

1 gram per 100,000 c.c. - No signs of poisoning.

With dilute solutions, however, the CO^ produced by the respiring
pulp cells would suffice to turn the diffusing KHO molecules into
potassium carbonate, so that the alkaline action of caustic potash
would be less evident than with equal dilutions of ammonia. In
fact, with a 1 per 1000 dilution, the poisonous action may be largely
due to the potassium ions, rather than to the hydroxyl ions.

Alcohol. — During the anaerobic respiration of apples small quan-
tities of alcohol are produced, and are apparently to some extent
transferred from the protoplasm Avhich forms them into the cell

22

Alfred J. Eivart

sap. since alGohol is one of those yubstances which are freely per-
meable to the protoplasmic membrane. *

For the tests pure absolute alcohol was used, prepared Yates'
Pippin apples being immersed for four days in the solution and
eiamined after three days in air. The temperature averaged 14^16
d

(leg. u.

1 i-.c. of absolute al<ohol per
lOc.e. of mixture. (100 c.c.
of sohitiou).

1 c.c. of absolute alcohol per
100 c.c. of luixtui-e. (1000
c.c. of sohition).

I c.c. of absolute alcohol per
1000 c.c. of mixture.
(1000 c.c. of solution).

1 c.c. of absolute alcohol per
10,(X)0 c.c. of mixture.
(1000 c.c. of sokxtion).

From superficial browning to pits 1-2 mm.
diameter and depth.

From superficial browning to pits 1-2 mm,
diameter and depth.

No signs of poisoning.

No signs of poisoning.

Hence in its poisonous action on the pulp cells of apples, alcohol
comes next to pure water, and is one of the least poisonous of all
the substances tested.

Tannic acid or Gallo-tannic acid is present in the pulp both of
ripe and unripe apples, and Mr. P. R. Scott's analyses give the
ajnount as usually less tiian 0.1 gram per cent., and as being slightly
more abundant in pitted than in normal apples.

Yates' Pippin prepared. After seven days' immersal at 1-3 — 16
deg. ('.. in tannic acid solutions in water.

1 gram per 100 c.c.
1 gram per 1000 c.c.
1 gram per 10,000 c.c.
1 gram per 100,000 c.c.
1 gram per 1()(K),(K>() c.c

Brown pits 1-2 mm. diameter and depth.
Brown pits 0.5-1 mm. depth. 1-2 mm. diameter.
No distinct signs of poisoning.
No signs of poisoning.
No signs of poisoning.

Sturmer Pii){>in a])ples were sensitive to tannic acid in ten times
greater dilution as compared with Yates' Pippin.

Tannic aiid. thei'cfore, comes next to aleolml in tlie feelilcness of
its pdisoiidus action, and is less jyoisonous tlian many nutrient
salts are when applied singly. It may safely be assumed therefore
tliat tbe slight differences in the pi-rcentage of tannic acid sup-
posed to exist between pitted and clean apples have no causative
relationship with l)itter pit.

Bitter Pit in Aj^ples. 23

The influence of mechanical injuries.

Stewart^ noted that in a l)ruise(l fniit, the injured portion con-
tained an abundance of starch, but not the uninjured portion.
This of course wouhl (inly be the case when the injury was caused at
that period of deveK)pment wlien the pulp cells are packed with
starch. Bruises on quite young fruits, before the starch grains have
l)een deposited, and on adult fruits after they have dissolved, do not
show this peculiarity. Varcollier's2 explanation is that in the
bruised cells the tannin inhibits diastatic activity. McAlpine (I.e.
page 21) states. " The death of the cells, in my opinion, is quite
sufficient to account f(ir the persistence of the starch in the bruised
cells," being appaicntly vmaware that diastase wiH act as well in a
non-living medium as in a living cell. The explanation is merely
that the escape of the sap from the bruised dead cells removes the
medium into which the protoplasm excretes the sugar as it is
formed, so that in tlie protoplasm of the dead cell the percentage of
sugar inhibitory to further diastatic action is soon reached.
Although diastase is a.faiily stable compound when dry, in the moist
cell it soon undergoes post-mortem decomposition, and hence the
possibility of a post-mortem diastatic action is limited in time.

In any case the presence of starch grains in dead pulp cells, and
their absence from the living pulp is not an infallible indication of
bitter pit, and indeed this symptom only accompanies bitter pit
when the defect begins, to develop during the second or " starch "
stage of the apple. If bitter pit arises during the early " proteid "
stage of the apple or tlie adult "sugar " stage, the dead cells con-
tain no more starch than the living ones. (1st paper, pp. 410-415.)

The relation of Bitter Pit to vascular tissue.

In tliose cases wliere l)itter pit is due to poisonous substances
absorbed through the roots, it would be natuial to expect the dead
tissue to l)e more or less closely associated witii the conducting vas-
cular bundles. This was actually observed by Wortmann (Landw.
Jahrb. xxi. 1892, p. 663), but his generalisation is too sweep-
ing. The vascular network in apples is comparatively small
meshed, so that any large pit or spot must appear to be associated
with a vascular Ixmdle. Small pits, however, particularly when late
in development, may I)e found which have no special connection
with any one vascular bundle, and larger spots may be sometimes

1 Stewart, F.C., New York State Station, Bull. 164, 1899.

2 Varcollier, G , Coinpt. lleiid. Acad. Sei., 141, p. 4li5, 190.=j.

24 Alfred J. Eivart:

found whose centres lie between two vascular bundles instead of on
either.

7'he vascular system of the ajjple.
In a paper published by the Linnean Society of New South
Wales, vol. xxxvi., 1912, pp. 613-656, D. McAlpine describes
the vascular system of the apple (and pear), and apparently con-
sidered that its existence was unknown to Sachs and other botanists.
As a matter of fact, the vascular systems of the apple and pear, as
well as of fruits generally, were first described and figured by
Nehemiah Grew in the year 1682 (Anatomy of Plants, Book IV.,
pp. 179-182, plates 65-67). Grew's description stands to the
present day without modification, except that in the words " from
which (the main branches) a few small fibres are dispersed without
any order through the apple," "few" should be "numerous."
Wortmann, in 1892, specially discussed the relation of the fine
bundle endings and branches in the pulp to bitter pit, and Brooks
(Bull. Torrey Botanical Club, xxxv. p. 423, 1908) represents the
vascular system of the apple, and made dissections of the vascular
network from frozen pulp. References to the. vascular network in
the apple are scattered throughout the literature dealing with the
diseases of the apple. Hence it is difficult to understand why
McAlpine (Report p. 36), describes the vascular network in the
apple pulp as " this wonderful and hitherto unsuspected struc-
ture," and when McAlpine states (p. 28), " I venture to think that
if these vessels, as well as the wonderful vascular network inune-
diately beneath the skin, where the bitter pit originates had been
recognised by Professor Ewart, he would have arrived at a very
different conclusion," he makes both a misleading and an unwar-
ranted statement.

A curious error also lies in the statement that " the vascular
network is a strengthening system or skeleton," "with a fibrous
portion to strengthen the delicate cells and prevent collapse."
(p. 36). Fortunately for orchardists, this statement is untrue,
since were it true apples would be difficult or impossible to eat raw,
Cursory examination of the vascular bundles under the microscope
shows the feeble thickening of the wood vessels which are conduct-
ing rather than skeletal structures, and the conspicuous absence
of true skeletal elements such as wood fibres, sclereiichyma, collen-
chyma, etc. The rigidity of the apple is due to its distended pulp
cells almost entirely, and when these collapse or lose water, the
tissue becomes soft and flabby, although the rigidity of the vascular
system is unaltered. The latter resembles a capillary blood system,
rather than a skeletal framework.

Bitter Pit in A'jyples. 25

Mc Alpines theory of Bittpr Pit.

This is in brief (p. 73) that when the supply of water is abundant
the vascular network may not enlarge as rapidly as the pulp cells.
" a mesh here and there will be left unfinished, the cells adjoining
will not receive their regular supplies of nourishment through the
regular channels, and collapse and death will ensue."

If the supply of water is deficient, " even if the mesh was cum-
pletely formed, wherever the mesh of the network of vessels failed
in conducting water, there the adjoining cells would collapse, and
the entire patch shrivel and become brown."

McAlpine is apparently unaware of the fact that water can pass
readily from one pulp cell to another, and that the starch grains
usually present in abundance in bitter pit tissue, are carried to the
cells through the vascular bundles in the form of sugar, showing
that the bundles are functioning normally. It would be easy to
obtain evidence of such interruption if it took place. No such
evidence is brought forward, and none is to be obtained by the
examination of bitter pit tissue. Furthermore, where the bitter
pit tissue may form a continuous layer near the surface, as in some
confluent forms of "crinkle," living tissue may occur outside the
affected portion of the vascular network, from which on McAlpine's
theory it should be cut off. His theory is based upon a series of
assumptions, some of which are quite incorrect, and no experi-
mental or anatomical evidence is brought forward to support it.
The exciting cause demanded is either an excess or a deficiency of
water, i.e., diametric opposites producing the same result.

Finally, I have shown that single pulp cells, or small groups of
them, in immature bitter pits may retain their starch grains and
remain living and turgid until the apple is fully adult, i.e., after
the apple has been plucked and the flow of water and food materials
through the vascular bundles has ceased. In such cases we are
dealing with an inhibition of ferment action by an agency not
strong enough to immediately kill the protoplasm, and the death
of the starch-containing cells is simply hastened somewhat as com-
pared with sugar-containing cells, possibly partly as the result of
starvation. Under normal circumstances the sap of each cell is
able to hold all the sugar produced from its starch, and since the
protoplasm produces its own diastase, it is impossible to see how
an interruption of the vascular system could prevent the conversii>n
of the starch into sugar.

26 Alfred J. Eivart :

The poisoning theory of Bitten Pit.

A satisfactory theoiy in regard to a disease or det'eet shoidd : —

(a) t'oincide with all the facts.

(b) The suggested agency should be able to produce th&

disease or defect experimentally.

(c) The artificially and the naturally produced disease or

defect should behave with approximate siiiiilarity under
'corresponding external conditions.

In regard to (a) the poisoning theory agrees with all that we
knew in regard to the action of ferments, to the sensitivity of the
jjulp cells to jDoison, and to the variation of their sensitivity with
age, so that an amount of poison at first sufficient to arrest ferment
activity would become generally toxic when the protoplasm readied
a certain age. In regard to (b) it has been shown that every
symptom of bitter pit, including external appearance, colour,
character of dead cells and cell walls, and presence of starch grains-
can be produced by artificial jjoisouing. The last feature, on which
so much stress is usually laid, is a general but not an unavoidable
accompaniment of bitter pit. Any agency, including mechanical
injury which kills the cells while packed with starch, will cause dead
starch-containing tissue to be present in the apple pulp. If, how-
ever, the poisoning takes place before the starch has been deposited
oi' after it has been dissolved, the dead bitter i»it tissue will not
contain any more starch than the living pulp.

In the early proteid stage of the apple, the cells are resistant
to poison, and owing to the rapid cell multiplication and proteid
growth, no concentration of absorbed traces of poison is possible.
In the starch stage the cells are still resistant, and diastatic
activity is the first function to be affected. Odd cells here and there
are to be found in the pulp of most sound apples in which the
starcli grains have remained undissolved, but in which the poison-
ing progresses no furtlier until the general pulp is approacliing
death. The reason why l)itter pit is generally accompanied by
cells packed with starch is because it is when proteid growth has
ceased, that a concentration of al)S()rbed traces of poison liecomes
possible, and because the sensitivity to poison increases from this
stage onwards in the life of an apple.

It is in ro;.'ard to tlie unalytii'al evidenc-e that the greatest
difficulty of complete proof is to be expected. The tests t'urricd
out in conjunction with the Federal Analyst have shown that
it is possible to produce artificial bitter pits witli traces of
poison so small as to be incapable of detection even by deli-

' Bitter Fit in A'lypie^. 'Z7-

cutf clii'iiiical analysis. MfAlpiiif (p. 70 of Keportj dismisses
the poisoning theory of bitter i)it in five lines as follows : " Tliis
theory is sufiieiently disposed of by the analysis of pitted
apples made by Mr. P. K. Seott, Clieniist for Agrieulture. A
Stsite Committee was appointed t(j collect pitted apples from un-
sprayed orchards, and on analysis, not the slightest trace could be
foinnl of either lead or arsenic, or any other mineral poison."
Apart from the fact that the quantity of pitted apples from un-
spiayed oichards which this Committee, of which I was a member,
was able to obtain was exceedingly small, and quite insufficient
for an exhaustive examination of the delicacy needed, no attempt
was made to detect mineral poisons in geneial. Mr. Scott practic-
ally confined his tests to the detection of arsenic. The only other
test used was as follows. " Another portion of the dried material
was incinerated at a low heat, and the ash dissolved in hydrochlorie
acid, and a current of sulphuretted hydrogen was passed through
the solution. I did not obtain any coloration of liquid or precipi-
tate by sulphuretted hydrogen."' McAlpine is evidently unawaie
that this method would fail entirely to detect manganese, cobalt,
nickel, zinc, ahmiinium. iron, or cliromium. Further it would be-
entirely useless to attempt to detect lead, mercury, silver, gold ,or
copper by this method when present in dilutions just within the
toxic limit to the pulp cells of adidt apples, without using very
large quantities of material and special methods of extraction and
mechanical or electrolytic concentration.

Only one experiment is given with a metallic jKiison — (Report
p. 23) — and as an adult apple was used, in which the starch had
all or practically all dissolved, little or no starch could be expected
to be present in the dead tissue. A saturated solution of mercuric
chloride in alcoliol was used, which latter is able to kill the pulp
cells by merely drsiwing water from them, and also interferes with
the absorption of the mercuric chloride by the pulp. As the
solution used had a concentration of 1,000.000,000 times above
the toxic limit for Yates' Pippins, it is not surprising that some
effects were produced.

In regard to the difficulty raised as to how poisons could be
absorbed from the soil by the delicate root-hairs, and the state-
ment that "the concentration within the cells must, become more
or less ecjualised with that without, before the plant can be
]properly nourished." (p. 27. of Report), every student of plant
physiology knows that the latter statement is quite misleading.
It is also well known that the roots of various plants can absorb
traces of various mineral poisons, which may accumulate in special

28 Alfred J. Ewart :

parts or organs, particularly such as are ultimately rliiown off
(leaves, bark, fruits), without either the roots or the plant as a
whole being affected. The following poisonous metals may l)e
absorbed by various plants when grown on soils containing them :
Zinc up to 13 per cent, of ash, manganese up to 14 per cent.,
cobalt, nickel, mercury, silver, copper up to 1 per cent., lead,
thallium, arsenic, titanium, etc. These absorbed poisons arc either
set aside in special parts or cells sacrificed as poison traps, or may
not cause any injury at all if the plant has developed the power of
precipitating them in an insoluble or innocuous foi'm.

Actual tests with the roots of seedling apples showed (with sul-
phate of copper) a toxic limit lying between 1 in 100,000 and 1 in
500,000, although when transpiration is active the limit may be
lowered, while when growing in garden soil seedlings may be
watered with much higher concentrations without being appreciably
affected. In the case of Yates' Pippin the toxic limit of the pulp
cells (1 in 1,000,000), is not much lower than that of tlie roots,
which may explain why this variety is practically immune to bitter
pit, Avhereas in the varieties more sensitive to poisoning and to
bitter pit, the ultimate toxic limit may be 100 times lower than for
the roots, which allows an ample margin for differential pidsoning.
The pulp cells are end points where poisons may accumulate until
a toxic limit is reached, and tliis toxic limit falls with increasing
age or rising temperature. In addition waste and ])oi.soiious sub-
stances frequently tend to accumulate and concentrate in particular
cells or groups of cells which are sacrificed for the benefit of the
rest. Evidence has already Vjcen brought forwaid to show t.Iiat this
occurs in the apple.

Some of the experiments Ijrought forward to show the absence
of any connection between spraying and bitter pit are worthy of
comment (Report p. 23). In a Deepdenu orchard, wla-ic twelve
trees were to have been cut down on account of bitter pit, these
were reserved, and left unsprayed. As the result a total of 23j lbs.
of fruit were formed, including twelve apples affected by bitter pit.
So that, apparently, if the experiment indicates anything, it shows
that the absence of one yeai's spraying reduced the bitter pit
apples to one per tree !

At Burnley Gardens some fruits were enclosed in Ijags and othois
left exposed on an unsprayed tree of Annie Elizabeth. Of the
apples enclosed in bags 55 per cent, were pitted, and of the exposed
one 39 per cent. Calico bags were used, however, and as calico
glazes sometimes contain zinc oxide and other metallic poisons, it
would be interesting to know whether the bags were tested before use.

Bitter Pit in Apples. 29

A very important point is to l)e noted in the Burnley Gardens
records given as an appendix, namely, that varieties which in other
places are given as immune, or nearly so, to bitter pit, appear to
he very liable to it when grown in the Burnley orchard. Thus the
degree of affection of certain varieties by bitter pit is as follows : —

For orchards tfenerally. ''"^^ill^ae!;"""'''

Kome Beauty - Slight to very sliufht - Bad

Munroes Favorite - Very Blitrht - Slif^ht

London Pippin - Very slight - Had

Dumeiows Seedling - Slight - Bad

Gravenstein - Very slight - Slight

Statesman - Slight - Bad

Now for many years the Burnley Gardens have probably been
the most thoroughly sprayed piece of ground in Victoria, and pos-
sibly in Australia. In France, it has been found that of the total
copper applied as sprays during twenty years, one-half to two-
thirds was retained by the soil, and could be recovered on analysis.
At the Lausanne Viticultural Station (Switzerland) the surface foot
of soil was found to have accumulated 3.5 parts of copper per
100,000 of soil, and in other vineyards as much as 11 parts per
100,000 were found. These figures are well within the limit of
toxicity to the pulp cells of apples, even without any accumulation
or absorption. It would be of interest to have an analysis of the
Burnley orchard soil both now and after an interval of some
years.

The British Board of Agriculture (Journal, vol. xix., p. 751,
1912) has recently carried out experiments to determine whether
copper which is used in spraying or treating potatoes for various
diseases, can be absorbed by the tubers, and to what extent. In
the following table of the results obtained the numbers give the
grains of copper found per lb. of the dry weight on analysis of the
harvested tubers : —

75 lbs. Strawsonite 75 lbs. Copper Sul- ,, . . .

per acre. phate per acre. "^ ntrerxteo.

Peel. Pulp. Peel. Pulp. Peel. Pulp.

Lancashire plots - 1.44 - 0.10 - 0.16 - 0.08 - 0.12 - 0.07

Kew plots - - 0.08 - 0.045 - 0.094 - 0.05 ! - — . _

The highest amounts in the pulp would not be appreciably greater
than 1 part of copper per million of the dry weight, and since only
living tubers would be harvested and tested, the cells of potatoes
seem to be less sensitive to copper than the pulp cells of apples.
The " untreated " soil must have contained a fair proportion of
copper, and the lesser absorption from the Kgav plots is probably

;30 Alfred J. Ewart :

<hie to the soil containing more imnius. which has a iXDiiouneeil
retentive and restraining action upon many mineral poisons, as
compared with sandy soils.

77/ e browning of the puly cells.

According to McAlpine (Report p. 12), the l)rowninL^ of dead
pulp tissue is due to a change in the cell walls, and " tlie- guirnny
or mucilaginous substance which colours them brown is of a pectic
•character." As a matter of fact tlie Ijrown colour is not in the
cell wall, but in the protoplasm within it; it is not of a pectic
character, and it is not either gummy or mucilaginous.

Lindret (Le Cidre, p. 150, 1893) conchnled that an oxidase fer-
ment was present which carries oxygen to the tannin of the cell
iind causes a production of dark coloured oxy-compouiids whioh
are precipitated upon the cell walls as a permanent dye. Behrens
<Centralbl. f. Bakt. 2 abt. 1898, Bd. 4. S. 5U) explained the brown
colour as being due to the combination of a direct oxidation pro-
duct of the tannic acid of the fruit, with the proteids of the cell.
Before any definite conclusions can be made, however, it is neces-
sary to know the distribution of the tannic acid in the cell.
Avhether an oxidase ferment is pi-esent or necessary, wliethei' a
brown colouration can be produced in tlie absence of free oxygen,
and what are the influences of different external conditions on the
browning.

T/ie (listrihutioii of fhe faiinin in ihe. cell.

Sap rapidly expressed by strong pi-essure from Statesman. Sturmer
Pippin and Yates' apples, and filtered i-apidly with the aid (vf a
suction pump in 1-.3 minutes, is quite colourless, and remains so on
standing. It contains an iron-greening form of tannic arid.

The pressed pulp rapidly browns in air. and witli l'"c<'l;j tiii-iis
black. Hence one at least of the sul)stances causing browning is not
in the cell sap, but in the protoplasm or cell walls of the pulp cells.
The black colour with Fe ('1., is produced rapidly with crushed cells,
and is darker than ])efore the sa]) was pressed out, but with living
cells it only ap])(>ars.as the Vv ('!., penetrates the piotoplasm anil
kills it. In freshly browned j-ulp. the colour is not in the cell wall,
but in tlie i.rotoplasm.

The residue of ])ulp cells on the filter in all cases slowly turns
deep brown in air and turns daik with i'\' ("1 ;. .Vt tir.st it may con-
tain .still living ptdp cells, and Ihmicc gives the Fe Cl^ reaction
more rapidly on boiling. Sap tillered from pressed jndp after

Bilfer Pit in Apjdes. :?!

staiuliiig is distinctly brosvn, darkens \vitli Fc Cl.j. and shows a faint
pinkish shinnner against the brown with solid KCN. With an excess
of alcohol and etlier a flocculent brown pj-ecipitate is foi-niLMl.
soluble in water, and consisting largi'ly of glucose, but Ijlackcning
with Fe ('\.^ and showing brown with a pinkish shimmer with
KCN.

If the slowly expressed sap is boiled before filtering, the filtrate
remains almost colourless in air, but turns brown with NaHO, pink
with KCN, disappearing and reappearing on shaking and stand-
ing, and green darkening to a <listiiict tannic acid reaction with
Fe CI3. The residue on the filter paper contains less tannic acid.
Apparently some of the tannic acid present in the slowly expressed
sap is not present in the natural sap, but is taken up from the
protoplasm after the latter has been killed. The non-browning of
the sap from boiled pulp suggests the presence of an oxidase enzyme
destroyed by heat.

J. af Klercker (Bihang till d. Svenska Vet. Ak. Handl. Bd. xiii.
111. 1888), concluded that tannin might eithei- occur in the cell
sap or in tlie protoplasm in the form of oil-like drops formed
by the fusion of smaller ones, but that the actual substance of the
protoplasm was always free from tannin. To test this apples
peeled on one side (Plate V.) were immersed in solutions of ferric
■chloride, and of methyl blue and the coloured pulp examined after
«ome days. With Fe CI5 the walls of the pulp cells remained prac-
tically colourless, and also the vacuole, whereas the protoplasmic
■contents turned brown. Under high powers round or occasion-
ally oval vesicles of tannic acid stained brown with Fe CI.;, and
dark blue with methyl blue, could be distinguished readily in rhe
protoplasm of the pulp cells. Apparently the Fe Cl.j causes a slight
contraction in size of the vacuoles, but in very many cells they are
extremely abundant and conspicuous, and none of the pulp cells
appear to be entirely free from them. If these tannic acid vacuoles
•exist in the living protoplasm, they would constitute a second osmotic
system, each vacuole being surrounded by either a precipitation
membrane or an organised plasmatic membrane, so that tannic acid
could only escape from them when the osmotic membrane was
destroyed and no new one formed.

T//r iia flirt- 0/ f/w fdiniiii iiuitcrinl.

From its relative solubilities in alcohol and in ether, it may be
•concluded that it occurs in the form of tannic acid and not of trallic
iicid. Nevei-theless, on boiling acid ])u1i) some of the tannic ;uid

32 Alfred J. Etoart :

may be converted into gallic acid. There is no evidence to show
that it is present as a glucoside. Since tannin vacuoles must have
an osmotic pressure corresponding to that of the cell in "which they
lie, with their surface tension pressure added (possibly more than
1 atmosphere), the tannin in them must be more concentrated than
in the cell-sap.

Exact estimates of the amount of tannin present in the cell are
impossible, owing to the difficulty of extracting the whole of it. If
any oxidation occurs the brown oxy-tannin combines very firmly
with the protoplasm. Although traces of brown colouration may
Ije imparted to the sap at first, once the browning is complete, it i»
not removed by 1 per cent, hydrochloric or sulphuric acids, darkens
in stronger acid or in dilute sodium hydrate, and is not removed
by ether, alcohol or peroxide of hydrogen. In a saturated solution
of sulphurous acid the pulp rapidly becomes a lighter yellowish
brown, but retains this colour even after two weeks without furthei-
fading. On washing, the pulp turned to the same shade of black
with Fe Cls ;is before. After three weeks in hydrogen peroxide the
brown pulp was distinctly paler, and gave a fainter tannin reaction
with Fe CI3.

Estimations of the tannic acid in a mixed solution are difficult
to carry out accurately. In contact with granulated zinc or zinc
foil tannic acid is slov.ly precipitated as a white tannate soluble in
HCl, and a slow evolution of hydrogen is shown. With magnesium
the evolution of gas is somewhat more rapid, but the white precipi-
tate largely adheres to the magnesium, and becomes browned after
a time. The first method, however, can be used even when the
tannin is in an acid cell sap, and it appears to be capable of quan-
titative use, but it is so far not possible to devise a method which
will determine the exact amounts of tannic acid originally present
ill the acid pulp, and apparent differences in the tannin contents of
dead and living parts may be merely the result of unequal extrac-
tion.

The influence of oxygen on browning.

Preliminary trials showed that both peeled and unpeeled apples
c«iuld stand repeated evacuations and replacement of an atmosphere
of hydrogen or carbon dioxide for three days without the pulp cells
being affected. Slices were then floated on glass boats on a one per
1000 solution of copper sulphate, and the air removed by repeated
evacuation and replacement with hydrogen or carbon dioxide.
They were then shaken into the liquid, and all gas drawn out by
evacuation. After one dav all tlie slices were quite unbrowned.

Hitter Pit in Ajiph's. :yS

■whereas slices Hoiitiiig on copper sulphate exposed to air were
browned right tlirough in this time. On adniitting air the eohiur-
less slices rapidly browned on the surface, and more slowly in the
deeper water-logged pulp.

Slices immersed in absolute alcohol slowly browned, especially
along the veins, while slices in absolute alcohol under kerosene and
in kerosene remained almost entirely colourless after one week, then
slowly browning to some extent on exposure to air. In alcohol a
little of the tannic acid slowly dissolves out.

T/ie oxidase ferment .

The rapidly filtered sap from apples has no j)ower of decomposing
hydrogen peroxide, or of turning guiacum l)lue. The pounded pulp
produces a slow evolution of oxygen gas, and turns guiacum blue,
but the same is shown after the pulp has been soaked in 1 per cent,
solutions of mercuric chloride or copp ;r sulphate, and then well
washed. Boiled pulp causes a feeble decomposition of hydrogen
peroxide, such as is produced by various organic materials or finely
divided particles.

Pulp cells killed by immersal in 1 per cent and (» — 1 per cent,
solutions of soluble mercury oi- copper salts turn brown almost as
readily as when killed by crushing. The same is shown when the
pulp cells are killed by water saturated with chloroform or with
chloroform vapour. In one experiment tlie presence of chloroform
appeared to retard browning Thus a band of skin 2 centimetres
broad was removed around the equatorial peripheiies of two apples,
and one was immersed in (a) a 1 per lUOO solution of copper sul-
phate, the other in (b) a similar solution saturated with chloro-
form. In 1 week the brown tissue was 5 — 6 mm. deep in (b), and
8 — 9 mm. deep in (a). Tlie central pulp, however, contained much
air in (a), but was nearly fully water-logged in (b), apparently as
the result of the influence of the chloroform on the surface tension
of the air in the intercellular spaces. The different depths of brown-
ing were not therefore due to chloroform retarding the browning,
but to aeration acceleratting it. On exposure to air the central pulp
of (b) browned inwards rapidly, but that of (a) more slowly.

If hydrogen peroxide is present tannic acid instead of turning
brown with sodium hydrate, gives a light blue rapidly darkening,
becoming dirty, and finally brown on standing. Since the pulp
cells do not show this intermediate change, but turn directly brown
with sodium hydrate, no hydroxyl appears U) be present or to take-
part in the oxidation.

34 Alfrc<l J. luvorl :

The influence of lixiJ .

Slices of pulp dropped into l)oiling water until lieated througli
remain colourless in the presence of oxygen, but the pulp gives
strong and the colourless liquid faint reactions for tannic acid
FeClj . KCN, etc.). After boiling filtered apple sap with dilute
tannic acid, the liquid turned as black with Fe CI3 as before boil-
ing. A section of pulp bro^wned to lialf its deijtli by soakinir in
dilute tartaric acid and then Ixtiled, did not develop any
further brown colouration on exposure to air, but both the pale and
the brown parts gave tannic acid reactions (Fe CI.5 KCN). Boiled
colourless pulp soaked in dilute sodium hydrate or ammonia and
exposed to air slowly turns reddish brown by oxidation right
through. Hence the absence of browning in boiled pulp i.s not due
to any decomposition or complete removal of the tannic acid in
the pulp cells.

If the pulp is slowly heated up to the lethal temperature in air
it turns brown, and the same occurs in water, although tlie brown-
ing here is less pronounced, and the water accumulates small
amounts of tannic acid.

Before we can understand these results it is necessary to consider
the influence of acids on browning, since although solutions of
tannic acid rapidly oxidise when alkali is added, they are not
appreciably oxidised when directly exj^osed to air for a week or
more either when ])ure oi' in tlie presence of glucose, cane sugar,
or citric, tartaric <>r malic acids, or only acquire a very faint
yellowish tinge on very prolonged exposure to air, which necessi-
tates the use of sterilised spore-free solutions.

The influence of acids on the hroirnlnii of the pulp relJx.

When tlie pulp is immersed in any mineral or organii.' iuid
beyond a cei-tain strength, l)ut not strong enougli to disi-ojour the
cell wall, tlie pulp cells do nc)t turn l)rowti. but remain tolouricss.
althougli they are killed. At lower dilutif>ns still snthcii'iit to kill
the pulp cells, l)rowiiing takes place.

stunner l'ii)iiiii
.Apples.

( 'oiicentra

Turn .lark
l.rown.

tions at which

I'ale
l.row n.

pulp

cells :—

Remain
colonrlesi-

Sulphuric acid

.

P.O.
0.01

p.O.

0.1

-

I

Oxalic acid

-

0.1

0..")

1

Oitric acid

-

1

4

-

7..",

Tartaric acid -

1

5

10

Bitter Pit in Apples. 35:

The colourless pulp, hoAvcvcr. after washing, gave black with
FeClj, and brown with sodium hydrate, showing tliat the tannic
acid had not been destroyed. Colourless acid pul]) dv colourless
boiled pulp turned brown on soaking in dilute sodium hydrate or
fiodum carbonate or ammonia, but remained practically colourless
after pounding up with precipitated chalk.

If the pulp browned by alkali is immediately leplaced in acid
it becomes slowly colourless again, but if kept for some time the
brown colour is permanent, and is not removed In- acid. Colour-
less pulp just neutralised with sodium hydrate, ammonia or precipi-
tated chalk, darkens slightly on long exposure to air. but the
•colouration is feeble as compared with that produce<l in the presence
-of a slight excess of alkali.

Causes of hroirii/ng. General ci>/icIi/k/ohs.

The browning is due to the oxidation of tannic acid present in
numerous minute vacuoles in the protoplasm of the pulp cells, and "f
an iron-greening tannin present in the cell-sap. The former
appears to be gallotannic acid, and in the presence of free alkali its
oxidation is not necessarily dependent upon the presence of any

•oxidase ferment. Oxidase action does not take place in acid media
beyond a certain strength. When the protoplasm dies slowly in air
the tannic acid in the presence of neutral or alkaline bases is

■ oxidised. If killed rapidly by boiling, the oxidase enzyme is de-
stroyed, and the acid in the cell sap penetrates the protoplasm and
removes its alkalinity before the tannic acid has time to be oxidi.sed. .
On the addition of alkali, oxidation takes place. When the pulp is
killed by pounding or by pressure, brown oxidation products may
appear in the sap. Tannic acid and the brown oxidation products
combine rapidly with dying but uncoagulated protoplasm, and more
slowly with coagulated protoplasm. The broAvn colour imparted to
the protoplasm is then very permanent, and is not removed by acid.

When living pulp cells are placed in poisonous solutiun.s
which destroy oxidases, the protoplasm i.s killed, and the tannic
.acid in the protoplasmic vacuoles is oxidised in the pre-
sence of its alkali or alkaline bases and of oxygen liefure
the vacuolar membrane loses its osmotic properties and allow.s the
acid of the sap to penetrate the protoplasm and remove its alka-
linity. If the poison used is a free acid aljove a certain concen-
tration, dependent upoTi its rate of diffusion, combining aviijitv
and ionisation, the alkalinity of the proToplasm is neutralised as it
"ir-5 killed, and no browning takes place. The tannic acid is, how-

36 Alfred J. Ewart :

ever, still present in combination with the coagulated proteid, and
Avill give the characteristic reactions and turn brown on adding
alkali.

If all the oxygen is removed, the cells can be killed by poison
without turning broAvn, and if the acid sap has been given time to-
penetrate the protoplasm completely no browning takes place on
admitting air nntil alkali is added.

When slices of pulp are dropped into absolute alcohol, which
destroys tlie oxidase, they remain practically colourless, because-
the rapid penetration of the alcohol destroys the vacuolar membrane
and allows the alkalinity of the protoplasm to be neutralised by
the acid sap before the tannin has time to oxidise. Along the veins,
however, where there is little or no acid sap, browning may take-
place, although the oxidase is destroyed by the alcohol.

When an apj^le is cut with a sharp razor the cut surface remains
quite pale, whereas when scraped or cut Avith a blunt knife it turns
rapidly brown.

If the cub or scraped surface of the pulp is moistened with hydro-
chloric acid of acidity somewhat greater than that of the cell sap-
(0.5 to 1 per cent.), which diffuses rapidly through the ectoplasmic
membrane, the cut or bruised surface remains quite pale.

The relative rates of death, of penetration of acid, and of escape-
of sap appear to lie factors in producing these differences, but the-
matter needs further investigation.

The Anaepobiosis of the Apple.

McAlpine (IJeport p. 42) states that when the supply of free-
oxygen is cut oft" apples and pears can still live for months. No-
experiments or references are given in support of the statement. It
has long been known that apples will live for a long time in a con-
fined space, but then they contain a large amount of air to begin
with, and their i-espiration is not very active, particularly at low
temperature's.

Yates' Pipi)iii apples were placed in an air-tight i-eceiver, ex-
hausted, tilled witli puie CO.,, again exhausted, and the process
repeated several times daily for the first three days, and then every
third day. The leiiipcratui-c averaged 14— IS deg. ('.. reaching 20
deg. C. twice dui-ing (lie longest period of exposure. After two
weeks in CO, ;i,ll were sound and living, but after one week in air
slight decay was shown at some pgints near the surface.

After three weeks in CO.,, the i)ulp was collapsed, and dead on
the surface at some points. The fact that the dead tissue was-

Bitter Pit in Aiyples. ■ ^7

tsliglitly hiowiied woulii show that a truce of lioe oxyjj;eii was Btill
present in the pulp.

After four weeks the sipples were collapsod, and the surface
wrinkled for the most part, tlie pulp dead ainl s]i<j;htly l)rowned,
])ecoining veiy dark on exposuie to an-. Portions of living pulp
Averaging one-fourth of the hulk in some parts e.xtended fiom the
surface to the core.

After six weeks in ('0.,, all were dead, the tiisl jioitioiis dying
being distinctly biown. tlie later poiti(nis to die l)ciug ])ractically
uncoloured until air was admitted.

Evidently the air is only slowly lemoved from an \inpeeled
ivpple in an atmosphere of carbon dioxide. Using hydrogen, similar
results were obtained, but death took place in four to five weeks,
probably owing to the more rapidly diffusing hydi-ogen removing
the air from the apple more rapidly.

Apparently a Yates' apple is not capable of more than a month's
strict anaerobiosis, and carbon dioxide has no poisonous action on
the pulp cells, acting simply by replacing air.

Experiments were also tried on the effects of covering the skin of
Apples with comparatively impermeable films, and of immersing
them in liquids in which oxygen is more or less soluble than it is in
water. Of these the results obtained under kerosene and with gela-
tine films are of most interest.

Apples immersed iii kerosene.

Peeled apples under a deptli of two to four inches of kerosene
remained a pale greenish colour for fourteen days, and the pulp
cells were turgid and living. In three weeks they turned soft, and
slowly acquired a broAvnish colour, duller and not so dark as iu
ui)-. From the surfaces small plasmodium-like masses of granular
wdiitish material exuded, which later appeared to grow over the
whole surface as a white felt-like moss. This consisted of very
fine, much-branched threads, with no spores and few or no trans-
verse partitions. The appearance was as though a giauular Plas-
modium had turned into a filamentous mycelium.

Slices of raw potato infected with the mycelium developed under
kerosene Avhite sunken patches at each point of infection, ramify-
ing at first in the substratum, but later more on the surface, the
threads being somewhat coarser, and more septate than on the
apple, possibly as the result of better nourishment. Over the unin-
fected surface and on uninfected slices, small whitish granular
plasmodium-like exudates appeared, turning later brownish. These

38 Alfred J. Etvart :

are merely soluble exudates from the cell precipitated in contact
with the kerosene.

Mycelium infected slices of potato and apple in air developed
blue patcheB at each point of infection and characteristic Penicil-
lium sporophores. The same foi-med slowly on pieces of the original
felt-covered apples when kept in moist air. Penicillium is hence
able to slowly develop a vegetative mycelium when immersed under
a depth of two to four inches of kerosene. It appears also that
neither the living ectoplasmic membrane of the pulp cells of
apples or that of Penicillium is permeable to kerosene. Chudjakow
(Lafar Teclmische Mykologie, 1, 315) has shown that Penicillium
can grow at a pressure of 10 mm. when well nourished (glucose, etc.),
and oxygen is about 5 times more soluble in kerosene than in water.

The influence of yelatine skins on applet.

Sound Yates' Pippins which had been kept in cool storage from
March 1 until September 1 were exposed to air on a laboratory
table, the temperature ranging from 13 deg. C. to 33 deg. C.
during the following six months. One half were untreated, the
others were momentarily immersed in melted 10 per cent, gelatine
at 40 deg. C, and hung up by the stalks to drain. Tiic gelatine
soon dried, forming a very thin skin on the surface, and giving the
ap])lcs a very glossy bright colour. In spite of the blocking of the
bi-eathing pores, sufficient air diffuses in to prevent asphyxiation.
After two months the untreated apples Mere darker coloured, more or
less pitted, soft or wrinkled, and in two to three months had beguK
to rot or were completely rotted, in every case the rotted pulp con-
taining fungal hyphae. The gelatined apples after three months
were brightly coloured and though sliglitly soft on the surface were
smooth or only slightly wrinkled. In the latter case the gelatine
films separated slightly from the skin at one or two points, but no
signs of decay were shown. After five months the gelatined apples
were still sound, and brightly coloured, but slightly soft or wrinkled
in parts, whereas the untreated apples had contracted to shrivelled
brown masses. After six months the gelatined apples were still
of a sound bright colour, and the flesh of a good flavour, but not
quire tiirn. As the room was a very dry one, the conditions as
retrajds the loss of water were, however, very severe, and the apples
had already been six months in cool storage. This simple method
of gelatining the skin seems suitable for preparing apples for
exhibition or for preserving small lots of valuable apples without
the necessity of cool storage. The ajjples must of course be kept

Bitter Fit in Apples. .39

dry, :in(l should not be in contact, or if so, should be wrapped in
tissue paper, and a free circulation of dry air allowed between
them. Whether the method would be of any use for extensive
storage could only be told by actual trial. i The gelatining does
not at first affect the flavour of the apples, and if properly done the
gelatine skin is hardly noticed when the apple is peeled.

The rotting uf apples in storage appears to be almost entirely
due to tlie development of fungal hyphae in the pulp, the spores
entering from the surface through the breathing pores of the skin.
Gelatining the apple would prevent any entry of spores and remove
this source of decay, if no spores had already gained entry. Apart
from this source of death, there is no reason why sound apples
should not gradually shrivel when kept without any actual rotting
occurring. It has already been stated in Germany that apples keep
much better if the surface is sterilised by washing in formalin.
Wrapping in tissue paper would then pi-event the entry of fresh
spores from outside.

The drying and contpaction of Bitter Pit tissue.

This is the natural result of the fact that the plasmatic mem-
branes on death lose their power of preventing the escape of the
dissolved materials present in the vacuole. As these diffuse out-
Avards the water follows them, and is drawn into those still living
cells whose osmotic pressure is not fully satisfied. This is aided by
the elastic contraction of the previously distended cell walls, and
their ultimate complete collapse is hastened by the loss of water by
evapf>ration. With artificial poisoning sunken pits only develop
when the poisoning is localised. When the whole surface is browned
It remains smooth until nuicli moisture has been lost. The stretched
epidermis contracts at first pari passu with the collapse of the
superficial pulp cells, and it is only when the contraction is exces-
sive that either cracks appear or that the epidermis becomes
wrinkled so as to i-etain the same total suiface area.

In the following experiment peeled Yates' Pippins of exactly
equal weight (60 grams.) were floated on 250 cc. of each liquid and
Aveighed daily. In the two poisonoiis solutions the total weights
of mercuric chloride present were 0.20 and 0.125 of a gram
respec-tively, amounts too small to affect the weights appreciably by
absorption.

I Mr. SclioubridH:e informs me th.it unpublished experiments have shown that in time tJie flavour

1 sufficiently affected to lower the saleable qiuility ixirticnlarly for export, but no data are
lailalile of the varieties tested or of the conditions under which the tests were made.

Increase of \V

eight.

After 1 day.

During
2nd da.v.

During
3rd day.

p.c

p.c.

p.c.

Water

- 12.8

4.9

- 4.5

KgCU. 1 per

- 13.9 -

G.9

- 2.9

10,000

HgCla. 1 per

- 15.1

6.9

- 4.6

2000

40 Alfred J. Ewari

Brown on surface and water-
logged to llinm. depth.

Browned llmm. deep and water-
logged 12ni.m. deep.

Browned to depth of 14ni.ui. and
water-logged 15inm. deep.

On the third day the apple in tlie 1 per 2000 solution sank, that
in 1 per 10,000 was just afloat, and the one in water, though still
afloat, was floating loAver than before. The increase of weight
results mainly from the water filling the air spaces in the pulp, and
the collapse or contraction of the cells killed by poison enlarges the
air spaces, and hence accelerates the entry of water.

The distribution of water and ash in apples.

Zschokke (Landw. Jahrb. d. Schweiz, 11, p. 192, 1897). showed
that in transpiring apples there might be a ditt'erence of from i to 1
per cent, in the amount of water in the basal and distal portions of
the fruit. This is the natural result of the greater abundance of
breathing pores, through which water vapour escapes, on the calyx
half of the apple. McAlpine (Report p. 7'5) gives similar data for
Annie Elizabeth apples.

Kreshly Plucked. After 8 days.

Top. Middle. Bottom. Top. Middle. Hottoni.

p.c. p.c. p.c. p.c. pc. p.c.

Clean - 85 50 - 86.23 - 86.12 - 85.68 - 86.74 - 86.92 ^
Pitted - 85.49 - 87.04 - 87.58 - 86.13 - 86.51 - 86.17

Hence the average percentage of moistuie in the clean, freshly-
plucked apples was 85.95 per cent., and after eight days in air
was 86.45 per cent., the numbers for the pitted apples being 8().7
per cent., and 86.27 per cent, respectively. Ajiparently the per-
centage of moisture increased in the clean apples after eight days
in air, and decreased in the pitted apples, a remarkable result, if
not due to faulty methods or the use of une(|ual material. In any
case it is evident that variations of \ to I per tent, of water can be
of no importance in regard to bitter pit, for imuh grcattT varia-
tions are shown by growing and adult aj)ples, and the weight of a
fresh apple can be reduced by drying by 5 to 10 })cr cent, without
the pulp cells being injured.

Bitter Fit in Applies. 41

Mucli greater iiupoitance is to be attached to vaiiations in tlie
percentage of ash, although in the case of a strong metallic poison
an apple might l)e completely killed without its precentage of asli
being appreciably increased. Mr. P. R. Scott's analyses, however,
fieem to show that bitter pit apples and pears contain a greater
percentage of ash than usual. (Report pp. 46, 47.)

Josephine Pears

0.38

0.43

Stone Pippin Apples

-

0.42

0.48

Lord Wolseley Apples

-

0 271

0.352

The pitted fruits oidy contained 1 to 2 jJcr cent, less moisture
than the clean ones, so that the bitter pit tissue must have been in
an early sappy stage, and the ash which represents materials drawn
from the soil does actually appear to be more al)undant in Ijittrr
pit tissue or in pitted fruits. No analyses of the ash are given, un-
fortunately, 80 that it is uncertain whether the increased ash
•contains unusual or poisonous constituents.

Effect of manuring on Bitter Pit.

The results of a variety of tests with different manures are given
in the Bitter Pit Report in great detail (pp. SO-91). In the Box Hill
-orchard the percentage of bitter pit in the two check plots was l..">
and 4.5. The percentages on the manured plots were all less than
the difference between these two. In the Bathurst plots the averages
for the tAvo unmanured plots were 1.42 and 3.00, and this was a
greatei- range of variation than Avas shown by any of the manured
plots. In the Blackwood orchards the number of pitted apples
varied ficmi 1 to 5, and the number of api^les from the three controls
varied from 1 to 56. None of these tests therefore show anythi'nu',
the differences observed being of the field variation character.

Effect of pruning on Bitter Pit.

In regard to the results given with pruning (Report p. 92, 98), a
similar criticism holds. In the Burnley results, with leader prun-
ing, the bitter pit apples varied from 2 to 21, a greater range of
variation than between the different modes of pi-uning, showing
that the numbers given are meaningless as regards the effects of
pruning. In the Deepdene orchard the bitter pit apples from
unsprayed trees pruned in four different ways totalled only 12.
with a variation of 1 to 5. The Bathurst tests are most satisfac-

.42 Alfred J. Eivart:

tory, and in spite of the high range of variation {<i.o-i to 8.11) seen»
to indicate that medium pruning produces the laigest amount of
bitter pit, and no pruning the least, whilst hard pruning is inter-
mediate. Nevertheless on page 81 of the Report medium pruning^
is recommended as one means of reducing bitter pit. Medium
pruning tends to concentrate the sap on the fruits, and with it any
poisonous ingredients absorbed, while hard pruning tends towards
new Avood formation, and so diverts some of the sap from the
fruits.

The interesting experiments with different stocks carried out hv
Mr. Quinn are not yet far enough advanced to enable any con-
clusions to be made, but grafting is not likely to affect the resist-
ance of the pulp cells of the gi-afted scions to poisons.

The influence of cool storage on Bitter Pit.

Since the resistance of the pulp cells to poison is greatly increased
at low temperatures, it is only to be expected that in cool storage
the development of bitter pit should be retarded or even stopped,
Avhen only minimal amounts of poison are present. If the starch
grains were undissolved, the low temperature would prevent or
delay the last stage of complete poisoning and tuining brown. If
the amount of poison i^i-esent is lelatively large, brown spots
may still appear in cool storage, but the amount will be reduced.
(Report pp. 103, 105.) The influence of cool storage is mainly con-
fined to preventing or delaying the onset of the later stages of
poisoning, such as death and collapse of the cells, the turning
brown and acquiring a more or less distinct bitter taste. It is.
Iiowever, precisely these changes which render affected apples un-
saleable. An apple in the incipient stages of bitter pit, though a
little less sweet, will be as edible as one not affected at all, and the
point may be once again emphasised that an apple may be com-
pletely poisoned with various metallic poisons and yet contain insuf-
ficient poison to produce any ])oisoning symj^toms or effects when
eaten.

Conclusions.

The evidence in favour of the poisoning theory of bitter pit
Itrought forward in the present and previous paper, may be briefly
recapitulated as followe : —

It is possible by applying poison during the starch stage of
an apple to reproduce artificially every symptom of bitter pit. The
diastase ferment which is responsible for the normal solution of

Hitter Fit in Ajyplet>. 4^^

tlu' stattli LTrains is jn-fseiit during ar K'ust tlir early stages of
liitter {'il. 'J'lu' starch grains are iionnal and capable of solution.
Tht.' only agency capable of preventing their solution in localised
living cells under the conditions existing is a poison.

The most resistant apple (Yates' Pippin) to poison ii^ also the
most resistant to bitter pit.

At low temperatures the resistance to poison is increased ten tj^
fi hundred times (0 deg. C. as compared with 30 deg. C). In cool
storage the resistance to the full development of bitter pit is-
fcimilarlv increased.

'riie poisoning theory is in accordance with all that is known
in regard to the sensitivity of the pulp cells to poisons, to their
diminishing resistance with increasing age, and to the changes
which take place in the cell. The increased percentage of ash in
bitter tissue is evidence pointing in the same direction.

Dr. White, in bitter pit apples from an orchard heavily sprayed
with arsenate of lead, was able to detect the presence of traces of
lead. Against this is the fact that the State Analyst was unable to
detect arsenic in a limited number of bitter pit apples from four
orchards certified to have been unsprayed. Anjr poison is, however,
capable of producing bitter pit symptoms, and the results obtained
by the Federal Analyst show that it is possible to poison the pulp
cells of apples by traces of poison so minute as to be incajjable of
det€ctiori even by delicate chemical analysis.

No other theory of bitter pit will stand critical examination or
8cientific testing. Mr. McAlpine's vascular interruption theory is
unsupported by observation or experiment, and is negatived by the
fact that during the early stages of bitter pit the vascular connec-
tions are normal. The cracks appearing in the tissue form during
the later stages, they are not always present, and are the result
and not the cause of the death and contraction of the pulp cells.
In addition, the starch grains of bitter pit tissue and its ash con-
.stituents are carried to it by materials conveyed along the vascular
bundles, and since the percentage of ash in bitter pit tissue is higher
than in healthy ptilp, the conducting channels must have been func-
tioning more actively if anything than usual. The accumulation of
absorbed poisons at certain points causes these cells to be sacrificed
to maintain life in the rest.

The browning of apple pulp is due to the oxidation of tannic acid.
Apparently gallotannic acid occurs in numerous minute rounded
vacuoles in the protoplasm of the pulp cells in addition to the iron-
greening tannin of the cell-sap. If so, the plasmatic membranes of
these vacuoles nuist be impermeable to alkali or oxygen, or both when

44 Alfred J. Ewart: Bitter Fit in Apples.

living. The vac\iolar meinbraiR-e is iinpernieable to the ari«ls of the
cell sap. When a metallic poison whicli (le.stioys oxidase is applied
-externally, alkali and oxygen may Lome into contact with the tannic
acid and produce browning, before the vacnolar inenil)iane becomes
permeable to the acid of the cell sap. When the cells are killed by
boiling oxidase is destroyed, and the vacuolar membrane allows
acid to escape immediately, and neutralise the alkalinity of the
protoplasm, so that tlie piill> ren)ains colonrless until alkali is
added. When the cells are phued in toxic but very dilute sul-
phuric acid, browning occurs before the alkalinity of tlie protoplasm
is removed, or before the oxidase is destroyed. With stronger acid
solutions the oxidase is destroyed or the alkalinity is removed before
the tannic acid has time to oxidise, and no browning takes place. The
brown oxidation products rapidly unite with the proteids of the cell,
and the colour is then very permanent. Carbon dioxide and unaltered
cell sap are non-poisonous to the pulp cells. Tannic acid is less
poisonous than any other acid tried, and alcohol is less poisonous
than lime water.

Yates' apples do not appear to be capable of more than a month's
strict anaerobiosis in hydrogen or carbon dioxide at room tempera-
ture. In a cool chamber the period Avouhl piobal)ly l)e prolonged.
Apples can he preserved to a remarkable extent by loatiTig them
"with a gelatine skin. Peeled apples will remain living foi- a fort-
night longer under kerosene, and the fungus Pencillium will grow
upon them and upon potato slices submerged in kerosene.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES.

Plate III.— Localised ).oisoning, with 1 per 1 .000. 000. Odd of mer-
curic chloride.

i\ . — Fig. 1 . Portion of vascidar system of ap]>le x 12^.
Fig. "2 . Poition of vascular system of apph' x 29.
\'"\\l. -5 . Endings of vascular bundles in apple pnlj) x 22.

V. — Fig. 1 . A))ples i)eeled on one side and ])lackene<l witji

ferric cliloride.
Kig. 2 . Poi-tions of blackened pulp cells x lo. showinu'

tannic acid vacuoles.
Fig. ;5 . Tannic Atid vacuoles in protoplasm of pulp

cells stained with ferric rlilori.le x ;{20.
Fig. 4. Do., stained with methyl blue x 400.

Froc. K.S. Victoria, 1U13. Pl;ite III.

Pro.-. l.'.S. Virt..ria, lillli. IMate TV.

Pioc. K.S. Yi<-t...ia, l!tl:i. IMnt.. V.

[Proc. Rov. Soo. ViCTOKiA, 26 (N.S.), I'T. I., una.]

Akt. III. — On the Age <in<l PhyxKHjKtph'ic Relatione of the
Older Basalts of Gremsboruagh and Kangaroo Ground^
and of certain Basalts at Bundoora and Ivanh,oe.

Bv J. T. JUTSON

(Geological Suivey of Western Australia).

[Kead i. th April. 1913J.

Introduction and Previous Literature.

The Kainozoic basalts of Victoria have hitherto been divided intO'
two main series, the Older Basalt and the Newer Basalt. The
tornier is represented by the isolated patches lying mainly to the
east of Melbourne, and the latter by the great volcanic plains tO'
the west of the same city.

Whilst, however, these two principal series have been recognised,
some suggestions have from time to time been made that there is an
intermediate series. Thus, as pointed out by Mr. T. S. Hart in his
'■ Volcanic Rocks of the Melbourne District,"! the older volcanic-
rocks are divided into two groups on the Geological Survey Maps —
viz.. Older Volcanic and Lower New Volcanic. Mr. Hart shows that
the largest aiea of the Older Basalts, near Melbourne, lies along
and to the east of the Saltwater- River, and reaches down to Mel-
bourne, reappearing beyond the Yarra at Emerald Hill; and that
the greater part of it is coloured and lettered on the maps as Older
\ olcanic. the south-eastern end is coloured and lettered as Lower
.New Volcanic, and the middle is coloured Lower New Volcanic and
lettered Older Volcanic. Mr. Hart concludes that from the sections
round Melbourne there is a series of older volcanic rocks, overlaid
by marine Tertiaries, and perhaps a second series before the newer
volcanic. Mr. Hart also discusses the age of the Greensborougli
older series of basalts, as will be shown later.

Messrs. Hall and Pritchard in their paper on the Tertiaries in
the neighbourhood of Melbourne2 also point out (p. 189) that the
volcanic rock at South Melbourne and West Melbourne is coloured
on the Geological Survey Quarter Sheets as Lower Volcanic — i.e.,
Lower Newer Volcanic — and is so lettered except on Quarter Sheet

1 Vict. Nat., vol. .\i. (1894), p. 75.

2 I'roc. Roy. Soe. Victoria, vol. ix. (N.S.), 1?<96, pp. 187 •2-29, pi. 8.

48 J. T. Jutson :

The Greensborough Older Basalts.

These rocks t'orni a series of small isolated patches oil the tops of
the hills on each side of the Plenty River in the neighbourhood of
Greensborough and Janefield. They Avere mapped in the early days
of the Victorian Geological Survey, and were re-examined by the
writer whilst mapping the country to the east of the Plenty River
prior to his departure in 1911 for Western Australia/' Associated
with them are the Kainozoic gravels and sands shown on the Survey
Quarter-Sheet. As already noticed, Aplin and Hart doubt whether
the basalts rest upon the sediments. At the time of my examination
of the country, no sections were available showing the actual rela-
tions, but from an exhaustive examination I have no doubt that the
liasalt overlies the sediments.- This opinion is based upon the
relative positions of the two rocks throughout the area, but it is
supported by the fact that no l)asalt pebbles in the sediments have
been discovered by the writer. If the basalt were the older, we
should certainly expect some of its pebbles to be included in the
sediments.

If the relations between the rocks be as stated, then the age of
these Kainozoic sediments becomes an important question as regards
the correlation of the basalt, and merits some attention.

Generally similar sedimentary rocks are found to the south in
isolated patches, forming as a rule the caps of hills, such as at
Heidelberg, Preston, Northcote, Studley Park and Royal Park.
These appear to pass into the more or les'fe continuous sheets to the
south-east of Melbourne, and there can be little doubt that the whole
of these rocks were originally unbroken on the Nilumbik Pene-
plain,^ the more northern areas probably being of fresliwater
origin, whilst the southern ones aie in part at least marine. The
country has since been much dissected, especially in its northern
parts, with the result that the sediments in places now form merely
the caps of the hills.

The sediments of tlie Greensborough area are now disconnected
I)y erosion. I)ut are found high up the liills at apparently the same

1 Portion of this counti-.v h;is, I uiiderstaiirt ffoiii Prof. Skeats, lieeii independently inapp>-d
liy Sir. Junner of tVie Melbourne Univer.sity (he beinff unaware of my work amongst the basalts of
the district), and a paper thereon has been read by him before this Society. At the time of writini;-
(Otli .March, 191S) this paper has not been published, nor lias it been seen by me, so that both
Mr. .lunner's and my own eonc'lusions are each independent of the other's.

■2 In places the basalt rests directly on the Silurian. The e.xplanation is that either from tlie
contour of the country, the gravels and grits never covered these particular places, or that t hex
liave been removed by deiuidation before the flow of the basalt.

3 Kor a deflnition of this peneplain, see the writer's paper on the Physiography of tlie Yaira
previously cited, p. 477.

older Bdtudts oj iirecm^hoiniKjIt, etc. 49

general level. The latter also appears to be continuous with that of
similar deposits to the south referred to above In their lithologi-
cal and general eharatters, the deposits are similar, except that in
the Greensborough aiea they are much coarser-grained in places,
consisting largely nf very heavy gravels.^ This, however, is what
would be expected on ajDproaching the hills (to the north), from
which the rocks are derived. The most reasonable inference is that
the Greensborough sediments belong to and are of the same age as
those to the south. These, by the fossils obtained at Royal Park
and Beaumaris, have been placed as Kalinman, so that if the
Greensborough gravels and sands belong to this period, the Older
Basalt of the district may be considered as Kalimnan, or younger.

The Older Basalt at Royal Park and other localities farther west
underlies the Barwonian, hence it must be of this or of an earlier
age. There is therefore a very considerable time gap between the
Older Basalt of Royal Park, Saltwater lliver, etc., and the Older
Basalt of Greensborough.

The latter rock is much older than the Newer Basalt of the plains.
The Greensborough area clearly shows (as pointed out by Mr. Hart)
that before the eruption of the Newer Basalt, the Older Basalt had
been nmch denuded and the country deeply dissected. A large time
gap also therefore exists between the Older Basalt and the Newer
Basalt of the Greensborough district. There is thus evidence of
three distinct basalt periods, separated by wide intervals of time,
m the neighbourhood of Melbourne.

If the Older Basalt of Greensborough were of the same age as
that of Royal Park, the underlying sediments would be much older
than Kalimnan. and would probably be contemporaneous with the
sedimentary beds below the Royal Park basalt, but the available
evidence points in the writer's opinion rather to Kalimnan age
than to a much older period.

In the Greensborough ai-ea, most of the Kainozoic sediments are
closely associated with the basalts. The latter have apparently
acted as protective caps, and when the basalt is removed the sedi-
ments soon follow. Farther south there are numerous outcrops of
sediments uncapped by basalt. Greater thickness of sediments in
this direction (towards the sea) would, however, be expected, and
this thickness would temporarily save some rocks from removal by
denudation. In view, moreover, of the evidence brought forward
in this paper, it is impossible to say to what extent basalt may have
overlain the sedimentary rocks.

1 Similar gravels are .also found at Kangaroo Ground.

50 ./. T. Jatsoii :

The Kangaroo Ground Older Basalt.

The main portion of this basalt occupies a fairly extensive belt
of high country a few miles to the east of the Greensborough
basalts. As seen in the road cuttings, it is very vesicular, and con-
siderably decomposed in parts. In the former character it differs
from the Greensborough Older Basalts, as the latter, so far as ob-
served, are generally dense.

Beneath the basalt are some gravels, grits and sands, which have
in places been worked for gold. These sediments, together with
their silicified products, quartzites, can be noticed at the edges of
the basalt on the noi'thern and eastern sides of the main outcrop.
Quartzite boulders are found in other parts, and in the township
of Kangaroo Ground there is a rather extensive outcrop, which
also apparently underlies t?ie basalt.

An actual section of the basalt covering the sediments is seen to
the east of the small quarry reserve in Allotment 16, Section III.,
Parish of Nillumbik. The basalt cap here is only a few yards in
diameter, but it rests on grits and gravels of an exposed thickness
of about 16 feet, so that any doubt as to the relations of the two
rocks is set at rest.

The Geological Surey has marked on the parish map of Nillumbik
the " probable course of lead " under the basalt, thus indicating a
belief in the existence of an old buried river channel. The basalt
at Kangaroo Ground certainly in parts lies on a very uneven sur-
face, as may be seen on the main road running north to the town-
ship from Eltham. By Weller's Temperance Hotel, at the foot of a
long hill, the basalt outcrops and overlies gravels, w^hilst towards
the top of the same hill going north it rests on Siluri.m rocks. In
this uneven surface, it appears to differ much from the Greens-
borough Older Basalts. Elsewhere, however, in the vicinity, the
general surface on which both the basalt and gravels lie seems
moderately level.

The question of the age of the Kangaroo Ground l)asalt is not
easily answered. The writer, in his paper already referred to on
the physiography of the Yarra Basin, regarded this rock (through
adapting the current ideas of its age as that of the typical Older
Basalt of Royal Park, etc.), as a monadnock on the Nillumbik Pene-
plain, and therefore older than the latter. The cap of Kainozoic
sands and gravels around Melbourne rests on the ]>eneplain, and is
therefore younger or at least coincident with the final stage of for-
mation of the peneplain. Considering the Greensborough gravels
and sands as part of this cap, makes the Older Basalts of the same

Obler B<tmifs of Greenshoroiujli, etc. 51

district younger tlian the peneplain; whilst if the Kangaroo
Ground basalt be a monadnock on the peneplain, there is a great
gulf between the respective Older Basalts of the two places. If, on
the other hand, it be not a monadnock, but part of a flow subse-
quent to the formation of the peneplain, both it and the Greens-
borough rocks would probably be of the same age, but separated
from the Koyal Park flow by a great interval of time.

The point might be satisfactorily settled if the age of the sedi-
ments below the respective basalts at Kangaroo Ground and Green.s-
borough could be determined beyond doubt, but unfortunately no
fossils have been discovered at either place, and thus the most
reliable proof is absent.

The proximity of the two areas, the generally similar characters
of the underlying sediments, and the roughly level, continuous sur-
face over which the basalts have flowed suggest their identity in age.
In favour of their difference is the uneven valley-like surface on
w'hich the Kangaroo Ground basalt in part rests, and the dis-
crepancy in the character of the rocks (vesicular and dense) already
noted, but these are of a soraew^hat frail nature on which to make
H great time gap. Provisionally, therefore, these basalts may be
held to be of the same age, and as the Greensborough Older Basalt
belongs probably to the Kalimnan or later period, the Kangaroo
Ground basalt must tentatively be placed there. If this be correct,
the latter is not a monadnock on the Nillumbik Peneplain.

No distinct vents have been discovered in the basalts of Greens-
borough or Kangaroo Ground. Garden Hill, at the latter place,
rises considerably above the general level of the surrounding basalt
and it is just possible that this may represent the worn-down vent
from which the lava was spread over the country.

Streams cut through the Older Basalt at Greensborough, but are
deflected away from that at Kangaroo Ground. Either a monad-
nock on the old peneplain or a high mass (such as exists), due to
being the remains of a vent, would cause this peculiarity.

The Mount Cooper Newer- Basalt.

As previously indicated, the basalt forming the cap of Mt.
Gooper, Bundoora, is shown on the Survey Quarter-Sheet as con-
tinuous with the Newer Basalt flows on the plain to the west. On
a visit to the locality some years ago, the writer accepted this view,
but in consequence of subsequent examination of the Greensborougli
basalts, and the high-level basalt at Ivanhoe, together wnth the dis-
tribution of the basalt around Mt. Cooper, as shown by the map.

62 J. T. J Litii07t :

some doubt has arisen as to its correctness. On a recent visifc
to iVlelbourne, the writer intended to visit the ground, but unfor-
tunately time did not permit. The question is, however, now
brougtit forward as a suggestion for further investigation.

Mt. Cooper is a rather prominent landmark, rising to a fair
height above the Newer Basalt of the Darebin Creek valley, and hav-
ing steep northern and western faces. There is a large patch of
Kainozoic sediments (most of which have been converted into
quartzite), which rest on the Silurian rocks of the district, and
underlie the basalt. This quartzite outcrops freely on the northern,
western and southern slopes of the hill, and is found right in the
bed of the Darebin Creek to the west.i These silicified gravels and
grits are no doubt part of, and originally continuous with, the
Kainozoic sediments of Preston and Greensborough, to which refer-
ence has already been made.

The basalt cap is at the northern end of the hill, and is probably
from 40 to 50 feet thick at the highest point. This basalt, when
examinued in aifu, is, so far as observed, dense and non-vesicular.
Its boundaries are clearly shown on the northern, southern and
western sides, where the quartzite already referred to crops out
fi-om beneath the basalt. To the west, in the valley of the Darebin
Creek, is the low-lying lava flow, the typical Newer Basalt of the
district, from which the high basaltic cap of Mt. Cooper is separated
by the quartzite.

According to the Survey map, the basalt of the hill is continuous
with the lower basalt at its north-eastern end, and on this ground
no doubt, the higher basalt has been mapped as Newer Basalt, and
the hill consequently regarded as a volcanic vent. An important
(piestion therefore is whether the two basalts are actually connected
oi- not.

At first siglit there appears to be no doubt that such a connection
exists as although an actual outcrop cannot be continuously traced,
the heavy black soil resulting from the decomposition of basalt
forms an unbroken line on the north-eastern face. In addition, near
the top of the Mount, and on the same face, numerous pieces of
very vesicular basalt of low specific gravity, Avhich might for con-
venience be called basaltic pumice, occur. This is somewhat sugges-
tive of a vent in the neighbourhood. There is also a low hill be-
tween Mt. Cooper and the main road to the east, rising above the
level of tVie low-lving basalt. This hill has highly vesicular basalt,
which is apparently connected with the lower flow.

1 This .shows that ,at this locality tho K.iinozdic sedinu-iits were deiiositi<l on an iiiiuven
Mirfaco, or thiit they h;ive l>tcii let down l.y fiiiiltiny.

Older Basalts of Greenshoroitgk, etc. 63

On the other hautl. tlie Mount has been well dissected on most
sides, and the basalt appears to be lying on the quartziie. If a
plug exist, it occurrence has not yet been actually demonstrated.
Again the. basalt on the top of the quartzite. when examined in situ,
if. dense and non-vesicular, in this respect in hand specimens,
resembling more the (ireensborough Older Basalt than the typical
Newer Basalt. It also occurs at such a height that if erosion had
proceeded so far as to remove all traces of basalt on the nortli-
eastern slope, the high basalt would certainly have been regarded
merely as another outlier of such Older Basalt of Greensborough.
It is for these reasons that the writer ventures to doubt tlu; correct-
ness of the Survey interpretation.

In the absence of a sufficient examination of the urea since this
doubt arose, a definite opinion on the point cannot be (jffered, but
as a hint to anyone taking up the investigation, attention should
be paid to the low hill to the east, which may be the remains of au
old vent of the Newer Basalt period. If so, the occurrence of such
basalt above its general level might be explained, and at the same
time make it possible for the basalt on the top of Mt. Cooper to be
another outlier of the Older Basalt of Greenslxirough or perhaps the
plug of an old vent of such Older Basalt, l)ut there is little more
(if any) ground for the latter alternative than for any of the basalt
caps of the Greensborough area.

Microscopical examination might thiow .some light on the ques-
tion, and the small patches of Newer Basalt on the eastern side of
the main road at Bundoora (which the writer has not seen) should
iiho be studied.

The Ivanhoe High-Level Basalt.

On several occasions some yeiirs ago, the writer endeavoured
to locate the " basalt boulders " marked on the Quarter-Sheet. Tlie
" siliceous conglomerate " was easily fixed by an outcrop on the
roadside, but no trace of the basalt could be found, and the matter
'was dismissed as a mistake of the field geologist or draftsman. Some
time later, however, on happening to pass that way again, several
holes up to about 4 ft. deep were being dug in connection with the
formation of a nursery, and in these holes the " basalt boulders "
revealed themselves, thus offering another testimony to the remark-
able accuracy of the early Victorian Geological Survey. The basalt
was close to the siliceous conglomerate, and apparently only a few
yards in extent.

The "basalt boulders" consisted of rounded, semi-rounded and
angular blocks, having on the average a diameter of about 10 inches

54 J- T. Jutson :

of hard, non-vesicular, dense basalt. Some blocks were polygonal
in shape. The writer has no doubt that these boulders are not
waterworu, but are the remains of basalt in situ, jointed into small
vertical columns, and then weathering into the observed forms bt
exfoliation, i.e., spheroidal weathering.

The rocks were found near the crest of the ridge to the east of the
Darebin Creek, and high above and disconnected from the Newer
Basalt flow of that valley.

The actual relation to the silicitied sediments could not be seen,
but the latter may be taken to represent a small altered patch of
the ordinary Kainozoic sediments of the district. The silicification
is apparently connected with the basalt, and the latter would prob-
ably therefore be younger. It is evidently older than the Newer
Basalt, and its most likely age is that of the Older Basalt of Greens-
borough, and of the cap of Mt. Cooper, if the latter ultimateh' turn
out to be of the same age as the former, the likelihood of which is,
in the writer's opinion, strengthened by the Ivanhoe example. The
possibility of the basalt being a volcanic plug of the Greensborough
Older Basalt period must also he borne in mind, although there is no
direct evidence on the point.

It is interesting to observe that only at this locality (where basalt
is associated with them) are the Kainozoic sediments of Ivanhoe and
Heidelberg silicified to such an extent as to merit the term quartzite
being applied to them. Yet at Greensborough basalt caps are
numerous, and scarcely any silicification has taken place, but at
Kangaioo Ground both silicified and unsilicified Kainozoic sedi-
ments underlie the basalt. At Mt. Cooper the underlying sedi-
mentary rocks have been extensively silicified. Mr. Armitage^ has
suggested a cause for the silicification of similar rocks in the Essen-
don district, but the matter cannot here be discussed.

The Physiographic Relations.

As we have seen, the question of the age of the basalts and sedi-
ments is bound up with the physiography of the district.

The following points appears to be well established. To the
north, east and south of Melbourne, tlie higher hills are capped by
Kainozoic sands and gravels, which were originally continuous and
rested upon a practically level surface of the older rocks, this sur-
face representing an old base-level of erosion, which stretched far
up the Yarra valley, and which for convenience has elsewhere been
called the Nillumbik Peneplain. These gravels and grits around

1 Vic. Nat., vol. xxvii. (1910), p. 02.

Old<'r Bimdis vl Grec„slH>n>,njh, rtr. 55

Melbourne are in part marine and in part freslnvater. They were
laid down on the Nillunibik Peneplain at the base-level of the latter.
Subsequently thr ((nmtry was elevated, and a fresh cycle of erosion
coinnK'nced. witli the result that tlie Kainuzuic sediments have been
partly broken up into the present disconnected caps on the hills,
and in the resulting valleys the Newer Basalt has flowed. Judging
by what are regarded as the marine representatives of these sedi-
nieiitary beds at Koyal Park and Beaumaris, their age is Kalimnan.
The Older lia.salt at Royal Park is clearly older than the Kalimnan
beds there, as the latter overlie the Barwonian. and tliese in turn the
basalt. 1

Passing now from these fairly well established conclusions, reasons
have already been given for believing the Kainozoic sediments of
Greensborough, Ivanhoe and Mt. Cooper to be Kalimnan; for classi-
fying the overlying basalts at Ivanhoe and Greensborough as Kalim
nan or later; for considering the possibility of the Mt. Cooper basalt
being of the same age; and for provisionally placing tl»e Kangaroo
Ground sediments and l)asalt witli tlie similar rocks of Greens-
borough.

From physiographic considerations it would seem that the Older
Basalts, the subject of this paper, must liave been poured out before
the underlying sediments were broken up by erosion, and conse-
quently before or soon after their uplift from base-level; for if any
great interval elapsed between the uplift and the basalt flows,
denudation would have brought about such inequalities of the land
that the basalt, instead of as a rule, now regularly capping the hills,
Avould have been found also in the valleys, but of this there is no
evidence, except in part at Kangaroo Ground, as already recorded,
Avhich, however, mav be due to some local cause.

Summary.

Gravel, gi-its, sands and their alteration product, (piartzite, are
found at Ivanhoe. Mt Cooper. Greensborough and Kangaroo
Ground at liigli levels, associated with the basalts. The latter over-
lie the sediments at three of the localities, and at the foui-th (Ivan-
hoe), the same relation probably holds good.

No fossils have yet been discovered in these sedimentary rocks.
In their absence, the evidence points to those at Greensborough
and Mt. Cooper being continuous with and of the same age as those
farther south (which include the Ivanhoe area), and which ar^ re-

1 As to the greneral Kainozoic history of the ooiiiitn ;ir(.iiii(l Mellioiiriie, see '• Victorian Hill
nd Dale" and other writiiis-s by Dr. T. s. Hall.

66 J. T. Juttion:

garded as Kalimnan. The overlying basalt at Greensborough and
that at Ivanhoe must therefore be Kalimnan or younger, but it is
uncertain whether the Mt. Cooper basalt belongs to the same series
or to the Newer Basalt period.

The Kangaroo Ground sediments and covering basalt are on a
balance of probabilities provisionally placed with the similar rocks
of Greensborough.

The evidence therefore shows a series of basaltic outliers, which
point to a distinct period of vulcanicity between the typical Older
Basalt of Royal Park and the Saltwater River, and the Newer
Basalt of the plains, the intermediate period being separated from
each of the others by a great time gap. It is suggested that the
terms Older Basalt and Newer Basalt be retained for the rocks above
indicated by those names, as they are now well established and
understood, whilst the term Intermediate Basalt be used for the
basalts of the intermediate period.

On the above reading, the Kangaroo Ground and other basalts
cannot be considered as monadnocks on the Nillumbik Peneplain,
as they are younger than such peneplain.

Garden Hill at Kangaroo Ground may l)e a worn-down vent of
the Intermediate Basalt.

From the physiography of the district it is inferred that the
Intermediate Basalt was poured out bcfon- or shortly after the
uplift of the Nillumbik Peneplain.

In conclusion, it is well to state that the want of definite con-
clusions on the various points raised in this paper is chiefly due to
two i-easons — first, the unsatisfactory character of the evidence
itself, and second, the incomplete examination of the ground by
the writer on account of his removal from Victoria to Western
Australia.

Sufficient data have, however, been brought forward to show that
not only a thorough investigation from all points of view of the
basalts and associated sediments of the area dealt with in this paper
and of adjacent districts is required, l)ut also that the Older
Basalts of the State as a whole should be subjected to a close re-
examination ?\s opportunity offers.

The difficulties atteiiding attempts to fix tlir age and stratigra-
phical relations of the Victoi-ian liasalts have Ik'ch jioiiited out liy
Prof. Skeats.i

1 Pres. Add. (Sec. C), A.A.A.S., IJii.sliain^. liUlii, )i.

fPRor. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.S.), \'t. I., 1913].

Art. IV. — Oil the Occurrence of a Felsitic Dyke and Associated
Breccias at Sugar Loaf Hill (Mont Park), near
Heidelberg.

HV

J. T. JUTSON
((jleological Survey of Western AiLstralia).

AND

FREDERICK CHAPMAN, A.L.S., etc.
(National Museum, Melbourne).

(With Plate VI., and one Text Figure).
[Read loth April. I91.S .

Introduction.

Sugar Loat' Hill is an elongated hill running about north-north-
west, and is -440 feet above sea level. It lies a little to the north of
Heidelberg, and constitutes a prominent landmark, from whicii a
fine panoramic view can be obtained.

As already pointed out by one of us (J.T.J.i) the hill is a mouad-
nock on the Nillunibik Peneplain.

Previous literature.

References to this hill are few. Selwyn, in the map accompany-
ing his report on the geological survey of the Yarra basin and
Western Port ,2 has mapped it as a " siliceous dyke of red jasper
and white quartz rock." On Quarter-Sheet 2 S.E. (Aplin, 1808),
it is noted that on tlie hill there are outcrops of a " hard and Hinty
' breccia,' composed of angiilar and here and there a few semi-
rounded pieces of sandstone and altered shale." and the suggesticm
is made that this breccia has, in all proliability. tilled a pre-existing
fissure in the bed rock.

Mr. T. S. Hart, M.A., in his " Volcanic Hocks of the Melboui-ne
District, "3 inclines to the opinion that Sugar Loaf Hill was onte
the bottom of a lava-filled valley, that the lava has been removed.

1 Proc. Roy. Soc Victori.i, vol. xxiii. (N.S.), pt. ii., 1911, p. .'<0'2.

2 " The Basin of the River Yarra and part of the Northern, North Kastern and Kastern Hraiii-
atfe of Western Port Bav." Votes and Proceedings, l,e«:. Council, Victoria, 18.i5-6, vol. ii., pt. i.

3 Vict. Nat., vol. xi., 1894, pp. 74-78.

58

Jutson and Chapman :

•but that the hardened drift of the stream bed remains, capping the
hill.

Since Mr. Hart wrote, some very small excavations on the top of
the hill have been made.

General JJescription of the Outcrops and Sections.

The country surrounding Sugar Loaf Hill consists of Silurian
sediments (mainly shales with thin bands of sandstone), with a strike
some degrees to the east of north. We believe the main part of the
hill to be of similar lithological character, and the rocks to possess
a similar strike, although the latter point is not directly ascertain-
able.

On the top of the hill a band of rock (which we regard as a felsitic
dyke intrusive into the Silurian) runs approximately north-north-
west for about 300 yards. A l)raiah is thrown off from about the
centre, and runs northerly for about 100 yards on the east of the
main portion of the dyke. The outcrops are faint for about 50
yards north of the bifurcation. Between the two branches of the
dyke tliere is exposed a moderately coarse-grained sandstone, with thin
quartz veins. The width of the dyke varies from about 6 to 30 feet.

Associated with the dyke is a very coarse-grained breccia, which
we consider to l)e a fault — or friction-breccia formed subsequently to-
the dyke.

At a shallow excavation about 18 inclies deep, and aljout •") feet
long, towards the southern end of the main outcroj) of the dyke, a
small but interesting section is disclosed, which is slunvn by the
following diagrammatic figu)-e : —

\\\ S^/i/nar? -j"j- fe/5//-e PyAe fX "(F^hihc 3recc^c^).

of fehf^fc ro<A, .

FeLsUe Btjl,r, Mont Park: 6»

Tlie Silurian riH-ks are not seen in the actual section, Imt are
iiisi-rted to show the )elatiojis.

The (Ivkc at vliis section is about 12 feet ^vide ; the hrecciated
selvage Avould averatre about 2 J, inclies, but reaches 5 inches; and
the enamelled rock is about | inch in width. The width of the-
fault-breccia has not l)een defined, but about 4 feet of it can be seen.
The eastern face of the enamelled rock is smoothed, polished and
marked by faint, api>roximately horizontal striations, evidently indi-
cating considerable rock movement. The petrology of this rock and
of the dyke and selvage are described later.

The fault-breccia is composed of angular fragments of apparently
fine-grained sedimentary rocks (no doubt of Silui-ian age), of the
dyke rock and of tlie selvage, the size of the fragments varying from
about !(• inclies tv \ inch.

The selvage, on its western side, passes into the dyke by an
irregular, indistinct line, the rocks having the appearance of being
fused together. The junctions of the enamelled rock with the selvage
and the fault-breccia respectively are sharp, practically vertical,
and run approximately parallel to the course of the dyke ; they are
regarded by ns as fault planes. The actual junctions of the dyke
and the fault-breccia respectively with the Silurian cannot be seen.

At another small excavation (noAv filled in), and elsewhere on the
hill, generally similar relations between the main rocks occur.
Points of difference are that the selvage is nearly three feet wide in
places, and is soinetijnes cavernous, and that well down on the soutli-
eastem slope of the hill, a coarse-grained breccia occurs, but the-
dyke ajijiears to be absent.

On the northern slope of the hill, and a few feet below its summit,
tliere is a small outui-op of hard silicified coarse grits. These rocks
evidently belong to the series of Kainozoic gravels and grits capping
the hills at Preston. Xorthcote. Heidelberg, Studley Park, and other
places. They do not appear to have been disturbed l)v any earth
movement.

Ptt ruUxji/ .

The following is a (lescrif)tion of the three principal types of rock.

The dyke rock is compact, of a chalky-white appearance, obscurely
laminated near its edge, and in places stained with iron. Travers-
ing the rock are numerous small, irregular planes, which may be
due partly to shrinkage on cooling, and partly to the severe pressure
the rock has sustained during the various earth movements, which
have occurred subsequent to its intrusion. Along certain planes,
bands of the brecciated selvage occur, showing clearly that the
brecciation of the dyke was not confined to its eastern edge.

■60 Jutson and (.-li airman :

lender a high power of the microscope, thin sections (Plate VI.,
fig. 4) are seen to consist of a felsitic ground mass with altered
felspars giving a shadowy extinction, small blebs of quartz, numerous
tufts of sericitic mica, and occasional pale green tourmalines. On
the field evidence the rock would be classified as an acid dyke.
Under the microscope, however, on account of the decomposition
that has taken place, it might possibly be regarded either as a
fine-grained dyke-stone or as a volcanic ash : but from a considera-
tion of both the field and microscopic evidence, we are of opinion
that it is a fine-grained decomposed felsite.

The selvage rock from which the slide (Plate VI., fig. 3) has been
taken is a brick-red jaspery breccia. Some of the included frag-
ments measure as much as 11 mm. in diameter. These seem to have
been originally sandstones and secondary quartz vein-stone.
■Certain of the quartz fragments are distinctly rounded (due prob-
ably to crushing), and some show characteristic polysynthetic struc-
ture under crossed nicols. The brecciated rock-fragments are
-cemented by a ground mass of fine felsitic material, which has a
purplish or reddish tint owing to the quantity of haematite included
in it in segregation patches, and bordering the larger fragments
of polysynthetic quartz. Sericite is abundant in minute flakes in
the matrix of the rock, and traces of a large simply twinned ortho-
■clase on the (?) Baveno type also occur. Many of the secondary
quartz fragments show interesting stress shadows as well as micro-
gneissic structuie. Macroscopically this rock resembles a volcanic
"breccia, with included fragments of sedimentary Silurian torn from
the rocks adjacent to the fisstire. This term, however, generally
implies a pyro-clastic rock formed by an explosion from a volcanic
vent, which does not appear to be the case with the rock in question.
It is better described simply as a felsitic breccia. It may have been
formed either by the dyke on its intrusion tearing off fragments of
the adjacent rocks, which became mixed with the dyke-stone at or
near the margin of the dyke, or by earth movements causing the
dyke to be brecciated subsequent to its consolidation. As the dyke-
stone appears to form the matrix of the brecciated selvage, and
the rocks have no distinct boundary line, but are irregularly fused
together, we incline to the former explanation.

A certain amount of mineralisation of the rocks, paiticularly this
selvage rock, has taken place, as shown by the thin veins and
patches of pyrites and other minerals in hand specimens.

The enamelled rock is of an ochreous yellow to a brown colour.
It resembles a fine-grained laminated ash breaking up into several

Felslte Dyke, Mont Park. 6P

distinct platy layers, disposed parallel to the wall of the fissure-
Its eastern face is, as already noticed, polished, and faintly striated..
The dynamical movement to which the rock luis been subjected
probably accounts for the laminated appearance.

This rock in thin sections (Plate VI., figs. 1 and 2) under a
moderately high power, is seen to consist of fine felspathic material
closely felted, with larger fragments of altered felspars and
extremely angular fragments of quartz. These larger fragments;
are arranged rudely parallel to the walls of the fissure. The very
fine felsitic constituents, by being impregnated with limonite, are
not conspicuously anisotropic under crossed nicols. but the edge of
this thin band of rock has lost its iron, being very clear in excessively
til ill .sections, ami giving striking polarisation effects. A still
hiirher magnification I'eveals the presence of minute fi-agments of"
pale green augite, occasional red-brown rutiles, and numerous:
rounded crystals of zircon. Throughout the rock there are ragged
fragmentary folia of biotite, whilst disseminated here and there-
may Ije seen limonitic granules, probably decomposition products,
restdting from the alteration of 1)iotite. and other ferro-magnesiant
minerals.

The rock may be described as a fragmental felsitic rock resem-
bling an ash, but its origin is a difficult problem. There are three-
posible solutions :--(!) A thin intrusion of a felsitic character much
later than the main dyke itself; (2) a true acid volcanic ash; and
(3) a fragmental rock due to the grinding of the walls of the fault
fissure, the constituents of the rock consequently being derived
largely from igneous rocks.

Concerning (1), it is difficult to understand the completely
crushed quartz, and the entirely fragmental character of the matrix,
for so much dynamical stress would surely result in chemical changes
within the rock itself. With regard to (2). the microscope rather
favours this suggestion, but it is difficult to account for such a
thin band of volcanic ash in such a position, considering that it
is clearly not interbedded with the Silurian sediments of the area,
and that it is extremely unlikely that a narrow fissure would remain
open, and become filled with pyroclastic material to such a depth
as this fissure must have po.ssessed, in view of the very considerable-
denudation to which the rocks must have since been subjected. The
most favourable solution appears to be (3). but whilst we incline
towards this idea, Ave think the origin of the rock must be left an
open question for the present.

We are indebted to Mr. D. J. Mahony. M.Sc, for assistance in^
elucidating the petrology of the rocks examined.

'^'Z Jntson and Chapman: Felsite Dyke, Mont Park.

Conclusions.

A dyke of felsite is considered to have intruded the Silurian
sediments by a forked fissure across the line of their strike.

Associated with the dyke is a brecciated selvage, which we have
termed a felsitic breccia. We consider it piobable that this rock
originated by tlie dyke on intrusion, tearing off and enclosing frag-
ments of the adjoining rocks Anothei- aspect has been mentioned above.

After the formation of the brecciated selvage, a strong earth
movement took place, by which the present coarse-giained fault oi-
friction breccia was formed.

Later, further dynamic changes occurred along the same line of
fracture, as indicated by the features of the thin enamelled band of
rock, but as the origin of the latter is not clearly determined,
nothing very definite as to the displacement can be stated, except
that it was, in part at least, almost horizontal.

Thus, including the original fissure, we have evidence of several
distinct earth movements along the same line of fracture, and so
strikingly confirming the general statement that lines of weakness
■often suffer from repeated displacements. The rocks have probably
been altered by thermal waters as well as by dynamic agencies.

Rgarding the age of the dyke and breccias, if our reading of the
phenomena be correct, they aie clearly post-Silurian. The Kaino-
•zoic grits at the northern end appear to belong to the series of
■gravels and grits that cap the higher hills to the north-east of
Melbourne, such as Northcote, Studley Park and Preston, which are
regarded as Kalimnan. As these grits do not appear to have been
affected by the earth movements, all such movements, together with
the date of the intrusion of tlie dyke, must be regarded as pre-
Kalimnan.

It is possible that the dyke is contemporaneous with the felsitic
■dykes, which can be seen intruding the Silurian along the Alexandra
Avenue, Melbourne.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE

Platk VI.

Fig. 1. — Fragmental felsitic rock from the enamelled band in

section near southern end of outcrop, Sugarloaf Hill.

Slide No. 1. X 28.

Fig. 2. — The same, more highly magnified. Slide No. 1. x 184.

Fig. 3. — Felsitic-breccia, with quartz-vein fragments and altered

sandstone, southern outcrops. Slide No. 2. x ",9
Fig. 4. — Felsite. From the dyke, southern outcrop. Slide No. 3.
X 28.

I'roc. R.S. Victoriii, 1<I1:3. I'latc VI,

a

^;?#^;i "■"%,.

u^-

[Proc. Roy. Sue. Victoria, 26 (N.S.), Pt. I., 1913.J

Aii'i'. V. — On I^atica tasmanica, Tenison- Woods, and
description of a New Species of Nat lea.

BY

G. B. PRITCHARD, D.Sc, F.a.S.,

AND

J. H. GATLIFF.

(With Plate VIl.)-
[Read 8th May, 1913. J

When making out the Catalogue of the Marine Shells of Victoria
we included Natica tasmanica, T. Woods, l in the synonymy of
Natica didyma (Bolton m.s.), Chemnitz, and also cited as synonyms
A. arnpla, Philippi, N. hiclor, Philippi, and N. chemnitzii, Recluz
(non Pfeiffer), and xV. lamarckiana, Recluz, and gave other refer-
ences.

We had previously obtained specimens of N . tasmanica, T. Woods,
from Dr. J. C. Cox, and Miss Lodder, named N . didyma, Bolten,
obtained in New South Wales and North-West Tasmania.

The original description of N. tasmanica by T. Woods^ is as
follows : — " iV. shell, with a somewhat covered umbilicus, depressedly
orbicular, thick, with a short but slightly exsert spire; whorls con-
vex, rounded, smooth, or obliquely thickly and most minutely
striate, aperture semilunar, horizontal, columella somewhat thin,
with a prominent callosity, which is spirally sulcate, umbilicus
angula'rly excavate; with a kind of callosity within the suture at the
mouth; pale fulvous or whitish, banded with brownish or orange
lines; base white, chestnut or fulvous within."

In the National Museum, Melbourne, three specimens were set out
on a card as N. tasmanica, T. Woods, dated January, 1877, and
numbered 35315-7 locality, Hobson's Bay, and are duly entered
under that name in the museum register. They answer to the above
description. The Curator, Mr. Kershaw, informs us that at about
that time the Rev. J. E. T. Woods examined their Australian shells
and assisted in their identification, and probably the name was fur-
nished by him.

1 Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 1900, vol. xii. (n.s.), pp. 191, 192.

2 Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas. for 1875, pp. 148, 149.

64 Pritchard and Gatliff :

Mr. Whitelegge, in his " List of the Marine and Freshwater inver-
tebrate fauna of Port Jackson and the neighbourhood,"' lists the
species as N.^Hdyma, Bolton, m.s., Philippi.

Messrs. Tate and May, in their " Revised Census of the Marine
Mollusca of Tasmania,"' quote the same shell as Polinices ampla,
Philippi, and give Natica lamarckiana, Recluz, as a synonym, and
subsequently at page 448 state that Natica ampla — JV. didyma,
Bolten. They also^ list as a separate species, Polinices tasmanica,
T. Woods, and give a figure* of a shell that is not his species; it does
not answer to the description, being of a different form, with the
umbilical callosity entire, and not spirally sulcate.

Messrs. Pilsbry and Vanatta, in a paper entitled " Notes on
Vrdinices didyma, with description of a new Australian species,'"''
describe and figure N . tasmanica, T. Woods, as a new species, under
the name of Polinices aulacoglossa,^ type locality Altona Bay, Wil-
liamstown, near Melbourne, Victoria, and remark, " Some speci-
mens received from Dr. J. C. Cox are larger, alt.. 41 J diam., 42
min., otherwise similar. This is apparently the form listed by
Messrs. Pritchard and Gatliff as Natica didyma, Chemn., It i»
certainly distinct specifically from P. didyma, or any of its sub-
species.

.\atica chemnitzii, Recluz (not N. chemnitzii Pfr., 1840) seems to
be identical with this species, though if so it attains a larger size
than any examples we have seen. In any case the name is a/
homonym, and cannot stand.

Natica tasmanica, Tenison-Woods, has been placed in the
synonymy of P. didyma, by Messrs. Pritchard and Gatliff. but Tate
and May, in their Census of Marine Mollusca of Tasmania (1901),
have retained it distinct, a decision supported by the figure pub-
lished by thein, it is a far smaller species than P. aulacoglossa,
alt. 13, diam. 16 mm.

It is unfortunate that Messrs. Tate and May figured the wrong
shell. Mr. May's attention was personally drawn by one of us to
the matter on 11th May, 1901. On 10th Mai'ch, 1913, we wrote ask-
ing him where the type was. He replied, " There is in this instance
unfortunately no type known to refer to, or authentic co-types."
and admits that the wrong shell was figured by Prof. Tate and him-
self.

I Proc. Koy. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, p. 96, No. 406.

•2 Proc. Lin. Soc. N.S.W., 1901, vol. xxvi., 375.

3 Loe. eit.

4 Loc. cit., pi. xxv., fig 49.

'■> Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila<lelphia, 190S, vol. Ix., pp. .')6.'i-5.'>9, pi. 29.

(■> Loc. cit., pi. 29, fii,'s. 1-3.

Ne'W Species of Natica. 65

We uio surprised thiit Messrs. Pilsl)ry and Vanatta did not dis-
cover this fact, as Tenison-Woods states, amongst other clearly ex-
pressed items, " Columella somewhat thin, with a prominent cal-
losity spirally sulcate." In Messrs. Tate and May's figure the cal-
losity is not sulcate.

We adhere to our opinion that the slight differences existing
between A', didyina^ and N . tasmanica do not warrant the latter
being considered a distinct species, and are of opinion that there
is a closer resemblance between the two than we can discern between
iY. clidi/iiKi and X . hicolor. The last-named is classed by Messrs.
Pilsbry ami Vajiatta as a variety of S . didyma.

Whether the shell be considered to be a distinct species, a variety,
or a synonym, the name given to it by Tenison-Woods has prece-
dence, and P. aidncogJossa^ Pilsbry and Vanatta, becomes a synonym.

Natica controversa, sp. nov. (PI. VII., Figs. \-:\).

IDUl. Natica tasmanica, 'J'ate and May. (non T. Woods), Proc.
Lin. Soc. N.S.W., vol. xxvi., p. 375, pi. 25, f. 49.

Shell rather small, solid, globose, whorls about five, smooth, but
for the slightly irregular lines of growth, spire short and slightly
exsert, aperture ovate, outer lip rather strong, suture well defined
with a strong enamel thickening internally; at the anterior end of
the columella there is a narrow but defined tooth-like ridge, umbili-
cus angled, deep, about one-third of it covered by a semilunate cal-
losity, which is convexly rounded on its surface, and does not bear
any trace of a transverse sulcation. Colour light yellowish white ; on
the body whorl there are two indistinct, darker encircling bands, the
upper one being the broader, and extending from a little below the
suture to the periphery; the other is narrow and near the base; there
is also a light-coloured band below and adjoining the suture, due to
the internal thickening.

Dimensions o/ ry/Je.— Height. 15; bieadth, 17 mm.

Locality. — South Coast, Tasmania.

Observations. — This is the species which was figured in error by
Messrs. Tate and May (cited above), as representing iV. tasmanica,
Tenison-Woods, and referred to by us in the foregoing remarks
upon that species.

Type in the National Museum, Melbourne; liitherto unnamed
specimens No. 36265-6, have been on view since October, 1876, We
have chosen No. 36265 as type. We have recently received two

1 Of this species we have before 118 an example from .lapaii, verified hy comparison with the
shell under that name in the British Museum by Mr. C. .). Gabriel in 1S07.

66 Pritehard avd Gatlif: Species of Natica.

smaller specimens from Mr. May as being the species he figured, and
these agiee with our present species. Mr. May also states that the
•operculum is unknown.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE.

Figs 1-3. — Natica controversa, sp. iiov.

Fig. 4. — Natica tasnianica, T. Woods.

All figures are natural size.

Proc. R.S. Vicloi-ia, lUV.i. J'latu VII.

[Pboc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.SJ, Pt. I., 1913].

Ak'I'. V\. — Oii tSome New ISpeclea <ind Varietle,s of Victorian
M< 1 1 ■ ii I ('. MoUiisccL

HV

.J. H. GxiTLIFF

AND

0. J. GABRIEL.

(With Plate VIII.).

;;Read 12th .lime, 1913].

This paper contains descriptions of three new species of Rissoa,
one variety^ and a new variety of BvUinella pygmaea, A. Adams;
also remai-ks on and figures of Nissoa hicolor. Petterd.

Rissoa iravadioides. sp. nov. (Plate VIII., Fig. 1).

Shell minute, cylindrical, of four and a-half slightly convex lirate
whorls; exclusive of the embryonic whorl, which is smooth; the fol-
lowing whorls are each encircled by about six flatly-rounded spiral
lirae, equally spaced, the intervening grooves are concavely rounded,
and of the same width as the lirae, the upper portion of the whorl
is slightly t.abulate below the suture, which is incised. The obliquely
pyriform aperture is in the plane of the axis, and is laterally
extended to the right, beyond the l)ody of the shell, periphery
rounded. Colour, cream-white.

Dimensions. — Length, 1.55; breadth, .55 mm.

Locality. — Dredged off Wilson's Promontory (type), also in 8 to
10 fathoms, Westein Port.

Ohs. — In general appearance somewhat resembling shells of the
genus Iravadia.

Type in Mr. J. H. Gatlift's collection.

Rissoa janjucensis, .sp. m(.v. (Phite A^III., Fig. 2).

Shell minute, sub-cylindrical, smooth, of five and a-half whorls,
including the embryonic wliorl. which is small; sutures linear, well
defined; whorls flatly convex. Aperture in the plane of the axis,
roundly pyiiform. laterally extended to ttje riudit, peristome com-
plete. Colour, pale yellow.

68 Gidlif arid Gahrlel:

Dimensions. — Length. 1.5; breadth. .5 mm.

Locality. — Jan Juc, Puebla coast (type), in shell sand; also-
dredged in 8 to 10 fathoms Western Port.

06s. — Another specimen is of ^■eddish-bro^vn colour, with the
excei^tion of the base and peristome, which gradually become pale-
yellow.

Type in .Mr. J. H. (latliff's collection.

Rissoa verconis, Tate : v.u-. apicilata, var. nov.
(Plate VIIL, Fi<,'. :3).

The species was originally named by Petterd Rissoa baclia,^ and
the following is his description : — " Shell small, narrowly oblong,
smooth; whorls 6, aperture small, labrum thick; apical whorls
inflated. Long., 1.75; lat., .50 mm."

The name being pre-occupied by A. Adams in 1861, was changed
by Tate to R. verconis,^ and the shell was figured by Tate and
May. 3 It has a rounded dome-shaped apex.

In the variety' the apical whorl is oblique, and of a somewhat
peculiar formation, the nucleus is not situated at the highest point,,
but drops down to the left. Colour, brown.

Dimensions. — Length, 2; breadth, .53mm.

Locality. — Type of variety, dredged in 6 to 8 fathoms Western;
Port; Port Albert (T. Worcester).

Rissoa wilsonensis, sp nov. (Plate VIII, Fig. 4).

Shell minute, tun-eted, white, shining, semi-transparent. Whorls
four, including a prominent dome-shaped protoconch. Whorls fur-
nislied with four elevated, rounded, spiral keels, the interstices
being about twice the width. The body-whorl, with its eight carinae
occupying slightly more tlian lialf the length of shell. Sutures
deeply impressed. A microscopie- examination of the interstices
discloses a minute sciilpture of numerous, slightly undulating spiral
thi'eads, ciossed l)v threads of feebler strength. The protoconch is
well defined, and ornamented with spiial lirae. Aperture, througl>
which the spiral sculpture may l)e seen, ovate; labrum thin; inner
li]) slightly patulous.

Dimensions of Type. — Length, 1.5; breadth, .75 nmi.

Locality. — Dredged off Wilson's Promontory.

1 Jour, of Conch., 1884, vol. iv., p. IHS.

•2 Trans. Roy. Sec. S. Aust.., 1S!M», vol. xxiii., p. •_';«.

"^ Pioc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 11)01, vol. xxvi., p. a02, pi. 27, fijf. 80.

Victoi-idii Murine Moll n sea. 69

Obs. — At pri'seiit tliroe speriineiis i-epreseiit the species, one, pos-
«essiii;^- ail fxtra wlioil. attaining the diniensions of 2 iinn. It has
an ally in /i*. /</'/(ir(/>\ I'etterd, whieh species possesses closer spirals
xind is more acuminate in form.

Type in Mr. C. J. Gabriel's collection.

Rissoa bicolor', Petterd. (Plate VIII., Figs. 5 and 6).

This sjtecies was described as being " without sculpture, "'i
This is correct as far as concerns the body whorls, but a microscopic
•examination shows that the two-whorled protoconch is minutely
granulated, these granules being symmetrically arranged in about
twelve spiral rows, which are more clearly defined on the second
whorl. The species also varies in size and outline, some being
•elongately pyramidal, as figured by Tate and May. 2 and others are
smaller and more tumid in the Avhorls, we therefore give a figure
of one of these, and a magnification of the embryo showing the
feature above described.

Bullinella pygmaea, A. Adams; var. sculpta, var. nov.
(Plate VIIT., Fig. 7).

Shell thin, small, white, semi translucent, sub-cylindrical, trun-
cated at the top. Sculpture — the whole surface is scored with
numerous, irregular, somewhat remote spiral furrows, and with
longitudinals of a similar character, but more frequent. The top is
narrower and margined with a slightly thickened radiatingly-
marked rim, within which is an infundibuliform perforation.
Aperture the full length of the shell, narrower above, and almost
half the width of the shell at the anterior end. Outer lip. thin,
sharp, nearly straight. A narrow, elongated, oblique pillar-lip
appears, behind which is an umbilical chink, into which the sculp-
ture is clearly traced.

Dimensions of Type. — Length, 1.25; breadtli. .75 mm.

Locality. — Dredged off Wilson's Promontory.

Obit. — In the series of the variety studied variation existed. A general
consistency in contour prevailed which warranted a variety being
made, but with not sufficient distinction to rank it as more than
a variety of the variable B. pygmaea, A. Ad.

Type in Mr. C. J. Gabriel's collection.

1 Jour, of Conch., 1884, vol. iv., page 137.

2 Proc. Linn. ,Soc. X.S.W., 19U1, vol. xxvi., page 391, pi. 2C, fip. 63.

70 Gatliff and Gnhrid : Mtiriae Molhtsca.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VII 1.

Fig. L — Rissoa iravadioides, sp. nov.
Fig. 2. — Rissoa janjucensis, sp. nov.
Fig. 3. — Rissoa verconis. Tate var. apicilata, var, nov.
Fig. i. — Rissoa wilsonensis, sp. nov.
Fig. 5. — Rissoa bicolor. Pettei'd.
Fig. 6. — Rissoa bicolor, protoconch enlarged.
Fig. 7. — Bullinella pygmaea, A. Adams, var. sculpta. var
All the figures are variously magnified.

Proe. K.S. Yi,.t„riM. i;u;

5. riat.. VIII.

C. J. G. ad. Mat. d*-

[Proc. Koy. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.S.). Pr. 1.. 191:5 .

Ak'I'. VII. — Additi(mi> to the Cat<ilo(jue of the Marine Shells
of Victoria.

BY

J. H. GATLI KK

AND

C. J. GABRIEL.

[Kead 12th June, 1913] .

In this paper we liave made 69 additions to the catalogue, includ-
ing 8 new genera, namely, Eufhria, Leucosyrinx, Eglisia, Phena-
colepas, Ciispidaria, Ectorisma, Thyasira, and Gyrilla; 3 new
species and 2 new varieties described in the preceding paper, and
the total number of mollusks catalogued is 1031.

In our generic nomenclature we have used the names adopted in
the earlier portions of tlie catalogue. There have been changes
made since, and some of the alterations have not been generally
adopted, we purpose dealing with this matter in a future paper.

It will interest palaeontologists to note the inclusion of Eglisia
triplicata, hitherto only recorded as a Tertiary fossil.

Trophon recurvatus, Verco.

1909. Trophon recurvatus, Verco. T.R.S., S.A., vol. xxxiii.

p. 336, pi. 24, f. 7, 8.
1911. Trophon recurvatus, Verco. May, P.R.S., Tas., for
1910, p. 307.
Hab. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile fieach.
Obs. — Size of type: Length, 6.7; breadth, 3 mm.

Trophon simplex, Hedley.

1903. Trojilion simplex, Hedley. Mem. Aust. Mus., vol.
iv., p. .380, f. 93.
Hab. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Obs.— Size of type: Length, 8; breadth, 3.8 mm.

Cymatium kampylum, Wat.son.

1883. Nassaria kampyla, Watson. J.L.S., Lond., vol.

xvi., p. 594.
1886. Nassaria campyla, Watson. Chall. Zool., vol. xv.,
p. 405, pi. 14, f. 12.

72 Gatliff (ind Gabriel :

1900. Lampusia nodocostata, Tate and May. T.R.S.. S.A.,

vol. xxiv., p. 90.

1901. Lanipiisia iiodocostata. Tate and May. P.L.S.,

N.S.W., vol. xxvi., p. 355. pi. 23, f. 2.

1902. Lotoriura nodoeostatiiiii, Tate and May. Kesteven,

Id., vol. xxvii., pp. 463, 479; f. 1 and 4.

1906. Cymatiinn kampyla, Watson. Hedley Rec. Aiist.

Mus., vol., vi., p. 219.
Hab. — Same as last-named .species.
Obs. — Size of type: Length, 1.67; Ijieadtli, 0.8 inehes.

•CymatiuM COLUMNARIUM, Hedley and May.

1908. Cymatium columnarium, Hedley and May. Rec.

Aust. Mus., vol vii., p. 119, pi. 23, f. 15.
1908. Cymatium columnarium, Hedley and May, Veico,
T.R.S., S.A., vol. xxxii.. p. 343.
Hab. — Bass's Strait, Commonwealth trawler " Endeavour."
Obs. — Size of type: Length, 21; breadth, 8.5 nun. Tlie identi-
fication has been confirmed by Mr. W. L. May, and we have since
compared the shell with the type.

Fasciolaria AUSTRALASIA, Pel ry ; v:\r. liAKEiu, (Jatliff and Gabriel.

1912. Fasciolaria australasia. Perry. Var. bakeri, (ratliff

and Gabriel. V.N., pp. 46-48, pi. 3 and 4, f. 1-7.

Hab. — Of type, Anderson's Inlet (Baker). Cajje Howe, Connnon-

wealth trawler "Endeavour"; Lakes Entrance; Port Albert (T.

Worcester).

Obs.— Size of type of variety : Length, 93 ; bi'eadth, 41 nnn.

(ienus Euthpia, Gray, 18.^0.
EUTHRIA TABIDA, Hedley.

1904. Phos tabidus, Hedley. P.L.S.. N.S.W.. v<.l. xxix..
]). 191, pi. 8, f. 18.

1907. Eutliria tal'ida, Hedley. Ker. Aust. Mus.. vol. vi.,

p. 286.
Hab. — In aboiit 40 fathoms, olT Ninety .Mile J?eacli.
Obs.— Size of tyi.e : Length. 12; breadth, 5 lum.

VoLUTA PAPILLOS.A, Swaiiiscdi ; var. K KN VOM AN A. lirazier.

1897. Voluta kenyoiiiana. Hra/.iei'. P.L.S.. X.S.W.. v.d.
xxii., p. 779.

Additioun to Cufahujiie oj S/idls. 73

190G. Voluta papillosa, Swaiiisoji. \'ar. kenyoniana,
Brazier. E. A. Smith. 1*. Mai. Snc. Ldml., vf)l.
vii., p. 6.
1912. Voluta papillosa Swainson. Var. ki'iiyoniana.
Brazier. Vcrco, T.H.S., S.A., vol. xxxvi.. p.
228. pi. U, f. 2, :}.
Hab. — C'apc Everard; Lakes Entfaiice.

Obs. — The variety is loiigitudijially irrt'<rularly costate, and the
costae vary in ninnber and development on different specimens. The
size of the type of tlie vai-iety is — length, 1-37 ; breadth, 46; altitude,
37 mm. The National Museum exhibits a spoeimen obtained in 70
fathoms 70 miles X.E. of the West Sisters Islaii.ls. Bass's Strait.

MiTKA STADI.VLIS, Hedley.

1911. Mitra stadialis, Hedley. Zool., Commonwealth
trawler "Endeavour," part I., p. 112, pi. 20, f.
:^7.
Hab. — Bass's Sti'ait. Commonwealth trawler " Endeavour."
Obs. — Size of type : Length. 8.5; ])rea(ltli. '■] mm.

jVlARf;iNKLLA (JATLIFFI. .May.

1911. .Marginella gatlitK, May. P. U.S.. Tas.. for 1910,
p. .385, pi. 1.3, f. 8.
Halj. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Obs. — Size of ty])e : Length, 3.3; breadth, 2.5 mm. The author
remarks upon its i-esemblance to .1/. ochidced, Angas, and states,
*' but is a very much l)roader shell, with a shorter spire." Colour,
yellowish white.

Marginella cabhikli, .May.

1!)11. Marginella gabrieli. May. Id., p. 386. pi. 13, f. 9.

Hab. — Dredged oft' Wilson's Promontory.

Oljs. — Size of tyjie : Length, 4; breadth, 2 nnn. A biconical shell;
white, with four orange bands. Our single .specimen is slightly
smaller.

Dkillia schoutanic a May.

1911. Drillia sehoutanica. May. P. U.S.. Tas.. for liHo.
p. 391. pi. 14. f. 17.
Hab. — Bass's Strait, Commonwealth trawler "Endeavour."'
Obs. — Size of type: Length, 12.5; breadth, 5 mm.

74 GafUtf' (ivd Gahi-iel :

Dhillia saxea, Sowerby.

1896. Drillia saxea. Sowerby. P. Mai. Soc. Lond., vol. ii.,

p. 25. pi. 3, f. 4.
1909. Drillia saxea, SoAverby. Verco. T.R.S.. S.A., vol.

xxxiii., p. 304.
1911. Drillia saxea. Sowerby. May, P.R.S., Tas., for 1910,
p. 308.
Hab. — Dredged off Wilson's Promontory.

Obs. — Size of type : Length. 7; breadth, 3 mm. Our single worn
and bleached specimen is rather larger.

DiULLIA LACTEOL.\, Verco.

1909. Drillia lacteola, Verco. T.R.S., S.A.. vol. xxxiii.,

p. 304, pi. 26, f. 5.
1911. Drillia lacteola, Verco. May, P.R.S., Tas., for 1910,
p. 308.
Hab. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
01)s.- — Size of type: Length, 4.8; breadth, 2.1 mm.

DhILLIA XENIA, Hedley.

1903. Drillia nenia. Hedley. Mem. Aust., Mus., vol. iv.,

p. 3S7. f. 101.
1909. Drillia nenia. Hedley. Verco. T.R.S., S.R.. vol.
xxxiii.. p.. 300.
Hab. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Obs.— Size of type: Length, 6.6; breadth. 2.5 mm. Compared
by us with the type.

(leiius Leucosyrinx, D.ill, 1889.

Leucosyrinx REci'A, Hedley.

1903. Leuiosyrinx recta, Hedley. Mem. Aust. Mus., vol.

iv.. J). 386. f. 99.
1911. Leucosyrinx recta, Hedley. May. P.R.S., Tas., for
1910. J.. .308.
Hab. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Obs. — Size of type : Length. 6 ; breadth. 2.5 mm.

Dai'uvella tkiskhiata, Verco.

1909. Dapimella triseriata, Verco. T.R.S.. S.A., voL
.xxxiii.. p. 325, pi. 28, f. 8.
Hab. — Same as the |)receding species.

Additions to Catalogue of >>hclls. 75

Obs. — Size of type. Length, 4.6; breadth. 2.4 nun. The shell has
seven unequal spiral lirae encircling the penultimate whorl, the
intervening spaces being crowded with very fine axial striae, which
ascend obliquely inclined to the right. Our identification has been
kindly confirmed by Dr. Verco by comparison with liis type.

NaTU'A SfilOUTANICA May.

1912. Xatica schoutanica. May. P.R.S., Tas., p. 45. pL
2. f. 3.
Hab. — Bass's Strait, Commonwealth trawler " Endeavour."
Obs. — Size of type: Diameter, major. 5.5, minor 4.5; height,.
5 mm.

TURRITELLA MICROSCOPICA, May.

1911. Turritella microscopica. May. P.R.S.. Tas.. for
1910. p. 395, pi. 15, f. 23.
Hab. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Obs. — Size of type: Length. 3.5; breadth. 1 mm.

Capulus DEVOTUS, Hedley.

1904. Capulus devotus. Hedley. P.L.S.. N.S.W.. vol.
xxix., p. 190. pi. 8. f. 15. 16.
Hab. — Same as the preceding species.
Obs. — Size attaining to: Height, 7; base, diameter, 7 mm.

Cyclostrema hoaialox, Verco.

1907. Cyclostrema h(»malon. Verco. T.R.S.. S.A., vol.
xxxi.. p. 305. pi. 29, f. 3. 4.
Hab. — Dredged off Wilson's Promontory.

Obs. — Size of type: Largest, diam., 2.7; smallest. 2; height,
1 mm.

Crossea xaticoides, Hedley.

1907. Crossea naticoides, Hedley. Rec. Aust. Mus.. vol.
vi.. p. 290, pi. 54. f. 6. 7.
Hab. — In alx)ut 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Obs. — Size of type: Height. 2.35; width. 3 mm. Shell smooth.
" Umbilicus deep and narrow, its margin a faint basal funicle.
.\perture entire, circular."

Crossea carinata, Hedley.

1903. Crossea carinata, Hedley. Mem. Aust. Mus.. vol. iv..
p. 345, f. 71.

76 Gatlif and Gnhnel:

Hab. — Same as the preceding species.

Obs. — Size of type: Height. 1.7; width. 1.8 mm. " Shell smooth
iiud glossy. . . . Apertui-e subcircidai."

(renus Eglisia, Gray, 1810.

EfJLlSIA TKIPLICATA, Tate.

1890. Scalaria (Eglisia) triplicata. Tate. T.R.S.. S.A..

vol. xiii., p. 231.
1892. Scalaria triplicata. Tate. Id. supp., pi. 9. f. 2.
1897. Eglisia triplicata. Tate. Harris. Cat. Tertiary Moll..
B.M., part I. Australasian Tertiary Moll., p.
270.
Hab.— Port Albert (T. Woicester).

01)s. — Size of type: Length. 28; breadth. 7 nan. About one-half
■of our single specimen, being the ea^'lier portion, is missing, the
size of the remainder is: Length. 15; breadth. 6.5 mm. We have
compared it with fossil specimens in the National Museum, obtained
from Muddy Creek (Miocene), and consider it to be the same species.
The palaeontologist. Mr. F. Chapman, concurs in this decision.

OiN(iULiNA i\8h;xis, May.

1911. Cingulina insignis. May. P.R.S., Tas.. for 1910.
p. 39(;. pi. 15. f. 24. 24a.
Hab.— In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Obs. — Size of type: Length, 11.5; l)readth. 2.8 mm.

TuHHONILLA TIAKA, May.

1911. Turbonilla tiara. May. Id., f. 25, 25a. 25b.
Hab. — Same as last-named species.
Obs. — Size of type : Length. 9; breadth. 2 mm.

Odostomia ni!(;atohia, Hedley.

1903. Odontostomia nugatoria. Hedley. Mem. Anst. Mus..
vol. iv.. p. ;36;5. f. 87.
Hab. — Same as last-named species.
01)s. — Size of type : Length, 2.2: breadth. 1 mm.

IvissoA IKAN Ai)n)ii)KS, Gatllfl' and (Jiibri«'l.

1913. UissoairMvadioidcs, (JatHH'aiul (ial)iipl. Antea page 67.
Hab. — Dredged off Wilson's Promontory; also in 8 to Id fathoms
Western Port.

Additions to Cdtcdogue of Shells. 77

RissoA .lAN.TUCKNSis, (iatliff and (iabiiel.

1913. llissoa janjucensis. Gatlil'f and r;al)iiel. Autea pag^e-
67.
Hab. — Jan Jiu-, Puehla coast in slu'll sand; also dirdncd in 8 to.
10 fathoms. Western Port.

Ri;sso.\ VKHCuNls, Tate ; var. .apkmlat.a, (iatlirt' and (ialtriel.

191.'). liissoa vereonis, 'I'ate vai-. apieilata. (iatlift" and
Galjriel. Antea pafje
Hab.— Dredged in 6 to 8 fathoms. Western Port; Port Albeit (T.
Worcester).

KlssoA WILSON KNSis, Gatliff" and Gabriel.

1913. Rissoa Avilsonensis. Gatliff and Gabriel. Antea page-
68.
Rl«S0A KUBICUNDA, Tate and May.

1900. Rissoia (Cingula) rubicunda, Tate and May. T.R.S.^

S.A., p. 100.

1901. Rissoia rubicunda, Tate and May. P.L.S., N.S.W.^

vol. xxvi.. p. 393.

1902. Rissoia rubicunda. Tate and May. May, P.R.S.,

Tas., p. 114, f. 13.
1911. Amphithalamus rubicundus, Tate and May. Hedley,

Zool.. Commonwealth trawler " Endeavour,""

l^art I., p. 107.
Hab.— Western Port (T. Worcester).
Obs. — Size of type : Length, 2.5 ; breadth, 1 mm.

Rissoa pyramidata, Hediey.

1903. Scrol)s pyramidatus, Hedley. Mem. Aust. Mus., voL

iv., p. 354, f. 77.

1911. Amphithalamus pyramidatus, Hedley. Zool. Com-

monwealth trawler "Endeavour,'' part I., p.

107.
Hab. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Obs. — Size f>f type : Length. 2.1 ; l)readth. 1.4 nun.

Rissoa sciioutanica, May.

1912. Rissoa sciioutanica. May. P.R.S., Tas., p. 47, pi. 2,.
f. 6.

Hab. — Same as the last named.

Obs. — Size of type: Length, 2.5; breadth, 1.5 mm. Yellowisli:
white. Body whorl encircled with three keels.

78 Gatllf arid Gabriel.-

ElssOA FILOCINCTA, HetUey ami Petterd.

1906. Rissoa filociiieta, Hedley and Petterd. Rec. Aus.
Mus.. vol. vi., p. 217, pi. 37, f. 2.

1911. Rissoa lilocintta, Hedley and Petterd. May, P.R.S..

Tas., for 1911, p. 309.
Hal). — Same as the last named.

Obs. — Size of type : Length, 3; breadth, 1.7 mm. A very ornate
species.

Rissoa australiab, Frauenfeld.

1867. Rissoa australiae, Frauenfeld. Novara, p. 14, pi.

2, f. 23.
1887. _ Rissoia australiae, Fraxienfeld. Tryon, Man. Conch,
vol., ix., p. 344, pi. 71, f. 81.
Hal). — Kilcunda. ,

Rissoa columnaria, Hedley and May.

1908. Rissoa columnaria, Hedley and May. Rec. Au.st.
Mus., vol. vii., p. 117, pi. 22, f. 9.
Hab. — Dredged off Wilson's Promontory.

Obs. — Size of type : Length, 2.6; breadth, 1.1 mm. Our examples
only attain to about half this size, and the close longitudinal hair
lines are less numerous.

Genus Phenacolepas, Pilsl)ry, 1891.
Phenacolepas calva, Verco.

1906. Scutellina calva, Verco. T.R.S., S.A., vol. xxx..
p. 217, pi. 8, f. 9, 10.

1912. Phenacolepas calva, Verco. Id., vol. xxxvi., pp.

185 and 199.
Hab. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Obs. — Size of type: Height, 2^ major diam., 2.8; minor diam.,
1.8 mm.

Lkpidopleurus columnarius, Hedley and May.

1908. Lepidopleurus columnarius, Hedley and May. Rec.
Aust. .Mus.. vcl. vii., ]). 123, pi. 24, f. 27, 28.
Hall. — Bass's Sti-ait, C'diiniionwealth ti-a\vloi- " Endeavour."
Obs.— Size of tyi)c : Length, 8; breadth, .3 nun. We have only
the posterior and median valves, but the longitudinal i-adiatinir

Additional to Catalo(/ae of Shclh. 79

rows of iniiiute jLj;raiiis are so characteristic tliat the identification
is readily made, and has been confirmed bv us In- comparison -witli
the type.

AOANTnOf'IIlTKS Kl.MIJKHl, ToiT.

1912. Acanthochites kimberi, Torr. T.R.S., S.A.. vol.
xxxvi., p. 167, pi. 6. f. ."ia-f.

Hab. — Torquay.

Obs. — Size of type: Lenu'th, 10; bi-eadtli, 4 inin. We have coin-
pared our specimen with the type, wliich was kindly brought for
examination by Dr. Torr. when he recently visited Melbourne. He
concurred in our identification. The figure is correct in showing
four tufts round the head plate, the description erroneously states
that there are five. Our specimen has eight plates, but we can only
see seven in the figure.

Acanthochites rxilis, Torr and Asliby.

1898. Acanthochites exilis. Torr and Ashby. T.R.S., S.A.,
p. 218. pi. 7, f. 6.

Hab. — Dredged. Western Port.

Obs. — Size of type: Length. 3; breadth, hum. Dr. Torr has
confirmed our identification, and states tliat '' The whole shell is
much more deeply coloured than the South Australian type, which
is porcelain-white. The Victorian specimen is flesh-coloured
(pinkish yellow), and the dorsal area of the third valve is not so
brightly coloured as ours, yet it gives evidence of a deeper stain
than the rest of the valves." Our single specimen measures 7x3
mm.

BULLINELLA PROTUMIDA, Hedley.

1903. Cylichna protumida. Hedley. Mem. Aust. Mus.. vol.
vol. iv.. p. 396. f. 112.
Hab. — Dredged off Wilson's Promontory.

Obs. — Size of type: Length 5.4: ; breadth, 2.3 mm. May be dis-
tinguished readily from otir other species by its being " inflated
rather suddenly at the anterior third, rounded anteriorly, obliquely
truncated at the vertex.''

BuLLiNELLA PYGMAEA, A. Adams ; var. scuLPi'A. Gatliff and (labriel.
1913. Bullinella pygmaea, A. Adams, vai-. sculpta, Gatliff
and Gabriel. Antea jiagc 69.
Hab. — Same as preceding species.

8() GafUtf (I'lid Gabriel.-

Dkntalium viroula, Hedley.

19().'5. Dentalium virgula, Hedlcy. Mc-iii. Aust. Mns., vol.

iv.. p. 328, f. 62.
1911. Dentalium virgula. Hedley. Verco, T.R.S., S.A.,
vol. XXXV., p. 209.
Hal).— In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Ohs. — Size of type: Length, 10.5; breadth at aperture, 1.1., at
apex 0.62 j diameter (if tube, 0.2 mm. Identitieation confirmed by
us by comparison with tlie type.

Cadulus gibbosus, Verco.

1911. Cadulus (Polyschides) giblx.sus, Verco. T.R.S.,
S.A., vol. XXXV., p. 213, pi. 26, f. 6.
Hab. — Same as preceding species.

Obs. — Size of type : Length, 9.7; greatest diameter 1.8; diam. of
the posterior end, .45; of the anterior end, 1.1 mm. Our speci-
mens are immature, but the identification has been confirmed by
Dr. Verco.

Cadulus spretus, Tate and May.

1900. Cadulus (Gadilia) spretus, Tate and May. T.R.S.,

S.A., vol xxiv., p. 102.

1901. Cadulus spretus, Tate and May. P.L.S., N.S.W.,.

vol. xxvi., p. 420, pi. 25, f. 52.
1903. Cadulus spretus, Tate and May. Hedley, Mem. Aust.

Mus., vol. iv., p. 328.
1908. Cadulus spretus, Tate and May. Suter, Trans., New-
Zealand Inst., vol. xl., for 1907, p. 353.
1911. Cadulus spretus, Tate and May. Verco, T.R.S.,
S.A., vol. XXXV., p. 212.
Hab. — Same as preceding species.

Obs. — Size of type: Length, 5.5; diam. of laiger aperture, .7;.
diam. of the smaller aperture, .3 mm. Tiie type is in the Hobait
Museum.

Caj)ui>u.s axcjustior, Verco.

1911. Cadulus angustior, Verco. T.R.S., S.A., vol xxxv.,
pp. 211 and 218, pi. 26, f. 5, 5a, 5b.
Hab.— Port Albert (T. Worcester).

Obs. — Size of type: Length, 4.6; breadth, .6 mm. Tlie author
has kindly confirmed our identification. Nariower and more-
cylindrical than our other species.

Additions to Catalogue of Slidls. 81

Genus Cuspidaria. Nai-do, 1840.
CUSPIDARIA HRAZIERI, E. A. Smith.

1867. Neaera (Rhinomya) ruj^ata, Angas. P.Z.S., Lond.,

p. 914 (non A. Adams).
1885. Neaera brazieri, E. A. Smith. Chall. Zool., voL

xiii., p. 51, pi. 9, f. 3.
1902. Cuspidaria brazieri, E. A. Smith. Hedley, Mfin.
Aust. Mus., vol iv., p. 312.
Hab. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Obs. — Size: Length, 6; height, 3.66; diameter, 2 mm.

Cuspidaria alta, Verco.

1908. Cuspidaria alta, Verco. T.R.S., S.A., vol. xxiii.,

p. 198, pi. 13, f. 8-11.
1912. Cuspidaria alta, Verco. May, P.R.S., Tas., p. 43.
Hab. — Same as last-narried species.

Obs. — Size of type: Antero-posterior diam., 6.8; umbo-ventral,.
4 mm.

Genus Ectorisma, Tate, 1892.

ECTORISMA GRANULATA, Tilte.

1892. Ectorisma granulata, Tate. T.R.S., S.A., vol. xv.,.
p. 127, pi. 1, f. 3, 3a.

1906. Ectorisma granulata. Tate. Hedley. P.L.S., N.S.W.,.

vol. XXX., p. 539.

1907. Ectorisma granulata, Tate. Hedley, Rec. Aust.

Mus., vol. vi., p. 302.
1911. Ectorisma granulata, Tate. May, P.R.S., Tas., fi)i-^
1910, p. 311.
Hab. — Same as last-named species.

Obs. — Size of type: Antero-posterior diam., 15; umbo-ventral.
11 mm.

Gari menkeana, Reeve.

1856. Psammobia menkeana. Reeve. Conch. Icon., vol. i.,
pi. 6, f. 43.
Hab.— Portsea, Port Phillip.

Obs. — A small species, size of our largest example being : Antero-
posterior diam., 19; umbo-ventral, 10 mm.

82 Gatlif and Gabriel :

Tellina diluta, Smith.

1885. Tellina diluta. Smith. Chall. Zool.. vol. xiii.. p.
108, pi. 4, f. 7-7b.
Hab. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Obs. — Size of type: Length, 8; height, 5; diaiii.. 2.5 mm. A
white shell, concentric striae extending continuously from end to
end.

Chione mesodesma, Quoy and Gainiard.

18."j5. Venus mesodesma, Quoy and Gaimard, Astrolabe,

vol. iii., part 2, p. 532, pi. 84, f. 17, 18.
18-35. Venus spurca, Sowerby. Thes. Concli.. vol. ii.. p.

719, pi. 156. f. 92-98.
1880. Chione mesodesma, Quoy and Gainiard. Hutton,

Man., New Zealand Moll, p. 148.
1885. Venus (Chamelaea) mesodesma. Quoy and Gaimard.

Smith, Chall. Zool., vol. xiii.. j.. 131.
1905. Chione mesodesma. Quoy and Gaimard. Suter, P.

Mai. Soc, Lond., vol. vi., p. 204.

1911. Chione mesodesma, Quoy and Gainiard. Hedley,

Zool., Commonwealth tiawler " Endeavo\ir,"'
part I., p. 100.

1912. Chione mesodesma, Quoy and Gaimard. May,

P.R.S.. Tas., p. 44.

Hab.^ — Dredged off Wilson's Promontory.

Obs. — Similar in appearance to C. gaUiiuda. Lamarck, -wliich
has fine radial sculpture upon and between the concentric lamellae,
a feature absent in the above-named species.

Meretrix regularis, Smith.

1885. Cytherea (Caryatis) regularis. Smith. Chall. Zool.,
vol. xiii., p. 140, pi. 1. f. 8-Sb.
Hab. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Obs. — It is variable in size, ranging fi-om : Length, 5.5; liciglit,
5; diameter, 4 mm., to length 10; height, 9 mm.

Genus Thyasina, Leach, in Lamarck, 1S18.

'J'llYASIRA FLEXUOSA, MoutagU.

1801. Venus sinuosa, Donovan (iion Pennant, 1777).

British shells, vol. ii.. pi. 42. f. 2.
1803. Tellina flexuosa, Montagu. Test. Brit., p. 72.

Additions to Coialogiie of Shells. 83

1815. Telliiia flexuosa, Montagu. Wood, General Condi.,

vol. i., p. 188, pi. 47, f. 7, 8.
1818. Aniphidesma flexuosa, Montagu. Lamarck, A.S.V..

p. 492, who also quotes as a synonym Thyasira

flexuosa, a name communicated to him by Leach.
1825. Tellina flexuosa, Montagu. Wood. Index Test., p.

22, pi. 4, f. 78.
1842. Thyatira flexuosa, Montagu. Soweil)y, Conch. Man.,

2nd ed., p. 274.
1857. Cryptodon flexuosus, Montagu. H. and A. Adams.

Gen. Recent Moll., vol. ii.. p. 469. pi. 114,

f. 2, 2a.
1862. Crypton flexuosus, Montagu. Chenu. Man. Condi..

vol. ii., p. 121, f.-583.
1875. Lucina (Cryptodon) flexuosa, Montagu. Woodward.

Man. Moll., p. 456, pi. 19, f. 7.
1875. Axinus flexuosus, Montagu. Tate. Appendix Id..

p. 72.

1884. Cryptodon flexuosus, Monft. (?). Tryon, Struct.

and Syst., Conch., vol. iii., p. 211, pi. 119, f. 48.

1885. Cryptodon flexuosus, Montagu. Smith. Chall., vol.

xiii., p. 192.
1895. Cryptodon flexuosus, Montagu. Brazier, P.L.S.,

N.S.W., vol. ix., for 1894, p. 725.
1895. Axinus flexuosus, Montagu. Pilsbry, Cat. Marine

Moll, of Japan, p. 133.
1901. Thyasira flexuosus, Montagu. Dall. Proc. U.S. Nat.

Mus., vol. xxiii., p. 784.

1901. Cryptodon flexuosuin. .Montagu. Tate and May,

P.L.S., N.S.W.. vul. xxvi., p. 431.

1902. Axinus flexuosus, Montagu. Hedley. Mem. Aust.

Mus., vol. iv., p. 320.

1903. Thyasira flexuosa, Montagu. Dall, Trans. Wagner

Free Inst., Phil., vol. iii., p. 1339.
1905. Cryptodon flexuosum, Montagu. Murdoch, Trans.
New Zealand Inst., vol. xxvii., for 1904, p. 232.

1911. Thyasira flexuosa, Montagu. Dautzenberg and

Fischer, Jour, de Conch., vol. lix.. p. 42-47.

1912. Thyasira flexuosa, Montagu. Lamy. Bulletin du

Mus. d'Hist. nat., Paris, No. 3, p. 5.
Hab. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninetv Mile Beach.

84 Gatliff and Gabriel:

Obs. — In size the shell attains to about 9x9 mm. Our specimens
are smaller, as also are others from Stewart Island, kindly sent to-
ns by Mr. II. Suter, named Thyasira flexuosa, Montagu. The aiea
of distribution of this species is very wide; it occurs in European.
West Indian, Japanese and Australasian seas. Fossil in European
Neocene and Pleistocene; and Tertiary, Florida, U.S.A.

Very many more references to the species could be cited ; those
given indicate the difficulty that is found in classifying these small
shells, and the difficulty is enhanced when, as in this species, indivi-
dual specimens vary considerably in form and size.

It may be questionable as to whether the name Thyasira, com-
municated by Leach to Lamarck, and attached to a named and
well-known shell, his generic name apparently not having been'
previously published, is sufficient to establish the genus. Lamarck
does not adopt it, but classes it in his genus Amphidesma, where-
it is misplaced.

CUNA EDENTATA Verco.

1908. Cuna edentata, Verco. T.R.S., S.A., vol. xxxii., p..
357, pi., U, f. 1-3.
Hab. — Same as preceding species.

Obs. — Size of type: Antero-posterior, diam., l.G; umbo-ventral,.
1.9 mm. The shell much resembles G. concentrica, Hedley, but that
species has the inner ventral margin crenulated ; in the above species-
it is smooth.

Cuna comma, Verco.

1908. Cuna comma, Verco. T.R.S., S.A., vol. xxxii., p..
357, pi. 17, f. 29-31.
Hab. — Same as last-named species.

Obs. — Size of type: Antero-posterior, diam., 2.6; umbo-ventral.
3.2 mm. Obliquely pyriform. Concentrically ribbed. Inner
ventral raargin smooth.

Cuna concentrica, Hedley.

1902. Cuna concentrica. Hedley. Mem. Aust. Mus., vol.
iv., p. 315, f. 55.

1908. Cuna concentrica, Hedley. Verco, T.R.S., S.A., vol.

xxxii., p. 357.

1909. Cuna concentrica, Hedley. May, P.R.S., Tas., for

1908. p. 54.
Hab. — Torquay.

Additions to C<(t(do(jae of Shells. 85

Obs. — Size of type: Height, 2; length, 1.85 mm. "Without
radial sculpture, but with about forty concentric ribs." Sides
triangular, ventral margin rounded. Equilateral.

CuNA .vrKixsoNi, T. Woods.

1877. Kellia atkinsoni, T. Woods. P.R.S.. Tas., for 1876,
p. 158.

1901. Carditella atkinsoni, T. Woods. Tate and May,

P.L.S., N.S.W.. vol. xxvi.. p. 435, pi. 27, f. 107.

1902. Cuna atkinsoni, T. Woods. Hedley, Mem. Aust.

Mus., vol. iv.. p. 315.
1908. Cuna atkinsoni, T. Woods. Verco, T.R.S., S.A., vol.

xxxii.. p. 354.
1911. Cuna atkinsoni, T. Woods. Hedley, Zool.. Common-
wealth trawler " Endeavour," part I., p. 91.
Hab. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Obs. — Size of type : Height, 3; width, 2 mm. A smooth shell.

■Cuna particula, Hedley.

1902. Cuna particula, Hedley. Mem. Aust. Mus., vol. iv.,
p. 316, f. 56.
Hab. — Same as last-named species.

Obs. — Size of type: Height, 2; width. 2.3 mm. Concentrically
sculptured; an oblique form. Inner ventral margin crenulated.
Compared by us with the type. Our specimens attain to twice the
.size.

•Caudita cavatica, Hedley.

1902. Cardita cavatica. Hedley. Mem. Aust. Mus., vol.
iv.. p. 318, f. 58.
Hab. — Same as last-named species.

Obs. — Size of type : Length, 17; height, 14; depth of single valve,
•6 mm. We have compared our single valve with the type.

"Cardita delicata, Verco.

1908.— Venericardia delicata, Verco. T.R.S., S.A., vol.
xxxii.. p. 351, pi. 16, f. 18, 19.
Hab. — Same as last-named species.

Obs. — Size of type: Antero-posterior. diam., 8.5; umbo-ventral,
7.2 mm.

86 Gatllff <md Gabriel :

NucuLA BEAcnpoKTEXSis, Verco,

1907. Nucula beacliportensis. Verco. T.R.S., S.A.. voL
xxxi., p. 2-] 6. pi. 27, f. 3.
Hab. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Obs. — Size of type: Umbo-ventral, diam., 4.6; antero-poKteiioi-.
4.9 mm. " Is truncated or straight from the end of the hinge tO'
the ventral l)oider." Inner ventral margin minutely crenulate.

Leda fortis, Hedley.

1907. Leda fortis, Hedley. Rec. Aust. Mus.. vol. vi., p. 3(52.
pl. 66, f. 2. 3.
Hub. — Same as last-named species.

Obs.— Size of type: Height, 3.7; length, 4.2; depth of single-
valve, 1.45 mm. " Solid, smooth, nearly equilateral, sub-triangu-
lai-, rather inflated."

Leda miliacea, Hedley.

1902. Leda miliacea, Hedley. Mem. Aust. Mus., vol. iv..

p. 295, f. 43.
1907. Leda miliacea, Hedley. Verco, T.R.S., S.A.. vol.

xxxi., p. 217.
1911. Leda miliacea. Hedley. May, P.R.S., Tas., for 1910,
p. 312.
Hab. — Same as last-named species.

Obs.^-Size of type: Length, 2.25; height, 1.5 mm. A minute
ovate species. Our examples have been compared by us with the
type.

Genus Cyrilla, A. Adams, 1862.

Cykilla dalli, Hedley.

1902. Cyrilla dalli, Hedley. Mem. Aust. Mus., vol. iv.. p.
296, f. 44.
Hab. — Same as last-named species.

Obs. — Size 6f type: Length, 1.2; height, 1.05; depth of single
valve, 0.35 nun. Compared by us with the type.

MoiJioLA LiNEA, Hedley.

1907. Modiola linea, Hedley. Rec. Aust. Mus., vol. vi.,

p. 300, pl. 56, f. 23-25.
1911. Modiola linea, Hedley. May, P.R.S., Tas.. for 1910.

p. 313.

Addlfunis to Cafaloijar of Shdis. 87

Hab. — Same as last-named species.

Obsw — Size of type: Length, 5.75; height, 2.5; depth of single
valve, 0.9 mm. Compared by us with the type.

Ahcopekxa kkcens, Tate.

1897. Arcopenia lecens, Tate. P. Mai. Soc, Lond., vol.
ii., p. IcSl. three figures.

1900. Arcoperna recens, Tate. Hedley, P.L.S., N.S.W.,

vol. XXV., p. 496.

1901. Arcoperna recens, Tate. Tate and May, P.L.S.,

N.S.W., vol xxxvi., p. 439.
Hab. — Same as last-named species.

Obs. — Size of type: Transverse diameter of closed valves, 15;
umbo-post-ventral, 19; antero-posterior, 17; umbo-ventral, 14 mm.

PhILOBRYA PKCTIN.VrA, Hedley.

1902. Philobiya pectinata, Hedley. Mem. Aust. Mus., vol.

iv.. p. .300, f. 46.
1911. Philohrya pectinata, Hedley. May, P.R.S., Tas., for

1910, p. 313.
Hab. — Same as last-named species; also in shell sand, Kilcunda.
Obs. — Size of type: Length, 2; height, 2.5 mm.

Lima murrayi, Smith.

1891. Lima murrayi, Smith. P.Z.S., Lond., p. 444, pi.
35, f. 26.

1905. Limea acclinis, Hedley. Rec. Aust. Mus., vol. vi.,

p. 47, f. 10.

1906. Limea murrayi, Smith. Hedley, Id., p. 223.

1907. Limaea murrayi. Smith. Verco, T.R.S., S.A., vol.

xxxi., p. 315.
Hab. — Same as last-named species.
Obs. — Size of type : Length, 8; height, 12; diameter, 6 mm.

[Proc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.S.), Pt. I., 1913.]

Art. VIII.— 0?i Two New Specien of Chaetogaster.

By olive B. da vies, M.Sc.

(Government Researcb Scholar, Melbourne University).

(With Piute IX).
[Read 12th June, 1918J.

Introduction.

Chaetogaster is a genus of small, transparent worms, living on
certain fresh-water snails, clinging to them by means of a posterior
Sucker, or as is sometimes found, crawling about right in the
pulmonary chamber, into which it has worked it way through the
pulmonary opening.

It does not seem to be confined to any one species of snail ; I
have found it on species of Limnaea, Isidora and on Plaiwrhis
gilherti.

On Planorhis it was quite abundant, and could be seen in the
pulmonary chamber. This is worthy of note, as Dr. Annandale
remarks of C. heyigalensis that he saw " in one instance, in an
aquarium in which snails were somewhat scanty, a solitary worm
attempting to establish itself on a Planorhis ; but the connection
was only temporary, not lasting for more than a few minutes. The
mouth of the shell in this genus is too constricted to be suitable
for the worm, which is generally gregarious." On the other hand
not only, as above remarked, did I find C. australis infesting
species belonging to three genera of fresh water snails, but in some
cases it even preferred Planorhis to either Limnata or hldora, when
all three were present in the one jar.

The fact that the Australian Chaetogaster is found on these three
genera is noteworthy. In Europe it is found on TAmnaea, while
here it is found on Limnaea, Isidora and /^hmorhis. In the same
way in Fasciola the cercariae are found in Europe in Limnaea,
while here they are found in several different genera; there is a
question whether Fasciola has been introduced on some Limnaeae
and spread here to other genera, and the same question, from
analogy, may be raised with regard to Chaetogaster.

According to Beddard the genus Chaetogaster belongs to the
Naidomorpha, a group of Oligochaetes which has already been
recorded from Europe, America and Asia (India); but as far as I

Two Neiv Species of Chaetor/asfer. 80

can ascertain there has been no species of Ciutetogaster hitherto
recorded from Australia. During last year I found some of the
pond snails I was keeping in vessels infested with this small para-
site. These snails came originally from Merri Creek, Weeweerup,
Yackandandah, and Geelong; and it is probable that the parasite
also came from these several localities, as there does not seem to
have been any possibility of infection between the separate jars.
On examination there were found to be two species present. In
most of the jars there was the form I shall describe as Chaetoga^ter
australis, and this was present in very great numbers; but in one
jar (from Merri Creek), and also on some snails in a pond in the
University grounds, parasitic on a species of Isidora (I. texturata),
"were a few specimens of a much large species, which I shall describe
as Chaetogaster victoriensis.

A great deal of the structure of Chaetogaster can be made out
by examining the living animal, as it is very transparent. I also
worked with sections, both transverse and longitudinal, and with
preserved animals, stained and mounted whole. Chaetogaster is
very difficult to kill satisfactorily, as it contracts rapidly and disin-
tegrates very readily. The method I found most successful was to
kill the animal by pouring on to it boiling 70 per cent, absolute
alcohol. This acts as a fixing and preserving agent. I used several
different stains ; the most satisfactory were methyl blue for staining
whilst alive, borax carmine for the specimens mounted whole, and
acetic acid alum carmine for the sections.

Chaetogaster australis, .sp. n.
External Characters.

Length. — The length varies from 0.88 mms. to 1.83 mms. Average
individuals measure about 1.4 mms. The largest measured (1.83
mms.) was almost divided.

The prostomium is circular and sucker-like; this is most clearly
seen in the living animal, which moves along with a looping move-
ment, very much like a leech. The mouth is on the ventral surface;
the anus is terminal. At the posterior end there is no definite
sucker, Ijut the animal seems capable of slightly flattening its body
so as to somewhat resemble one.

The setae are arranged in bundles; typically there is a pair of
bundles of setae in each segment; but after the first pair there is
an interval without any setae; the second pair of bundles is in the
sixth segment. Then they aie arranged regularly, a pair in each
segment, to the posterior end.

90 Olive B. Davies:

Dorsally there are little papillae, each with two or three fine short
hairs; these are piobably sensitive, and are only clearly seen when
the living animal is tieated with some foreign substance such as
methyl blue. Tlii'ie are also a number of coarser hairs round the
anterior and posterior ends.

There is no clitellum.

Asexual reproduction, by means of fission, is a marked charac-
teristic of this animal; but in this species I could find no case of
secondary fission as described in other species.

Segmentation .

Segmentation is marked externally by the setae; there being
typically a pair of bundles of setae in each segment, but the second
bundle marks the sixth segment, there being an asetigerous portion
between the first and second bundle. The posterior segments are
shorter than the anterior, and, consequently, the setae are closer
together.

Internally segmentation is mai-ke<l by the septa, and the ganglia
of the ventral nerve cord. The number of segments varies, as new
ones are constantly being added. Asexual reproduction takes place
in consequence of this. The shortest animal I met with consisted of
eleven segments.

In eighteen specimens examined : —

2 having 19 segments, the line of fission was between 10 and 11

1

,, 15

•i

,, 15

'^

,, 14

6 ,

,, ]'5

1

, 12

1

, 12

1

, 11

11 ,

, 12

0 .

. 10

1> .

. ll>

9 ,

. 10

8 ,

, 9

.as not dividint

The above list seems to point to tlie formation of new segments
OH each side of the line of fission, and not only in the postei'i(M-
segments, though tlie new segments seem to be foi-med more rapidly
at, the ])osterior end.

Setae.

The setae, as has been stated before, are arranged in l)undles. and
there are typically a pair of bundles in each segment. Each bundle
is placed ventro-laterally, and consists of from 8 to 11 setae,
arranged in a semi-circle (Kig. vi. (".), except in tlie first bundle,
which is straight. (Fig. vi. B.) In connection with these setae

Two New /S'pe&ies of Cluietognster. 91

there are strong muscles so arranged that the setae are capable of
rotary movement or up and down, or they caii spread out like a fan.
The setae of the first bundle are longer than those of the others,
being approximately lialf as long again; they are situated at the
level of the pharynx, while the second are at the level of the hinder
end of the crop. Each seta is somewhat / shaped, bifurcated at one
end. with two unequal prongs, and a swelling near the middle.
(Fig. vi. A.) There are no dorsal setae.

Body Cavity:

Tlie body cavity is divided up by the septa into segments. The
septa are more clearly distinguished towards the anterior end, and
by their aid we find the portion without setae consists of three
segments. (Fig. i.). Each septum is very thin, with hei'e and there
a slight swelling caused by nuclei. The first septum is behind the
pharynx, the second at the beginning of the crop, the third and
fourth in the region of the crop, and the fifth at the posterior end
of the crop. (Fig. i.)

I could not see any corpuscles in the body cavity.

All Die lit (try Canal.

The moutli, which is, large and circular, opens on the venti-al
surface; the buccal cavity is somewhat globular anteriorly, but
narrows posteriorly; (Fig. iv. BC) it is lined with indefinite cells
without any clear nuclei, and its walls are very much stiengthened
by muscle bands.

The pharynx (Fig. iv. P.) is a wide tube leading from the buccal
cavity to the oesophagus. Its walls are also very muscular. It
extends back to the third segment.

After this the canal narrows to form the oesopliagus (Fig. iv.O. ;
Fig. i. O.), lying in the third segment. This differs from the pharynx
in being of much smaller size, not so muscular, and in having its
inner lining thrown into more folds. The buccal cavity, pharynx,
and oesophagus are, all three, attached to the body wall by numerous
strong muscle bands.

The canal then, in the fourth, fifth and sixth segments, forms
another dilatation, the crop. (Figs, i and iv. C.) This is about
twice as long as the pharynx, is not attached to the ])ody wall by
well-defined muscle bands, and contains little muscular tissue, but
has little blocks of muscle round the outside of its walls, and is
lined by large distinct glandular cells, with very distinct nuclei and
nucleoli. (Fig. iv. C.)

92 Olive B. JDavies:

The stomach (Fig. i. S.) is marked off from the crop by a very
definite constriction. The stomach and intestine (Fig. i. I.) are not
clearly distinguishable in prepared specimens, but in the living
animal the stomach can be distinguished by its refractive particles.
Their walls are more muscular than those of the crop, and the
lumen miich smaller owing partly to the greater development of tlie
lining cells. These cells are not nearly so distinct as in the crop,
and their nuclei are not so clear. The stomach occupies the seventh
and eighth segments, and the intestine runs from this to the
posterioi^end, where the anus opens to the exterior.

Circiilnfn nj .S' y .s f e m .

The blood is colourless and has no corpuscles. There is a distinct
dorsal contractile vessel running from behind forwards; its pulsa-
tions are very noticeable j\ist about the junction of the oesophagus
and the crop. Here it appears to form a dilatation, and a little
in front of this a vessel runs down either side of the oesophagus, and
the two unite to form a ventral vessel.

Ex ere to nj Si/s teni .

The excretory system consists of paired nephridia. They are con-
stantly found in the seventh and eighth segments (Fig.i. N.), and
often in the tenth and eleventh, and sometimes immature ones more
posterior still. They are not found in the newly-formed segments.
The openings of the nephridia to the exterior are situated imme-
diately in front of the bundle of setae of the same segment. Follow-
ing back from the opening to the exterior, is a diverticulum, and
beyond this a dilatation, then follows a coiled tube, which ends in
a swelling near to the anterior septum of the segment, to which it
seems to be attached by muscle fibres. (Fig. vii. A.)

Nervous St/sfem.

The nervous system consists of a dorsal cerebral ganglion (Fig. i.
C.G.) ; from this nerve conmiissures run round either side of the
alimentary canal to a ventral ganglion. Running from this there
is, typically, a ventral nerve cord (Fig. i., N.C.), with a ganglion
in each segment; but in the anterior segments the nerve cord is
double; and in the asetigerous portion the ganglia somewhat irregu-
lar and ill-defined.

l\vo Neiv Species of ChaetogaHter. 9H

Reproductive Si/stem.

I could not discover any trace of reproductive ort:^uiis in any
specimen I examined. Asexual reproduction is, lioAvcjvur, very
common; in fact, a normal individual without any trace of fission
is not at all common.

Asexual Iteprodaction .

Mr. H. Seddon, L.V.Sc, of the Veterinary School, and Mr. J.
Brake, B.Sc, of the Biology School, were good enough to take some
niicro-photogi-aphs of C. australis during fission, and draAvings from
tliese are reproduced in Figs. viii. to xvi.

Normally, asexual reproduction begins to take place when the
animal consists of about 12 segments. But actual fission does not
take place till more segments have been added on each side of the
line of fission. The process may be artificially hastened, is not
actually brought about by heat, scarcity of water, or treatment with
some foreign material, e.g., methyl blue in small quantities, or some
other water stain, if very dilute solutions are used; if the solution
be too strong, or the water begins to dry up through evavoration too-
quickly, the animal disintegrates at once. This had to be borne in
mind while the photographs were being taken, and plenty of water
given the animals.

The first indication that fission is about to take place, is a thicken-
ing and wrinkling of the body wall about the region of the eighth
segment. At the same time outgro^vths from the ventral nerve
cord grow up either side of the alimentary canal, under the
thickening, about the line of future fission, and finally form a nerve
ring round the alimentary canal. The thickening is at first fairly
wide (Fig. viii.), but later it narrows to form just a line across from
side to side. For a long time the animal remains at this stage,
indicated in Figs, x and xi. ; this almost has the appearance of
disintegration, but the actual animal these photographs were taken
from divided after this stage, and formed two new individuals very
like those represented in Fig. xvi. With regard to the organs, the
canal becomes differentiated to form the new parts of the new indi-
viduals. That is, the intestine of the original individual lengthens,
and finally becomes divided and differentiated to form the whole
canal of one of the new individuals; and the stomach of the original
individual, with a small part of the intestine, lengthens, and finally
becomes stomach and intestine of the second new individual; so for
a time the mouth and the anus of the two new individuals are in

^4 Olive B. Davtes:

■contact. In Figs. xi. and xiv. it seems as if these organs actually
function as such before complete fission takes place.

The nerve ring is formed by the outgrowths from the nerve cord,
which have already been mentioned. New setae are formed very
quickly. I was not able to make out the method of their formation.
The nephridia are not formed until some time later. The portion
between the first two bundles of setae after the line of fission
lengthens out rapidly, and finally after the animal has Ijeen lying
.quiescent for some time, it gives a series of rajDid contractions, and
the two new individuals jerk themselves^ apart.

Figs. xii. and xiii. show an individual in which the line of fission
is narrowing down.

Fig. xiv. shows anotlier individual at tlie stage represented in
Fig. X. This individual also divided afterAvards.

Fig. XV. shows a stage between those represented in Figs. viii. and
ix. Fig. xvi. shoAvs two new individuals immediately after fission.

Chaetogaster victoriensis, sp. n.
External (Characters.

Length. — The length varies from 6 to 9 mms. Average individuals
measure about 8 mms.

The animal is much larger than C. atisfralis: it is less inclined
to disintegrate, contains more segments, and. consequently, the
asetigerous portion seems comparatively shorter.

There is no clitellum.

G. vicforien.s/s, like C. ausfralis, reproduces asexually by fission,
l)ut differs in that in this species secondary fission takes place as a
rule, before the primary fission is complete.

The prostomium is circular, the mouth ventral, the anus terminal.
The setae are arranged in bundles as in C. ausfralis. Thei-e are
some fine hairs round the two ends of the animal.

An average animal consists of about 20 segments. I could find
no individual in this species that had no trace of fission; in fact,
•each specimen not only showed signs of primary fission, but of
secondary as well.

Movement takes place by means of a series of contractions and
expansions Avith the aid of anterior and posterior suckers, someAvhat
like a leech.

The setae are arranged in bundles, and there are typically a pair
of bundles in each segment. Tlierc is also the asetigerous portion
foUoAved by the bundle in the- sixth segment. Eacli bundle consists
of from 5 to 9 setae.

Tlvo New Species of Ch<ietog«ister. 95

Segmentation.

Segmentation is marked externally by the setae, internally by the
septa, nephridia and ganglia of the ventral nerve cord. The number
of segments varies; the individuals I observed consisted of frf)m
16 to 25 segments.

Setae.

The setae of the fii-st bundle are longer than those of the others.
Each seta is of the same general shape as in C. australis, but is
much longer in comparison to the difference in the size of the animals,
and the forked end is much shorter. There are also fewer in each
bundle than in C. australis.

Body Cavity.

Tlie body cavity is divided by the septa into segments. Tlie
septa are more clearly distinguished towards the anterior end. The
first septum is behind tlie pharynx, the second behind the oesophagus,
the sixtli l)e]iind tlie crop, the ninth beliind the stomach. (Fig. ii.)

Alitneiitary Canal.

The mouth (Fig. ii. M.) is large and circular; it is situated on the
ventral surface, and opens into the buccal cavity (Fig. ii. B.C.),
which leads to the pharynx. (Fig. ii. P.)

The pharynx is extremely muscular, and is attached to the body
wall by muscle bands.

The oesophagus (Fig. ii. 0.) is short and narrow, and leads into
a large, thin walled sac, the crop (Fig. ii. C), the walls of which
appear to be only one cell thick.

A well-marked constriction separates the crop and stomach.

The stomach (Fig. ii. S.), lying in the seventh, eighth, and ninth
segments, is l)etter defined than in G. australis: it is a dilatation of
the alimentary canal not so wide as the crop, and narrowing pos-
teriorly to pass into the intestine (Fig. ii. I.), which I'uns to the
anus.

Circulatory System.

The blood is colourless, and has no corpuscles. The course of the
blood vessels is similar to that in C. Australis.

Excretory System.
The excretory system consists of a number of paired nephridia,
and there are typically a pair of those in each segment. (Fig. ii.
N.) They generally commence in about the seventh segment, being

96 Olive B. Davies :

absent in the more anterior ones. From 'this backwards there
appears to be a pair in each segment, except in those segments
across which future fission takes place. Here it would be hard to
distinguish them if they were present, owing to the thickening of
the body wall, and the outgrowths from the ventral nerve cord.

The openings of the nephridia to the exterior are situated imme-
diately in front of the bundles of setae of the same segment; follow-
ing back from this opening is a dilatation, and back from this
a much coiled tube ending in a large swelling. (Fig. vii. B.)

Nervous System.

The nervous system consists of a dorsal bilobed cerebral ganglion
(Fig. iii. C.G.); from this two stout commissures run down either
side of the pharynx, and from a bilobed ventral ganglion (Fig. iii.
A.V.G.); from this the ventral nerve cord (Fig. iii. N.C.) runs down,,
with typically a ganglion in each segment; but in the anterior seg-
ments the ganglia are somewhat irregular, and the nerve cord and
ganglia are double. This is clearly seen in Fig. iii.

Reproductive System.

I could not discover a trace of reproductive organs in any specimen
I examined. The animal reproduces asexually by fission ; but it
seems to be a much slower process than in C. austrolis. Also'
secondary fission before primary is complete seems to be the rule
in this species. (Fig. ii. L.F.2.)

It is doubtful whether these species of Chaetogaster are truly
parasitic. In some individuals small crustaceans were found in the
alimentary canal, but in others it Avas almost empty. The fact that
specimens were found in the pulmonary chamber also indicates that
there may be another mode of nutrition. It certainly seemed tcv
cause the death of a great many snails in my vessels; but this may
have been due to suffcation by the blocking up of the pulmonary
chamber and its opening by the worms. Some of the European
species are said to be internal parasites, but most others seem to use
the snail more as a means of progression and as a shelter.

(J. australis appears to most resemble G. hengalensis. It differs
from it in the number of its setae in each bundle, and their
different arrangement; in its much smaller size and in several minor
characteristics; C austratis also has a preference for crawling right
into the pulmonary chamber of the snail rather than staying oi>
the outside.

Two New Species of Chaelixjastt

9:

C. vicforiensis appears very different. It reseinhU's C pelhtcidus
and C. punjahensis, etc., in secondary fission. It i.s niucli larger
tlian C punjahensis, and a little larger than C. pellncidus, being
nearest C. hcngalensis in this respect.

A very marked feature in C. vicforiensis. is the fact that the
anterior portion of the nervous system is completely double (this is
clearly seen by reference to Fig. iii.). while in C. ausfralis only
the cord itself is double.

In C. victoriensis I could not see any of tlic dor.sal papillae and
hairs as in C. australis. Both C. australis and C. victoriensis
resemble C. fliformis in the absence of the dilatations of the-
oesophagus.

I should now like to thank Professor Spencer and Di'. Hall, under
whom this work has been undertaken, for all their help and advice.

LITEKATUKE.

Annandale, Nelson. — " Notes on an Indian Worm of the Genus-
Chaetogaster," Journ. of the As. 8oc. of Bengal. 1. 4, 19U5.

Beddard, F. E.— " A Monog. of the Order of Oligochaeta," 1895.

Stephenson, Major J. — " Description of an Oligochaete Worm allied
to Chaetogaster," Rec. Ind. Mus., vol i., pi. ii., Aug., 1907,
p. 133. " Desciiption of two freshwater Oligochaete Worms.
from the Punjab," Rec. Ind. Mus., vol. i., pi. iii., Oct.,.
1907, p. 233.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

In all

figures :

;—

A.

Anus.

A.V.G.

Anterior ventral ganglion.

B.C.

Buccal cavity.

C.

Crop.

C.G.

Cerebral ganglion.

C.T.

Coiled tube.

Com.

Commissure.

I.

Intestine.

L.F.

Line of fission.

L.F.I.

Primary line of fission.

L.F.2.

Secondary line of fission.

M.

Mouth.

Mus.

Muscle.

98 Oiive B. Davies : New Species of Chaetoyader,

N. Nephridium.

N.C. Nerve cord.

N^C.O. Outgrowth from nerve cord.

N.G. Nerve ganglion.

N.O. Opening of nephridia to the exterior.

O. Oesophagus.

P. Pharynx.

S. Stomach.

Sp. Septum.

Fig. i. C. australis (living animal).

Fig. ii. C. victoriensis (living animal).

Fig. iii. C. victoriensis, head.

Fig. iv. C. australis, longitudinal section of anterior

portion.

!A. Typical seta. B. An-
terior group of setae.
C. A typical group of
setae.
Fig. vii.a. C. australis, nephridium.

Fig. vii.b. C. victoriensis, nephridium.

Figs, viii.-xi. C. australis, different stages in the division of

an individual A.
Figs, xii.-iiii. C. australis, division of an individual B.

Figs. liv.-xvi. C. australis, stages in the division of three in-

dividuals C, D, E.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 1913. Plat*« IX.

[Proc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.S.), Pt. I., 1913].

A HI'. IX. — New or Llttle-knoivn Victorian Fossils in the
National Mtiseam.

Pakt XVI. — 80MK SiLUKiAN Braciiiopoda.

By FREDEIUCK CHAPMAN, A.L.S., F.ll.M.S.

(Palaeontolof^ist to the Museum).

(With Plates X. and XI).
[Read 12th June, 1913].

Introduction.

The fauna of the Victorian Silurian strata includes a rich assem-
blage of brachiopods; and although the number in this group,
together with the present contribution, now amounts to about 60
species, yet probably not more than half has been described.

A selection of the better preserved specimens has been studied,
.and the results, given herewith, help to show how interesting is the
Australian Silurian fauna compared with that of other widely
separated areas. One feature of the present series is the marked
Devonic element found in the otherwise Wenlockian or newer
.Silurian facies of our Yeringian mudstones.

Amongst the more noticeable points brought out by the present
work is the presence of a denticulate hinge in Leptaena rhomhoi-
■dalis, especially in shells of the younger or neanic stage, a struc-
ture hitherto unknown in this genus. The wonderfully well-
preserved impression of the brachial arms in the same species of
Leptae?ia is also figured and described here for the first time from
Australian rocks; and the brachial supports of one of the specimens
tends to show affinity with the chonetine structures in similar valves

• of the Productidae.

For some of the fossiliferous material included in the piesent
■paper the writer is indebted to Mr. W. S. Dun, F.G.S., of Sydney,
who, some years ago undertook to describe Mr. G. Sweet's collection

• of Silurian fossils, but who, after my arrival in Australia, generously
and insistently passed on the collection to be worked out in tlie
National Museum ])y myself. Consequently upon this, Mr. S\vt'"t

'-iias consented to donate the <lescril;ed specimens as they are dealt
with from time to time.

100 Frederick Cliapmaa :

List of genera and species herein described : —
Siqjhotwtrtta jdicafelhi, sp. nov.
Crania pulcJielloides, sp. nov.
Leptaena rhomboidalis, Wilckens sp.
Lepfaena rhomboidalis, var. undata, McCoy.
CJiotietes hipartita, sp. nov.
Gonchidium knighfii, J. de C. Sowerby
Clorinda linguifera, Soav. sp. var. wilkiii.so)ii, Etheridge fil'..
Gyjndula victoriae, sp. nov.

Atrypa reticularis, Linne sp., var. decurrens, var. nov.
Atrypa aspera, Schlotheim sp.
Atrypa fimhriata, sp. nov.
Cyrtina suh-hiplicata, sp. nov.
Spirifer lilydaleiisis, sp. nov.

SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTION OF THE FOSSILS..
Class Brachiopoda.

Fam. SiPHONOTRKTIDAE.

Genus Siphonotreta, de Verneuil.

Siphonotreta plicateMa, sp. nov. Phite X., figs. \a-c.

Description. — Pedicle valve subrectangular. transverse; posterior
margin broadly convex, cardinal angles rounded; anterior margin-
nearly straight, with a median sinns. Pedicle opening close to-
posterior margin, apical, and communicating with a short, open
channel directed anteriorly; a median wrinkle denotes the position
of the underlying pedicle tube. Shell folded into three areas, two-
postero -lateral depressed-convex areas, and an anterior median and
sunken area. Surface ornament consisting of concentric laminar
folds and vertical striae; the latter probably representing remnants
of short, spinous processes; also a few corroded and broken tubular
cavities with jagged edges pointing to the former presence of several
long spines.

Measurements. — Holotype. Length, .'5.5 mm.; widtli, 5 mm.;
height, approxinuitely, 1 nun.

OhHervations. — The present species is definitely placed in the
above genus, Siphonntrefa, on account of the apical foramen and
spinous character of tht' sliell. Tlie transvi-rse rhaiarter of the out-
line is someAvhat peculiar for Sip/io/iufrtfd, ))ut tliis may lie almost
matched in some varieties of .S'. oiisfraJi.s, Chaiunan,! from the

1 Proc. Kov. Soc. Viftoiia, vol. xvi. (ii.s.), pt. i., 19ua, pp. (ifi, 00, pi. x., fi^s. 7, S, 13; pi. xi.,.
ftiJ- 1-

Victorian Fos^'Us, Part XVI. 101

.■Silurian (Melbouiniaii) of Suutli Yaii;i. Vittniiji. In (lutliue
S. plicatella very nearly resembles Bai raiidL's " Dixvnxi " pJivo^aS
from stages F and O (Lower Devonian) of Hranik and Konieprus in
Bohemia. Tliat form, liowevei'. is a true Or}>iculoidea, having a
posterior foramen, as well as merely finely concentric ornament.

Occurrence. — Silurian (Yeringian). In grey nnidston'e : Van
Y'ean, Victoria. Presented by A. J. Shearsby, Esq.. F.H.M.S.

Fam. Craniidae.

(xenus Crania, Retzius.

Crania piilc]iell()i<jfx, sp. nov. Plate X., figs. 2a, h.

Description. — Slieil small, subpentagonal, slightly wider than
long (length measured post-anteriorly). Free valve depressed limpet-
shaped ; the apex situated a little towards the posterior margin.
Posterior margin short, straight, rather sharply angulated at the
extremities; thence the margin slopes steeply towards the rounded
and broad anterior margin. Surface of free valve furrowed with
concentric growth-lines and depressions, and having a variable
series of moderately-fine radial riblets converging to the apex.
Between the primary sharp and salient riblets there is a second
system of fine striae, commencing some distance from the vertex, and
extending to the margin of the valve.

Measurements. — Length, 4.5 mm. ; width. 5.25 nim. ; approximate
height, 2.5 mm.

Observations. — Undoubtedly the nearest allied form to the above
is Crania pulchella, Hall and Clarke, ^ a species occurring in the
Lower Heidelberg, near Clarksville, New York State. The shell
is larger and more rotund in outline than C. pulchelloiffes. None
of the British species appear to approach the Australian form liere
described.

Occurrences. — Found occasionally in the Silurian ( Yci-iiigian)
mudstone in the neighbourhood of Lilydale. Holotype (from Rud-
dock's Quarry) presented by W. J. Parr. Esq.

Fani. STU()PHO>rEXiDAK.

Genus Leptaena, Dahnan.

Lejjfaena rhonihoi(Iali>i. Wilckens sp. Plate X., rtgs. 3-7.

Conchitts rhoniboidalis, \Vilckens, 1769, Xachricht von seltenen
Versteinerungen, vorziiglich des Thierreichs, p. 79, pL viii., figs.

1 Syst. Sil. Boheme, vol. v., 1879, pi. ci., figs, ii., 1-7.

2 Pal. N. York, vol. viii., Pal. Brach., pt. i., 1892, p. 180, pi. ivH., fig. 3.

] 02 Frederick Cluqyman :

43, 44. Leptaeva c/epresso, Sowerby, 1839, in Murchison's Silurian
System, pp. 623. 636, pi. xii., fig. 2. Strophomena rliomhoidalis,
Wilckens sp., Davidson, 1871, Mon. Sil. Brach (Pal. Soc), pt. vii..
pt. vii., No. 4, p. 281, pi. xxxix., figs. 1-21 ; pi. xliv.. fig. 1. Leptaena
(Leptagonia) rhonihoidalis, Wilckens sp., McCoy, 1877, Prod. Pal.
Vict., Dec. v., p. 19, pi. xlvi.. fig. 1.

Observafio?is. — As McCoy has remarked, the Victorian specimen*
of L. rhomhoidaliff show no difference from the European examples,
and exhibit the same variable characters. The species is a very
abundant fossil in certain of the mudstone facies of the newer or
Yeringian division of the Victorian Silurian, some fossiliferou^
blocks being quite crowded with their remains to the exclusion of
other shells. Three very interesting examples of this species having
an important bearing on the phylogenetic relationship of this group,
were discovered in the mudstone at Loyola, near Mansfield, by Mr.
Geo. SAveet, F.G.S., and these are described below.

JS'ote on (I specimen of Leptaena rhomhoidalis showing striate
devticulafions on the cardinal area. (Plate X., fig. 3.)

Hitherto the hinge-line of Leptaena depressa has been held to
have a non-denticulate character. Amongst the well-preserved casts
of this shell in the Sweet collection, however, there is one specimen
in the n^anic stage, ^ 13.75 mm. wide, showing the cardinal line,
especially on the portions nearest to the cardinal process of the
opposed biachial valve, to have fine but well-marked linear ridges
normal to the hinge margin.

In Hall and Clarke's summary of characters in the genus
Leptaena"^ those authors say " Cardinal area narrow, slightly wider
on the pedicle valve, not denticulate." It is conceivable that these
denticulae now recorded may be only partially calcified as a rule,
and thus similar to other structures only occasionally seen in this
genus, such as the spiral brachia, and the striated muscular areas,
and that the process of fossilisation more often tends to their disap-
pearance than to their preservation. Another reason to be assigned
for this denticulate structure hitherto escaping observation is that
tlie usual condition of the matrix is more or less calcareous, and this
tends towards a secondary mineralisation of the fossil body; whereas
the mudstone of th^ Victorian Silurian lends itself admirably to
the preservation of delicate organic structures such as this. In
fact, the fine, oozey mud which was laid down in those times was to

1 That ia, a young; form developing;' the adult characters of the bhell.

2 Pal. N. York, vol. viii., Pal. Brachiopoda, pt. i., 1892, p. 277.

Victorian Fossils, Part XVI. 103

all intents and purposes comparable to a colloid substance, and took
an instantaneous impression of the intricate structural features of
the organism before they became deteriorated l)y agents of decay.

Nofe on a hrachial rdlrr of I.('pt<itii(t r/ioni/ioidalis showing well-
preserved impressions of the hrac/iial spiralia.
(Plate X., tigs. 4, 5.)

This shell is in the early neanic stage, and measures only 5 mm.
in length by 7.5 mm. in width. It represents the interior of a
brachial valve with the fleshy spiralia strongly impresesd on the
surface. The positive form of the spiralia is seen in the wax impres-
sion. It shows them to have been apparently diplospiral,! but of
few convolutions, the apices directed to the front (ventrally) and
slightly outwards. That this specimen is the interior of a brachial
valve and not merely the impi'ession in mudstone is evident from
the fact that true shell structure is present by the distinct perforations
all over ithe internal surface. The cardinal area is very distinctly
crenulate, more strongly so than in the neanic form herewith figured
to illustrate this new character in Leptaena (Fig. 3). These points
tend to support the suggestion here brought forward that the
denticulate hinge character disappears with age and shell-develop-
ment, owing perhaps to the greater strength acquired in later stages
by the formation of the dental lamellae adjacent.

The form of the spiralia, so clearly demonstrated by a wax
impression, is even more definite than in the beautiful example of
the Gothland specimen figured by Davidson. 2 Moreover, in our
example the spires are seen to l)e attached directly to the crura at
the posterior end of the septum.

Note on a brachial valve of Lepfaena rhomhoidalis shovinr/ brachial
markings or sujiporfs. (Plate X.. figs. 6, 7.)

This specimen, discovered by Mr. Sweet, is also, as in the former
example, in the neanic stage. It is a very faithful mud-cast of the
interior of the brachial valve. The crenulation of the cardinal
area is very distinct. The septum is well developed, extending
nearly the whole length of the sliell. The bases of the brachial sup-
ports follow the general trend of the spiralia, but show a curious
angularity of outline towards the anterior margin ; a character

1 A double spire formed liy the continuity of the bifurcated juguni with the convolutions of
the spire. In this particular case the contiiuiation of the jufjal processes was probably of a
chitinous nature. •

•2 Op. cit., pi. xxxix., fijr. 16.

104 Frederick GhapriKin :

seen in Chonetes and Sfrophnlosin, to -wliicli tliis peuns, at least in
its young stages, shows marked affinities. It is nioru tliun pinljable
from the above structural features that Leptaeua is of a more
advanced type of the Strophomenidae, which shows retrogressive
tendencies in its later development.

Occurrence. — The above species, L. rhoinhoUJalh, has l:)een
recorded from one doubtful Melbournian locality, Eraser's Creek,
Springfield; otherwise, it is restricted in Victoria to the Yeringian
stage, occurring at Lilydale, Croydon, Loyola and the Thomson
River. It also occurs in the passage beds (between Melbournian and
Yeringian) at Whittlesea.

The unique specimens showing the spiralia and brachial supports,
as well as the example with finely denticulate hinge-line, were found
by Mr. Geo. Sweet, F.G.S. at Loyola, near Mansfield, who has
presented them to the Museum.

Leptaena rhomboidalis, Wilckens sp. ; var. un data,. McCoy.

Orthis undata, McCoy, 1846, Syn. Sil. Foss., Ireland, p. 136, pi.
iii., fig. 1. Lejytaena deltoidea Conrad, var. undata, McCoy, 1852,
Brit. Pal. Foss., p. 234, pi. IH.. figs. 38, 39. Strophomena
deltoidea, Conrad sp., var. undafa, McCoy, Davidson, 1871, Mon.
Sil. Brach. (Pal. Soc), pt. vii.. No. 4, p. 295, pi. xxxix., figs. 23,
24. L. rhomboidalis, Wilckens sp. var. undata. McCoy, Chapman,
1907, Vict. Nat., vol. xxii., p. 239.

The characteristic ripple-surfaced shell of the above form is met
with in various stages of development, from 35 to nearly 100 nnn.
in width, in the Victorian Silurian. It appears to keep tolerably
distinct from L. rhomhoidalis by its more transverse shape, larger
size and irregular and persistently wrinkled surface; and it may
therefore be regarded as a tolerably well-marked variety of L. rhom-
hoidalis

Occurrence. — Silurian (Yeringian). Loyola, near Mansfield, in
hard, brown and grey mudstone. Collected by Geo. Sweet, Esq.,
F.G.S.

Fam. PiJourcTiDAK.

Geiiu.s Chonetes, Kischer.

(']ioiietf!< hipartita. sp. iiov. Plate X., figs. 8-10.

Descri pt'ioii . — Slic'll small, si'niicircular or t raiisviTsc. Pedicle
valve strojigly convex; median aii-a conspicuously arelicd and
medially sukate ; l)eak ])rominent; area. on either side of median

Victorian Fossils, Fart XVI. J05

ridge depressed and concave towards the cardinal extremity. Hinge
line straight, extremities acute and more or less extended; anterior
margin regularly and bioadly rounded. Brachial valve concave,
with two divergent folds or flexures of the shell-surface. Surface
of both valves punctate, bearing about 30 thin radial riblets with
fine intermediate striae near the anterior border.

Measurements. — Pedicle valve (Cotype) : Length, .'5.5 iniii. ; widtli.
5.25 mm. Another example (Paratype) : Length, 4.5 nuii. ; width.
8 mm. Brachial valve (Cotype) : Length, 3.25 mm. ; width, 5.5 mm.

Observations. — This neat little species belongs to the section of
the genus styled Plicosae, having not more than 30 riblets. It
agrees to some extent with the Wenlock species, Chonetes minima,
Sowerby sp.,i but differs to a marked extent in the median division of
the umbonal ridge, and by having a generally Avider or more
transverse shell. The " Leptaena " winiina referred to by Prof.
McCoy on quarter sheet No. 4 S.W. locality Bb 20. Kilmore Cieek.
probably related to this or an allied species.

Occurrence. — Silurian (Yeringian). Common in the nmdstone of
Ruddock's Quarry, near Lilydale; and at the Geol. Surv. locality
Bb 16, at Simmonds' Bridge Hut on the Yarra.

Fam. Pentameuidae.

Genus Conchidium, Linne.

Conchidium kniyhtii, J. de C. Sowerhy, .sp. Plate XI., tig. 11.

Pentamerus knightii, Sowerby, 1813, Min. Conch., vol. i., p. 7.3.
pi. xxviii. Idem, 1839, in Murchison's Silurian System, p. 615.
pi. vi., figs. Sa-c. Davidson, 18GT, Mon. Sil. Brach. (Pal. Soc).
vol. XX., p. 142, pi. xvi., figs. 1-3; pi. xvii., figs. 1-10; pi. xix., fig.
.3. Etheridge, R., jnr., 1892, Rec. Geol. Surv., N.S.Wales, vol. iii..
pt. 2, p. 54. pi. X., figs. 1-6; pi. xi.. figs. 1-4.

Observations. — This fossil is not uncommon in the Silurian sand-
stones of Heathcote, Victoria. The examples are mostly in tlu'
condition of internal casts of the shell, but where the outer sIr-II
ornament is preserved the characteristic costatiou is seen.

Mr. Etheridge records this species from various localities in New
South Wales, in strata of Silurian age, which he calls the " Peur
tamerus Limestones," and remarks on the fact of its being a
characteristic fossil of the Aymestry Limestone in Wales and the
W^est of England, occurring sparingly in the underlying Weiiloek
and the overlying Upper Ludlow.

1 Leptaena ininhna, Sowertiy, in Murchison's Silurian System, 1S39, pi. xiii., figs. 4, 4a.

106 Frederick Chapinan:

Its occin'reiico in Victoria is iiitorestiii'j, as it seems ronfiiied
to the Melbouniiau sta^e of tlie Sihii'ian rocks.

OccuJ'reiice. — Silurian (Melbournian). Heathcote. From th©
(^eol. Surv. Coll. Bb oO " Kanges E. of Heathcote," and Bb 51 " Mt.
Ida, N. of Heathcote."

(Jenus CiOPinda, Barrande.
Clnrindd Vni<in\fcra, Sow. sp., var. iriIkiii>>oin , Eth. fil.

PentamernH liiif/iiifer. J. de C. Sinverbv, Etheridge, R., jnr.,
1892, Records Geol. Surv.. N. S. Wales, vol. iii., pt. 2, p. 52, pi. xi.,
figs. 5-9.

Observations. — Two specimens, rather crushed, but still showing
the characters of the above variety, were collected by the early
Geological Survey of Victoria from " sect. xii. Parish of Taring, "
a locality west of the present Yering railway station. The specimens
were tableted and labelled " Pentcnnerns " by Sir F. McCoy.

The variety wilhinsoni differs from the specific form, according
to Mr. Etheridge. 1 " in its peculiarly flattened ventral sulcus, and
otlier minor characters. As before said, it seems to occupy an inter-
mediate position between F. linr/vifer and P. globosus."

Both Victorian specimens are ventral valves, and, although
deformed by pressure, the anterior margin is sufficiently (distinct to
show the broad ventral sulcus mentioned by Etheridge as a character
of his N. S. Wales variety. This variety occurs in N. S. Wales in
the Bowning Series (the Lower Limestones and the Lower Trilobite
Bed), and in the Silurian of Hatton's Corner, Yass.

Occurrence. — Silurian (Yeringian). Geol. Surv. Coll. Sect, xii..
Parish of Yering (W. of Yering railway station).

Genus Gypidula, J. Hall.

Gypidnlii ricforiae, sp. nov. Plate XT., fig. 12.

Description. — Shell sub-pentagonal or broadly ovate. Ventral
valve very tumid, with the beak strongly incurved; mesial fold
broad, elevated, commencing about one-third from the beak and
extending to the anterior margin, and medially sulcated. Biachial
valve almost fiat or gently convex in the median area, curving back-
wards towards the anterior margin; with a broad mesial sinus
bearing a distinct median plait extending from the hinge to the
anterior margin. Numerous concentric growth-lines on both valves.

1 Loc. cit., p. 33.

Victorian F<h^sils, Part XVL 107

Cardinal aspect of shell similar to Davidson's figure 21r/. of Gi/ji/r/ula
(" Pe7itamerus ") galeata, Dalman sp..i but more strongly, although
simply, plicate.

Measurements. — Length of shell (l)eak to anterior), 19 nnn. >
width, 21.5 mm. Greatest depth of l)rachial valve. 5.25 mm. ; ditto
of ventral valve, 12 mm.

Observations. — The above species is represented by a perfectly
preserved cast of the shell, which, as it still retains the minute
characters of the growth-lines, must l)e regarded as superficially
replacing part of the shell itself.

Gypidula victoriae is closely related to Q. galeafd, Dalman sp.,-
a characteristic Silurian fossil having an extensive vertical range.
The latter is found in the Wenlock and Ludlow in England ; the
Gotlandian in Scandinavia; the newer Silurian in Bohemia; lower
Helderberg in the United States; the Devonian of the Ural Moun-
tains; and in the Middle Devonian of the Eifel, Germany.

The chief differences between the Australian and the other widely
distributed species are, the greater gibbosity of the umbo of the
ventral valve; the comparative flatness of the brachial valve; and
the vellicate or pinched-up character of the plications, with a cor-
respondingly strong flexure of the sinus and fold of the median area.
That this Australian species is clearly referable to Gypidula, J.
Hall, and not to Sieherella, Oehlert, is shown by the discrete
character of the septum in the brachial valve seen in the present
specimen .

Occurrence. — Silurian (Yeringian). In mudstone, near Lilydale
(Ruddock's Quarry). Collected and presented by W. J. Parr, Esq.

Fam. Atrypidae.

Genus Atrypa, Dahnan.

Atrypa reticularis, Liniie sp., var. decvrrens. var. nov.

Plate XL, fig. L3.

Description. — Shell sub-circular to long ovoid; ventral valve
depressed, brachial valve tumid in the median area, but not so
ridge-like as in typical examples of A. imhricata. Ornament con-
sisting of radiating riblets crossed by conspicuous concentric lamellar
folds.

1 Mon. Sil. Brach. (Hal. Soc), pt. vii., No. 2., 186:, pi. xv., fi),'. eia

2 Atrijpa gateata, Dalman, Kongl. Vetensk. Acad. Handlin^ar, 1S27, p. 130. Pentamerxts
qaleatus, Dalman sp., Davidson, Mon. Sil. Brach. (Pal. Soc), pt. vii.. No. 2, 1867, p. 145, pi. xv.
fists. 13-23.

;108 Frederick Chapman:

Observations. — The Victorian specimens here ascribed to a new
varietyi are midway between A. reticularis, L. sp., and .-1. imhri-
cata, Sow. sp.2. Although possessing the strong imbricating
lamellae of A. iinhricata, the well-marked fold and sinus so charac-
teristic of Sowerby's species is in most of the Victorian examples
nearly absent. In a few specifnens the latter feature is conspicuous
and more pronounced than in the type form A. reticularis, in whicli
the median area is broadly rounded and Avidely concave respectively.
The relationship of the variety decurrens to A. reticularis is seen
in the more acute and well-pronounced i-iblets and elongate form as
compared with A. imhricata.

Occurrence. — Silurian (Yeringian). In mudstone; Loyola, near
Mansfield. Collected and presented by G. Sweet, Esq., F.G.S. Also
at Yering, Tapper Yarra, Victoria. Geol. Surv. Coll.

Atrypa aspern., Sclilotheim sp. Plate XI., Fig. 14.

Terebratula aspera, Schlotheim, 1813, Leonhard's Taschenbuch,
p. 74, pi. i., fig. 7; and Petrefactenkunde, 1820, pt. i., p. 263; pt.
ii., 1822, p. 68, pi. xviii., fig. 3. Atrijpa aspera, Schloth, sp..
Dalman, 1827, Uppstallring och Beskrifning af de i Sverige funne
Terebratuliter ; Kongl. Vetenskaps Acadamiens Handlingar fiir an
1827, p. 128, pi. iv., fig. 3. Atrypa reticularis, L. sp., var. aspera,
Schloth., Davidson, 1865, Mon. Dev. Brach (Pal. Soc). pt. ii., p. 57.
pi. X., figs. 5-8.

Observations. — in common with other components of the rich
Yeringian fauna of Victoria, tliis species is typical of the Devonian
elsewhere, both in N. Amei'ica and in England, and on tlie Con-
tinent. In N. America A. aspera var. occidentalis. Hall, occurs in
the Middle Devonian (Hamilton Shales); whilst the typical species
is found associated with Atrypa reticularis in the Middle Devonian
Limestone of Devon and Cornwall. A curious lithological factor in
regard to the distribution of this and the related foini, A. reticu-
laris, may here be noted, namely, the prevalence of A. aspera in the
mudstones and of A. reticularis in the limestones, of the Yei'ingian
"stage; although l)oth forms are occasionally found irrespectively of
lithological conditions. Tliis species has already Iteen noted from
both the Silurian and Devonian of Victoria by McCoy, who regarded
it as a variety of A. reticularis.^

1 The name decurreng denotes a decleiisiuii towards A. imbficata.

2 Terebratula imbricata, Sowerby, 1839, in Mui-chison's Silurian System, pi. xiii., t\<^. 27.
Atrypa imbricala, Sowerby sp., Davidson, Jlon. Sil. Hrach. (I'.al. Soo.), pt. vii.. No. 1, \SiS7, \h Vi'',
pi. XV., figs. 3-8.

3 Prod. Pal. Victoria, dec. v., 1877, p. •-'«.

Victorian Fossils, Part XVI. lOQ-

Occurrence. — Silurian (Yeringiaii). In imulstone at Loyola,
near Mansfield; eoUected and presented by Mi-. (i. Sweet, F.G.JS.
Atrypa aspera also occurs in the Middle Devonian limestone of
Bindi, Gippsland, Victoria, specimens of Avhich. in the National
Miisfuni collection, Avere collected many years ago by Dr. A. W.
Howitt.

Atrypa Jlinb I id.in sp. nov. Plate XI., Fig. 15.

Description. — Shell, suborbicular, inflated. Brachial valve highly
convex in the median and cardinal regions, suddenly descending to-
a concave and outspread anterior margin, the edge of which is
ornamented with numerous outspread and irregularly disposed
spines. Surface of value with 4 or 5 strong, sharp, concentric
ridges, crossed by radial ribs, and forming nearly rectangular
interspaces which are conspicuously excavated. The marginal
spines, which are continuous with the radial ribs, are of variable
length and variously directed, this latter feature probably owing
to pressure. The type specimen is a well-preserved cast in which the
.shell seems to have been replaced by iron oxide.

Measurements (Holotype). — Length of shell to bases of spines, 16
nnu. ; width, 18 mm. Length of longest spine about 7 mm.

Observations. — This handsome species bears some relationship to-
two other forms of Atrypa, viz., A. hystrix, J, Hall.i and A. spinosa,
J. Hall. 2 In ^4. hystrix the ribs are folded into tubular spines,
mostly disposed round the margin of the shell, as in the present
species; but the radials are not sharply defined, leaving concave
areas in the interspaces between the concentrics and radials.
(»n the other hand, in A. spinosa the shell is beset all over with
spines, covering two-thirds of the total shell growth. Both A. hystrix
and A. spinosa occur in much higher horizons than the present
species; the former being found in the Chemung Group (Upper
Devonian). the second in the Hamilton Gi-oup (Middle Devonian),
r>f N. America.

Occurrence. — Silurian (Yeringian). In mudstone; near Lily-
dale. Specimen collected and presented V)y \\. H. Annear, Esq.

Fam. Spiriferidae.

Genus CyPtina, Davidson.

Cyrtina snti-tiipJicata. sp. nov. Plate XL, figs. \^a-c.

Description. — Shell small, sub-triangular. Pedicle valve with a
high, triangular and arched cardinal area; remnants of the deltidial

1 See Hall and Clarke, Pal. N. York, vol. viii., Crachiopoda, pt. ii., 1894, pi. h ., fljf. 23.

2 See lidem, ibid., pi. Iv., figs. 21, 22.

110 Frederick Chapvian :

plates or dental lamellae are seen attached to the sides of the cardinal
area of the shell. A narrow slit-like depression, at the base of which
the foramen was situated, is seen in the upper third of the deltidial
area. Area on either side of the delthyrium transversely striate.
Anterior margin of the pedicle valve irregularly flexuose. Cardinal
extremities of valve blunt. Shell smooth, excepting for a few con-
'Centric, lamellar folds and the sharply plicate margins of the sinus,
the latter being deeply sulcate.

Measurements. — Holotype : Length, 6 nun.; width, 9.75 mm.;
length of hinge area, 3.5 mm.

Observafio?is. — The nearest related form to the above is James
Hall's C. hiplicata,^ a Lower Devonian species, which occurs in the
■Corniferous Limestone (Upper Helderberg) of Michigan, and in the
Schoharie Grit of Schoharie, N. York (base of Upper Helderberg
'Group).

The present species differs in its blunt cardinal extremities and
more deeply sunken sinus of the pedicle valve.

Occurreyice. — Silurian (Yeringian). In brown mudstone at Rud-
•dock's Quarry, near Lilydale. Collected and presented by J. S.
'Green, Esq.

Genus Spir'ifer, Sowerby.
Sjjirifer lih/daleiisis, sp. nov. Plate XI., figs. 17, 18.

Description. — Shell referable to the .S'. sub-orb icularis type; that
is, " with sub-orbicular outline, broad, low and usually lateral
plications; the median plications are few and indistinct.''- Shell
almost equally convex, with rounded to salient cardinal extremities.
The pedicle valve is strongly curved towards the prominent beak ;
mesial sinus deeply excavate and feebly plicated, especially near
the anterior margin, the margins of the sinus more or less ridge-
like. The brachial valve bears a broad mesial fold, which is con-
spicuously, longitudinally striated. The general shell-surface is
finely striated by delicate radial lines, and the shell is irregularly
set off concentrically by a few lamellar growth-lines. Radial ribs
rounded and gently curved; tliey number from 8 to 10 on each side
of the fold and sinus.

Mcdtiiirciiieiifs. — A Itrachial valve (coty])e) : Length (anterior
iii.iigiii to beak), 19.5 nun. ; widtli, .30.5 mm. .\ ventral valve
(cotyp(>): Lengtli, U mm.; width, 22 mm.

1 See Hall and Clark, Pal. N. York, vol. viii., I'al. Hnuli., pt. ii., 1S9-1, pi. \xviii., fij>s 7-9.

2 Hall arifl Clarke, Pal. N. York, vol. viii., I'al. Hr.icli., pt. ii., 1894, p. Hi.

Victorian Fossi/s, Part XFI. Ill

Observations. — Tliis spirifer has marked chtiracters of its own
which make it easily separable from tlie other Victorian Silurian
spirifers, namely, S. plicatellus, L. sp., var. macropleura, Conrad;
S. sulcatus, Hisinger, sp. ; and .S'. 7;f/7fl7;?e//os«s, J. Hall, var.
densilineata, Chapm. The nearest related form to the present
species is .S'. concinnus, J. Hall,i a spirifer of the sub-orbicularis
type from the Lower Helderbergian of N. America. From .S'. con-
cinnus the Lilydale species is separated by the smaller number of
ribs, which vary from 8 to 10, against 12 to 14 in the Lower Helder-
berg form.

The Bohemian Silurian species, Spirifer viator, Barrande,-
approaches our form in the young stage, but in the ephebic and
gerontic conditions it has a remarkably large and salient mesial
fold. Moreover there are fewer ribs in that species; that is, 6 to
7 on each side of the mesial fold and sinus.

Another somewhat related species is McCoy's Spirifer bijiif/osuM.
which occurs in the Wenlock Shale of Ireland.-^ So close is its
resemblance to the Victorian fossils in many points that the writer
had previously tentatively referred the latter to McCoy's species.
In the. number of the ribs the Irish species more nearly agrees with
ours, being 10 to 12 on each side as compared with the Victorian
with 8 to 10. The deep dividing groove of the mesial fold in
S. bijngosns is sufficient distinction, however, to .specifically separate
our Victorian specimens. At the same time it is extremely interest-
ing to note the double relationship of the two widely separated
brachiopod faunas of tlie British Wenlockian Series and the Lower
Helderbergian of N. America, with the Victorian Yeringian strata.

At a casual glance, Mr. W. S. Dun's Devonian species S. pitt-
mani* from N. S. Wales, might easily be mistaken for .S'. lilydalensis.
The two forms belong, however, to separate groups. The ostiolate
group to which -S'. pittmani and .S'. yassensis must be referred, have
a smooth sinus and fold; while S. lilydalensis and the other related
forms of the sub-orbiculate group have the mediiin area striated or
plicated.

Occurrence. — Well-preserved casts and moulds are often found in
the brown mudstone of the Lilydale district. The cotype of the
brachial valve Avas collected and presented by R. H. Annear, Esq.,

1 Pal. N. York, vol. iii., lS.o9, p. 200, pi. xxv., fifjs. -la!, and pi. xwiii., fij,'. 7. See also H.ill
and Clarke, ibid, vol. viii., pt. ii., 1S94, pi. xxx., fi-rs. 1, 2.

2 Systi'uie .Silurien du centre de la Boheme, vol. v., 1879, pi. vii., fiy:s. 411 ; pi. ixxiii., fiys.
iii., 1-8; pi. xxiv., %. vi.

3 S.viiopsis Silurian Fossils Ireland, 1846, p. 36, pi. iii., fig. 23. See also Davidson, Hrit. Sil.
Brach. (Pal. Soc), pt. vii.. No. 1. 1866, pi. x., fig.s. l.S, and pt. vii., No. 2, 1867, p 89.

4 Dun. W. S. Rec. Geol. Surv. N. S. Wales, vol. vi., pt. 4, 1904, p. 320, pi. Ixi., figs. 4, 4a, M,

oils

112 Frederick Cliapmdii :

Avho obtained it from Wilson's Quarry, near Lilydale. An extensive
series of the same fossil was collected and presented by the Rev. A.
W. Cresswell, M.A., who obtained these spirifers fi-oni vari
exposures to the iioith of Lilydale. Silurian (Yeiingian).

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Platk X.

Fig. 1. — Siphoiiotreta plicateUn, sp. nov. : rt, pedicle valve (holo-
type), X 6; 6, profile of valve, x 6; o. ornament of
anterior part of valve, x US. Silurian (Melbour-
nian) : Yan Yean, Victoria. Coll. Mr. A. J. Shearsby,
F.R.M.S.

Fig. 2. — Crania pulchelloide.s, sp. nov. a, apical aspect; h, profile.
Silurian (Yeringian) : Ruddock's Quarry, near Lily-
dale, Victoria. Coll. by Mr. W. J. Parr, x 4.

Fig. 3. — Leptaeiia rhoinhoidalis, Wilckens sp. Cardinal area and
posteri(n- portion of shell, to show denticulated hinge-
line. Silurian (Yeringian) : Loyola, near Mansfield,
Victoria. Coll. by Mr. G. Sweet, F.G.S. x 2.

Fig. 4.— Z. rhomhoidalis, Wilckens sp. Interior of a brachial or
dorsal valve in the neanic stage, sliowing impression
of the fleshy spiralia and crura. Silurian (Yeringian) :
Loyola, near Mansfield, Victoria. C^oU. by Mr. G.
Sweet, F.G.S. x 3.

Fig. 0. — L. 7'ho/nhoidaiis, Wilckens sp. Wax squeeze fiom interior
of brachial valve (Fig. 4), showing form of spiralia.
X 3.

Fig. 6. — L. r/io/tiho/dril/s, Wilckens sp. Natural cast in mudstone
of interioi- of brachial valve. Silurian (Yeringian) :
Loyola, near Mansfield. Coll. by Mr. G. Sweet. F.G.S.
X f?.

Fig. 7. — L. rhoinhoidalis, Wilckens sp. Wax s(|ueeze from natural
impression of brachial valve (Fig. (5), sliowing brachial
impi'essions. x 3

Fig. 8. — Chonefrs. hipartifa, sp. nov. Pedicle valve (cotype). Silu-
rian (Yeringian): K'uddock's (^Miarry, near Lilydale.
(^.11. by .Mr. J. S. Green. x 3.

Fig. 9. — C. hipartitd, sp. nov. Pedicle valve of a larger examjde
(paratype). Silurian (Yeringian) : Simmonds' P.ridge
Hut on the Yarra. Coll. Geol. Surv. Vict. x 3.

Vn,r. U.S. V

F. C. ad. ]];u. del.

Pi-oc. JI.S. Vicloria. ]<»]:

!»l:{. Plat.- Xr.

F. C. ad. iiat. del.

Victorian Fossils^ Part XVI. H;-J

Fig. 10. — C. hi part ltd, sp. iiov. Briuliial valve (e-otype). Silurian
(Yeringian): Siiiuiioii(l.s' Bridge Hut on the Yarra.
Coll. Geol. Surv. Vict., x 3.

Platk XI.

Fig. 11. — Conchidiiini kiiifihtii. J. de C. Sowerby, sp. Cast and
n^ould of shell in fine sandstone; showing the spondy-
liuni and general form and ornament of the shell.
Silurian (Melbournian) : Heathcote, Victoria. ColL
Geol. Surv. Vict. x 2.

Fig. 12. — GifpiduJa rirtoriae, sp. nov. Brachial aspect of shelL
Silurian (Yeringian) : Ruddock's Quarry, near Lily-
dale. Coll. by Mr. W. J. Parr. Natural size.

Fig. 13. — Afrypa reticularis, Linne, sp. var. decnrrens, var. nov.
A wax squeeze taken from a mould in mudstone, of
a ventral valve. Silurian (Yeringian) : Ruddock's
Quarry, near Lilydale. Coll. by Mr. W. J. Parr, x 2.

Fig. 14. — A. aspera. Schlotheim, sp. A wax squeeze taken from a
natural mould in mudstone. of a ventral valve. Silu-
rian (Yeringian) : Loyola, near Mansfield. Coll. by
Mr. G. Sweet. F.G.S. Nat. size.

Fig. 15. — A. -fimhriata, ii\'). \\o\. A brachial valve (holotype). Silu-
rian (Yeringian) : near Lilydale. Coll. by Mr. R. H.
Annear. Nat. size.

Fig. 16. — Cyrtina suh-hi plica ta, sp. nov. : a, pedicle valve, x 3;
h, area of pedicle valve, showing the cardinal area
with pseudodeltidium. x 3; c, pseudodeltidum under
higher magnification, showing the form and position
of the pedicle foramen, x 9. Silurian (Yeringian) r
Ruddock's Quarry, near Lilydale. Coll. by Mr. J. S.
Green.

Fig. 17. — Spirifer lih/flahiisis, sp. nov. Pedicle valve (cotype).
Silurian (Yeringian) : north of Lilydale. Coll. by the-
Rev. A. W. Cresswell, M.A. Nat. size.

Fig. 18. — S. lilydalensis, sj). nov. Brachial valve of a larger-
example (cotype). Silurian (Yeringian) : Wilson's-
Quarry, near Lilydale. Coll. Ijy Mr. R. H. Annear.
Nat. size.

CORRIGENDUM.

Til Part XV. of this series, vol. XXV., part L, 1912, p. 192, line 8-
froiii top, after Fig. 7. — read '■^ Pleurotoma sayceajia."

[Proc. Roy. Soo. Victoria, 26 (N.S.). Tt. I., 1918.]

Akt. X. — Fuvtiier Notes on AvMralktn Hydroids. — //.
By W. M. bale, F.R.M.S.

(With Plates XII, Xlir.)
[Read lOth July, 1913.]

The present paper is in oontinnation of my last connnunication to
the Society, which was read in April, 1893. During the somewhat
long interval but little has been done in Australia towards advanc-
ing our knowledge of its hydroid fauna, the only contributions
which I am aware of being those of Messrs. Bartlett, Mulder, and
Trebilcock, in the " Geelong Naturalist." A number of new and
interesting forms were made known in these papers, mostly among
the smaller species, and pi-incipally from collections made in or
near Port Phillip; and since this is the case witli a locality which
has perhaps been better searched than any othei' in the States, it
may readily be imagined what a wealth of information remains to
be gathered by futuie investigators along our less-explored shores.

A quantity of liydroid material which Avas dredged by the
" Thetis " in 1898 was sent to Mr. Jas. Uitihic.-^.f the Royal Scottish
Museum, Edinburgh, and the results were published by the Aus-
tralian Museum in one of its Memoirs nearly two years since. In
this paper a number of new forms are desci-il)ed. and a good deal
is added to our knowledge of already-known species.

A number of hydroids dredged from time to time by the Com-
monwealth trawler " Endeavour " have been ])laced in my liands
for examination, among them being some new and striking f(n-ms
obtained from the little-explored region of the Great Australian.
Bight. These form the subject of a Report, which was completed
some months since, and which it is expected will shortly be published.
A small lot of material since received contains several additional
forms new to our fauna, which I hope to report upon at a future
date.

Though no other works have a})peared s])eiially devoted to the
Australian Hydroida, many of our species have been described in
accounts of collections made in otliei' ])arts of the world during
recent years, and the nuirdu'i- of foims known to be common to
Australia and other rei^ioiis has l)eon e(nisideiably augmented, while
numerous changes in nomenclature have found more or less accept-

AiiMralian Hydro ids. 115

iince. >[any specific iiaiiies forinerly adopted by nic have liecii
ranked as synonyms of older species, following: on tlif (.'xamination
of n^useuni types of former observers. \Yhose descrijjtions -were so
incorrect or inaderi'iate that it had been impossible to identify the
species Avhich they were intended to indicate. This is especially the
case witli the hydroids descrilied by Lamarck and Lamouroux. of
whose descriptions a great many were quite valueless, so that the
species remained unidentified for nearly a century, till Dr. Billard
recorded the results of his examination of tlie type specimens. Tlie
same observer has also examined the British Museum collections,
and finds a numljer of the species (Australian and otlier) described
by Allman in tlie " C'liallen^er " Report, and elsewhere, to be
identical with previouxly-luiown forms (in addition to those Avhich
I had, in former papers, noted as synonyms of some of Busk's and
Kirchenpauer's species). I may i-emark in passing tliat a similar
revision of Kirchenpauer's types would be very serviceable. His
accounts of some of the species leave much to be desired, and in two
■or three cases wliere the tyj^es have been examintMl. tlicy jn'ove to he
such as could not be I'ecognised from the descriptions and figures.

A few of tlie speeies dealt witli in the following pages have been
treated by recent oljservei'S as synonyms of older sjiecies, from which
they are really distinct, and to clear up their affinities I have
<lescribed them more fully, though in fact, some of the original
descriptions were inconsistent with the synonymy assigned to them.
Two of Busk's species, which have only been identified in recent
years, are here fully described, and one or two changes are made
in specific names, for various reasons. In view of the unfortunate
vehicle of piiblication chosen by the Geelong observers (the " Geelong
Naturalist " being issiied in sueli limited numbers that scarcely any
copies were available for |niieliase), I proposed re-describing sucli of
the new species, as I had. tliidugh tlie coui-tesy of Mr. Mulder,
obtained specimens of, but have had to postpone doing so to a
possible future opportunity.

I cannot let pass this occasion (the first which has presented itself)
•of expressing my hearty thanks to those observers who have favoured
me with their publications. These are : — Miss Laura Thornely. of
Liverpool; Dr. R. Kirkpatrick, of the British Museum; Mr. Jas.
Ritchie, of Edinburgh; Dr. E. T. Browne, of Beikhampstead ; Dr.
A. Billard, of Paris; Professor M. Bedot, of Geneva; Professor G.
M. R. Levinsen and Mr. P. Kramp, of Copenhagen; Dr. CI. Hart-
laub, of Heligoland; Dr. Elof Jaderholm, of Sweden; Dr. E.
:Stechow, of Munich; A. K. Link... of St. Petersburg: Dr. G. Mark-

116 ir. M. Bale:

tnuiRT-Turneretsclier, of Gruz, Austria; Professor ('. (' . Xuttiii^'
of Iowa City; Dr. C. McLean Fraser, of British Columbia; Pro
fessoi- S. F. Clarke, of VVilliamstown. Massachusetts; Dr. A. G
Mayei-, of Cambi'idge, Massachusetts; Dr. E. Warren, of Natal
Mr. Inal)a, of Kyoto; Mr. H. Farquhar, of Wellington; Mr. Thos
Whitelep:ge, of Sydney; Mr. J. F. Mulder, of Geelong ; Professor R
von liondenfehl.

I have also to gratefully acknowledge the assistance rendered to
nif in other ways, especially by Professor Nutting. Dr. Stechow.
Dr. Hartlaub. Dr. Kirkpatrick, Mr. Ritchie, Dr. Billard and Mr.
Mulder, who have either sent me specimens, or compai-ed my speci-
mens with types, or otherwise assisted me in the endeavour to settle
the affinities of doubtful forms.

Hydra vikidis Linne.

Hydro I'ir/dis, Linne. Faun. Suec. 1746, p. ."'GT ; id., Syst.
Nat. L. 1767, p. 1320; Johnston. Brit. Zooph.. 1847. p.
121,%. 28; Hincks, Brit. Hydr. Zooph.. 1868, p. :n2.
fig. 40; Bedot, Zool. Anzeig. xxxix., 1912. p. 603.
Hydra riridissima, Pallas, Elenchus, 1766, p. .'il ; Brauer,
Zool. Anzeig, xxxiii., 1908. p. 790.
//. I'iridis lias not hitherto been included in lists of the Australian
hydi-oids. ]>ut it is found abundantly, in company with the brown
hydra, in ponds bordering the Yarra near Melbourne; and its
occurrence in those localities has been noticed in the " Victorian
Naturalist " on several occasions.

Pknnaria wilsoni, n. noiii.

Ifalocordyh aiisfralis. Bale, Proc. Roy. Soe. Victoria. N.S..
vi.. 1893, p. 94.

It is now generally recognised that the genus llaJdcortJ yle is not
really distinct fi-oni I'cniuirid , to which genus our //. oiistrali^ must
accordingly be relegated. In ordei- to avoid confusion with l'. aus-
Indis Bale (although that species is now considered by some
ol)servers to be only a variety of P. rarolinii), it seems advisable to
re-name the present form, which was dredged in Port Phillip by the
late Mr. J. Bracebi-idge WilsoTi.

All the species hithei-to referred to /'rn/iaria api)ear to be iden-
tical in habit, the stem giving off two series of alternate branches,
which are both in the same plane, or nearly so, while the short poly-
l)iferous ramuli form a single series along the distal side of the
branches. In /-*. wilsoni (at least in the mounted specimens), the

Australian H/jdroUh. J 17

branches are all directed to one side, and so appear at first sight to
be uniserial; in reality, however, they originate in two planes about
90 deg. apart, but are then dii'ected so decidedly forward that when
mounted they fall to the same side, and seem to have a secund dis-
position. A more important distinction, however, is the arrange-
ment of the ultimate ramules, which in F. wilsoni are biserial, and
like the branches are in two planes about 90 deg. from each other.
They are, as a rule, alteriiate, but there are sometimes irregularities
in their disposition, such as two occurring in succession on the same
side. This arrangement, and the very much more pronounced
annulation, distinguish the polypidom from that of P. australis.

The only specimens I have seen consisted of two mounted pieces,
and Mr. Wilson was unable to say what the size of the original
specimen had been, or to give any further details of the ramification.

Hebklla scandkns (Bale.) (Plate XTT., Fig. 10).

Lafo'ea scandens, Bale, Proc. Lin. Soc. N.S.W.. 2nd Ser.,

iii.. 1888. p. 758, pi. xiii.. figs. 16-19.
Hehella scandens, Marktanner-Turneretscher, Ann. d. k. k.

Xaturh. Hofmus., v.. 1890, p. 2U, ;pl. iii., fig. 16;

Farquhar. Trans. X.Z. Inst., xxviii.. 1896, p. 460; Cam-

penhausen, Zool. In.st. d. Univ. Jena. 1897, p. 307 (?);

Hartlaub, Zool. Jalirl).. Suppl. vi.. iii.. 1905, p. 587;

Warren, Ann. Nat. (tov"!. Mus.. i.. 1908. p. .'Ml, fig. 21 ;

Levinsen, Vidensk. Medd. f. d. naturli. Foren, 64, 1913,

p. 285.
Lirtorelln xrandens. Borradaile, Fauna and Oeogr. of flie

Maid, and Laccad. Archipel. ii., 1905, p. ,840.
Hehella cyl I nd rieii (in part). Pictet, Rev. Suisse de Zoo]..

i.. 189.-^ ].. 41, pi. ii.. fig. 36; Verslnys. Mem. .k- la

Soc. Zool. de France, xii., 1899. p. 31.
Lafoia calcarata (in part), Billard, Bull, du Mus. d'Hist.

nat., 1904, p. 481; id., Exp. Sci. du Trav. et du Talis-
man, viii., 1907, p. 174.
Hehella cah-arafa (in part), Billard, Arch, de Zool. Exp. et

Gen.. 4 ser.. vii.. 19(l7. p. 339; Ritchie. Proc. Zo.,1.

Soc. Lond.. I'llO. p. 81(1; id.. Mem. Austi-. .Miis.. iv..

1911, p. 816.
Hehella roiitorfa, .Maiktanner-Turneretscher. Ann. d. k. k.

naturh. Hofmus.. v.. 1890, p. 215, pi. iii., fig. 17 a, b;

Campenhausen, Zool. Inst. d. Univ. Jena, 1897, p. 307;

Levinsen, Vid. Medd. f. d. naturh. Foren. 64, 1913. p.

285, pi. v., figs. 16, 17.

] 1 8 Tf. M. Bale :

(?) Not Lnfoea colcamfa, Agassiz, Mem. Mus. Comp. ZooL
Harvard, i. 1865. p. 122. %. li)(); Hargitt, X. Amev.
Nat.. XXXV.. 1901. p. :^)S7, fig. 24.
(?) Not //rhella calcarafa. Nutting. Bull. U.S. Fish. Conun.,

xix., 1901, ]). an.'i. 378, figs. 50. 94.
Not Jjdfoed c!/llii(/ric<i. von Lendenfeld. Proc. Lin. See.
N.S.W.. ix.. 1884. p. 912. pi. xl., figs. 4, 5.

This is one of a series of closely-allied forms, the specific relation-
slrip of which is more or less doubtful. Pictet first classed together
the Lafoea cylindrica of von Lendenfeld, Hehella contorta and
//. cylindrafa of Marktanner-Turneretscher, and — somewhat doubt-
fully— Lafoea s-cnDdeim. Billard added to the list Lafoea calcarata^
Agassiz. of which he regards all the others as synonyms.

Pictet claims that he finds in Amboyna specimens, in the same
colony, hydrothecae coinciding exactly with the descriptions of the
three species which he unites (other than H. contorta), and his only
reason for doubt as to the identity of H . scandens arises from an
apparent difference in the gonophores. Regarding //. contorta he
remarks, referring to the flexuri' of the hydrothecae. " Nous ne pen-
sons pas cependant qu'il y ait lieu d'en faire une espece distincte,
car ce n'est evidemment qu'un phenomene pathologique provenant,
soit d'une mauvaise methode de conservation, soit d'une autre cause
inconnue." The assumption that the bent form of the hydrothecae
is due to bad preservation is perfectly groundless; it is the usual
and normal condition of this hydroid, which, however, does not
seem to me to diffei- more than varietally from //. srandens,
especially since Levinsen has shown that its gonangium is exactly
similar to that of the latter species.

My experience differs from tliat of Pictet in regai'd to tlic ti-oplio-
soine. I have observed many colonies of //. i^candetis, and several
of //. contorta. but have not found any gi-eat variation in tlie
hydrothecae. And Pictet does not explain hoAv he was able to
satisfy himself tliat tlie characters of /.. ci/lindricd are such as to
justify its association with the other forms; Von Lfiidcnfeld's state-
ment that his species has the hydrothecae " large as in L. parali-
tica '■ seems to forbid siich association, iiml tlicri' is I'cuson to
believe that it is identical with a ti.ini to be (U'siiibed further on,
whfise size is such as to take it far out of the range of the species
or vaiiety observed by Pictet.

Tlie gonosonu' of Pictet's sperimens is described thus :— " Gono-
theques allonges, recourbes en torme de coi'ne d'alxindaiice, a paruis
lisses, renfermant trois bourgeons medusoides en forme de cloche.

Australian Hydro ids. Ill)

disposes sur une rangee." According to the figure the aperture is
circular and entire.

Tin' goiiiuigiuiii i)f //. xra/idens and //. roiitorfa is not recurved
idniucopia-fashioii, and its wall is not smooth, hut feehly annu-
lati'd ; its apertuic when mature is divided into several shallow
enuuginations, each witli its opercular flap. As Levinsen justly
remarks, " The gonothecae of //. contorta seem to be very different
from tliose of //. calm rat a and H. cj/II ndrica, figured by Agassiz
and Pictot."

As to the gonophores themselves. Pictet says, " Dans cette espece
\^H . scatidens] en eft'et. les gonotheques contiendraient deux gono-
phores renfermant chacun trois a quatre ceufs et surmontes d'un
gros blastostyle en forme de trompette, tandis que sur les exemplaires
recoltes a Amhoine. les gonotheques renferrnent trois bourgeons
medusoides en forme de cloche tres facilement reconnaissables."

He goes on to suggest that the apparent blastostyle of H. scandenx
is really the first medusoid bud, an erroneous interpretation having
been given to badly-preserved specimens. The suggestion as to the
blastostyle is somewhat extraordinary, as it is difficult to imagine
liow- the structure which I have figured (as it exists) could be con-
fused with a gonophore ; nevertheless, I have no doubt that Pictet
is correct in supposing that the gonophores are medusoid, and it is
quite possible that three may be produced, though not all at one
time, as in the form Avhich Pictet has figured. In the few specimens
which seemed to be complete there appeared first the large trumpet-
shaped blastostyle. then the first gonophore. w'hich, however, was not
in a condition to enable its structure to be made out satisfactorily,
and l)elow this the second bud, an ovate body in a much more rudi-
mentary stage of development. In one or two instances there was
at the base of the gonotheca a slight enlargement, which may perhaps
have been the earliest rudiment of a third medusoid, but its minute
size and the presence in each case of foreign matter obscuring it
made its character a matter of uncertainty. If a gonophore, its
development must be very late, for even in a case where the first
had escaped, and the second seemed mature, it was still apparently
no further advanced.

On the whole I conclude that Pictet 's own account of both the
gonotheca and its contents, if correct, furnishes strong evidence
against the identity of his specimens with H. scandens, and reasons
will be given for believing //. cylindrica to be an entirely different
species. I have not seen //. cyU7idrata, and therefore offer no
opinion regarding it. As to H. calcnrafa. it may possibly be the

120 W. M. Bale:

same as H. scandem^, but the descriptions certainly do not esta))lish
their identity. A. Agassiz says that the gonangia are gigantic as
compared with the hydrothecae, which is decidedly not the case with
H. scandens; their form also is different. The more advanced
mediisa is said to fill the cavity of the gonangium almost entirely,
and to be from l-20th to l-16th of an inch long when it escapes.
In //. scandens the large-st medusa measured in each case, when
apparently about mature, slightly under l-40th of an inch, and
never Qccupied more than a small proportion of the gonangium.
According to Agassiz, Nutting, and Hargitt the hydrothecae of
H. calcarata are very strongly curved at the base (Nutting says
doubly curved), and are generally borne in pairs, neither of which
conditions obtain in //. scandens. The free medusa of E . calcarata
is well known, but that of E. scandens lias not been observed, nor
has that of Pictet's specimens.

Hebella cylindrica (Von Lendenfeld). (Platf- XTT., Fig. 11.)

Lafo'ea cylindrica. Von Lendenfeld, Proc. Lin. Soc. N.S.W.

ix., 1884, p. 912, pi. xl., figs. 4, 5.
Not Hebella. cylindrica, Pictet, Hev. Suisse de Zool., i.,
1893, p. 41, pi. ii., tig. ."5(5; Versluys, Mem. Soc.
Zool. de France, xii., 1899, p. 31; Weltner, Hydr. von
Amboina u. Thursday Id., 1900. p. 586; Jaderholm,
Arkiv. f. Zool., k. svenska Vetenskapsakad. i., 1903, p.
274.
All the records of H. cylindrica since the date of Pictet's paper
on the Hydroids of the Bay of Amboina, refer to small forms like
K. scandens, which were, by that author, associated under the name
of H. cylindrica. The form which 1 now, with little hesitation, refer
to that species is of far larger size than any of tlifsc l)ut it certainly
agrees better with Von Lendenfeld's figure and description, neither
lof which, however, directly indicates the si/e of the specimens. The
drawing is said to l)e made with " A objective and C t)cular," with-
out even iiitiinatiug wliose lenses are refcn-ed to; if Zeiss', the com-
bination quoted would give a magnification of over 100. and the
figure, if on that scale, would represent a tOiiii wilh the hydrothecae
less than .25 mm. in length, or much too small for even //. sra/n/cns.
As Von. Lendenfeld expj-essly mentions tliat tiie hydrothecae, as well
as the hydranths, are " large as in L. parasitica," it is evident
that the reference to the lenses employed does not indicate the scale
on which tlie fitivire was drawn.

Australian Hydro ids. \2l

The specimen now in (juestion has hydii^tliecae about 1 luin. in
length, or slightly larger than those of //. para.sifira, and more
than double tlie average of //. svaiuhns, and stout in proportion.
It agrees perfectly with Von Lendenfeld's figure, except that the rim
of the hydrotheca is a trifle less everted. This rim is douliled in one
case, but tlie two rims are extremely close together. It is growing
on Si/iif/ier/ i/iii a/fer/tdiia. as shown in tlu' tigurt', and for mm-
parison 1 ^ivf a figure on tlie same scale of S. ri/Undiicnin witli
H. scandtns growing on it. The hydrothecae of the two species of
Syntheciuin are of about the same size, and it will be seen that the
comparatively gigantic hydrothecae of H. cylindrica surpass in size
those of the St/nfliec/iitn as much as the latte)- exceed those of //.
scandetis.

The specimen of S. (dftnuuis on which this //tbelhi was Inuud
was a small piece (apparently a pinna) sent to me by Dr. Ki)k-
patrick from the " Challenge!- " collection. I at first contemplated
describing the HeheUa as new, l)ut on compiuing it with Von Len-
denfeld's account of H. cylindrica, found it so closely similar as to
suggest the strong probability of their being the same. This con-
clusion is arrived at from the figure of the supporting hydroid. as
well as from that of the Hehella itself. Von Lendenfeld says tliat
the species grows on Sertularians, but mentions no particular
species. The figure agrees, however, very fairly with Syntheciuin
alfernans, and not Avith any other Sertularian which I am
acquainted with; moreover, the relative sizes of the Sertularian and
the Hehella are much the same as those of S. alfernans and the
species under consideration ; there is every probability therefore
that these two ai'e the same foi-ms tliat Von Lendenfeld lias figured.

The species differs from //. xcnndens (at least so far as this sjieci-
men is concerned), in the absence of the chitinous "floor" of the
hydrotheca. There is <ui unmistakable " floor," on Avhicli the
flattened base of the hydianth is supported, but it appears to l)e
purely membranous, and nor an ingrowtli of tht- perisarc, as in
H. scandens.

Sertulakia loculosa Bale. (Plate XII.. Figs. 7. 8.)

Serfularia loculosa. Bale, Aust. Hydr. Zooph., 1884. p. !)1

(part), pi. iv., figs. 5, 6, pi. xix.. fig. !) ; Warren, .Ann.

Natal (iov't. .Mtis.. i.. li)()8. p. :m\. ti<r. 8. pi. xlviii.. fig.

:57.
Serfularia tiirhinafa, Billard, Ann. Sci. Xat., 9 scr.. xi..

1910, p. 19 (in part); ( ?^ Ritchie. Proc. Zool. Soc.

Lond., 1910. p. 821.

122 W. M. Bale:

Nfit SerfiiUirld Jori/Josa . liusk. Vide Serf iiJar/a iiirhitiain

(Laiuomoux), !>. 124.
Not DjiiiaiiK'nd t iirhlitdtd . LaiiKiiiioux, Vide p. 124.

Hydroeaulus about lialf an iiicli in lieight, often coiitiinicd into
a stolon, unl)iaii(li('d. Hydrotliecal internodes mostly a little
shoi-ter tlian the widtli across the hydrothecae, one or two at the
siinuuit often nuieli elongated, nodes sometimes single and trans-
verse, often doul)U'. Avitli the lower transverse and the upper con-
spicuously ol)li(jur and slender, the latter occurring at irregular
intervals.

Hydrothecae opposite, a paii- on each internode, divergent, but
with the lower prtrtions in contact or approximate in front,
separated behind; mostly short and s(piat in form, Avith a distinct
oblique fold or ridcfe crossing them about the middle; aperture look-
ing outwards and upwards, with two lateral teeth, generally blunt
and rounded, but in some specimens more pointed, a third tooth
often developed above.

Gonothecae ovate, truncate, not compressed, with several strong
annular ridges; summit witl: a wide operculate opening; borne on
the lower part of the shoots.

Colour, brown, pale to very dark.

//rt^,._Q,ieenscliff ; Port Phillip; Portland (Mr. Maplestone) >
Natal Coast, common (Warren).

Undei- the name of S. loculosa Busk, I included in the " Cata-
logue of the Australian Hydroid Zoophytes," along with Busk's
type, two or three forms which I had observed in collections from
Port Phillip. One of these, of pinnate habit, is probably identical
with S. inrflata (Versluys), and, Avitli tliat species, is referred in the
present paper to the Di/iKiniciia nuini'niata of Kirchenpauer. The
other varieties differ considerably from Busk's, and 1 have long
been doubtful whether they should not be separated, though reluc-
tajit to propose a new name on grounds perhaps insufficient.

In 1009 Billavd announced, as a result of liis examination of
Laniouroux' types, that the B. turhinata of that autlior is the same
as Busk's .S". lorvlosd. corresponding in all respects, as Dr. Billard
informs me, Avith Jiusk's draAving. 1 now propose, Avhile accepting
the original name, N. hirhiiuitd, lor Busk's species, to separate the
common short-celled forni, and to retain for it the name of S.
loc/ilosa, under Avhich it is already generally knoAvn. The grounds
of Reparation will be liriefiy stated.

In S. loculosa, as restricted, the liydrothecae are short and squat
in form, slightly divergent throughout, so that the two constituting

a pair are in contact in front only at tiie lower part, and the basea
of the hydrothocae. as well as the ti-ansverse ridfjes, i-nii obliquely
to the axis of the hv(li(!C'anlns. In N. furfniiafa the hydrothecae are
more erect in thr \n\\vv part, the main divergence being: above the
rid<re. which is at right angles to the axis of the hydrocaidns. The
vertical ridge where the two hydrothecae meet is not continued down-
ward in S. loeidosa as it often is in .S'. turhinata. The mouth in
;S'. loculosa is upward-directed, with distinct lateral teeth, while in
the other form it huiks ratlier dnwuward. and the lateral teeth or
lobes are but fcel)ly di'vclopc'd.

The intern(j(lcs in N. i iirhiiutta aic separated Ijy simple nodes,
transverse or very slightly obli(|ue, whieh are usually very close
above the hydrothecae. Tn S. loculoxa similar nodes exist, but in
addition to and above them there are found at irregular intervals
oblique nodes, in which the base of the upper internode runs down
into a point in front, while the top of the lower one is jiroduced
upwai-d into a similar point at the back. Such double joints may occur
between most of the hydrothecal inter nodes on a shoot, or there may
be only one or two of them, and the straight ones vary a good deal
in distinctne.ss. The effect is that the short section of hydrocaulus
between them constitutes a separate internode, as AYarren justly
describes it, and the condition is exactly similar to that of many
species of Phi niularia. in which the short intei'mediate internode
is separated from the liydrothecal internode above by a long i)l)lique
joint, and from that below by a straight ti'ansvei'se one. often less
distinct. The only diffei'ence is that in Vhntinhiria the short intei--
mediate intei'Tiodes are of regular occurrence, while heie thev are
irregula)'.

Tn botli S. Jomloftd and N. t urhnuifa one or two internodes —
usually oidy one — at the summit of a slioot may be vei-y nmch
elongated below the hydrothecae. but the hydrothecae themselves are
not longer than those found elsewheie. In some specimens of
S. locnlom ("Catalogue." pi. iv.. fig. 6) the hydiothecae are less
squat than usual, with the teetii less ol)tuse. a variation which
appi-oximates tlieni to .S'. iiKin/iimtd . but not to S. t-nrhiiuifa .

Warren finds S. lomlosa common on the Xatal coast, and his
detailed description leaves no doubt of its identity Av^th the common
Australian foi-m. Oidy in the gonangia is any difference indicated,
the Xatal form having from seven to nine annulations. while my
specimens liave only five. The difference may possibly be sexual ;
Wai-ren's figured specimen was female, but he does not state whethei-
the male was nl)seived ; my specimens were empty, and in onlv
two of Them have I sei'n the tronan«ria at all.

124 If. M. Bale:

Billard has associated under the name of S. turhinata not only
the two simple forms referred to above, but also the pinnate form
described by Kirchenpaiier as Bynamena marginata, and also known
as S. inflafa (Versluys), and by other names. This will be further
referred to under S. mnrr/'nnta.

Sertulakia turrinata (LMuiouroux). (Plate XIL, Fig. 6.)

])i/nainena i ur}>iiuUa , Lamouroux, Hist. Polyji. Cor. Flex..

1816, p. 180; id., Encycl. Meth. ii.. 1824. p. 290.
Sertularia turhinata, Lamarck, An. s. Vert.. 2nd Ed. ii..
1836, p. 154; Bale, Aust. Hyd. Zooph.. 1884, p. 96;
Billard, C. R. Acad. d. Sci.. cxlviii.. 1909, p. 1064;
id.. Ann Sci. Xat. (9 .<er.), ix.. 1909. p. :522 (in part);
Id. (9 ser.). xi.. 1910. p. 19 (in part).
Serf iilaria loriilosa. Busk, Voy. of Rattlesn. i.. 1852, p.
.•593; Bale, Aust. Hydr. Zooph., 1884. p. 91 (part), pi.
ix.. fig. 12; Jaderholm, Ark. f. Zool.. k. svenska Veten-
skapsaka<l. i., 190.3, p. 285.
Not Sertularia tarulo.^a Bale. Vide p. 121.
Hydrocaulus about half an inch in height, often continued into
a stolon, unbranched. Internodes mostly a little longer than the
width across the hydrothecae, the proximal one shorter, one or two
at the summit often much elongated ; nodes transverse, mostly
immediately above the hydrothecae.

Hydrothecae opposite, a j^air on each internode. in contait in
front for a considerable part of their length, separated behind;
upper portion divergent almost horizontally, a distinct horizontal
fold or ridge crossing them about the middle ; the thickened
vertical ridge marking their union in front often continued doAvn-
Avard beyond the bases of the hydrothecae; aperture looking outwards
and somewhat dowuAvards. with two very indistinct lateral lobes.

Gonothecae not compressed, with five or six strong annular ridges,
summit with a Avide operculate opening; borne on the hnver jiart
of the shoots or on the hydrorhiza.
Colour, bi-oAvn. often very dark.

//aft.— Bass- Strait, 45 fathoms (Busk) : Java Sea (Jaderholm) :
Paumben. India (?) (Jadei-holm).

The characters which distinguish this — the original tyjie of ,S'.
li>ruh)s<i. Busk — from the short-celled form hithei'to associated with
it have been detailed under S. lociilosa, and will lie obvious on
reference to the figures.

Australian Hydro I dx. 125

Tlie precise form of the hydrotheca-margin is doubtful. In the
best -preserved specimens there is an angle in the middle of the
upper side, but no tooth, and the lower side is simply rounded, or
with two lateral lobes scarcely indicated. But so delicate is the
perisare at the margin that the shape seems in all cases more or
less altered. Even in the fresh specimens the condition seems
to have been similar, as Busk described the aperture as irregular.
In S. loculosa tlie perisare is stouter, and there is even a distinctly
thickfiied l)oi-(lci' to tlie aperture. Init tlii.s is wanting in S. fiir-
f)i/iiif(i, at least in these specimens.

Whether the oblique nodes, which in S. Incidosa are found in
addition to the simjile transverse ones, ever occur in -S'. fitr/>/>iofa,
I eautiot say. Xont- exist in my specimens, wliich consisted
altogether of iibout sixty internodes, and Jaderholm, whose speci-
mens loiiL'spondLMl with Husk's figure, does not mention them.

The gonangia are similar to those of S. locidosa, with, according
to Jaderholm, five or six annulations.

The species appears to be rare. I have seen no examples other
tlian Busk's, thougluS'. loculosa is quite common in the same locality
(Bass Strait), and the only other record I have met with, besides
Lamouroux', is that of Jaderholm. Possibly »S'. locidosa is a
shallower-water form, and hence more often thrown on the beach.

In considering the validity of the distinction which I have drawn
between these two forms it must be borne in mind that I have had
only the one mounted colony of S. turhinafa under examination.
It remains for future investigation to determine the relationship
between the two forms.

Skutitlari.a MAH(4i\.vr.\ (Kirchenpauer). (Plate XII., Fig. 9.)

Dj/naineii(i nKirrii nata. Kirchenpauer, Verli. d. K. L.-C.

deutschen Akad. d. Naturf.. xxxi., 1804. p. \-\, figs.

8-8c.
Sertularia fosridnx, D'Arcy W. Thompson, Ann. and Mag.

N.H.. Ser. 5, iii., 1879, p. 104, pi. xvii., figs. 2-2a.
Sertularia amplectens, Allman. Journ. Lin. Soc, Zool.,

xix., 1885. p. 141, pi. xvi., figs. 3, 4; Jaderholm, Bihang

till. k. svenska Vet. -Akad., xxi.. 1896, p. 13, pi.

i., fig. 9.
Desmoscyphus r/racilis. Allman, ('hall. Kept., Part ii.. 1888,

p. 71, pi. xxxiv., figs. 2-2c.
Desmoscirphus inflatus, Versluys, Mem. Soc. Zool. de

France, xii.. 1899. p. 42, figs. 11-13.

3 26 W. M. Bole:

Desinoscyphus hrevicyatliua, Versluvs, Mem. Soc. Zool. df

France, xii., 1899, p. 40, figs. 9-10.
Sertularia infiatu, Jaderholm, Ark. f. Zoul. k. svenska
Veteuskapsakad, i., 190."5, p. 286; Vanhoffeii, Deutsche
Siidp.-Exp., 190l-:3 xi.. 1910, p. :521, f. .-Jg ; Stechow,
Zool Jahrb., xxxii.. 1912, p. ;U)1.
Sertularia versliii/si. Nutting, x\mer. Hydr. — Sert., 190-4.
p. 53, pi. i., f. 4-9; Billard, Actes.. Soc. Lin. Bord..
Ixi., 19()(;, p. 74; id., C. K. Acad. d. Sci., cxlviii., 1!)0!).
p. 194; id.. Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat., xiii.. 1907, p. 27.");
Congdon, Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., xlii., 1907, }>.
481; Ritchie, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1907, p. 505, fig.
144, pi. xxiv., fig. 2-6; Fraser, Bull. Bureau of
Fisheries, xxx., 1912, p. 375, fig. 40.
Sertularia J>revicyathtis, Nutting, Amer. Hydr. — Sert., 1904,

p. 60, pi. vi., figs. 1-2.
Sertularia twrhinata, Billard. An. Sci. Nat.. 1> ser.. xi.,

1!)10, p. 19 (in partK
Not Dynaintna turhiiiata, Lamouroux,_ Hist. Polyp. Cor.
Flex., 1816, p. 180; id., Encyc. Meth., ii., 1824, p. 290.
Not Sertularia furhi/iata. Lamarck, An. s. Vert., 2nd Ed.,
ii., 1836, p. 154.
Hydrophyton monosiphonic, pinnate (rarely simple) often under
half an inch in height, but sometimes reaching two inches. Proxi-
mal portion of the stem without pinnae or hydrothecae. Pinnae
alternate, each home on a distinct process at the base of a stem-
intei'node, wliicli supports also an unpaired hydrotheca in the axil,
and a pair of sul)-alternate hydrothecae above. First internode of
■each pinna short, without hydrothecae, separated from the next
internode by an oblique conspicuous joint, at which it readily
separates; joint between the first internodi' and tlie rladojdiore
straight, often less distinct or <)i)solete; nodes slendci- and oblique,
or straighter, and less distinct.

Hydrothecae of the i)innae or sinqde shoots in pairs, opposite,
mostly in contact in front, short and stout, with a slight oblique
fold or ridge crossing them about the middle; aperture nearly ver-
tical, with two large pointed triangular lateral teeth, and sometimes
with a third smaller tooth above.

Gonotliecae oblong, compressed and lenticidar in transverse sec-
tion (flattened behind and convex in front), with seveial distinct
transverse annulations; the superior angles i)ro(luced upwai-ds into
two large incuived luu-n-like processes; aperture narrow.
Colon idess or l)rownish.

Australian Hii<lroiih. 1*27

//„/,._ Williamstown. I'.-rt Pliilli]).

I liavc ill the iiiain tolli>\v<'(l IJillai-.l in the synonymy of this
species, a(l(liii<r, liowevrf. S. lire riri/(itliu-<. and excluding the tAvo
unbi-ainlu'd I'oiins. N. locitloxd and .s'. t ttrhi luttn . already treated of.
The two hittci- foiins, l)esides l)eing always, so far as is known,
unhraiulied. ditfei- from the present in the form of tlie gonangia,
whieii ai-e rouiKled in section, with a wide operculum covering the
whole of the sunnnit, while those of tlie pinnate form are plano-
eonvex, witli twd iiietirved hoins at the uiJi>ei' angles, and opcnin<i
by a narrow slit. It haj^pens that the onlv specimens hithei-to
recorded with tlie gonosome sufficiently pi-eserved for the sex to be
ascertained are those of S. inf.ata, observed by Ritchie, which bore
male gonophores, and those of S. Inctdosa, seen by Warren, in which
the gonophores were female. Billard thereupon suggests that this
may be a case of sexual dimorphism, the pinnate form being habitu-
ally associated with tlie male sex. and the iinliranched form with the
female. This view is not supported by any direct evidence, nor,
so far as I am aware, is any analogous ease known ; I consider,
therefo)-e, tliat the pinnate and the simple forms should by no means
be united until their affinities are actually pi-oved. It may also be
remarked that >'. infafa is not always pinnate, though unbranched
forms liave not hithei-to lieen referred to' it : tlie N. hrevicyathus,
found by Versluys in the same ilredging with liis .S'. infldta. is
almost certainly merely an unbranched foiin of the latter species;
and in my own specimens, which agree alisolutely with S. inflata
(so far as ean be ascertained in the abst'iue of the gonosome). I
find simple and pinnate shoots growing fiom the same hydrorhiza,
•or even, in one instance, the stem of a pinnate shoot running otit
into a stolon, which, in its turn, gives origin to an unbranched
shoot. These simple forms differ from N. lonilosa in the thinner
perisarc, the more sharply triangular teeth, and the tendency
(which is also exhibited by the piniiate form) foi- the ridge of the
hydrotheca to become weaker, or sometimes (|uite obsolete, in the
distal portions of the colony. But I doubt Avhether these distinctions
are constant, and should not regard them as of specific value if
the gonosome proved to be similar in each case.

S. hrevicyafhua is not distinguished from S. iii-flafa except l)y the
simple habit, and liy points of structure known to \m- varial)le in the
species of this gi-ouj), siu-h as the jiresence of a third tooth on the
border of the hydrotheca.

Ritchie agrees with Congdon that the operculum of iS'. itiflafn has
a large abcauline and two smaller latero-adiauline valves, but feels

128 W. M. Bale:

assured that in S. loriilosa {fiirhivata 1) the operculum is formed
by a solitary flap. Probably the condition of the operculum would
be determined by that of the hydrotheca-margin, which may or
may not have the small superior tooth developed.

The species seems remarkably variable in size. The usual height
is about half an inch, and according to Nutting often less, while
specimens are recorded up to two inches. It is also said to vary
greatly in the proportionate length of the internodes. as well as in
the distinctness of the nodes. These in my specimens are all of the
Avell-defined oblique type (sloping downwards from the back) so
familiar in many Sertularians, and Ritchie describes his specimens
as similar in this respect.. Nutting, however, describes the nodes
of the pinnae as straight, and Versluys says, " La partie distale de
la pinnule est divisee plus ou moins distinctement en entrenoeuds."
Tlie naked proximal part of the stem, which is divided from the
hydrocladiate portion l)y a very marked joint, is much shorter in
inv specimens than in the type. I note the peculiarity mentioned
by Allman and Ritchie of tlie pinnae falling off, leaving the basal
portions as a series of pointed spines. Much variation exists in
regard to robustness of texture, and to the distinctness of the
transverse ridge.

Versluys first gave a satisfactory account of the species under
the name of Desmoscyphus inflatus in 1899. Allman's D. gracilis
was found by Nutting, from examination of type specimens, to be
identical Avith Versluys' species, and as the name S. r/racilis was
preoccupied, Nutting re-named the species S. vershiysi . Versluys'
name, however, held priority till Billard later, on examining
Allman's type, found that S. amplectens (1885) was also the same
species. Afterwards Billaid classed all these names, along with
S. flosculus Thompson, I), marginatn Kirchenpauer, and S. loculosa
Busk, as synonyms of S. turhinata (Lamouroux). As I have for
reasons already stated classed the two last-named species as at
least provisionally distinct, I adopt for the pinnate form Kirchen-
pnuer's name, S. vKirt/inafa. Kirchenpauer's specimens, like my
own, were without the gonosome. If, as is quite possible, our species
shovild prove to have gonangia of a different type altogether, dis-
tinguishing it alike from S. loniloaa. and from Versluys' species, it
would 1)6 advisable to retain for it the name of .S'. ntarginata, and
for the other form <S'. aniplerfois.

It may be noted that it is to the restricted S. loculosa that S.
marginata exhibits, in tlie form of the hydrothecae, such close
afhnity. I have not seen it with the hydrothecae resembling those
of -S. tnrhinala.

Ausfralidi^ Hydroids. 129

Skutui.akia tknuis Bale.

Serfiilan'a frnuis^ ]iale. Aust. Hydr. Zooph., 1884, p. 82,
pi. v., ti^a. i, 5, pi. xix., fig. 16; Jaderholm, Ark. f.
Zool.. k. svenska Vetenskapsakad. i., 1903, p. 287;
(?) Thornely, Rep't. to Gov't, of Ceylon on the Pearl
Oyster Fisheries of the Gulf of Manaar, Suppl. Rep't..
viii.. 1904, p. 117, pi. ii. fi^r- 5.
Serfiihin'a gracilis (in part), Pictet, Rev. Suisse de Zool.,.

i., 1893, p. 48.
Tlminrid tenuis, Borradaile. Fauna and Geogr. of tlie

Maldive and Laccadive Archipel., ii., 1905, p. 841.
Sertidaria disfans (in part), Billard, Arch, de Zool. Exp.
et Gen., 4 ser., vii., 1907. p. 354; id., Exped. Sci. du-
Travailleur et du Talisman. Hydroides. viii., 1907, p.
187, figs., 10, 11.
Not Sertularia f/racili.s. Hassall, Hincks, Brit. Hyd. Zooph.,.
p. 262, pi. liii.. fig. 2; Nutting, Anier. Hydr.— Sert.,.
1904, p. 57,. pi. iii., fig. 10.
Not Sertularia distans. Allman. Gulf Stream Hydroids,
1877. p. 25. pi. xvi., figs 9, 10; Nutting (as S. pour-
talesi), Amer. Hydr. — Sert., 1904, p. 59. pi. v., fig. 5.
Not Bynamena distans, Lamouroux, Hist. Polyp. Cor.-
Flex.. 1816, p. 180. pi. v. fig. 1 a. b.
S. tenuis is mentioned here for the purpose of rectifying the-
synonymy, which has become confused owing to the association of
the species with some others, which, however similar in the form of
the hydrothecae. differ from it widely in other respects. Mark-
tanner-Turneretscher first suggested its identity with a European
form which he considered a variety of .S'. gracilis, and Pictet
definitely stated that the two species were identical, overlooking the
fact that the original description of S. tenuis was, in more than
one point, obviously incompatible with the known characters of
.S'. gracilis. In view of the same description it is difficult to imagine
why Borradaile referred the species to the genus Thuiaria.

Billard accepted Pictet's statement, but having satisfied himself
from his examination of Lamouroux' types that the Bynamena
distans of that author was the same species as S. gracilis, ranked
all these forms together, as well as the S. distans of Allman, and
some other American species, which, however. Nutting considers
distinct.

S. gracilis is a typical example of what Schneider calls the
" By n a mena-gr oup " of Sertularians ; that is to say, it has the-

10

130 W. l\I. Bale:

hydrothecae in opposite pairs, and when l)i-anches are produced they
spring from below (or sometimes above) one of the paired hydro-
thecae. Thus there is no difference in the arrangement of the
]iydrothecae on the stem and the branches, or as Nutting says we fin<l
"the stem and branches alike in every particulai." This is
obviously the simplest form of ramification possible, and is especi-
i\\\y found among the Diphnsine. Now, from this arrangement S.
.tenuis differs entirely, and, so far as the ramification is concerned
•(though not otherwise), it agrees with Schneider's " Thuiaria-
group," having each of the regular alternate pinnae springing from
below an axillary unpaired hydrotheca, while the stem-internode
supporting it supports also the normal pair, which in these circum-
stances are generally sub-alternate, the one on the same side as the
pinna being set higher up. The arrangement is exactly the same as in
.S'. marginata and niimerous larger species, such as 8. elongata, and
by its differentiation of the stem and pinnae is of a more advanced
type than that of .S". ;/rac/l/s. Besides the distinction Ijetween the three-
celled internodes of the stem and the tAvo-celled ones of the pinnae,
there is the further difference that the hydrothecae of the stem are
more divergent than those of the pinnae. Yet another distinction
which has been overlooked is that S. grdciJis has the nodes at
<listant and irregular intervals, while S. feni/is has them below
«very pair of hydrothecae (or every three hydi-otliecae in the case
of the stem). Some species, however, are said to vary in this
particular, and -S'. tenuis may possibly do so. but I have seen no
instances, except in the special cases mentioned Vjelow.

While the pinnae, when present, are usually regular and alternate,
the habit is not so firmly established as to preclude the occurrence
of frequent irregularities. Thus it is not unusual to find the two
lowest pinnae of a shoot on one internode and opposite (a condi-
tion, it may be remarked, which occasionally occurs in several other
small alternately-branched species, both of Sertiilar/(i and Phnnii-
laria). The internode thus bears four hydrothecae. the two axillaiy
ones and the regular pair, which are now opposite. Even on a
pinnate stem there may bo intercalated between two pinna-bearing
internodes an intoi-nodi- sujtjKuting (inly a ])air «>t' hydiothecae. It
is usual for the four or five intei-nodos at the top i>f a pijinate stem
to bear hydrothecae only, in which rase tliis portion entirely
resembles a pinna, the hydrothecae being ojijiositc and becoming*
less divergent towards the summit, 'i'lu- sini)))*' slioots. which are
the most numerous, have ri'gular t \vo-rfll('(l internodes, Imt tlie
hydrothecae (except at ihe to]») are widelv diveigent. like tliose

Australian Hydroids. 131

■on the stems of tlie pinnate form, except that they are opposite and
generally in contact in front. I have seen an alinormal case of a
hydrotheca being transformed and continued as a branch. The
hydrotheca-bearing portion of the pinna is separated from the
dadophore by a sliort internode. exactly as in S. marginata.

The gonangia are pear-shaped, tapering below, not compressed,
but circular in section, and with the outline towards the summit
somewhat concave outwardly, thus differing from the " round-
shouldered " compressed form found in certain species otherwise
Tery closely allied to S. tenuis.

Sertularia divergens Busk.

Sertularia divergens, Busk, Voy. of Rattlesn.. i.. 1(S52. p.

392; Bale, Aust. Hyd. Zooph. 1884, p. 81. pi. v., fig. :5.

pi. xix., fig. 16; Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat. 0 ser., ix..

1909, p. 322.

Not Bynamena divergens, Lamouroux, Hist. Polyp. Cor.

Flex., p. 180, pi. v., fig. 2.
(?) Not Sertularia moluccana, Pictet, Rev. .Suisse de Z<m.1.
i., 1893, p. 50, pi. ii., figs. 42, 43.
This species or variety differs from S. tenuis in the more compact
liabit, the shorter hydrothecae and internodes, and the closer pinnae,
which are somewhat more divergent. The pinnate habit seems more
■confirmed; indeed, I have not yet observed any of the unbrauched
shoots which in .S'. tenuis predominate, though such will doubtle.ss
occur.

Pictet considered his S. moluccana a variety of this species, but
he renamed it because he regarded it as distinct from Lamouroux"
species. I do not think S. moluccana is the same, judging bv
Pictet's figure. He mentions that the ramification agrees with my
description, but the ramification is common to many other species.

The investigations of Billard confirm the opinion expressed ])y
Pictet, and earlier by myself, that this is not the D. divergens of
Lamouroux, but as that species is the same as S. hicuspidata, Lam-
:arck, which name Billard has adopted, the name may stand as
S. divergens, Busk, unless it be treated, as Billai-d with nnuh
reason proposes, as a mere variety of S. tenuis.

Sektui..\ria acanthostoma Bale.

.Sertularia acanthostoma. Bale, Jouin. Micr. Soc. Vict., ii.,
1881, p. 23, pi. xii., fig. 4; id., Aust. Hydr. Zooph.,
1884, p. 85. pi. iv., fig. 7, 8; Billard. Arch. d. Zool.

132 W. M. Bale:

Exp.. 4 ser.. vii.. 1907, p. 352; Bartlett, Geelong

Naturalist, 2 ser., iii., 1907, p. 44. fig. — ; Warren,

Ann. Nat. Gov't. Museum, i., 1908. p. 303, fig. 7, pi.

xlvi.. figs. 23-26.

Billard has pointed out that in this species there are not always

three pairs of hydrothecae between every two pairs of pinnae, as

stated in the original description, but that the number varies, three,

however, being the rule. I have noticed a similar irregularity in

a Portland specimen given to me by Mr. Maplestone, which has four

pairs in some of the intervals, thus agreeing with the majority of

cases in which Billard found a departure from the typical number.

I have also met with a specimen in which the stem, consisting of

thirteen internodes, Avas unbranched throughout.

Warren mentions that liis Natal speciTnens were usually covered
with a delicate algal incrustation. This organism is also very com-
monly found on Australian specimens.

S. pluridenfafa (Kii-chenpaiier), another African species, is re-
markably similar to the present in the general form of the hydro-
thecae. The pinnae, however, are not opposite, but, according tO'
Kirchenpauer. irregular. The denticulation of the hydrotheca-
bordfer appears to agree with tliat of S. acanfhontomn in so far that
it is symmeti-ical on the two sides of the hydrotheca, but the teeth
differ both in number and arrangement, S. acavthostoma having
sixteen, while <S'. pluridentata has only eight. These eight are
arranged precisely like those of many Statoplean Plumularians ;
that is to say, there is a median unpaired tooth on the adcauline
extremity of the border, and a similar one on the apocauline margin,
while each of the intermediate sides supports three teeth, thus
making two unpaired teeth and three pairs. In .S". acanfhnstoma
there are no median teeth on either the adcauline or the apocauline
margins, but the teeth are arranged in eight synunetrical pairs on
the tAvo sides. Warren's figure of the hydrotheca. seen from above,
presents a quite stiiking resemblance to the front view of llalivor-
narla iliciafoiiKt . in which also the teeth are airanged. some point-
ing iuAvard and others outAvard.

Dr. Warren has furnished interesting details of the sti-ucture.
pointing out especially that in the concave depression at the outer
margin of the hydrothecii there is a thickening of the ectodermal"
epithelium. Avhich has very nuicli tlie character of a nematophore,
being provided with a l)atteiy of laige nematocysts similar to those-
found in the Plumularians. He also i-eitiarks that the hydrotheca,
is distinguished by possessing no trace of openulum.

Audrallan Hijdro'nU. 138

The gonothecae have only been observed by Bartlett. They are
described as " long, obovate, smooth, aperture operculate." They
are of unusually long proportions, widest a little above the middle
and btit little narrowed above; the operculate ajDerture seems to
be the full width of the top, and no collar is shown. The height,
according to Bartlett's figure, is about 2 mm., by 1 mm. in diameter.

8ertul.aria muellkri, n. sp. (Plate XIT., Fig.s. 1-5.)

Shoots thickly clustered, simple, nearly half an inch in height,
slender, divided by conspicuous oblique joints into internodes, each
of which supports a pair of hydrothecae about the middle.

Hydrothecae opposite, in contact in front, separated behind,
tubular, divergent, but with the distal part curved upward; aper-
ture very large, looking upward, with two long pointed teeth, erne
in front, the other, which is slightly larger, on the back outer margin.

Gonothecae borne on the proximal part of the shoots, mostly 2-4-
on each; ovate, somewhat compressed, very liigh-shouldered ; oritiee
small, operculate, with a narrow denticulate collar.

Hah. — Encounter Bay.

This species has some affinity with -S'. minima, but the internodes
are considerably longer and more attenuated, the hydrothecae have
the aperture more expanded, looking more upward and with longer
teeth, and there is a characteristic curve upward of the outer side
of the hydrotheca at the top. To a certain extent they resemble
the hydrothecae of S. opercidnta. The gonangia are of the same
general type as those of S. minima, but rather irregular, many of
them having the shoulders very high and somewhat angular. Tho
shoots are produced in great profusion, a slendei- linear alga ten
inches long, being thickly clothed with them from end to end.

The specimen was given to me by the late Baron von Mueller.

PlUMULARI.V C.^.MHANl'LA Busk.

Phininlaria rawpauuhi , Busk, Voy. of Rattlesn.. i., l.'^r)2,
p. 401 ; Bale, Aust. Hydr. Zooi^h.. 1884. p. 124, pi. x..
tig. 5; id., Proc. Lin. Soc. N.S.W.. Ser. 2, iii.. 1S88. p.
776, pi. XX., figs. 1-6; id.. Tr. and Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.,
xxiii.. 1887, p. 94; id.. Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vi..
N.S.. 1893. p. 113; Marktanner-Turneretscher. Ann.
d. k. k. Naturh. Hofmuseums. v.. 1890. p. 255; Far-
quhar. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxviii., 1896. p. 466; Billard.
C. R. Acad. d. Sci., cxlvii., 1908. p. 759.

134 W. M. Bale .

Plumularia uidivii<a, Bale, Jouin. Micr. Soc. Vict., ii.,

1881, p. 39, 46, pi. XV., %. 1.
Phimularia laxa. Allinan, Chall. Plum. 1883, p. 19, pi. i.,.

figs. 5, 6.
Plumalarlu torresia. Von Lendenfeld. Proc. Lin. Soc.

N.S.W., ix., 1884, p. 477, pi. xiii., figs. 13, 14, pi. liv.,

fig. 16.
Plumularia ruhru, Von Lendenfeld, Proc. Lin. Soc. N.S.W.,

ix., 1884, p. 476, pi. xiii., figs. 11, 12, pi. liv., fig. 15.
The simple form of this species was described by me in 1881
under the name of P. indivisa, but it was mentioned in an adden-
dum that it had been found to be identical with the stemless form
described by Busk. It is introduced hei'e for the purpose of recti-
fying its erroneous association by several Avriters with the widely-
distributed P. secundaria, consecjuent on Dr. Billard's report that
Busk's type specimen in the British Museum was the same as that
species. This statement is doubtless correct, being confirmed in
letters from both Dr. Billard and Di'. Kirkpatrick, nevertheless
Busk's account shows clearly that the specimens which he had before
him were not P. secu/idaiia : moreover, my specimens agree precisely
with those described by Busk. Obviously this is an instance, like
others I have met with, in whicli the museum specimen is erroneously
labelled; and in this case the confusion is not surprising, as the
two forms cannot be distinguished from each other without micro-
scopical examination, and, as I have now ascertained, both are
found in the same locality.

Under the microscope the two hydroids are easily distinguished.
The short, stout, rigid or semi-rigid lateral sarcothecae of P. cam-
panula and its stemless variety, are in themselves sufficient to-
mark it as distinct from any species with the long, wine-glass-shaped
cups found in P. secundaria. P. catharina, etc.. as Busk points out.
Other differences are the presence in P. secundaria of a very small
sarcotheca behind the hydrotheca. not found in P. campanula, and
also the presence of one, two, or three, but generally two, median
sarcothecae on the uppei' part of each internode, where P. cam-
pa nuta has only one.

The ramification of P. campanula is very variabU-. Kirst we
have the iridivisa-iovm, in which simple hydrocladia spring dirt'ctly
fioiii the hydroihiza. Among these we find shoots which give origin
to (inc. or perhaps two, secondary hydrocladia. From the^e the
tiansition is easy to regularly pinnate forms, such as constitute the
P. ruhra of Von Lendenfeld; and thence to the polysiphonic

AiisfrdlloH IhiilroHls. 135

l)r;tii(lif<l tniiii (Icsciihrd liy \'on Leiidenfeld as /''. forresia, and
l>v Alliiiiiiiii as /'. 1(1.1(1. 'I'Ik'sl' forms also frequently bear additional
liyilroehulia spriiiijing at irre<rular intervals from the re<!:ulai- pin-
nately-disposed sei-ies.

PH'MULAHIA HAUIA K i tclien ]>;uicr.

liiuinihirid Ixulid. Kirclienpaiu 1. Ahli. Nat. Ver. Hamb.,
vi.. 1876, p. 45, pi. i.. iv.. Htr. -J; Bale, Catal. Aust.
Hyd. Zooph., 1884, p. 128. pi. xviii., figs. 1-2.
I'himiiJdiid rai/i. <(////'. Bale, Cat. Aust. Hydr. Zooph., 1884,.
].. l.-'.l. pi. xi., figs. :5, 4; id.. Proe. Lin. Soc. N.S.W.^
Ser. 2, iii., 1888. p. 74(5; Kirkpatrick. Sci. Proe. Roy.
Dubl. Sol-., vi., (N.S.), 1890, p. 604.
I'liiiniiliirid. i/rac/l/s, \'on Lendenfeld, Proe. Lin. Soc.
X.S.W.. ix.. 1884, p. 476. pi. xiv., tig. 17, pi. xvii.,
figs. 28, 29.
Dr. Hartlaub has kindly examined, at my request, the type speci-
mens of Kirchenpauei's P. hadia, and has found them to be, as I
suspected, identical with P. ramsa//i. The point into which the
anterior lip of the hydrotheca is, accoiding to Kirchenpauer, pro-
duced, is not really present, neither are the other features by which
the species appeared to be distinguished from P. ramsayi . So far
from being produced as shown, the front of the hydrotheca is really
somewhat everted, though very slightly.

Aglaophkxia ukkvirostris (Musk). (Plate XllT., Figs. 7, 9.)

Pluiniildiid },rcriro><friH. Busk. Voy. of Rattlesn., i.. 1852

p. 397.
Adldoplieiiid 1>reriro><tris, Bale. Aust. Hyd. Zooph., 1884,.

p. 169; Kirkpatrick, Sci. Proe. Roy. Dubl. Soc. vi.

(X.S.). 1890, p. 611 ; Billard. C. R. Acad. d. Sci.,.

rxlviii.. 190i). p. 368.
Thec(irdijni.< hrc ri roxf ri x, Billaid. Ann. Sci. Nat., 9 ser.,.

xi., 1910. p. 51. fig. 24.
Afihioplitiiid Jieferocdi-pd. Bale. Journ. .\Iicr. Soc. Vict.,.

ii.. 1881. ]). .30 (note).
Aglaopheuid rifiana. Bale. Aust. Hydr. Zooph., 1884, p.

152.
Aiil(i(ij)]ii'iiid iiidhli rciixix. Borradaile. I'^auiia a)id Geogr. of

tlie Maid, and Laecad. Arcliip.. ii.. 1905. p. 843, pi.

Ixix.. fiixs. S-8b.

136 W. M. Bale:

Not Plumularia (for Aglnnpheiiia) vitiana, Kircheupauer,
Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamb., v., 1872, p. 34, pi. i. iii., fi^. 9;
Billard, Arch. Zool. Exp. et Gen., 4 Ser.. vii.. l!)07.
p. 388, figs. 22, 23.

Hydrophyton aljoiit one inch in height, polysiphonic in the ohler
portions only, and small specimens monosiphonic througlnnit ;
branched or unbranched, branches when present all in one plane,
given off at very wide angles from the supplementary tubes; inter-
nodes normally supporting each a hydrocladium, but the nodes
often indistinct. Hydrocladia straight, alternate, divergent at a
wide angle (about 65 deg.) in one plane, nodes transverse, doisum
-of hydrocladia slightly serrate.

Hydrothecae borne on the front of the hydrocladia, tubular, more
or less abruptly bent in the middle (proximal and distal extremities
being bent away from the hydrocladium); a -rudimentary ridge or
fold near the base, directed obliquely forward ; aperture expanding,
border with a large strongly-incurved anterior tooth, two large
triangular teeth on each side, and two angular lobes above the
lateral sarcothecae ; back entire, adnate. A very slight septal ridge
generally present, opposite the intrathecal fold.

Mesial sarcothecae free for about half their length, embracing
the whole of the proximal part of the hydrotheca, and then project-
ing forward over the aperture; with a small circular terminal orifice
and a larger inferior one adjoining the hydrotheca, the two united
by an inconspicuous slit; an additional orifice opening into the
hydrotheca. Lateral sarcothecae small, sub-conical, directed for-
ward or downward and somewhat outward, terminal and lateral
apertures generally united. Cauline sarcothecae with wide, free
distal margin, two at the base of each hydrocladium. A minute
apparent perforation on each hydrocladium-process.

Gonangial ramules with a normal hydrotheca on the first inter-
node; corbula consisting of about five pairs of leaflets with lobed
edges, which are united by the lobes, leaving a series of small
openings between them; rows of sarcothecae very irregularly placed.
those nearest the rachis mostly bordering the distal edges of the
leaflets, but those higluT up Iti sliort rows, not at the edges; each
leaflet with a large sinus near the base on the distal side, in which
is seated a small hydrotheca with its two lateial sarrotln'cae. Rachis
generally produced beyond the coibula, its tL'rniinal portion sup-
porting about two somewhat moditied liydrothrcae.

Colour, light brown.

Australian Hi/drouls. 137

Hab. — Fiji, on a coral: off Cimiheihuid Ids.. 27 fathoms
(Busk): Torres Strait (Haddon) : on the re.-f at Hulule. MaU- Atoll
(BorradaileV

Busk's original description of F. hrevirostris was insufficient to
admit of its identification, but Dr. Kirkpatrick kindly compared
one of my specimens with Busk's type, and has also sent me a
specimen from Haddon's Torres Strait collection, which proves
similar in all respects to my own specimens from Fiji. These I
■described in 1881 under tlie pi-oposed name of A. het trocar pa, but
I afterwards referred them to the A. ritiuua of Kirchenpauer
(" Catalogue," p. 152). The later descriptions by Billard of both
A. vitiana and A. hreviroslris seem to prove, however, that this
reference was erroneous.

Nevertheless, the two species have many points of agreement.
Both were found growing on a coral from Fiji; in size, habit, and
colour they agree closely, as well as in some minor particulars. The
branches in each species spring from the supplementary tubes, so
that branching cannot occur till the polysiphonic structure is
developed, which in many cases is not till growth is well advanced.
One of my specimens of A. Jirevirofttris consists of a single shoot
bearing five corbulae, but with no trace of fasciculation. The proxi-
mal part of the stem is naked at first, then supporting a few large
sarcothecae in a single row before the hydrocladia are reached.

The principal distinction l)etweeH the hydrothecae of the two
species is that in A. vitiana there is an anterior intrathecal ridge
similar to that of Lytocarpus phillipiiiuf:, while in A. brevirosfris
the distal part of the hydrotheca,. though ul)ruptly recurved, does
not become united to the proximal portion, so that instead of an
intrathecal ridge there is on the apocauline side of the hydrotheca a
deep constriction. In A. vitiana the two principal teeth on each
side of the hydrotheca are said to be l)ifid. and the internode is
described as having three septal ridges, or sometimes only two.
A. brevirosfris has the lateral teeth simply triangular, and there
is scarcely ever more than one septal ridge, which subtends the
inthrathecal fold. In A. vitiana the internodes are stouter, as is
the mesial sarcotheca, and the canaliculate condition of the latter is
more apparent.

Both Billard's and Borradaile's figures show the constriction of
the hvdrotheca as much less abrupt than is usuallv the case. In
Haddon's specimen, as well as in my own. such hydrothecae are
abundant, but in both cases the majority are of the more abruptly
bent type.

138 W. M. Bale:

A singular condition noted by Billard as occurring in A. vitiana
and Idia prisfis is observable also in A. brevirostris, namely, the
reversal of the front and back of the polypidom. I have once
observed the same thing in A. sinuosa, but it would seem to be a
common occurrence in .4. hrevirosfris, as it is found in more than
one of my few specimens. In one instance a branch has the hydro-
cladia up to about the middle all fronting one way. suddenly a
reversal occurs, and the hydrocladia face in the opposite direction;
this continues for a distance including four hydrocladia on each
side, and then a second reversal takes place, and on the rest of the
branch the hydrocladia face as at the beginning. In another case
the part of the shoot including the first five hydrocladia faces one
way, and the remainder in the opposite direction. Billard found
that these reversals followed a regeneration of a broken part; in my
specimens, however, this did not appear to be the cause, as I could
find not the slightest breach of continuity in the branches.

The corbulae of A. hrevirosfris are interesting structui'es, com-
bining, as I pointed out in 1881, the general character of the
A. pluma type with the presence of hydrothecae on the leaflets.
The attachment of the leaflets to each other by the marginal lobes,
leaving small interstices between, is a feature found also in the
corbulae of A. macrocarpa. Another noteworthy feature is the
continuation of the gonocladium beyond the corbula, where it
resumes for a short distance the character of a hydrocladium, sup-
porting one or two hydrothecae.

Lytocarpus aukitus (Busk). (Plate XIII., Fig. 10).

Plumul(tri(i (iiiritti. Busk, Voy. of Battlesn., i., 1852, p.

397.
AfflaopJunld (nirita. Bale, Aust. Hydi'. Zoopli., 1884. p.

169. pi. xviii.. figs. 18. 19.
Liltocdv pitx phd n'i<'('\is (iiirlttis, Billard. ('. K. Acail. d.
Sei.. cxiviii.. 1909. p. aOT ; id.. Ann. d. Sci. Nat.. 9 ser.,
xi.. 1910. p. 4i).
AiilaophfiiKi (lls'iiiiictd . Pictrt. Rev. Suisse dc Zoo!., i.,
189:5. }.. r)9. pi. iii.. figs. .')1. 52.
HydrophytoTi 2-."! imlii's in heiglit. polysiphonic in the older
portions oidy. and sTiiall spcH'iniciis monosiphonic throughout,
branched or unl)iaiKhcd ; bi-anchi's wIkmi present all in one plane,
given off almost at right angk's fioni the sujiplementary tul)es. each
internode normally supporting a hydrocladium, but the uodt's often
indistinct. Hydrocladia straight, alternate, divergent at a wide

Australian Hydroiih. \'i^

angle (al)Oiit 75 deg. to 80 deg.), and a little directed towards the-
front ; nodes transverse or scarcely oblique, indistinct.

Hydrothecae borne toAvards the front of the hydrocladia, with
which their longest diameter is parallel, a slight constriction near
the base on the adcauline side, continued- into a slight transverse-
fold ; an anterior intrathecal ridge projecting downwards from
between the front of the aperture and the mesial sarcotheca more
than half-way through the cell ; aperture at a small angle Avith the
hydrocladiuiu. sub-crenate. sub-plicate, each side forming an
angular lobe, front entire, a rounded lobe or an erect tooth behind.
Hydrothecal internode Avith tAA'o divergent septal ridges, one nearly
opposite the rudimentary posterior ridge, the other at the base of
the lateral sarcothecae ; generally a third midAvay betAveen them.

Mesial sarcotheca adnate to the front of the hydrotheca nearly
as far as the aperture and mainly rising from it, free part variable-
in length, slightly tapering, projecting forAvard at a varying angle,
Avith distinct terminal and inferior apertures and a small orifice
opening into the hydrotheca. Lateral sarcothecae conical or
tubular, either adnate and directed upwards, or large, free and
projecting doAvnAvaids from the hydrotheca; terminal and lateral
apertures distinct. Cauline sarcothecae similar to the laterals, but
Avider, tAA'o at the base of each hydrocladium.

(Gonosome 1

Colour, bright broAvn.

Hn}>. — Port Darwun Telegraph Cable : ofE Cumberland Island. 27
fathoms (Busk) : Bay of Amboyna. 80 metres (A. disjuncta, Pictet).

This species, like A. hrevirostris. Avas insufficiently described by
Busk, and remained unidentified until 1909, AA'hen Billard examined
Busk's type in the British Museum, and found its structure to agree
AA'ith that of L. phoernceus. But the habit is different; Busk say&
that the branches are at right angles to the stem, and that the
habit closely resembles that of A. hrevirostris (where the hydrocladia
also form a Avide angle Avith the rachis), while in all the varieties,
of L. phceniceus observed by me the branches, and also the hydro-
cladia, are set at angles of about 45 deg. L. auritus may
therefore be described as having the habit of A. hrevirostris with
the minute structure of L. phceniceus, and this description applies
to a small specimen which, I have had for many years, but which
I had ahvays hesitated to assign to L. phoeniceux (notAvithstanding
the similarity of the hydrothecae). on account of the different habit.
It Avas still in the monosiphonic stage, and, therefore, unbranched,
and Avas collected from the Port DarAvin cable. Avhcro it Avas growing-

340 W. M Bale:

in company Avith fertile specimens of L. phoeniceus. That the type
^specimen is similar is evident from the statement of Dr. Kirkpatrick,
who writes, " A. aurita seems to me to be a variety of A. yhfenicea.
The hydrothecae are identical, but the hydrocladia more separated
and at a wider angle." .

I have a sketch by Mr. Busk, showing the ramification only. It
represents a colony an inch and a half high, which divides just
above the base into three ascending stems, each of which gives
'Origin to two or three branches on each side, the branches being, as
Busk describes, " not opposite nor regularly alternate, divaricate at
right angles." (The " right-angled " condition is only approxi-
mate). Pictet's figure of his A. disjuncta agrees perfectly with
Busk's account and sketch.

As to the form of the hydrotheca Billard finds that Busk's speci-
men resembles most closely the form of L. phoetiiceux figured by me
on plate xv., fig. 5, of the " Catalogue," but with the median tooth
-less developed. My specimen differs from this in having the crena-
tion or plication of the hydrotheca-margin much feebler, also in
having the lateral sarcothecae of the erect type, while those of the
figure cited are directed downward. Some at least of Busk's sj^eci-
mens must have agreed with mine, since he descril)es the lateral
sarcothecae as rising above the hydrotheca. Pictet's specimen also
agrees in this particular, as well as in the feeble plication of the
liydrotheca-margin. It seems, therefore, that the wide range of
variation found in the hydrothecae of L. plifrnirtuii is paralleled
in L. auritus, and that Billard's suggestion to establish oiirifi/s as
•a variety based on a particular form of hydrotheca will scarcely be
applicable. The variety or species should be founded on the peculiar
habit, by which L. auritus is distinguished from all the forms of
L. p/ioenicetis.

Pictet's description and figure of his A. disjv/irfn agiee so closely
with L. auritus that I think there can be little doul)t of their
identity. The only points in which a distinction is iiKlicated are
the position of the hydrocladia in the same plane, and of the hydro-
thecae, which are said to face the front exactly. Both these de.scrip-
tions as applied to my specimen are only approximately loiii^l . luit
the differences are negligeable. The (Hstauce apart of tlie hydio-
thecae, which is the feature i-egarded by Pictet as of }>rinii})al
importance, is not greater than in one or two foi-nis of L.
phoeniceus in my possession.

Aiistraliav,. Hydro ids. 14>

Halk^oknakia akcuata (Laniouroux). (Plate X ITT., Figs. 1-4).

Agldojihenia arcuata, Lamouroux, Hist. Polyp. Cor. Flex...
1816. p. 167, pi. iv., fig. 4a, Vj ; Kirchenpaner. Abh.
Nat. Ver. Hamb., v., 1872, p. 27, pi. i.. fig. 10.
Plumidarla arcuata, Lamai'ck, An. s. Vert. 2nd Ed. ii., 1836..

p. 166.
Aglaophtnia ar(iuat<i, Kiuuss, Coral, u. Zoopli. d. Siidsee^.

1837, p. 24.
llalicornnvUi arcnata (in part), Billurd, Arch. d. Zool.
Exp.. 4 ser., vii., 1007, p. 366, fig. 13; Stechow, Zool..
Jahrb., xxxii.. 1912, p. 369.
HaUcoriiaria cormtta, Allman, Journ. Ijin. Soc. Lond.,
Zool., xix., 1886, p. 153, pi. xxiii., figs. 1-4.
Hydrocaiilus luonosiplionic, uid)i-anched or dividing dichoto-
mously one or more times; hydrocladia alternate, one on each'
internode, set at an angle of about 45 deg. to 50 deg., and slightly
directed forward ; nodes slightly oblique.

Hydrothecae cup-shaped, deep and narrow, set at a wide-
angle (about 75 deg. to 80 deg.), no true intrathecal ridge,
but the apocauline wall somewhat incurved at the point where-
it is interrupted by the hydropore, wdiich is large and distinct;
aperture with a strong median anterior incurved tooth and
usually with three teeth on each side, of wliich the first and
third are large and everted, while the middle one is small and
incurved, the latter often more or less obsolescent or totally want-
ing; back produced upward into a long erect lobe with the edges
curved towards each other on the outer side, hydropore Avith one or
two minute denticles above and below. No septal ridges in th&
internode.

Mesial sarcotheca quite erect in the proximal portion, distal half
directed forward, either parallel with the hydrocladium or more-
obliquely; free part compressed laterally, very stout at the part
just above the hydrotheca, where the strongly salient aperture is
situated, terminal portion tapering very rapidly to the acute closed'
point. Lateral sarcothecae adnate, saccate, with two small circular
apertures close to the free margin, the lower onebecoming. in those-
near the end of the hydrocladium. produced into a large tubular-
mouth, or even into a long closed pointed horn, having its own-
lateral aperture, while the tipper circular orifice becomes obsolete.
Cauline sarcothecae similar to the latoi-als, two, close together, at
the base of each hvdrocladiuiii in front, and one at tlie back of each:

142 W. M. Bale:

(ionosome 1

Cdlour, blown (" fauve Ijiillant et fonce '" — Lainouroux).

Ilah. — Mer des Antilles (Laniouroux) : Algoa Bay and Algieis
((Krauss) : Fort Dauphin, Madagascar (Billard) : Cape of Good
Hope (Kirchenpauer).

This African species, which is not known to occur in Australia,
is introduced here on account of Billard's having referred to it our
M. ascidioides, which indeed singularly resembles it in several jDar-
.ticulars, but which, as I shall show, is nevertheless quite distinct.

The form which is described above (from specimens obligingly
forwarded to me by Dr. Stechow fi'om the Munich Museum) is. I
have no doubt, the true Aglitoplienla arcuata of Lamouioux and
Kirchenpauer (also the Halicornaria cornuta of Allman), but Billard
includes with it several forms which he considers to be the young
•colonies, and which, if really to be referred to the same s^Decies.
stamp it as variable to an extent unknown elsewhere in the order.
I have not seen these forms, some of which appear scarcely to differ
from our //. longirostris, and the specimens sent to me, which
include young colonies of only two centimetres in height and mature
ones of eleven or twelve, do not differ noticeably among themselves.
When the mesial sarcotheca is carried forward parallel with the
hydrocladium they agiee }-oughly Avith Lamouroux' figure, when it
is more oblique they approximate to Kirchenpauer's.

According to Lamouroux' figure the hydrocaulus is dichotomously
■divided several times, but from Billard's account the ramification
is peculiar and probably unique ; a branch springs from the front
of the hydrocaulus, and has its anterior aspect directed towards
that of the stem, and each successive branch grows in the same
manner. The result of this mode of branching appears to be that
all the branches are in one plane, but in a plane at right angles to
that of the hydrocladia. This may l)e contrasted with the condition
which prevails in //. furcota and its allies, where the hydrocaulus
bifurcates in a single plane, which is also the plane of the hydio-
cladia. According to Lamouroux' figure the l)ranches diverge at a
Tery wide angle (about 90 deg.).

Billard states that in young colonies the cauline intoinodes are
longer than wide, and nearly cylindrical, while in mature colonies
the side of the internode on which the hydrocladium is borne is
about double the length of the opposite side. The latter description
applies to all my specimens, young and old, except that the differ-
ence in length of the two sides is not so gi-eat. Tlie intt-i'iiodes arc

Australian Ilydrovh. 143

very short, and the one side being longer than the other it follows
that the nodes are oblique, alternately sloping to the right and the
left, so that the internode. as seen from the back or tlie front, appears
cuneate.

Billard's description of the hydrothecae in mature colonies is as
follows: — " Enfiu dans les colonies agees la region proximale et
moyenne des hydroclades montie des hydrotheques dont le l)ord
presente trois dents laterales, la premiere et la troisieme etant
rejetees vers I'exterieur, et la dent moyenne dirigee vers
I'interieur; dans la partie distale la dent moyenne qui se reduit
au fur et a mesure qu'on s'eleve a disparu completement et il
n'existe plus que deux dents laterales; de plus les dactylotheques
laterales sont tres allongees et atteignent jusqu'a 160/x. On a
ainsi un dessin qui Concorde en tous points avec celui donne
par AUman pour son espece U.alicornaria cornuta, et celle-ci ne se
distingue pas de I'espeee de Lamouroux.

" Les hydrotheques de ces colonies agees montrent une dent pos-
terieure extremement developpee; parfois elles possedent un repli
intrathecal; la presence de cette particularity permet de faire
entrer en synonymie YHalicornaria ascidioides Bale, qui possede
les memes caracteres. Les dactylotheques medianes sont plus fortes
•dans ces colonies agees, elles sont ouvertes ou bien parfois fermees
a leur extremite et il en est de meme des dactylotheques laterales
allongees."

The foregoing extract describes my specimens (both young and
old) exactly, with these exceptions — the lateral sarcothecae are not
usually so much elongated as described, the mesial sarcothecae are
in no case open at the ends, and there is no intrathecal ridge, at
least not such as H. ascidioides possesses, as will be presently
explained.

Billard says that tlie gonosome is unknown. Krauss. however,
mentions it in the following terms : — " Junge Exemplare haben
eben so einseitig in den Achseln der Fiederchen sitzende grossere
weibliche Zellen (sogenannte Blaschen). Am Strande ausgeworfen.
verliert diese Aglaophenia bald ihre Fiederchen. wahrend ein Theil
der weiblichen Zellen hangen bleibt und erhalt dadurch ein so
verandertes Ansehen, dass Mann eine ganz andere Art vor sich zu
haben glaubt." Unfortunately no description of these gonangia
is given.

In comparing this species with //. ascidio/de.< I may premise that
I am unable to find a branched specimen of the latter, though I
am under the impression that I have seen one. It is so extremelv

144 W. M. Bale:

close an ally of H. sujjerba that there is every probability that its
ramification would be similar; that is to say, a true branching, not
a dichotomous division. A definite distinction is seen in the
arrangement of the hydrocladia; those of //. arcuata are borne each
on a separate internode, and are consequently always alternate, while
in H. ascidioides every internode bears two hydrocladia, which are
always opposite or nearly so. The hydrothecae of H . arcuata differ
in form from those of H . ascidioides, being narrower towards the
base, and are more erect, the central axis of the latter being at
about 60 deg. to the internode. while that of the former is about
80 deg., the anterior side being indeed almost or quite at a right
angle. The hydropore in //. arcuata is more conspicuous than in
most species, owing to the perjsarc being thickened up to the edge
of the pore, so that the abrupt interruption is very noticeable
in optical section. The slight ridge or projection inside the
apocauline wall of the hydrotheca is caused by this thickened edge
being more or less incurved just where it borders the hydropore on
the upper side, and is therefore not analogous to the intrathecal
ridge in H. ascidioides (and all the members of its group), which
is a distinct septum, springing from the wall of the hydrotheca and
projecting half across its cavity, and which does not border the
hydropore but is situated some distance above it. Such a ridge i&
truly " intrathecal," while the ridge in H. arcuata is not within
the hydrotheca at all, but is merely a portion of its boundary. At
the same time there is no doubt that this rudimentary ridge in-
dicates how the fully-developed ridge of such species as H.
ascidioides has originated. The inflection of the hydrotheca-wall
has been extended till it reached half across the cell, and then the-
inflected portions have been brought into contact and united. But
this extension could not occur in a form like H. arcuata, unless
the hydropore were removed away from the ridge to a lower posi-
tion, as in the other species. While in most members of the genus
the hydropore is muclj less conspicuous than in H. arcuata, its
whereabouts is easily discernible (where the specimen is clean) by
the little points of perisarc which project from its upper and lower
margins. These denticles are a c-haracter which I have found
common to all the species of IlaUcornaria which I have yet observed.
In //. arcuata they are less conspicuous tlian in most species, but
one or two can generally be made out, at least on the upper border
of the hydropore, which, in this species, is the " ridge."

In regard to the hydrotheca-margin the two species differ notably.
Both have an anterior tooth and one on the back, but the latter in.

Aiisti'til i(vn Hi/drald.s. 145

//. arcuatd is imuli laijirr and has the ed^'es turned outwards and
recurved till it dftni appears (|uitr tulmlai-. The lateral teeth, how-
ever, arc the most distinctive. There are normally three on each
side; in //. /is</(/ioi(fes the middle one is always the largest (or at
least as large as either of the others), and is always more or less
everted, as are also the fii-st and third. In //. arcuata, on the con-
trary, the middle tooth is the smallest, and is incurved, while the
first and third are everted. Tn both species the lateral teeth may be
reduced to two on each side, but in //. areiiatn this results from the
gradual disappearance of the incurved middle tooth, in //.
ascif/in/des it is always the third tooth which becomes obsolete. In
all the Austialian species of the ancidio/des-gvomp the rule -holds
good that tlie middle lateral tooth is the principal one; in some
cases the first may become obsolete, in" others the third, and in others
again lioth the first aTid third, but the middle one is in every species-
well developed, and always everted. The obsolescence of the middle
tooth in //. arena fa becomes more pronounced towards the ends of
the hydrocladia, but I do not find this to be the case with the
decrease of the third tooth in H. ascidioides, the hydrothecae near
the ends often having the teeth best developed.

The mesial sarcothecae of H. arcuata. differ from those of H.
ascidioides by tlie more erect proximal portion, the much more
pronounced tapering of the free portion, and the closed pointed
ends. I have never seen the ends closed in H. ascidioides, except
in certain deformed specimens, where they were bluntly rounded.
The lateral sai-cothecae of H. ascidioides are never, so far as I
have seen, prolonged into long closed horns as in H. arcuata, though
as in many other species the tubular mouth is considerably elon-
gated towards the ends of the hydrocladia. Only on the proximal
part of the hydrocladia in //. arcuata are the little circular orifices^
equally developed, the lower ones become progressively more and
more prominent towards the ends of the hydrocladia, where they
attain the condition of rather long open tubes, oi- even pointed
horns. In either case they have a lateral orifice on the inner side,
and the upper of the two circular orifices has disappeared.

I have figured H. ascidioides along with H . arcuata for com-
parison. fSee plate XIIT).

H.\LIfORNARIA SUPERB.A. Bale.

Af/laopJieiiia superha. Bale, Journ. Micr. Soc. Vict., ii.,.

1881, p. .31, 45, pi. xiii.. fig. 4-4b.
Halicornari^i auperha. Bale. Aust. Hydi-. Zooph.. 1884, p.

4: id.. Proc. Rov. Soc.

IT.-).

pl-

liii.

. Hg,

1. pl

. x^

ri..fig

Vict..

, vi

1.. N

.S..

189.3,

P-

107.

146 W. M. Bale:

I mention this species for the purpose of describing its mode of
branching, and, incidentally, of contrasting it with the very dif-
ferent ramification of other members of the same section. The six
or seven species Ln question form a very natural group, distin-
guished from all our other species (except //. hiroxtrata) Ijy the
possession of a strongly-developed anterior ridge, and from all oui-
other Statoplea by the position of that ridge. The minor charac-
teristics of this group enable us to divide it into three sub-groups,
the first consisting of //. ai^cidioides and H . superha, which are very
intimately allied; the second of H. haileyi. H. fiircata, and H.
intermedia, which approximate even more closely ; and the third of
H . hians and H. haswellii, which also are nearly akin.

I have not seen either of the two last-named species in a branched
condition, and though I believe I have seen a ))ranched specimen of
E. ascidioides, I cannot find one for reference. I have, however,
several such specimens of //. i^nperha, the ramification of which is
quite different from that of //. haileyi and its two allies. In these
latter there are strictly speaking no branches, every subdivision
being purely dichotomous (resulting in general from the bifurcation
of a single internode) ; the two new divisions are of equal diameter,
each diverges at about the same angle from the primary axial line,
and the perisarc is not interrupted at the bifurcation, but con-
tinuous, and even the regular spacing of the llydrocladia along the
outer sides of the hydrocaulus is not interfered with.

H. svperha is generally unbranched, but here and there among
a large cluster is found a shoot giving off a small branch, or some
times two, and in one case I found three. In many instances these
branches sprang from the lower part of the stem, where it was
denuded of hydi'ocladia, and were themselves bare on the proximal
portion. There is no dichotomous arrangement, but a perfect
distinction is maintained between stem and branches, the latter
being smaller, and divergent abruptly from the side of the stem;
indeed, they mostly start out at a right angle, though very soon
curving upwards. The perisarc in their proximal portion is divided
into internodes, much more strongly marked than the internodes of
the hydrocladiate portions, and without hydrocladia, thus agreeing
with the structure of the branches in the Statoplea generally, which
is, in fact, simply a ic|H'tition of the primary structure of the
proiiniiil pait of thr striii itst'lf. On a specimen which I examined
one branch coiniiioiiifil with an exceedingly siidit disioid internode,
unarmed; the next was longer, cylindrical, with a large sa>-cotheca
in the middle; then ftillowed live longer internodes, each of which

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 1913. Plate XII

7^ ^^

Proc. E.S. Victoria, l!»i:{. Plate XIII.

Australian Hydroids. 147

bore two large sarcothecae abreast; the sixth bore on one side a
sarcotheca, and on the other a normal hydrocladium with its two
cauline sarcothecae, and the I'est were typical. Another branch
commenced similarly so far as the first and second internodes were
concerned, then followed one inter node, with two sarcothecae
abreast, the fourth supported one hydrocladium, and the remainder
two each. The branches originate at the side of the stem, between
two hydrocladia; the order of the hydrocladia is not disarranged,
and as the branch is thick it occiq^ies the wliole of the space betAveen
the two.

EXPLANATION OF PL.ATES.

Platk XTT.

Fig. 1. — Sertulnria muelleri, n.sp. Front view.

Fig. 2. — ,, ,, ,, Back view.

Figs. 3-5. — ,. ,, ,,. (xouothecae.

Fig. 6. — Sertiihiria tiirhhiata (Laniouroux).

Fig. 7. — Sertidaria locidosn Bale.

Fig. 8.- „ „ „ var.

Fig. 9. — Sf.rf;idaria marginata (Kii-chenpauer).

Fig. 10 — HebeMa scandenn (Bale), on Sipdhfcium rijliiKlrirnni

(Bale).
Fig. 11. — Hehella cylivdrira (Von Lendenfeld), on Syntherivm

alter nans A 11 man.

(All niHgiiitied 40 diameters).

Plate XIII.

Fig. 1. — Ilalicornaria arcnata (Laniouroux).

Fig. 2. — „ ,, ,, from the same colony.

Fig. 3. — ,, ,, ,, middle of pinna.

Fig. 4. — ,, ,, ,, end of pinna.

Fig. 5. — Halicornnria ascidioides Bale.

Fig. 6. — ,, ,, ,, end of pinna.

Fig. 7. — Aylaojjhenui brevirostria (BusU).

Fig. 8. — ,, ,, ,, fi'om .same colony.

Fig. 9—

Fig. 10. — Lytocarpua aurihiH (Busk).

(All magnitied 80 diameters).

[Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.S.). Ft. I., 1913]

Akt. XI. — On Eucalyptiis polyhractea, R. T. Baker.

By K. T. baker, F.L.S.

(Curator, Technological Muaeiun, Sydney).

Communicated by Prof. A. J. Ewart, D.So.

In a paper — " A Census of Victorian Eucalyptus " — read by
myself before the Australasian Association for the Advancement of
Science, in Melbourne, in January, 1913, this Eucalyptus is recorded
as Victorian under the above name.

After reading my paper, a specimen was shown to me in the
National Herbarium under a label bearing Mueller's writing, E.
frutlcetorum. This has caused me to go once more into the
nomeclature of the two species, for I had already gone over the
ground before describing the species in 1900.1

The name E. polyhractea was bestowed by myself in 1900.

Since this Eucalyptus was described under the above name it has
had various positions given it by other systematic workers on the
Eucalyptus.

In 1903, Trans. Roy. Soc. South Australia, Vol. xxvii., pp. 240
and 244, Mr. J. H. Maiden places it along with E. Woollsiana^
E . riridis, and others, as a synonym of E. odorata, Behr.

In 1903, Crit. Rev. Gen. Euc, Vol. i., p. 80, the same author
places it as a synonym of E. calycogona, Turcz., var. celastroideSy
Maiden, and further states: — "I do not think that the original
desoiption of A\ fruticetoruni, F. v. M., had been published in
Australia until I transcribed it for the Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W.,
1902.

'' I am aware of the confusion that has gathered around E.
frill icetormn, but Mf. Wilkinson's specimens, named E. frutice-
toriiin by Mueller himself, although gathered many years after the
original type specimens were collected, answer the description very
well. Bentham (B. Fl., Ill, 252) states that the West Australian
specimens refcncd to by Mueller in Frag, ii., 57, are referred to
E. loxoj)hleha, Benth., {E . fotcitnda, Schauei). They are also
stated to be the E. mntalifoli((, of Micpiel (op. lit. and Mueller in
Trans.. Vict., Inst., i., 35).

1 Proc'. Uiiii Soc, N.S.W., vol. xxv., 1000, y. 602.

Eucatyptuus Polyhractea. 149

E. fruticetorum, F. v. M.. is glaucous, and is so very close to
E. celastroides, Tuicz.. that I think its proper place is under E.
calycoffona, Turcz.. var. celastroides, Maiden.

The E. gracilis, F. v. M., figured by Muellei- in the Encalypt-
ographia, is not typical E. calycogoita. but in part a slightly angled
form nearest to E. frnticeforum."

Again (loc. cit.). Part iv., issued 1904, he states: — " Tliis is (as
regards the Westei-n Austialian specimens) identical witli E. loxo-
phleba, Benth.. (B. Fl.. iii.. 252). I have shown (Part iii.. p. 80
of this woi-k) tliat E. fnificeloniin is a synonym of E. vnhjvoiiona,
Turcz."

In 1904 the same authm-. Pioc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.. p. 761. under
E. odorata, Behr. gives: ''E. cajnputed. V. v. M.. syn. E. poly-
hractea, K.T.B."

Ibid. p. 763. — " Indeed, botli it (E . ararioides. A. Cunn.) and
E. cajriputea (E. polyhractea) are closely related, and l)oth have
close affinity to E. odorafa."

Obid. p. 765.— Under E. Woolhiann, R.H.B.. states :—" Of the
identity of E. cajuputen and E. polyhractea, I liave little or no
doubt."

Ibid, p. 765. — " For example, Dombey Bay, S.A.. specimens
show the very great difficulty, perhaps the impossibility, of separat-
ing E. cajuputea from the Green Mallee (E . viridis) and from the
Blue Mallee (E . polyhractea)."

In 1910, by the same author', in his " Critical Revision of the
Genus Eucalyptus," vol. ii., p. 40-41, it is placed as a synonym of
E. frvticetorum, F. v. M., the article finishing up with these words :
— " The type specimen (of E . fruticetorum) seems to have been
lost. I made a personal search in the Melbourne Herbarium for
it, with the kind help of Prof. Ewart, and no trace of it can be
found at Kew, so Colonel Prain is good enough to tell me. There
is no good reason to doubt the correctness of Mueller's determina-
tion of this character specimen of his own species."

In the same work, vol. i., p. 79. Miieller's MS. description of
E. fruticetorum is given, but this is too meagre upon which to
place any systematic work.

Now, Bentham, Flora Australiensis iii.. p. 252. places this
species {E. frvticetorum) undei- E. loxophleha, Benth., which
Maiden, loc. cit.. vol. i.. p. 112, places under E. foecunda, Sch.,
and later, p. 119. remarks^" E. fruticetorum, F. v. M., Frag, ii.,
p. 57. This (as regards the Western Australian specimen) is iden-
tical Avith E. loxophelha, Benth. I have shown (Part iii.. p. 80. of

160 R. T. Baker:

this work) that E. fruticetorurn is a synonym of E. calycogona,
Turcz/'

In view of all this revision and counter-revision of nomenclature,
concerning this particular Eucalyptus — for first, it was synonym-
ised under E. odorata (loc. cit. supra.), then acacioides (loc. cit.),
then Woollsiana (loc. cit.), then cajuputea (loc. cit.), next viridis
(loc. cit.), then calycogona (loc. cit.), and, lastly, fruticetorum
(loc. cit.), it is only natural that one should take a still greater
interest in their own species, and this last determination has moved
me to go over the ground again.

I might also add that I visited the Melbourne Herbarium several
times and examined the specimens there before describing any of
my species, and also failed to find a specimen that could be identical
with E. polyhractea. In view, however, of the last that has come
to light, I have again gone over Mueller's description of E. frutice-
torum, Frag, ii., p. 57, and have also again considered all the
features in juxta-position with my own original description of
E. polyhractea.

It would go into too much space to particularise each difference,
but there are two that stand out very conspicuously, namely : —

K. fruticetorum, F. v. M. - E. polybractea, U. 'I'. B., Proc.

Frag. 11, 57. Lin. Soc. N.S.W., 1900, p. 692.

(1). I<eaves alternate, moderately - "leaves altei'nate," "lanceolate

petiolate, narrow-falcate or erect," '' rarely falcate," oblan-

oblong lanceolate ; papery or ceolate ; " coriaceous ; penvi-

leathery penniveined ; sliin- veined; "not shining ;" "mar-

ing, marginal vein close to ginal vein removed from the

the edge. Leaves 2-4'" long, edge;" "mid-rib on the imder-

4-8'" wide (these are impos- side raised, giving the leaf the

sible figures for leaves), taper- appearance of an olea leaf,"

ing into a point, often unci- 3-4'" long, under 6 lines wide,

nate. uncinate.

(2). Anthers svibovate. - Ovate or globular.

Anthers varying from ovate to Anthers globose ; dehiscing by ter-

globose, square and cixneate, minal pores,

more or less bent on itself,
dehiscent longitudinally the
whole length on both sides.

When Baron Von Mueller was describing his E . fruticetorum, he
could not possibly have had specimens of E. polyhractea to have
so described these two organs, especially the latter, for all his
deliniations and description of anthers in the Eucalyptographia
art! pretty accurate. These two differences alone are sufficient to
prove that these two species fall into different groups of Eucalyptus.

B, T. Baker: Eucalyptus PoUfhradea. 151

One effect of this confounding of nomenclature is that in New
South Wales, the oil obtainable from E. pohjhractea being of a high-
class character, is in demand on the European and American mar-
kets, and when exported from New South Wales is sold under this
name, that being the one to which the chemistry is attached in the
work on " Eucalypts and Their Essential Oils," published in 1902,
and quoted by London buyers.

The same species is now being worked in Victoria in the Ingle-
wood and Bendigo Districts, but the name E. cajwputea is attached
to the product by at least one manufacturer, a name which belongs
really to the South Australian species, E . odorata. The Victorian
product thus suffers in consequence with those people who know the
oil of E. polyhractea intimately.

Apart then from the systematic side, Avhich, of course, must pre-
dominate, commerce would certainly be better served if the original
name — E. polyhractea — is retained for this Mallee, the claims of
any other name for the species as shown above being untenable. The
name E. fruticetorum refers to another species according to
Mueller's description (supra). The " Silver leaf " Eucalyptus of
Bendigo and Inglewood, Victoria, and the " Blue Mallee " of
Wyalong district. New South Wales, are the same species, and its
name is E. polyhractea.

[Peoc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.S.), Pt. I., 1913].

Art. XU.~ContribiLtiovs to the Flora of Australia, No. 21}
The Flor.\ of the Northern Territory (Lkguminosae).

BY

ALFRED J. EWART, lX8f., Ph.D.,

AND

ALEXANDER .MORRLSON, M.D.

(With Plates XIV., XV.).

[Read 10th July, 1913].

As is well known, the Commonwealth Government, since taking
•over the Northern Territory, have carried out a policy of energetic-
ally investigating the natural resources of this tract of country.

In addition to the expedition by Gilruth and Spencer, the Barclay
•expedition traversed a large part of the Territory, and Mr. Hill,
the botanist attached to the party, made large collections of plants.

Dr. Morrison was appointed to assist in the work of investigating
these collections, and the flora of the Territory generally, and the
present paper is the first fruits of the work done. It includes the
Leguminosae only; the other orders will follow as their examination
is completed.

Mr. Maiden has undertaken the investigation of the Myrtaccae
and of the Acacias, in which groups his knowledge is unrivalled.

The present paper not only gives much additional infonnation as
to the distribution of the plants of this oi-dcr in the Territiny. hut
also includes desci'iptions of four \w\\ spciik's — Isotropis argcntca,
Jacksonia anomala. Psoralea luteosa. and Tcplirosia pubescens.

Very little is known as yet as to the fcononiir properties of the
plants of the Northern Territory, more partimlarly as regards their
fodder value or poisonous properties. Dr. Gilruth obtained data
during his first visit of the food value of certain grasses which have
since been identified and published in the lOtli Contribution to the
Flora of Australia.

The Leguminosae include not only many of the most valual)le
fodder plants, but also many poisonous plants. Few of tlie

1 No. '20 ill Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. \xvi. (n.s.), p. 1., I!H;{.

Flora of Australia. 153

plants on the present list have been tested as yet from this point of
view, but poisonous species are known to occur in the following
genera : — Bauhinia has three poisonous species, one of which is a
fish poison, and another an anthelminthic, but no data are available
for the species of this genus on the present list. Brachysema undu-
latum grows in other parts of Australia, and causes mechanical
injury. Ganavalia obfusifolia causes gastro-enteritis in stock.

Several species of Cassia are considered poisonous, and, accord-
ing to Greshoff. this also applies to Cassia Sophora and G . Sturtii.
No less than five species of Crotalaria are recorded as poisonous,
and of these one, G. Mitchelli, grows in the Northern Territory.
Three species of Erythrina and two of Erythrophlaeum have been
recorded as poisonous, but they do not include any of the species
growing in the Territory. The Asiatic Flemingia congest a is a
taenifuge, but the F. lineafa of the Territory has not been tested.
Many species of Gasfrolobimn are poisonous, ])ut only one incom-
pletely tested species (G. (jrandiflorum) is included in the present
list.

Indifjofera hoviperda, however, has in West Australia l)cen
responsible for large losses of stock. The genera Phastfolus,
Psoralea and Seshanea include poisonous species, but apparently
none from the Territory. Rhynckosia minima is, however, poisonous
according to Greshbff, and the same may be found ultimately to
apply to some of the species of Swainsona and Ttphrosia. Several
species of the latter genus are well-known fish poisons, and this
applies to at least one species from the Territory, namely, Tephrosia
purpurea. In this direction there will Ije mucli \\iirk to be done in
the future.

Alysicakpus lon(;ifolius, W. and Arn.

Okey Creek. G. F. Hill (No. 761). 16/2/1912.

AlYSICARPUS RUfiOSUS, DC.

Ten miles west of Eva Downs. G. F. Hill (No. 522). 9/8/1911.

Atylosia makmokata, Bentli.
Maude Creek. Professor Spencer and others. July-August. 1911.

Bauhinia CuNxiXfuiAMii, Benth.
S. Lat. 18 deg. 28 min.— Long. 132 deg.. G. F. Hill (No. 441).
6/7/1911; Katherine Creek, Professor Spencer and others. July-
August, 1911; 40 miles south-east of Newcastle Waters. G. F. Hill
(No. 444), 10/8/1911.

154 Ewavt and Morrison .■

Bossiap:a phylloclada, F. v. M.
Sandstone country, near Tanumbirini. G. F. Hill (No. 804),
26/3/1912.

Braciiysema Chambersii, F. v. M.
Foi-tv miles west of Lander Creek, civ.. G. F. Hill (No. 365),
21/6/1911.

Canavalia obtusifolia, DC.

North Island, Gulf of Carpentaria, G. F. Hill (No. 628),
20/10/1911.

This plant is poisonous, according to Greshoff, but the poisonous
principle is not known.

Cassia Chatelainiana, Gaud.
Seventy miles north of Survey Camp civ.. G. F. Hill (No. 393),
28/6/1911; S. Lat. 17 deg.— Long. 132 deg., G. F. Hill (No. 455),
7/7/1911.

Cassia ooNrmxA, Benth.

Seventy miles North of Survey Camp, civ., G. F. Hill (No. 386a),

28/6/1911; 20 miles south-west of Borroloola, G. F. Hill (No. 574),

7/9/1911; Sandstone country, Borroloola, G. F. Hill (No. 604),

2/10/1911; Lower McArthur River, G. F. Hill (No. 677), 8/11/11.

Casssia besolata, F. v. M.
Near Haast's Bluff, Macdonnell Ranges, G. F. Hill (No. 208),
26/5/1911.

Cassia eremophila, A. Cunn.

Seven miles north of Charlotte Waters, G. F. Hill (No. 17),
23/2/1911; Henbury Station, Finke River, G. F. Hill (No. 43),
9/3/1911; Jay Creek, G. F. Hill (No. 43), 21/3/1911.

Cassia eremophila, A. Cunn., var. platvpoda.
Charley Creek, Macdonnell Ranges, G. F. Hill (No. 174),
14/5/1911.

Cassia leptoclada, Bentli.
Sandstone ranges near We.stern Creek. Borroloola, G. F. Hill
(No. 74f)). 15/2/1912.

Cassia Sohiioija, L.
Haast's Bluff (3()()0 ft.), Macdonnell Ranges, G. F. Hill (No. 177),
16/5/1911.

Flora of AiiKfi'dlla. 155

This plant is poisonous, according to Greshoff, but the poisonous
principle is not known. The same applies to Cassia Sturiii.

Cassia Stuktii, R. Br.

Henbury Station. Finke River. G. F. Hill (No. 36), 7/3/1911;
near Haast's Bluff. Macdonnell Ranges, G. F. Hill (No. 205),
26/5/1911; 60 miles north-east of ^ii.. G. F. Hill (No. 282),
7/6/1911.

Cassia vknusta, F. v. M.

cii.. G. F. Hill (No. 240a), 3/6/1911; ^iii.. Lander Creek, G. F.
Hill, 10/6/1911; 11 mile Creek, near Eatherine, Professor Spencer
and others, July-August, 1911; On sandstone ranges, Western
Cieek. near Borroloola, G. F. Hill (No. 746), 13/2/1912.

CrOTALARIA CuXNINfJHA.MII, li. Br.

Seventy miles north of ^iy., G. F. Hill (No. 386), 28/6/1911;
Borroloola, G. F. Hill (No. 663), 7/11/1911.

Crotalaria dissitiflora, Benth.
Glabrous form.

Hermansburg. Kinke River, G. F. Hill (No. 54), 11/3/1911.
11/3/1911.

Crotalaria dissitiflora, Benth.
Hermansburg, Finke River, G. F. Hill (No. 54). 11/3/1911.

Crotalaria linifolia, Linn. f.
Borroloola, G. F. Hill (No. 615), 9/10/1911; Lower McArthur
River, G. F. Hill (No. 676), 8/11/1911.

Crotalaria linifolia, Linn. f.
Elongated variety.
Orkey Creek, G. F. Hill (No. 761), 16/2/1912.

Crotalaria Mitchelli, Benth.

Twelve miles north-west of ciii. (Long. 132^— Lat. 21f S.), G. F.
Hill (No. 326), 12/6/1911.

This plant is poisonous, according to Greshoff and to Maiden, but
the poisonous principle is unknown.

Crotalaria retusa, L.
Edith Creek, Professor Spencer and others, July-August, 1911;
Lower McArthur River, G. F. Hill (No. 681), 8/11/1911.

156 Ew(trt and Morrison :

CrOTALAHIA TRIKOLIASTKUM, Willcl.

Hii.ist's Bluff (4000 ft.). Macdonnell Ranges, G. F. Hill (No. 191),
18/5/1911.

Crotalahia trifoliastru.m, Willd.
Lat. 19 deg. S., Long. 132 deg., G. F. Hill (No. 434). 4/7/1911.
Form with leaflets 2 mm. broad.

Desmodium Muelleri, Benth.
Near Western Creek, G. F. Hill (No. 755), 15/2/1912.; Western
Creek, G. F. Hill (No. 757), 15/2/1912.

Erythrina VESPERTiLio, Benth.
About 30 miles north-west of Twitchera Gap, Macdonnell Ranges,
G. F. Hill (No. 165), 10/5/1911; Borroloola, G. F. Hill (No. 665a),
«/ll/1911.

Erythrophlakum Laboucherii, F. v. M.
Newcastle Waters. G. F. Hill (No. 473), 7/7/1911.

Flemi\<;ia lineata, Roxb.
Edith Cieek, P)ofessor Spencer and others, July-August. 1911.

GaSTROLOBIUM CiRANDIPLORUM. F. V. M.

Seventy miles noi-th civ. on Lander Creek. G. F. Hill (No. 382),
28/6/1911.

This is poisonous, according to Greshoff, and acts as an inebriant.
The poisonous principle is not known with certainty, but may 1)6
a readily decomposing alkaloid.

IxDKiOFERA uoviPicRDA, Morrisou.
(J..urn. of Botany. 1.. 166. May, 1912.)

To the description of fiuiting specimens in the place above
quoted may be added the folloAving notes of flowers on specimens
from the Northei-n Ten-itoiy : —
longer than tube; biacts lanccolate-sujjulate, 2-3 nun., deciduous

Calyx about 3 imn.. tube liroad. lobi-s narrow lanceolate, rather
before flower opens; petals icddisli jmrple. standard broadly ovate
on a short claw. 6 x 4 nun., villous externally, keel as long, slightly
incurved, obtuse, tomeiitose on lower margin, both minutely apicu-
late, wings shoi-ter, 5 mm., narrow oblong; anthers acutely apicu-
late, 0.6 mm. long, ovary villous, style incurved, stigma small.

Flora of Australia. 157

Lander Creek. N.T., about 21 deg. S. Lat., and 132 deg. E.
Long.. G. F. Hill, No. 374, 25/6/1911; also Ashburton River. N.W.
Australia. Stuart Carev, 1883.

The plant poisoned 120 cattle in one night at the Ashlnutou
River in 1905, and some settlers recognised it as a reputed poison
plant seen by them also in the Kimberley District, further north.
The aiea <>t' its distribution is, therefoi-e. vei-y extensive.

IXDKiOFER.\ BREVIDENS, Beuth.

G. F. Hill. 1911.

Indigofera exneapiiylla, L.
Sixty miles nortli-east of cii., G. F. Hill (Nos. 285 and 287),
7/6/1911.

IXDKiOFERA IIAPLOPHVLLA, F. V. iV] .

Sandstone ranges, near Western Creek. G. F. Hill (No. 772),.
16/2/1912.

Indigofera linifolia, Ketz.
Hermansburg, Finke River. G. F. Hill. No. 83. 13/3/1911.

Isotropis argentea, Ewart and Morrison.

Flowers in axillary racemes, petals yellow, of about equal length,
keel beaked, pod oblong, obtuse, seeds numerous, smooth.

A slender, few-branched undershrub. \^ feet high, the whole
plant clothed with an indumentum of appressed shining hairs.
Leaves unifoliolate. articulate on a very short petiole, narrow
linear, flat but closely induplicate, subacute and recurved at distal
end, in length up to 5 cm. x 0.3 cm. broad, the stiff silvery hairs
more dense on under surface. Stipules subulate and shoi-t.

Racemes short, axillary or terminal, flowers few or solitary,
peduncles 6-8 mm., with a pair of narrow lanceolate bracts at articu-
lation near or above middle, and similar l)ut smaller bracteoles close-
to calyx, which is about 7 mm. long, two lipped, lobes at least twice
as long as tube, lanceolate, the upper pair united higher up, form-
ing a broad lip, the lower lobes curving over the prominent keel.
Petals yellow, about as long as calyx, standard on a very short,
broad claAv, ovate, obtuse, wings slightly shorter, oblong, mem-
branous near base, keel as long as standard with a very slender
claw, sharply incurved and broad and membranous below the
straight beak. Pod sessile, densely pubescent with stiff erect hair»
brown on young pod at first, but yellowish on mature pod. which
is turgid, oblong, obtuse with a minute recurved blunt point, 2.1

158 Ewart and Morrison :

•cm. long X 0.6 cm. thick, the pedicel enlarged under it; funicles
short, seeds about 26 in pod, subreniform, astrophiolate. flattened
and smooth.

Ten miles west of Eva Downs, G. F. Hill, No. 524a, 19/8/1911.

The obtuse pod of this plant, as well as the large beaked keel,
■distinguished it from the other species of Isotropis. In I. Wheeleri.
F.V.M., the seeds are reniform, with a strongly-marked network of
raised lines on the surface, and the pubescence is of a different
■character, its racemes also are terminal, and its pod smaller and
acute, while the leaves are tubular rather than terete and channelled
as described by Bentham. I. Winneskii, F.v.M., has smaller
seeds, symmetrically reniform, and rugose over a broad band
round the outer margin, the funicle remaining attached in the
narrow sinus.

Jacksonia anomala, Ewart and Morrison, n. sp.

Upper lobes of calyx shorter than lower, connate to top, petals
somewhat shorter than calyx, standard small, shorter than the other
petals, pod subglobose with two seeds. Flowers small situated on
base of dichotomous, striate, leafless stems, with broad scarious
bracts and bracteoles.

A small undershrub reaching one foot in height, with numerous
stems repeatedly forked from base; branches flattened angular,
.striate, not pungent, at first thinly pubescent, 1.5 mm. broad;
leaves represented by small broAvn lanceolate scales at nodes.
Flowers very shortly pedicellate on short dense nearly sessile
racemes clustered on basal rounded portions of branches, each
subtended by a suborbicular brown villous bract, with a pair of
oblong ovate mucronate bracteoles at base of calyx, in both cases
5 mm. in length, and persisting. Calyx densely silky villous, cleft
to near base, lower lobes 9 mm. oblong-linear and acuminate, con-
nate to top and forming a broad ovate lip 7-8 mm. long, with a
subulate bifid tip. Petals and pod firmly clasped by calyx, standard
broadly ovate, on a very short broad claw, about 5 mm. in length,
and fitting under the concave upper lip of the calyx, wings on a
very slender claw, narrow oblong, of about the same length as keel,
but with a transverse fold near top, keel nearly 8 mm. long,
ovate lanceolate. Pod ovoid or subglobose, sessile, villous, 1 cm.
long, including the straight and tapering acuminate beak, which is
nearly as long as the pod itself, and exceeds the calyx; seeds two,
approximately reniform, smooth, brown, 2 mm. in length.

Lat. 18 deg. 27 min. S. Long, c 132 deg. E. G. F. Hill, No.
•499, 6/7/1911.

Flora of Australia. 159

This plant shows affinities to some of the Braehysemas, particu-
larly the xerophytic species of the section Leptoscma, in the leafless
condition, radical inflorescence, broad bracteoles (as in B. bracteo-
losum), connate upper calyx lobes, and small ovate standard; but
it differs in the small number of seeds in the pod, and in the size
and colour of the flowers. Compared with Jacksonias, on the other
hand, it agrees in having small flowers, with the upper calyx lobes
shorter than the lower, petals yellow, nearly equal in length, and
shorter than the calyx. The seeds in the pod are only two, which
is the usual number in Jacksonia, and if we consider that the
leafless condition is normal in that genus, while exceptional in
Brachysema, there need be no liesitation in deciding its generic
position.

There is seen in this species a considerable resemblance to some
of the smaller forms of the Scoparia section found in extra-tropical
South-Avest Australia, and its mature calyx even shows the angular
character noted in the buds of J. angulata and others.

Jacksonia dilatata, Bentli.
Edith Creek, Professor Spencer and others, July- August, 1911;
Bacon Swamp, Professor Spencer and others. July-August, 19'
Sandstone ranger, Borroloola, G. F. Hill (No. 600), 2/10/1911.

1911

Jacksonia odontoclada, F. v. M.
Hell Gate, Roper River, Professor Spencer and others, July-
August. 1911.

Jacksonia r.\mosissima, Benth.
Twenty miles south-west of Borroloola, G. F. Hill (No. 56-1),
7/9/1911.

Lotus australis, Andr.
ciii.. Lander Creek, G. F. Hill (No. 316). 1(1/6/1911.
Classed as a poison plant by Greshoft", Smith and Maiden. l)ut
no poisonous principle has been extracted, and the evidence as to
its poisonous properties is not satisfactory.

Mirbelia oxyclada, F. v. M.
■ On sandliills, 70 miles north of Survey Camp <^'iii., G. F. Hill
<No. 394), 25/6/1911; 110 miles north of Survey Camp, civ.. G. F.
Hill (No. 408), 1/7/1911.

Pktalostylks labichkoides, R. Br., \iir. cassoidks, Bentli.
Jay George. Macdonnell Ranges, G. F. Hill (No. 133), 4/5/1911 ;
40 miles N.N.W of Meyer's Hut, G. F. Hill (No. 233), 2/6/1911.

160 Ewart and Morrison:

Pici'ALOSTYLKS LABICHKOIDKS, R. Br., vai'. iniciophylla, ii. vnv.

Forty miles west of Lander's Creek, civ.. G. F. Hill (No. 364),
23/6/1911. The stems and leaf-rhachis of this variety are stouter,
more rigid, and almost spinescent, terete and covered by a dense
hoary coating of hairs. The leaflets reach to 41 in number, and
are broadly obovate and retuse or even obcordate, thinly pubescent
on lower surface and glabrous above, measuring 2-4 mm. in length
by les.s than 3 mm. in breadth. The sepals are thinly pubescent,
and are longer and l)r(»ader (13 by 3 mm. max.) than those of No.
133, var. cassioides. in which, however, the petals are larger, and
the leaflets reach 45 in number.

In the form No. 233, which is almost glabrous, the leaflets are
mostly 5-6 mm. long, with the terminal one 8-9 nmi. Numerous
intermediate forms connect the small-leaved varieties with the
fully-developed type.

The var. cassioides described by Bentham (from Sturt Creek and
Gulf of Carpentaria) is represented in the Melbourne Herbarium
by specimens from Sturt Creek and Nicholson River, both collected
by F.v.M. in 1856, but neither has the varietal name added on the
labels. On the other hand a specimen of var. microphylla (from
Mt. Churchman, W.A. , Young) is labelled by the Baron, evidently
in error, "var. cassioides," but in it there are between 50 and 60
leaflets, measuring only 2-3 mm. in length, hirsute, and with a
recurved blunt point. Another specimen, collected by Giles shows
the rigid and almost spinescent character, while two specimens
from the upper Ashburton River, W.A. (Cuthbertson. 1888) indi-
cate, the one, a development approaching the typical, and the othei
a sciubby form similar to v. microphylla in the size of the leaf. The
leaf development may be taken to indicate the nature of the water
supply, the small-leaved forms being found in arid surroundings;
although the bed of a river where moisture is retained in the mud
and gravel, produces in the driest season the fidly-developed form
in flower, while beyond the ovei-hanging banks almost all else is
desiccated and dormant.

PllASKOLUS MuNCiO, L.

Okey Creek, G. F. Hill (No. 765), 16/2/1912.

PlTHKCOLOIUUM MONILIFKKITM, Beutll.

Borroloola, G. F. Hill (No. 582), 12/9/1911; McArthur River.
G. F. Hill (No. 582).

Flora of Australia. 16B

PSOKAI.KA HAIXXJANA, I5<'lltll.

Maude Creek, Professoi- Spencer and others, July-August, 1911;:
11 Mile Creek (near Katharine), Piofossoi- Spencer and others^
Julv-Auffust. 1911.

PsOUAf.EA CINKRKA, Liudl.

Lake Woo.ls. G. F. Hill (No. 486), 2/8/1911.

PsoitALKA LKUCAXTHA, F. V. M.

Survey Koute, Lat. 19 deg. IG niiii. S., G. F. Hill (No. 429),.
4/7/1911.

PsoKALKA LU'n-;o.s.\, Ewart and Morrison, n. sp.

Lowermo.st calyx lobe slightly longer than rest, which are equals
petals green, glabrous, standard and keel equal, wings slightly
shorter; style glabrous, terete; pod ovoid, indehiscent, two-seeded.
Plant glandular, with trifoliolate digitate leaves and large scarious
stipules.

Leaves on striate angular petioles of about 2 cm., trifoliolate.
digitate, leaflets lanceolate, entire, obtuse or subacute, the terminal
one larger (4.3 x 3.5 cm.), thinly woolly tomentose on both sides.
veins prominent on undei- side and ending at margin, sprinkled
with minute black glands. Stipules 7 mm. in length, lanceolate,,
striate, scarious.

Flowers in nearly sessile racemes, which spring from leafless
base of branches or from upper axils, the longest 12 cm. ; bracts
linear-lanceolate, striate, scarious, 3 mm. long, completely cover-
ing buds in dense young racemes, deciduous like the stipules,
pedicels single or in pairs. 2-4 mm. long, at length distant. Calyx
about 6 mm., glandular, silky villous, lobes linear-lanceolate
acuminate, three times as long as the campanulate tube, the lower-
most 1 mm. longer than the others, which are equal, the upper
pair shortly united at l)ase. Petals shortly exceeding calyx,
yellowish green, standard o])ovati' or suborbicular, somewhat
reflexed. with a ])aii- of small auiicles above a tapering claw, 6-7
mm. long, x 4 mm. broad ; keel quite as long, incurved, obtuse,
glabrous like the standard, wings a little shorter, narrow, falcate,
adhering to keel at base, claws of I)orli narrow linear; ovary sessile,
villous, style incurveil. glabrous, (erete ; jjod indehiscent. oblong-
ovoid, about half as long as calyx, villous, obtuse, with a horn-
like incurved point, seeds two. astro])hiolate. oblong, brown, I
mm. in length, doi-sal side flat, with a narrow rim enclosing a long
pit.

12

162 Ewart and Morrisoti :

Northern Territoi-y. noi-tli of Lat. 15 deg. S., W. S. Campbell,
September, 1911.

A small glandular undershrub, witli its l)i'anclies rising erect
from horizontal rhizomes or branches to a height of 14 cm. over all.
In Tephrosia the glandular character is not observed, the leaves are
generally pinnate, the standard tomentose, and style flattened;
the pod also is seldom ovate, but flat and dehiscent, and contains
usually more than two seeds. While tliis number of seeds is an
exceptional minimum in Tephrosia, it is rare to find more than one
in Psoralea. Although there are many differences from either
genus in the details of structure of tlie flowers, there are more
points of resemblance to Psoralea than to Tephrosia, and the glan-
dular character, digitate leaves, and structure of the pod point to
the former. If the digitate leaves with three entire leaflets be taken
as a guide to its position in the genus, it would be placed in the
small group i-epresented by P. adscendens, but its other characters
differ widely. The yellowish-green colour of the flowers is not
recorded in Australian species of either Psoralea or Tephrosia. The
species is apparently related to F. v. Mueller's P. Schultzii, of which
only a few (purple) flowers and some leaf fragments exist.

PSORALKA PATENS, Lindl.

Abraham's Lagoon, Professor Spencer and others, July-August,
1911.

PsORALKA PUSTULATA, F. v. M.

Newcastle Waters, (4. F. Hill (No. 474), 17/7/1911.

Ptyciioskma tripoliolatum, F. v. M.
Lander Creek, ^-iii., (i. F. Hill (No. :50G), 10/6/1911.

RlIYNClIOSIA MINIMA, DC.

Lower McArthur Kiver. G. F. Hill (No. 675), 8/11/1911.

Sksbania aculkata, Pers.
Crescent Lagoon, Professor Spencer and others, July- August,
1911; McArthur River. O. F. Hill (No. 672), 8/11/1911; Hodson
Downs, Cx. F. Hill (No. 827). 5/-I/I912.

Sksbania gkandiflora, Pers.
North of 15 deg., W. S. Campbell, 5/9/1911.

Flora of AuHtralia. 163

SWAINSONA BUKKKI, F. V. M.

Thirty-eight miles north-west of ^'iv., Lauder Ci-eek. G. F. Hill

<No. .-iTB), 24/()/l9n.

8VVAIN.S0NA OKOHOIDKS, F. V. M.

Sixty miles north-east of cii., 0. F. Hill (Nos. 284 and 286a),
7/6/1911.

SVVAINSONA sp.

Ten miles west of Eva Downs, G. F. Hill (No. 521), 19/8/1911.

Tkmplktonia HoOKKRf, Hen til.
(Nkmatopuyllum Hookeki, F. v. M.)
South of Newcastle Waters, G. F. Hill (No. 481). 12/7/1911;
track to Maude Creek, Professor Spencer and others, July-August,
1911.

Tephrosia filipes, Benth.

Haast's Bluff (4000 ft.), G. F. Hill (No. 188), 17/5/1911.

Tephrosia flammea, F. v. M.
North Island, Gulf of Carpentaria (sandstone ranges), G. F.
Hill (No. 633), 20/10/1911; Borroloola, G. F. Hill (No. 657),
'7/11/1911; sandstone ranges, near Western Creek, G. F. Hill (No.

777), 16/2/1912.

Tepiikosia phaeosperma, F. v. M.
North Island, Gulf of Carpentaria, G. F. Hill (No. 624),
:20/10/1911.

Tepiikosia pubescens, Ewart and Morrison, n. .sp.
Flowers in pedunculate axillary racemes, calyx lobes and tube
•of about equal length, standard half as long again as calyx, keel
as long, incurved and very shortly l)eaked ; leaves trifoliolate, with
prominent veins anastomosing within tlie margin.

Leaves trifoliolate on petioles of 2 cm. or less, leaflets ovate or
•obovate, petiolulate, terminal one 3 cm., and larger than the lower
pair, primary veins anastomosing within the mai-giii, very promi-
nent, as are also the intervening reticulatidus, smoother and
greenish on upper surface. Stipules small, lanceolate.

Flowers in short racemes of 1.5 cm. pedunculate in uppermost
avils, peduncles much longer than leaves, rusty pubescent like the
stem, pedicels about as long as calyx; calyx tube narrow companu-
late 0.5 cm., lobes lanceolate acute, upper pair about as long as
itube, and united to near the top. lowermost 0.6 cm.

12a

1^4 Eivart <i'n<l Morrison: Flora of Australia.

Standard broadly nbovate-cuneate, very obtuse, yellowish, with
purple veins. 1.5 cni. long x 0.5 cm. broad at top, keel about same
len<,'th and l)readth. incurved, with a very sliort obtuse beak, wings
shorter and narrow. Upper stamen geniculate, not hairy. Ovai-y
villous. Pod not seen.

Top Spring, G. F. Hill, No. 535, 31/8/1911.

An undershrub, with somewhat stout tmbranclied stems, clothed
like the inflorescence and petioles, with a rusty indumentum, the
leaflets greenish grey, with a dense and close pubescence and very
prominent veins and reticulations as in T. coriacea and flammea.
In shape and indumentum, however, the leaves differ, as well as in
the long and stouti.-;h peduncles bearing cluster-like racemes at the
top.

Tkphrosia PUKPrKEA, Pers.

Sandstone ridges, North Island, Gulf of Carpentaria, G. F. Hill
(No. 630), 20/10/1911; Borroloola, G. F. Hill (661). 7/11/1911;
sandstone ranges, near Western Creek, Borroloola. G. F. Hill
(No. 745a), 15/2/1912.

This plant is well known as a fish ]ioison, and if eaten might also
be poisonous to stock.

Tepiirosia uniovulata, F. v. M.
Twenty-eight miles so\itli-west of Newcastle Waters, G. F. Hill
(No. 499). 8/7/1911.

Urakia cvlixdracka, Beiith.
Five mile bar, McArthur River, G. F. Hill (No. 734). 6/2/1912.

ZoRNiA niPiiYLLA, Pers.
Black Rocks, McArthur River, G. F. Hill (No. 644), 22/10/1911 .
sandstone range. Top Spring, Kilgoui' River, G. F. Hill (No. 553),.
1/9/1911.

EXPLANATION OF .PLATF^^S.
Plate XIV.

Fig. 1. — Indigofera bovipenhi, Moiiison.
Fig. 2. — Jacksoniji aiioiiiala, n.sp.

Platk XV.
Kig. 1. — Tepiirosia pul)CKcens, n.sp.
Fig. 2. — Paoialea lutessa, n.sp.
FiLT. ;>. — Tsotropis argentea, n.sp.

\'<-"r_ U S \'i,-l..ri:i, \<J\:', I'l.ih. \l\-

Pioc. R.S. Viclui-ia, 1913. Plate XV

]Pboc. Roy. Soc. Victoria,' 26 (N.S.), Vr. I., 1913. J

AiiT. XIII, — Deseription of New and Rare Fossils ohtu/taed
by Deep Boring ia the Mallee.

Part I. — Plantae ; and PiIiizopoda to Dkachiopoda.

By FREDERICK CHAPMAN, A.L.S., F.R.x\I.8., &c.

(Palaeontolog-ist to the National Museum, Melltourne).

(With Plates XVI.-XIX).
[Read 10th July, 1913].

Introductory Note.

In this and the two succeeding parts are eniljodied the palaeonto-
logical results of a somewhat exhaustive study of the material
brought up by borings in the Mallee near Ouyen, numbered 1-11.
The actual boring was carried out between August, 1908, and
August, 1909. The borings are all in the County of Weeah, and
•commence at about six miles east of the South Australian boundary,
and fifty miles north of the 36th paiallel at Pinaroo. The bores
are situated at distances of two to four miles apart.

The second part of this report will comprise the niollusca,
written in conjunction with Mr. C. J. Gabriel, and the thiid part,
by myself, will comprise the groups of the Ostracoda and Fishes.

The report containing the general results will subsequently
appear in the publications of the Geological Survey of Victoria.

Plantae.

Boring fungi, indet.

In one in.stance. Bore 9. 'Mh-'.Vlb feet, the remains of a boring
fungus are seen in the outer, aragonitic layer of a (?) J)osiiiea
valve. The thallus forms stellate groups, measuring about 3 mm.
across. The tubes average about .115 mm. in diameter. A micro-
scope section did not leveal any recognisable structure.

In Bore 1. 154-190 feet, the rolled sliells of niollusca are freely
riddled with a similai- form of perfoiating plant. Init showing less
regularity in outline.

1 66 Frederick Chapman :

Genus LITHOTHAMNION, Pliilippi, 1837, Foslie, emend. 1900.
LiTiioTHAMNiox KAMosissiMUM, Reuss sp. (Plate XVT., Figs. \a-c, 2, 3),

Nulliporo ra/uosissima, Reuss, 1848, Haidinger's Naturw,
Abhandl., vol. ii., pt. ii., p. 29, pi. iii., figs. 10, 11.
Unger, 1857, Denkschi-. K. Akad. Wiss. -Wien. vol.
xiv., pp. 23, 38, pi. v., figs. 18-22.
LifJwfhnwnivm ramosissimum, Reuss sp., Giimbel, 1871,
Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., vol. xi., pt. i., p. 34,.
pi. i., figs. \a-d.
Cumuli pora rosenhergi , Mai'tin, 1881. Saninil. Reiclismus.

Leiden, vol. i., pt. i., pp. 12-14, 64, pi. iii., figs. 6, 7.
Lithothamninm rosenhpvgi, Maitin sp., Martin, 1881, Ibid,
vol. i., pt. ii., pp. 70, 79. Ibid, 1882, vol. i.. pt. iii.
pp. 153, 155.
L. ramosissimum, Rss. sp. Rothpletz. 1891, Zeitschr.
deutsch. geol. Gesellsch., vol. xliii., p. 320. Nishiwada,.
1894, Journ. Coll. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo, vol. vii.,
pt. iii., p. 233, pi. xxix., figs. 1-3.
L. (Cum.ulipora) rosenhergi, Martin, Newton and Holland,

1900, Journ. Geol. Soo. Tokyo, vol. vii., No. 81, p. 1.
L. rosenhergi, Martin, sp. Yoshiwara, 1900, Journ. Geol.

Soc. Tokyo, vol. vii.. No. 81, p. 22.
LitJiothamnion ramosissimmn. Reuss sp.. Foslie, 1900,
" Revised Systematical Survey of the Melobesidae."
Kongl. Norske Vidensk. Selsk. Skr. No. 5, p. 12 (No.
14).
Lithothamniitm ramosissimum,, Rss. sp., Newton and Hol-
land. 1902, Journ. Coll. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo, vol.
xvii.. Art. 6, p. 17, pi. i., fig. 8.
Ohservations. — From Jurassic times the branching Litliothumnia
have played an important role in the formation of limestones,
especially those associated with reef-making corals. The distin-
guishing characters of this plant, apart from the fruiting organs,
are not easily defined, the form of the thallus being very variable.
Solms Laubachi cuts the gordian knot in that he says, " Wo shall
do well to follow Unger in this matter, and put them all together
as Lifhothamnium ramosissimum.' '

My own conviction is, that when the cell structure is well pre-
served, and the mode of frutification shown, the fossil specimens
are as good as living examples for diagnostic purposes. It has

1. Fossil Hotniiy, Oxfoid, ISDl. KiikHsIi tnuislatioii by H. K. F. Ganisey, p. 4i'i

New Old Hare Fussiti^. 167

hitherto Ix-eii the usage amongst pahieobotaiiistst to separate the
encrusting forms of Lif/iot/uinnuon as Lif/inphi/llum; but as Foslie
(whose untimely deatli we have recently had to deplore), showed, ^
that, having regard to the J-eproductive organs of the plants, that
method was based on insufKcient ground. From a study of the
recent form-s of tlie gi-oup, Foslie included nearly all the species
of Tjithnphylluiii in Uthothamnion, the latter genus being defined
In- the (l<>\\nwai(l giowtli of the conceptacles into the frond (subgen.
E nlithothainiiion . sect. Innatae) or by their superficial character
(sect. Evanidae). The present species falls into the first section of
the sul)genus mentioned.

The eonie))ta(les with teti-aspoi'es can be found in the fossil
examples by slicing, almost' as easily as in tlie recent forms. In
these specimens from the polyzoal rock of the Mallee bores, it is
found that the conceptacles are immersed in the thallus, the surface
of which is sometimes overarched above the conceptacles. The
conceptacles here examined were slightly broken during slicing, so
that the true outline of the cavity was not seen. It has already
been stated^ that the tetraspores " could be but imperfectly fossil-
ised," since they contain very little carbonate of lime. It is, there-
fore, particulaily interesting to note that the tetraspores are here
present, and preserved as glauconite pseudomorphs of a pale green
tint. The example figured shows two of the tetraspores clinging to
the inner wall of one of the conceptacles, whilst another is seen in
an adjoining cavity. These tetraspores are ovoid, and pointed at
the base of attachment. The pseudomorphic change into glauconite
shown In- tliese fossil bodies is more easily understood when we
compare them with the sarcode bodies of Foraminifera replaced bv
the same substance, foi- 1 am inclined to believe that the glauconiti-
sation of foi-aniinifera takes place as a reactionary product of the
protoplasm, and not as a nieie infilling of the dead shells, in which
case we should most i)r(>l)nbly get a concentric structure developed
in the glauconite. This assumption can, of course, only be proved
by detailed observation and chemical experiment.

In Lifhothamnion nummnliticum* the cell structure i.'> quadrate
and smaller than in //. rninosissimum, to which we refer nearly all
the present examples. The specific standing of the latter is further

1. Seward. Fossil Plants, vol. i.. Caiiibridge, ISns, i> 186.

2. Foslie. Op. supra {'it., p. 5, et seq.

3. See Waters, A. W., on " Fossil Lithothamnia". Mem. Lit. and I'liil. Soc .Manchester, vol.
1874, p. '248. This pai)er gives a useful resume of the ociuireuces of the fossil LithothaiuTiia
roek-formini; aireuts (pp. •.;44-2.in).

4. IJthotlMuiniam iriiuinndhirinii. r,\\n\h^-\. \\<\\M\<\\.\i\>A\..-r. .\k. Wiss., vol. xi. (1), 1
p. 37, pi. i, f\%. i/ie.

168 Frederick Ckaprnan:

supported by the external form of the specimens, which is in
general agreement with other Miocene examples, of wliicli sonic of
the synonymy is given above.

Rothpletz'^ gives the cell measurement of his examples of L.
ramosissimum as 20 x 14-16yLt, whilst the specimens from the Mallee
vary from about that proportion to 'W x \1 fi.. This amount of
variation in the cell measurement can he found in a single branch
in our specimens, so that the dimensional character must be taken
with other factors, viz., the liabit of the branches and the form and
position on the thallus of the conceptacles, whether immersed, sub-
immersed, or prominent.

There is little doubt that tlie encrusting layers of calcareous algae
found on some of the pebbles in the present borings are merely the
■early stage of the above, or a closely allied species, as the cells agree
in form, and spread out fan-wise over tlie surface as in the basal
parts of a branching specimen.

The above species is a peculiarly Miocene form. It constitutes
the bulk of the Leithakalk (Tortonian) of the Vienna Basin. In
Eastern Asia it accompanies Miocene forms of Lepidocycliyia, such
as have been recorded from Japan, Timor, New Guinea, Amboina,
Batu Island, Formosa and Riu Kiu.

Distrihation.— Bore 3, 201-220 feet and 22G feet. Bore 4, 16:i-
170 feet. Bore 5, 163-175 feet (figd.), and 175-189 feet. Bore 10,
310-320 feet. Bore 11, 438-440 feet, and 457-458 feet.

[In woi'king out the above details I have been assisted with
literature, and specimens of recent inatci-ial, through the kindness
of Mr. C. J. Gabriel.]

LrrHoTHM.\NioN aff. lichenoidk.s, Ellis and SoUuider.
Millepora lichenoides^ Ellis and Solander, 1786, Nat. Hist.

Zoophytes, p. 131, pi. xxiii., tig. 9.
LifJtofhaninion lichenoides. Ell. and Sol. s|). , Foslic. 19(MI,
Kongl. Norske Vidensk. Selsk. Skr. (Xo. 5), p. 14, No.
55.
In this form the branches ai-e flattened oi- f i()udo.><e, with the
conceptacles superficial.

Distribution.— Bore 11. 457-458 feet.

lirnioTiiAMNiON spp , iiidft.
Specimen a. — Bore No. 3. abour 226 feet, yielded two pebbles
partly foritied of an encrusting f/ifJiothdiiniion.

1. Op. (it., ).. 3113.

Ne>D and Rare Fossils. 109

Specimen h. — This is an encrusting thalliis. very thin, oir- (tU
layer in thickness, spi-ead over the surface of a pliosphatic pchhle
from Jiorc ."5, 20(1 feet. The ek)ngate-rectanguhir cells are like those
of Lif/iofha/iinio/i rnniosnxinnnn. l)ut niuch larger. Thev spi'ead
far-wise over the surface, and the limiting plane of each succes-
sive growth is undulate or convex. In some respects it is allied to
Lithotliainiiion lichenoides, Ellis and Sol. sp., Avhich Foslie places
in his second section (Evanidae) of the suhgenus Eulithofhamnion.
The question here arises whether a form like L. raniosissiiin//// , wlien
attached to a rolling pehhlc, does not conform to its surroundings
and show a varietal mutation on account of the abnormal conditions
•of its existence.

Genus LITHOPHYLU'.M. Philippi.

{() LlTHOPHYLLUM sp.

This is a comparatively large fragment, subcylindrical, measur-
ing 11 X 5.5 mm. It cannot be referred to a branchlet of /.. ifn/iu-
^issimum, since the succes.sive concentric layers of the growing
thallus are separated by narrow spaces, which show it to be per-
sistently encrusting; and what is more important, there arecircidar
depressions over the surface on the sunmiits of low monticules,
pointing to superficial conceptacles.

Bore 1, 212-215 feet.

Animalia.
FORAMIXIFERA.
Fam. MILIOLIDAE.
Genus TKILLIXA. Schlum])erger.
TuiLLiw iJoWCiiiM, Scliliniil)eii,'Hr. (Plate XVI., Fig. 4).
Trillina /lowr/ti/ii . Sclduml)eiger. 18i»."5, Bull. Soc. (Teol.
France, ser. 3. vol. xxi., p. 119. wondcut fig. 1, and pi.
iii., fig. 6. Chapman, 1908. Proc. Linn. Soc. Xcw
South Wales, vol. xxxii.. p. 75.3. pi. xxxix., figs. 7-9.
Ohserrations. — This remarkable and easily indentifiable species
was figured and described by M. Schlumberger from the lower beds
at Muddy Creek, near Hamilton, where the Rev. W. Howchin found
it to be moderately common, ^t also occurs in Miocene strata in the
New Hebrides. It was only occasionally found in the present bores,
in strata identified as Janjukian by the general characters of its
facies. It here evidently persists into a higher horizon than that

170 Frederick Ghajwian :

represented by the Muddy Creek lower beds (Bak-oinbian), for it
is associated in Bore 4 Avith some undoubted Kalinin an forms, as
Bafhyactis beaumariensis. although the remainder of the fauna at
163-170 feet is essentially Janjukian.

The example figured above resembles M. vulgaris in contour,
whilst others are nearer M. iricarinafa in outline, the species being
much subject to variation.

Distrihutio7i. — Bore 2. 211-240 feet, very common. Bore 3^
about 260 feet. Bore 4, 163-170 feet. Bore 11, 267-270 feet.

Genus ORBITOLITES.
Orbitolites complaxatus, Lamarck.

OrhitoIife>; cotnpld/iaf us, Lamarck, ISOl, Syst. Anim. sans-
Vert., p. 376. Carpenter, 1856, Phil. Trans., p. 224,
pis. iv-ix.
Observations. — As a fossil this species has been previously re-
corded from Victoria by Mr. Howchin, as rare at Muddy Creek
(lower beds; Balcombian); it has also occurred in the Govt, well-
boring in the Murray Flats. South Australia. 0. complanata, as
remarked by Mr. Howchin. w'as living on the South Australian
coast to Nvithin Pleistocene times, but is now extinct in that area.

Disfribufio/i.—ln the present borings this species is of common
occurrence, and seems mainly confined to the greensand and
phosphatic deposits of tlic Janjukian and Kalinnian series.

Fam. LITUOLIDAE.

Genus AMMODISCUS, Keuss.

Ammodiscus ova MS, sp. nov. (Plate XVI., Figs. ~i«, b).

(?) A7)i>nodisrus sp.. Chapman and Howchin, 1905, Mem,

Geol. Surv. New South Wales, Palaeont. No. 4. Foram.

Permo-Carl). Limestones of New Soutli Wales, p. 11,

pi. i., figs, i'la-c.

Description. — Test composed of fine arenaceous mud, consisting

of a depressed, sparsely-coiled shell, elongated in one direction to

form an iri-egular oval. Thinner in the centre than at the

periphery.

Dimensions. — Longer diameter. .6!!-' imii. : slioiter diameter,
384 mm. Thickness, cir., .(»77 nun.

Observations. — The examples doubtfully referred to the genus
Ammodiscus by Mr. Howchin and myself, from the Carbopermian

Neir (I III/ Rare Fossils. ]7\

of New South Wales, is of tlie same type of shell as the above, and
may be regarded as a depauperated and sparsely coiled form of
the Ammodiscus type. The nearest allied examples to the above are
the Ammodiscua roherfsoni, Brady sp.,^ and A. auricula. Chap-
man.2

/)iyfrif>uf ion. --Bnve 10. lOO-LSG feet.

Fam. LAGENIDAE.

Genus FRONDICULARIA. Defrance.

Frondicularia lorifkra', sp. nov. (Plate XVI., Fig. 6).

Dexrriptioji. — Test, compi'essed ovate, with pointed extremities,
more acute at aboral end. Edges of test, blunt. Chambers
numerous, about fifteen. The surface of each acute V-shaped cham-
ber thickened with redundant shell-growth, especially towards the
oral area of each segment.

Ditneiisions. — Length of type specimen. 4 nnii. ; gieatest width.
1.615 mm. ; thickness, .3 mm.

Affinities. — In outline somewliat like the associated species of
Frondicularia in these borings, viz., F. inaequalis. It is distin-
guished from that form, however, by the wide angle of divergence
made by the two upper edges of each segment, and the exceptionally
heavy shell with thick, strap-like layers of redundant growth on
the lateral surfaces of the test.

Distribution.— Bore 4. 163-170 feet. Bore 11. 4.38-440 feet.

Fam. ROTALIIDAE.

Genus CARPENTER! A. Gray.

Carpenteria proteiformi.s, Goes. (Plate XVI., Fiy. 7).

Carpenteria balaniformis, Gray. var. proteiforinis. Goes,

1882. K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl., vol. xix.. No. 4.

p. 94, pi. vi., figs. 208-214; pi. vii., figs. 215-219.

Observations. — This species is found both in the Balcombian and

Janjukian faunas; in the former at Muddy Creek (lower beds), and

in the latter at Batesford.

1. Trockammina robertsoni, H. B. Brady, 1876. Jlon. Carb. and Perm. Forain. (Pal. Soc), p. sO,
pi. iii., fl{f. G. Ammodiscun roberTKoni, Brady sp. Chapman, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 6, vol. xvi.,
p. 318, pi. xi., figs. 15-17.

2. Chapman, loc. supra cit., 1895. p. 319, pi. \i.. fig. 18.

3. Deriv. Lorus, a strap ; fevo, I bear.

172 FrederirJ,- Cluiptuan :

The specimens frcim tlie polyzoal rock of the Mallee borings are
invariably arrested in growth, showing only the first tier of seg-
ments above the primordial group.

Dixf rihi/f /'on. — Bin-e 11. :Ai^-')i'2 fft-r ; r)44-r)46 feet; 560-562 feet.

Genns PULVIXULINA, Parker and Jones.
PuLViNULiNA scAiJKicuLA, Chapman.

Pnlviii/ulina saahricAddv, Chapman, 1910, Proe. Roy. Sue.

Vict., vol. xxii. (N.S.), pt. ii., p. 288, pi. ii., figs. 2a, b.

Observations. — This distinct littlf species was hitherto known

only from the Batesfoi'd limestone. It is here moderately connnon.

and restricted to the polyzoal rock of the Mallee bores.

J);.sfr/'hiifio//.—Bi,ve 11, 540-542 feet; 554-556 feet.

PULVINLMNA CALABKA, Costa Sp. (Plate XVT., FigS. 8rt, 6).

RosdliiKi (-(dahva. Costa. 1856, Pal. del Regno di Xapoli,

pt. ii., pi. xiv., figs. 6r/-r.
li. thlara. Stache, 1864. Novara Exped., Geol. Tlieil. vol.
i.. p. 279, pi. xxiv., figs. 29a-r, SOfl-c.
Ohserrafioiis. — This remarkable and distinct species was figiiifd
by 0. G. Costa from the Italian Tertiaries, but not described.
There is no doubt about its identity with our Mallee bore speciinen.

The RosaUna thiara of Staclie is synonymous with Costa's species.
It was described from the Tertiary marl of Whaingaroa Harbour.
N.Z., which yields a microzoal fauna closely resembling that of the
deeper parts of the Mallee bores.

The test of our specimen is slightly rough, and is in the form
of a depressed nautiloid spiral. Hatter on the superior face, which
shows a many-chaniliered, short, seg!iiented whorl with constiicted
sutui'es, closely and dcTisely coiled on the central axis. Underside
somewhat concave, .showing tlie outer whorl. Septal face where
fractured shows the shell-wall to be thick.

Dimensions. — Diametei- of test. -'{.S-l nmi. ; thickness, 1.25 mm.
Distrihufion. — Bore 5. 16:MT5 feet.

Genus (iYPSINA, Carter.
(ivHSiNA nowcillNl, Cliapuian.

Umii^ina honrhiiti. Cliapman. 1910, Proc. R. Soc Vict.,
vol. xxii. (N.S.), pt. ii.. p. 291, pi. ii., figs, ia, h., pi.
iii., fitjs. 3-5.

N'eiv anil Iha-e Fossils. 173-

Ohsrrrations. — This species was hitherto only known t'loni the
liatfsford Limestone. Typical spwimeus were found in the present
Itoitvs as follows : —

Bore .-^ 226 feet. Bore 5, ]62-16:3 feet. Bore 11. 440-442 feet-

Fam. NUMMULINIDAE.
Genus POLYSTOMELLA. Lamarck.

POLYSrOMELLA STKIATOPUNC'I'ATA, F. V. M. .sp , var. KVOLUTA, nOV.
(Plate X\M., Fi^r. 9).

I)('.<rri ptioii. — This variety is vei-y distinct fiom the type-form
in having the earlier whorls exposed on tlie umbilical area. The-
latter is depressed and wide, eompared with that of the specific
form. The retral processes in this variety are strongly developed,
and the interspaces, especially on the last whorl, are circular and
deep towards the inner boundary of the whorl.

Diameter of test in figured specimen, .466 mm.

Ohfier rations. — Typical examples of the species itself are also
found in these bores; as, for instance, in Bore 11, 170-175 feet,
and in the later deposits, l)ut more spai-ingly than the variety above-
described.

An evolute variety of the above species has lately been described
by Messrs. Heron-Allen and Earland, fiom Selsey and Bognor in
Sussex, under the varietal name of self<ci/ent<ifi.'^ That variety Avaf,
recorded as " both recent and fossil "' (probably pleistocene). It
differs from the present evolute variety in liaving an encrustation
of redundant shell-growth ovei' the umbilieus, whieh is, moreovei'.
not so Avide noi- so deep as in our variety.

Dhfr;h„f/'o,>.—]inve 9. 26:5-27:'. feet. Bore 10. 160-186 feet ;.
195-225 feet; 296-.'?06 feet.

Genus OPERCULINA. d'Orbigny.
()PKi{(;ULiNA VENOSA, Fichtel and Moll sp.

yauf>liJ.< i-enoRiix, Fichlel and .Moll. 1798, Test Mier., p. 59

pi. viii., figs. e-h.
Amphinfefpna ciimiiKjii . ( 'aii)eTitei'. 1859, Phil. Trans..

p. 32. pi. v., figs. 1:M7.
Xiumnvlifes rumi/K/ii. Carp.. H. B. Brady, 1884. Be]).

Chall., vol. ix.. p. 749, pi. cxii., figs. 11-13, woodcut..

fig. 22.

1. Jouni. R. Micr. Soc, 1909, p. 695, pi. xxi., figs, -ia-e (\ai-. of P. striatojninctata); name jfivem
a-* /'. striatopunctata, var. selseyensig, lideni, ibiti, 1911, p. 448

174 Frederick- (Jhapman :

yirmmuli/ia venom. F. and M. sp.. ("haprnan. 1895. Pioc.
Zool. Soc. Lond., p. 47.

OhHcr vat ions. — This interesting species occurs twice in these
hores. It was accepted as a nummulite by Dr. H. B. Brady in
his work on the "Challenger" foraminifera (loc. supra cit.), but
he did not seem quite convinced that it belonged to that genus, for
he says,i " On the whole I am inclined to agree in this latter
■determination " [as a nummulite by Carpenter] " notwithstanding
the fact that in any large collection of specimens there ai-e invari-
ably a certain number in which the segments of the final convolu-
tion spread out radially, so as to impart an Operculi7ia-\\ke aspect
to the shell."

In my own cabinet there is a series of tests of this form from the
East Indian Archipelago, which shows extreme modification, ending
with the typical Operculina .

Operculina venosa is found on parts of the Australian coast at
the present day, in the neighbourhood of the Great Barrier Reef.

Distribution.— Bore 1, 215-244 feet. Bore 11, 566-568 feet.

SPONGIAE.
CALCISPONCxIAE.

SprcuLES, indet.
The spicules of calcareous sponges enumerated in the lists of
fossils from the borings are all of the tri-radiate type, and confoi-m
to figures 4, 5 and 6 of plate iii. in Dr. Hinde's description of
Plectroninia halli in their outline, but are more than twice the
size. 2 No precise identification is, liowever, attempted here.

ANTHOZOA.
HEXACORALLA.
Fam. TUHBINOLIIDAE.
HoLCOTROCHUS CRENULATUS, Dennaut. (Plate XVTI., Fig. 10.)
JIolcotrocliHS cretiidatiis, Dennant, 1904, Trans. R. Soc.
S. Austr., vol. xxviii., p. 'i, pi. ii., figs. ia-c.
Observations. — This neat little coral is not easily confused witli
the only other known form of the genus, //. scriptus, for the latter
<liffers in its more broadly-ovate transverse section, and in the
horozontal scribing of the costae; whilst the surface of the thecal
wall in //. crenulatus is granulate.

1. Loc. supra cit., p. 742.

2. Quart. Jouni. Geol. Soc. vol. hi. 1!) in, pp. .50-69, pita, iii.-v.

New and Rare Fossils. 1 75

This is the first recorded occurrence of //. crenulatus as a fossil.
Except for a slight weathering of the external surface, the two
specimens found here are in every way comparable with the recent
examples in the Dennant collection, from South Australia. These
were obtained by Dr. Verco at Cape Borda (15 fms.); St. Vincent's
Gulf; and Backstairs Passage (22 fms.).

The related //. scriptus, also found locently in Backstairs Pas-
sage, S.A., at 22 fathoms, was originally descril)ed by Mr. Dennant
from the Tertiary of Muddy Creek, and supposed by that author
to come from the lower beds. The i)ink. ferruginous appearance
of the type specimen now in the National Museum collection sug-
gests, however, that it came from the red limestone between the
Balcombian and the Kalimnan series at Muddy Creek, and about
which there is now evidence for believing it to be of Janjukian age.
The rolled examples of H. scripUis found by Dr. T. S. Hall, came
from the Kalimnan of Forsyth's Grange Burn. Hamilton.

Distrihntion. — //. crenulatus occurs in Bore 11 of this presejit
series at 197-199 feet, associated, with Kalimnan fossils.

OCTOCORALLA.
PSEUDAXONIA.
Fam. ISIDAE.
Genus MOPSEA. Lamaroux.

MoPSEA TKNisoNi, sp. nov. (Plate XVfl., Figs. 11 «, h, \2a, h,
13 and 15a-c; PI. XTX., Fig. 39).
his sp., Tenison Woods, 1("^G2, (reol. Observations in S.

Australia, plate facing, p. 7-3, fig. 6.
(?) his dactyla. Id., palaeont. New Zealand, pt. iv.. 1880,

p. 7, pi. i., fig. 1.
cf. Isia sp.. Duncan, 1875, Quarr. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol.

xxxi., p. 674, pi. xxxviiiA, figs. 1-4.
his sp.. Id., 1875, ibid., p. 675. j)!. xxxviiis.. fig. 4.
Preliminary Note. — Tenison Woods in 1880 figured and described
some fossil remains possibly identical with tlie above species under
the name of his dactyla, from Hutchinson's Quarry, Oamaru. Vnit
they were so badly preserved as to preclude an exact comparison. It
seems better, therefore, to give a distinctive name, in honour of T.
Woods, who actually figured this form in 1862 from the Mt. Gambler
deposits. In his description of the fossils, he states, amongst other
points, that "The condyles are convex or sub-conical, concentrically

176 Frederic/.- Cluvpiuaii :

striate," but he does not luciitioii the i-adial striae seen in our
form. Judging from an examination of several hundred examples
of the calcareous internodal joints of Mopsea from the Mallee bores,
Tenison Woods' specimens may liave been abraded, so that the
fine, salient radii were cleared away, leaving only the more deeply-
marked concentric growth stages of the calcareous part of the
axis. Specimens in the present collection show both conditions.

Description . — Calcai-eous joints forming the internodes, circular
to elliptical in transverse section ; short and wide when from the-
base of the coral; longer, to extremely slender and circular in
section where forming the nuiddle and distal joints. Sides straight
to incurved, and slightly dilated at the ends, especially in the
terminal joints; with numerous, fine linear ridges or striae.
Articular facets flat to C(niieal, with strong concentric rings of
growth and numerous fine radii. The concentric rings are undu-
late, and outwardly concave to meet the axial radii at the cusps.
The radii are in systems of eight, and these, with the concentric-
lines, produce a very ornate effect on the articular surface in well
preserved specimens. The stiiae of the cylinder coi'respond Avith the
radial lines of the condyles.

Microscopic Structure of the CdlcdreouK Internodes. — A trans-
verse section of the joints shows that the axis is built on a system
of eight rays which send off secondary and tertiary branches; and
these consist of thin calcareous plates with a slight upward curva-
ture, giving a tegulate appearance to the rays, in section. The
inter-radial areas appear to be formed of fused, spicular bodies.
Compared with the structure of the calcareous axis in a living
Mopsea (M. cf. encrinula, Lamarck sp.V the fossil species here
described (M. tenisoni) shows fundamentally similar structure,
though on a coarser scale. This is probal)ly owing to the rays not
having advanced beyond the jirimitive eight. Tlie tegulate api)car-
auee is seen in both the living and fossil species.

Dimensions of Calcareous Joints. — Three typical specimens were
selected.

A. — Specimen of a basal joint ; 0x8 nmi. in diameter. 4 mm.
high.

]{. — A median joint, that is, fiom the middk' liranelu's of the
coiiillum; 2.5 nmi. in diameter, T) nun. liigh.

('. — A terminal joint; .75 mm. in diameter, 2.25 nun. high.

JJisfribution.— Bore 1, 215-244 feet. Bore 3, 201-220 feet; 226
feel. Bore 4. 103-170 feet. Bore 8, 210-219 feet. Bore 9. 315-325
feet. Bore 10, 310-320 feet. Bore 11, 267-590 feet.

Ne>V and Hair Fossils. 177

spicules Assoc ///fed in the Deposits wifh Mopsea. — Alcyonariam
spicules are imt uiicoiniiioii in the finest washings of the polyzoal
i-(n-k (if the Mallee hores. Thev appeal- to he all of one general
type, and witliout imuh douht may he referred to the same
organisms as these here deseiihed. They agree with certain species
of Mopsea found round the Australian coast at the present day, and
closely iesend)le those Hgun-d under the name of Mopsea whiteleggei
by Thomson and Mackinnon.i a delicate and graceful plume-like
form from Broken Bay, New South Wales. The fossil spicules her«r
recorded are fusifoini, twisted to a long S-shape. or V-shape, and
sparsely covered with short rounded, blunt or square-ended
tul)ercles. They measui'e from .375 to .4 mm. in length.

.Mopsea UAMiLroNi, Thomson sp. (Plate XVII., Fig. 16).

his sp., Duncan, iSTo, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xixi.,

p. 674. pi. xxxviii.a, figs. 5 and (?) 6, 7, 7a.
Isis sp.. 1, Id., 1880, Palaeontologia Indica (Sind Fossil
Corals and Alcyonaria) ser. xiv., vol. i., pt. 1, p. lU9,
pi. xxviii., figs. 8. 9.
/sis /lamilfoni, Thomson. 1908. Trans, and Proc. N.Z.

Inst., for 1907, vol. xl., p. 99, pi. xiv., fig. 1.
Mopsea hamiltoni, Thomson sp., Chapman, 1912, Mem.
Nat. Mus., Melbourne. No. 4, p. 43. pi. vi., figs.
3«, h: 4.
Ohstrrations. — The calcareous joints of this species are scarce in-
the present collection, as compared with those of the foregoing-
Mopsea tenisoni. Their differential characters are well defined in
most examples, as seen in specimens now figured, in Avhich the radial
lines on the condyles are very pronounced and distinctly crenulate.

Duncan's Indian specimens referred to above were from the
Gaj Series (Burdigalian) ; Naigh-Nai Valley, S.W. of Sehwaii.
Duncan compares these fossils with his previously figured examples
from C. Otway, Victoria; and there is no doubt of their close-
relationship if not identity.

Mopsea hamiltoni is now known from the Cape Otway Series, from
King Island, and from the greensands of Kakanui. New Zealand,
as well as from three of the borings in the Mallee ; whilst a piac-
tically identical form occurs in tlie Gaj Series of India.

Disfn'hution.—Bove 3. 226 feet. Bore 4. 163-170 feet. Bore-
11. 342-510 feet.

1. Mem. .^ustr. Mus. Mem. iv., pt. 13, Alcyonaria, inu, p. 678, pi. Ixvi., fijft. i, 3; pi. Ixiii.

13

178 Frnlrrn-h- C/h, pjuo u .-

(ienus ISIS. LinnacMis.

Isis COMPHES8A, Duiic;in. (Plate XVII., Kigs. \7n. b\ Pi. XIX.,
Fi.(. 41).

Isis r(>/////ressa. Duiicun. 1880, Palaeoii tologia Iiidiea (Siinl
Fos.sil Corals and Alcyonaria), ser. xiv., vol. i., pt. 1,
p. 109. pi. xxviii.. figs. 4. 5.

Ohserraf/o/is. — Two fiaiiiuents of the stony axis of the alcyonarian
occur in the Mallee Ijoi-es, which are conipai-able to the above foi-m.
The largest fragment measures 12 m^ni. in length, and its greatest
transverse diameters are 6.25x4 mm. In shape it is a flattened
cylinder, and is superficially grooved with coarse longitudinal striae.
The fractiired surface of one of the fragments is, in the central area,
discoloured to a bluish black, as if by residual organic staining. The
articular surface is nearly flat, and has all the characters of
Duncan's figured specimen.

A transverse section of this fossil under the microscope shows it
to consist of undulose concentric laminae, with a sub-circular
central portion having numerous shoi-t i-adial extensions; and these
layers, by accelerated growth along one axis, cause the stem to
finally assume an elliptical outline. The cusps of the concentric
layers form the costae on the external siirface of the calcareous axis.

Duncan's specimens were from the Haj beds of Tandra Rahim
Khan.

Occurrence.— Bore 3. 226 feet. Bore 11. 495-500 feet.

NOTE ON THE (lEXEIJlC AFFINITIES OF THE ABOVE
AL( 'YON A R I AN FOSS I LS .

Calcareous joints of Alcyonarians have long l)een known fioiii the
Tertiary beds of Southern Australia and N^ew Zealand. These
fossils have hitherto been referi'ed to Is/'s. Tenison Woods in 1862
figured a basal joint from the Mount Gambier limestones whicli he
referred to that genus. 1 Subsequently Duncan provisionally re-
ferred to Isfs and Mopsea the collection of alcyonarian remains
sent to him fioni .\ustralia (Cape Otway beds), accordingly as the
calcareous joints are bianclied or unbranched.Z '{'hat is to say, if
branched, they belong to Isis. if not they may i)elong to Mnpsen.
or are unl)i'an(he<l joints of Isis. This view now ap])ears to be
erroneous, for in Mo/>sfn encrinii/a l)ranchiiig invariably takes

1. Geol. Obs. in S. Austvali.i : plate fiiciri-r y. 73, fife'. 6.

2. Quart. .1. Ceol. Soc, vol. \xxi., p. 07:!.

^ev (lull liiire Fossils. 179

jjlace oil the calcaieoiis iiitciiKxlrs.i Tin- si>irulrs (selerodei-mitesj of
Mopsed are stated to Ije cluh-sliape(l,2 l)ut tlie majority of those
figured in the " Challenger " report and from tlie " Thetis "
expedition are spindle-sliaped. thontrh sdinetimes a])proa(hing the
clavate type.

In Melifoden the internodes are calcareous with a horny matrix.
In the present examples referred to Mopsen. the microscopic struc-
ture of the joints excludes that genus from considei'ation. since tlicy
are seen to be solidly and originally calcified.

There is, however, at least one species in the present collection
Avhich agrees with /.v«s, as seen in the long, and coarsely-grooved
joints, and the dense lamellated structure of the axis.

CRIXOIDEA.

Fam. COMATULIDAE.

Genus ANTEDON. de Freminville.

Antkdon pkotomackonema, sp. nov. (Plate XVII., Fi.us. 18a, h).

Description. — Isolated centrodorsal nearly hemispherical seen
from the side; with more than 30 cirrus sockets, an-anged in threes
and fours vertically, alternate; borders of sockets prominent, with
indications of a crenulated surface to the rim. Ventral aspect sub-
circular, showing the grooves of the radial pentagon, which increase
in width near the periphery. Dorsal aspect subpentagonal at base,
with a central depression apparently not perforate or permanently
open.

Dimensions. — Type: Height of centrodoi'sal, 1.154 mm; width
ventrally. 1.7 mm.

Ohservations. — Another specimen, probably of this species, and
twice the dimensions, occurs in the same sample, viz.. Bore 11,
430-432 feet. It is. however, not so well preserved, and conse-
quently is not figured.

Separate brachial ossicles, which may be referable to this or an
allied species, are common in the Mallee borings, in the Janjukian
series, having a Mount Gambier facies; and also at Batesford,
Geelong.3

There is still another species of Antedon in the southern Austra-
lian Tertiaries, which is found at Torquay, Victoria, and at Mount
■Gambier. This will be described later, from specimens in the

1. Wright and Studer, Rep. Chall., Zool.. vol. xxxi., 1889, Aloyonsria, p. 43.

2. Cambridge Natural History, Coelenterata, 1906, p. 3.53.

3. See I'roc. Roy. .Soc. Victoria, vol. xxii. (N.S.), pt. ii., 1910, pi. 30;., p. lii., fijjg. 8a-//.

180 Frederick Cluipman :

National Museum. It is a comparatively large foi-m, with iew
cirrus sockets and a low lentiodorsal.

Ajfi7iities. — One of tlie noarest allied forms to the aVjove species
appears to be Anterlon iiKirronema, Miller sp..l a Feather-star
which has been recoided by the " ChalleTiger '' from Port Jacksoih
at 30-35 fathoms; and is also found in King Geoi'ge's Sound and
Port Stephens.

Occurrence. — Centrodorsals (2 examples). Bore 11, 430-432 feet.
Brachials (probably of this species). Bore 3, 226 feet. Bore 4,
163-170 feet. Bore 11, 430-432 feet; 438-440 feet; 440-442 feet;
442-446 feet; 446-448 feet; 457-458 feet; 540-542 feet; 546-548
feet; 558-560 feet; 560-562 feet; 562-564 feet.

Antedon, sp. (Plate XV ill., Fi-. 19).

Observations. — A eiirus joint of a larger species than that de-
scribed above as A. protonKicronenid occurs in the polyzoal limestone-
of the Mallee. It may be referable to the Mount Gamljier and Tor-
quay species before noticed.

Occurrence. — Bore 11, 560-562 feet.

ASTEROIDEA.

PHANEROZONIA.

Genus PENTAGONASTEK. Linck.

Pkntagonastku sp. (Plate X VITI , Figs. 20, 21 ).

Ohservatiotis. — Marginal plates of a large species of Sliield-star

have already been recorded by Dr. T. S. Hall^ from the Lower avid

Upper beds of Muddy Ci-eek ; and also from Spring Creek. Waurn

Ponds and Batesford.

In the Mallee boi-ings the genus /'c/ifai/nna.vfer is well distributed
through the polyzoal rock series, and repi-esented both by subtri-
angular plates from the margin, and subpolygonal to rounded
plates of the abactinal area. A few of the plates met with are
covered with minute tulirrcles, as in those of the common living
Fentagonastcr (nir<(l(i .

Occurrence.— BoYQ 3, 226 feet. Bore 11, 197-590 feet.

1. Seel', n. C.-ii-pciitcr. l{el>oi-t cm the ('(iiimtiilac, (hall. lie).. Zoo
p. -212.
•I. I'roc. \Xoy. Soc, Viotoriu, '

New and H<tre Fossils. 181

KCHIXOIDKA.

■ riDAK'OIDA.

Kain. (MDAinDAE.

Genus (^OXIOCIDAKIS, Dosor.

GoNOiciiJAius sp. (Plate XVII , Fig. 22).

Ohs(iraf/o/is. — Aiiiiiugst other eidaroicl spines oecurring here
there is a small spine differing from those of the living G. tuharia,
Lam. sp.l in having the shaft hour-glass shaped, smooth, with blunt
<\pical tubercles; whereas those in G. turhnria are always more or less
flattened, and tubercular along the shaft, excepting in the case of
the secondary spines, w'hich are longitudinally serially granulate.
From Leiocidaris it differs in the clavate form of the spine.

(roniocidaris (misprinted " Gomocidaris ") is recorded by Tate
in his " Census of the Older Tertiary Fauna of Australia. ''2

Dimensions. — Length, 8 mm.; greatest width at about one-tliird
from the base, 3.1 mm.

Occurrence. — Bore 11, S'jO-oSo feet.

CLYPEASTROIDA.

Fam. FIBIILAKIIDAE.

Genus ECHIXOCYAMTTS, van Phels.

Sul)genus SGTTTELLINA, Agassiz.

EciIINOCYAMUS (.SCUTKLLINA) PATELLA, Tate sp. (Plate XVIIT.,

Fig. 23).

Ohserrnfions. — In 19(17 Di-. T. S. HalP de.sci-il)fd a Snifel/ina
tentatively referred to the above species, liaving a definite niarsuiiium
or brood pouch. This structure was new for this oi tier of eehiiidids.
the Clypeastroida.4 The figui-cd example came from the polyzoal rock
near the mouth of the Glenelg River, Victoria, and Dr. Hall also re-
corded other specimens obtained by him from Mount Gambler in a
similar rock. Amongst the score or two tests of the above species in
the Mallee bores collection one very fine example with a brood pouch

1. See McCoy Prod. Zool. Vict., dec. 10, 1883, p. 33, pi. c.

2. .loiirn. Roy. Soc. X.S. Wales, vol. x.Nii., 188!), p. ir,!.

3. Pioc. Roy. Soc. Victoii.i, vol. xx. (N.S.), pt. ii., I(KJ7, p. 140. woodcut.

4. H. L. Clark in his description of t'ibularia nutrieiix obtained by the "Thetis," off the cna<t
of N.S. Wales (Mem. Austr. Mus., No. iv., 1909, p. 557, pi. Iviii., figs. 1-11) refers to that species as
" the only clypeastroid known" with a niarsupiuni, hp probably not havina: seen the report i|Uote(l.

182 Fredei irh i'liapmaii :

oecnis. In outliiif it is of an elonjLrate nr ovatr type, bnt comes-
within the limit of variation in the aml)ital outline assumed hv this
species. This example measufes 8.5 mm. x 7 mm., and Avas found
in' Bore 11 at noO-od.") feet in white poly/.oal lork of the Mount
Gambier type.

In one instance (Bore 8, 165-18U feet) an examph' of this species-
was found with the periproct inframarginal, hut this need not be
considered as more than an exceptional chaiactei-. as such variation
is characteristic of the genus as a whole, but not of the species under
present notice.

ANNELIDA.

POLYCHAETA TUBICOLA.

Fam. SERPULIDAE.

Genus 8EUPLTLA, Linne.

(Skrpula. ouYKNKNSis, sp. uov. (Plate XVIII., Figs. 24, 25 ;
PI. XIX., Fig. 42).

Descnpti(ni . — Tube free, stout, hexagonal in .section, gently
tapering and slightly curved; the cusps formed l)y the six longitu-
dinal irregular ridges. Exterior of shell annulated by variably
spaced rings of growth, producing a roughened appearance on the
edges of the ridges. Intciiov of tube round and polished.

Di i.ic'iixions. — l-'igured specimens (co-types). Spec. A. — Length.
5 mm. ; width. 2 mm. Spec. \i. — Length. 6.5 mm.; greatest width,
1.75 mm.

()lfs(rr((ti())is. — Several forms of worm tubes ascrilied to Serpnla
ap})roach tlie present species, l)iit none seems to exactly match it in
its hexagonal and Huted cross section. 'I'he specimens are very
constant in charai'ter. From the sliells of Dciif (ilium they are
typical shell-structure under the microscope (pi. xix., tig. 42).

Orc///'/r//rr.— Bore :'.. 21(1 feet. Borr 1!. 562-590 feet. Fairly
common.

Genus DITRIIPA, Berkley.

l)nKU}'.-\ COKNEA, Ijiiine sp., viir. woumbetiknsis, McCoy. (Plate
XVI 11., Figs. 26-28).

Ditrupa ii'urui/n'f/ctis/.s, McCoy, 1874, Prog. Rep. Gcol.

Surv. Vict., pt. I. p. 22. tig. 4. Chapman, l!)(l5. Vict.

Nat., vol. xxi.. No. 12. p. 18(1.

JJescr/'/ff/oii. — Tube lathcr small, slende)- and taj)eiing; swollen

near the apex and tiinua1c(l from the shoulder of the swelling to

iXew iintl. Hare Fijssi/s. ]S'i

tlu' oritur, till' t'd^f lit' wliicli is tliiii and sliari». Surface smooth,
l)ut I'm- iiHlistinct iiii<;s of Lirowtli. Otxasioiially these rings
are vciv tiiii'k. and rust-nihk' toUars.l lAMif^tlis of two typical
exaiiipk's. 8 nnii. and !>..") nun., respectively; hreadths. 1.5 mm. and
1.5 mm. at the apical end.

Ohsrrrttf/n/is. — The type species has been described under many
names. 2 As a fossil it raniies in Eui-o))e from the Middle Eocene to
the Pleistocene, and is also found livinir.

The present variety is more re<;ulaily tai)ei'iny' than Brocchi's
" iJciitdli mil " coarcfaf iiiii.'^ It is close)' to Sowerby's " ])ent(t-
Iniiii " iiKTfUisdt uni.^ from which it dift'ers in its more irregular
surfai-e and generally smaller size. The latter species is synony-
mous wirh DitniiKi roriKC.

The original specimen refi'ired to by .McCoy, from the Janjukian-
ironstone of Stawell, N'ictoria. is merely a mould, and the figure
given in the Progi-ess llejxnt (loc. supra cit.) hardly coincides Avith
a s(|ueeze which I have taken fi'om the type specimen, and now
figured (see ]il. xviii.. tig. 2()). Since McCoy connects this specimen
with thost' from Wormbete Creek, Barwon Valley, there leaves no
room for doul)r as to its identity. This vaiiety is, so far as
known, (|uite I'estricted to the Janjukian series in Victoria.

Orcirreiirc.—Woyv :;. 2ol-22() feet; 22G feet. Bore 4. 16:M70
feet; 180-]!)U feet. Bore 5, 16:5-175 feet; 175-189 feet; 189-190
feet. Bore G. 150-15-1: feet; 158-161 feet. Bore 9, 315-325 feet.
Bore 10, 254-296 feet; 310-320 feet. Bore 11. 272-315 feet; 331-
342 feet; 342-349 feet; 353-370 feet; 448-450 feet.

Drrni PA. cornea. L. sp., var. constkicia, var. nov. (Plate XVIII.
Fig.s. 29, 30).

Dfscriiifinii . — Tubi- tapering, only slightly curved, broken up
into nodosities by constrictions at intervals along the tube. The
nodose swellings aie generally found at or towards the apical end,
tlius showing the varii'tal character to be ])artly attributable to
senility. Tulic larger and stouter than in v.w. ironnbefiefisis.

Orriirnnrr. — linro 1. 215-244 feet. Bore 3, 226 feet. Bore 4.
163-17(» feet: lS()-]!)() fivt. Bore 5. 163-175 feet. Bore 10. 310-
320 feet.

1. Ill this c^ur.aoter it icseiiiblcs Dilnijin xtvdnyiilatit, Desliiiv es. Sec- Mono;;iapliie, 1S2G, p. 372,
pi. xvi., fi^'. 28. Al.so Rovereto, |>al. Ital., vol iv. 1898, p. 73, pi. vii. (ii.), fi<,'. 1.5, \bae. This specie*
or variety is recorded living- from the Mediterranean, Southern Ocean, and Atlantic.

2. See Kovereto, G. l'ala;ontojjcrai)hia ttalica, vol. iv., 1898. p. 71 : and vol x., 19(i4, p. 29.
:i. Conch iolOjLria, vol. ii., pi. i, fis,'. 4.

4. Min. Conch.. \o\. i.. 1M2. pi. Iwix., fi>,'.s. 3, 4.

184 Frederick i^li(i,jriiiaii :

Genus SPIRORBIS, Laiuarek.
Spihoubis helicifokmis, P^icliwald. (Plate XVIIl., Fig. ol).

Sjjirorhis /ielir/fon)i/K, Eichwald, LSo^. Lethaea I'ossica.

vol. iii., p. 52, pi. iii., %. 11. Rovereto, li)04. Pal.

Ital., vol. X., p. 59.

Ohservafio/is. — Several specimens, agreeing in all details of shajie

and ornament, were found in the present series. Some of thein

are attached to the interior of bivalved shells.

A similarly ornamented (?) Spirorhi-'t, but of much larger dimen-
sions, is figured by Goldfussl from the Oolite and Lias of Geiniany.
under the name of Serpula convoluta. Eichwald's species came
from the Tertiary (probably Miocene) of several Russian localities,
as Zukowie, Zalisce and tlie districts of Volhynia and Podolia.
Rovereto found this species in tlie Miocene of Ritzing and Neulei-
chenfeld in Austria.

The fossil recorded as Spirnrhis sp. from the polyzoal rock (Jan-
jukian) of Seal River, King Island2 evidently Ijelongs to the
above species.

Occurrence.— ^ove 8, 160-165 feet. Bore 11, 564-566 feet.

Class POLYZOA.

Suborder CHEILOSTOMATA.

Fam. CATENICELLIDAE.

Genus CLAVIPORELLA, MacGillivray.

Clavipokklla sp. (Plate XVIIL, Fig. 32).

Observations. — A zooeium of Clavi porclht was picked out of the

material from Bore 5 at 163-175 feet, in tlie present series. The

specimen is important from the fact that it corresponds with the

peculiar little iron-stained bodies occasionally found in the Jan-

jukian calcareous sands of Wauiii Ponds, and wliich have been

referred to the foi-aminifev, AKtrorhi-.d (iiu/i/ldsd.^

Fam. .ME.MBILVNIPORIDAE.
Ceiius SELENA RI A, Busk.

Sklknahia M.\i!(;iNA'r.\, Tciiisoii Woods, \ai-. spiiiAMs, \ar. nov.

(Platr XVIIl., Fiu. 3:5).
IJtHcri pfion. — The typo spei'ies, N. iii(ir(/i iitifa , is very comnum
throughout the strata in the bores referable to the Kalimnan and

1. Petrefacta Oerinaiiiae, vol. i., 18:;7, p. -iiS, pi. l.wii., tiys. 14((-./.

2. Mem. .Nat. Miis,, M.'lhomiu', No. l, IDI', p. 4:..
a. Trans. Hoy. Soc S. Aust., vol. viii , lS8(i, p. Kin.

NeAv atul Rare Fosfiils 185

Janjukian series. Some of the forms, howevt-i-, noaitst the little
variety lucens, MacGillivray,! with the pt)lished dorsal surfatf have
a distinct spiral arrangement of the zooecia viewed from the loMer
or ventral aspect of the zoarinm. Another feature invariably accom-
panying this varietal charactrr, and which is sometimes met with in
other species of the genus, is the inclusion of a little glauconite pebble
in the centre of the zoarium on its lower side. This probably formed
a point of attachment for the initial zooecium.

Dimensions of figured specimen (type): 1.87 mm. in diametei-.
Occurre lice .—Vonwd in strata referable to the bas^e of tlu' Kalim-
nan and the top of the Janjukian.

Bore 5. 155-159 feet. Boie 8, 165-180 feet; 180-199 feet; 210-
219 feet. Bore 9. 254-256 feet; 263-273 feet; :n 5-325 feet. Bore
10, 230-254 feet; 254-296 feet. Bore 11, 199-209 tVvt.

*Fam. LEPRALIIDAE.

Genus LEPRALIA. Johnston.

Lkpham.\ GiPPSLANDll, Waters. (Plate XIX., Fig. 43).

Lepralia gippslandii , Waters, 1882. Quart. Journ. (4fol.

Soc, vol. xxxviii., p. 509. MacGillivi-ay, 1895. Trans.

B. Soc. Vict., vol. iv.. p. 77, pi. x.. fig 21.

Ohservdtions. — Four typical examples of this species were found

in a sample from Bore 5, at 175-189 feet. They form an enciusting

layer upon a species of Cellepora.

The species appears to liave l:>een liitherto confined to the locality
of Baiinsdale.

Fain. 8.MITTIIDAE.
Genus PORINA. d'Oibigny.

POKINA GKACILI.S, M. Ed wards sp.

Poiiiia rpari/is. M. Edwaids sp., MacCTillivray, 1885. Trans.
R. Sor. Viet., vol. iv.. p. 103, pl. xiv., figs. 21-24.
Observat lorix. — The usual form of the zoarium in these deposits
(polyzoal rock) is the lobed, bilaminate variation. In eonnection
with this it is interesting to note that MacGillivray (loc. sujMa cit. )
says, " The lobate form is that usually found reeent. while the great
majority of the fossil specimens are cylindrical."

1. Tiaiis. Roy. Soi-., Viet., vol, iv., 1S)9.=>, p. 48.

186 Fnuh'rn-h (%nj>,Han:

Class BIlArHTOPODA.

Fain. TKHEBUATl'LIDAE.

Genus TEREBRATULINA. (rOrl)i^iiy.

TkREBRATULIXA FLINDKKSI, sp. liov. (Plate XVUr., Fii;-. ."U'Nr).

Description. — Shell small, elongate ovate, with tapering beak.
Both valves convex, the pedicle valve deeper tlian the l)rachial ; the
latter depressed towards the anterior margin. Beak stout, pro-
minent, with large foramen.

Shell surface ornamented with about 12 strong, ridge-like costae,
bifurcated at or near the anterior margin, and beset with squamosa
scales; costae becoming spinose at lateral margins of shell. Inter-
costal spaces deep. Concentric lines of growth inconspicuous.

Dimensions. — Lengtli, 4.75 mm.; greatest width, 3 nun.; thick-
ness, 2 mm.

Ohstrrdfions. — This species is well repi-esented in the Dennant
Collection by specimens from Flinders, from the Mitchell Eivei-, and
fi-oiu the Muddy Creek older beds.

T . findersi differs from T . fria/u/ulfiris. Tate,l in its more elon-
gate shape and ovate outline, and in tlie convexity of the bi-achial
valve.

Occurrence. — Two specimens (one of whicli is the selected holo-
typeK found in Bore K). :]\i)-:V2i) feet.

Fam. TF]?EB1{ATFLL1DAF.

Cenus TEREBKATELLA. (1'()rl)igny.

Tekebratrli.a acutii.'osti; \. sp. iio\. (Plate XV [JT., Fig. '.^yin-r).

Dc.^cn ption . — Shell small, subci I'eular, compressed, with a pro-
minent l)eak. Pedicle valve lonve.x in the umbonal area, with
sli-jhtly concave shoulders, flattcMied posteriorly. Brneliial valve
nioie ile))ressed and only slightly i-ouvex in the ]iosterioi- region.
Surface nearly smooth, but under a low jMiwt'r st'en to lie finely,
rail i ally striate.

/>;///^//^■/V>/^9.— Leno-tli. •2.2:5 nmi. ; l.readth, 1.84 nnii. : thickness.
.7.") mm.

OlK-ierraf ions. — This s])ecies bears somi' resemblance to the evenly
contoured variations of T. iroothi. Tate, 2 l)ut is easily separated by

1. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. A\ist., veil, iii., isso, i>. l.".'.t, i>I. viii., H-s. -,iiL n.id.. vol. \xiii., lsli!>
p. -Jf-J.

". Op. siipia fit., vol. iii., ISSH, )>. Kit, jil. i\., ti-s. KV/,-.

Nnr and Ho re Fossils. 187

the i.rniiiinciit l)c;ik jiimI tlir ahsriut' of a inesial i'ol<l on tlie lirachial

valvr.

(;,.,.„,.;.,,„.,.. _B,.ie 11. 4:5()-4;5-2 feet.

Tkiikhkatklla poejilaxdica, .sp. iiov. (Plate X\'lll., Fii;s. SGttc,.
37, 38).

Descri ption. — Shell small. roTindly oval : outline subanguhtte.
Valves plano-convex. Beak small, pointed, foraini'ii conspieuous :
surface of pedicle valve strongly arched dorsally ; Itrachial valve
with a shalloAV. bi-oad sinus, not extensive, turned doAvn to meet
the arched fold of the pedicle valve. Sliell surface finely punctate..
and showing a few faint concentrii- lines tending to l)ecome lami-
nate.

Dimensions. — Length of holotype. 5.75 mm.: width. 5 nun.;,
thickness, 2.25 mm.

Ohserrations.- — This interesting little Terehratclln is not infre-
quent in the bores, but never abundant. Iti only two cases were
perfect examples secured, on account of the lial)ility of the valves
to easily separate. By its well-developed median septum it is seen
to be a typical member of this genus. The above species is of the
TerehrateUa woodsi type.l but that shell is much heavier, having a
larger foramen and comparatively gigantic beak, and with a deepei-
and more convex brachial valve. At first sight T . porihnidira might
be confused with Tate's Magasello hmafa.^ which also occurs in
these bores, but may be distinguished by the latter having a typical
acute beak with smaller foramen, characteristic of that genus, and
a rounder outline to the shell.

In the Dennant collection there is a ty))ical example of the above
species from Portland, which was doul)tfully referred to Terehra-
teUa woodni. and in the same tube are numeious shells of a similar
form from Beaumaris. My attention was first directed to this
particular species some years ago in the Nati(mal .Museum collec-
tion, when sorting over material from the white polyzoal limestiuie
of Portland, at which locality it is a typical fossil.

Occurrence.— Yi(^\e 6, lU-150 feet; 154-158 feet. Bore 9. 263-
273 feet. Bore 10. 254-296 feet; 310-320 feet. Bore 11. 505-510
feet: 515-520 feet ; 525-530 feet : 545-55(1 feet.

Loo supra cit.

Trutis. K. Soc. S. Aiist, vol. xxiii.. 180f>. ]..

188 Frederick Chaimmn :

Genus MAGA SELLA. DalL
Magasblla luxata, Tate.

MagaseUn lunnfa, Tate, 189^. Trans. R. Snc. E. Austr.,
voL xxiii., p. 250, pi. viii.. fi<4s. .3, '.\«.
It is interesting to note the (tccunence of tliis i-ace form in the
present series, especially as it was previously found in sonu- South
Australian bores, viz.. Croydon Bore, near Adelaide, at 400 to 1230
feet, and Murguidawa Bore, near Wellington, at 213 feet. Tate
also records the species from Belmont, near Geelong, and from the
Murray River Cliffs at Mann van.

Occurreure.—B(n-e !). 315-325 feet; 11. 560-565 feet.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
Plate XVI.

Fig. 1 a, h, c. — Lithothamnion rdinoxissi^mni, Reuss. Three

examples of bianchlets. Mallee Bore No. 5. 163-175

feet. X 4.
2. — L. ramosissimum, Reuss. Vertical section of a branchlet,

showing variable cell-dimensions. Mallee Bore No. 3,

226 feet. x 26.
3. — L. raiii(>.sixsinium, Reuss. Portion of same branchlet in

section, showing two conceptacles with included tetra-

spores (T). the latter ti-ansforming into pale gieen

glauconite. x 52.
4. — Tr'iUiiKi lioii'clii ni, Schlumbergcr. Lateral aspect of test.

Malice Bore No. 4, 163-1 TO feet. x 13.
h a, h. — AniDKxJixru^ oval is, s]). nov. : a, lateral aspect of

test; h. edge view. Malice Bore No. 10, 160-186 feet.
X 26.
■&.—F ri)iidicid(iii(i lorifeid, sp. nov. Lateial aspect of test.

Mallee Bore. No. 11. 43S-440 feet. x 13.
7. — Carpeiiterid jirofriforiN/s, (iocs. A young t'xaiiii)lc. con-
sisting of the rotaline basal series of chambers. Mallee

Bore No. 11, 540-542 feet, x 26.
8 a, h. — Pidvinulina calahra, Costa sp. : a, superior aspect;

It. inferior aspect. Mallee Bore No. 5. 163-175 feet.
X 13.
i). — Fol;ish)iii('lhi sfn'<ifo/)>i/icfaf(i. F. and .M . sp.. viw. tro/iitn,

var. nov. Lateral aspect of test. .Malice bore No. 9,

263-273 feet. x 56.

Prop. E.S. Vict.>n,i, Ul]:^ Plat.- XVI.

Proc. R.S. Victoria. I'.tl3. I'iaU' XVII.

K,(;., arl. n.-it. del.

Proc. R.S. Vit-fui-ia, lid:?. l'];it.' XVTIl.

I'.C , ad. iiat. del.

■. l.'.S. Vi.-luiia. litlli. I'latu XIX.

40

New (iiiil Rare Fossils. 189'

Plate XVII.

Fi<r. 10. — Holcofrochus crenulaftis, Deniiant. Lateral aspect.
Mallee Bore. No. 11, 107-19!) feet, x 26.

11 a, h. — Mnps-ea ff/ii-soni, sp. nov. : r/, articular face of

joint; h, lateral surface of joint. .Mallei Bore No. 11,
555-560 feet, x 8.

12 a, h. — M. tenisoni. sp. iiov. : a. articular face of juint

near distal ei:id of coi-alluni ; A. lateral aspect. Malice

Bore No. 11, 544-546 feet. x S.
!•}. — M. tenisoni, sp. nov. Thin slice of a sector of a joint.

magnified to show structure. Mallee Bore No. 11, 495-

500 feet, x 52.
14. — Mopsea cf. encri nuhi , Lam. sp. (Living). A thin slice

of a sector of a joint of the corallum, to show similarity

of sti-uctui-e with that of the preceding- species. x 26.
15. — a-c. — M()/)Si(i sp.. cf. teitisoiii, sp. nov. : a-c, spicules or-

scleroderinites. Mallee Bore No. 11. 546-548 feet.
X 52.
Ki.- — .1/. Jiamiltoni. Thomson sp., Articulai- face of joint.

Mallee Bore No. 11, 505-510 feet. x 8.

17 a, h. — his compressa, Duncan: a. lateral aspect; h,

articular face. Mallee Bore No. 11, 495-500 feet, x 2.

18 fi, h. — Afifedoii prototnocrniienid. sp. nov. : a, centiM-

dorsal seen from the side; h. ventral aspect. Mallee
Bore No. 11, 430-432 feet. x 26.

Plate XV 111.

Fijr. \':\.—A„fedon sp. Cirrus joint. Mallee B.u-e No. 11, 560-562-

feet. X 26
20. — Pentagonnsfer sp. Maiuinal plate. Mallee Bore No.

11. 575-580 feet, x 4.
21. — Pentagonaster sp. Bitundcd plate of the ahactinal area.

Mallee Bore No. 11, 575-580 feet, x 4.
22. — Goniocidaris sp. Hour-glass shaped spine. Mallee

Bore No. 11, 5.30-535 feet. x 5.
23. — Echinoci/amus (Soifelli naS pdtelhi. Tate sp. Actinal

surface showing niarsu]>iuni. Mallee Bore No. 11, 500-

505 feet, x 2.
24 a, h. — Serpidct oiit/e/w/isix. s]). nov. : a. side view of larirc

tube (spec. A); A, aperture. Mallee Bore No. 11, 585-

590 feet, x 4.

390 Frederick Chajrinan :

F)!^. 25. — S. otii/eiieiisis, sp. iiov. A \i\r^e tube (spec. B). Malice

Bore No. 11, 585-599 feet. x 4.
26. — Ditriipd cornea, Linne sp., vai'. wormhetitJisiH, McOoy.

Type of " Z>. wormhefiensis." McCoy. Cast from iriould

in ironstone near Stawell. x 2.
27. — D. cornea, L. sp., var. wormhetiensis, McCoy. Speci-
men showing: annular nodosities. Mallee Bore Xo. 5,

163-175 feet, x 2.
:28. — J), cornea, L. sp., vai-. wormhetie.nsis, McCoy. Typical

smooth specimen. Mallee Bore No. 5, 163-175 feet.

X 2.
29. — D. cornea, L. sp. var. consfr/cfa, var. nov. Inr<_ru-

larly constricted form. Mallee Bore No. 5. 1G3-175

feet. X 2.
"K). — D. cornea. L. sp., var. consfricfa, var. nov. Rei^ularly

constricted form. Mallee Bo«:* No. 5, 163-175 feet.

X 2.
^il.-^Spirorhix heliciforniis. Eichwald. Free or uppei' sur-
face. Mallee Bore No. 11, 564-566 feet. x 26.
32. — Claviporella sp. Zooecium. Mallee Bore No. 5, 163-

175 feet, x 52.
.33. — Selenaria inar(jinata, T. Woods, var. spiralis, var. iiuv.

Inferior aspect of zoarium, showing spirally anan^'ed

zooecia. Mallee Bore No. 9, 315-325 feet, x 16.
.34. — Terehraiulina findersi. sp. nov.: a, brachial valve;

h, pedicle valve; c, lateral aspect. Mallee Bore No. 11,

310-320 feet. x 4.
35.^ — Terehrafella aci/firosfra . sp. nov.: a, brachial valve;

h, pedicle valve; c, lateral aspect. Mallee Bore No. 11,

430-432 feet, x 8.
36. — TerehrateUa porflandica. sp. nov.: a. brachial valve;

h, pedicle valve; c, lateral aspeit. Mallee Boi-e No. 11,

525-530 feet, x 2.
37. — T. porflandica, sp. nov. Interior of a brachial valve.

Mallee Bore No. 6, 154-156 feet. x 2.
38. — T. portlandica, sp. nciv. Interior of a pedicle valve.

Mallee Bore No. 6, 114-150 feet, x 2.

Pl..\TK XIX.

Fit'. 39. — Mopsea tenisoni. Chapman. Transverse section of scleic*-
basic axis, showing finely tegulate structure of the suc-
cessive curved layers, and secondary radial ariange-
mcnt. Malloc Bore N... 11, 585-590 feet. x 14.

Neiv <(„>/ h'urr Fossils.

191

Fiy. -to. — Mopsea vi. ciicrni iiUi . liiiiii. Transverse section sliuwint^

coarsely ro^'ulate structuic. x 14.
41. — his coin jirrxxd . Duncan. Transverse section of a.\is,

sliowin^- hi^dily ornate tej^nlate structure. Mallee Jiore

No. 11, 495-500 feet. x 14.
42. — StrpvJa niii/ciitnsis, sp. nov. Transverse section of

tube, sliowiiitr laminated injier layer and tubulated outer

layer. Mallee Bore X<.. 1 1 . 5S5-590 feet. x :i6.
4'5. — Lepr/ilia gi ppdaiidii . Waters. Mallee Bore No. 5. 175-

18f) feet, x 7.

[Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.8.). Pt. I., 1918].

Ai!i' XIV. — A Revision of the Fossil Volutes of the Table
Ca/)€ Beds, Tasmania, witJi DeHcrlptions of Neiu Species
and Varieties.

By G. J}. PKIT(JHARI), D.Sc. F.G.S.

( fji'ctni'er in Geology, kc. School of Mines I)e[)iivtnient, VVorkini;- Men's
Collej:;e, Melbourne).

(With Plates XX., XXI.).

[Read 10th July. 1913].

Ill the year 1895 I revised tlie Fossil Fauna of tlie Table Cape
Beds, Tasmania, mainly from a collection made by Mr. E. D.
Atkinson. Since that time I have had opportunities of examining
the beds and of gathering together a fully representative collection
of the fauna, as well as noting the specimens and types on view in
the Hobart Museum. Lately 1 have also liad the pleasure of examin-
ing and naming furtlier material from tliese interesting beds,
collected by Mr. R. N. Atkinson, a son of the above gentleman, and
it seems likely that through his enthusiasm and industry many
new species will be brought to light, as well as much valuable and
additional information on many of the already recorded forms. As
a preliminary to a further revision of the fauna as a Avhole I have
thought it well to submit a revision of the Volutes, and include a
description with figures of a new species, which has been discovered
by Mr. R. N. Atkinson, and by him very generously submitted to
me for that purpose.

1. VOLU'I'A ANTICINOULATA, McCoy.

1874. V. antii'liKjulata, McCoy. Prod. Pal. Vic. Dec. i.,
pp. 24-2(), pi. vi., figs. 2-4.
<~)bs. — The type of this species is in the National Museum. Mel-
boui-iie. and was obtained from the Bird Rock or Spring Creek
Beds, near Geelong. This species was confused by Mr. U. M.
Joliiistoii in liis Geology of Tasmania with V. anfisaihnis, McCoy,
but ttiat is (juite a distinct form; nevei-theless, the necessity for cor-
recting the record must not be overlooked. This species may l)e
regarded as a good typical one of this Tertiary liorizoii, and is
certainly also very common in its occurrence, being readily obtain-
able right throughout the Table Cape section in the uppermost

Iu,ss;/ Vnhltes. 193

layers as well as in the Inwrst. As is visually the case when iiuiuerouR
examples can ]»■ uatliernl of a sjjeeies. varietal forms can he marked
off, ami this has alicady l)eeii very a])ly done by Sir F. McCoy. At
least two (if his \\c]l-<lcfiiied varieties can he identified.

■2. Voi.LTA .\\Ti(iN(;iTLATA, var. i\[)ivis.\, .McCoy.

1N7-1. r. (iiifirnnjiilatd var. iiu/ir>'sa. .McCoy. Piod. Pal.
Vic. Dec. i., p. 25.
Ohs. — This form is a nari'ow type witli fewer and moie sigmoidal
rihs. The sjdial stiiar aie confined to the anterior base, re.sulting in
a smooth polislu'd hody-whoil and lihs. and the absence of the-
sub-sutural sulcus. This form is commonly represented at Table
Cape. The type of this variety is in tlie National Museum, Mel-
bourne, and was ohtained from the Sirring Creek or Bird Rock
Beds, neai- (Teeloiig-.

3. VoLUT.\ .VNTICINGULATA, var PERSULCATA, McCoy.

18T-i. V. (nificingidata, var. i^ersulcafa, McCov. Prod.
Pal. Vic. Dec. i., p. 25.
Obs. — The type of this variety is in the National .Museum, Mel-
bourne, and was obtained from the Spring Creek Beds, south of
Geelong. The striking features of this form are the more numerous
and straighter costae and the strongly-developed spiral groovings
over tlie whole of the body whorl and spire. Usually a much rarer
form tluui the foregoing.

4. VoLUTA WELDii, T. Woods. (PI. XX., Fig. 1).
1S75. r. ireJfJil. T. Woods. Proc Roy. Soc. Tas., p. 24,
pi. 1. f. 2.
Obs. — Another very cfimmon form at Table Cape showing an
interesting range of variation, (juite sufficient to warrant a similar
treatment to that adopted in the case of V . anficlngulnta, McCoy.
The original description of this species is of an extremely meagre
iharacter. but the figure clearly represents the bioad. solid, and
heavily, l)ut sparsely nodose form, and as tlie type is in the Hobart
Museum there can be no doubt whatevei- as to the form T. Woods
intended to )epi-esent his species.

5. VoLUTA WELDii, var INTERMEDIA, var nov. (PI. XX., Figs. 2, 3)-
Shell much naiiower than the typical form, with a shorter and
more blunted apex, more closely and acutely nodose, nodes number-
ing nine to twelve on the body-whorl as against about seven in the

14

!l)4 fr. B. Pritchard:

typical form. Leiifith -V-') iiiiii., l)readth 17 min. ; as fcjmparL'd with
length 41 iiiiu., brcadtli 22 iiini., in the original description.

This is tlie more us\ial foini at the Muddy Creek and l\iver
Mm- ray Cliffs sections.

Type of tliis vai'iety fioni .Muddy Creek and in my own colhHtion.

6. VOLUTA AVELDII, \ ar ANGUSTIOK, var uov. (PI. XX., Fig.s. 4, 5).

Obs. — This form is rather common at Table Cape, and nuiy be
characterised by its relative narrowness, acute slope of the spire
whorls, continued down to the angulation of the body whorl, and
by the very faint development of nodes. Length 30 mm., breadth
14 mm.

Type of variety in my osvn collection.

7. VoLUTA STROPHonoN, var. STOLIDA, .JolinsLon.
1876. V. sfropliodo/i. McCoy. Prod. Pal. Vic. Dec. iv..

pp. 25. 2G. pi. xxxvii., figs. 2. -3. 4a, 4b, 4c.
1880. V. sf.oUda, Johnston. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas.. p. 36.
1888. V. sfolu/a, Johnston. Geology of Tasm-J.nia, pi.
XXX., figs. 4. 4a.
Obs. — McCoy illustrates well in his prodromus some of the varia-
tion to which this species is liable, and marks c)ff figure 3 as the
average form, figure 2 as a remarkably short-spired vai-iety. and
figure 4 the long-spired variety. McCoy's short-spired variety
certainly occurs at Table Cape, and the form Avhich has been named
stolida by Johnston seems to me but anotlici' robust variation of tliis
species. The type of V. xfrnpliodon, McCoy, is in the Xational
Museum, Melbourne. l)nr the type of Y. stolida. Johnston, is not
in the Hobart Museum, and is pi-obably in Mi-. Johnston's private
collection. If the latter had been visiljle a more definite compari-
son could have been made, and greater surety given. There is no
representative of this s])ecies in the Hobart Mnscnm.

8. A'^OLUTA STROPHODOK, McCoy, var. i!i;i;vispiKA, \ ar. nov.

1876. V. strophodon. McCoy. Prod. Pal. Vic, Dt-c iv.. p.

26, pi. xxxvii., fig. 2.

Obs. — In conformity with the treatment meted out to o\ii- other

common volutes in having varietal names for extreme forms, it is

only fair to call tlir specially-conoidal form by a distinctive name,

viz., hrevhjt'ivd . 'i'his form occurs at Tal)l(' Cape wliilst tlie very

long-spired varietv (himjixpi ra var. nov., .McCoy's figures, 4, 4a.

b, c), common in the oldei- Tertiarv clavs of Victoi'ia, has not vet

FofisU Volute. 195

l)een collected there to my knowledge. A paiallel series of variation
in almost all their characters can be made out between V. strop/to-
■don on the one hand, and Y . weldi'i on the otlier.

9. VoUTA TATEAN.A, Johnston.

1879. V . tafeana, Johnston. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., p. 37.

1<S88. V. tafedna, Johnston. Geology of Tasmania, pi.
XXX., figs. 3, .3a.
Obs. — Except for the pullus, this species is of the V . sarissa type,
which is evidently its analogue in the Muddy Creek Beds, Victoria,
so far as general habit is concerned, but its greater proportional
length of body whorl to spire is a very distinctive feature, which
may at once be seized upon. V . pueblensis, Pritchard, from Spring
Creek, i« another very close ally, and may, in fact, ultimately prove
but a variation of this species, when a good series can be obtained,
but at present the larger pullus, the more slender habit, and the
delicate costation serve to distinguish the Victorian form. In a
recent letter from Mr. R. N. Atkinson he mentions a volute of the
tateana-saris.' ' pe, a mature shell smaller and much more elongate
than V. tateana amongst his discoveries. It is not unlikely that
this may compare favourably with V . pueblensis. or help to bridge
the gap between that species and V. tateana. Specimens of V .
tateana are on view in the Hobart Museum, but the type is not
amongst them. Tate only records the species from Table Cape on
the authority of Johnston, so it is to be presumed that the ty2:>e is
in Mr. Johnston's collection.

10. VoLUTA MORTONI, Tate.

1889. V. mortoni; Tate. Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A.. vol. xi..
pp. 124, 125, pi. ix., figs. 1, 2.
Obs. — The type of this species is in the Hobart Museum. This
species also occurs in the Lower Beds at Muddy Creek. W. Victoria,
but is usually very thin a«d fragile.

11. VoLUTA sTEPHENSi, Johnston. (PI. XXL, Fig.s. 3, 4).
1879. T'. stepheusi, John.ston. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas.. p.

35.

1888. r. stephensi, Johnston. Geology of Tasmania, pi.

XXX., f. 1.

Obs. — This large species has so far been only very poorly figure<l.

rand at the same time ill-defined, and Professor Tate does not add

:an_ything material to our information. Being a large .sliell. its type

196 G. B. Prltchard:

of i)re8ervati(Mi in the Table Cape Beds is not sucli as to show all'
its eliaracteis in a deiided manner, henee different leniarks about
the presenef. indistinctness, or absence of spii'al sculpture. I feel
certain that this species is really well sculptured spirally, carry-
inji' about I'-i well-defined threads on the posterior whorls. It is
evidently a close ally of V. Jic pf(i<joiialii<, Tate, from the River
.Muiiay Cliff's, and a ciitical comparison of serial specimens may
show a closer c(>nnection than has hitherto l)een indicated.

The tvpe of tliis species is api)ai-ently inaccessible, thus increas-
injj: the difficulty of satisfactorily dealini^ with it.

12. VOLUT.\ ANCILLOIDES, Tate

l.^M). r. <nirl]loides, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., yol.
ix.. p. 126, pi. iii., f. 7.
Obs. — The type of this species was obtained from the clay beds
of Mornington oi- Sclmapper Point, Victoria, and is in the Geologi-
cal Museum of the Adelaide University. It is well represented in
tlie Table Cape fauna, as most collec'tions have included it, and
specimens are on exhibition in the Hobart Museum. A good species
and (luite distinct from F. macro pt era, McCoy.

13. VOLUTA MACCOYII, T Woods.

1877. V. marrof/ii, T. Woods. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., for-

1876, p. 95.
1889. r. i„(irc(>!ill, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soc, S.A., vol.

ix., p. 126, pi. ii., f. 2.
1896. V. iiKirrnnii, Pritchard. Pi'oc Roy. S(.c. Vic, vol.
viii.. U.S. pp. 95-97.
Obs. — The type of this species is from tlie Table Cape beds, al-
though the species is also very connuon in Victoria, especially at
the Muddy Creek and .Moinington sections. The Victorian rej.re-
seiitatives are of a thinner and more fragile tyi)c> than the usual
Tasmanian examj)les. In my o])inion V. jmlitii, Tate, should be
included witli this species, but I am afraid that in my endeavo\ir
to clear ujt some of the *i1itticulties surrounding this species in a
formei- paper on the T;il)le Cape fossils, I \\v,\\ have added need-
less confusion by including V. liratu, Johnston. Upon more nuiture
consideration on a<lditi(mal material I must admit that V. lirafa,.
Johnston, sliould be upheld.

Fossil VoUiU's. 107

U. N'l.UTA I.IKATA. Jullll.Ston. (1*1. \ X.. Figs. 7, S).

I.STI). r. linitd. .I(.liiist«Mi. Pror. I»uy. Soc. Tas.. p. :{?.
1888. r. Iir<it(i. .Ii)luist(,n. (n'olcoy ,,f Tasmania, pi. x.\x..

f. in.

{V. (ill port I. .I(.liiisr..ii. noil 1880).

Obs. — Mr. Johnston's (k'siiiiition of this sjioeios is: — "Shell
ovately fusifoi-m. shining-, of 7 whorls, inrliulinii- the sniootli pnlliis
■of 1-^ turns; wlioils .scart'ely convex, and ornaincnred with tine.
slightly emved lirae. i-egular and distinri ahovc. hut heeoiniuL;-
iiidistinet and irrei^iilai- on hudy wlioil : the inicrspaees are marked
Avith very tine lonj^itudinal lines of ^^rowth; s)iirc witli a slitiiitly
eonvex oiitliue, and i'uiiuing an angle of ahour ."(i .K-g. ; apei-ture
somewhat elliptical, longer than spire; lip sinipU'. emarginate
above; eoluniella curved, with four e(|ui-disrant 'distinct ol)li(pie
plait.s ; length of shell 48 mil., breadth 21 mih. length of apertui-e
•^(1 mil., proportional length of ])ody whoil GS-lOdths. of pt-niilT
whorl IG-lOOths."'

The type of this species was ol)tained fioni Table Cape, liut
it is not in tjje Hol)ait Museum. |.robalily in Mr. Johnston's
private collection. Professor Tate, in Part 11. of " The Gastro-
pods of tlie Older Teitiarv of Austi-alia." i-p. 1:')0. 1:^1. when deal-
ing with this species mentions tliat he liad not seen autlientic
specimens, yet he gives a figure and deso'iption of a ^Vestel•n Vic-
torian shell, and calls it V. lirnfa. Johnston. Compaiing Tate's
■description with Johnston's, it is at once seen that tliey do not
agree, hence further confusion, and an erroneous lecord foi- the
Muddy Creek beds. Professor Tate ajjpears to have entertained
some doubt about his treatment of tliis species, for he proceeds to
very biiefly desci-il)e a close ally as differing by its shorter s]'ire,
niuro ventricose body whoid. and stronu'er I'ibs. and names it V.
costellifera. This name will now eml)i-ace the shell figured and
<lescribed by Tate as V . lirata. It is hard to understand liow this
mistake came about, especially as .Mr. Jolinston noted that his
shell approached closely to V. MciJoyi, while tlie shells befoic P)o-
fessor Tate were of an entirely different type. V . linifa. Johnston
(non Tate)), is a good species of the T . maccoi/i ty\n-. It is. how-
•evei-. a much more robust shell, thickei- and more solid, commonly
with a more obtuse apex, a more convex shell, with lirae on the spire
whorls. There can be little doubt that the figure given by Mr. John-
ston in his Geology of Tasmania. ]>laie xxx.. figuie in. ii'piesents
this .si^ecies, although referred to ..n the explanation ,.f the plate

198 G. B. Pritchard:

as r. allporti, Johnston. Tliis reference nnist be an error, for the
description given of V. allporti. precludes the possibility of the
illustration being a correct tnie.

The record of V. lirota, from the Muddy Creek Beds, Western
Victoria, should be expugned, but more recently the typical Table
Cape form of this species has been collected by Dr. T. S. Hall and
my.self from the coastal beds below Rivernook, near the mouth of
tlif Gellibrand River. W. Victoria.

1.5. VoLUTA PELLITA, Johnston.
1879. V. pellita, Johnston. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., p. 36.
1888. V. jjelliia, Johnston. Geology of Tasmania, pi. xxx.,.
f. 2.
Obs. — This species Avas not recognised by Professor Tate when
dealing with our Tertiary Volutes; it is, nevertheless, a good species,
and should be accepted. I have elsewhere^ pointed out some of the
more striking differences between this species and F. ancilloides on
the one hand, and V. niarropfera on the other.

The type of this species is not in the Hol)art Museum, probably it
is still in Mr. Johnston's possession.

16. VoLUTA SPKNCEUI, Pritchard.
1896. V. spenceri, Piitchard. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic. vol.
viii., U.S.. pp. 98-100, pi. iv.. f. 1, 2.
Obs. — The type of this species is now in the National Museum,
Melbourne, and is from the Table Cape Beds. It is also recorded
from Curlewis in Victoiia.

17. VoLLTA ATKINSONI, Pritchard.
1896. V. (itkiviioiii. Pririhaid. Proc. KN.y. Soc. Vic. voL
viii.. U.S., p. I(»0. pi. iii.. f. 1.
01)s. — Type from tlic Table Cape Beds, and now in the National
Museum. McllH)urne.

IS. V'oiAiTA HALM, Pritchard.

18!)6. V. hdlli, i'ritcliai-d. Proc Hoy. Soc Vic. vol. viii.,

U.S.. p. 1(1]. pi. ii.. f. 1. 2, ;3.

Obs. — The type of this species was obtained from the Spring

Creek Beds, near Ceelong (Jan Jukian) and is now in my own

private collection. It is, however, a common shell at Table Cape,

and on that account may have been in Mr. Johnston's collection,.

]. I'lOc. Koy. Soc. Victoiia, vol. viii., ii.s., pp. S»7, 9S.

Foasil Vohites. 199

but if so. his treutiiit'iit of it is of such an obscure and uncertain
character, that it wouhl l)e the merest guesswork to place it. In
1888 Mr. Johnston gave a figure in the Geology of Tasmania
■which did not represent V. allporti, though purporting to do so.
In the same year Professor Tate failed to recognise V. allporti^
Johnston.

The original descriptidu of V. allporti, is. " Shell large, ovately
fusiform, of six regularly increasing whorls, besides a small pullus,
Avhich is too imperfect in the various specimens for description;
spire acute; apical angle 45 deg., slightly concave in outline;
whorls slightly convex, and only ornamented with line longitudinal
lines of growth; aperture I'ather narrow, elliptical; lip not ex-
panded into a wing, simple; columella curved, with four distinct
slender o])lique plaits; length, when perfect, about eight inches, or
20(» mil., breadth 65 mil., proportional length of body-Avhorl about
eo-KKlths of penultimate 9-lOOths.'"

This species is referred to as the " largest Volute in Table Cape
Beds, and has much the general appearance of V. macroptera
(McCoy) in its young state, but has a smaller pullus, and differs;
materially in the size, number of whorls, and the absence of an.
expanded wing."

This description does not agree with V . /uilli, and might confuse
two or three species, and in view of the confusion already existing
I would recommend the removal of V. allporti from our lists.

19. VOLUTA ALTICOSTATA.

188!). r. (iUl<-o.-<fafa, Tate. Tiaus. Roy. Soc. S.A.. vol. xi..
p. 122. pi. v.. f. 7.
01)s.— The type was obtained from the oldcf Muddy Creek Beds.
W. Victoria, and is in the Geological Museum of the Adelaide
Univei'sity.

20. Voi.ITA .MACKOPTi:i!.\, McC.y. (P). XX., Fig. 6).
1874. V. //larropffro. ^fcCoy. Prod. Pal. Vic. Dec. i.. pi.
viii.. f. 1-4.
01>s. — The type was obtiiined from the Spring Creek or Bird Rock
Bluff Beds, near Geelong, and is in the National Museum, Mel-
bourne. Tate records this species as in the Hobart Museum, but the
specimen so labelled that I have examined in that Museum is a
young example of T'. /inlli. Recently I received a genuine young
example of this species from Mr. R. X. Atkinson, and this is the
first occasion on whicli a specimen has come under my notice. The
Tal)le Cape specimen is a slight variant on McCoy's species, as it

1^00 G. B. Pritrhitrd :

shows u distinct costatioii on the eailier spirt- whorls and a
stronger spiral striation. In my former paper I iiKlu(h'd V . mac-
ropfera in the list of species requii'ing contiiniation. Professor
Tate evidently accepted this, as in liis lat#i- list, witli Mi-. Dennant,
Correlation Paper, part iii., p. 13-i. this species was omitted from
the Table Cape records.

21. VOLUTA WYNYAKDENSIS, sp. nOV. (PI. XXL, FigS. 1, 2).

Shell of medium size, ovately fusiform, with an i)1)liquely
■enrolled mammilate apex, and a few strongly and closely costate
w^horls ending in a narrowly ovate aperture without a simple
margin.

Apical angle about foi'ty-five degrees. The niannnilate embryo is
made up of two smooth obliquely enrolled Avliorls, in appearance
indicating the probable possession of an exsert tip. Succeeding the
embryonic whorls there are about four wlioils, flatly convex, u
shoulder gradually developing on the second, and increasing to
■considerable strength on the body-Avhorl. Distinct overlap of whorls
at the suture. Whorls closely and nari-owly costate, nund)ering
about sixteen on the eai-liei- spire whorls, increasing to about twenty
on the body wdiorl. The whole siirface marked by fine closr spiral
threads. The body whorl becomes rather l)roken up by slightly
sigmoidal lines of growth, whicli are much stronger than the spiral
threads, but the earlier whorls do not clearly show the lines of
■growth, while the spiral thi-eads are (|uite distinct. Aperture
narrow, ovate, outer li]) ascending slightly at the postcrioi- end.
anterior canal relatively brinid, l)uf sliallow. Cohniiella only
slightly twisted, and fui-nished with four narrow ol>]i(|ii:' plaits,
and smooth enamelled area sliar])ly inarked oh' from tlie sculpt ui-ed
portion of the body Avhoil.

Dimensions. — Length, SO mm.,; lireadtli, 4(1 mm.: length of
aperture, 47 nun.; breadth of aperture, 1 (> mm.; bicadth of
anterior notch, 7 nnn.

Obs.— Type froiu the Table Cape Heds. c-olleete.l by Mr. IJ. .\
Atkinscui. .\ hue s])ecies, <|uite distinct from anything yet de-
scribed, and in an excellent state of preseivat ion e.xc'cpt in leuai'd
to the c^xti'eme a))ex, t!ie appearance would seem to jioinf to an
exsert tip, but nothing ai)solute can be asserted in tliis respect till
more specimens are o))tained. The spec-imen as described does not
appear to Ik- (piite niature, but its chai-acters are very striking,
nevertheless. 1 am in jiossession of an imperfect specimen, collected
by myself from these beds, which juobablv tits (ui to this species as a

I'l-.Mv i; S, Vi.-1..ri.i, I'.ll:?. I'lat.- XX.

Tro.-. K.S. Vict..i-i;(, lilKl. \'\-M<- XXI.

L. Knibbs, Photo.

Fossil Vohitcs. 201

more adult t'onii in wliirli the iiciinlt iiiiati' and Ixidy wIkmIs sIidw
the development of strong, liigli shouldered ril)s spaced widi-lv
apart, and with a slightly thickened and reverted outer lip.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate XX.
Fig. 1. — Voluta weldii. T. Woods (typical).

2. — Voluta weldii. var. intermedia, var. nov. ; dorsal view.
•J. — Voluta weldii. var. inteiincdia. var, nov.; front view.
4. — Voluta weldii, var. angustior. var. nov. ; front view.
5. — Voluta weldii, var. angustioi-, var. nov.; dorsal aspect.
6. — Voluta macroptera, McCoy, young exam])le. dorsal aspect.
7. — Voluta lirata. .Tolinston ; front view.
8. — Voluta lirata, Johnston; dorsal view.

The aI)ove figui-es are all natural size.

Plate XXI.

Fig. I. — Voluta wynyardensis, sp. nov.; dorsal view.
2. — Voluta wynyardensis, sp. nov. ; front view.
3. — Voluta stephensi, Johnston; dorsal view; reduced one-
half.
4. — Voluta stephensi, Johnston; fiont view; leduced one-half.
My best thanks are due to Mr. L. Knibbs for the photographs
from which these shells are reproduced.

[Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.S.), Part I., 1913].

Art. XV. — On the Estimation of the Position (ind Slope of
the Foramen Occipitale Magnum.

By L. AV. U. BUCHNER

(<jovernment Re.searcli Scholar in the Department of Anthropology,
Melbourne University).

(With one Text Figure).
[Keacl 10th July, 1913].

Ill 190i) Bolk^ published a work concerning the estimation of the
displacement, position and slope of the foramen occipitale magnum.

In describing its position he refers to the fact that in Mycetes
the foramen lies very near " the occipital pole of the skull, so that
the condition is found which is the rule Avith other mammals; some-
times, as in man, it lies about the middle of the cranial base." The
same writer^ also states that, " Together with the variations in
position the inclination of the plane of tlie Foramen nmr/niini also
generally changes."

As the question of the earlier liistory of the foramen occipitale
magnum, and of the base lines from wliicli have been estimated its
position and slope has been already fully considered by Bolk, it
is mmecessary to jiursuo the (|uestion further in the present paper.

In view, however, of the much more recent work accomplished
by this author, on the foramen occipitale magnum, it will be
necessary for me to examine his methods in some little detail, inas-
much as they form the basis of the present investigation. Bolk
introduces a new baseline estimated in the bisected skull. He says,
" As frontal point I chose the lowest point of the frontal wall of
the skull, where the interior surface . . . bends inwardly in a
more or less sliai)) curve, to be continued in tlu' roof of the nasal
cavity."" He further states that "the dfteniiiiiat ion of this point
presents no ditHculties as a iiilc, since in the niediaii plane the
interior surfaci' of all Primate skulls ])o.sscsscs a distiiut fi-ontal
wall, wliicli niav l)e nioi'e or less inclined, and may ])ass more or
less gradually into the cranial wall, lint whirli is still always
presi.-nt."'

This authoi- then goes on to say that " in tlic median all Primate
skulls possess a front. On both sides of the median plane this
frontal wall disappears, since tlu' roof of the orbitae approaches

Fordmen Occipitdie Mujjnum. 203

204 /.. W. G. Buchner:

very elosely uiidtT tlie cranial )-oof. so that the rranial iilaiie. and
the ()r))ital roof join uiuler an acute angle."" This anteiioi- point
IS calkMl the " Fi-onton.''

The posterior cranial point is also obtained on the bisected skull.
Foi- its determination the grt'atest distance from the fronton
to a point on the posterior ^vall is estimated with tiie aid of com-
passes. Bolk fuithei- says. " Witli the lower Primates this pfdnt
■can, as a rule, l)e determined at once."' In man. howevei-. and
especially in juvenile skulls, it is not so easily estimateil. Bolk
found that very often no definite point could !)e determined for the
'Occipiton, as it is termed, foi' he found that infrequently " a
fairly large part of the interioi' surface of the skull in the median
plane describes a circular arc." Wliere this was the case, the
middle of this circular arc was always chosen as tlie posterior
point."

It is obvious that tliis base line, from frojiton to occipiton, as
Bolk himself points out, is determined by tlie sliape and form of
the skull, and is thus distinguished from other planes, which are
more or less dependent on fixed cranial points. From this 1)ase
line is determined the ])<'sition, displacement and slope of the
foramen, occ'i ptalt nuKjninn. The positio.n he calculated l)y means
of an index basalis, whilst the slope is determined by the liasal
Angle. The former is constructed by dropping a line at right
angles from the fronton-occipiton plane, which cuts the basion.
This base line is thus divided into two paits at the point C (see
fig. 1). As Fc becomes greater it folloAvs that the basion retreats,
iind this is expressed by the formula

B^cxlOO Till-

= Index basahs.

Fo

By comparing the l)asal indites of tlu' anthropoid and man. Bolk
found that a consideral)le differenct' existetl between them, the
•average indices of tlie human skulls being I") units less than that
.d' the anthropoid.

In his second ]ia]>ei'. the same author discusses the " slope of the
foramen magnum in Pi-imates. The slojte is estimated by again
■employing the f ronton-oeci])it<m base lim'. As l)efiue. a line is
jirojected fi-om the base line at right angles, and cutting the l)asion.
From this projei'ted line c Ba (tig. 1) is estimated the iiulination
of thi. slope ,,f Hh' A-/vn//^// bv ealeulating tl,c> angle wliieh tlie plane
c ]}a forms with the basion-opist hioii plane l>a «^p.

Tt apjiears to me that Bolk's methods ,,f delermining the j.osition
and sloj)e of the foramen ocr'i p'llah iikkiiiiuii are beset hx at least

Fi>rnni('ii Occijnfdle Mdijitain. 'ZOf>

two i;i';ive ohjrttidiis. Bct'orL' a skull ran he examined hy Hoik's
inetlio(l ir must be bisected. This in itself constitutes an almost
insuju'i alile ditticulty. for, notwithstanding Huxley's^ now out-of-
date dittuiii that, " it shall he an oppidljiiuni to an ethnological
eollectinn to possess a single skull whieh is not bisected longitudi-
nally." the seii'Tire of eoniparat ive naniology has .so far advaneed
as to lender the bisection of skulls unni-cessary f(U' modern investi-
gations.

The second objection I find against Bolk's method, is, that tliere
is a ditiieulty in determining the frontal point. As already defined,
this point is " the lowest point of the frontal wall of the skull where
the interit)r surface . . . bends inwardly in a more or less steep
eui-ve. to lie continued in the roof of the nasal cavity." After ex-
amining a nundjer of bisected Australian aboriginal crania, I find
it is not always possil)le to determine this point with accuracy. The-
crista fiontalis is projected into the skull in many cases foi- s-everal
millimetres.

Bolk' himself says that in the skulls of the Javanese, with one
exception, he found a " frontal crest projecting very far into the
cranial space." From this it would appear that a considei-able-
difficulty may be exjaei-ienced in attempting to detei-minc tlie exact
position of the fronton, for as the crista frontalis projects, so wilt
it affect the basal index. It seems, therefore, that this latter objec-
tion, which has been laised, wt)uld appear to be a real one. It is,
then, difficult to see how Bolk's new base line can ever serve as
the basis of a craniometrical system, particulaidy in view of tire-
objection that it necessitates the bisection of every skull, and with-
out such bisection it is eonipletely useless.

The objects of the present paper ai'e two in nundjer. The first
is to record certain ol)servations based mainly on the median
sagittal diagrams of some fifty-two Tasnumian ciania, and the
second is to ascertain from certain of these observations bv means
of biometric analysis, wliich method is the best to apply to non-
bisected skulls foi- tlie determination of the position and slope of
the foramen occipitale magnum. 'J'lie observations I have recoided
are eight in number, and are as follows : —

(1) The length of the foramen ociipitale mairnum, measui-ect

from basion to o)>isthion.

(2) The greatest bieadth of the foramen occipitale magnum.
(3") The foraminal index.

Breadth of foramen x 100.
Lenirth of foramen

206 L. W. G. Bijckner:

(■i) Broca's occipital angle. (See fig. 2.) The angle i.s cun-
tinued by the nasion-basion, and basion-opisthion
planes.

(5) The foraininal angle l)ased on the Frankfort plane. (See

fig. 2.)

(6) The nasion-inion length.

(7) The basal index. (See fig. 2.)

(8) The basal angle. (See fig. 2.)

Of the above observations, numbers 1 and 2 were estiniateci
<iirectly on the skull by Professor Berry and Dr. Robertson in 1909,
and for permission to utilise these figures I have to express my
thanks to these authors. Number 6 has also been recorded else-
where/ by the present writer. The remainder of the observa-
tions are the original contribution of the present work, and for
Avhich I. am responsible.

For determining the position and slope of the foramen occipitale
magnum, I have employed three distinct methods.

Of these, the first is Broca's Avell-known occipital angle, the
second is determined by utilising the Frankfort Plane as a base
line, and the third is the original method of the present work, and
is based on the nasion-inion plane.

As Broca's method is so well known, and has already been
referred to, there is no necessity for any further explanation con-
•cerning it.

For the second method I have utilised the Frankfort plane as a
base line. Bolk has referred to the fact that Hubert also determined
the slope of the foramen by using this plane 6n non-bise<ted skulls.
Bolk further states that he considers it to be a method wliich is
preferable to others when the skull ci^nnot be bisected. Unfortu-
nately, this work is not available in Mell)ourne, nor is any abstract
of it available. The method which I propose to use, therefore, may
•or may not be original. In any case, whatever observations are
based on the Frankfort plane, will only give the inclination of the
slope of the forameti, and not its position and situation (Hi tlie
.skull base. The method I have adojjted is to project a lino down-
wards at right angles to the Fraiikfort plane, and cutting the
basion. The angle which this line makes with the l)asi()ii(i)>isthi(in
plane determines the foramina! angle (see fig. 2).

As J{olk also points out, the inaccuracy which ni'conipanics tlie
■estinuition of angular measurement by direct observation is lessened
by constructing pi'ojections on a suitable base line. He says,
■" The ])osition of every point in the skull varies (ni its own

Fijraineii Occipifah' M(i(/ini.ia. liUT

iiL'connt, since un every imint a liii'^e luinilKr i>t' factors have a
localising influence." Twi. of these points may have a nurnljer of
factors in conniion. Thcii'luiH', if in two skulls tlic angle hounded
hy these points is found to vai-y, this diffcii'mc is not to Ije
accounted foi- hy the shifting of one point oidy. 1 have, therefore,
estimated the inclination of the slope of the foramen in the manner
just descrihed.

Tlie thii-d method of determining hotli the jiosition and slope
<)f tlie forajiif'/i is a modification of that desciihed by JJolk. save
that the base lines are <lift'enMit. The base line which 1 propose to
use in the nasion-inion phuie. It has been pointed out ]>y Schwalhe.^
Cunningham, 7 Berry and Robertson. 8 as well as myself,^ that this
plane is an important one in iom})arative craniology. The several
observations recorded by the above investigators all serve to support
this contention. Another reason — and a strong one — is. tliat in
Beri-y and Robertson's Atlas of Tracings of Tasmanian crania? the
necessary points are accurately denoted, so that observations may
be estimated direct from the tracings in the median sagittal plane.
My reasons for utilising this plane as a base line Avould. theiefore,
appear to be quite valid.

For the determination of the position and slojie of the foramen,
by adopting the procedure already recorded when describing Bolk's
method, I have constructed a basal index, and a basal angle. As
before a line is dropped at right angles from the base-line — in this
case the nasion-inion plane — and cutting the basion (see fig. 2).
The basal index is then calculated by taking the ratio, which XX
bears to X^I, the latter being referred to as 100.

P>asal Index NX x 100

Nl

The Basal Angle is likewise determined by estimating the angle
which is contained by the two planes, X Ba and 15a Op (see tig. 2).
As the method is adopted from Bolk's work, any further explana-
tion is deemed unnecessary.

The material on which the present j)a])er is I)ased will hi' found in
Berry and Robertson's Atlas of Tracings of Fifty-two Tasmanian
Crania. All the observations recorded in tabU' 1., with thi' excep-
tion of the two already referred to. namely, the length and breadth
of the foramen, have been estimated direct from the tracings in the
median sagittal plane; that is, in the nor/no //ifrralis. As numbei
48 has previously been shown to be that of a juvenile, all the
observations recorded on it have been omitted from the table of
generalised results.

ber.

Mill.

Tnie Mean and
Froh. Error.

Staiulaiil
Deviation and
I'loh. Krror.

Max.

;h7

- :u -

35.78z!z0.82 -

■ 2 89-0.22 ■

- 41

:^.s

- 2() -

29.43^=0.27 -

2.55-^0.19 -

. 35

:m\

- 6S -

«2. 59 ±0.59 ■

. 5.26±0.41 •

- 100

3.S

- l.-)4 -

■ l()3.H4:=0.o9 ■

■ 5 39 ±0.41 ■

■ 178

3:{

- 91 -

] 00.243:0.54 ■

■ 4.«2±0.3S ■

• 107

45

- 145 -

■ 17O.97±0.66 ■

- 6.()0±0.46 ■

■ 183

3S

- 43 -

52.71 ±0.28 ■

■ 2.69±0.20 ■

- 58

:w

- S5 ■

■ 92.71 ±0.4H

- 4.35 ±0.33

■ 106

208 L. W. (r. Hih-luH'r:

In Tal)le 1 the oenenilised results esriinated ln(jiiietrically are
set fiirtli. Tlie nature of the observations, the ti-ue means, with
tlieir ]ii(ibal)le errors, the standard deviations with their probable
eridrs. tnj^^etlier with the mininiuiii and maximum figures for each
oliservation, are displayed in theii- lespective orders.

T.AHLK I.

T.VSMANIAN Ch.ANI.S.
Nature of Oliservation

1 - Lengtli of Fur. ore. magnum

2 - Breadth of For. ore. magniun

3 - Foramiiial Index

4 - Broca's Anj^le

5 - Foraiiiinal Angle (Biichnei')
() - Nasion-Inion Length
7 - Basal Index { Biichnei-) -
S - Basal Angle (Biichner) -

A stu'dy of Table 1 reveals some interesting facts. It will be
noted that, as judged from the standard deviations, the observa-
tions numbers 7 and 8. which are based on the nasion-inion plane,
are less variable tlian 5 or 6, which are estimated bv Broca's metliod.
or the Frankfort plane methdd. The standaid deviation for bdth
the Basal Index, numlier 7, and the Basal Angle, number 8, are
shown to be very small.

This, thei-efore, would apjjcar tn suppdtt the contenticm referred
to in an earlier part of this work, that the nasion-iniim plane is
leally the best from which td estimate the slope and approximate
jidsiridii of the foramen occipitale »ia(//ni/n.

In order td ccmipai-e the figures df Tal»le 1 witli those of other
I'aces. I have utilised sevei-al plates df Bei'i-y and Kdbertson's
Atlas (if Australian Crania, in (irdei- to dlitain the necessary data.
As this worklo is in the hands df the jirinter. T have to express my
thanks to Pi-ofessdr Bei ly and Dr. Kdbeitsdu fdr allowing me to
use their original drawings. The dbservations wliieh I have
recorded aie taken frdm the first 52 tracings of Ndrmae A.

The o])servatidiis wliich I have recorded are as follows : —
5. Basal Index,
fi. Basal Angle.

7. Foraminal Angle (Krankf.irt Plane).

8. Bi-dca's Occipital angle.

The dther source df cdinpaialive data I have absti-acted from
Bulk's Wdrks. Thi' generalised results for both the Australian
and [{dlk's figures ai'c set fdrth in Tallies ii. and iii. I'espectively.

Foraiiifiti, Occiintdle Mii(/nii,iii.

209

These results have been nl)tained in precisely the same manner as
those of the Tasmanian, and. therefore, need no further explana-
tion.

TABLE IT.

Australian Ckania.

X.ature of Obiervatioii.

."). Broca's Ang'le - - - l()2.28±().48

• ;. FonuninalAnolo (Hfiohnei') l()().98±li.44

7. Kasal Index ( Buchner) - 52.47 ±0.24

8. Basal Angle ( Buchner) - yi.72±0.4(J

Statidai-d Deviation
and Hroh. Krrnr.
.-).21±U.Hr)
4.S ±0.31
2.t;0±0.17
4.37±0.29

Nature of Ob:

Index Basalis
Ba.sal Anw'le

TABLE II L

BoLK's OnSRRVATIONS.

^"°" and Proh. Error.

45.S4±U.26
99.68±0.58

Standard Deviation

and Prot). Error.

2.74±0.18

o.n±0.41

Again, by conipariii;j: the observations (7 and 8) based on the
nasion-inion plane with those based on Broca's and the Frankfort
Plane methods, it will be noted that the former are the least vari-
able.

In Table iv. the results for each observation in the Tasmanian-
Australian groups, together with those furnished by Bolk, are set
forth in order of their variability. In each instance, the observa-
tions based on the nasion-inion plane, which concern the present
work, are the least vai'iable. whilst the angular measurements based
on Broca's and the Frankfort Plane methods show the greatest
variability, whicli is s\ifficiently liigh to preclude them from further
consideration.

In conclusion, when fuither comparative data are available, a
better test will be afforded as to the practicability of the original
methods herein described. From the material available it is cleai'
that the observations based on the nasion-inion plane are the
more accurate. The present work also furnishes another proof that
the bisection of crania is unnecessarv.

TABLE TV.

Natiire of Observation.

Hace.

No.

Tnif -Moan and
Prol.. Error.

S.D. and
Proh. Error

Basal Index (Bdchiicr) -

.Australian

- .52 -

53.47-0.24 -

2.60-^-O.I7

Basal Index (Buchner) -

Tasmanian

- MS -

52.71-^0.28 -

•-'.64-1-0.20

Index Hasalis ( Hoik)

- Various Races

- .50 -

45.84-^0.2(5 -

2.74±:0.18

Basal Angle (Buchner) -

Tasmanian

- 38 -

02.71 ±0.40 -

4.35±0.33

Basal An.j:le (Buchner) -

Australian

- 52 -

9I.72:r0 4O -

4.37 ±0.29

Foraniinal Angle (Buchner)

- Tasuuinian

- 33 -

1{.H).24±0.54 -

4.H2±0.38

Foratninal Ansjle (Buchner)

Australian

- 52 -

106. 98 ±0.44 -

4.80±0.31

Basal Angle (Bolk) -

- Various Races

- 50 -

99.68 ±0..58 -

5. 11 ±0.41

Broca's Angle -

Australian

- 52 -

162.2] -»-('.48 -

5 21 ±0.35

Broca's Angle -

Tasmanian

- :<s -

163.64-f-0.59 -

5.39±0.41
15

«10 Bilcli/iier : Forariten OcciplUiU Mayna)/!.

REFKKEXCES.

(1) Bolk, P. — On the position and displacement of tlie Foramen

Magnum in tlic Piiniates. Proceedinp^.s Koninklijke Akad.
van Wetenscliappeii te Amstei-dam. Translated from : Ver-
slag van de geivone vergaderitnf der Wisen. Nafuiirkiindicie
Afdeeling v(ni Zaterday, 27 Nov.. 1909, Dl. iviii.

(2) Bolk, P. — On the Slope of the Foiamen Magnum in Primates.

Ihid. [Jan. 26, 1910.]

(3) Huxley, T. H.— .l/a/i's Place in Nature. Macmillan and Co..

London, 1897.

(4) Biichner, L. W. O.— A study of the Curvatui-es of the Tas-

manian Aljoriginal rranium, /'ror. Roii. Snr. Edin.. in
course of puhlicafion .

(5) Huber, L. — Vergleichunf/ dt.t H i/lohales und Menachenschddeh.

Mlinchen, 1902.
(0) Scliwalbe, G. — Studien iihci- I'ithecanthrojnis trcrfiix. DaV)ois.
Zeit fiir Morph. und Anthrop. Bd 1, Heft 1.

(7) Cunningham, D. J. — Tlie Australian Forehead. Anthropo-

logical Essays, presented to Edward Burnett Tylo]-, in honour
of his 75th birthday. Oct. 2. 1907.

(8) Berry, R. J. A., and Rol)eitson, A. W. D. — The Place in Nature

of the Tasmanian Alwriginal. as Deduced fiom a Study of
His Calvaria. Part 1. rror. IRoii. Sor. Edin., vol. xxxi..
pt. 1, No. 3.

(9) Berry, R. J. A., and Robertson. A. W. D. — ^Dioptrographic

Tracings in Foui- Normae of Fifty-two Tasmanian Crania.
Tranf;. Boy. Soc. Vic. vol. v.. 1909.

(10) Berry, R. J. A., and Robertson. A. W. D. — Dioptrographic

Ti-acings in Three Normae of Ninety Australian Crania.
In the Pre.^f.

[Proc. Rov. Soc. Victoria. 26 (NS.). Pt. H., 1914\

Airr. X\''l. — (J I) A nsfralutn (tiid TasiiKinidii Coleoptera, ivitk
De.scfipfloihs of Neiv Species. Part II.]

By art huh M. LEA.

(With Plate XXII.).
[Read IJtli September, 1913].

ERRATA.

Vol. XXV. (New Series), Part II.

I'age 359, lines 9 and 10—

For "subtle and angular" read "subhexangular."
Page 361, line 15—

For "obilqua" read "obliqua."
Page 361, line 17—

For "they they" read "then tliey."
Page 361, line 21 —

For "Harwell" read "Haswell."
Page 362, line 12—

For "bacata" read "baccata."
Page 362, line 20—

For "30" read "20."

uniformly) carinate the Tasmanian specimens are. (Since describ-
ing cosfipenne, I have seen hundreds of specimens). Clark says
of jienicillafum, " On either side of the suture an obsolete carina-
tidu, plainly perceptible when the inseet is viewed from in front."
In exan:»ining cosfipenne from the front, the elytra appear to be
feebly concave in the middle, with the carinae less distinct than
from any other direction; in fact, from above, they are most dis-
tinct (especially along the middle); the word "obsolete" would
certainly be misleading applied to all the Tasmanian specimens I

1. Part I. in Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. xxii. (ii.s.), p. 11.3, 1909.

2. Trans. Rov. Soc. S. Aiist., lvH)l, p. 125.

-10 Bilchner: Foranteii Occipihdc xMaynam.

REFEKEXCES.

(1) Bolk, P. — On tlie position and displacement of tlie Foramen

Magnum in the Primates. Proceedings Koninklijke Akad.
van Wetenschappen te Amsterdam. Translated from : Ver-
slag van de geiroiw vergaderinr/ der Wise/i. Nal nurkinidigc
AfdeeMrig van Zaterdoi/, 27 Nov., 1909, Dl. iviii.

(2) Bolk, P. — On the Slope of the Foiamen Magnum in Primates.

Ihid. [Jan. 26, 1910.]

(10) Berry, R. J. A., and Robert.son, A. W. I). — Dioptrographic
Tracings in Three Norinae of Ninety .Australian Crania.
In the Prexs.

[Pkoc. Koy. Soc. Victoria. 26 (N.S.). Pt. IT.. lOU^.

Airr. XV \. — On Aa.sfraliai) and Tasmanian Coleoptera, with
Deso-i'pfioois of Neiv Species. Part II. ]

By AHTHITK M. LEA.

(With Plate XXII.).
[Read JIth September, 1913].

Carabidak.

Xanfhuj^hafn.
I have not seen a I'ecord as to species of this genus bombarding,
but some of them ceitainly do. This first eanie undei' my notice
A\ith X. a/if/usfii/a. whicii discharges a small, vague cloud, usually
of semidunai' shape, extending to about two inrhes from its body.
It appeai-s to be discliarged outwards and upwards, l)ut occasionally
forwards. The amount of vapour is small, and must usually' escape
olxservation, but, when about to pick up the beetle, the vapour, if
Avatched for, can be seen in almost every instance. Only one dis-
charge appears to be made, and it is not accompanied by sound.

Dytiscidae.
Necferosoma cosfipenne. Lea.
The late Rev. T. Blackburn^ says, " This insect is no doubt iden-
tical with H. penicillatus Clark." This may possibly be the case,
but, if so, it is singular how decidedly (and, between individuals, so
uniformly) carinate the Tasmanian specimens are. (Since describ-
ing cosfipenne, I have seen hundreds of specimens). Clark saya
of penicillntvDi, " On either side of the suture an obsolete carina-
tion, plainly perceptible when the insect is viewed fi-om in front."
In examining cosfipenne from tlie front, the elytra appear to be
feebly concave in tlie middle, with the earinae less distinct than
from any other direction ; in fact, from above, they arc most dis-
tinct (especially along the middle); the woid " ol)solete " would
certainly be misleading applied to all the Tasmanian specimens I

1. Part I. in Proe. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. xxii. (n.s.), p. 113, 1009.

2. Trans. Rov. Soc. S. Aiist., 1001, p. IS.''..

212 Arthur M. Lea:

have seen. The markings, it is true, vary somewhat, like undoubted
specimens of p(^«Jc///«///w (my types of cosfipenne were without
pale elytral markings), althougli, as a rule, the pallid portions
occupy a ntuch smaller area. I thijik, therefore, that even if cosfi-
penne is to be referred to penicilUif nm, it sliould be regarded as a
distinct variety of that species.

PSELAPHIDAK.

Articerus regius. King.

Mr. Cox has recently taken numerous specimens of this species
about Sydney.

The male has the front femora strongly inflated, and middle pair
still more so, the hind pair, however, are normal. In the original
description, King noted the middle pair as being strongly spined;
the spine referred to, however, is really on the trochanter ; there
is also a small tooth on each of the front trochanters. The front tibiae
are strongly notched, the n(jtch being marked behind by an acute
tooth, and in front by a somewhat obtuse one ; the middle tibiae
are less conspicuously notched, and the tooth behind the notch is
feeble, but the one in front is distinct and acute.

The female differs from the male in being slightly smaller, the
legs unarmed, femora comparatively thin and of even thickness,
and the hind pair the longest, tibiae not notched, and lower surface
of abdomen convex, with the sutures straight.

Both sexes are densely clothed with brick- red pubescence along
the middle of the metasternum, the clothing extending to about the
middle of the apparent basal segment of abdomen of male, but
not quite so far on the female.

T nif^i plioni!^ fore/Iaferts, Lea.

A specimen from Townsville (in the Britisli .Museum) differs from
the type in being larger (almost 3 mm.), and somewhat darker.

HiSTFRlDAK.

Chlamydopsis and allies.

Hitherto three generic names liave Ikh'Ii usrd in dealing with these
curious myrmecophilous beetles, Chlanif/dopsis and Bi/zenia, which
are certainly synonymous, and Orectoscelli^. The late Rev. T. Black-
burn, in commenting on the great dissimilarity of tlie species known

Coleopfera, Part II.

213

to him, nevertheless referred them all to Chlamydopsis, and in this
I was content to follow him. But, as the species are now rather
numerous, and are certainly allied together in clusters, it seems
desirable to propose several new generic names for some of them;
as it is certain that other entomologists will not be satisfied to leave
them all in the typical genus. I therefore purpose apportiijning
them as follows : —

ECTATOM-

Chlamyuopsis.

Orectoscelis.

Pheidoliphila.

MIPHILA.

agilis

duboulayi

carho

glabra

cavicoUis

hiuneralis

granulata

opaca

comata

minvita

deteeti

pseudocephala

ectatommae

sternalis

epipleuralis

excavata

forniicicola

inaequalis

iiKluilina

latipeiniis

longipes

pygidialis

•

reticulata

serricoUis

striatella

tuberculata

variol" isa

Orectoscelis.
This genus is unknown to me. To it Mr. Lewis referred humeralis
and duhoulayi : also, somewhat doubtfully, sternalis. The last
named species, liowevei', I pui'pose transferring to Plieidoliphila.

CItlami/dopsis.

Regarding striatella as the type of the genus, the species may
all be distinguished by the prothoracic margins being narrowly,
usually unevenly, raised in front, and frequently at the sides. The
elytra are widely depressed near the base, with the depression ex-
tending to the sides, but towards the margins concealed by raised
humeral processes. Of these some species have each shoulder in the
form of an epaulette, Avith two projections behind it; others have
the epaulettes split into two projections, which almost meet two
subhumeral ones, the raised parts having fascicles or pilose mem-
branes. Hind legs, more or less elongate, and not entirely fitted
into grooves.

To this group comata and tuberculata are now referred as
aberrant species, for which, at present at least, it is not desirable
to propose new generic names.

2a

214 Arthur M. L<^<t :

E cfafoinin i pli /la, n . g .

The species of tliis genus aie nearer tlie nurinal // isteridae than
any of the others. The prothm-ax is wide and \vith(uit raised mar-
gins. The elytra are transversely impressed behind the base, and
the shoulders are not cleft, and are without special clothing. The-
legs are short, wide, and fitted into grooves.

The two know*n species occur in nests of Ectafoiinna inttdUirinn.

PJieidoli pliiJa, n.g.

The sjjecies of this genus are all small. The prothorax is strongly
raised in front, with the raised portions overhanging the head.
The elytra are not depressed immediately behind the scutellar
region, but there is a depression close to each shoulder; there is
an oblique incision at each shoulder, but the shoulders themselves
are not raised above the general level, although clothed internally.
All the legs are fitted into grooves.

The host of sfernalis is unknown, but all the other species have
been taken from nests of various species of Pheidole.

I'heidoliphila miniifa, n.sp. (Plate XXII., Fig. 1.)
Reddisli-castaneous, prothorax somewhat darker. Clotlied with
golden setae within each shoulder, elsewhei'e almost or quite glab-
rous.

Head small, vertical and feebly concave. Antennae with basal
joint large, subtriangular and rather wide. Prothorax about thrice
as wide as the lateral length, subopaque, smooth and indistinctly
punctate; median three-fourths of apex, appearing as a shining,
regularly curved, and moderately elevated ridge, each side of which
is marked by a subtriangular notch. Elytra subquadrate, widest
close to base, with a distinct depression within each shoulder; each
side at base appearing as a wide obtuse projection, which is con-
spicuously elevated at the depression, but not elevated above the
general level, and obliquely cut off at the outer base; disc regularly
convex, with dense and small, but clearly defined punctures.
Pygidium and propygidium w-ith minute punctures. Prostermim,
with a deep, wide and almost parallel-sided groove, extending
almost its entire length. Metasternum with a feeble median line,
and with minute, but clearly defined punctures, similar puncturea
in l)asal segment of abdomen. Legs rather short, tibiae distinctly
flanged, the flanges increasing in width from apex to near base^
and then more or less obliquely cut off. Length, H mm

Coleopteiu, Part II. 215

Hah. — Victoiia. near Melbourne, from a nest of Vhe'idoJe sp.
(F. P. Spry). Type in National Museum.

From all the previously described species readily distinguished
by the apcx of the prothorax ; in the other species it is stron<;ly
elevated, and more or less l)ihd ; in tliu jiresent species it is but
moderately elevated, not at all bifid, and slopes round with an
even curve, (ininnhita at first appears to have the elevated parts
evenly curved, l)ut this is really due to two elevations touching
in tho middle, like a pair of closed nippers. It is tlic smallest
known species of the allied genera.

The typo has each antenna withdrawn into its receptacle, so that
only the outer face of the basal joint, and the tip of the club are
visible; the tip, however, is placed side by side witli the basal
joint, so that it cannot be seen from above, as in most species of
Chlamydopsis.

Since the above was written, Mr. Spry informed me that he had
taken, in Novendjer, ten more specimens clustered together under
a stone, in a nest of the same species of ant at Fern Tree Gully,
and he kindly gave me four of them, these enabling me to add
the following particulars : — The club is of an elongated-conical
shape (nuich like a modern rifle bullet), and distinctly shorter than
the first joint, the intervening joints combined are slightly longer
than the club. On the prosternum, from each side of the median
groove, a line extends, slightly obliquely, to near the sides, where
it touches at right angles, a curved line. The tibiae are more or less
shallowly concave on both their margins; on the lower side, for
their entire length, for the reception of the femora, and on the
upper side, for a shorter length, for the reception of the tarsi.

Chlamydopsis detecti, n.sp.

Of a rather light castaneous, legs and tips of subhumeral pro-
jections, somewhat darker. Head, front of prothorax and base of
elytra, with a few straggling setae; a fairly large, but partially
concealed, golden pubescent membrane within each shoulder.

Head vertical and transverse, with small but distinct punctures,
and a few small granules. Antennae with basal joint large and
curved. Prothorax twice as wide as its median length, wliich is
about twice that of each side, disc gently elevated in middle, lateral
and apical margins strongly elevated, base oblique from middle to
each side, with dense and small, but clearly defined punctures.
Ehjtra a trifle wider than long; with a wide irregular depression

216 Arthur ill. Lea:

near base, each side of scutellar region with a feebly elevated space,.
Avitliin the depression, the hinder margin of each with a few small
granules ; about each shoulder with two conspicuous processes, the
outer one thin and strongly elevated, the inner in the form of a
stout, obtuse tubercle, the two separated by a conspicuous groove;
immediately behind the two subhumeral processes are two others of
somewhat similar form, but with their apices pointed forwards
instead of backwards; hind margins obliquely reflexed ; a few seti-
ferous granules on each side of suture near middle, and on the
inner basal tubercles; punctures small and mostly inconspicuous.
Pygidium and propygidium large and separately convex. Under
surface, except four apical segments of abdomen (which are highly
polished), subo23aque. Intercoxal process of presternum narrow
and with a narrow carina on each side. Metasternum with a nar-
row median line. Legs not very long; all the tibiae with rather
wide flanges, ending somewhat abruptly near their bases. Length
4^ mm.

Hah. — Queensland; Dawson River, from a nest of Iridomyrmex
detectus (E. D. Barnard).

Nearer to formicicola than to any other described species, but
considerably larger, elytral processes larger and of different shape,
with distinct granules, etc.

On the type the antennae are almost entirely withdrawn into
their receptacles, so that only the basal joint and a small portion
of the club are visible; the club, however, appears to be cylindrical
and curved. The margins of the prothorax are so strongly elevated
that the disc appears conspicuously concave, its greatest depth
being at the front angles; the margin is somewhat interrupted in
the middle of the apex. The subopaque parts of the under surface
are rendered so by dense minute punctures, and exceedingly minute
pubescence.

C'/iIninydnp.s/s ngilii^, n.sp. (Plate XXII., Fig. 7.)

Reddish-castaneous, under surface (except prosternum), sides and
apex of elytra blackish. A few short pale setae scattered about, but
a conspicuous fi-inge of very short setae on the inner margin of
each epaulette.

Head almost vertical, with distinct net-like punctures. Antennae
with basal joint large, flat and curved, its outer face with punc-
tures as on head ; club subovate, and rather large. Prothorax al-
most twice as wide as the median length, disc regularly and gently
elevated, front margins elevated, and in the form of four oblique

Coleoptem, Part II. 217

lobes, with a median notch, the outer lobes slightly wider than the
inner ones, sides feebly decreasing in width from apex to base, and
very feebly elevated; punctures as on head. Eli/tra subquadrate,
with a wide transverse, irregular depression near base; each side
of scutellar region feebly elevated within the depression, and sub-
opaque; each shoulder in the form of a conspicuous epaulette, con-
cave internally above the depression ; a feebly notched process
close behind each epaulette; middle behind the depression longitu-
dinally and o])liquely striated, rest of upper surface and the epis-
terna with net-like punctures. Similar punctures on pygidium and
propygidiuni. Prosiernuin and mesosfernum, with net-like punc-
tures. Metasternum with a moderately deep median line, continued
to base, but not to apex; and, as also the abdomen, with distinct
but irregularly distributed punctures. Four front legs of moderate
length, their tibiae with flanges, which, from some directions, ap-
pear to regularly increase in width from base and apex to middle,
which appears rather acutely dentate; hind legs very long, their
tibiae of very different sliape to those of the others. Length, 3 mm.

Hah. — N. S. Wales; Sydney, from a nest of Ectnf omnia inetaUi-
cum (H. W. Cox).

Allied to iiiaeqiial/s and longipes. To the former species at first
it appears to be very close, but the hind til^ae are very different.
In the present species they are wide foi- the greater portion of
their length, with the upper edge gently rounded off, and the
obliquely cut off apex not far fx'om perpendicular. In /'naequalis
the apical slope is much longer, and the whole tibia is considerably
narrower, the apex of the prothorax is also not exactly the same.
f.onf/ipes has much longer hind legs, and is otherAvise very differ-
ent. In sending the specimen, Mr. Cox wrote that it was extremely
active, a character strikingly at variance with tlie other species
of the genus. l)ut Mr. W. du Boulay. who has recently taken a
specimen, wrote tliat it was (|uite slow in its movements.

C/il(init/(/opsis inaequalU. Blackb. (Plate XXII., Fig. 8.)

A hind leg of the type of this species is figured for comparison
with that of the preceding species.

Chlamydopsis sern'rollis, n.sp. (Plate XXII.. Figs. 2, .'5, and 4.)

Black, subopaque; legs of a rather dingy castaneous. Each
epaulette, with a conspicuous golden pubescent membrane pos-
teriorly, and with a few stout golden setae.

218 Arthur M. Lea :

Head rather small and vertical ; with dense punctures, and with
four conspicuous granules. Antennae with basal joint large and
with punctures as on head. Prothorax scarcely twice as wide as
the median length; front margin with three conspicuously serrated
lobes, median lobe Avith four teeth of even size, each of the others
with four or five teeth of somewhat uneven sizes; each side with
tAvo or three conspicuous teeth; a narrow irregularly serrated
ridge from middle of disc to apex; Avith a few conspicuous granules
or small tubercles on each side of median portion of disc. Elytra
someAvhat longer than Avide, Avith a conspicuous sub-basal depres-
sion; each shoulder in the form of a conspicuously elevated
epaulette, Avith numerous rough granules, sides near base serrated ;
disc irregularly elevated behind each epaulette, each side of suture
with a roAv of small granules, becoming larger posteriorly; a trans-
verse irregular roAv of granules at about apical third ; apex con-
spicuously and irregularly serrated; epipleurae Avith conspicuous
striae, all converging to outlets of basal depression. Propi/gidium
and pygidium Avith a few rough granules of irregular size, their
junction conspicuously serrated; propygidium in addition Avith a
longitudinal roAv of granules. Under surface densely punctate,
the punctures coarser on four front inteicoxal processes, and at
base of abdomen than elseAvhere. Leys moderately long, all the
tibiae Avith conspicuous flanges, Avhich at the highest point of each
appear strongly dentate. Length 2^ mm.

Hah. — N.S. Wales; Port Hacking, from a ne.st of Eciatomma
metalliciun (W. du Boulay.)

I Avas at first inclined to regard tlie type of this species as re-
presenting a variety of pi/gidialis ; l)ut it dift'trs fi-oni tlie type of
that species in having the margins of prothorax Avith very con-
spicuous seri'ations, the apices of the elytra are similarly serrated,
and so is the prothoracic carina as seen fi-om the side (traces of
these serrations are to be seen on the type of pur/idialis). But
the hind legs are also different. On the ty])c of pi/gidinlis the
obliquely cut oft hind margin of the hind til)ia. containing the tar-
sal groove, slopes off at a Avide angle fiom tlic vntical, with its
highest point not much more distant fi-om the basr than from the
apex. On the present .species tlie sloi)e is inueh shorter, niiu'h
nearer the vertical, and Avith the hiy:hest jxiint almost twice as dis-
tant from the base as from the apex. The present species also has
the elytial epipleurae Avith striae quite regulai- foi- tlie greater jxir-
tion of their lengths; in />////;>//>///,< the sti'iation is seareely notice-
able, even at the outlets of tlie l)asal depression.

Coieo'plera, P<iii II. L'lU

On the type each aiiteinia is lilted into its iLrt'iitacle so tliat only
the outer face of the liasal joint, and tlie tip of the eluh. are visil)le.
The whole of the upper surfaee. and tlie py<^idiuin and ]>ropy<.n-
■diuin, are clearly eovered witli small flattened ^nannies, that from
some directions appear almost like scales. Most of them are of
uniform size, hut occasionally one appears to he sli<j:htly lai'ger
than its fellows.

Chlamii(h>p^is pf/;/u/iaI/s. Blaekh. (Plate XXII., Fijrs. 5 and G.)

A hind le<;- of the tyj^e of this species is figured for compai-ison
with that of tlie preceding species.

linizoFii.\(;ii)AK.

Orliolissa liiunc rails, Fairm.

Some specimens from Cairns sent to .Mons. tliouvelle were iden-
tified by him as belonging to this species, which does not appear
to liave been previously recorde<l as Australian.

ClOIDAK.

Li/vfus ini pressiis, Comolli.

This species is widely distributed in Au.stralia and Tasmania.
It has been introduced, and I have to thank Mons. A. Grouvelle
for the identification of some specimens sent to him.

Malacodekmidae.
Laius hackeri, n.sp. (Plate XXII.. Fig 9.)
J Flavous; basal half of head Ijlack. v.-ith a greenish gloss,
scutelkim black; elytra with base and a triangular continuation
along suture, and a subapical angular fascia (touching sides but
not suture), metallic blue or purple; under surface (parts of abdo-
men excepted), and legs black or blackish, knees pale; antennae
with two basal joints and a part of third flavous, the others black
with rather sparse long hairs, and with shoit and rather spai-se
pale pubescence.

Head somewhat flattened and with tiie face very feebly concave;
■«ith small indistinct punctures. Antennae with two basal joints^
large, and the second curiously distorted. L'rothorax strongly
transverse, almost angularly dilated to apical third; with shallow

1. The third joint is really the one here treated as the second, the true second joint being very
small and usually concealed ; and as other workers have treated the true second joint as being-
absent, I simply follow their lead.

220 Arthur M. Lea:

indistinct punctures. Elytra with dense punctures, sparser and
smaller, on l)lue basal marking than elsewhere. Length, i\ to 4^
mm.

2 Differs fi'om the male in having the two basal joints of anten-
nae simple, and the front tarsi different.

Uah. — Queensland : Cairns, Chillagoe (Henry Hacker).

A medium-sized species, with distinctive elvtral markings, and
with the second joint of antennae of male very different to that
of any previously-described spec-ies.

The pale colours have altered somewhat since the specimens were
first received, and, unfortunately, they were not noted when fresh.
On the ehi:ra the flavous parts appear to be of two shades of colour,
both being paler than the prothorax. The subapical fascia, if such
it can be called, on the elytra, starts from the sides, where it is
widest, and its front margin is angularly produced at its middle,
whilst its back margin is triangularly or semi-circularly notched.
The basal joint of the antennae is large, and towards its apex has
a small conical projection crowned with a seta ; the second is longer
than the first, and its extreme width greater than its length, its
lower surface convex, and upper irregularly concave, and it has
two curious projections from the front ; the anterior one of these
is the larger, is first directed outwards, and then backwards, and
terminates in a somewhat curved process, which almost, but
not quite, touches a narrow process that represents the outer
part of the posterior projection. From some directions the two
projections appear to meet in front of a circular opening. The
male has the second joint of the front tarsi very small, so that at
first the tarsi appear to be four-jointed; in the female the second
is of normal size, so that the five joints are clearly visible, and the
tarsi appear to be longer.

Laius C.-pupiiretis. n.sp. (Plate XXIT., Fig 10.)

<r Flavous, basal half of head black, with a purplish gloss,
scutellum black; a large spot on each shoulder, and a C-sliaped
mark near the apex, deep metallic blue or purple; meso and metas-
ternum black with a purplish or metallic green gloss; tip of abdo-
men infuscate; four hind legs black with a purplish gloss, the front
ones, except tibiae, flavous; two basal joints of antennae and part
of third flavous, the rest black. With rather long, suberect, pale
pubescence, and, in addition, with some longer and usually darker
hairs.

Goleopfera, Part II. 221

Head somewhat flattened in parts, and with minute punctures.
Antennae with two basal joints large and distorted. Profhornz
Btrongly transverse, sides somewhat angularly inflated to apical
third; punctures shallow and indistinct. Elytra with very dense
punctures, smaller and sparser on humeral markings than elsewhere.
Front tarsi with basal joint short, second longer, closely applied
to it and strongly curved at apex, claw joint unusually large; front
femora with a tubercular swelling on middle nf upper surface.
Length. 6 to 6^ mm.

$ Differs from the male in having the two V>asal joints of an-
tennae simple, the second joint of the front tarsi distinct from the
second, and the femora simple.

Hab. — Queensland : Cairns (Henry Hacker).

A large species, allied to tarsalis and major; from both of wliielf
it is readily distinguished by the subapical markings of elytra, and
different basal joints of antennae of male. From verticalis (Mac-
leay, not Fairmaire), of which, so far, only the female is known;
it differs in being flatter, and in the shapes of the elytral mark-
ings.

The mark on each shoulder covers the whole of the extreme base,
is then directed backwards close to the suture to about the apical
fourth, and then is directed somewhat obliquely to the side; the
subapical mark is strongly curved, and touches the side, but not
the suture; on the left elytron it is somewhat C-shaped, and on
the right reversed — 3. The basal joint of the antennae is feebly
curved on its inner side, and strongly curved on its outer, with
the apex almost as wide as the length. The second joint is shorter
than the first, but considerably wider, convex on its lower, and
irregularly concave on its upper surface; near its anterior outer
edge there is a distinct fovea, and posteriorly it is excavated, with
two processes above the excavation, one narrow and oblique,
the other conical and upright, the two touching at their tips.
But the second joint appears of different shape from almost every
direction it is viewed from. The tuljercle on the front femora of
the male is concealed by the overlapping sides of prothorax.

Laius minutus, n.sp. (Plate XXII., Fig. 11.)

(7 Black, in parts with a faint purplish gloss; prothorax
somewhat flavous, the apical half, except at sides, stained with
brown; elytra with a conspicuous, narrow, raised, median, white
fascia not toucliing suture or sides, but sides at mediuni third

*22Z Afthitr M. Lai :

thickened and flavous ; under surface of first and second, and
■concave upper portion of second joints of antennae, somewhat
flavous. With comparatively sparse, but erect dark hairs.

Head longer than usual, moderately convex, with a faint median
line. Eyes larger than usual. Antennae rather short. Two basal
joints large. Frothorax slightly longer than wide; sides somewhat
oblique from apex to apical third, thence incurved to base, which
is rather narrow. FAiitra with some small punctures marking o2
the sutural and lateral tliickeniugs, but elsewhere impunctate, or
almost so. Front iarsi witli tlie twu basal joints apparently con-
joined. Length, '2\ mm.

Ilah. — Queensland : Dalby (Mrs. F. H. Hobler).

A minute species, not very close to any other known to me, but
-evidently belonging to Fairmaire's first section of the genus, and
allied to guttulatus; from the description of which it differs in the
median fascia of the elytra not touching the sides, although the
sides against which it terminates are pale, but of a decidedly dif-
ferent colour; the apex not spotted, and the tibiae no paler than
tlie femora.

The first joint of the antennae is ratlier thin at its basal fourth,
but thence is rather strongly inflated. The second is about as long
as the first, but much wider, convex on its lower surface, and con-
■cave on its upper, with the outer margins irregularly folded over
the concavity.

Laius alle/ii. Lea.

On several occasions Mr. Allen wrote to me that he considered
this remarkable species to be a carrion beetle; but as no other mem-
ber of the whole family is known to be such, I concluded that he
had confused the species with the connnon carrion-beetle, yecj-obia
rufipes, a species which in size and colour, except of the legs, it
very greatly resembles. Recently, however, Mr. Allen sent nineteen
specimens of the species, and wrote of them, " You were dubious
about those being carrion-beetles. I have ocular demonstration
regarding these specimens, as I caught the bulk of them in head
•of a fish (severed), lying on the beach, the fish had only been caught
that day, and the head was not putrid. I remember now taking the
•original specimens on rocks, wave-washed, along the sea-beach.

Neocarphiirus 7)//o,>f//>f z/?//."*, n.sp.
J^ Black; head (a spot on forehead excepted), antennae (three
or four apical joints excepted), palpi, and extreme base of pro-
thorax flavous; parts of front legs, and sometimes knees of middle

Coleo/>tera, Part II. 22:^

legs, diluted with flavous; eyes green. With a few setae scattered
about, more noticeably towards apex of abdomen than elsewliere>
elytra in addition with dense and very short piibescence, somewhat
similar clothing on abdomen.

Head large; deeply and irregularly excavated; with a large
raised space, the front of which is rounded and midway between
the antennae, and the hind end of which is notclied or foveate. and
almost in the exact middle of the head. Antennae extending almost
to apex of elytra. Profliora.r shining; distinctly longer than wide;
about once and one-half as long as wide, sides feebly rounded in
middle. Abdomen suboval, wider than elytra; convex on upper,
and concave on lower surface. Legs long, basal joint of front tarsi
rather large and lop-sided. Length, 2|, to apex of elytra 2, mm.

Hah. — New South Wales : Narromine (E. W. Ferguson).

At hrst sight apparently belonging to .Y. sohriniia, but elytra
with extremely short and depressed, but rather dense pulie.scence, a
charactei- which will readily distinguish it from all others of the
genus. In sohrinus the cephalic tubercle, when viewed from behind,
appears as if with elevated points at each end; in the present
species it appears single, and flat-topped, or gently convex. Dr.
Ferguson sent seven specimens for examination, but they are all
males.

Dasi/tes hlackhurni, new name; helmsi Blackb., ii.pr.

I propose this name as a substitute for D. helmsi of Blackburn.
helmsi having been previously used for a Xew Zealand species.
(Sharp, Trans.. Ent., Soc, Lond., 1882, Part 1, p. (56.)

Dasyteii jtdesi, new name; boitrr/eo/si. Lea. n.pr.

I propose this name as a substitute for /). boiirr/eoix/. Lea, as
M. Bourgeois informs me that that name had been previously used
bv Schilskv for a Roumanian insect.

Lampi/ris aiisfralia. Fal).

The type of this species has apparently disappeared. It should be
in tlie Banks' collection, now in the British Museum; but Mr. G. J.
Arrow informed me that it was not there now, " and was apparently
not there when the collection came to us."

2ii4 Arthur M. Lea :

MORDELLIDAE.

Mordellisfeiia Innyipes, Lea.i
This name will stand, as, although it is the .same as jiicunda
Champ, 2 that name was previously used for a New Zealand spet-ies
of MordellisfenaJ

Mordella promincua, Er.

I have seen the type of this species. It appears to be a small and
partially abraded specimen of communis, Wath.

CUROULIONIDAK.

Polyphvades hiplagiatus, Pasc.
Mr. Arrow confirmed my identification of specimens from King
George's Sound as belonging to this species. Mr. Pascoe no doubt
wrongly recorded the species from Queensland.

yeosi/o</r/us cordipeniiis. Lea.
Tliere are eight specimens of this species in the Queensland
Museum from Mudgerbah (Queensland). The types were found
attacking cultivated ferns; so that a genuine locality record for
Australia is of interest.

Atelirus atrophiis, Pasc.

There are before me six specimens, that I refer to this species, but
no two are exactly alike in size or colour. The type was described
as having the middle of the elytra pale, and the posterior declivity
with a ring of scales; with these characters a specimen from Mount
Wellington agrees, a specimen from Hillgrove (New South Wales)
also agrees, but the rest of its surface is much darker than the
mountain one. Four other specimens have the derm of the elytra
quite uniform in tint, and the club black. Of these one has the
apical ring complete but simple; two others have the rings com-
plete, but with inner markings as well, whilst the fourth (from
Gippsland), has a complete ring on the declivity of each elytron.
This specimen also has a complete median prothoracic stripe. All
these specimens have the fifth intestice slightly thickened, and

1. Proc. I.inn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1895, p. 30:{ ; (lesc-ril)ed as a Monletla.

2. Tiaris. Kiit. Soc. Loud., 1895, p. 272.

.•). liiomi, Man. of the N.Z. Col., 1880, p. 415.

Coleoptera, Part 11. 225

advanced over the suininit of the posterior declivity, so as to appear
like a feeble elongated tubercle. The size varies from i\ to 8 mm.

Atelicits ferrugineus, Waterh.

This specie.s was described originally as from South Australia,
but occurs as well in West Australia. Victoria, and New South
Wales. The interrupted median line of the prothorax, described
by Waterhou.se, is not always present. The head is occasionally
black. The size varies from ."? tn .5 mm.

Atelicus inaequal/s, Waterh.

The scales on this species are usually without lustre, but one
specimen before me has many scales with a golden glitter.

Misophrice hohleri , Lea.

Some fresh specimens of this species from Mrs. Hobler show an
additional range of variation to that of the types. A small specimen
measures but 1| mm. Two specimens have the dark scales on the
elytra, not black, but reddish-brown, and covering only about one-
third of their surface. The species, however, may be readily dis-
tinguished by its long and thin elytral setae.

Thechia alternata. Lea.

This species is without a scutellum. and so should have been
referred to Ce?ichre?iaA I am very doubtful as to whether lioth
Cenchreiia and Thechia wull be permanently retained; the presence
of a scutellum and the absence (apparent only) of an apical spur
to the tibiae are the only distinguishing features of Thechia, and
these might very well be outweighed by the common triarticulate
tarsi.

The types of altemafa have an indistinct median fascia on the
elytra, two other specimens have the fascia rather more defined.
The species is evidently, therefore, close to fasciafa,"^ but differs from
the description of that species in having the abdomen uniforndy
clothed, instead of "in medio argenteo-squamoso."

1. Pa,scoe, .lourn. Linn. Soc, 1873, p. 24.

2. Pascoe, I.e., p. 24, pi. iii., fip. 9.

226 Arthur M. Lea:

Orchestes perpusillus, Pasc. (now lihomphns).

Thinking this species was possibly a Ithainphus, I sent specimens
that appealed to agree with the description, and were from Cham-
pion Bay (tlie original locality), to Mr. Arrow, of the British
Museum. Of them he wrote, " Appears to me to be Orchesfes per-
pusillus, Pasc,, from the type. Mr. Guy Marshall agrees with me,
and considers it to belong to the genus Rhamphus.

Acioiemis spilonota, Pasc. ^

A specimen from the Endeavour River appears to belong to this
species, but differs from the description in having several feeble
fascicles at base and apex of prothorax, as well as across middle.

SCOLYTIDAK.

Cro-^iiofarsNs f/reri/hfie, n.sp.

Flavouis, in purt.s (hirk l)rown or castaneous. Head, tip of elytra
and legs with I'ather long and sparse pale hairs.

Head flattened in front, and with some distinct l)ut irregularly
distributed punctures; l)aso witli some small punctures and a feeble
median carina. I'rotJwrax slightly longer than wide, sides rather
strongly incurve<l near apex, and thence gently inflated to near
base; with a few small but rather clearly defined punctures about
middle of base. Elylro with striae irregularly impressed, deeper
about base and towards, (but not at) apex than elsewhere; the
interstices with small punctures; suture triangularly notched about
apex; extreme apex irregularly vertical, and with several small,
conical, seta-tipped projections. Length, 2 mm.

//.-?/>.— Queensland. (C. French. Ji-.)

Readily distinguished from all nther named species of Australian
Platypides by its extremely small size. Of the two specimens before
me, one has the head, except numth jiarts, and pronotum, almost
l)lark, its elytra from about tlui middle are eastaiieous. but about
th(t ape.x rai)idly ])ec(mie almost bbuk ; the otluT has the dark parts
imirh paler. In both the club is inruscate.

Tim specimens descrilit'd . eviih-iitly dl" but one rox, were taken
by .Mr. FrtMich at .Melboiirnu when I'.xamining newly imported logs
from Queensland of the silky oak (Grevillea robusta).

1. Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., ISS.^, p. 247.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 1914. Plate XXII.

Coleoptera, Part II. 227

COCCINKLMDAH.

Chilomenes i)i(icii/afa, V. ; Orrus ninllipes. Oil.

On several occasions I have erroneously referred to this very
coninion and useful West Australian species as quadri pustulatus,
Muls; I have received the correct name from Herr J. Weise.

Ckrambycidae.

Xf/sfrocei-a rirescens. Newm.

A specimen of this spec'ies was found crushed on a footpath by
Mr. P. Lockwood at Launceston, Tasmania. It probably matured
in wood brought from Australia.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXII.

Fig. 1. — I'heidoJi phild iniiiuta. Lea.

Fig. 2 .—Chla 1)1 tfdojhoii s serricollis. Lea.

Fig. 3. — C /i la in //d ops is serricollis. Lea; hind leg.

Fig. 4. — Chlnnn/dopsis serricnUis. Lea; front part of protliorax^
as viewed obliquely from behind.

Fig. 5. — Chlamydopsis pi/gidialis. Blackli. ; front jDart of pro-
thorax from same position.

Fig. 6. — Chlninydopsis pi/r/idiaJis, Blackb. ; hind leg.

Fig. 7. — Chlamydopsis agilis, Lea; hind leg.

Fig. S. — ChIa)7i)/dopsis i7iaequalis, Blackb. ; hind leg.

Fig. 9. — La ills Jiacheri. Lea.

Fig. 10. — Lams C . purpureus. Lea.

Fig. 11. — TMiiis II) ill)/ fits. Lea.

[Proc. Kot. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.S.), Pt. II., 19U].

Akt. XVJI, — Oti Bitter Pit and Sensitivity to Poiaons.

By ALFRED J. EWART, D.Sc. ; Ph.D.
(Professor of Botany and Plant Physiology in the University of Melbourne).

[3rd Papeh].

(With Plate XXIII.)

[Read 11th September, 1913].

In pursuance of foi'mer papers in Avliicli the extreme sensitivity
of apples to poisons was described, it was thought desirable to
obtain a comparison with some other plant structure also capable
of prolonged semi-dormant existence. For this purpose potato3s
were selected, which, like apples, became discoloui-ed by oxidase
action when dead, but which, unlike apples, are capable of further
growth, and can, for instance, form cork across a cut surface,
which apples can not do.

In addition Rothera and Greenwoudi have recently attempted
to gain direct evidence in regard to the poisoning theory of Bitter
Pit, and with negative results. Their works and methods ap-
peared to demand further experimental investigation.

Sensitivity of Potatoes to Poisons.

In order to compare the sensitivity of apples and potatoes to
poisons, a number of experiments were performed of which the re-
sults are given below. The potatoes were prepared by removing
small areas of the skin, and then immersing them in the poisonous
solution. They were then cut in two, and tlie deptli to which
tho l)r<i\vn ov purple colour was developed bcneatli the pi'epared
spots was noted after a few hours' exposuie to moist air to allow
of the complete oxidation of dead tissues. SnowHake potatoes were
used thioughout.

MERCURIC CHLORIDE. FIVE DAYS IN ONE LITRE OF SOLUTION,
TEMPERATURE AVERAGING IL^C.

Stren({th of / 1 per
Solution 1 1,(100.

1 per

10,000.

1 per

100,000.

Iper

1,000,000.

1 per
10,000,000.

Depth of 4-5 mm.

1 m.m.

Superficial

No (li.stinL't signs

No signs of

spots.

browning
only.

of poisoning.

poisoning.

1. Chemical iiivestitfation in connection with Hitter Pit, li>13.

Bitter Pit and Sensitivity to Poisons. 229

COPPER SULPHATE. FIVE DAYS IN ONE LITRE OF SOLUTION,
TEMPERATURE AVERAGING 15°C.

Strenffth of ( 1 per 1 per 1 per 1 per 1 per

Solution ■( 100. 1000. 10,000. 100,000 1,000,000.

Depth of 5-10 mm. 3-5 mm. 2-3 mm. Superficial brown- No signs of

spots. iner only. poisoning.

With stronger solutions of copper sulphate, when the potatoes
are first cut open, a bluish tinge can be seen beyond the browned
areas, but after exjjosure to air all this region browns, and it
consists wholly of dead cells.

With solutions of lead nitrate, 1 per 10,000 strength, a faint
superficial browning appears on the prepared spots after five
days, but with mora dilute solutions (1 per 50.000), no signs of
poisoning can be detected.

With strong solutions (1 per 1000 to 1 per 10), the tissues be-
neath the prepared spots leiuain white, and at first seem to show
no signs of poisoning. After a day's exposure to air, how-
ever, greyish, scabby spots 1-2 mm. deep develop with a 1 per
1000 solution, and this tissue is made up of dead cells.

Potato juice produces a white flocculent precipitate with lead
nitrate, and this action seems to retard considerably the penetra-
tion of the lead nitrate. An excess of the latter apparently de-
stroys the oxidase ferment responsible for browning, and potato
slices immersed in 10 per cent, lead nitrate remain wdiite for an
indefinite length of time. A lesser strength of lead nitrate is
needed to kill the pulp cells than to destroy the oxidase. Hence
if potatoes are placed in a 5 per cent, solution, beneath each pre-
pared spot is an area of white but dead tissue, and then a brown
zone, in which the lead is less concentrated, and the oxidase has
had time to act after the cells were killed. Just in front of the
brown zone, a white line can be seen, where the cells have been
killed, but where no oxidation has as yet occurred, and further
in still tlie cells are living and normal. (See Plate xxiii.) To
produce browning, therefore, a time interval is necessary between
tho death of the cell and the destruction of the oxidase.

With similar exposures at a temperature averaging 13-140 Q the
potatoes showed themselves insensitive to 1 per 100 solutions of
magnesium sulphate, and 1 per 2000 solutions of barium chlorate,
while only a faint superficial browning was produced by a 1 in
50 solution of magnesium sulphate, and a 1 in 500 solution of
Inarium chlorate.

230 Alfred J. Eu-(irt :

Solutions of potassium cliloi-ate showed no signs of any poisonous
action up to strengths in wiiicli a strong osmotic action Avas exer-
cised. Tlius even after five days at 130 C. in a 5 per cent, solution,
and in spite of the fact that the prepared spots were slightly de-
pressed owing to the withdrawal of water, no signs of any poison-
intr action could be seen beyond a faint superficial browning on
some, but not all, of the prepared spots.

To test the effect of an acid, sulphuric acid was selected; pre-
pared potatoes immersed in it, and examined after one day in the-

SULPHURIC ACID, EXPOSUEE FIVE DAYS, TEMPERATURE
AVERAGING 12-13°C.
1 per 250. 1 per 1000. 1 per 10,000. 1 per 50,000. 1 per 200,000.

Dead tissue 8-10 - Dead tissue 5-6 - Pits 2 mm. - Faint super- - No signs of
mm. beneath mm. deep, deep, faint ficial brown- poisoning,

each prepared quite white. brown. ing.

spot, but quite
white.

Sulphuric acid is feebly acid to litmus paper up to 1 c.c. in
100,000 of water, but shows no perceptible acidity with 1 in
1,000,000. Hence litmus is slightly more sensitive to acid than
potatoes are. Using potatoes with small sprouts, the latter were
completely destroyed and rotted in concentrations up to 1 in
10,000, with 1 in 50,000 the tips, of the sprouts were slightly
affected, but a 1 per 200,000 solution did not produce any more
effect than immersal in distilled water.

Using caustic potash, prepared snowflake potatoes were im-
mersed for five days at an average temperature of 13o C. in | litre
of solution, then cut open along the line of prepared spots, and
examined after 2 hours' exposure to air.

CAUSTIC POTASH.

1 gram per 100 c.c. water. Pits 3-4 mm. dep.

1 gram per 500 c.c. water. Pits 1-2 mm. dep.

1 gram per 1000 c.c. water. Pits siiperficial to 1 mm. deep.

1 gram per 2000 c.c. water. Faint, superficial browning only.

1 gram per 5000 c.c. water. No distinct signs of poisoning.
Snowflake potatoes appeared to be comparatively in.sensitive to
antesthetics. 'J'hus with an immersal of 3 days at 13-1-10 c. in
a 5 pel- cent, solution of ether, the tissue was killed to a depth
of 3-4 mm. beneath the prepared spots, but only browned on
exposui-e to air, presumably owing to the ethei- i-etarding oxidase
action. With a 1 per cent, solution the tissue was killed on the
surface, and hardly browned at all, while no signs of poisoning
were shown with a 0.2 per cent, solution.

Bitter Pit and Sensitivity to Poisons.

231

llie influence of tenipeidt nie . To tost tlie influence of tenipera-
turo on the sensitivity to jioisons, snowtiake potatoes were selected,
and nieri'Uiic rlildridt' used as \\\v poison. .MttT the i-einoval of
fragments of the skin ai'ound a median line, they were immersed
for '.\ days in half a litre of solution. After the exposure they
were cut in half througii this line, and exposed t«> the air for
a couple of hours. At .■{(»<> ('., even if the lii[uid is kejit well
.aerated, the immersal cannot he ))rolonged further, since after
the third day the controls in puie water, which previously are
unaffected, begin to .show signs of asphyxiation, dead, discoloured
tissue then appearing, usually fii'st at the centre. In a 1 per
1,000,000 solution at 30O C. bacteria develop rapidly in spite of all
precautions, and hence the solution was replaced by fresh sterile
solution daily. With the 1 in 10,000 and 1 in 100, OOO solution at
30 0 C, most of the pits were pale at the surface, with a curved
dark band deeper in, and on exposure to aii- in mo.st cases a more
diffu.se and less darkened zone of dead tissue extended a short
distance into the pulp beyond this band. With shorter periods
of immersal, the poisoning does riot extend beyond the dark band.

C'oiicenti-iitioii.

Tenipeiature.

1 per 10,000.

1 per 100,009.

1 per 1,000,000.

29-30°C.

Dark pits 3-5 oini. •

■ Pits less dark, 1-3

- Slight superficial

deep, and tissue

mm. deep, and

darkening beneath

dead and dark-

diffuse zone be-

prejjared spots to

ening nearly to

yond darkening

a depth of 1 m.m.

centre.

to a depth of
2-5 m.m

13-14°C.

Pits 1-2 m.m deef , -

• Slight superficial ■

■ No signs of poison-

but not very
dark.
Slight superficial -

darkening only.

ing.

>0-l°C.

No signs of poi- ■

- No signs of poison-

darkening and

soning.

ing.

Ijrown rim to

prepared spots.

SENSITIVITY OF APPLE AND PO'J'ATO (Poison Limit
at 13-15=C.)

APPLE.

POTATO (S

riowHake.

Concentration.

.Mol. K(|.

Concentration.

Mol. K.|.

Ratio.

loC'-

.

1 per 10,000,000

- 27 lU

- 1 per 100,000

- 27. 1

100

-

1 per 100,000,000

- 27100

- 1 per 1,OOJ,000

- 271.0

lOo

0-l°C.

-

1 per ICO.OOO

- 27

- 1 per 10,000

- 2.7

10

CuSO^

1 per 1,000,000

- 249

- 1 per 100,000

- 24.9

10

Pb2NO

a "

1 per 2,5(X),000

- 827

- 1 per 10,030

- 3.3

250

MgSO,

1 per 5,000

- 1.2

- 1 per 50

- 0.012 -

100

BaCl,

1 per 10,UOO

- 3.0

- 1 per 500

- 0.15 -

20

H,SO,

1 per 1,000,000

- 53.

- 1 per 50,000

- 2.65 -

20

Alkali

-

1 per 10,0(X)

- 0.4

- 1 per 2,000

- 0.05 -

8

KCl

-

1 per 10,000

- 0.7

- I per 20

- 0.0014 -

500

Anaes-
thetic

1
>

I per 100,000

- 11.9

- 1 per 100

- 0.0074 -

lUUO

232 Alfred J. Ewart :

In all cases, therefore, apples are much more sensitive to poisons
than potatoes. The cells of the latter are undoubtedly more
actively living, as is shown by the power of forming cork across
a cut surface, which the pulp cells of the apple are unable to do.
The latter are adult cells, Avith only a thin lining layer of living
protoplasm, specially adapted for prolonged existence in a more
or less statical condition, cUiring which their equilibrium is very
easily upset by the merest trace of poison. A high temperature
affects the sensitivity of potatoes to poison in the same way as it
does apples.

Poisoning Theory of Bitter Pit.

Rothera and Greenwood^ have recently made an attempt to
obtain a direct answer to this problem. They found in the first
place that starch grains from both pitted and normal apples woidd
dissolve in diastase, but that in some cases starch grains might
still be undissolved after 10 days, thus confirming the results ob-
tained by me in 19122, which also showed that resistant grains
will usually dissolve after treatment with dilute hydrochloric acid,
for a reason to be given later. In regard to the cell-wall, misled
by McAlpine's statement (1st Report, p. 12), that the brown colour
of bitter pit is due to a gummy or mucilaginous substance of a
pectic character, which colours the cell-walls brown, Rothera and
Greenwood investigated the chemistry of the cell-wall, and could
find no pronounced indication of a difference of composition be-
tween the cell-w^alls of healthy and pitted tissue. This is not sur-
prising, since the brown colour is due to the formation of an
oxidation product of tannic acid which unites with the protoplasm
lying within the cell-wall. In the early stages of bitter pit the cell-
wall is colourless and unaltered. Any changes in the cell-wall could
only be the result of slow impregnation subsequent to death.

Direct tests of the poisoning theory of bitter pit w^ere performed
by adding the insoluble ash of bitter pit, and the portion dis-
solving in 10 per cent, nitric acid to starch — diastase solution-
No poisoning action could 1)0 detected as compared with controls.
This is hardly surprising. One experiment only was performed
with bitter pit material, which had been mixed with sand, tri-
turated and used for the extracton of starch. It had, therefore,
already been washed, and was again well washed with water,
alcohol and ether. The possibility of poisons l)cing washed out

1. Chemical investiffation on Bitter Pit, 1913.

2. Proc. Roy. Soe. of Victoria, vol. xxiv. (n..s.), p. 41o.

Bilter Pit (lad Sensifl rili/ to Poisons. 233

by this treatment was overlooked. The bitter pit ash ol)tained by
incineration contained over 70 per cent, ot" added sand, and the
possibility of a formation of insoluble silicates (lead silicate, etc.)
needs consideration. Finally, 10 per cent, nitric acid is not a
general solvent for metals or metallic oxides, and in insoluble
form a poisonous metal is comparatively harmless.

In other experiments the pitted tissue was directly tested by
leaving it in contact with diastase solutions for a day. then
filtering off and testiu<j: the diastase with starch solution. The
authors state that the action of malt diastase was strongly acceler-
ated after contact with boiled and unboiled bitter pit pulp, and
normal pulp, and that with taka diastase, practically no effect
was exercised. On repeating these experiments with filtered solu-
tions of malt diastase dissolved in distilled water, I am able to
give them emphatic contradiction. Prolonged contact with pounded
apple pulp, boiled^ or unboiled, bitter pit or normal, practically
destroys diastase in 1 to 3 days2. and unboiled pulp, if anything,
appeal's to be more active than boiled.

Even contact for a sliort time with pounded apple pulp retards
or inhibits diastatic action. Thus (A) 20 grams of pounded
apple pulp, and (B) 20 grams previously heated to 100^ C. for
15 minutes, were added to separate 10 c.c. of 1 per cent. Taka
diastase, and at once filtered. In three hours 5 c.c. of each filtrate
were added to 10 c.c. of 0.5 per cent, starch, and a control con-
tained 10 c.c. of 0.5 per cent, starch to 5 c.c. of 0.33 per cent.
Taka diastase.

The solutions were kept at 35° C, and portions tested at inter-
vals with iodine. In (A) the liquid was brow-n, and develoj^ed a
large, brown coagulum, which was shaken up before testing. In
(B) the liquid was colourless, and formed a smaller precipitate,
later nearly all dissolving.

3 Hours. 6 Hours. 16 Honr.s. 3u Hours.

(A) - Blue. - Bhie. - Bhie. - Blue.

(B) - Blue. - I'urplisli hlue. - Purple. - Purjjle.
Control - Palei- ]>\w. - Purple. - Nil. - Nil.

On testing (A) and (B) the former contained distinctly more
tannic acid. Apparently in the heated pulp a good deal of the
tannic acid combines with the coagulated proteids of the cell.

1. Out of contact with water.

'J With prolonged exposure a portion of the action appears to be due to the diastase destroj'ingr
itself when in solution even at low temperatures such as 14 or 15°C. (See Czapek, Biochemie, vol
i.,p. 345.)

234 Alfred J. Eivart :

The appai-ent accelerating action on malt diastase observed by
Rothera and Greenwood is the result of an experimental error,
and is probably due to the action of the tannic acid of the apple
pulp upon the starch solution, and upon the iodine test employed.

On mixing 1 per cent, solutions of gallotannic acid and starch
a dense white precipitate is thrown down. With more dilute
solutions up to 0.1 per cent, a more bulky and gelatinous precipi-
tate forms. A slight gelatinous precipitate may form even when
0.04 per cent, solution is used. These results are shown even when
filtered starch solution is used, but the settling of the coagulum
or precipitate is slower. The precipitate dissolves on boiling, and
is precipitated on cooling, even in the presence of dilute HCl.
On repeatedly washing the coagulum with water all the tannic
acid can be removed, and it then gives no appreciable blue with
ferric chloride. If strong tannic acid is poured into starch solu-
tion, pasty masses of plastic starch form. On boiling in • w^ater
these break up, but without completely dissolving, especially if
they have been for some time in contact with the tannic acid.
They dissolve, forming a clear solution on warming with dilute
hydrochloric acid, but on cooling a white precipitate of starch is
formed. The coagulum is not strongly attacked by diastase. At
least in experiments lasting over 1-2 days at 30o C, the precipi-
tated starch was still undissolved by 1 per cent, malt diastase, and
gave a strong blue with iodine. After drying in air tlie plastic
masses of precipitated starch became hard and translucent. They
did not dissolve even on prolonged boiling with water, but dis-
solved rapidly on the addition of hydrochloric acid, forming a
clear solution, giving blue with iodine. This " insolul)le " starch
is probably in a different physical condition to the starch grains,
and appears to be very resistant to diastase.

An excess of cohl 2 per cent, tannic acid even precipitates
soluble starch, but the milky liquid becomes clear again at 35° C,
and cloudy on cooling, Avhile the dried gummy precipitate dis-
solves readily in l)oiling water. Gallic acid is much less active
than gallotannit- acid in })rccipit atiiig ordinaiy starcli, and has
no prei'ipitatiiig action on soluble starch, even in toiisiderable
excess. In addition lleintz^ has shown that tannii' acid interferes
with the iodine test for staix'h. 'I'hus. if a drop of iodine solu-
tion is added to a mixture of a 1 ])er icnt. tannic acid and 1
per cent, starch solution, the blue raj. idly fades to purple, and then

t. Jahresb. Asjiltult. Chem,, 1879, p. 499.

Bitter Pit and Sensitivity/ to Poisons. 235

<-olt>ui-k'ss. On a(l(liii<r excess of iodiia-. tlie lilue eolnur is jx-riiia-
lient. As the jii-ecipitattMl stairli is allowed to settle, tlie lifjuid
above <.Mves eoloiii- reactions with iodine veiv like those oecunin;.'
•during diastatic action, and in the piesence of tannic acid, a small
amount of starch is easily overlooked. This is prohahly the ex-
planation of tlie erroneous statement made hy Kothera and Green-
wood, in le^^ard to the accelerating actiini of contact with apple
pul]), on malt diastase. If (».") per cent, solutions of diastase and
tannic acid are mixed and liltered, the filtrate thi'ows down a
white coagiilum with stai'ch solution, which may still lie uiidis-
solveil, even after .'3 days.

The retardation of amylolysis by tannin was first shown l)y
Payen, but the action has been considered to be due to the tannic
.acid precipitating the diastase. (Czapek, Biochemie. vol. 1, ]>.
344). The following experiments are given in full, since they show
the exact action of the tannic acid. Needless to say, before each
sample was taken, the liquid was shaken, so that any precipitated
jstarch Avas evenly distributed, and the proper amount of iodine
was used in eacli case.

Tannic acid produces a bulky white precipitate, with ordi)iary
papain and pepsina pcuci, l)ut pure pancreatin and diastase re-
main clear, or shew only a slight cloudiness. By treatment with
alcohol, and wasliing active diastase can l)e recovered. Gallic acid
does not precipitate any of these ferments appreciably, if clear
solutions are used, and the amount of precipitate formed with
tannic acid appear to depend upon the amount of contamina-
tion with foreign coagulable proteids. The action of the tannic
.acid is f)n the starch rather than upon the diastase, and hence
gallic acid, which is a feebler starch coagulin, affects diastase action
less than tannic acid does.

In the first experiment (A) 5 c.c. of unfiltered 1 per cent, diastase
-was added to each 5 c.c. of filtered 1 per cent, starch solution, and
.■5 c,c. of the solution of gallotannic acid to each mixture. In ex-
periment (B) filtered 1 per cent, diastase was used, and the tem-
perature kept between 26° and 28° C. Portions of each solution
were tested at regular intervals of time with iodine, the colour
sequence as the starch dissolves ))eing l)lue, violet, purple, brown,
yellow, the last being merely due to tlie iodine, and being given as
ni\.

236

Alfred J. Ewart :

Tannic
Acid Solution added.

TABLE A.

Iodine Test After

Stroni

Hours.
; blue.

5 e.c. of b%-

5 c.c. of 1%

5 c.c. of 0.2%
5 c.c. of 0.4%
5 c.c. of 0.008%
5 c.c. of 0.0016%
5 c.c. of 0.0010% •
5 c.c. of distilled

water
5 c.c. of 1% starch •

and
10 c.c. of 2.5% tan--

nic acid

*Equallingr in the total 15 e.c. of solution,
centration of the 5 c.c. added in each case.

Strong^ blue.

Strong blue.

Paler blue.

Purple.

Purple.

Nil, all dissolved.

Nil, all dissolved.

Strong blue.

26 Hours.

- Starch in dense

ppt., liquid
starchless.

- Nearly all starch

pptd.

- Strong blue.

- Violet.

- Nil.

16 Hours.
Strong blue.

- Strong blue.

- Strong blue.

- Paler blue.

- Purple.

- Nil.

- Nil.

Dense residue of
starch ; liquid,
starch free.

, concentration of 1.6°, of tannic acid (J of the con-

TABLE B.

Tannic

Iodine Test After

Acid Solution added. ^^ Hours.

3 Hours.

6 Hours. 1

IS Hours.

30 Hours.

5 c.c. of 1%* - Blue, and white

ppt.

- Blue.

- Blue.

Blue.

- Blue.

5 c.c. of 0.2% - Blue, and gelatinous

- Blue.

- Blue.

Blue.

- Blue.

ppt.

5 c c. of 0.04% - Blue.

- Blue.

- Blue. -

Blue.

- Blue.

5 c.c. of 0.01% - Blue.

- Blue.

- Blue.

Blue.

- Blue.

5 c.c. of 0.005% - Blue.

- Blue.

- Paleblue-

Purple.

- Nil.

5 c.c. of 0.001°/^ - Paler bliie.

- Purple,

- Nil.

5 c.c. distilled - Paler blue.

- Purple.

- Nil.

water.

'Total concentration onetliird of this ii

1 each

case.

Similar results were obtained with Taka diastase, except that
it appeared to be a little less sensitive than the samples of malt
diastase used. Possibly on this account the retarding action of
the 0.02 per cent, solution was not so pronounced, and it required
ivowx 0.2 to 0.08 per cent, solutions to practically arrest the dias-
tatic action. At least much undissolved and condensed starch was
still present in the latter case after 30 hours. A portion of the
difference was due to the higher temperature, and with malt dias-
tase at 350 C, 0.2 to 0.08 per cent, tannic acid was also necessary
to prevent the complete solution of the starch in 30 hours.

To each 5 c.c. of 1 per cent. Taka diastase, and 5 c.c. of 1 per
cent, solution, 5 c.c. of tannic acid were added, and the mixture

Bitter Pit and Sensitivity to Poisons. 237

kept at 350 C. and tested at intervals with diops of iodine solu-
tion. With tlie 1 per cent, and tiie 0.2 per cent, solutions of tannie
acid a large coaguluni of starcli was formed condensing on stand-
ing. With 0.04: per cent, a slight coa<ruluni was formed, later
nearly dissolving.

Tannic Acid. 3 Hours. 9 Hours. 20 Hours. 30 Ifoiu-s.

5 c.c. of 1 %* - Strong blue. - Strong- blue. - Stronof l)lu<'. - Ppt. smaller

but givin<:j

strong blue.

5 c.c. of 0.2% - Strong blue. - Strong blue. - Strong blue. - Ppt. smaller

but giving
strong blue.
5 c.c. of 0.0-1% - Strong blue. - Fairly strong - Purple. - Pale purple.

blue.
5 c.c. of 0.02% - Fairly strong - Fairly strong - Pale purple - Nil.

blue. blue.

5 c.c. of O.OOS% - Paler blue. - Greenish blue. - Nil. - Nil.

5 c.c. of 0.001% - Grreenisli blue.- Greenish blue.- Nil. - Nil.

5 c.c. of water - Greenish blue. - Purple. - Nil. - Nil.

■ 'I'otal concentration one-tliird of this in eacii case.

There are some indications that even after adding 5 c.c. of 0.2"
per cent, tannic acid (making a concentration of 0.07 per cent,
approximately in the whole liquid), a small amount of the preci-
pitated starch was converted into sugar at 35^ C., and there is
slightly less precipitation when the solutions are warmed to 38^ C.
before mixing them if they are mixed at 14^ or 15^ C. Accord-
ingly in the following experiment the solutions were all warmed
to 380 c. before mixing, and kept at that temperature for 2-i
hours. Each tube contained 5 c.c. of 1 per cent, starch, 5 c.c.
of 1 per cent, diastase, and 5 c.c. of tannic acid. The controls
were boiled. The tubes were shaken several times during the 24
hours, and then 10 c.c. of the supernatant liquid tested with
Fehling's solution, using an excess of sodium hydrate. The brown
precipitate dissolves, forming first a green, and then a brown
liquid, and tests showed that even in the presence of tannic acid
small quantities of sugar can be detected. Tannic acid itself gives-
a red precipitate^ with Fehling's solution, if the sodium hydrate ib
not in excess. If the latter is in excess the tannic acid reduction is
separated by a long interval from the sugar reduction, or is
practically arrested. The red precipitates were allowed to settle
for not more than 10 or 15 minutes, filtered rapidly on tared filter
papers, washed, dried and weighed, and the excess weight over the
control is given in the third column of the table.

1. According to Sonnenscheiii, Ding. Polytechii. Jourii., Vol. cclvi., p. 555, 1885, 1 gram CuO =
0.4126 gram tannin and 0.4245 gram dextrose.

238

Alfred J. Eivart.

Concentration of Tannic Acid
in whole solution.

Supernatant
liquid.

Reduction to

Kehling'stest.

Residue.

Iodine Test.

r Unboiled. -
'^•^^°/'" i Boiled con- -

Milky.

- Weak.

Small, bnt

- Strong blue.

(0.00 gram.)

condensed.

Very milky.

- Weak.* -

Small, but

- Strong blue.

I trol.

condensed.

fUnl)oiled. -

1

Clear.

- Slightly -
stronger.

More bulky.

- Strong blue,
slightly

•0.16"/o i

(0.01 gram.)

purplish.

\ Boiled con- -

Milky.

- Weak.

Small, but

- Strong blue.

L trol.

condensed.

f Unboiled. -

1

Clear.

- Distinctly -

stronger.
(0.025 gram.)

Smaller.

- Strong, but
distimctly
purplish

0.033% ^

blue.

Boiled con- -

Milky.

- Weak

Still smaller

- Strong blue.

trol.

L

but more
condensed.

'The diastase used jfave a faint reduction with Fehling's test.

Even at optimal tempei'atures therefore tannic acid distinctly
retards diastatic action in a concentration of 0.0003 to 0.003 per
cent, (only 1-lOth of the starch having dissolved), strongly retards
it in concentrations of 0.003 to 0.06 (l-25th dissolved) and prac-
tically inhibits it in concentrations of 0.33 to 1 per cent.

Tannic acid may therefore be regarded as a " coagulin," or
■*' anti-diastase." Its inhibitory action appeal's to be much more
pronounced at 15-20O C. than at 35^ C. and the average tempera-
ture at which the metabolism of the apple takes place lies within the
former limits, ^sow, P. K. Scott found the sap of pitted Wolsely
apples contained 0.106, and that of clean apples 0.074 of tannic
acid per 100 c.c. of juice. At first sight we might seem to have
here an explanation of tlie non-solution of the starch grains in
bitter pit.

The resistance of apple diastase to tannic acid has, however,
still to be determined. In addition the diastase of the pulp cells
is in their protoplasmic lining, whereas the tannic acid is in the
•cell-sap within. It is only when the protoplasm is killed that tannic
acid penetrates it, and there it comes into contact witli the oxi-
dase ferment, and is oxidized to a brown colour. The absence of
the latter so long as the cell is living shows that tlic diastase and
the oxidase ferments are not in contact witli tannic acid, altliough
the vacuolar membrane separating them may leprescnt a space
of less than a thousandth part of a millimetie. Furtlier there is
no evidence to show that tlie percentage of tannic acid is higher
prior to bitter pit formation, and an increased percentage of
tannic acid often follows as the result of injury or stimulation

Bitter Pit and Sensitivity to Poisons. 2;i9

to a plant tissue withtnit exercising any additional injuiious in-
tlueiu'e.

Any staiH-li gfains. however, \vhieli wei'e extruded into the cell-
sap would l)e protected from diastatic action, and hence it Avas of
interest to deterniine thi'ii- actual position \n l)itter pit cells, and
in those occasional starch-beai-ing cells, which so frequently occur
in healtliy ptdp tissue. Sections of hitter pit and healthy pulp
were stained with iodine, and examined in a horizontal micro-
scope. -After notinu' the position of the starch grains, the stage-
was rotated through ISO^. It is easy to see in tliis way that cer-
tainly 99 per cent, of the starch is in tlie protoplasm. Very
occasionally a large starch grain can be seen to be lying in the
vacuole, and to move when the cells are turned upside down. The
same is shown in carefully teased preparations. In the l)rown
starch l)earing tissue formed by bruising an apple when it is in
the starch stage of development, free starch grains lying in the
vacuole are much commoner, l)ut even here by far the greater
number of the starch grains always remain in the dead proto-
plasm. Any starch grains lying in the vacuole after j^i'olonged
contact with tannic acid would become more resistant to diastatic
action. Probably this is the explanation of the occurrence of occa-
sional resistant grains in the .starch of both normal and bitter pit
pulji. The fact that treatment with dilute hydrochloric acid makes
these grains more readily dissolved by diastase is not neces-
sarily due. as I formerly supposed to be the case, to the removal of
a poison inhibiting ferment action, but is possibly due to the
acid removing the peculiar insoluble or difficultly soluble condition
into which contact with tannic acid throws starch.

T/ie Dldxfdsc Metliod of Deffcfitiri Poisons.

That this method of detecting extraneous poisons in bitter pir
tissue would be a failure might have been predicted from the
foregoing facts. Indeed, since metallic poisons usually combine
with the proteids of the cell, a cell width had just i-eceived enough
to poison it might have little or no available suiplus to poison a
second cell or a solution of diastase.

Cubes of apple pulp weighing 5 grams were floated for two
days on (a) Avater, (b) 1 per 1,000,000 mercuric chloride: (a)
browned on the surface, (b) more deeply, and a duller brown. Each
was then pounded up, 10 c.c. of 0.05 per cent, diastase added
and filtered after each day. 5 c.c. of each filtrate were added to

•240 Alfred J. Ewart .■

10 c.c. of dilute 0.05 per cent, starch solution. In the control
all the starch dissolved at 35o C. in 3 hours, but even after 1
•day abundance of starch was present both in (a) and (b), and a
large coagulum separated out containing nearly all the starch.
After two days the starch was still undissolved, Vjut more reducing
sugar seemed to be present than in the control. The clear liquid
•turned pale yellow with NaHO , and contained tannic acid de-
rived from the apple sap, but a good deal of the tannic acid com-
bines with the proteids of the tissue, or is carried down by the
precipitated starch.

In a similar test there were added to 10 c.c. of 0.5 per cent,
-diastase and 10 c.c. of 0.5 per cent, starch (a) 10 c.c. of distilled
water, (b) 10 c.c. of boiled filtered apple sap, and (c) 10 c.c. of
1 per 1,000,000 HgCU. Both (a) and (c) remained clear, and
the starch dissolved in 3| hours, whereas in (b) a white coagulum
of starch formed which was not entirely undissolved, even after
-3 days at 25° C. The clear supernatant liquid before shaking
gave no reaction with iodine, just as though all the starch had
been dissolved instead of merely the unprecipitated starch.

Similar experiments with equal volumes of solutions of mercuric
•chloride, 0.2 per cent, malt diastase, and 0.5 per cent, starch,
showed that a 1 per 1,000,000 solution of mercuric chloride exer-
-cises no appreciable influence upon the diastase, whereas a 1 per
10,000 solution appeared to stop the diastatic action entirely.

The pulp cells of apples are evidently much more sensitive to
mercuric chloride than is diastase or diastatic action. In bitter
pit formation, however, the arrest of diastatic action comes first,
and the death of the cell follows later. The diastase of apples is
either small in amount, or feeble in activity, as compared with
malt diastase, and the solution of the starch grains in ripening
apples may take not a few hours, but several weeks to complete,
so that a feeble diastatic activity might be sxippressed or retarded
by gradually accumulating traces of poison until the concentra-
tion was reached at which the protoplasm was killed. Under the
conditions of a laboratory experiment where the tests must be com-
pleted in a few hours to a day or so, and comparatively large
amounts of ferments used, the use of diastase would only detect
a ])(iison in tlie ash of bitter pit tissue when present in relatively
huge amount. It would not necessarily detect an amount of
poison sufficient to iidiibit a feeble diastatii' activity, taking nor-
mally days or weeks to be conq)leted. It is also conceivable that
an amount of jxiison insufficient to inhibit diastatic action, or to

Bitter Pit (ind Sensitlc'dy to Polsonf^. 241

kill the cell niifrlit inliihit the production of diastase, and there is
some evidence tu sliow that in certain plants (fungi, etc.), not only
poisons. l)ut also food substances may exercise a regulatory or
inhibitory action upoii the formation of diastase. Dr. White,
however, found diastase to be present at least in the early stages
of bittei- pit. As it is not possilile to detect metallic poisons in
bitter pit tissue l)y the diastase mctlidd. what is needed is a com-
plete exhaustive percentage analysis of the ash of bitter pit tissue,
using large (piantities of material, and iiit'thods of concentration
like those which enable traces of certain metals to be extracted
from their ores. No such analyses have as yet been made, and
they lie more in the province of the chemist than of the plant
physiologist, but the significant fact noted by Mr. P. R. Scott, that
the percentage of ash is higher in bitter pit tissue than in normal
pulp, merits further investigation.

Summary.

In all cases potatoes are less sensitive to i)oisons than apples,
the differences in the resistance varying from 1000 times ('anaes-
thetic), to 8 or 10 times (alkali and copper sulphate). Mercuric
chloride and copper sulphate are about e<|ually poisonous to pota-
toes, and sulphuric acid is only slightly less pf)isonous than lead
nitrate, and is some 50 times as poisonous as is alkali.

As in the case of apples, the sensitivity to poisons is much
greater at high than at low temperatures. Tannic acid precipitates
starch from its solution in water. The precipitate dissolves on
boiling, and forms again on cooling, even in the presence of hydro-
chloric acid. The precipitate can be obtained in gluten-like masses
soluble with difficulty, or imperfectly soluble in diastase, and in
hot water, but readily soluble in dilute hydrochloric acid on boil-
ing. The occasional resistant starch grains found in apples have
possibly been in contact with the tannic acid of the cell-sap. They
will dissolve in diastase after warming with dilute hydrochloric
acid, and then washing well.

The presence of 0.0003 to 0.003 per cent, of tannic acid distinctly
retards diastatic action; 0.003 to 0.06 per cent, strongly retards
it, and 0.33 to 1 per cent, practically inhibits it. This effect is
shown at 35° C, and is still more pronounced below 20c> C. The
cell-sap of apples may contain up to as much as 0.1 per cent, tannic
acid, and bitter pit tissue appears to contain more than normal
pulp. This will protect any starch grains extruded into the cell-

242 Alfred J. Eivart: Bitter Fit.

sap from solution, and in cells bruised while in the starch stage,
will aid in preventing the starch from dissolving. In the bitter
pit cells, however, the starch grains are in the protoplasm, and
so long as the latter is living the tannic acid of the cell-sap is not
in contact with them, or with diastase. If any of the tannic is
present in the protoplasm, it exists in the form of special small
vacuoles, and is also not in contact with the starch or diastase.
It is probably the difficulty of penetration which makes externally
applied tannic acid non-poisonous in dilutions below 1 per 1000.
Diastase solution after prolonged contact with pounded apple pulp
loses its solvent action.

In the presence of tannic acid a small quantity of starch is
easily overlooked by the iodine test, apart from its precipitation.
It was possibly in this way that Rothera and Greenwood obtained
an apparent acceleration of diastatic action after contact with
apple pulp. Their results are therefore of no value so far as the
poisoning theory of bitter pit is concerned. A complete exhaus-
tive numerical analysis of the mineral constituents of bitter pit
tissue in bulk is urgently needed, paying special attention to
metallic elements present in small amount, and this would prob-
ably give definite guidance for further investigation. The nature
of the combinations in whicli the mineral constituents occur will
also be of importance. Thus approximately 1 per cent, of the
ash may consist of oxide of iron- If this were present, either as
the chlorides or sulphates, it would be distinctly poisonous.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES XXIII.

Potatoes halved after four days in 5 per cent, lead nitrate.

a and d, face view, b and c. side view of cut lialf.

Two fragments of skin were removed on c and d, and three larger
ones on a and b prior to immersal.

The poison was absorbed from the surface, but the browning is
deep-seated.

Pioc, K.S. Virtoria, 1911.. PLite XXIII.

[Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.S.) Pt. II., 1914].

Akt. XVI II. — Notes on Aniifcterides, vnth Descriptions of
New Species.

[Part T.]

By EUSTACE W. FERGUSON, M.B., Cii.M.

[Rea<l '.tth October, 1913.]

In the present series of papei's it is my intention to contribute
from time to time such notes on tlie distril)ution, rehUionship and
synonymy of the Australian Amycterids as have come to light too
late for inclusion in the formal revision now lieing published in the
Proceedings of tlie Linnean Society of New South Wales. In re-
vising a group so difficult in many ways as the ground weevils.
one finds as the work progresses many facts becoming evident which
■often throw new liirlit on obscure or neglected features in portions
■of the work already publislied. Also as it became generally known
that I was engaged on the group, collectors from various parts of
Australia have sent me specimens for identification; in tliis
way a large amount of material has passed tlirough my hands,
and new species have accumulated.

In the present paper appear the descriptions of some new species,
belonging chiefl}" to Psalidura and Talaurinus. I had also hoped
to include some notes on the species of Amycterides found in Vic-
toria, Init having recently received a good deal more material form
Victoria. T have not yet been able to examine it all thoroughly, and
must postpone this part of the papei-. It may be said, however,
that though a good numlier of species liave now been described
from Victoria, but little is knoAvn about many of them; even some
•of the commoner species have been only lately described. Of the
fauna of many of the mountain ranges of Victoria, the habitat, pai
excellence, of Fsaliduxi and Talnurinus, practically nothing is
known, and, as species are often strictly local, systematic collect-
ing of the mountain districts will probably bring many new species
to liglit.

PsALiDUHA ^rIRA, var. edenensis, n. var.

^ Of size, form and structure of mira, differing in the abdom-
inal fascicles, being broader and more widely separated.
Dimensions. — J' 21 x 8 mm.
Ifab.—y.^. Wales, Eden (H. J. Carter).

4

244 Eufitace W. Ferguson:

In tlio pcisititm and sliape of the fascicles tliis iiiscet miresponds.
more with P. suhlaevigatn, but the difference in the prothoracic
granules is very marked. /''. mirifica, which I regard as a variety
of P. mira, seems intermediate in respect to the fascicles between
mira and the new variety, otherwise I would have been inclined to
regard edtnensis as worthy of specific rank.

It would be interesting to know whether this species or a closely
allied one extended into Victoria. /'. mira with its varieties
ranges from Sydney to Eden, and does probably extend into tlie
north-east corner of Victoria. The only other species of the
" horned- jaw " group found in Victoria is /'. a pjn'oximata , which
occurs at Buffalo Mountains; but P. carfcri, which is found at Mt.
Kosciusko, might also occur in Victoria.

PSALIDURA TAYLORI, n. Sp.

cT Size small, elongate, subparallel. Black, opaque; sparsely
clothed with minute brownish scales; setae black, fascicles reddish,
anal hair black.

Head convex, rather densely clothed. Rostrum distinctly separate
from head, somewhat dilatate on sides beyond external ridges,
internal ridges subparallel. little convergent, medium notch wide,
lateral sulci long, deep. Eyes ovate. Prothorax (5x5 mm.)
widely dilatate on sides, apical margin with median lobe strongly
produced and ocular lobes definite, collar constriction well marked,
disc depressed in centre, median line evident; closely set with
very small depressed granules each bearing a long seta. Elytra
(8.5 x 6 mm.) evenly, rather strongly, widened from behind shoul-
ders, base moderately arcuate, humeri definite, not greatly pro-
duced ; disc with rows of small foveiform punctures, interstices
first, third, fifth and seventh prominent, costiform, setigerous in
double series; second, fourth and sixth not raised, sparingly
setigerous in single series. Metasternuiu with feeble central im-
pression. Apical segment excavate, preanal fossa deep, occupying
most of excavation; fascicles widely separated (2 mm.), posterior
edge with dense fringe of short, stout hair. Forceps short, stumpy,
apices not meeting, directed backwards, a short knob-like pro-
jection present on inner and anterior aspect concealing the small
laminae; apical tergito strongly bearded between ends of forceps.

? Of a short, obtuse form; protohrax (4.5 x 5.5 mm.) abraded
in middle; elytra (11.5 x 8 mm.) with interstices second, fourth
and sixth more definitely raised, subcostate, not as prominent as
rest. Beneath convex, without excavation.

Nof^s ov Am i/cte rides. 245

iJiiiicnsioiis. — 3 i") X (5 iimi. ; ? 1() x c'^ iiiiii.

Ilab.—^.^. Wales, (iuv Fawkt-s (V . H. Taylor); Guyra (H. J
Carter).

The Guyra speciinens differ in being larger (17 x 7 mm.) and in
having the alternate interstices, second, fourth and sixth, more
raised. (l.*^ x 8 mm.) less obese, the prothora less abraded.

From the dilatate protliorax and the form of the anal excavation
and forceps 1 regard this species as allied to P. sulcipenn/s, but the
elytra] interstices would indicate an approach to the groups with
all the interstices complete.

Is is a very distinct species, and I have much pleasure in dedi-
catiiii;- it to the oi'iginal discoverer — Mr. F. H. Tavlor.

PSALIDURA IRRASA, U. Sp.

i Black, with muddy scales in depressions; setae light brown,
where present moderately long, mostly appearing as if abraded.

Head and rostrum as in P. variolosa. Prothorax (5.5 x 6 mm.)
strongly dilatate on sides, apical lobe sti-ongly produced over head,
discal impression faint; set with small, round, depressed granules,
as if abraded, punctures small, setae absent except near sides.
Elytra (11 x 8 mm.) with rows of shallow transverse foveae, ridges
between not greatly raised, setigerous, not granulate; interstices
finely granulate, the granules round, smooth on top as if abraded,
the puncture small, occluded, not umbilicate. towards side's and on
declivity granules less abraded, setigerous, umbilicate, second,
fourth and sixth interstices in single, third, fifth and seventh in
double series; sides with rounded setigerous, non-umbilicated gran-
ules. Anal excavation wide and deep as in variolosa, fascicles
closer and longer; posterior edge strongly bearded wath black hair
extending across middle, intermedite row of hair black, set close
against posterior row, differently directed — back and down^appa-
rently not extending across middle line. Forceps short, apicus
meeting, laminae obliquely set.

Dimensious. — c7 17 x 8 mm.

Hah.— Kov^eW (J. F. Stephen, per H. J. Carter).

Close to variolosa, but differentiated by the character of the
granules, and by the hair or bristles of the posterior row extending
across the middle line. The anal characters are hard to make out
definitely, but I have not ventured to dissect out my only specimen.

246 Eustace W. Feiyuson:

PSALIDURA INTERMEDIA, 11. sp.

(? Of size and general form of variolosa. J31ack, sparsely clothed
with feeble greyish scales; setae long, dark l>rowii. Fascicles red;
anal hair black and reddisli.

Head and rostiuni as in rartolosa. Prothorax (5 x 6 nun.) ain}>li-
ate, median lobe strongly produced, collar impression feeVjly
marked, closely set with small, I'ovind, strongly setigerous grannies,
not abraded nor umbilicate, rather smaller in centre. Elytra
(10.5 X 7.5 mm.) with rows of shallow transverse foveae, intervening
ridges feebly granulate, setigerous; interstices with rounded, strongly
umbilicate, setigerous granules, those nearer base feebly flattened,
in single series on second, fourth and sixth, tending to duplication
in centre, in double series on third, fifth and seventh. Sides with
setigerous non-umbilicate granules. Anal excavation wide and
deep; fascicles large, closer together than in ir/Ieo.ri ; posterior
edge strongly beaded with dark hair or bristles, extending across
middle line, intermediate row of a bright red colour, set farther
away from posterior row than in rnr/olosa, and continued across
middle line; apical tergite bearded. Foixeps short, apices acute,
touching; laminae obli(]uely set.

$ Like variolosa, ( j ).

Dimensions. — cT J.7 x 7.5 mm. ; ? 19 x 8 mm.

Hah. — Queensland, Stanthorpe, Dalveen (H. J. Carter and T.
O. Sloane).

The arrangement of tlie anal hair is a bit difficult to make out,
the intermediate row appears to be directed inwards and somewhat
forwards until on a level with the fascicles on each side, thence the
bristles are continued in an arc parallel with the posterior edge, and
continuous across the middle line. It seems closest to /'. irilcoxi,
but is a larger species, in general appearance more rcsenililing P.
variolosa. The distinctions between the species of the /'. irilcoxi
group may be tabulate<l as follows : —

HO (t)3) Klytral interstices finely and distinctly i^rannlate.
61 (62) Snpramunary tufts (intermediate row) reddisli.

a. Intermediate row not continued aciv^ss middle line.

aa. Bristles continued iutoss middle lin

/'. irilroxi. MnL-\.

I', uitennedid, n.sp.
(52 (»)1) Intermediiite row of lirisflos Mark.

1). Posterior vow of bristles not continuous across middle line.

P. vafioliisti. h'cr;;-.
bl). Posterior row continuous across middle lini'.

P. irrasa, n.sp.
<)3 (OO) Elytral interstices costate.

P. hreviformis, ¥erg.

Notes on A,n;/rtrri,h-s. 247

PSAMDLKA IIKLMSI, 11. Sp.

(^ Elliptiful L'loiij^att'. size lar^w Black, opafiuc; in (le])rt'ssions
with sparse, iiimldy (■lnttiiii<r ; sctar iiKpdnatL'ly l(iii<^-, (lark-l)r()\vii.
almost black; fascicles reddish.

Head convex, rather closely setigern-pinuiatf. luistruni as in
P. moiit/cohi. Protliorax (G x G.5 mm.) rotuiidate, mrdiaii lobe
well defined, rollar const lictioii aiul median line faint hut nace-
able; closely set with small, round, set i-^ei-ous yiunules, rather
finer in centre; sides >:ranulaie. Elytra (U x S.") mm.) gently
widened <in sides from liehind shoulders td heyniid middle, apex
soinewliat alniiptly rounded, mucronate, base widely, not deeply,
arcuate; humeral angles out-turned nodulifoim ; with rows of
small transverse closely-placed foveae, intrastrial lides setigerous,
hardly granulate; interstices somewhat raised, fourth rather less
so, all continuous throughout, set with small black strongly set-
igeroiis granuh's in doui)le series, single on portion of fourtli.
Metasternuiu widely concave, sides almost on level with middle
coxae; anal excavation deep, wide, reaching to anterior margin,
preanal fossa hidden with force]is in position ; fascicles small,
moderately separated. Forceps short, apices obtuse, hardly meet-
ing; laminae slightly bent inwards, apices meeting, broad at base,
anterior and posterior edges straight and parallel for abont two-
thirds of length, thence posteri<u' edge changing direction back-
wards as well as downwards, and anterior edge continued back to
form an obtusely pointed apex. Apical tergite strongly bearded.

5 Differs in usual manner; fifth segment with feeble median
longituilinal impression, sublaevigate.

/J/i)/f/isif)/i>i. — c? 21 X S.T) mm; 2 21 x 8.5 mm.

//r?/>.— Victoria, Benalla (1{. Helms); National Museum. Mel-
bourne.

In general appearance close to /'. nionficola, but separated by the
form of the laminae. In inonficoJa the edges of these are sub-
parallel throughout and the apex iiroadly rounded; in m/rahiinda
ioviu of the laminae. In nioiit iroJa the edges of these are sub-
triangle.

1 have much pleasure in dedicating this new species to Mr. R.
Helms, who kindly placed him s{)ecimens at my disposal.

T.\i,.\ri{ixLs coxFrsrs. n. sp.
<r Of a narrow, elongate form. Black, with evidence of fairly
dense greyish subpubescence in parts, this mainly removed from
dorsal surface of elytra. Setae light brown in colour.

248 Eustace W. Ferguson:

Head separately convex from rostrum. Rostrum flattened above,
the median area and sublateral sulci but little depressed; a deep
semicircular sulcus behind apical plate; external margin of dorsum
presenting a thin edge, not raised into a ridge, with a feeble
sinuation concave outwards in front of base; internal ridges strongly
raised above general surface, long, convergent, but not meeting,
median area feebly depressed between the ridges, with a short, ill-
defined median carina in front. Scrobes looking somewhat upward
as well as out, posteriorly widened, but not reaching eye. Scape
long, modei-ately tliickened. Prothorax (3.5 x 4.5 mm.) evenly,
moderately strongly rounded on sides, ocular lobes feeble, disc with
ill-defined subapicial constriction ; set with moderately large, con-
tiguous, rounded granules, somewhat irregular in size, each bear-
ing a long seta and tending to leave median and sublateral lines
free from granules. Elytra (10 x 5.5 mm.) elongate, little widened
posteriorly, base feebly arcuate, humeri evident but not produced.
Disc with rows of small open foveiform punctures, each subtended
by a single seta ; interstices definitely though not greatly raised, set
Avith small subobsolete granules in single series, setae long, directed
backwards, the Avliole sculpture somewhat confused. Beneath with
small scattered setae, no median vitta; intermediate segments mode-
rately long, fifth segment not excavate, with narrow transverse
sulcus at extreme apex, not extending the widtli of segment. Legs
simple, femora not ridged beneath.

? Similar but more robust, fifth segment with shallow oval
impression near apex.

Dimensions. — 3" 15 x 5.5 mm. ; ? IT x 7.5 nun.

/M/>.— \.S. Wales. Carah (S., D. Wel)b), Moree (A. M. Lea),
Narrabri (F. Musgrave).

A distinct species, not close to any previously described. In
general appearance it resembles T. sfranf/i/hitiis, Blackb., but that
species has a differently sculptured rostrum. In all the specimens
in my collection the clothing is reduced to small patches on sides
and declivity, but specimens in Mr. Lea's lolliHtion liave the whole
surface almost densely clothed.

I cannot at present state its true position in the genus, the
number of granulate forms discovered since my table was published
suggest that the grouping suggested therein requires modification.
At present, and until material is availal)le from the more inland
parts of Australia, particularly S.W. Queensland. I think it inad-
visable to attempt such revision. In the characters of the rostrum
this species suggests a rclationsliij) to 7\ rnriei/afiis, .\Iacl., which
is found in similar country.

^otes on Amycterldefi. 249

Talaihims al.\ti(;oh\is, n. sji.
(? Small, elongate, subpaiallel. Black, densely clothed with
grey and silvery subsetose puljesconce (hardly scales), the prothorax
trivittate, the elytra obscurely maculate; the head densely clothed
-nith yellow. Setae light brown.

Head convex, separately so from rostrum, forehead obliquely
rugulose on each side near base of rostrum; external rostral ridges
not raised, the margins of dorsum divergent posteriorly with feel)ly
sinuous outline; internal ridges prominent, little convergent,
oblicjuely rugulosely punctate; median area moderately depressed
between internal ridges, the middle feebly raised and subcarinate
Serobes rather strongly curved. Antennae with scape rather short,
strongly and sinuously curved backwards, incrassate and dilatate
towards extremity, the innermost portion narrow, forming short
peduncle. Protliorax (.j.o x 4.5 mm.) moderately and evenly
rounded on sides, apical margin rather feebly prf)duced aljove,
ocular lobes feeble; disc closely set with small depressed setigerous
granules, for the most part rounded, but in the baso-lateral quad-
rants of disc showing feeble tendency to run in transversely curved
row's. Elytra (8x5 mm.) elongate, little widened, base feebly
arcuate, humeri marked, slightly advanced; with rows of small shallow
transverse foveae obscured by clothing, alternate interstices slightly
raised, feebly granulate but strongly setigerous in single series,
■occasionally duplicated, second and fourth interstices not raised,
marked by feeble row of setae. Beneath without median vitta, with
obsolete scattered setigerous punctures, fifth segment depressed in
middle two-fourths, the depression bounded on each side by a
strong carina extending from the anterior margin a little more
than half the length of the segment. Legs simple.

$ Similar to c? , but more ovate in outline, transverse arrange-
ment of prothoracic granules more evident, beneath gently convex,
without- depression on fifth segment.

Ditnensio7is. — c? 13 x 5; J 12 x 4.5 nnu.

//«/>.— N.S. Wales, Garah (S. D. Webb), .\Ioree (A. M. Lea);
S. Queensland, Darling Downs (Lau.).

Closely allied to T. clnriconiift, but readily distinguished by the
prothoracic granules smaller, not flattened or tessellated as in that
species.

Talaurinus vitticoi.lis, n. sp.
2 (General facies that of 7'. t/riseiis, Macl. Black, opaijue;
a-atlier sparsely clothed with exceedingly minute, <lark subt^etoKe

250 Eustace W. Ferguson :

scales, with lono^er white subsetose pubescence forming three longi-
tudinal vittae on prothorax (the middle one only evident at base),
an interrupted line along edge of elytra, and fairly densely distri-
buted on legs, w'ith yellow subpubescence at sides of prothorax and
elytra, on sterna and abdominal segments, forming a yellow patch
in middle and at each side of segments, these being united along
the top of each segment. Setae black.

Head continuous alxtve with rostrum, densely clothed except along
narrow median line, with scattered decumbent setae. Rostrum
excavate, median area depressed, sulcata at bottom; external ridges-
somewhat convergent, width across base of ridges much less than
width of rostrum; internal I'idges moderately long, slightly con-
vergent. Scrobes simple, widely open posteriorly. Scape mode-
rately long and robust. Eyes subovate. Prothorax (3 x 4 mm.)
subcylindrical, very little widened, apical margin feel)ly sinuate;
disc with fairly definite sul)apical constriction and moderately
impressed median line; with small, not very prominent granules
somewhat irregularly disposed, with slight tendency to run to-
gether, granules more distinct on sides. Elytra (10 x 6.5 mm.)-
strongly widened on sides, apex moderately strongly produced, base
gently arcuate, humeri marked but not produced ; with rows of
obscure punctures, the first, third and fifth interstices feebly raised,
the others not at all, with no evident granules, but with numerous
fine setae more or less irregularly disposed in double or triple series
on raised interstices, tlie whole sculpture obscure and indefinite,
more obscure, beneath convex without impressions.

Dimensions. — $ 15.5 x 6.5 nun.

Hah. — S. Queensland, Brisbane, Stradbrooke Island (Queensland
Museum and R. Illidge).

A typical member of Group IV., second portion of group with
humeral angles not produced ; it differs from all in the clothing and
more obscure sculpture, its nearest ally being T. griseim. Tlie
elytral sculpture is very indefinite, the rows of depressions, whicii
are more of the nature of shallow foveae, being very liaid to trace;
the arrangement of the fine setae is also confused. I liavc not seen
a male, but in tlie allied speeies, T . (/riscus, the difference in sex is
not marked.

TAL.'VrHINL-S .\N(!rSTU8, U. sp.

J l''oriu elongate, narrow. Black, rather densely clothed with
minuir muddy subsetose seales ; l)eneath with median yellow vitta ;.
setae dark ludwn.

Notes on Amycterides. 251

Head continuous witli rostrum in same plane above, densely
clothed and witli numerous stout decumbent setae. Rostrum mode-
rately loiii,', little excavate except at apex, tUv mrdian aiisi nannw,
rather sti(.n<ily depressed, external ridges parallel, iuteinal long,
prominent, ilmufili less so tlian external, rather feebly convergent,^
sublateral sulci long. Sci()l)es open posteriorly, extending not
quite to eye. Eyes ovate. Piotiiorax (."5 x i nmi.) evenly rounded,
but not greatly ampliate on sides, apical margin with rather
strongly marked postocular sinuation ; closely set with hue, soine-
wdiat depressed grantUes, becoming obsolescent along middle line,.
sides granulate. Elytra (10 x 5.5 mm.) elongate, not greatly
ampliate on sides, base subtruncate, humeri hardly marked. Disc
with series of small, practically obsolete punctures closely set ;.
sutural interstice rather feebly raised, stronger at base, with obso-
lete granules, second with five or six small separate tubercles, obso-
lescent anteriorly, more evident and subconical on declivity, ex-
tending tti apex, fourth with none or single one near middle, third
and fifth each with a continuous row of small tubercles, obsolete
and tending to i-un together anterioiiy. beeoniing more marked and
subconical po.steriorly, sixth with row of about six subconical,
moderately closely set. not reaching base oi' apex. Sides with rows
of obsolete punctures, interstices not tuberculate. Beneath flat-
tened, intermediate segments rather long, fifth with obscure mesial
depression. Anterior femora not rigid. $ Similar to male, but
more ovate in outline, median ventral vitta less marked, sculpture
more obscure, beneath convex without impressions.

Difueiisinns. — d 15 x 5.5 mm. ; ? 14x5 mm.

//ah. — Victoria. Glenample (T. O. Sloane). Other specimens
without exact locality.

In my table of the genus would l)e placed in group Vlll., and with
T. .«)J,rnnis. from which it differs inter alia in shape, tubercles
and uiider-surface. It is perhaps most nearly allied to 7'. Inirf-
jj/ialiis. l)ut tlie anterior femora are not rigid beneath, and it is it
smaller, narrower and much more obscure-looking species. Al-
though apparently common in Victoria, this species seems to have
been previously overlooked.

T.vr>AUUIXL"S TUHNKHI. n. Sp.
<? Oblongate-ovate. convex. Black, practically witiimit clothing
except a small patch of setose pubescence in the middli' of each of
the two first abdominal segments; setae black, minute, for the most
part abraded.

252 Eustace W. Fen/itson:

Head strongly convex, rather feebly depressed in front; with a
few obsolete punctures. Rostrum short, excavate, external ridges
rounded across, subrugosely punctate, somewhat convergent pos-
teriorly; internal ridges prominent, convergent; median area
strongly depressed, sublateral sulci long, deep, connected at base by
^-ransvere basal sulcus. Sulci well defined posteriorly; eyes ovate.
Prothorax (4.5 x 5.5 mm.) rather strongly dilatate on sides, apex
somewhat produced , above, ocular lobes feeble; disc with br(?ad,
shallow subapical transverse impression, median line traceable;
<^losely set with numerous small granules feebly depressed above, as
if slightly abraded. Elytra (9.5 x 7.5 mm.) rather widely dilatate
posteriorly, apex strongly and abruptly rounded, base feebly
-arcuate, angles marked but not produced ; with rather deep longi-
tudinal striae formed of small closely set transverse foveae, the
intervening ridges depressed, but running up on to the interstice
on eithei- side; interstices strongly raised, the .second tlie most
prominent, the first, second and third definitely costiform, the com-
ponent granules abraded to base level, the remaining interstices not
so evidently costiform, the granules, tliough showing a tendency
towards abrasion, small and distinct, on the fifth and sixth in
double series. Beneath, intermediate segments short; fifth with
extensive shallow depression reaching to anterior margin in middle
and extending to postero-lateral angles, also with a deep, slightly
transversely oval median fossa situated near posterior margin, a
blunt tubercle present at each side of, and propecting into, fossa,
situated a little neaier posterior than anterior margin, and nearer
to side than to corresponding tul^ercle. Anterior femora not
i-idged, tibiae simple.

Dimensions. — c? 15 x 7.5 mm.

Hah.—^.ii. Wales, Mt. Kosciusko, 6000 ft., 5th March, 1915.

For the opportunity of describing this species I am indebted to
Dr. A. Jeffries Turner, wlio took the unique specimen on Mt.
Kosciusko in March, 1912.

The species forms an interesting addition to the morbillosus
group, group xiii. of my revision. From the other members it is
readily distinguished by the costiform character of its elytral sculp-
tuif. In my table it might be placed next T. melnncholicus. Lea.
iuid the table Avould then read : —

116 (111) Third elyti-al interstice costiform.

a. Second and f'oiirtli interstices ol)Solete.

T. melancholicus, Lea.
aa. All inter.sticcs strongly developed.

T. turneri, n.sp.

Notes on Aiuycterides. 253

Though I have iihicid this ltuiij) among the tuberculate species,
it is evidently ii<it iinah at home tliere, both this species and
nielancholicus being strongly costate species, and yet they cannot be
separated from their congeners of the same group.

The distribution of these two species, one found at Mt. Kosciusko,
the other extending from Mt. Macedon into S. Australia, would
suggest tho possil)ility of otlicr foinis occurring in the intervening
jirea.

Talauuixis cahinatus, n. sp.

d Clo.sely resembling 2\ costipennis; elongate, ovate. Black
subnitid, practically without clothing above, a small patch of yellow
scales in middle of each ventral segment.

Head convex, external rostral ridges continued back into head,
forehead somewhat concave between the ridges. Rostrum narrow,
internal ridges long, rather feebly convergent, sublateral sulci and
jiiedian area narrowly and deeply depressed, rostrum deeply ex-
cavate in front. Eyes subrotundate. Scape moderately long,
strongly incrassate, scrobes simple, not quite reaching eyes. Pro-
.thorax (3.5 x 4 mm.) gently rounded on sides, apical margin trun-
cate above, postocular sinuation strongly marked; disc with minute
granules closely set, smaller and more depressed than in costijjennis ;
sides with similar granules. Elytra (10 x 6 mm.) moderately
strongly dilate on sides, apex moderately produced mucronate, base
rather feebly arcuate, humeri thickened, somewhat noduliform, not
gieatly produced. Disc with rows of subquadrate foveae becoming
smaller and less distinct posteriorly, arranged in double rows, the
second and fourth interstices being absent, outer row in single
series, the sixth interstice present ; interstices one and three costi-
form, three particularly prominent and carinate, five costiform
showing evidences of granularity, sixth interstice with similar but
more evident granularity; sides with irregular punctiform foveae,
interstices granulate. Beneath concavo-convex, apical segment with
shallow, ill-defined subquadrate impression occupying middle two-
fourths. Legs simple, femora not ridged or dentate. $ Rather
larger and more obese, prothorax (4 x 4.5 mm.) and elytra (lU x
€.5 mm.) with similar sculpture, the fifth elytral interstice showing
jSk greater tendency to granularity. Beneath convex, fifth segment
with shallow rounded impression at apex.

Dimensions. — <? 15 x 6 mm. ; J 1(5 x 6.5 mm.

Hah. — Victoria, Portland (J. Dixon), Nelson (Blackburn). Type
in author's collection.

254 Eustace W. Fcryusoii:

Closely allied to T. cosfipefm/s, and with similar minutely granu-
late prothorax, Ijut with different elytral foveae. These are
arranged as in T. cost i pennies, in two double rows and one single-
row, the second and fourth interstices, but not the sixth, being
absent. In the rugifer group all these three interstices are absent,
and there are in consequence three double row's of foveae, the lateral
boundary being formed by the seventh interstice and not by th&
-sixth, as in cnri/Kifiis and co'^f ipc/uiis. The foveae approach some-
wliat to the JiicricoUls type, l)ut are not so large nor so clearly
defined as in that species; in tlie median striae they are subquad-
rate, and while well defined above and below, are less definitely
separated laterally from the adjacent foveae in the same stria; in
the more lateral rows and posteriorly they are smaller and less
defined. I am indeljted to Mr. J. Dixon for my specimens of this
interesting species. So far as I have seen the costate group does
not extend farther to the west than the habitat of this species.

SCLKKOKIXUS AJlYCTEnOIDE.S, n. sp.

3 Elongate ovate, moderately robust. Black, subopaque. rather
densely clotlied with minute dull golden squamose scales, lower
margins with white scales, with strong black median ventral vitta ;
setae black.

Head continued into rostrum in same plane above, foi-ehead
bounded on either side by the continuation back of the external
rostral ridges, feebly convex in middle, moderately strongly im-
pressed on either side of convexity, these impressions continuous
with basal sulci of rostrum. Rostrum short, external ridges sub-
parallel, plane in profile, continued into forehead, the point of
junction marked l)y a feeble constriction; median area feebly
carinate, lateral sidci shallow, only marked, foveiform, at base.
Scrobes deep, en<ling distant to eye. Eyes oval. Prothorax
(4x5 nun.) rather strongly Hiiqiliate, apical margin feel)ly trisinu-
ate, ocular lobes niodei-ately marked, subapical impression most
marked near sides, median and sul)lateral lines not impressed, but
with ratliei' fewer tubei'cles; disc witli moderately large, rounded
tubercles, not closely set. exce})t at hiteral margins; sides with
tuljercles obsolescent, not extending to coxae. Elytia (Id x (> mm.)-
rather strongly wi(K'ned on sides, apex al)rui)tly i-ounded. almost
i-ectangulai-, l>as(( gently ai-cuiite. luinieri not indduced. with out-
wardly diri'cted tulxTcle; dise with srrial puiu-turi's obsolete, striae
indicated by small setigerous granules; sutural interstiee with fine-

iV'u/e.s oil Amijcferides. 266

jrraiiuk's, stronger at Ijuise. st'Loiid interstice not raised, with tliree
or four isolated, widely se})arated sulnjonical tubercles, third in-
terstices tendiiif; to converge on declivity, with closely placed
transverse tubercles occupying the width of the interstice, sixteen
to eighteen in number, stronger and almost imbricate posteriorly,
4;;nding half way down declivit}', fourth not raised, without
tubercles. Hftli with nine or ten tubercles similar to those on third,
•extending from humcii to lieyond middle, sixth witli five nioi'e
isolated subconic-al tuhtTt-les extending from in fi'ont of middle
half-way (hjwn declivity. Sides with tubercles flattened, not raised.
Neutral segments concave on either side of median hirsute vitta,
<;oncavity most strongly marked and forming deep depression on
fifth segment. Femora not ridged, tibiae simple.

2 Closely reseml)ling J" in general appearance, elytra more
evenly rounded on sides, apex rather strongly emarginate, with
■dentiform projection on either side at level of third interstice,
tubercles slightly more numerous and rather more strongly trans-
verse; beneath gently convex, intermediate segments with faint
indications of a median vitta, segments longitudinally scarred oi-
impressed, apical segment with an oval depression at apex.

Dimensions. — <?■ 16 x 6 mm. ; $ 17x7 mm.

Hah. — Victoria, Portland (T. G. Sloane and J. Dixon).

Another female measures 19 x 8 mm.

A thoroughly distinct species belonging to the sabulosus group,
hot not close to any other known to me. A superficial resemblance
to the genus Amycterus has suggested its specific name.

[Proc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.S.), Pt. II., 1914].

Ak'I'. XIX. -On the Origin and Relation f>]iip of some
Victorian Igneous Rocks.

By H. S. summers, D.Sc.
(Lecturer and Deinon.strator in Greology, Univei'sity of Melbonrne).

[Read 9th October. 1913 J.

Contents.

I. Introduction.
II. Victorian Igneous Series.

(a) Macedon Dacite-Granodiorite Series.

(b) Victorian Upper Palaeozoic Series.

(c) Lilydale Devonian Series.

(d) Macedon Kaiuozoic Series
III. Differentiation of Victorian Series.

(a) Macedon Dacite-Granodiorite Series.

(b) Victorian Upper Palaeozoic Series.

(c) Macedon Kainozoic Series.

(d) Lilydale Devonian Series.

IV. Relation of Igneous Rocks to Earth-Movements in Victoria.

(a) Heathcotian iSeries.

(b) Upper Palaeozoic Series.

(c) Kainozoic Alkaline and Calcic Series.
V. Petrographic Regions.

\ I. The Origin of Victorian Magmas.
VII. Summary.
VIII. References.

I. Introduction.

During the past several years I have been engaged in conjunction
with Professor Skeats in making a careful study of the igneous rocks
of the Macedon District. An account of our work in this area has
recently been published as a Bulletin of the Geological Survey of
Victoria (19), but since that paper went to the press I have continued
to work on the question of relationship and differentiation of the
two igneous series which are so well developed in the neighbourhood
of Macedon and Woodend. This has led on to the study of the
relationship of the Macedon dacites and granodiorites to rocks of
other areas in Victoria, and the evidence that has been collected
seems to have considerable hearing on certain aspects of modern
petrology.

The most important point to be raised is the relationship of the
so-called alkaline and sul)-alkaline or calcic groups of rocks to one
another. Hai-ker (4) !)elieves that these two branches of igneous
rocks are (juite distinct from one another, and that the former

Victorian Igneous Hocks. 257

branch is fundamentally associated with tectonic movements charac-
teristic of the Atlantic coast type, and the latter is associated with
the Pacific coast type of earth movements. Evidence will he ad-
vanced in opposition to this belief, and to show that in Victoria the
non-calcic granites are genetically related to the calcic dacites and
granodiorites.

Professor Skeats and the author have already expressed tlie Ijelief
that the alkaline rocks of the Macedon District represent a frac-
tional differentiation product from the calcic basalt magma.

If these two contentions be upheld, then it follows that the correla-
tion of alkaline rocks with subsidence due to faulting and the cor-
relation of calcic rocks with folding, due to lateral compression, is
open to grave objection.

The differentiation of rock magmas will be discussed at some
length, but more with the view of determining the relationships of
the end products to one another than to attempt any explanation of
the means whereby these end products are derived from the parent
magma.

II. Victorian Igneous Rocks.

(a) T/ie Macedon Granodiorite-dacite Ser/e.s.

In tiie Macedon District there are extensive developments of rocks
belonging to two very distinct cycles of igneous activity. The older
of these series has been shown (19) to consist of dacites, granodiorites
and granodiorite porphyries. The dacites were in part extrusive
and in part intrusive, and were closely followed by the intrusion of
the granodiorites and granodiorite porphyries. It is quite impos-
sible to definitely fix the age of these rocks, as they were intruded
through and into rocks of Ordovician age, and are overlain in part
by sands and lavas of Kainozoic age. However, for reason given
elsewhere it is highly probable that these rocks are of Devonian age.

(b) Victorian Vyinr Palaeozoic Sei-ies.

Dacites similar in every respect to those of the Macedon District
occur in the Dandenong Ranges and in the neighbourhood of
Healesville. Mineralogically and texturally these dacites are entirely
comparable with those of Macedon. Phenocrypts of plagioclase,
hypersthene, biotite, and occasionally quartz, are set in a granu-
litic groundmass consisting mainly of quartz and felspar, with some
biotite, ilmenite and minor accessories. Naturally there are textural
variations, but the above brief description can be applied to tlic
majority of sections examined from Macedon, Dandenong Ranges,
and Healesville.

258 H. IS. Siirmnera:

Northward from Healesville in the Cerberean Range, and in the
northern portion of the Strathbogie Range, a rather coarser rock
is the prevailing type. Taking the occuri-ence at the road-metal
(^uarry at Violet Town as a type of the Strathbogie rocks, the fol-
lowing brief description may be given here.

This rock consists of phenocrysts of plagioclase (acid labradorite).
abundant biotite, sparing hypersthene with a moderal)le auifiunt of
■quartz in a granulitic groundniass similar in evciv respect to that
describetL above as uccui-ring in the dacite, except tliat it is some-
Avhat coarser in grain. The phenocrysts aie distinctly larger than
those found in the dacite, and there is a largei- amount of free
quartz present. Garnets are ncjt unconunon throughout this area.
An analysis of the material from the Violet Town (juai'iy ^vas made
■a few years ago for me by Mr. G. Ampt, Init has so fai- not been
published. This analysis, which is given later, compares faii'ly
•closely with those of the dacites, but as was expected from the micro-
scopical examination, it shows a decidedly higher percentage of
silica.

The chemical and mineralogical characters of this rock are suffi-
ciently closely allied to those of the Macedon dacites to cause us to
regard them as genetically related to one another.

The southern portion of the Str.athbogie Ranges consists of a
granitic rock which provisionally may be lefei'i-ed to as adamellite.
Frequently there is no hard and fast line of demarkation between
the (juartz-poiphyrite of the northern poition and the adamellite
of tho southei-n. To the soiitliwai'd the quartz porpliyrite liecomes
much coarser in grain, and might well be desci'ibed as adamellite
po)-phyry, and in places passes imperceptibly into adamellite. Xoar
Euroa tlio junction is more marked, as a fairly broad area of eveii'
grained aplitu is found separating the adamellite porphyry from
the adamellite. An examination of the junction of this aplitii'
i-ock with the porphyry shows that the aplite is intrusive into the
lattei-, as veins from the former can easily be traced running out
fi-om tho main mass into the adjoining ])ori)liyry. The relations
of the a))lite to the adamellite are not so clear, but apparently the
ajilite is also inti'usivo into the adaiiu'lliti'. The inference I make
from a study of this held is that the iiuartz porpliyrite and adamel-
lite porphyry are the oldei' I'ocks, and that as in the case of the
Macedon and other dacite areas, the granitic rock was subsequently
intruded. The difference noted l)etween tlie contact in the dacite
areas and in this area may be due to the fact that the dacite was
largely effusive, whereas the field evidence and microscopical

Victortiin Igneous Jiocks. 259

fliurac'ter uf tlie uortlifrn Suatlil)ugie rucks tends trt sliow that they
were entirely intrusive in cliaructer. One might picture first an
intrusion of the porphyry, followed at a short interval by a more
deep-seated intrusion of adamellite. Subsequent cooling and con-
traction left an opening at the junction for the intrusion of the
still molten, somewhat more acid residuum. Except for a slight
schistocity there is very little evidence of contact metamorphism in
the porpliyry. such as has been noted at Macedon, Belgrave and
elsewhere in the dacite. This might be explained by the fact that
the temperature of the aplite at its intrusion would be relatively
low. and the resultant metamorphism would be almost negligible.

Thu adamellite of the- St rathbogies can be traced continuously
from the neighbourhood of Seymour to tlie Broken River, near
Xillahcootie. I have shown (22) that during the ascent of Mount
Samaria, in this neighbourhood, granite, granite porphyry and
quartz porphyry are successively met wnth, and there is little doubt
that the three types belong to the one intrusion, the structural
variation being due to the different pressures under which the rocks
ci-ystallised. The above rocks would be better described as adamel-
lite, adamellite porphyry and quartz porphyrite. Eastward from
Mount Samaria the prevailing type is a quartz porphyrite similar
to that found at the summit of the mount.

The granular groundmass so typical in the dacites and the
Strathbogie quartz porphyrite is generally aVjsent in the Mount
Samaria and Tolmie porphyrites, its place being taken by a fine-
grained cryptocrystalline aggregate.

Hypersthene is absent in most sections examined, but several
sections of the rock from Burn's Track, near Tatong, showed this
mineral, and in these sections the granulitic groundmass was pre-
sent. The field evidence shows that the quartz porphyrites of the
Tolmie Highlands and of the Strathbogies belong to the one great
period of intrusion, and this is supported by the general similarity
of the micro-structure of the rocks in the two areas. This relation-
ship has been given in some detail because the age of the dacites
and allied rocks largely hinges on the evidence obtainable in this
area.

The field evidence in the Macedon District shows that the dacites
are post Upper Ordovician, and are younger than the Kainozoic
igneous rocks of the area. The dacites of the Dandenong Ranges
and Healesville are post-Silurian. The Strathbogie and Tolmie
adamellites and quartz porphyrites are intruded into the Silurian,
and these rocks in the southern portion of the Tolmie area ar^

5

260 //. 6'. Savivier.s:

overlain by the Maiistield sandstones. Tliere is some little (lou])t as
to the age of these sandstones, as McCoy (11) described tliem as
equivalent to the Old Red sandstone, hut latei- Woodward {2-t) has
placed them in the Lower Cai-boniferous. In any case, however, the
age of these rocks in the north-east of Victoria is confined to fairly
narrow limits. They are post-Silurian and pre-Lower Carbon-
iferous, i.e., they aie almost certainly Devonian. Enormous earth
movements marked tlie opening of the Devonian in Victoria, and
there is no evidence of intense earth movement in Middle and Upper
Devonian, so that the inference is that the intrusion of these igneous
rocks accompanied these Lower Devonian eartli movements, and
consequently are of Lower Devonian age.

The closely-marked similarity between the mineralogical and
micro-structural features of the dacites and the quartz porphyrites
lead one to the conclusion that they belong to the one great period
of igneous activity, so that the dacites and grano-diorites of
Macedon, Dandenong and Healesville, in the absence of other
evidence, may be classed as Lower Devonian.

Dr. Howitt (7) has shown that the Snowy River porphyries are
Lower Devonian in age, so that there is a strong probability that
the dacites and Snowy River Porphyries are genetically related.
Unfortunately the Snowy _River Porphyries cannot be included in
this discussion, as no analyses of these rocks have been made.

In Central Victoria are numerous occurrences of granite rocks,
and there range from granodiorite through adamellite to normal
granite.

Mr. Stillwell (20) has described the granitic rock of Broadmead<nvs
as adamellite, and gives an analysis by Mr. H. C. Richards of a
specimen from Gellibrand Hill. Professor Skeats (16) has described
the rock from Mount Eliza, in the Mornington Peninsula, as a
grano-diorite, and gives an analysis of the rock estimated by means
of Rosival's method. The large mass of granitic rocks extending in
a rude semi-circle to the north of Castlemaine and Maldon contains
various types, but that from the Harcourt tjuarries is on the border
line between the adamellites and granodiorites. An analysis of this
rock Avas made some few years ago by Mr. C Ampt, and is given
later.

North-west of Bacchus Marsh, near Ingliston, is an intrusion of
adamellite (provisional name). This has been analysed by Mr. A.
(i. Hall at the Mines Department Laboratory, and the analysis will
be given later.

Victorian Igneous Rocks. 261

Sections of the granitic rocks near Bulla show that tliese rocks
are at the alkalic end of the granodiorites.

Professor Skeats (17) has described the rock from Station Peak,
in the You Yangs, as a granite containing anorthoclase.

Exceedingly similar in the hand specimen and under the micro-
scope to the Station Peak granite, but somewhat finer in grain, is
the granite from the Dog Rocks near Geelong.

Microscopical examination shows tliat the rocks from Cape
Woolamai, Gabo Island, and Mt. Bviffalo are granites, and are easily
•distinguishable from the granodiorites of Central Victoria. This
difference in the microscopial characters led to the belief that there
were two types of granitic rocks in Victoria, which were quite
•distinct in their chemical characters, and had no genetic relationship
with one another. At first sight chemical analyses, to be quoted
later, seem to uphold this view. The granodiorites are intruded
into both the Ordovician and Silurian sedimentary series, whereas
.at present no true granitic rocks are known within the Silurian
area. This led to the view that whereas* the granodiorites were post-
Silurian, the granites might possibly be pre-Silurian.

There is no exposed contact between the granites of the You-Yangs
or the Dog Rocks with fossiliferous sediments, but there is little
doubt that these granites are related to those of Maude, whicli are
intruded into sandstones and slates belonging to the Darriw'ell
horizon of the Lower Ordovician. The Mt. Buffalo granite is in-
truded into the Upper Ordovician.

Evidence, however, will be adduced from a study of chemical
analyses of some of these rocks to show that the granites and
granodiorites are gentically related to one another.

(c) Lily dale Devonian Series.

Recently Mr. M. Morris has been working on a series of igneous
rocks which occur in the neighbourhood of Lilydale. Analyses of
four of the types have been made at the Mines Department Labora-
tory, and these are of considerable interest owing to their variation
from the normal dacites of the Dandenong Ranges, with which they
are intimately connected. Mr. Morris has kindly allowed mo to
use these analyses, but no description of the microscopical characters
or field relations can be given here.

(d) Macedon Kainozoic Series.

During the Kainozoic Period Victoria was the centre of intense
vulcanicity. Extensive flows of basalt covered a considerable area
of Southern Victoria, Avhile isolated patches are fairly widely dis-
tributed throughout the State.

262 H. S. Summers:

The early geological survey of Victoria subdivided these basalt
rocks into older and newer Volcanic. In some cases where the lavas
come into relation with the Kainozoic marine series the age can be
fairly definitely fiyed, but in a large number of cases field evidence
as to exact age is wanting. Professor Skeats (15) has discussed the
relative ages of these basalts and has pointed out that " the reference
of a basalt to the older or newer series is frequently based only on
conjecture or analogy."

The basalts of the plains to the north of Melbourne, however,
clearly belong to the younger series, as they overlie the Kainozoic
marine series at Essendon, Keilor and elsewhere.

The plains are continuous up to the slopes of Mount Macedon,
and there is not the slightest doubt that the basalts of the plains
near Macedon belong to the newer series.

Somewhat older than these basalts are the interesting series of
alkaline rocks which flank the slopes of Mount Macedon.

The alkali rocks which have been recognised in the Macedon
District consist of solvsbergite, anorthoclase trachyte, anorthoclase
olivine trachyte, olivine anorthoclase trachyte, limburgite, mace-
donite, woodendite, and anorthoclase basalt. For reason given in
the paper on the Macedon District, Professor Skeats and the author
consider the probable order of extrusion was : —

1. Anorthoclase trachyte.

2. Solvsbergite.

•?. Anorthoclase basalt, Macedonite, Woodendite.

4. Anorthoclase olivine trachyte, Olivine anorthoclase trachyte.

5. Limburgite.

The solvsbergites are in the form of plugs at the Camel's Hump,
Hanging Rock and Brock's Monument, while the remaining types
occur as more or less widely spread lava flows. The age of these
rocks is considered to be probably mid-Kainozoic.

III. Differentiation of the Rocks.

One of the most interesting problems to the petrologist is that of
the causes which give rise to the great diversity of types of igneous
rocks. As has been stated earlier, the aim in the present paper is
1 athc'i- to shoAv the relationships of the end products than to attempt
an c'Xj)lanation of the causes which have led to the production of
tlie various types belonging to any one scries.

Harker (4) has shoAvn that the serial j-elationship of the rocks of
any petrographic province may be expressed by moans of variaticm
diagrams consti-uctcd with the silica percentages of the several

Victoridu Igneous Rocks.

26^

rocks taken as abscissae, and tlie percentages of the other constitu-
ents as ordinates. Such a variation diagram was constructed, based
on the analyses of tlie Macedon granodiorite-dacite series, and is
given in Fig. 1.

r 2 5 4 S 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 15 14 15 16

^■y

V

/

7

/

r

-DflCITE CHEROKCES.

■fi^

\

/

y

./

/

^DflCITE BRREMflR HOUSE.

yDnciu: wilumigongong creek.

^RflNODIORITE BRflEMflR HOUSE.

64

1

^ 1

/
1

/

/

fi-i

/

i

/

/

^DRCITE HESKCT.

fifi

f

/

k

^

f,7

K

/"

/

.^

68

i

/

/'

69

1

/

/

*

10

/

h 1

/

11

//

/

J/\.

^ A

I

-GRflNOBlDRlJE- PORPHTR Y.

67

\

1

\

/

r-BflCITE CHER0KEE5.

6^

•J

/.

•/

-DflCITE BRflEMflR HOUSE.
"^DflCHE WILLIMIGONGONG CREEK.
^GRflNODIORITE BRREMflR HOUSE.

64

f

/

65

k

-DRCITE HESKET.

66

>;

•.."

/i

61

^

cs

1

,
/

6fi

%

1

S^

^s

60

r

li

/.'

rQafjf)TiinQiir i-iF^^Kn

10

\

/

}

k'

11

\

/

i^'

\ M

-C^RflNOBIORI TE- PORPH YR Y.

6?

\

1

/

^

^dflCITE CHEROKEES.

fi.^

)

i

/

-dflCITE BRHi^RR HOUSE.
^B^CITE WILLIMiaONGONG CREEK

64

\

/

/

6^

/

1 \

-DflciiE HEsnr.

66

'-;

1

f

61

p

^

k

6ft

1

o

/

^

69

1

/

10

\

_,

/

t

11

\

/

i

1

s

iy

[

GRnNOBIORnE-PORPHYRY.

Fig. 1,

264

H. S. Summers:

1 ■> 3 4 5 6 y 8
63 111 -T

Q 10 li /? I'> « li '^

' 'tjl 1

/- f'

liz ' '

/ k^ h

r nr

'-i

^^ — 1 — h^?-—i^ V

■=r ■ ^v-

Z' ixJ it-A-

t

69 _|.4-J|-ii-L^

7! ^iii T

UJlt ^

1

''-}kkn^^

n r 1

Z5/7(r/rf CHEROKEES.

-DffCITE WIlimiCONGONG CREEK ^

MCITE BRREMfIR HOUSE.

^RRNODIORHE BRflEMfIR HOUSE..
dffC/TE HESKET.

-GRffNODIORITE HESHET-

".RflNODIORlTE- PORPH)py.

\

-1

. I

•V-

II .

—

'I

\:

i

'/

6J
66
67
68
69
70
11
17

~

\

-J

V

"~

\

rr

— «

z

~~

k

M

-t"

\t

fe

A-

~

\>

s

/

•\

Js

;>

1 ;

\

/o'

">

~"

\

1

/

""

hi

\i 1

/I

_

U

-dffClTE CHEROKEES.

-D/JCITE WnUMIGONOONG CREEK..

-DflCITE BRflEMfiR HOUSE.

RflNODIORlTE BRflEMHR HOUSE..
^DfiCITE HESKET.

-GRBNODIORITE HESKET.

..GRRNODIORITE- PORPHIR'i .

E^^

! •',.

— 1

—

-TT

7-

— J

1

\

'

;

65
66
61

V

/

t

1

—

/

_,

"V

/^

~

"

f;

h

/>■

«.

69

~

i^

/

kj

—

•

A

~

/

—

/

/

_

1

-DflCITE CHEROKEES.

-DflCITE \Nia\MIGDNGONa CREEK.

-nnCITE BRREMRR HOUSE.

^iRftNOIIIORITE BRREMflR HOUSE,
-DflCllE HESKET.

-aRnNonioRiTE heskei.

-GRflNOniORI fE - PORPH i R r.

Fig. 2.

Vicforidii. Igneous Bocks. 265

As tliLi iinalyses sIkiwlmI a considerable range in the amount of
water, and as tho totals varied somewhat, it was felt that the
analyses as rliry stood wvw nol (luitr comiiaraljle with oik- another,
so that the analyses wi'rr recaUulatL'tl to lUU per eent. with the
water onutted. Portion of the ferrous oxide originally present in
the rocks had been converted tu ferric oxide, and as the amount
of oxidation varied it was thought l)ctter to calctdatc all the iron as
ferrous oxiile. and iiianganous oxide was added to the ferrous oxide.

A second variation diagram based on these recalculated analyses
was nuide, and is given in Fig. 2. The difference between these two
diagrams is very maiked, as Fig. 1 shows a series of sigmoidal
curves, wliereas in Fig. 2 the variation is expressed by straight
lines. As this second diagram Avas considered to bring out the
relationship of the vaiious types to one another better than was
the case in the first diagram, other diagrams used in the paper have
been plotted from recalculated analyses.

(a) 77(e Jlacedon Gvaiiodiorite-Dacite Series.

Seven analyses of rocks belonging to this series have been made
in tlie Mines Department Laboratory, and these are given in Table
I.

TABLE I.

I. 11. III. IV. V. Vi. VII.

SiO

62.04

62.54

62.56

64.04

64.48

68.92

71.65

Al,03

16.50

16.66

16.60

15.58

15.07

15.26

14.56

Fe^Og

0.66

1.04

1.02

0.80

0.60

0.80

1.13

FeO

6.67

5.54

5.98

4.47

5.19

3.30

1.56

MgO

3.06

2.68

2.70

2.64

2.17

1.64

0.84

CaO

4.56

3,92

4.30

3.52

3.31

3.04

1.27

Na,0

2.27

2.66

2.98

2.42

2.55

2.71

2.76

K,0

2.14

2.47

2.57

2.80

3.04

2.93

4.14

H2O +

0.54

0.46

0.68

2.25

2.01

1.04

0.15

H,0-

0.16

0.17

0.18

0.38

0.13

0.22

1.20

CO,

nil.

nil.

nil.

nil.

tr.

nil.

nil.

TiO,

1.16

1.20

1.10

0.80

0.90

0.70

0.35

PsO.,

0.19

0.20

0.17

0.18

0.22

0.19

0.12

Mno

tr.

tr.

tr.

tr.

0.11

tr.

0.04

Li,0

nil.

tr.

tr.

tr.

tr.

tr.

6t. tr.

CI

tr.

tr.

tr.

. tr.

tr.

nil.

tr.

NiO

—

_

—

0.01

.-

nil.

CoO

__

—

0.01

—

nil.

FeS^

nil.

nil.

nil

nil.

—

nil.

—

SO3

—

—

—

—

nil.

—

—

Total

99.95

99.54

100.85

99.88

99.79

100.75

99.77

Sp. Gr. - 7.789 2.781 2.773 2.722 2.708 2.688 2.630

266 H. S. S

wmmers.

I. Dacite, ^ miles south-west of Cherokees.

II. Dacite, 50 yards south of Braemar House Stable.

III. Dacite, Willimigongoiig Creek, Upper Macedon.

IV. Granodiorite, near Braemar House.
V. Dacite, 1 mile west of Heskct.

VI. Granodiorite, near old Sawmill, Hesket.

VII. Granodiorite, Porphyry, Barringo Cl'eek.

For reasons given above these analyses were recalculated to 100
per cent, with the water omitted, and all the iron reckoned as
ferrous oxide. These recalculated analyses are given in Table
II., arranged in order of increasing silica percentage: —

TABLE II.

I. II. III. IV. V. VI. VII.

SiO,

62.59

62.64

63.29

65.90

66.04

69.33

72.88

Al,03

16.65

16.62

16.86

16.03

15.46

15.35

14.81

FeO

7.26

6.91

6.56

5.. 35

6.03

4.04

2.67

MgO

3.09

2.70

2.71

2.72

2.22

1.65

0.85

CaO

4.60

4.. 30

3.97

3.62

3.39

3.06

1..30

Na,0

2.29

2.99

2.69

2.49

2.61

2.73

2.81

K,0

2.16

2.57

2.50

2.88

3.11

2.95

4.20

TiO,

1.17

1.10

1.22

0.82

0.92

0.70

0.36

P.O5

0.19

0.17

0.20

0.19

0.22

0.19

0.12

Total - 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00

I. Dacite, J mile south-west of Cherokees.

II. Dacite, Willimigongong Creek, Upper Macedon.

III. Dacite, 50 yards south of Braemar House Stable.

IV. Granodiorite, near Braemar House.
V. Dacite, 1 mile west of Hesket.

VI. Granodiorite, near old Sawmill, Hesket.
VII. Granodiorite porphyry, Barringo Creek.

It will be seen that the only difference in the order of the analyses
in the two tables is that the Braemar Hou.se and the Willimigongong
Creek dacites change places.

As already pointed out, thei'e is a very marked difference in
the shape of the graphs in the two variation diagrams plotted from
the original and the recalculated analyses respectively. In the
second diagram the relationship of the different types to one another
agrees with Haiker"s " linear "variation " as the percentage of each
oxide is a linear function of tlic silica }ierrcntage.

One interesting point was noted in regard to the ret-alculated
analyses of these dacite and granodioriti\ viz., that the sum of the
molecular ratios was approximately a const ant figure. The nuile-
cular ratios of these rocks are triven in Tal)le 111. : —

Victorian Igneous Rochn. 267

TABLE III.

1.

II.

III.

IV.

V.

VI.

VII.

SiO,

1.043

1.044

1.055

1.098

1.101

1.156

1.215

Al.Oa

.164

.163

.166

.157

.152

.151

.145

FeO

.101

.096

.092

.075

.084

.056

.037

MgO

.077

.068

.0(i8

.068

.056

.041

.021

€aO

.082

.077

.071

.064

.061

.055

.023

Na,0

.037

.048

.044

.040

.042

.044

.045

K^O

.023

.028

.027

.031

.033

.032

.045

TiOi

.015

.014

.015

.010

.011

.009

.005

P.0.5

.001

.001

.001

.001

.001

.001

.001

Total

- 1.543

1.539

1.539

1.544

1.541

1.545

1.537

I. Dacite, Cheiokees.

II. Dacite, Willi

migiongong Creek.

III. Dacite, Ihaeinar House.

IV. G:

ranodiorite,

, Braemar

House.

V. Dacite, Hesket.

VI. Gr

anodiorite,

Hesket.

VII. Gi

•anodiorite

Porphyry,

Barring

0 Creek.

It must be admitted that these recalculated analyses do not truly
represent the composition of the different types, as there is no allow-
ance made for the presence of ferric iron or magmatic water ; but
still the above result must be considered significant.

If we use the term " unit molecular concentration " to indicate
the sum of the molecular ratios, then in the case of the Macedon
granodiorite-dacite series the unit molecular concentration remained
constant throughout the various stages in the differentiation of these
rocks. It will be seen later that there is apparently a relationship
between the molecular concentration and the shape of the variation
curves.

(b) Victorian Upper Palaeozoic Series.

Besides the rocks of the Macedon area, analyses have been made
of other dacites, granodiorites, etc., belonging to the Upper
Palaeozoic of Victoria.

Several analyses of rocks from the Dandenong and Healesville
district were made some years back at the Mines Department
Laboratory, but the methods used were such that too much reliance
cannot be placed on the results.

In 1908 Mr. H. C. Richards (12) analysed the dacite from near
Upwey, in the Dandenong Ranges, and this analysis compares very
closely Avith those of the Macedon dacites.

Thanks to the courtesy of Mr. E. J. Dunn, late Director of the
Geological Survey of Victoria, several analyses of granitic rocks

268

H. 8. Summers:

have been made for me at the Mines Department Laboratory.
Excluding the Macedon and Lilydale rocks, all the superior analyses
of the Victorian Lower Palaeozoic igneous rocks are given in Table
IV.

TABLE IV.
IV. V. VI.

SiO, -

63.27

67.75

69.19

70.51

70.94

71.57

72.49

73.30

75.99

76.31

M,0,

16.50

16.11

13.45

14.36

13.99

13.58

13.48

13.84

13.10

13.0^

Fe.,Oa

0.68

0.50

2.71

0.33

0.35

1.18

1.16

0.82

0.57

0.41

FeO -

5.10

4.00

2.78

1.95

3.02

2.19

2.09

1.22

0.61

1.07

MgO

2.48

0.79

1.06

1.08

0.80

1.07

0.49

0.82

0.18

0.36-

CaO -

4.18

2.68

2.04

2.98

2.35

1.72

1.31

0.84

0.41

0.65

Na,0

2.36

2.60

2.89

3.17

3.94

2.79

3.38

3.12

3.30

3.00

K,0 +

2.68

3.42

3.94

3.15

3.66

4.36

4.06

4.89

5.27

4.76.

H.,0-

0.52

0.96

0.77

1.18

0.21

0.69

0.76

0.50

0.40

0.29

H,0 -

0.09

0.20

0.16

—

0.11

0.11

0.18

0.19

0.14

0.11

CO, -

nil.

nil.

0.07

nil.

nil.

0.29

trace

nil.

nil.

0.66-

TiO, -

1.30

0.85

0.51

1.20

0.58

0.46

0.46

0.20

0.11

0.20

PjO., -

0.15

0.09

0.18

0.12

trace

0.11

trace

0.08

trace

trace

MnO -

0.03

trace

0.14

trace

nil.

0.09

0.13

0.15

0.06

0.11

Li-iO -

trace

trace

—

st.tr.

trace

nil.

trace

trace

CI

—

—

trace

—

_

trace

trace

nil.

trace

trace

NiO

__

_

nil.

0.08

nil.

nil.

nil.

0.02

0.01

CoO -

—

—

nil.

—

nil.

nil.

nil.

trace

—

Cr.-O.T

—

—

_,^

trace

—

—

—

—

—

—

SO, -

—

nil.

nil.

nil.

nil.

nil.

niL

FeS, -

0.16

—

_

_

—

—

—

—

_

—

BaO -

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

nil.

—

Total -

99.50

99.95

99.89

100.11

99.95

100.21

99.99

99.97

100.16

100.43

Sp. Gr. 2.7f

2.68 2.666

2.655 2.635

2.620 2.643

I. Dacite, Upwey.l (Analyst, H. C. Richards.)
II. Adamellite2, Granite Quarry, Mt. Gellibrand, Broad-
meadows. (Analyst, H. C. Richards.)

III. Adamellite, Trawool Quarry. (Analyst, A. G. Hall.)

IV. Hypersthene quartz porphyrite. Road Metal Quarries^

Violet Town. (Analyst, G. Anipt.)
V. Granodiorite, Harcourt Quarry. (Analyst, G. Ampt.)
VI. Adamellite, Ingliston. (Analyst, A. G. Hall.)
VII. Granite, Gabo Island. (Analyst, J. Wateon.)
VIU. Granite,3 Mount Buffalo. (Analyst, A. G. Hall.)
IX. Granite, Dog Rock.s, Goelong. (Analyst, A. G. Hall.)
X. Granite, Cape Woolamai. (Analyst, .\. G. Hall.)

These analyses have been recalculated to 100 per cent, witli the
total iron converted to ferrous oxide and the water omitted. Man-

1. Froc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. x.\i. (N.S.), Pt. II., 1909, p. 533,

2. Proc. Roy. Soc, Victoria, vol. xxiv. (N.S.), Pt. I., 1911, p. 177.

3. Memoirs of Geol. Surv. o( Victoria, No. 6, 19ii8, p. 8.

Victorian Igneous Rocks. 261>

gauous (ixide is added to the ferrous oxide. These recalculated
analyses, together witli tliusc of the Macedon Rocks, are given in
Tal)le \'.. arranged in order of increasing silica percentage.

TABLE V.
I. II. III. IV. V. VI. VII. VIII. i.x.

SiO., - 62.59 62.64 63.29 64.06 65.90 66.04 68.61 69.33 70.17

AloOa - 16.65 16.62 16.86 16.71 16.03 15.46 16.31 15.35 13.63

FeO - 7.26 6.91 6.56

MgO - 3.09 2.70 2.71

CaO - 4.60 4.30 3.97

Na,0 - 2.29 2.99 2.69

K^O - 2.16 2.57 2.50

TiO., - 1.17 1.10 1.22 1.31 0.82 0.92 0.86 0.70 0.52

P^O,-. - 0.19 0.17 0.20 0.15 0.19 0.22 0.09 0.19 0.18

Totnl - 100.00 lOO.(X) 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 lOO.OO

eiO., - 70.73 71.24 71.29 72.29 72.88 73.30 73.89 76.34 76.37

AI263 - 14.08 14.04 14.52 13.72 14.81 13.62 13.95 13.16 13.10

FeO - 3.90 3.34 2.37

MgO - 1.08 0.80 1.09

CaO - 2.54 2.36 3.01

Na^O - 3.05 3.96 3.18

K^O - 3.61 3.68 3.21

TiO. - 0.86 .58 1.21 0.46 0.36 0.46 0.20 0.11 0.20

5.91

5.35

6.03

4.51

4.04

5.43

2.52

2.72

2.22

0.80

1.65

i.or

4.23

3.62

3.39

2.72

3.06

2.07

2.39

2.49

2.61

2.64

2.73

2.93

2.72

2.88

3.11

3.46

2.95

4.00'

3.37

2.67

3.29

2.13

1.20

1.56

1.08

0.85

0.50

0.83

0.18

0.36

1.74

1.30

1.32

0.85

0.41

0.65

2.82

2.81

3.41

3.14

3.31

3.00

4.41

4.20

4.10

4.93

5.29

4.76

PjOs - 0.15 tr. 0.12

Total - 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.000 100.00 100.000 100.00

I. Dacite, Cherokees, Macedon District.

II. Dacite, Willimigongong Creek, Macedon District.

III. Dacite, Braeniar House, Macedon District.

IV. Dacite, Upwey, Mount Dandenong District.

V. Granodiovite, Braemar House, Macedon District.

VI. Dacite, Hesket, Macedon District.

VII. Adamellite, Broadmeadows.

VIII. Granodiorite, Hesket, Macedon District.

IX. Adamellite, Trawool, Strathbogie District.

X. Average of Adamellite and Quartz Porphyrite, Strath-
bogie.

XI. Granodiorite, Harcourt.

XII. Quartz-porphyrite, Violet Town, Strathbogie District.

XIII. Adamellite, Ingliston.

XIV. Granodiorite porphyry, Barringo Creek, Macedon District

XV. Granite, Gabo Island.

XVI. Granite, Mount Buffalo.

XVII. Granite, Dog Rocks, Geelong.

XVIII. Granite, Cape Woolamai.

270

H. S. Summer,

.

J ^

5 '

? .

1 t

7

fi"^

.1

■

I

fi-f

/

fi'i

'

/

fif!

-

.

./

.-

-~

■fi7

/

(Sft

/

/

.<^p

^

/

/

70

—

t.

1-

t'

71

77

'/

1

7^

,/

74

1

.;

•

T)

/

7S

i

^

-

„

-

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

?

f-

A

-D/JCITi: CHCROKELS.

- -SMCITE niLLIMICONCONG CD.
= \DflCITE BRflEMflR HCUSL.
_ ^DflCIT£ UPWCy.

„ ^CRmod/OR/ T[ BRfl^MflR.

^BfiCITE. HfSKE T.
'' r/lMMELL/TC BROflDMEfldOWS:
T URmaS/OR/TE HESKE J.

- Irnn/7,'^EL LITE S JRfl THBOGli S
~ jrM of m ona Q p. STRflTHHCGlES
Zjr&RmOHIOR/TE HfiRCOURT.
-■L-QUflRTZrCPPH. STR/STHSCCIES.
--^ffmMEUITE INGLISTON.

1 ^-GRmmoRiTE roRPH b/irringo cr

J^GRflNITE G ABO IS
_ \iR/INITE M^ BUFFALO

rGRfLNITE GEELONG
iJ^CRPNITE CriPE WOOL f] Mm

dBCITE ChERCKEES.
dflCITE WILLmiGONCCNG C/f
mClTE BRREI^RR HOUSE
'ft CITE UPWEY.
^.^GRRNCDIORIJE BRflEMflR
^^MCITE HESKET

■flDflMELLlTE BROffBMEffSOWS
■RmODlbRITE HESKET.
'D/fMELLITE STRFITHBDGIES
flV. 0/ m anaQ.P S TRflTH BOGIES.
JUrGRflNODIORITE HRRCOURT.
-^QUfLRT2 PCRPH. STRffTH BOGIES.

■ffDRMELLITE INGLISTON
^^GRftNOmORI TE PORPH. BflRRINGO CR.
^^GR.^NITE G/1B0 IS.

^GRRNITE M''- BUFFALO.

rCRffNITE GEE LONG.
-■i-Gh

GRANITE CAPE WOOLRN!AI.

Fig. 3.

A variation diagram has been plotted from these recalculated
analyses, and is given in Fig. .3. It will be seen that the variation
is of linear type, and that on the whole the various points
conform very closely to the graphs. The adamellite from Broad-
meadows shows a positive departure in the alumina, and an equal
negative departure in the magnesia, while the remaining oxides
■conform remarkably well. The two rocks from the Strathbogies
show decided departures in some cases, but the mean of these two
analyses gives points which fall close to the lines. The Harcourt
granodiorite shows little departure except in the soda. The four
granites conform remarkably well to the graphs.

Victorian Igneous Rocks.

271

If vaiiiitiou curves have any real significance, and there seems
no doubt that they have, then we must infer that all the rocks whose
analyses have been used in the construction of this diagram are
genetically related. In this diagram onh- first-class analyses have-
been used, and so those of the dacites of Dandenong Ranges and the
Black's Spur have been rejected for reason already given.

Analyses by Dr. Howett of quartz-mica-diorites were not included,
as titanium oxide had not been estimated and the methods of analysis
as used by him were not as exact as those in use at the present day.

The molecular ratios for the different oxides present in tlic re-
calculated analyses and their totals were determined, and it was
found that in this case also the total molecular ratios, or using the
term suggested earlier, " the unit molecular concentration,"
remained approximately constant throughout the differentiation.
These molecular ratios are given in Table VI.

TABLE

VI.

I.

II.

III

IV.

V.

VI.

VII.

VIII.

IX.

SiO,

1.043

1.044

1.055

1.068

1.098

1.101

1.144

1.156

1.170

Al.Og -

.164

.163

.166

.164

.157

.152

.160

.151

.1.33

FeO -

0.101

0.96

.092

.082

.075

.084

.063

.056

.075

MgO -

.077

.068

.068

.063

.068

.056

.020

.041

.027

CaO -

.082

.077

.071

.076

.064

.061

0.48

.055

.037

Na,0 -

.0.37

.048

.044

.039

.040

.042

.043

.044

.047

K,0 -

.023

.028

.027

.029

.031

.033

.037

.032

.043

TiO., -

.015

.014

.015

.015

.010

.011

.011

.009

.006

P.O., -

.001

.001

.001

.001

.001

.001

.001

.001

.001

Total

1.543 1.539 1.539 1.538 1.544 1.541 1.527 1.545 1.539

SiO,

1.179

1.187

1.188

1.205

1.215

1.222

1.232

1.272

1.273

Al,03 -

.138

.137

.142

.134

.145

.133

.137

.129

.128

FeO

.054

.046

.033

.047

.037

.046

.029

.017

.022

MgO -

.027

.020

.027

.027

.021

.013

.021

.005

.009

CaO -

.045

.042

.054

.031

.023

.023

.015

.007

.012

Na,,0 -

.049

.064

.052

.045

.045

.055

.051

.053

.048

K,0 -

.038

.039

.034

.047

.045

.044

.025

.056

.051

TiO„ -

.011

.008

.015

.006

.005

.006

.003

.001

.003

P. .05 -

.001

.000

.001

.001

.001

.000

.001

.000

.000

Total

1.542 1.543 1.546 1.543 1.537 1.542 1.541 1.540 1.546

/'T'i H. S. Sumiiiers:

1. Dacite, Cherokees, Macedon District.
II. Dacite, Willimig-ongong Creek, Macedon District.

III. Dacite, Braemar House, Macedon District.

IV. ' Dacite, Ujjwey, Dandenong- District.

V. Granodiorite, Braemar House, Macedon District.
Vr. Dacite, Hesket, Macedon District.
VII. .\dainellite, Broadmeadows.
VIII. Granodiorite, Hesket, Macedon District.
IX. idamellite, Trawool, Strathbogie District.
X. Average of Adamellite and Quartz-porphyry, Strathbogie

District.
XI. Granodiorite, Harcourt.
XII. Quartz porphyrite, Violet Town, Strathbogie District.

XIII. Adamellite, Ingliston.

XIV. Granodiorite porphyry, Barringo Creek, Macedon District.
XV. Granite, Gabo Island,

XVI. Granite, Mount Buffalo.
XVII. Glranite, Dog Rocks, Geelong.
XVIII. Granite, Cape Woolamai.

If the variation diagram, Fig. 3, can be couhidered at all a
picture of the nature of the differentiation of the magma which pro-
duced the various rock types shown, then it is certain that there
must be limiting values beyond which differentiation cannot pro-
ceed. It is obvious that for any percentage of silica that percent-
age plus the percentages of the bases as read off on the diagram
should in all cases equal one hundred. It follows then that when any
line reaches the vanishing point, i.e., the percentage of the oxide
represented by that line becomes nil, differentiation as indicated by
the diagram must cease. The reason for this statement is that
beyond that point the silica percentages plus the percentages of the
bases, as indicated on the diagram, must be more than one hundred
by the amount (a minus quantity) read off from the vanished line.
In order to bring out this point clearly a fresh diagram has been
drawn (see Fig. 4).

Two extreme values have been taken tu plot the iliagram, viz..
the mean of the three dacites from Cherokees, Willimigongong Creek
and Braemar House, and the mean of the granites from Dog Rocks
and Cape Woolamai. The lines have been drawn exactly through
these points so that the composition of any possible rock as read off
from the diagram may equal one hundred per cent.

The two values used are as under. The molecular ratios are given
in the second column in each case.

i''^ict(>ri(in Ljneous Rocks.

273

^ 'O

<-

-^

^

^

y.

o

^

-■

■o

o^

<-

-■^

^-

^

i

(o

^

■^

'i

c.

^

<^

1

/

r—

1

a-/-_. -

-^

/ill/

I LIMIT OF

1 ' J

DirFFRFNTmflON

/p

^ /

f-

/

/ ' ■

/: i

^._

^

1

/

\

/

1

;

\

1

i

/

i

1

•^

\

/

1
i

1

"^

\

1/

1
1

i 1 1

-■■

\

1

/

f

1

'•

1

/

i

■^

\l

/

/

I

/

-

I

/

1

7i •-

i

/

^

i

/

L

Ml

r 0

DIFFEREh

TIf

i
7 TION.

P

/

C-,

j 1

/

1

r

1

!

i

? 1

f

-

j

/

No

A?" —

it

k\

1

r

\:;

1 y

1

- ! 1

1

R
p

\ 1

"^

^ H

' / '

1

1 !

1

/

I

i

■"

/;

1

!

/]

1

\ \

/ ^

1

[

i

1 /
1 /

"^

\

/

! i

1

I

1

X

\

1 /

/

/

^^

A;

\

1

1

7'

l\

7 V

! 1 /

/

i

f>

\

iJ

1 ;/

1

/

i i

1 |\

'

1 / /^l/T/?

^cc OF n

IREE dflCITEs\ 1

1 i

"^

n

f\ 1

\ ' /

"'

-

r

/ 1 i i

1 1

*

1 i

/

\ / '

\

7 '

i

1 !

1/

V i

\

i

1^1

A

1

n^

! /

A ' /

/ !

I

03

' / '

h \ 1

\

/ I

1

^O

/7

l\

'• i '

1

.<C3

i / J

1 1 1

i

1
1

If

\>^

i '■

1

N

:^" tkk

1 \^

i Pf?

k

■ i ! :

1
1

I \ 1

' ^\

1 v^

i 1 '

1

/ / /^

r ! \

i '\

1 1 i

1

^K

/ / /

1 \

i i 1

i

/

^

F/ '/

\

\ ■

\

1

1 1

: \

:

^

// 1

1

\l ! IV

1

//V7/ 7 OF

iDIFFERi

^NTIflJION.

1 1

t

1

!

\l \ \\

1

I ,

1

1

\ i : \

1

I

1 1 1

Fig. 4.

274 H. S. Summer.

SiO,

-

62.84

1047

76.:36

1273

Al^bs

-

16.71

164

13.13

128

FeO

6.91

96

1.38

19

MgO

2.82

71

.27

7

CaO

4.29

77

.53

10

Na,0

2.66

43

3.15

51

K,'o

2.41

26

5.03

53

TiO,

1.16

15

.15

2

P,0,

.19

1

tr.

—

Total

I. Average of analyses of dacite from Cherokees, Willimigongong Creek
and Braemar House.
II. Average of analyses of granite from Dog Eocks, Geeloug, and Cape
Woolamai.

The lines drawn tlirough the points representing the percentage
of the oxides are produced both ways. It will be seen that in the
direction of increasing silica percentage the magnesia line vanished
at 78 per cent, silica, and is closely followed by tlie lime. It is
considered that a rock containing 78 per cent, silica is the most
acid product that this magma could produce under this type of
differentiation. A more acid rock than this could, however, be pro-
duced by a complementary subdivision of one of the possible pro-
ducts of the linear type of differentiation.

In the direction of decreasing silica percentage the potash line
vanished at approximately 50 per cent, silica, and this point is a
possible limit of differentiation in the basic direction. In working
out other variation diagrams it has been found that whereas the
total alkalies may show a linear type of variation the soda and
potash lines may become curved. In this case, then, there is the
possibility that differentiation may not reach a limit until the total
alkalies become nil at about 40 per cent, silica. In reading of? any
composition below 50 per cent, tlie soda lino must lie disi-egarded
and the soda i-ead off from the total alkalies line. Compositions
have been read off the diagram for every 5 per cent, increase of
silica, and are given in Table VII., together with the most acid
differentiation product containing 78 per cent, of silica.

Victorian Ljiieous Rocks. 275

T.un.i

■: VII.

40.0

I.

II.

III.

IV

SiO,

.667

45.0

.750

50.0

.833

55.0

.917

A1,0,

22.7

.223

21.4

.210

20.1

.197

18.8

.184

FeO

16.2

.225

14.2

.197

12.1

.168

10.1

.140

MgO

7.:}

.183

6.3

.158

5.3

.133

4.4

.110

CaO

10.6

.189

9.3

.166

7.8

.139

6.5

.116

Na,0

0.0

.000

1.0

.016

2.2

.033

2.4

0.39

K,0

0.0

.000

0.0

.000

0.0

.000

0.8

.009

TiO,

2.9

.036

2.5

.031

2.2

.028

1.8

.023

P.O,

0.3

.022

0.3

.002

0.3

.002

0.2

.001

Total

100.0

1.525

100.0

1.530

100.0

1.535

100.0

1.593

SiO^

60.0

1.000

65.0

1.083

70.0

1.169

75.0

1.250

78.0

1.30O

AUO3

- 17.5

.172

16.1

.158

14.8

.145

13.2

.132

12.6

.124

FeO

8.0

.111

6.0

.083

4.0

.056

1.9

.026

0.7

.010

MgO

3.4

.085

2.5

.063

1.5

.038

0.5

.013

0.0

.000

CaO

5.1

.091

3.7

.066

2.3

.041

0.9

.016

0.1

.002

Na,0

2.6

.042

2.7

.044

2.9

.047

3.1

.050

3.2

.052

K,0

1.8

.019

2.8

.030

3.8

.040

4.8

.051

5.4

.057

TiO,

1.4

.018

1.0

.013

0.6

.008

0.3

.004

0.0

.000

P.O. .

0.2

.001

0.2

.001

0.1

.001

0.0

.000-

0.0

.000

Total - 100.0 1.539 100.0 1.541 100.0 1.543 100.0 1.542 100.0 1.545

Naturally the most interesting compositions are those of the
limiting members of the series. Taking the acid limit first, we
find that such a composition would give practically pure quartz and
felspar, as may be seen from the following : —

TABLE VIII.

Pei-cent-
ajce.

Molecular
Ratios.

*?-!"ase.' -^"'''«-

Anor-
thite.

Quartz. Remainder.

SiO^ - 78.0

1..300

342 312

4

642 —

AI2O3 - 12.6

.124

57 52

2

— .013

FeO - 0.7

.010

.

— .010

MgO - 0.0

.000

— —

—

— —

CaO - 0.1

.002

— _

2

— —

Na-iO - 3.2

.052

— 52

_

—

KjO - 5.4

.057

57 —

-

— —

Quartz

.

.6i2 X 60

=

38.52

Orthoclase

.057 X 556

—

31.69

Albite

.052 X 524

-

27.25

Anorthit€

.002 X 278

^

.56

98.02

276 H. IS. Sunn/ners :

The FeO may be assumed to be present as magnetite, as tlie
percentage of FeO also includes the Fe203, and the small amount of
alumina is negligible considering the data on which the estimation
is made. It would seem then that the acid limit product of the
differentiation would be a rock consisting of approximately 38.5
per cent, fi-ee quartz and 59.5 per cent, felspar. In the case of the
more acid of the liypothetical limits of differentiation in the direc-
tion of decrease of silica the composition may be estimated as
follows : — ■

TABLE IX.

Percent-

aji-e.

.Molecular
liatios.

''ir- Apatite.

Alhite.

Ai.or-
thite.

Heiiiainder.

SiO, -

50.0

.833

198

266

369

A1,0„

20.1

.197

33

133

31

FeO

12.1

.168

28

—

—

140

MgO

5.3

.133

_ —

_

—

133

CaO

7.8

.139

— 6

133

—

Na,0

2.2

.033

.

33

K,0

0.0

.000

— . —

—

—

TiO^

2.2

.028

28 —

—

—

—

P.O.,

0.3

.002

— 2

—

—

—

It will be seen that there is more than sufficient silica left after
the production of felspar to form a metasilicate of magnesia,
ferrous iron and alumina. This excess of silica would be actually
greater, as portion of the iron would go to form magnetite. If we
allowed an equal amount of ferrous oxide for magnetite, as was
required for ilmenite, viz., 28 parts, this would reduce the amount
of ferrous iron by 84 points, and a possible composition of the
hypothetical rock would be as under : —

Quartz

-

-

.149x60

= 8.94

Plagioclase

-

-

(.033x524=17.29^
^133x278 = 36 97)

= 54.26

Ilmenite -

.

-

.028 X 152

= 4.26

Magnetite

-

.028 X 232

= 6.50

Apatife -

-

-

.002 X 336
^.031 X 162= 5.02 -^
.] . 1 33 X 100= 13.30 ^
(.036x132= 7.39 -^

= .67

Aluminou.s A

,niph

ibole

= 25.71

It will be seen that the rock would consist essentially of plagio-
clase and an aluminous amphibole or pyroxene with some quartz
and a moderate amount of iron minerals.

Victorian Igneous Rocks. 277

Turing now to the more basic liypothetical limit of possibla
differentiation, the composition of the rock may l)e estimated in a
similar manner, an equal amount of fci-rous iron l)ein«r allowed
for magnetite as is re<|uired foi- ilniuiiite.

TABLE X.

Percent-

Moleculai

Apu- nineii-

Mat'iiet-

Anor-

.\Uiiniii-
oils Am
piiil.ole.

Ke-

age.

Ratios.

tite. ite.

ite.

thite.

■ main-
der.

SiOJ

40.0

.667

_

366

304

-3

AI,03

22.7

.223

.

183

40

Fe,03

36

FeO

16.2

.225

— 36

36

81

MgO

7.3

.183

.

183

CaO

10.6

.189

6 —

183

Na.O

0.0

.000

—

_

-^

K..0

0.0

.000

—

_

_

Tib.

2.9

.036

— 36

P.0I5

0.3

.002

2

—

—

—

—

Anortbite -

-

-

.183 X 278
^.040x 162 =
'. j 081x132 =
^.183x100 =

: 6 48-^

= 50.87

Aluminous*

Ami^hibole

= 10.69 r

= 35.47

.18.30-'

Magnetite

-

.036 x 232

= 8.35

Ilmenite -

-

-

.036 X 152

= 5.47

Apatite

-

-

.002 X 336

= .67

This composition seems a rather more rational end point than the
other, as the rock would consist essentially of two minerals, anor-
thite and aluminous amphibole or pyroxene.

It is interesting to note that the ratio of the quartz to felspar is
39.3; 60.7 in the case of the acid limiting value, and that the
ratio of the pyroxene to felspar in the case of the basic limit is
approximately the same, viz., 41.1; 58.9.

While suggesting that these two values as read off from the
diagram represent the theoretical limits of this linear differentia-
tion, it does not follow that rocks w-ith such composition would
necessarily separate out from the given magma. In actual occur-
rence the composition of the original undifferentiated parent
magma must be a controlling factor in limiting differentiation.

(c) Macedon Kainozoic Alkali Series.

All the leading types of rocks belonging to this series have been
analysed at the Mines Department Laboratory, and in all nineteen
first-class analyses have been made. These are given in Table XI.

* This is not a true nietasilicate as the AI2O3 and SiOj are combined in the proportion 1 : 1, but
an examination of a number of analyses of aluminous ampliiboles and pyroxenes shows that gen-
erally silica must be allotted to alumina in the above proportion.

278

H. S. SvA

TABLE XI.
IV. V.

SiO,

43.06

43.24

43.58

43.82

45.10

47.02

48.83

50.14

51.48

51.53

A1,0, -

13.06

13.19

11.46

12.90

12.86

12.52

16.69

16.91

16.34

16.58

Fe.Oa -

4.68

4.42

3.40

6.74

5.66

5.81

2.66

3.26

4.86

2.35

FeO

8.10

8.46

9.13

6,25

7.10

5.83

8.4(J

9.15

5.14

7.68

MgO

9.92

8.48

10.80

9.32

8.56

9.92

5.56

2.62

2.82

4.03

CaO

9.30

9,32

9.88

9.44

9.10

8..38

7.95

5.18

4.70

6.10

NajO -

2.14

2.28

2.18

2.49

3.99

3.23

2.92

3.80

3.57

4.11

K,0

2.14

1.68

2.13

1.75

1.02

3.23

2.10

2.78

3.43

2.99

H,0 + -

2.53

2.46

2.40

1.70

1.53

0.70

0.66

2.16

1.62

0.22

HjO- -

0.76

2.03

0.47

1.26

1.10

0.69

1.34

0.14

1.90

1.39

CO, -

trace

trace

trace

trace

trace

trace

trace

trace

trace

trace

TiOa

3.60

3.15

3.32

3.50

3.50

2.60

2.85

1.90

2.62

2.1s

P,05 -

0.96

1.13

0.95

1.02

1.00

1.23

0.74

1.19

1.28

0.82

ilVDno

0.43

0.18

trace

0.37

0.08

0.12

0.25

0.38

0.35

0.13

Li„0 -

nil.

nil.

nil.

nil.

nil.

nil.

nil.

nil.

nil.

st.tr.

CI

trace

trace

trace

tra<;e

trace

trace

0.04

trace

■ trace

0.05

NiO)
CoO ) -

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

nil.

O.OS

SO3 -

nil.

nil.

nil.

nil.

nil.

nil.

trace

nil.

nil.

nil.

Total

100.68

100.02

99.70 100.56

100.60 100.28 100.99

99.61 100.11

100.18

Sp. Gr.

2.935 2.901 2.995 2.995 2.854 2.

2.870 2.786 2.760 2.787

SiO, -

51.72

54.06

59.44

59.52

60.10.

62.56

65.46

66.86

67.06.

AI.O3 -

13.36

17.13

17.98

18.06

18.38

17.89

17.40

16.34

17.40

Fe,03 -

2.80

6.10

2.28

3.76

2.22

4.98

3.00

2.38

2.24

FeO

8.16

3.55

3.34

2.27

3. .34

0.45

1.60

1.99

0.84

MgO -

7.20

3.05

0.78

0.78

1.30

0.18

0.09

0.22

0.26

CaO -

7.68

4.88

2.32

1.98

2.28

0.72

0.76

0.92

0.34

Na^O -

2.87

3.97

5.36

5.38

5.30

5.06

6.51

6.01

5.88

K,0 -

1.34

3.29

4.77

5.03

4.57

5.13

4.74

4.07

4.10

H,0+ -

0.96

1.00

1.57

0.96

0.43

0.73

0.35

0.41

0.6a

H,0- -

1.61

0.80

0.70

0.88

0.96

1.30

0.52

0.18

0.71

CO.

n.d

nil.

n.d.

n.d.

trace

n.d.

n.d.

n.d.

n.d.

TiO, -

2.30

1.95

0.79

0.67

0.69

0.38

0.24

(>.21

0.16

P.O.

0.25

0.48

0.30

0.27

0.33

0.11

nil.

trace

trace-

Mno -

trace

0.20

trac«

trace

nil.

trace

trace

trace

trace

Li,0 -

nil.

trace

trace

trace

trace

trace

nil.

trace

trace

CI

NiO)
CoO 3 -
SO3 -

trace
nil.

trace
0.3
nil.

trace
nil.

trace
nil.

nil.
trace

nil.
trace

trace
nil.

trace
nil.

trace
nil.

Total -

100.25

100.71

99.63

99.56

99.90

99.49

100.67

99.59

99.61

Sp. Gr.

2.828 2.722 2.590 2.621

2.504 2.596 2.646 2.559-

Victorian Igneous Rocks. 279

I. Limburgite, lower portion of King's Quarry.

II. Limburgite, No. 1 Quarry, Woodend.

III. Limburgite, No. 4 Quarry, Woodend.

IV. Limburgite, upper portion of King's Quarry.

V. Limburgite, No. 3 Quarry, AVoodend.

VI. Woodenditc, Old Racecourse Hill, Woodend.

VII. Auorthoclase Basalt, base of Sugarioaf Hill, N.N.E. of Woodend.

VIII. Macedonite, Emu Creek, Macedon District.

IX. Macedonite, Spring Mound, S.S.E. of Lancefield.

X. Olivine anorthoclase trachyte. Parish of Cobaw.

XI. Anorthoclase basalt, quaiTy at road corner N.N.E. of the Jim Jim.

XII. Anorthoclase olivine trachyte, summit of Sugarioaf Hill.

XIII. Anorthoclase trachyte. Quarry, Parish of Newham.

XIV. Anorthoclase trachyte, Turritable Fall, Upper Macedon.

XV. Anothoclase trachyte, eastern slope of Mount Eliza.

XVI. Anothoclase trachtyc, McAlister's Rock, Parish of Newham.

XVII. Solvsbergite, Camel's Hump.

XVIII. Solvsbergite, Brock's Monument.

XIX. Solvsbergite, Hanging Rock.

As in the previous cases these analyses have been recalculated to
lUO per cent., but where several analyses are extremely similar to
•one another the mean value is taken. Certain blends of analyses
are also included.

TABLE

XII.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

«.

•■

SiO,

45.31

47.78

49.48

51.66

51.69

51.84

52A4i

Al,03

13.15

12.73

16.92

17.43

16.13

16.21

16.87

FeO

12.95

10.45

11.19

12.84

11.07

10.91

10.15

MgO

9.74

10.08

5.63

2.71

5.06

4.97

4.10

CaO

9.74

8.51

8.05

5.35

6.55

6.47

6.21

m,o

2.71

3.28

2.96

3.93

3.29

3.40

4.18

K,0

1.81

3.28

2.13

2.87

2.62

2.69

3.04

TiO,

3.54

2.64

2.89

1.97

2.68

2.61

2.18

PjOs

1.05

1.25

0.75

1.24

0.91

0.90

0.83

Total - 100.00 100.00 100.0 100.00 100.00 100.00

SiO. 53.08 53.56 54.98 58.03 62.00 67.28

Al.Oa

13.72

17.01

17.42

17.93

18.54

17.29

FeO

10.97

10.27

9.12

7.33

5.47

3.80

MgO

7. .39

2.93

3.10

2.29

0.78

0.19

CaO

7.89 ■

4.90

4.96

3.63

1.87

0.68

Na,0

2.95

3.71

4.04

4.78

5.42

6.24

KjO

1.38

3.57

3.. 35

4.16

5.01

4.36

TiOi

2.36

2.72

1.98

1..3.5

0.65

0.20

P.O5

0.26

1.33

0.75

0.50

0.26

tr.

Total - 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.90

280 H. S. Summers :

1. Limburgite - Average of 5 analyses.

2. Woodenite - (Complementary).

3. Anorthoclase Basalt - (Complementary).

4. Mac«donite - (Complementary)

5. Blend of Complementary Types.

6. Blend of Alkali types less acid Trachyte and Solvsbergite.

7. Olivine anorthoclase Trachyte (Cobaw Type)

8. Anothoclase Basalt - (Complementary).

9. Macedonite - (Complementary).

-10. Anorthoclase Olivine Trachyte - (Sugarloaf Type).

11. Blend of Alkali Rocks.

12. Anorthoclase Trachyte - Average of 4 analyses.

13. Solvsbergite - Average of 3 analyses.

Variation diagrams based on these recalculated analyses are-
given in Fig. 5. The curves obtained are in general better than
those plotted from the original analyses (compare with Plates
VII. -IX.. Bulletin No. 24, Geol. Surv. of Victoria 1912).

The differentiation of the Kainozoie alkali lavas of Macedon has
been discussed in some detail (19), but some additions to tliis
discussion may be included here.

In the first place, judging from the variation diagram (Fig.
4), differentiation must have proceeded on different lines to those
exhibited by the dacite-granitic series. In the latter case variation
could be expressed by straight lines, but the variation of the alkali
rocks must be expressed by curves. It has been pointed out above
that the molecular concentration of the Palaeozoic rocks remained
constant throughout the differentiation.

In the case of the rocks under consideration, however, this is
not the case. The molecular ratios are set out in Table XIII., the
order of the analyses being the same as in the preceding table.

TABLE XIII.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

SiO,

.755

.796

.825

.861

.862

.864

.874

Al.Os

.129

.125

.166

.171

.158

.159

.166.

Feb

.180

.145

.156

.178

.154

.151

.141

MgO

.244

.252

.141

.068

.127

.124

.103.

CaO

.174

.152

.144

.096

.117

.115

.111

Na,0

.044

.053

.048

.064

.053

.055

.068

K.,0

.019

.035

.022

.031

.028

.029

.032

TiO,

.044

.033

.36

.025

.034

.033

.027

PjO,,

.008

.099

.006

.008

.006

.006

.006

Total - 1.597 1.600 1.544 1.502 1.539 1.536 1.628-

Victorian Igneous Rocks.

281

■LIMBVRCITC M£R/tGC OF riVd RNULISCS.

\NOOnENDITC OLD RItCECOURSC I

r« BnSfILT BftSCOF SUGHRLOflF HILL.

^MflCeOONITF CMU CREFK.

3LIN0 OF COMPL FMFNTflRY TYPES.

BLFNDOrmMI.1 TYPES LESS SOLVS.<^flCID TRflCH.
"^OLIVINE flNORTH. r/f/ICHYTE COBHV^ TYPE.
\-FlNORTil. SnSflLT NNE OF THE JIM JIM.
^MflCEDONITE SPRING MOUND.
-flNORTH. OLIVINE TRACHYTE SUC/IRLOnF HILL.

BLEND OF RLKflLI TYPES.

flNORTH. TRflCHYTt fiVERHCE OF FOUR flN/ILYSES.

SOLVSBCRCITE /IVERnGE OF THREE flNILYSES.

IIMBURGITE tJVER/ICE OF FIVE ANAL YSES.

WOCDENDITE OLB RACECOURSE HILL.

flNORTH. BASAL T BASE OF SUGARLOAF HILL.

MCEDONITE EMU CREEK.
■.-BLEND OF COMPLEMENTARY TYPES.
^BLENDOFALKAII TYPES LESS SOL VS. f-F!ClV TRACK
"^OLIVINE flNORTH. TRACHYTE COBAYV TYPE.
"^ANORTH. BASALT N.N.E OF THE JIM JIM.
^HACLDONITE SPRING MOUND,
a NORTH. OLIVINE TRACHYTE SUGARLOAF HILL

BLEND OF ALKALI TYPES.

ANORTH. TRACHYTE AVERAGE OF FOUR ANALYSES

-SOL VSBERCITE AVERAGE OF THREE /1NAL YSEG

Fig. 5.

282

H. S. Sumraers :

Total

TABLE XIII. iContinued).
9. 10. 11.

SiOj

.885

.893

.916

.967

1.033

1.121

Al,03

.134

.167

.171

.175

.181

.170

FeO

.152

.143

.131

.102

.076

.053

MgO

.185

.(y73

.078

.057

.020

.005

CaO

.141

.088

.089

.065

.033

.012

Na,0

.048

.060

.065

.077

.087

.101

K,0

.015

.a38

.036

.045

.053

0.47

TiOo

.030

.034

.025

.017

.008

.003

P.Oi,

.002

.009

.006

.004

.002

—

1.592

1.493

1.512

LiMBuficnE (fivufifice)

WOODE/VDITE (CCnPLEM£/VT/rf!y.)
HNORTH. B^5^LT.(C0MPi£MENTflRY)

■MCE DO nil rC. ( COM PL EMENTflRy^
BLENd OF COM PL EMEN TflRY TYPES
■BLENU or fILKflLI TYPES C£iS SOLVS/Y /ICIDTffACH.

, ^...hVE /^NG/fTMOCLffSE TRflCHYTC
^fj NORTH. BflSfLLT (COMPLE MCNTY7RY )
^MflCEDONI IE. (COMPL EnEN TftR Y )

fim/iTHOCflSE OLIVINE TRflCHYTC

^LENU Of flLK/lLI TYPES

tlNORTHOCLflSE TR/?CHrTE. (^Vflf/ieE )

SOI VS8CPGI TE (avER/tCE )

Fig. 6.

The molecular coinuutriition of tlit'.se analyses luis been plotted
and is given in Fig. 6. It will be noted that whereas the normal
rocks of the series conform very closely to the curve, those rocks
which have been described as complementary in origin depart

Victorian Igneous Rocks. 283

widely from the curve, l)i)t that the hleiid of the analyses of these
rocks agrees closely with the curve.

In dealing with the differentiation of the Macedon alkali series
the assumption was made that as the lavas had in general been
poured over a fairly level plain, that their bulk would be approxi-
mately proportional to the areas occupied by them.

Working on the above assumption the average composition tjf
the alkali rocks Avas determined, and is given as No. 11 in Tables
XII. and XIII.

After the extrusion of the more acid types it was estimated that
the composition of tlie residual magma would be approximately
that given as No. 6 in Tables XII. and XIII.

It will be seen that this composition agrees very closely with
that obtained by blending the so-called complementary types in
proportion to area, and also with that of the anorthoclase olivine
trachyte from Sugarloaf Hill. Tliis suggests that after the extru-
sion of the solvsbergite and acid tiachyte the residual magma split
into two parts of similar composition, one of which gave rise to the
anorthoclase olivine trachyte and limburgite, and the other portion
split up to form the macedonite, woodendite and anorthoclase basalt.

It has been suggested that the differentiation of the alkali rocks
may be subdivided into two forms — (1) Serial Differentiation, (2)
Complementary Differentiation. To the Serial differentiation are
assigned those types which conform to the curves, and w'hich shoAv
a regular gradation in the percentage of the various constituent
oxides. The remaining types show no such regularity in their
variation, but appear to have been produced by an irregular sub-
division of a partial magma, and consequently are considered to
have been derived by complementary differentiation.

The serial differentiation of these alkali rocks may conveniently
be referred to as curvilinear serial.

The probable limiting values of the curvilinear type of serial
differentiation cannot be determined sufficiently accurately to be of
any value, owing to the difficulty of satisfactorily producing the
curves. l)ut judging from the norms of the solvsbergites and lim-
burgites the acid limit value would be composed of quartz and
anorthoclase, and the basic limit value of anorthite and olivine
with a concentration of magnetite, ilmenite and apatite.

The relationship of the Macedon alkali series to other Victorian
alkali rocks and to the Newer Basalts has been discussed elsewhere
^19). It was pointed out that the alkali lavas and the basaltic lavas
in the Macedon area occur in such close juxtaposition and were

284

H. is. SiLmmei

almost contemporaneous, so that the assumption that the alkali
series and the basaltic series were derived from two separate and
distinct magmas is hardly tenable. The conclusions may be cited :

" The authors believe that the Kainozoic volcanic rocks of Victoria
were derived from a common magma. First came the separation
and pouring out of the Older Basalts of the eastern and central
portions of Victoria. This left a magma moderately rich in
alkalies, and by some process of differentiation alkali magmas sepa-
rated out into at least three lesser magma basins, viz., at Omeo,
Macedon and Coleraine. On the exhaustion of these lesser magma,
basins, extrusion once more took place from the main reservoir,
giving the Newer Basalt series."

It will be seen that the primary differentiation of the Macedon
rocks is considered to have been the separation of the alkali magma
from the basaltic magma, and that secondary differentiation of the-
serial and complementary types then ensued, and produced the
various members of the alkali series.

(d) Lilydale Devonian Series.

As stated earlier, four analyses of rocks from the Lilydale area
have been made at the Mines Department Laboratory, and these are
given in Table XIV.

TABLE XIV.

I. II. III. IV.

SiO,

AI2O3

Fe,03

FeO

MgO

CaO

Na,0

K2O

H2O +

H,0-

CO.,

Tid.

P.O.;

Mro

NiO

CoO

BaO

Li^O

S

SO,

CI

Total

Less = S

65.8.3

68.19

68.73

69.93

14.89

14.98

13.16

15.14

0.73

0.74

1.17

1.30

4.63

2.74

2.74

2.33

1.88

.029

1.22

0.26

3.13

1.95

3.03

1.80

2.12

3.34

2.30

3.36

2.34

3.64

2.59

3.55

2.41

1.40

1.86

0.83

0.17

0.14

0.09

0.07

0.47

1.93

1.50

nil.

0.89

0.20

0.50

0.20

0.16

0.05

0.17

0.03

trace

nil.

nil.

nil.

0.10

0.08

0.09

0.05

0.01

nil.

0.01

nil.

nil.

nil.

nil.

nil.

0.13

0.27

0.20

0.30

nil.

nil.

tr.

tr.

0.10

tr.

O.IS

tr.

nil.

nil.

nil.

nil.

tr.

tr.

tr.

tr.

99.97

99.94

99.54

99.15

.04

—

.07

—

Total

99.93 99.94 99.47 99.15

I. Dante, Dandenong Ranwe.

II. Toacanito, Qnarry 1 m. N.E. of Lilydale.

III. Dacite, Railway Cntting between Lilydale and Evelyn.

IV. Toscanite, about 1 m. E. of Mooroolbark.

Victorian Igneous Rocks. 285

The four analyses have been recalculated to 100 per cent., as in
the case of previous analyses, and the results, together with tlie
molecular ratios, are given in Table XV.

TABLE XV.

I.

II.

III.

IV

SiO,

- 68.01

1.1.34

70.76

1.179

71. .30

1.188

71.76

1.19&

Al.,03

- 15.39

.151

15.54

.152

15.43

.151

13.74

.134

Feb

5.58

.078

3.62

.050

3.61

.050

4.06

.057

M^^O

- 1.95

.049

0.30

.007

0.26

.006

1.27

.032

CaO

- 3.38

.061

2.29

.041

2.14

.038

3.37

.060

Na,0

- 2.19

.035

3.46

.056

3.42

.055

2.40

.039

K,0

- 2.40

.023

3.77

.040

3.61

.036

2.70

.026

TiO,

- 0.93

.011

0.21

.003

0.20

.003

0.52

.006-

P.O5

- 0.17

.001

0.05

.000

0.03

.000

0.18

.001

Total - 100.00 1.543 100.00 1.528 10<J.(K) 1.527 100.00 1.551

It is found that these analyses do not conform to the lines of
variation of the dacite-granitic series, as shown in Fig. 3, or in the
generalised diagram, Fig. 4. The unit molecular concentrations
of three of the rocks show distinct departures from the mean
concentration of the dacite-granitic series, viz., 1.541. In the case
of the Macedon alkali rocks it has been seen that those rocks whose
unit concentration departed from the normal variation for the
series Avere probably derived by complementary differentiation.
This suggests the possibility that these Lilydale rocks may have been
produced by a similar form of differentiation. In this case there
is an absence of quantitative data such as was available in the case
of the Macedon rocks, and so no direct method is available for
determining the relative proportions of the rocks. It is possible
that an approximation to the truth may be obtained by combining
the analyses in such proportions that the total molecular ratios of
the resultant composition may be about equal to the mean molecular
concentration of the granite dacites series, viz.. 1.541. This result
will be obtained by combining the analyses in the proportion of one
part of each of the Analyses I., II. and III., and two parts of
Analyses IV. One part each of Analyses I. and III., and two-
parts of Analyses II., and three parts of Analyses IV. will also give
approximately the same molecular total.

H. S. Suininen

TABLE XVI.

1.

II.

III.

SiO,

- 70.72

1.175

70.87

1.181

70.8

1.180

Al,03

- 14.77

.145

14.73

.144

14.5

.142

FeO

4.18

.058

4.09

.057

3.6

.050

MgO

1.01

.025

0.95

.024

1.4

.035

CaO

2.91

.052

2.89

.052

2.1

.038

Na,0

2.77

.045

2.82

.045

2.9

.047

K,0

3.04

.032

3.09

.033

4.0

.043

TiO,

.48

.006

0.44

.006

.6

.008

P,05

.12

.001

0.12

.001

.1

.001

Total

- 100.00

1.539

100.00

1.543

100.0

1.544

I. Blend of Lilydale Rocks in the proportion of one part each of 1., II.,
and III., and two parts of IV.
II. Blend of Lilydale Rocks in the proportion of one part each of I. and
III., and two parts of II., and three parts of IV.
III. Composition read off from diagram (Fig. 4).

It Avill be seen that these two blends agree fairly closely with the
■composition as read off from Fig. 4, and, furthermore, these two
blends conform fairly well to the variation of the dacite-granitic
series. Therefore there seems some justification in concluding that
these Lilydale rocks may have been derived from the common stock
magma of the dacite-granitic series, but that they have been evolved
by complementary differentiation.

iJV. Relationships of Igneous Rocks to Earth movements
in Victoria.

In his Natural History of Igneous Rocks (4) Marker lays great
stress on the apparent regional distribution of the so-called alkali
.and calcic i-ocks. He considers that the areas occupied by the
.alkali and sub-alkali groups correspond respectively with the areas
•of the Atlantic and Pacific types of coast line, as defined by Suess
(21). Accordingly the names Atlantic and Pacific Branches of
Igneous Rocks were suggested, but in a later publication (5) Harker
seems to favour the terms Alkali and Calcic Branches.

It is proposed to discuss the relationship of some Victorian rocks
to earth movements in order to see whether the Victorian evidence
is in accord or not with Barker's generalisation. The rocks to be
•discussed are the Heathcotian diabases, the granites and dacites of
the Upper Palaezoic and the Kainozoic Ijasalts and alkali rocks.

(a) Heathcotian Diabases.

Victorian Igneous Bocks. ' 287

Tliu (li;il)ases of Heathcote have been fully (lesci-ihed l)y Dr.
Howitt (8), I'rofessor Gregory (3) and Professor Skeats (i). ami
the age of these rocks and similar types at Lancefield is now
generally accepted as being between Middle Cambrian and basal
Lower Ordovician. The Lower Ordovician rocks only occin- at th^
surface to the west of the Heathcote-Lancefield line, except in the
Mornington Peninsula, and Professor Gregory considered that the
area in central Victoria now occupied by Silurian sediments was
land surface during the deposition of the Ordovician Rocks, and
that the Heathcote-Lancefield line represented the eastern limit of
the Lower Ordovician.

Professor Skeats has shown that the cherts and dia))ases are
interbedded, and that the former pass out conformably into normal,
sediments. The cherts have been shown to be due, at least in part,
to the silification of stratified ash, and the inference is that this asln
was either derived from submarine volcanoes or from a series of
shore line volcanoes.

In the former case marine conditions must have extended east-
ward of this Heathcote-Lancefield line, and Lower Ordovician
rocks should underlie the Silurian. If the latter supposition be
correct, then this line may well represent the eastern limit of
deposition. At present there is no positive evidence in favour of
either of these views, but some negative evidence in favour of the
latter, viz., the absence in this locality of known occurrences of
Lower Ordovician sediments to the east of Heathcote, but the thick
covering of Silurian rocks would completely mask any possible
outcrop, so that this evidence is of very little value.

In either case, however, these eruptions of basic lava are more-
easily explained as accompanying fault action rather than fold
action. The linear arrangement of the diabase in a north and
south direction, giving rise to the Colbinabbin Range, suggests dis-
tribution along a fault line. Another possible explanation is that
the linear arrangement is entirely due to the diabases and cherts
occurring along the upper portion of an anticline.

Along the western limit of the outcrops in Victoria of Lower
Ordovician sediments similar associations of diabases and cherts
are found at Mount Stavely and at the Hummocks to the north of
Casterton. The simplest explanation is that the Lower Ordovician
marine transgression was caused by subsidence between two fault
lines, i.e., the earth movements were of the Atlantic coast type.
Movements of the Pacific coast type can give rise to a linear
arrangement of the associated volcanoes, as evidenced in the great

^88 • H. S. Summers :

chain of the Andes, but it is difficult to imagine such earth move-
ments giving the requisite conditions for the production of inter-
bedded submarine lavas and tuffs. While the evidence is not at
all conclusive, I believe that the basic lavas of the Lower Ordovician
were associated with fault movements and, according to Barker's
generalisation, should show alkaline affinities.

(b) Ujyper Palaeozoic Series.

The intrusion of the granites and granodiorites and the associ-
ated volcanic rocks are undoubtedly associated with the intense
•earth movements to which the Ordovician and Silurian formations
have been subjected. In the Macedon District (19) we have
■evidence of extensive earth movements subsequent to the deposition
of the Lower Ordovician and prior to the deposition of the Upper
Ordovician. The Kerrie Conglomerates have been shown to belong
to the Upper Oi'dovician, and there is apparently a strong uncon-
formity Ijetween these conglomerates and the underlying Lower
Ordovician. The base of the Silurian is also marked by basal con-
glomerates, and the rocks of this system are in general less
folded that those of the Upper Ordovician, so we may fairly safely
infer considerable earth movements as marking the break between
these two great periods of sedimentation. In the eastern part of
Victoria Dr. Howitt (9) has shown that the Lower Devonian was a
period of great igneous activity associated ^vith intense earth
folding. The Mansfield sandstones of Upper Devonian or Lower
Carboniferous age rest unconformably on the upturned edges of
the Silurian.

Folding over north and south axes was the prevailing type of
tectonic movement to which the Ordovician and Silurian sediments
were subjected, so that we can safely infer that the granites, grano-
diorites, dacites, etc., were associated with movements of the
Pacific coast type.

(c) Kainozoic Igneovs Series.

The Victorian basaltic rocks are certainly not associated with
fold movements, because throughout the Kainozoic Period in
Victoria there is no evidence of any earth movement of this type
■except of a purely local character. On the other hand there is
abundant evidence of Kainozoic faulting. I understand that Mr.
D. J. Mahony is working out the evidence of this Kainozoic fault-
ing, so that I will not enter into the subject at any lengtli. The
first record of Kainozoic faulting is due to Selwyn (13), who pointed
out the fault line along the eastern shore of Port Phillip. In
South Gippsland there is abundant evidence of post-Jurassic fault-

Victorian Igneous J{o<-ks 289

111^', un<l many dt' tlicse movomt'iits are uml<iul)tc'(lly of Kaiuozoic
age. Tlie Xi'wor Basalts of Victoria are mainly eonfined to the
faulted area of South-Westerii Victoiia. The (Ireat Valley of
Victoria is of the nature of a rift-valley, this area having lieen
faulted down since the deposition of the Jurassic rocks. Bass
Strait also represents another Kainozoic rift-valley.

The earth movements in Victoria during" the Kainozoic period
were of the Atlantic coast type, and on Haiker's hypothesis we
should therefore expect to find i-ocks of the alkaline branch. It has
been shown that smh do dvvuv at Macedon (19), Coleraine (2.'5) and
Omeo {l^}, Ijut with them we must associate the calcic basalts.

V. Petrographic Regions.

We are now in a position to criticise Marker's generalisation on
the relationship of the alkali and calcic branches of igneous rocks
to tectonic movements in the light of the evidence to be derived
from a study of the Victorian igneous rocks.

In the fii'st place, notwithstanding Barker's assertion that the
•characteristics of the two branches are too well known to need
recapitulation, there is distinct uncertainty as to which branch a
large number of rocks belong. In discussing the basalts of Skye
{6) Harker himself finds difficulty in their classification. He con-
siders that normally basalts belong to the calcic group, bvit that
in this case they show alkaline affinities in the presence of various
zeolites, including original analcime.

The Heathcotian diabases are probably associated with fault
movement, but there is no evidence that they show the slightest
sign of alkaline affinities. Zeolites are plentiful in the basalts of
Collingwood, Flinders, and elsewhere in Victoria, and anorthoclase
is sometimes found to be present, but the few analyses that have
been pu])lished of the Victorian Kainozoic basalts agree very closely
with the composition of basalts from other jiarts of the world, and
there is absolutely no reason for placing them in the alkali branch.
Yet these rocks must be associated with fault movements.

In our paper on the Macedon District (19) Professor Skeats and
the author advanced evidence in support of the genetic associa-
tion of the alkaline rocks of that area with the Kainozoic basalts of
Victoria. At the same time it was pointed out that similar asso-
ciations of alkaline rocks with basalts had been recorded by Daly
^2) and Marshall (10). If this genetic relationship of alkaline

290 H. S. Summers. ■

rocks witli basalts be correct, then Marker's generalisation fails
unless Ave assume that the basalts show alkaline affinities.

Turning to the granitic-dacite series of Victoria we see that they
are associated with movements of the Pacific coast type, and con-
sequently should be expected to belong to the Calcic Branch.

The analyses of the dacites from Macedon show an average of
2.55 per cent, of potash, 2.62 per cent, of soda, and 4.03 per cent,
of lime, so that they must be classed as belonging to the Sub-alkali
Group (Iddings), which is equivalent to Marker's Calcic or Pacific
Branch.

In the same way the granodiorites may be shown to belong to the
Sub-alkali Group.

The analyses of the granites from Dog Rocks, Cape AVoolamai,
Gabo Island and Mt. Buffalo show the following percentages : —

Dog: Cape Gabo Jit.

Rocks. Woolamai. Island. Buffalo.

KjO - 5.27 4.76 4.06 4.89

Na,0 - 3.30 3.00 3.38 3.12

CaO - 0.41 .65 1.31 0.84

An examination of a section of the granite from the Dog Rocks
shows that it contains two felspars, one of which is orthoclase and
the other a triclinic form showing exceedingly fine twin lamellae and
undulose extinction, and which seems referable to anorthoclass.
As this rock contains 8.57 per cent, of alkalies and only 0.41 per
cent, of lime, it is quite impossible to stretch the definition of the
Calcic Branch to include a rock of this composition. The granites
of Cape Woolamai. Mt. Buffalo and Gabo Island must also be
classed as belonging to the Alkaline Branch.

The variation diagram (Fig. 3) shows that if any reliance can be
placed on variation diagrams, then the alkaline granites are
genetically related to the subalk aline or calcic dacites and grano-
diorites, and that there is a gradual passage from alkaline to
calcic types in the granitic-dacite series of Victoria.

It will be seen that the above evidence is in distinct opposition
to Marker's generalisation. The calcic diabases of Meathcote and
the calcic basalts of the Kainozoic Period are to be associated with
movements of the Atlantic coast type and the alkaline granites of
the Dog Rocks, Cape Woolamai and elsewhere, accompany move-
ments of the Pacific coast type.

The conclusion then is that Marker's generalisation in its present
form fails when applied to the elucidation of the association of
igneous rocks and earth movements in Victoria.

Victorian Igneous Rocks. 291

VI. The Origin of the Victorian Rock Magmas.

In an earlier poitiuii of this paper evidence has been given for
regarding the Heatlicotian diabases and the Kainozoic basalts as
being associated with trough faulting, while the granites, grano-
diorites, dacites, etc.. were associated with intense earth folding.
This means that the basalts, for we may regard the diabases aa
greatly altered basalts, were associated with one type of tectonic
movement, while the granites, etc., were associated with a quite
distinct type of movement.

If we turn to the generalised variation diagram (Fig. 4) of the
differentiation products of the Victorian granitic magma, we find
that the theoretical Ijasic differentiation end product differs radi-
cally in composition from normal basalt. This means that a
basaltic rock, could not be formed as a serial differentiation
product from this magma.

In the case of the Macedon alkaline rocks it was shown that some
of the rocks were apparently derived by the splitting up of a partial
magma, and that the products so formed bore no serial relation-
ship to one another.

In the Geelong and Heathcote districts we have a certain amount
of evidence that some of the rocks were derived in a somewhat
similar way by the splitting up of a magma.

Westward from Geelong and at the foot of the northern slope
of the Barrabool Hills is a large outcrop of a basic rock which is
best described as an epidiorite. Intruded through this rock is a
well-defined dyke of granite porphyry. The field evidence is such
that there is no doubt as to the relative ages of the two rocks.

Northward from this area lies the granite massif of the Dog
Rocks. A comparison of sections of this granite with a section of
the granite porphyry dyke from the southern area show that except
for the difference in the coarseness of grain there is very little
distinction between the two, and there is little doubt that they are
genetically related. The granite area of the Dog Rocks is roughly
triangular in outline, and at the south-eastern corner is an outcrop
of epidorite. Microscopically this resembles very closely the epi-
diorite from the southern area, and again they appear to be
genetically related to one another. In this case, however, the
epidiorite is apparently intrusive into the granite, and so is
younger than that rock. Unfortunately the field evidence is not as
conclusive as could be desired, so that the relationship of tlie two
rocks cannot be stated to have been proved. The epidiorite occurs

7

n. >b. JSummers:

s on the lower slopes

of the Dog Koeks. The

{»laee to be observed

aetually in eontaet, but

for irregular veins ol

tlie ('judidi-ite may be

292

as an irregulai- in;
two roeks are in ti
what I have taken
traced out into the surrounding gi'anitc. but in all eases to no
great distanee from tiie main nuiss. Al)(iut half a mile to the west,
on the southern border of the area, is another snuiU outcrop of
epidiorite. but again the relationship is obscured by surface soil.
In both cases, however, the epidiorite occui-s at a lower level than
the general mass of the granite, and as l)efoi-e stated, frona tha
larger area veins of the epidiorite appear to run off from the main
mass into the neighbouring granite. Had it not been for the
evidence of the southern area I would not have hesitated in con-
cluding that the epidiorite was intrusive into the granite, and as
it is this conception accords best with the availaljle evidence.
Through the kindness of Mr. E. J. Dunn, analyses of the granite
and epidiorite have been made for me by Mr. A. G. Hall at the
Mines Department Laboratory. The analysis of the gi-ani\e has
already been quoted, but is given here for comparison with that of
the epidiorite, which is recorded for the first time.

TABLE XV.

I.

11.

SiO.,

.

75.99

49.25

Al,03

-

1.3.10

17.49

Fe.Og

.

0.57

1.25

Feo

-

0.61

3.95

Mgo

0.18

10.67

Cao

0.41

14.83

Na,0

.

3..30

0.75

K,o

5.27

0.06

H,0

-

0.4.0

1.44

11,0

0.14

0.14

CO,

-

nil.

nil.

Tio,

0.11

0.09

P,05

'

1 race

trace

Mno

.

0.06

0.09

NiO

0.02

0.02

CoO

-

trace

trace

BaO

-

nil.

nil.

Li.,0

trace

trace

CI.

-

trace

trace

SO 3

-

nil.

nil.

Total

-

100.16

100.03

Sp. Gr

avity

2.620

2.934

I. Granite, Dog Rocks, Geelong.
II. ]]pidiorite, Dog Kocks, Geelong.

Victorian Igneous Rocks. 293

It will Itc sL't'ii that this analysis of I'pidiorite, uven when re-
•calculated to !()() per euiit.. winild nut cunforn) to the variation
•diagram of the Victorian Palaeozoic series.

The epiiliorito, then, is elcai'ly not r-olated to the granite in a
serial manner, and although the evideiue is strongly in favour of
the two rocks being derived from a conmion magnui, they fail to
show any chemical or mineralogical relationship to one another.

It is suggested that these two rocks were derived from a eonnnon
magma by complementary differentiation, and that the basic
difiterent iatioii i^ioduct was intruded to the south, and the acid
portion to the ncu'th. At the time of intru.sion the differentiation
was not (juite eonipleto, and in the southi'rn area the residual aeid
portion separated out, and was intiuded through the basic portion
in the form of a dyke. The irregular character of tlie juiution
■of the granite and epidiorite at the Dog Rocks suggests the possi-
bility that in this ease the completion of the differentiation took
place insifu.

In the Heathcote area is a somewhat analogous occurrence. Tlie
rocks described from this area include diabase, porphyrite, diorite
and an acid rock variously called aplite, granophyre, fine-grained
granodiorite and micro-granite.

Professor Skeats (14) holds that the micro-granite is genetically
related to the diabases and represents an acid residuum from the
basic magma.

The diorite is not at all normal, and probably represents a hybrid
rock duo to a mixing of the diabasic and micro-granitic magmas.

One point of considerable importance is the absence in both
•cases of normal intermediate types. Harker (4), in discussing the
North British Tertiary Province, mentions the occurrence of ultra-
basic rocks, the eucrite group, and basic rocks associated with
granites and granophyres, but points out that it is a broken series,
types of mean acidity being al)sent.

Anothei- interesting case of the association of acid and basic
rocks without the presence of intermediate types is that of the
laccolithic sheet of Sudbury, desei-ibed by Coleman (1) and referred
to by Harker (4).

While the latter considers that the separation out of the sulphides
from the norites was probably due to the limited miscibility of the
sulphide magma with the silicate magma, he doubts whether the
.separation of the norite from the overlying acid rocks may be
oittributed to the same cause.

7a

294 H. S. Suitimers :

The evidence of the Geehjiig and Heathcote areas suggest that
magmas of intermediate coiiipositiou have split into two portions,
an acid and a basic. We have also seen that a basaltic magma
cannot be serially related to the Victorian granite-dacite series.
This suggests the hypothesis which is tentatively advanced that
wherever a molten magma of intermedite composition exists,
Avhether it be a primary magma or a secondary magma derived
by the fusion of pre-existing igneous and sedimentary rocks, then
the primary differentiation is into an acid portion and a basic
portion, possibly due to the limited miscibility of the two types.

Basaltic magmas appear to have a greater uniformity in com-
position, and to produce fewer subsidiary types, to which they are
serially related, than the magmas which have produced granite,
dacite, etc., so that possibly the governing factor in this primary
differentiation is the separation out of a basic magma of fairly
constant composition.

If this primary differentiation were incomplete, or if by assimi-
lation of other material the balance between the various constituents
in the basaltic magma was upset, then secondary differentiation
might take place, causing a separation out of a subsidiary magma
and leaving a normal basaltic magma.

If the subsidiary magma were molecularly unstable, then further
differentiation of the serial or complementary type would be
induced, giving rise to a varied facies such as is met w4th among
the Macedon alkaline rocks.

In the case of the acid primary differentiation product, judging
by the Victorian examples quoted the various types would be
evolved by serial differentiation, with possibly some minor com-
plementary differentiation as at Lilydale.

As in the case of the basic primary differentiation product, if
the molecular balance be upset either by incomplete primary
differentiation or by assimilation, then a subsidiary magma may
separate out and give rise to rocks less normal in character.
Basic segregations so conmion in the Victorian granites may be
regarded as possibly representing such subsidiary differentiation
caused by the magma assimilating foreign material during intru-
sion.

As the acid primary differentiation product would have a lower
specific gravity than the basic portion, we might expect the acid
portion to occupy the upper portion of the primary magma reser-
voir, and in case of crustal movements, due to lateral compiession,
might bo more affected than the lowei- basic portion. On the other

Victorian Igneous Rocks 295

hand, fault iiiir would >iivt' rise to L-li;unuds \i\> whirli the more
deeply-seated i^asie portion might tind a passage to the surface.
In cases where folding and faulting have accompanied one another
Tve might be expected to get an a.ssoeiation of the two types, and in
such a case hybrid rocks caused Vjy the mixing of portions of the
two magmas might be expected to occur.

VII. Summary.

The aim of the present paper has been to discuss the relationship
of certain Victorian igneous rocks and to see what deduction may
be made from such study.

The differentiation of several series has been treated at some
length, especially with reference to the use of variation diagrams,
and it has been shown : —

1. Variation diagrams constructed from analyses which have

been recalculated to 100 per cent, with the water omitted
and with all the iron converted to ferrous oxide give a
better representation of the serial relationship of a group
of rocks than diagrams constructed from original analyses.

2. There is an apparent relationship between the shape of the

variation curve of the total molecular ratios and the shape
of the curves, indicating the serial relationship of the
rocks. Thus in the Victorian Upper Palaeozoic series the
variation of the total molecular ratios of the recalculated
analyses (i.e., the molecular concentration) can be ex-
pressed by straight lines, and the variation of the oxides
may also be expressed by straight lines. On the other
hand the variation of the oxides in the Macedon Kainozoic
series must be expressed by means of curved lines in agree-
ment with the curvilinear variation of the molecular con-
centration.

3. The conception of the complementary diffeientiation of

certain of the Macedon alkali rocks is upheld by the mole-
cular concentration cuive. A similar type of differentia-
tion probably accounts for the origin of certain of the
Upper Palaeozoic series occurring at Lilydale.
The limits of the differentiation of the Victorian Upper Palaeo-
zoic series are discu.ssed at some length, and it is found that the
theoretical acid limit value is a bimineralic compound consisting
approximately of 39 per cent, quartz and 61 per cent, alkali
felspar, and that the theoretical basic limit value, if we neglect

296 H. S. Siiinmers :

the iron oivx, is also a l)iniiiiL'ialie eoiiipound e-oiitaininir appi'oxi-
mately 41 per (.-eiit. of aiiipliil)olt' or pyroxene and 59 pei- cent, of
anorthite.

Barker's generalisation as to the relationship of Ixaiidies of
igneous rocks to tectonic movements is criticised, and evideme is
advanced to show that in its present form it fails when applied to
Victoria.

The origin of igneous rocks is briefly dealt with, and it is; sug-
gested that the primary differentiation of a parent magma is into
two portions, a basic and an acidic. The basic poi'tion gives rise
to the basalts, gabbros, norites, etc., jand the acid or dacitic magma
by serial differentiation produces andesites, rhyolites. granites, etc.
Other rocks are subordinate in amount and are believed to be due
to subsidiary differentiation of a partial magma from the basaltic
or dacitic magma when the molecular balance of the latter ha^*
been upset by assimilation of foreign material or by incomplete
primary differentiation.

VIM. References.

1. Coleman. A. P. The Sudbury Laccolithic Sheet. Journ.

Geol.. Vol. XV.. Pt. II.. 11)07, pp. 75!)-7?<2.

2. Daly. K. A. Magmatic Differentiation in Hawaii. Journ.

Geol.. Vol. XIX.. No. 4. 1!)11. pp. 289-31G.

3. Gregory. J. W. Tlie Heathcotian. a Pre-Ordovician Series

and its distribution in Victoria. Proc. Hoy. Soc. Vic. Vol.
XV. (n.s.). Pt. II.. 190:5.

4. Harker. A. The Natural History of Igneous Rocks. London.

1909.

5. Harker. A. Presidential Address— Section C— Brit. Ass. for

Adv. of Science. Portsmouth. 1911. pp. :{70-:}81.

6. Harker. A. The Teitiary Igneitus Hocks of Skye. Mem. of

Geol. Surv. of Unit. Kingdom. 1904.

7. Howitt. A. W. Notes on the Rocks occurring between Lime-

stone Uiver and .Mount Leinster. Iiep. .Mines Dep. Vic,

1H90. pp. ;5o-;5;}.

8. Howitt. A. W. Notes on Diabase and Adjacent Fitrmations

of the Heathcote District. Special l{ep. Dej.t. of .Mines Vic.
1896.

9. Howitt. A. W. Various papers on Gippsland. Q.J.G.S..

Proc. Hoy. Soc Vic. .Mines Dept. Publications.

Victorian lyneiHis Rockx. 297

1(». Marshall. P. (K-t-aii ( '(.iitoui's and Karth Mc.vfi.ifiitK in the
S..uth-\Vest Pacific. Aust. Ass. Adv. 8ii.. Brisbane. 1909,
J.,,. 4:{2-4r.().

11. .MiC.y. V. KeiM.it (.11 Palaeontology for the year 1889; Vio-

t..ria. Ann. Hep. See. for Mines, 1889, pp. 23-24.

12. Richards. H. ('. Ow the Separation and Analysis of Minerals

in the Daeite of .Mount Dandenong, Victoria. Proe. Roy.
Soe. Vic. Vol. XXI. (n.s.). Pt. II.. 1908, pp. 528-539.

13. Sehvyn. A. K. ('. Progress l\e])oit on the Select Commission

on the Coalfields, Votes and Proceedings Legislative Assend)ly
of Victoria. 1856-7.

14. Skeats, K. W. On the Kvid.-iice of the Origin, Age and

Alteration of the Rocks near Heathcote. Victoria. Proc.
Roy. Soc. Vic, Vol. XXI. (n.s.), 1908, pp. 302-348.

15. Skeats, E. W. The Volcanic Rocks of Victoria. Pres. Add.—

Sec. C.— Aust. Adv. Sci.. Brisbane, 1909. pp. 173-235.

16. Skeats, E. W. Notes on the Geology of .Moorooduc in the

Mornington Peninsula.

17. Skeats, E. W. Notes on the Geology of the You Yangs, Vic-

toria. Aust. Ass. for Adv. Science, Adelaide. 1907, pp.
387-396.

18. Skeats. E. W. Gn the Occurrence of Nepheline in Phonolite

Dykes at Omeo. A.A.A.Sc, Sydney Meeting, 1911, pp.
126-131.

19. Skeats. E. W.. and Summers. H. S. The Geology and Petrology

of the Macedon District. Bulletin of the Geological Survey
of Victoria. No. 24. l!tl2.

20. Stillwell, F. L. Ni.tes on the Geology of Broadmeadows. Proc.

Roy. Soc Vic. Vol. XXIV. (n.s.), Pt. I., 1911, pp. 156-178.

21. Suess, E. Das Antlitz der Erde (English Translation), 4 vols.,

Oxford. 1904.

22. Summers, H. S. (ieology of the Proposed Nillahcootie Water

Conservation Area. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic, Vol. XXI. (n.s.),
1908.

23. Summers, H. S. Prelindnary Note on the Alkali Rocks of

Dundas. A.A.A.Sc. Sydney Meeting. 1911, pp. 132-139.

24. Woodward. A. S. On a Carboniferous Fish Fauna from the

Mansfield District. Victoria. Mem. Nat. Mus. Melbourne,
No. 1, 1906.

[Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.S.), Part II., 1914.]

Ar'I". XX. — Is Eucalyptus frutlcetorum, F. v. M., identical
ivitk E. 'polyhractea, R. T. Baker I

By J. H. MAIDEN

(Government Botanist of New South Wales, Sydney.)
Communicated by Pi-ofessor A. J. Evvai-t.

[Read November 18th. 1913].

In this Journal xxvi. (New Series), p. 148, is a paper " On
Eucalptus polyhractea, R. T. Baker," by Mr. Baker, in which he
gives an account of my endeavours, with imperfect material, some
of it of dubious origin, to ascertain the identity of E . fruticetorum,
F.v.M. Mr. Baker ceased his researches with the year 1910, end-
ing with an imperfect reference to my Crif. Rev. Eucalptus, ii.,
40-41.

The actual reference

" Oil the occasion of a recent (July, 190'<) visit to the Melbourne Herbarium
I came upon an excellent specimen, bearing a label, entirely in Mueller's
handwriting, as follows: — Eucalyptus fruticetorum, F. v. M., liower Avoca
(Wedderhurn) Scrub. W. Percy Wilkinson, 1892."

I had never seen it before, although I had worked on Wilkinson's specimens
labelled by the late Mr. J. G. Luehmann, and transmitted by that gentleman
to Sydney, and it had probal)ly been mislaid (with many other specimens)
in the confusion which took place after Mueller's death. I shall fully figure
it in my " Forest Flora of New South Wales" in due course, and it is identical
in every respect with type specimens of E. polyhractea, R. T. Raker.

The type specimen seems to have been lost. I made a personal search in
tho Melbourne Herbarium for it, with the kind help of Professor Kwart ; and
no ti'ace of it can be found at Kew, so Colonel Prain is good enough to tell me.
There is no good reason to doubt the correctness of Mueller's determination
of this characteristic specimen of liis own species."

I was not able to carry out my promise as regards my " Forest
Flora of New South Wales" until Part XLII, 28 (1911), through
circumstances beyond my control, hut no one has been prejudiced
in any way by tlio delay.

The twig of A', frutlrctonim F.v.M. that 1 depicted at Plate 156
of my Forest Flora was faithfully drawn, as anyone can see by
referring to the original in the Melbourne Herbarium.

EdCAili/ptus Fruticetoritin. 299

Mr. Baker [op. cit. p. liSj states that he was shown a specimen
bearing Mueller's label, " E. fruticetorum," but does not quote the
furtlier particulars on that label. Perhaps it was Mr. W. Percy
Wilkinsons specimen. I repeat that that specimen was labelled by
Mueller E. fruticetorum in 1892. 1 further say that this specimen
is identical with a plant which Mr. Baker believed to be new in
1900. and named by him E. polyhractea.

If these two statements of mine are wrong, Mr. Baker should
point out the error or errors, and I will gladly withdraw them. I
have bestowed much care on the elucidation of Mueller's E. fruti-
cetorum, and, since 1908 believe that finality has been attained.

At p. 149 Mr. Baker says Mueller's description of E. fruticetorum
is too meagre upon which to place any systematic work, yet at p.
150 ho assumes (paiallel cohuiins) that the contrary is the case.

I have done my very best to ascertain the species-names of the
older workers in Eucalypts, and have revived more than one nanie
from unmerited oblivion.

Having found Mueller's fruticetorum (not the type, for that is
lost, but the next best thing, a specimen certified by the describer),
all the previous surmises, founded on imperfect and even doubtful
material, give way (as far as I am concerned) to my latest pro-
nouncement. A botanist has a right, like any other person, to be
judged by his latest decision.

Mr. Baker's criticism is entirely negative as regards E. fruti-
cetorum: he does not make a single suggestion as to wliat it may
be, but leaves it a name, in spite of Mueller's own identification of
it.

In passing, let me say that one must not apply the microscope
too closely to the descriptions of Eucalyptus species by the older
l)otanists. (Surely the same thing applies to other groups of
jilants and animals). One must try and find out what they meant;
what they did not mean is less important. <^^n mote tlian one occa-
sion when in conversation I confronted Mueller with difficulties of
this kind, he gave his ruling, and added, " We must read descrip-
tions philosophically " — a favourite word of his.

He obtained a great acquisition of Eucalyptus inaterial at the
time he wrote the description of E. fruticetorum, namely, during
the writing of the second volume of the Fragmenta. The confusion
he made with his E. hemiphloia (see Fraijm. ii. G2. and also my
€rit. Rev. ii.. 14), is an extreme case.

Smith confused both his E. resinifera and ^'. piperita, but
years afterwards. Smith being dead, and the types lost, Bentham

300 J. H. Maiden: Eucalyptus Fruticetom/m.

gave liis interpretation of them, without introchKing an additional-
name, and no one has ever disputed his decision. He has not even
a Smith-named specimen, type or no type. I could give other
examples.

Mr. Baker, at p. 151. points out that the Blue Mallee of Victoria
(Inglewood. etc.j, and of New South Wales (Wyalong) are identical,
which is what I pointed out in my " Forest Flora of New South
Wales." in 1911. Indeed. I have also shown that it extends to
South Australia.

To Mr. Baker's apjieal to drop the name fntt icetorum because
some distillei's are selling its oil undei' tlie name E . [xjlijhractea,
I have nothing to say, except that our efforts should be in the
direction of ascertaining the correct name as regards every
species. The correct name, when ascertained, will stand for all
time, and the sooner such is ascertained the sooner we shall arrive
at stability of nomenclature, which is surely the aim of all careful
taxonomists.

[Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.S.), Part II., 1914.

Ari'. XXI. — Description of New and Rare Fossih obtained
by Deep Boring in the Mallee.

Part TT. — Mollusca.

F. CHAPMAN, A.L.S.

(Palaeontologist to the National Museum),

AND

C. J. GABRIEL.

(With Plates XXI\ .-XXVIII.)

[Read 13th November, 1913].

MOLLUSCA.

Class PELECYPODA.

Fam. NFCULIDAE.

Genus NUCULA, Lamarck.

NucuLA OBLiQUA, Lamarck.

Nucula ohliqua, Laniarck, 1819, Aniin. sans Vert., vol. vi ,
pt. i., p. 59. Hedley, 1902, Mem. .Austr. Mus. Sydney,
No. iv.. p. 292.

In the present borings A. ohliqua, Lamarck is represented by
some identifiable fragments and one perfect valve. The latter,
together with numerous specimens in the Dennant collection, bears
out our conclusion that in the oldest of our Tertiary beds the
ancestors of the living species are represented by a more depressed
shell, of thinner build, and more acute at the umbones ; inter-
mediate forms are found in the Janjukian series at Table Cape;
whilst in the Kalimnan beds of Grange Burn and elsewhere, the
eame species had already attained characters seen in the living
N. obliqua.

Disfributio?i.— Bore 8. 165-180 feet. Bore 9. 254-256 feet.

^02 Cltapman and Gabriel :

Fam. LEDIDAE.
Genus LEDA, Schumacher.
Leda huttoni, T. Woods.
Leda hiiffoni, T. Woods, 1878, Proc. Linn. See. N.S. Wales,
vol. iii. pi. .xxi. fig 2, Tate, 1886, Trans. R. Sec. S.
Austr. vol. viii. p. 130, pi. vi. fig. 4.
A single, rather worn, but nevertheless undoubted valve of the
•above species occurs in the Mallee borings. In examining this
specimen, together with numerous examples of L. huttoni, in the
Dennant collection, we are struck with the close morphological
affinities of his species with L. lefroyi, Beddome, living on the
southern Australian coasts. It only materially differs from that
species in the more regularly convex ventral margin and heavier
dentition.

Distribution. — Bore 8, 165-180 feet.

Fam. PARALLELODOXTIDAE.
Genus CUCULLAEA. Lamarck.

CUCULLAEA CORIOENSIS, McCoy.

Cucullaea corioensis, McCoy, 1876. Prod. Pal. Vict., dec.
iii. p. 32, pi. xxvii., figs. 3, 4, 5a, b.
In the examination of some fragments of heavy examples we
note a uniformity in the Mallee specimens, in that they show
the transverse undulose ornament with the convexity on the radial
ribs pointing towards the ventral margin. The two heaviest speci-
mens figured by McCoy show the same feature, whilst the remainder
and those from Muddy Creek in the Dennant collection exhibit a
similar ornament, but with the undulations directed to the dorsal
margin.

JJistribuf ion. —Bore 8, 199-204 feet. Bore 9. 263-273 feet; 315-
325 feet.

Fam. ARCIDAE.

Genus LISSARCA. E. A. Smith.

lilSSAKCA RUHKlCArA, Tate sp.

Li?nopsis rubrirafa, Tate, 1887. Tran.s. Roy. Soc. S. Austr.,
vol. ix., p. 71. pi. v., fig. 6.

Lissarca rubricata, Tate sp., Verco, 1907, Trans. Roy. Soc.
S. Austr., vol. xxxi. p. 221, Gatliff and Gabriel, 1908,
Proc. R<.y. Soc. Vict. vol. xxi. (N.S.), pt. I. p. 390.

New and Rare Foss/h. 303

A typical valve of this species was found associated with fossils
of a Kalimnau facies in the Malice bore. The present specimen has^
been carefully compared with living examples from the Victorian
coast, and found to be identical in the minutest particulars.

Distribution.— BovG 2, 198-2U0 feet.

Genus GLYCLMERIS, da Costa.

Glycimehis maccuyi, Johnston sp. (Plate XXIV., Figs. !•")).

Pectunculus laticosfafns, McCoy, non Quoy and Gaimard,.
1875. Prod. Pal. Vict. dec. ii.. p. 26. pi. xix.. figs.
10- U.

P. M'Coiji. Johnston, 1885, Proc. R. Soc. Tas. for 1884, p..

199.
P. McCoi/ii, Johnston, Tate, 1886. Trans. R. Soc. S. Austr.,
vol. viii. p. 137.
From a lengthy and minute examination of numerous specimens
of the above species from Balcombian, Janjukian and Kalimnan
strata, we are able to make the following observations. The
examples afford an interesting study of a series of mutations of one
species through a comparatively long geological epoch, which
species meantime preserves its essential characters.

1. The fossil specimens figured by McCoy under the name of
Pectunculus laticostatus, Quoy and Gaimard, represent the toler-
ably distinct mutations (in Waagen's sense) of the one form. They
are : —

Form a. — A small shell from Grice's Creek (Balcombian) : length
(ant. -post.), 14.75 mm.; height, 14 mm. (PI. xxiv.. fig. 1). Also
larger valves from Corio Bay (Janjukian), length. 42.25 mm. ;
height, 42 mm. Characterised by 32 riblets in the small shell and
by 34 riblets in the large one.

Form h. — A large and ponderous shell from Bird Rock (Jan-
jukian) : length, 64 mm. ; height, 67 mm. Characterised by 40
riblets, practically equal to that of the recent Glijcimeris laticos-
tatus, Q. and G. (PL i. figs. 2, 3.)

2. The typical form of G. maccoyi diagnosed by R. M. Johnson
has 29 riblets. (PI. xxiv. f. 4.) His type form was described from
the Table Cape beds (Janjukian); a similar form, but smaller, is-
found in the Balcombian of Mornington, Muddy Creek older beds^
and the younger series at Corio Bay.

.304 Chapman and Gabriel:

:]. Aicoinpanyinf; the typical (t. maccoiji at Table Cape (ex At-
kinson coll. in the National Museum, Melhouine). are shells in
every way ci.uiparable with the form approaching G. laticosfatus,
Q. and (i.. and figured by McCoy from Bird Rock. This we refer
to form b (antea).

4. The several mutations of the above species sliow it to com-
mence in the Balcombian as a moderate-sized shell with about 29
riblets, persisting into the Janjukian. Side by side with this form
the mutation b springs up, but disappears before the Kalimnan.

5. The Kalimnan variant (form c) resembles tlie Balcombian
(small var.) species, btit is even smaller, and retains the Janjukian
character of form b in having a more deeply concave umbonal
cavity. (PI. xxiv. fig. 5.) Its archaic character is seen in the num-
ber of its riblets, 26-30 (F.C. coll. in Nat. Mus. Melb. from Mac-
Donald's, Muddy Creek).

6. The Bird Rock and Table Cape variant, form b, is ilearly
the Janjukian ancestor of G. Inticostafiig, Q. and (i. {furnia rem),
which later on inhabited the Pliocene sea at Wanganui. and is now^
confined to the area round New Zealand and the Chatham Islands.
From G. laticosiatus, Q. and G.. the form b of Table Cape and
Bird Rock differs in having a longer shell (ant. -post.) and a more
finely striated ligamental area. (PI. xxv. fig. 6.)

7. In the Kalimnan series G. fiKicco/// merges into G. subfngo-
nalis, Tate,2 by the truncation of the anterior cardinal angle.

All the specimens of G. maccoyi from the Mallee bores belong to
form a, having fewer riblets and moderate dimensions.

Distrihution.— Bore 5, 162-163 feet; 175-189 feet. Bore 6, 158-
161 feet. Bore 8, 165-180 feet; 199-204 feet; 204-210 feet. Bore
5, 254-256 feet.

Fain. TKKIONIIDAE.
Genus TRIGONIA. Bruguieie.
Trigonia lamarcki, Gray. (PI. XXV., Figs. 7-9).
Trigoiiia lamarckii. Gray, 1838. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.,
vol. I., p. 482, Reeve, 18(;o. (^.nch. Icon. vol. xii. pi.
i.. figs \<i-v. T. Woods, ISSS. (Journ. Hoy. S.>c. N.S.
Wales, vol. xxii.), p. 163, pi. x. figs. 16. 17: pi. xiv.
figs. 25, 26.

1. Typicaiexami)le8ofy.Zaf,co«fa^(k-,y. and G. sp., from the Wauiraiuii I.eds of N. Zealand,
.are in the Melbourne National Museum.

•2. Trans. R. Soc. S. Austr., vol. viii. (for lSS4-.'->), l«8(l, p. l.tT, I'l. xi., fij;s. 6«, ('.

New and Rare Fossils. 305

A solitai-v t'xainj)k' of the alxivc species was found in the Malloe
material. It is (juitf typical l)(>tli in the eostate ornament witli blunt
jiroeesses an<l in the heavy chaiaiter of the shell. It is most inter-
esting to Jiieet with this s|n'(ies. which has not l)eeTi recorded south
of Port Jaeksdii as a living shell. U>y it occurs here in presumably
passage beds between the Janjukian and Kaliiiinan series of the
Mallee.

A well-known KaliTiman offshoot of this polyphyletie form of
Triijoiiiii is si'cn in 7'. hoiritil .McCoy, which has the same ornament
(see pi. XXV. tig. 10). but is stouter, heavier and with fewer libs; a
form moi'e adapted to shore conditions, as denoted by the fauna
iiocompanying tliat shell.

Distrihufioii. — Bore 9. M'^-'.VIT) feet.

TuinoNiA mak«;akitacI';a, Lamarck, var. acuticostata, McCoy.
(PI. XXVI., Figs. Vl and Via, b).
Triijoiila aciificosfafa, McCoy. 1866. Geol. Mag. vol. iii. pp.
481, 482, fig. 1. Idem. 1875. Prod. Pal. Vict. dec. II..
p. 21, pi. xix., figs. 1, 2. T. niar;/ar/f(iren. Lam. var.
acuticostata, McCoy, Hedley, 1902, Mem. Austr. Mus.,
Mem. IV. pt. 5. p. :i01, tigs. 47. 48.

McCoy, in his original description of the al)ove fossil, alludes to
the distinction between this variant of 7'. iiuirgaritacea, Lam. and
the species, T. lamarcki. Gray, and T. pert i unto. Lam. ( = T. mar-
gar itacea) in having a " remarkable compression of the ribs into
acute angular ridges; and from the same cause the spinous
tubercles do not form the broad. l)lunt. transver.se tubercles which
they do in the recent species, in which latter tlie ridges foini
broad, obtusely flattened, almost square ribs when viewed from tlie
margin in a position \\\ which those of the present species form a
series of acute angles. ""i

That this distinction is only varietal has already been pointed
nut by .Ml-. Hedley (loc. supra cit. p. 301), who is not followed in
this, however. l)y Messrs. Pritrhard an.l (;aTlift.2 The fossil
examples cori-esi»ond with tiie living T. nmnjariiacfa (.see pi. xxv.
tig. 11), in having a lighter and less inflated shell as compared with
T. laiiuirchi : also in being more oblique and liaving more actite
ribs. It is never found lower than the Kalimnan series (Lower
Pliocene) in the geological scale.

1. Loc. cit., 1875, p. -li.

2. Pioc. Roy. Sw. Victoria, vol. xvi. (n.s.), pt. i., 1904, pp. 235-237. See also Piitdiard, Vict.
Nat, vol. xxiil., w. (i, lOOC. p. US.

306 Cliapmaa and Gabriel :

The recent examples of T. margaritacea, var. acuticostata from
Bass Strait determined by McCoy have all the requisite characters
of the fossil variety, and specimens in the Dennant collection from
Jemmy's Point exactly resemble them in the fewer number of ribs.
(See pi. xxvi. figs. 13«, h.

T . Diargarifacea has been recorded from the Werrikooian (Pleis-
tocene) of Limestone Creek, Glenelg River, by Mr. J. Dennant.^
On referring to the Dennant collection, however, we find the only
specimen of Trigonia from Limestone Creek there represented be-
longs to T . lainarcki.

A variety of T. mar gar it acta, in which the scales of the ribs
are flattened out in an almost spatulate fashion, has lately been
described by Dr. J. C. Verco, from St. Vincent's Gulf, and else-
where along the South Australian shores, to which he gives the
varietal name, hednalli'}

Distribution.— Bore 2, 198-200 feet. Bore 3, 226 feet. Bore
6, 154-158 feet; 158-161 feet. Bore 9, 315-326 feet. Bore 10,
230-254 feet; 264-296 feet.

Fam. PECTINIDAE.
Genus PECTEN, Miiller.

Pecten murkayanus, Tate.

Pecten. murrayauus. Tate, 1886, Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust.,
vol. viii. p. 105, pi. vii. figs. 5a, h.

This species affords an interesting illustration of the close re-
lationship between many of oar Tertiary species of moUusca and
those now living, generally in lower latitudes, around the Austra-
lian coast and in the adjacent seas. P. marrayanus is clearly a
progenitor of the group of pectens represented by P. leopardu&
Reeve-3 (W. and N. Australia and New Caledonia); P. Solaris,
Born sp.* (China Seas and Amboyna); and P. kuhnholtzi, Ber-
nardi-'' (New Caledonia). In all four species, the costation and con-
centric ornament are precisely identical, if a fairly extensive series-
is taken. A constant character in all is shown in the crowding of
the concentric lamellae near the umbonal region, their opening out

\. Hec. Geol. Siirv. Vic-t., vol. i., pt. ii., 1903, p. 146.

2. Trans. Koy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxxi., 1907, p. •lii. pi. \xviii., fijrs. 1 .'5.

3. Icon. CoiK-h, 18.52, pi. xxxii., flj,'. 145.

4. Index Mus. Cats. Vind., 1778, pt. i., Testacea, pi. \i , tin 4- •'^*?'' ''•'^o So\verl).v, Thes. Conch.
1842, pt. ii., p. ,55, pi. xii., fijfS. 7, 8, 22.

,5. .Journ. dc Conch., 1863, vol. viii., p. .'CS, pi. xiii., fiu. 1.

New and Rare Fossils. 307

in the medium area, and dense condition repeated in the ventral
area. The above conclusions have been arrived at after a pro-
longed study of the living shells above noted.

Distribution.— Bore 1. 216-244 feet. Bore 3, 226 feet. Bore
4, 163-170 feet. Bore 5, 162-163 feet; 175-189 feet.

Fam. MYTILIDAE.

Genus ARCOPERNA, Conrad.

Arcoperna scapha, Verco. (PI. XXVII., Fig. 16).
Arcoperna scapha, Verco, 1908, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.
vol. xxxii. p. 196, pi. xii. figs. 1-5.

Observations. — A typical example of this species, in no wise
differing from the living form, occurs in the present series. It is
the first recorded occurrence of this genus as an Australian fossil.
The species is well-known as a recent form by Dr. Verco's published
description ; that author recording it from Beachport at 49 to 200
fathoms; off Cape Jaffa, 90 and 130 fathoms; off Cape Borda, 55
fathoms ; and oast of Neptunes, 45 fathoms, all in 8. Australia.
Dr. Verco's record of Mr. Hedley's report of the species in New
South Wales is 22 miles east of Narrabeen, at 80 fathoms. One of
us (C.J.G.) has obtained it off Wilson's Promontory.

In the Dennant collection specimens labelled " Verticordia sp."
can be referred to this genus. They are from Brown's Creek,
Spring Creek and Hamilton Creek, Janjukian localities which may
be on the same or a lower horizon than the present specimen which
is associated with a mixed Kalimnan and Janjukian fauna. The
shells from the undoubted Janjukian localities mentioned, differ
however, in the stronger decussate surface ornament and rough
growth-lines, and probably represent another species.

Distribution. — Bore 3, 226 feet.

Fam. CRASSATELLITIDAE.
Genus CRASSATELLITES, Kruger.
Crassatkllites kingicoloides, Pritcliard.
Crassatellites kingicoloides, Pritchard, 1902, Proc. Roy.
Soc. Vict., vol. XV. (N.S.) pt. i. p. 94, pi. xiii. figs. 1-3.
IV. pt. 5, p. 315, woodcut, fig. 55.

Up to the present this species has only been recorded from the
Gippsland Lakes Tertiary deposits at Jemmy's Point, It has, how-

308 Chapman and Gabriel :

evev, been identified bv us in the Nat. Miis. eolleetion from
Beaumaris.

In the Mallee borings the species is fairly abundant at the
Kalimnan horizon, associated with such typical fossils as Limopsin
henumarieiii^ist, Chapm. and BafhyactiK beauman'ensis, Dennant.

A point Avorthy of special remark is the absence from the boring
material in the Mallee, of the allied form, Crassatellites catnurus,
Pritchard ^ ; a species which was described from the Western Dis-
trict of Victoria (Grange Burn and McDonald's, near Hamilton),
and. so far as we know, has not occurred elsewhere. This alliance
of the fauna with the Jemmy's Point facies of the Kalimnan, rather
than with that of the shallow-water facies of the Hamilton District
(Upper beds), is further borne out by the occurrence in the Mallee
of TurritelJa pagodula, a common Jemmy's Point fossil.

Even in fragments it is tolerably easy to distinguish G. l-ingi-
coloid.es from 6'. camiirus by the relatively greater depth in the
former of the posterior adductor impression, and, what is even
more striking, the large, deep and broad lunule and its trans-
versely striated character as compared with C . camurus.

Distribution.— Bore 1, 208-210 feet. Bore 2, 198-200 feet. Bore
3, 226 feet. Bore 4, 163-170 feet. Bore 5, 155-159 feetj 175-189
feet. Bore 6, 154-158 feet. Bore 8, 199-204 feet; 204-210 feet.
Bore 9, 263-273 feet; 315-325 feet. Bore 10, 254-296 feet; 3lO-320
feet.

Genus CUNA. Hedley.
CuNA COXCENTRICA, H^edley.

Cii/ia vonceiifricd, Hedley, 1902. Mem. Austr. Mus.. Mem.
iv. pt. 5, p. 315. woodcut, tig. 55.

The above species, first described by Mr. Hedley from shells
found in dredgings off the coast of New South Wales, shows certain
variations within limits; but the chief characters are so distinct
that there is *no difficulty in matching it with our fossils from
the Mallee bores at the Kalimnan horizon (L. Pliocene).

The living specimens have been recorded from Port Kembla,
63-75 fathoms, by (\ Hedley; and from Balmoral Beach, shore-line,
by one of us (C.J.(t.). Both localities are in N.S. Wales.

Cuna edenfata, Verco,- living in the Gulf of St. Vincent, S
Australia, resembles the above species in both fossil and recent

1. Loc. supra fit., 1902, p. 96, pi. .xiv., fljfs. .'. ',».

2. Trans. Ro.v. Soc. S. Austr., vol. .\xxii., 1908, p. a.iT, pi.

New and Rare Fossils. 309

^examples, with the distinction, however, that the denticulatious
on the inner vential border in (J. conctntrica are wanting in
Verco's Bpecies.

Distrihutwn.—BoYQ 8, 204-210 feet. Bore 9. 263-273 feet.
Bore 11, 175-197 feet; 197-199 feet.

Fam. CONDYLOCARDIIDAE.
Genus CONDYLOCARDIA. Bernard.

■CONDVLOCARDIA TKNUICOSI'AK, Sp. HOV. (Pi. XXVll., FigS. \1 ll-C ;.

Description. — Shell very small, shining, of a cream colour.
•Ovate wedge-shaped, inequilateral; inflated at the umbonal region
and depressed towards the ventral. Dorsal margin straight; an-
terior end tapering and bluntly rounded at the ventral angle;
posterior end short and widely rounded towards the ventral.
Interior of shell smooth, with feeble muscular impressions; ven-
tral edge on the commissure bearing a series of minute depressions
and elevations, passing into thin, diminishing riblets within.

External surface sculpture consisting of about 36 narrow, de-
pressed or sub-acute riblets, slightly varying in strength and dying
out before reaching the umbonal area; crossed at irregular inter-
vals by several w^ell-marked concentric growth-lines.

Cardinal border, short, straight, Left valve with a strong bifid,
imedian cardinal tooth, and feeble anterior and posterior lateral
■teeth; right valve with a triangular anterior cardinal, behind
•which is a deep fossa for the median cardinal of the left valve.

Prodissoconch smooth, subovate, slightly salient post-ventrally ;
•umbonal aspect depressed.

Dimensions. — Holotype (left valve) from Bore 10. 310-320 feet.
Length, 2.15 mm.; height, 1.77 mm.

Observations. — This species is a very distinct form. It shows
.some relationship to Condylocardia pectinata, Tate and May sp.i
in its general form and hingement, but in that species the orna-
ment is a coarse radial ribbing instead of fine costulations, as in C
tenuicostae.

Distribution.— Bore 8, 225-226 feet. Bore 10, 186-190 feet; 225-
230 feet (paratype); 310-320 feet (holotype). Bore 11. 175-197
feet; 197-199 feet.

1. Carditella pectinata, Tate and May, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxiv., 1900, p. 103.
Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, vol. xxvi., 1901, p. 435, pi. xxvii., fij^. 96, 97. See also Hedley, Ree.
Austr. Mus., vol. vii., No. 2, 1908, pi. xxv., figs. 43-45.

8a

310 Chapman and Gahrid :

Fam. CARDITIDAE.
Genus CARDITA. Brubudiere.
Cardita calva, Tate. (Plate XXVIL, Fig. 18).
Cardita calva, Tate, 1887. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol.
ix. p. 189, pi. XX. fig. 14.
This species is not found below the Kalimnan series. As Tate
remarks, it is nearest allied to C. compacfa, but is distinguished
by the smooth umbones. and it also slightly differs in shape.

C. calva is very abundant in the younger beds in the Mallee
bores, and shows a surprising amount of variability in the surface
ornament. One of the extreme forms is now figured, in which the
cancellate ornament, produced by the crossing of the concentrics
by the radials is confined to a narrow strip on the posterior
margin.

This species is found graduating into Cardita dilecta, var.
excelsior, Verco, ^ a living Australian form; some specimens of the
fossils matching it so closely as to be inseparable.

Distribution.— Bore 1, 215-244 feet. Bore 3, 201-220 feet; 226
feet. Bore 5, 163-175 feet. Bore 6, 114-150 feet; 158-161 feet. Bore
8, 165-180 feet; 210-219 feet. Bore 9. 254-256 feet; 263-273 feet;.
315-325 feet. Bore 10, 230-254 feet. Bore 11, 197-199 feet.

Cardita spinulosa, Tate.
Cardita spinulosa, Tate. 1886, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,.
vol. viii. p. 153, pi. ii. fig. 3.

This species is evidently very closely related to Carditella tor-
resi, E. A. Smith, 2 which, by the way, according to that author,,
is not typical of the genus Carditella, in its ligamental characters.^*
The only difference between the recent species quoted and our
fossil specimens appear to be in the lighter hinge area of the living
form.

Cardita spinulosa, Tate, is represented in the bore by small
specimens of the normal subrotund shape of the neanic examples,
as distinguished from the ventrally truncated forms in the gerontic
stage.

Distribution.— Bore 3, 226 feet. Bore 6, 158-161 feet. Bore 10,
310-320 feet.

1. Venericardia dilecta, K. A. Smith, v.ir. excflmor, Verco, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxxli.,.
1908, p. 348, pi. xiv., fit,'. 9. Cardita calva, Tate. Gatliff and Gabriel, Proc. Roy. Soo. Victoria,,
vol. XXV. (n.H.), pt. i., 1912, p. 173.

2. Rep. (Jhall. Zool., vol. xiii., Lamellibraiifhiata, p. 'JIT, pi. xv., fi(;8. 8. 8a.

3. Loc. Bupra oit., p. 218.

New and Rare Fossils. 311

Fain. LEPTONIDAE.
(iciius KOCHEFOKTIA. Velain.

KoClfKFORTIA DON'ACIFDUMIS. An<,'a.S .sp.

Mi/sella (/onacifor/nis, Angas. 1878, P)oc. Zool. Lond., p.

86:3. pi. liv. fig. 1:3.
Roehefortm donaciformis, Angas. sp., Dall. 1900. Trans.
Wagner Inst., vol. iii. pt. 5. p. 1157. Hedley. 1902,
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.8. Wales, vol. xxviii. pt. i. p. 7,
pi. i. figs. 10-14.
This species is recorded as living on the coasts of Victoria,
Tasmania and N.S. Wales. Our specimens are identical in all
•essential points of shape, ornament and hingement. with the recent
specimens.

Distrihution. — Bore 11. 542-544 feet; 544-546 feet.

Genus ERYCINA, Lamarck.
Erycina micans, Tate sp.

Kellia mica lis, Tate. 1887. Trans. Roy. Soc. Vict., vol. ix.
p. 148. pi. six. fig. 13.

This common Kalimnan fossil is generically related to the living
Erycinas of the Australian coast. It closely approaches Kellia
■angasmna, Tate,i a form which may eventually find its place in
the above genus, from which it differs in the stronger cardinal
dentition and usually present concentric ornament.

In Kellia tlie hinge is lighter and the shell non-punctate. The
shell in Lepton is typically more depressed and the hingement is
slighter.

The living Erycina parra, Deshayes,- has a similar shell, but
with a more convex ventral border; the valve-surface, moreover,
is conspicuously pitted instead of microscopically so, as in E.
micamt. The dentition is identical with that of E. inicans.

The related E. porva has been fotind fossil in the Pliocene of
Wanganui. X. Zealand, by R. Murdoch, 3 and as a living species
is found in New Zealand, Victoiia and N.S. Wales.

1. Ti-.aiis. Roy. Soc. S. Au!^r., vol. ix. (18S6), 1887, p. t>8, p). v., fijf. 7.

1. Kellia parm, Deshayes, Proc. Zool. Soc. I.oiid., 1855, p. 182. Erycina acupuncta, Hedley,
Mem. Austr. Mus., No. iv., pt. 5, 1902, p. 321, woodcut fi^'. 60. h'ryciiia parva, Desh. sp., Hedley
Trans. N. Z. Inst., vol. xxxviii., 1905, p. 73.

:i. See Hedley, loc. supra cit., p. 74.

312 Cliapmaii and GaJn-iel :

Distributio/i .—Bovii 6, ll-i-lSO feet. Bore 7. 142 feet 3 inclies-
155 feet. Bore 10. 225-2;3() feet; 310-320 feet. Bore 11. lOT-lOa-
feet

Fam. DONACIDAE.
Genus DONAX, Linne.

DONAX KENYONIANA,^ Sp. nov. (PI. XXVIL, FigS. 1 9rt, />, 20.-.U.1 21.)

Description. — Shell, triangularly elongate-ovate, very ine((uila-
teral, the anterior extremity being much larger than the posterior;
depressed convex, flattened towards the ventral and anterior, and
with a distinct depressed area on the ventral behind the median,
line; ventral margin nearly straight, incurved near the keel;,
antero-ventral angle well rounded, posterior sub-angulate; um-
bonal keel elevated and sharp. Surface of shell with purple and'
cream colour-bands in well preserved specimens. Growth-lines
conspicuously marked, crossed by fine, radial striae, stronger
towards the posterior. Interior of shell smooth, with the commis-
sure raised within and flattened towards the outer margin, in clean
specimens closely and finely vertically striated.

Dimensions. — Length of holotype (medium-sized example). 12
mm.; height, 7.75 nmi. Length of a larger specimen, paratype.
33.75 mm. Shell sometimes attaining a length of about 33 mm.

Observations. — The above species differs from Donax depressa,
Tafce,2 a Murray cliffs fossil, in its more elongate form and striatedi
inner margin. In the latter character it resembles D. deltoides,
Lamarck, ^ a species still living on the Victorian coast, but from'
which it is at once separated by its greater length and thinner
build.

Distribution. — Bore 7. 142 feet. 3 inches-155 feet. Bore 8. 160-
165 feet; 165-180 feet. Bore 10. 186-190 feet; 195-225 feet; 225-
230 feet; 310-320 feet.

Fam. CORBULIDAE.
Genus CORBULA. Lamarck.
CoRBULA coxi, Pilsbry.
Corbula coxi. Pilsbry. 1897, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad.,
p. 363, pi. ix. figs. 1-3. C. scophoides, Dennant and
Kitson. non Hinds. 1903, Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., vol.
i. pt. 2. p. 139. C. coxi, Pilsl)ry. Gatliff and Gabriel,
1909, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., vol. xxii. (N.S.) pt. i. p. 44.

1. Named after Mr. A. S. Keiiyoii, of the State Rivers and Water Supply Coininissioii.

2. Trans. R. Soc. S. Austr., vol. ix., 1887, p. I(i8, pi. xvi., fin. 11.

3. Anini. sans Vert. (ed. Deshayes), \ol. vi., 1819, p. 241. I'ritchai-d and Gatliff, I'roc. K. Soc-.
Vict., vol. xvi. (N.S.)pt. i., 190;{, p. 118.

New and Rare Fossih. 313

In working out the several species of Corbula occurring in the
Mallee bores, it was tliscovered that a discrepancy exists regard-
ing tht' identity of the Kalinman species found at Grange Burn
and (ithLM- h)(.alities. which has hitherto been referred to Hinds'
species C. scaphoides. The hitter species, a figure <>f whicli is
given in the Challenger Report, i is. however, a high, stiongly uni-
bonate form with deep sulci, generally comparable with C. epha-
milla, Tate, 2 but not so heavily structured.

One of us (C.J.G.), in writing to Mr. E. A. Smith, of the British
Museum, has had the benefit of that gentleman's dictum regarding
the Victorian species. C. coxi, Pilsbry. which Mr. Smith recog-
nised amongst specimens sent to him, and which he compared with
typical specimens in the British Museum (Nat. History). London.
These specimens have been carefully studied in comparison with
some of ours from the Mallee bores, which show them to be identi-
cal; and at the same time agreeing with specimens in tlie Dennant
collection from the Victorian Kalimnan. determined by that author
as C . scaphoides, Hinds.

Distribution.— Bore 1, 215-244: feet. Bore 3, 266 feet. Bore 4,
163-170 feet. Bore 5, 155-159 feet; 163-175 feet; 175-189 feet.
Bore 6, 114-15U feet; 158-161 feet. Bore 8, 165-180 feet; 180-199
feet; 204-210 feet; 210-219 feet. Bore 9, 254-256 feet; 263-273
feet; 315-325 feet. Bore 10, 160-186 feet; 186-190 feet; 225-230
feet; 230-254 feet; 254-296 feet; 310-320 feet.

Corbula kphamilla, Tate.

CorhuJd fphamlUd, Tate. 1887. Trans. Koy. Soc. S. Aust.
ol. ix. p. 176. pi. xii. figs. 13«7, />, 14.

In the course of diagnosing the differential characters of the
Corhuloe in the Mallee borings, the close relationship of ('. tun/'
cata. Hinds, 5 to the above species was very apparent. The only
difference being the usually heavy, iiicrassate chai-acter of the shell
cavity of the anterior area.

The trur ('. scd plioidcs. Hinds, 4 is also extremely close, both in
shape and ornament, when tlie adult shells are compared; the chief

1. Hinds, Proo. Zool. Soc. Loud., pt. xi., 1843, p. 56. E. .\. Smith, Rep. Chall., Zool. vol. xiii.
pt. XXXV., 1885, p. 32, pi. vii., fij,'s. 3, 3n, 36.

2. Tr.ans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. ix., 1887, p. 176, pi. xvii., fij,'s. VMt, b, 14.

3. Proc. Zool. Soc. Ix)nd., 1843, p. 55.

4. Cf. E. A. Siiiitti, loc. supi-n cit.

314 Chapman and Gabriel :

differences being the usually heavy and thickened structure of the
shell in Gorhula ephamilla , along with the greater attenuation of its
anterior.

Distribution.— Bore 1, 2US-210 feet. Bore 3, 226 feet. Bore
4, 163-170 feet. Bore 5, 165-169 feet; 162-163 feet; 175-189 feet.
Bore 6, 114-150 feet; 150-154 feet; 154-168 feet; 158-161 feet.
Bore 7, 142 feet 3 inches-155 feet. Bore 8, 165-180 feet; 180-199
feet; 199-204 feet; 204-210 feet; 210-219 feet. Bore 9, 254-256
feet; 263-273 feet; 315-325 feet. Bore 10, 220 feet; 254-296 feet;
310-320 feet. Bore 11, 199,209 feet.

Class SCAPHOPODA.

Fam. DENTALIIDAE.

Genus DENTALIUM, Linne.

Dkntalium aratum, Tate.

Dentalium aratum, Tate, 1887, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr.,
vol. ix. p. 192, pi. XX. fig. 8, Idem, ibid., 1889, vol.
ixiii. p. 265.

A critical examination of the recent related forms of the above
genus has resulted in the following conclusions : — The Australian
Dentaliidae form a large group, the characters of which show
a great amount of variation. D. aratum is no exception, and the
species most likely to be confused with that form are the living D.
robustwn, Biazier,' D. intercdi.atnm, Gould,'- and D. fvancisense,
Verco.3 D. robustum can be separated by the absence of longi-
tudinal striae. A constant feature of the costation in D. inter-
calatum is in the ribs becoming distinctly rounded in later growth.
In the case of D. franclsense we agree with Verco, who remarks, " I
am inclined to think that even this species is but an extreme variant
of the D. iiitercaldtum, Gould."

Distribnfiof I. —Bore 1. 215-244 feet. Bore 3. 226 feet.

1. Proc. Liiiii. Soc. N.S. Wales, vol. ii., 1877, p. 56. Hedle.v Rec. Austr. Miis., vol. iv., No. 3.
1901, p. 128, pi. xvii., fijf. 32.

2. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. HiHt., vol. vii., ISfiO, p. 106. SowvrUy in Reeve's Icon. I'onch, vol
xviii., 1872, pi. vii., fi;,'. 40.

3. Tran^:. Ro.v. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxxv., 1911, p. 2(i7, pi. xxvi., fiffs- 1, 1".

New <ind Rare Fost^iU. 315

K.'iiii. SIPIIONODEXTALIIDAE.
Ceiiiis CADULUS. Philippi.
Cadulus ACUMINATUS, TatH.

Cadulus acii/ni/iatus, Tate, 1887, Trans. Roy. Soc. S.
Aust., vol. ix. (for 1885), p. 194. Idem. 1899, ibid.,
vol. xxiii. (for 1898-9), p. 266, pi. viii. fig. 12.

Observations. — This species is separated from 0. infans^ by some
•slight characters, which are nevertheless constant. It is an interest-
ing point with regard to the above species that as a fossil, C. acumi-
natus is confined to the Lower Pliocene (Kalimnanj or " Oyster
beds " of Aldinga. whilst C. infans is only found at Muddy Creek,
in beds of the same age. This is an additional proof of the relation-
ship of the Mallee Cainozoic marine fauna with the rest of the
Murray Gulf occurrences, for the Hamilton Kalimnan sea appears
to have been partially shut off from the former by the porphyry and
.granite cliffs of south-western Victoria.

G. acumiyiatus is found living around the coasts of New South
Wales, Victoria and South Australia.

Distrihutio7i. — Bore 11, 175-199 feet.

Class GASTEROPODA.

Fam. DELPHI NULIDAE.

Genus LIOTIA. Gray.

LiOTiA DENNANTi, sp. nov. (Plate XXVII., Figs. 22, 23).

Description. — In form somewhat trochoid, consisting of four
■u'horls; the first two somewhat depressed with a slightly discernible
fine medium keel, becoming more pronounced in the third and
fourth whorls ; the last whorl subangulate, with a narrow, sub-
.jingular median and basal keel. Sutures excavated. The area
between the keels depressed or gently concave, the surface crossed
with fine, curved threads. Surface of each whorl immediately
below the suture faintly nodulose.

Dimensions. — Height. •"^.5 mm. ; greatest diameter. 4.5 mm.

Affinities. — This species appears to be nearest allied to the living
Liotia mayana, Tate,., It essentially differs from that species, how-

1. Tate, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. x.xiii., 1899, p. 266, pi. viii., fiff. 11.

2. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxiii., 1899, p. 227, pi. vi., figs. bae.

316 Chapman and Gabriel:

ever, in its more trochoid form, in tlie stronger thiead-like surface
ornament, and in the excavated sutures.

Observation.^. — A well preserved but aberrant or distorted
variant of this species occurs in the Dennant Collection (Nat.
Museum), from the Lower beds of Muddy Creek (Balcombian).

Di.-<fribiifio/i.—Bort^ 8. 180-199 feet.

Fam. TROCHIDAE.
Genus EUCHELUS. Philippi.

ErcuKLUS BACC.\TUS, Menke sp. (Plate XXVI., Fig. 14).

Monodonta harrafa. Menke. 184*3, Moll. Nov. HoU., p. 14,.

No. 5.
Eiichehi^ hnrratiis, Menke, sp., Tryon, 1889. Man. Conch.,
p. 435, pi. Ixii. figs. 72, 73.
Oh.se r vat 1 0/1. — The Mallee example appears at first sight to have
a neater and more concise ornament than fresh shells of this living
species. The difference, however, appears to be more apparent
than real, and produced by the process of fossilisation. In the
characters of the beaded spirals, the obliquely interstriated areas
and the absence of a true umbilicus, it agrees with the somewhat
variable species E. hoccafnx. The fossil specimen here occurs in
a mixed Janjukian and Kalimnan fauna, but the shell is probably
of the latter age.

D'lKtrihuf ion. —Bora 5, 175-189 feet.

Cenus CLANCITHI8, Montfort.

ClancULUs sp., afF. ALOYSII, T. Woods.

C'lancvlns aloydi^ T. Woods, 1876, Proc. 11. Soc. Tas., p.
155. Trochu.< (f'In/ici//iis) (iJof/.^ii, T. Woods sp., Tryon,
1889, Man. Conch., vol. xi. \^. 59, pi. xiv. figs. 20-23.
Ob.strrafion.^. — A specimen in the iieanic stage occurs in one of
the bores, the ornament of whirli is clearly that of a Clanriilus. In
its subacute liration and iiitrrstiiatc areas, it most nearly re-
sembles the above species., f.'. ti/o//.<ii is a connnon living Australian
species.

Dlsf, -ihiif ion. —lioiv 3, 201-220 feet.

New ami Rare Fossils. 317

Farii. UMBONIIDAE.
Genus TEINOSTOMA, H. and A. Adams.

Teinostoma oepressula, sp. nov. (PI. XXVII., Figs. 24«, b).

Description. — Shell depressed convex; on apical face sutures
flush with surface. Periphery rounded. Umbilicus filled in with
a callus, but the area is distinctly concave. Aperture subovate.
Surface polished, and under a high power finely striated with
growth-lines.

Dimensions. — Greatest diameter, 1.84 mm. ; height, .75 mm.

Observations. — The above species occurs in three samples of
strata in Bore No. 10, all of which contain a Kalimnan fauna,
and therefore the horizon of the species is definitely known.

Distribution.— ^OYQ 10, 186-190 feet; 195-225 feet; 225-250
feet.

Trinostoma pulcherrima, sp. nov. (PI. XXVII., Fig.s. 25«c).

Description. — Apical aspect naticoid, depressed; whorls rapidly
widening, consisting of three coils. Lower side depressed, and
concave in the umbilical area ; umbilicus only partially filled with
callus. Surface marked with fine, but definitely incised growth-
lines, which under a high power are seen to be crossed by fine
sulcate markings, giving the surface a highly ornate appearance.
Aperture sub-quadrate.

Dimensions. — Greatest diameter, 4.75 nmi. Height, 1.75 mm.

Observations. — The above species is an aberrant form of Teino-
stoma. and on account of the partially open umbilicus might
eventually find a place in Cossmann's genus Bonnetla.^

A second specimen was found in the Ixn'ings in tliL' Mallt't-. hut
not figured. It belongs to the same specific type, but shows a slight
variation in liaving the' sutures of the whorls on the aj)ical side
more excavate and the whorls themselves less rapidly increasing in
width. The surface ornament is identical, whilst the aj)ertui-e
is of the same general form, but morr CDundly ovate, owing to the
narrower terminal whorl, and the uinl)iiicus is slightly nioi-e open.

Affinities. — There appear to be no fossil or living i-epresenta-
tives of this form of shell closely appioaching it in all chaiacters.
perhaps the nearest being the living Teinostoma orhitinn. Hedley,-

1. Aiuiales Soc. Roy. Zool. et Malac. Belg., vol. .\li., 1906, p. 207. (Genotype figiiieii on \>\. ix.,
fiff. 16 ter-1).

i. I'roc. Linn. Soc. X. S. Wales, vol. xw., I9uti, pt. i., p. 96, fiys. It 1.=..

318 Chapman and Gabriel :

of Port Darwin and Tori'es Stiait. Tlic living species has a thinner
lip and stronger spiral surface-markings.

Distribution.— Bore .'J. 201-220 feet (var.). Bore 10, 225-230
feet (Holotype.)

Genus CYCLOSTREMA, Marryatt.

Cyclostkema homalon, Verco.

Cyclostrema homalon, Verco. 1907. Trans. R. Soc. S. Austr.
vol. xxxi. p. 305, pi. xxix. figs 3, 4. Gatliff and Gab-
riel, 1913, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., vol. xxvi. (N.S.),
pt. I., p. 75.

Observofio/is. — This is a living species on the South Australian
and Victorian coasts. It is distinguished from Petterd's earlier
■described Cyclostrema harrieffae, which also occurs in the borings,
by its wider umbilicus and coarser spiral markings.

Some examples of Cyclostrema in the Dennant collection (Nat.
Museum) from Guerard's Hill (Janjukian), and from the Gippsland
Lakes (Kalimnan). if not identical Avith the above species, are closely
allied to it.

The present occurrence is from a Kalimnan horizon.

Distribuf ion. —Bore 10. 195-225 feet.

Cyclostrema harkiettak, Petteid.

Cyclostrema Jiarriettae, Petterd, 1884, Journ. Conch., p.
141, No. 24. Tate and May, 1901. Proc. Linn. Soc.
N.S. Wales, vol. xxvi. pt. 3. p. 396. pi. xxv. figs.
46-48.

0/tservations. — This species, like the precctling, is here i-ecorded
as a fossil for the first time, and it is interesting to note its occur-
rence as far down as the Kalimnan. Its undoubted relation to
the form separated by Dr. Verco as C. homalon is also demon-
strated in the fossil specimens, and the two forms occur on the
same stratigraphical platform.

C. harriettae is a living species on the Victorian and Tasnianian
coasts.

DisfributioN.—Bovt' 6. 114-150 feet.

Neiv and Rare Fossils. 319-

Fam. EULIMIDAE.
Genus EULIMA. Kisso.

EULIMA FINCJUICULA, sp. IIOV. (PI. XXVIl., Fi<,'. 26).

Description-. — Shell pyramidal, (?) subacute at apex; whorls
seven, the earlier ones subdepressed, gradually becoming more
convex, the last being rather swollen. Sutures well marked.
Aperture long-ovate, with a thin callosity on the columellar
margin. Surface polished.

Dimensions. — Length (circ), 5.5 mm. Width (circ), 2 mm.

Observations. — Four specimens of this rather distinct species
were found at one horizon in one of the Bores. It has a larger
aperture than E. danae, T. Woods. 1 whilst the whorls are more
convex, and the apex is less acute.

The living species, Eulima inflata, Tate and May, 2 of Tasmania
and Victoria, is a shorter shell with a more circular aperture;
otherwise it bears some resemblance to the above species.

Distribution.— Bore 10, 225-230 feet.

Fam. PYRAMIDELLIDAE.

Genus PYRAMIDELLA, Lamarck.

Pyramidklla jonksiana, Tate sp.
Odontostomia {Syriiola) jonesiana, Tate, 1898, Trans. R..

Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxii. p. 70; p. 82 (fig.)
Pyramidella jonesiana, Tate sp. Pritchard and Gatliff,
1900, Proc. R. Soc. Vict., vol. XIII (N.S.), pt. I. p.
147.
Observations. — The above species was first described by Professor
Tate from fossil specimens (Werrikooian) from the Tintiiiara Bore,
S. Austi-alia.

P. jonesiana is related to P. tincta, Angas sp.,3 another recent
Victorian species, but is distinguished from the latter by its
greater breadth.

It is noteworthy that this is another living species occurring also
in the Cainozoic strata of Victoria and S. Australia. It is found

1. Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, vol. iv., 1880. p. 2, pi. 1., fig. 1.

2. Trans. 11. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxiv., 1900, p. 95. Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, vol. xxvi.,.
1901, pt. 3, p. 381, pi. XXV., fig. f>8.

3. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1871, p. 15, pi. i., fig. 11.

4^20 Chapman and Gabriel :

Jboth in the Werrikooian (Upper Pliocene) and the underlying
JCalimnan (Lower Pliocene) in the Mallee Bores.

The distribution of the living examples is Flinders and Western-
tport, Victoria.

Distribution. — Bore 1, 215-244 feet. Bore 6, 114-150 feet. Bore

10. 160-186 feet; 186-190 feet; 195-225 feet; 225-230 feet. Bore

11, 197-199 feet.

Genus TURBONILLA, Risso.

TUHBONILLA WEEAHENSIS,' sp. HOV. (PI. XXVIll., FigS. 27(1, h).

Description. — Shell turreted, moderately elongate. Holotype
^vith eight flattened whorls and a heterostrophe apex; whorls
slightly concave below the sutures. Aperture subquadrate, lip
thin. Surface of shell with about 24 shallow, sinuate sulci on each
Avhorl. Sutures well marked. The shell-surface between the sulci
iinely striate, longitudinally.

Dimensions. — Height of holotype. 7.25 mm. Greatest width,
:2.5 mm.

Distrthiition.—^ovQ 10. 225-230 feet; 310-320 feet.

Fam. CAPULIDAE.

Genus CALYPTRAEA. Lamarck.

Calyptkaea KALiMNAE, sp. nov. (PI. XXVIII., FigS. 28a-c, 29).

Description. — Shell of thick substance, sub-circular in basal out-
line. Spire excentric; apex slightly exsert. Sutures well marked,
whorls slightly to gently convex, marked by growth lines, corruga-
tions and striae, except on the first two whorls, which are smooth.
Base marked by sinuous growth-lines. Umbilical region with a
■callus and very small perforation.

Dimensions. — Major diameter of holotype (from Dennant coll.),
10 mm. Height, 6.5 mm. Diameter of a typical specimen from
the Mallee Bore, 4 mm.

Observations. — The above species is represented by a large num-
ber of immature examples in the Mallee bores. They all occur on
the Kalimnan horizon. Since they are undeveloped specimens it
has been considered necessary to select as a holotype of the species
a fine example from the Dennant collection (lal>elled Calyptraea
«p.) from the Gippsland Lakes.

1. Name derived from Co. Weeah in which the bores are situated.

New and Rare FoHt>'ds. 321

Affinities. — C. kalimnae is undoubtedly closely allied to C.
placuiia, Tate,i from tlie Aldiiiga Cliffs and the Adelaide Bore, S.
Australia. It differs, however, from that species in its incrassate
type of shell, more evenly convex whorls, thicker carinate edfje and
sub-circular rather than circular outline.

Distribution. — Bore 5, 155-159 feet. Bore 6, 114-150 feet.
Bore 8, 165-180 feet; 204-210 feet. Bpre 9, 254-256 feet; 256-263
feet; 263-273 feet; 315-325 feet. Bore 10. 186-190 feet; 254-296
feet.

Fam. NATICIDAE.

(^enus NATICA, Lamarck.

NaTIC.\ SUBINFUNDIBULUM, var. CRASSA, Tate.

(PI. XXVI., Figs, loa, b).
Notica sabinfundibulun , var. crassa, Tate, 1893, Trans. R.
Soc. S. Austr., vol. xvii. pt. 327.
Observations. — Tate refers to this variety as " distinguished
simpl}' by its thick test and usually larger size, attaining to 20
mm. in length and width." The size of present specimen is con-
siderably greater than that given l)y Prof. Tate, having a length
of 50 mm. and a width of 52 nun. It was fortunately jammed
in the convolutions of the shell auger, and so escaped comminution.
This variety, crassa, has been found in both the lower and upper
beds of Muddy Creek (Balcombian and Kalimnan), and at Beau-
maris (Kalimnan). In the present case the associated fossils indi-
cate a Kalimnan age for the horizon of this variety.
Distribution. — Bore 10, 220 feet.

Fam. RISSOIDAE.

Genus KISSOA, Freminville

RlSSOA GATLIPFIANA, sp. nov. (Pi. XXVIII., Fig. 30).

Description. — Shell minute, conical and subelongate; moderately

thick and polished. Whorls four; depressed convex, excepting the

body whorl ; the last two whorls ornamented with closely-set, tine,

spiral incised lirae, about 24 on body whorl. Suture well marked.

Apical wliorl flattened. Aperture ovate, lip protracted behind,

where its margin is dehiscent from the body whorl; laminate

internally.

Dimensions. — Length, 2.3 mm.; greatest width, 1.16 mm.

1. Trans. R. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xvii., pt. 2, 1893, p. 331, pi. vii., fig. 4.

322 CJiapman and Gabriel :

Observations. — This very distinct little Eissoa does not seem
to be matched or even approached by any other form, living or
fossil, at any rate in Australian faunas. We take the opportunity
of naming the species after our friend Mr. J. H. Gatliff, who has
worked so assiduously amongst the gasteropod fauna of the Vic-
torian coast.

Distribution. — Bore lU, 225-230 feet, four specimens).

Sub-genus ONOBA, H. and A. Adams.
RissOA (Onoba) bassiana, Hedley. (PI. XXVIIL., Fig. 31).

Ofioba bassiana, Hedley, 1911, Zool. Results. F.I.S. " En-
deavour," Part I., p. 108, pi. xix. fig. 25.
Observations. — This species was lately described by Mr. Hedley
from off Devonport, Tasmania (depth unrecorded), and it is alsa
known from Port Albert, Victoria (Gatliff and Gabriel). It is
interesting to meet with this additional example of a species which,
whilst occurring in the Kalimnan of the old Murray Gulf, still-
remains in evidence as a component of the living moUuscan fauna
of Bass Strait. The fossil example here figured has a length of
5 mm., whilst Hedley's type measures 4.5 mm.

Distribution.— Bore 6, 158-161 feet. Bore 8, 165-180 feet; 180-
199 feet; 204-210 feet. Bore 9, 315-325 feet.

RissoA (Onoba) chrysalida, sp. iiov. (PI. XXVIIL, Figs. 32, 33).

Description. — Shell pupiform, stoutly built, polished. Whorls-
four, depressed convex, with a spiral or helicoid apex of two and
a half turns. Sutures shallow, excavated. Aperture circular, lip
thick. Faint colour bands parallel with and near to the sutures
are seen in some specimens. Under a high magnification surface
marked with fine growth lines.

Dimensions. — Length, 3.1 mm.; greatest width, 1.5 mm.

Observations. — This neat little shell is a characteristic fossil of
the Kalimnan series in Victoria. It is a rather variable form in
regard to the height of the whorls, and an extreme variety from
the Dennant coll. is here figured, in addition to the central type-
form. The same shell was named in MS. by Mr. J. Dennant as E.
chrysalida, and in the Dennant collection (Nat. Museum) there are
numerous examples collected from the upper Ijcds of Muddy Creek.

Distribution.— Bore 8, 166-180 feet; 180-199 feet; 204-210 feet >
210-219 feet. Bore 9, 254-256 feet. Bore 10, 254-296 feet.

X^no (iiul Rarr Fos.siU 323

Kam. TIRKITELI.IDAE.
Genus THKRITKLLA. Lamarck.

Tlkritklla ciKCLMi-ifJATA, V^erco.
2'urrittlhi circumli(jota, Verco, 1910, Trans. R. Soc. S.
Austr., vol. xxxiv. p. 123, pi. xxx. figs. 3. 4.
Observations. — The two individuals found in the bore liave been
compared with living specimens received from Dr. Verco, obtained
off Beachport, S. Australia, at 110 fathoms. They are separable
from the thickly corded varieties of T. fristira, Tate,l by having
two heavy ligae. the anterior of which is generally separated into
three by deeply incised spiral furrows, the central division being
the thickest. The surface of the spiral cords is marked with fine
oblique striae.

Distribution. — Bore 3, 226 feet.

TURRITELLA PAGODULA, Tate.

Turritella par,o(iiiIa, Tate. 1893, Trans. K. Soc. S. Austr.,
vol. xvii. pt. 2. p. 336, pi. viii. fig. 10.

Observations. — This species has hitherto been recorded from
three localities of the Kalimnan series, viz., Gippsland Lakes,
Beaumaris and Horsham. It is absent from the Hamilton beds,
but occurs in some abundance in the Mallee bores, thus pointing
to the isolation of the former locality in Lower Pliocene times
from the Great Murray Gulf area, which had direct connection with
the Port Philip and Bairnsdale Kalimnan shore-line. The Mallee
specimens are typical.

Distribution.— Bore i, 163-170 feet. Bore 5, 155-159 feet;
163-175 feet; 175-189 feet. Bore 6, 114-150 feet. Bore 8, 165-
180 feet; 180-199 feet; 204-210 feet; 225-226 feet. Bore 9, 254-
256 feet; 315-325 feet.

Fam. CERITHIIDAE.
Genus CERITHIUM. Bruguiere.
Cerithiu.m TORRii, Tate.
Cerithium torrii, Tate, 1899. Trans. R. Soc. S. Austr., vol.
xxiii. p. 109, pi. I. fig. 2.
Observations. — A partially pyritised specimen occurs in this
series. In places the shell still remains intact, and shows the

1. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xvii., 1893, p. 338, pi. viii., fl<,'. 8; pi. x., fig. 3.

324 (Jh(i,/)i)i<i,ii and (jiihrii'l:

"closely und luimitely retioulate-liiied " smiacf cliaiatlciistic: of
this species. The general form of the shell is iieai- C />rifcfiardi,
Harris, 1 but the whorls are flattened and the costate ornament
occupies the whole height of each tuin.

G. torrii was first deso'iljed by Prof. Tate from material obtained
at the bottom of a dee}) well at Tareena on the Muiiay. in New
South Wales, just acioss the Victoi-ian border.

Distribution.— 'Qore 5. 162-Hi,S feet.

Fan.. CASSIDIDAE.
<^enus CASSIS. Lamarck.

Cassis contusus, 'I'ate.

Cassis roiitiisiis, Tate, 1899. Trans. ]\. Soc. S. Austr., vol.
xxiii. p. 108, pi. I. figs, hi, h.
Observations. — A fi-agment of this species was found in the
Mallee bores. The contused markings arranged in three spiral
rows round the body whorl are a characteristic feature in this
species. It Avas originally described, like the preceding species,
fi'om a Avell-boring at Tareena. on the Murray, in New South
Wales.

l)istriI>nfion.—^ovii 2, 198-200 feet.

Sub-genus SEMICASSIS (Klein), .\lorch.
Cassis (Skmicassis) subgranosa, Tate sp.

Semicassis subgrdiiosa, Tate, 1889. Trans. \\. Soc. S. Austr.,
vol. xi. p. 166. pi. vii. fig. 10.
Obser ratio IIS. — This rare species is disi iiii;iiislic(l I'ldui <\ (N.)
semigravosii by the stronger costate (Miiamcni ami llir sjiirally sul-
cated body whorl.

The only locality hitherto yielding tliis spr.ies is Edithburg,
Yorke's Pcninsida, S. .\usti-alia, where it oirurs in the " hard
raggy limestones."

Distribution. — Bore 6. 154-158 feet.

1. Oat. Tei-t. MoUusca, Aiistralasia (Brit. Mus.), 1S97, p. •2-2(i. pi. vii., fijf.

Nev: and Rnre Fo.ssKs. 325

Fain. Hl'CCLMDAE.
(ieiius NASSA. Martini.
Nas.sa spirali.scai{r.\, sp. iiov. (PI. XXVIII, Fig. 31).

Description. — Shell long — ovate, with a shar})ly pointed apex.
Whorls below the apex four to five* depressed, and sliglitly concave
in the posterior third; apex of three and a-half smooth Avhorls.
Surface ornament consisting of moderately thin costae, becouiing
beaded towards the suture. Body whorl more inflated, and spirally
scratched by fine grooves, which pass across the longitudinal libs;
the spiral grooves less conspicuous on the earlier wIkhIs. Sutu)es
deeply excavated; whorls tabulate. Outer lip with external mar-
ginal varix; internally with feeble denticulae. Columellar aiea
with a moderately broad callosity, anteriorly denticulate.

Dimensions. — Height of holotype. 10. o mm. : greatest width,
5.25 mm.

Affinities and Observations. — The nearest related form to the
above species is Nassa lahecula, Adams, i From that form it differs,
however, in its longer or more turreted shell and a less extent of
■ callus on the inner lip, and more numerous ribs.

N. spiraliscabra is associated with distinctive Kalimnan species
in the samples present.

Distribution.— Bore 6, 114-150 feet. Bore 8, 199-204 feet.

Fam. VOLUTIDAE.

Genus MARGINELLA, Lamarck.

Marginella hordeacea, Tate.
Marginella hordeacea. Tate. 1878, Tians. R. Soc. S. Austr.,
vol. I., p. 91.

Observations. — The Mallee specimens are not so broadly ovate as
-those from the type locality of Tate, namely, Aldinga, S. Aus-
tralia. Examples of the shell in the Dennant coll. (Nat. Mus.) show,
however, that the species varies in the same locality, but iii different
proportions. For instance, in the Kalimnan of Muddy Creek the
majority of shells are broadly ovate, and a few (n'ute ; from Aldinga.
of two specimens in the collection named, one is narrowly ovate,
the other broad; and from the (Jipjisland Lakes they are nearly all
Ijroad forni.s. The spire is not .so exsert as in M. proeforniicida.

1. I'roc. Zool. Sue. Lond., 1851, p. <)S. Reeve, Conch. Icon., vol. viii., 1855, pi. n.w., figf. 166.

9.V

.326 Chapman and Gabriel :

nest described, and the shell is smooth; otherwise it somewhat re-
sembles that species in general contour and in the arrangement
of the plaits.

Distribution.— Bore 10, 225-230 feet.

Marginella praeformicula, sp. iiov. (PI. XXVIII., Fi<<. 35).

Description. — Shell of medium size, volutiform. of solid build.
Spire of medium length, conspicuously exserted. Whorls four, con-
vex, and with about ten sharp plications on the shoulder of the
body whorl. Sutures with a flattened, depressed area. Aperture
long, sinuous and expanded anteriorly. On the dorsal aspect of
the shell the lip margin is limbate, or thickened wdth a varix.
Columellar plaits four, the anterior large and oblique, the two
posterior small and transverse.

Dimensions. — Length, 8.5 mm. ; greatest width, 5 mm.

Affinities. — The nearest form to the above species is the living
Australian Marginella formicula, Lamarck. ^ In that shell, how-
ever, the plicae are more numerous and less acute; the whorls are
more tabulate; the outer lip less expanded posteriorly; and the
number of whorls five, against four in M. praeformicula. The
fossil species foreshadow^s all the characters of the above-mentioned
living form so closely that there can be little question of its being
ancestrally related.

Distribution.— Bore 3, 201-220 feet; 226 feet. Bore 5. 155-159-
feet; 175-189 feet. Bore 6, 114-150 feet; 158-161 feet. Bore 7.
142 feet 3 inches-155 feet. Bore 8. 165-180 feet; 180-199 feet; 199-
204 feet. Bore 9, 315-325 feet.

Fam. TEREBRIDAE.

Genus TEREBRA, Lamarck.

Tkkehra profunda," sp. nov. (PI. XXVIII., Fig. 36).

Description. — Shell cerithioid, elongate, consisting of nine-
broad, convex whorls and a protoconch of two and a-half whorls.
Longitudinal costae nine on each whorl, subacute and transversely
scored by fine sulcose lines, eight on the penultimate whorl. Sur-
face of whorls posteriorly depressed concave, anteriorly convex.
Sutures deeply impressed. Aperture subquadrate.

Dimensions. — Length, 10.75 mm.; greatest with. 3.25 mm.

Distribution.— Bore 10, 225-230 feet.

1. Anim. sans Vert., vol. x.. 1822, p. 441. Reeve, Conoh. Icon., vol. xv., 1864, pi. viii_
figs. 28a, h.

2. Tli.it is, obtained hy deep boring.

iV'iin and R(iri' Fossils. 327

Fam. PLEIHOTOMIDAE.

Genus PLEUKOTOMA. Larniuck.

Sul)-geiius DIMLLIA. Gray.

Plkuuotoma (Dkillia) dilkotoidkk, sp. iiov. (PI. XXVI TT., Fii^. 37).

Description . — Shell of inediuni size I'or the sub-genus, solid, fusi-
form with an acute apex. Shoulder sloping, base contracted, with
a short canal. Whorls of the spire Ijicarinate; the body whorl with
above five ridges, becoming weaker anteriorly. Apex acuminate,
of three smooth whorls, seven whorls to the sjiire. Intel-spaces of
carinae covered with closely-set thread-like and sigrnoidal striae.
Aperture with a moderately deep sinus, long, ovate and obliquely
set.

Dimensions. — Holotype from Dennant coll. Length. 12 mm. ;
greatest width. 5 mm.

Observafio/is. — The Mallee specimens lieing incomplete, it was
necessary to select a fine example from an extensive series in tlie
Dennant coll. (Nat. Mus.), from the Kalimnan of the Gippsland
Lakes. These specimens were named in MS. by the late Mr. J.
Dennant, F.G.S.. as " Drillia cochleoris." That species name,
however, has been used in an allied genus, and we therefore re-
name it as P. {D.) dilectoides. in reference to its undoubted
affinities to Drillia dilecta, Hedley.i The latter species, from
moderately shallow water (24-75 fathoms) in the neighbourhood of
Port Jackson, is separated, however, by its blunt apex, flatter
sides, and longer and more vertical aperture.

Disfrihvtion. — Bore 6.114-150 feet; 158-161 feet. Bore 8.
180-199 feet.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate XXIV.

Fig. ] . — Glycimeris inaccoyi, Johnston sp. Form a, with 32 rib-
lets. Balcombian series. Grice's Creek, Port Phillip.
Coll. \V. ^ershaw. Nat. size.

1. Mem. Austr. Mus., Meiii. iv., pt. vi., lf»03. (Sci. Results of Trawlin;; Exped., "Thetis"),
1>. 387, fiff. 100.

^'■iS Cha'pnuiit ami Gabriel:

Fig. 2. — G. t/iaccoi//\ Joliiiston sp. Form /> [ = Pectuuculus laficos-
fat us, McCoy, iion Q. and G.), with about 40 riblets.
Janjukian series. From McCoy's type locality. Bird
Rock Cliffs, Torquay. Coll. J. F. Bailey. Nat. size.

3. — G. /naccoi/i, Johnston sp. Interior of valve showing^
finely striated area. Janjukian series. Bird Rock,
Torquay. Geol. Surv. Vict. coll. Nat. size.

4. — G. /naccoi/i, Johnston sp. Specimen with 29 riblets^
Janjukian series. Tal)le Cape, Tasmania. Nat. size.

5. — G. iiiaccoyi, Joliuston sp. Form r. with 30 riblets-
Kalimnan series. Macdonald's, Muddy Creek, Coll. F.
Chapman. Nat. size.

Plate XXV.

Fig. 6. — Gli/cimeris laficnstotus, Quoy and Gaimard sp. Living,
Coast of New Zealand. This species has about 40 rib-
lets. Interior of valve to show the comparatively
coarsely striate area. Nat. size.
7. — Trigonia lamarcki. Gray. Mallee Bore, No. 9, 315-325-

feet. Nat. size.
8. — T. lamarcki, Gray. Living. Coast of New South Wales.

For comparison with the above fossil. Nat. size.
9. — T. lamarcki, Graif. Costation of living specimen, mag-
nified, X 7.
10. — T. Itowifti. McCoy. Costation magnified for comparison
with the preceding figure. Cainozoic (Kalimnan
series). Macdonald's, Muddy Creek. Dennant coll.
X 7.
11. — T. rnargaritacea, Lamarck. Living example. Bass
Strait. Nat. size.

Pl.vik XXVI.

Fig 12. — Trigonia inargaritacta, vai'. aciifico^^tafa. McCoy, Co-
type of T. acuficosfafa, McCoy. Cainozoic (Kalimnan
series). Beaumaris. Port Philip. Nat. size.
13«, f>. — T. inargaritacfa, var. acuficosfafa, McCoy. Living
example (2 valves). Bass Strait. Pres. by Capt. Stan-
ley. Nat size.
14. — Euchelus haccafus, Menke sp. Oral aspect. Malice Bore.
No. 5, 175-189 feet. Nat. size.

New ami lid re Fossils. .\29

15a, b. — Xot/ca siihinfuridihtilin/i . var. rras.'^n. Tate. fi , dor-
sal aspect; h. oral aspect; Mallee Bore, No. 10, 220
feet. Nat. size.

I'l.ATK XXVII.
Fig. ie.—Ano/)erna srap/ia. Verco. Mallee Bore, No. 3. 226 feet.
X i.

17a-c. — Cou<hih)c<irdifi fenuicostae, sp. nov. a, exterior of left
valve, X I."); //, cardinal area of left valve, x 26;
c. cardinal aron of light valve, x 26 ; « and h, Holo-
tvpe. Mallee Bore, No. 10, 310-320 feet; c, Mallee
Bore, No. 10, 225-230 feet.

18. — Can/lfn a/lra, Tate. An extreme variety with costation
suppressed and concentrics dominant. Mallee Bore.
No. 9, 254-256 feet, x 6.

19«. />.- — Doikij: k<ii//o/i>ana, sp. nov. Holotype. a, right
valve x 2 ; f>. portion of the same to show colour bands
and radial striae; x 4. Mallee Bore, No. 10, 310-320
feet.

20. — D. kfinioiiidiHi, sp. nov. Paratype. Interior of left
valve. Mallee Bore, No. 8, 160-165 feet. Nat. size.

21. — ]J. kenifonlnna, sp. nov. Paratype. Ventral edge of
valve interior. Mallee Bore, No. 10, 186-190 feet.
X 8.

22. — Liotia dejmanti, sp. nov. Holotype. Oral aspec-t. Mallee
Bore, No. 8, 180-199 feet, x 4.

23. — L. deininnf/. sp. nov. Paratype. Portion of shell more
highly magnified to show intercostal, thread-like orna-
ment. Cainozoic (Balcombian series). Lower beds.
Muddy Creek. Ex. Dennant Coll. x 8.

24«, f>. — TeifiosfonKt depressida. sp. nov. Holotype. a, apical
aspet-t ; />, umbilical aspect. Mallee Bore, No. 10. 225-
230 feet, x 8.

25r/-r. — Teiii(»it(tni(i pidrherrima. sp. nov. Holotype. a, apical
aspect, x 4; h, umbilical aspect, x 4; c, surface orna-
mt-nt. x 12. Mallee Bore. No. 10. 225-230 feet.

26. — Eidnna pitiguicula. sp. nov. Holotype. Mallee Bore,
No. 10. 225-230 feet, x 8.

Platk XXVIII

Fig. 27r/, h. — TiirhouiUd weeahensis, sp. nov. Holotype. a, oral
aspect, X 4; ft, protoconch. x 26. Mallee Bore. No.
10, 225-230 feet.

330 Chapman and Gabriel: New and Rare Fossils.

Fig. 28a-c. — Calyptraea kalimnae, sp. uov. Holotype. a, apical

aspect; b, lateral aspect; c umbilical aspect. Cainozoic

(Kalimnan series). Gippsland Lakes (ex. Dennant Coll.)

X 2.
29. — C. kalimnae, sp. nov. Paratype. One of the typically

small forms from tiie Mallee Bores (No. 8, 165-180

feet). X 2.
30. — Rissoa gatliffiana, sp. nov. Hcilotype. Mallee Bore, No.

No. 10, 225-230 feet, x 20.
31. — Rissoa (Ofioba) hassiana, Hedley. Mallee Bore, No. 8,

180-199 feet, x 8.
32. — Rissoa (Onoha) chrysalida, sp. nov. Holotype. Typical

form. Mallee Bore, No. 9, 254-256 feet, x 8.
33. — Rissoa (0.) chrt/salida, sp. nov. Paratype. Extreme,

elongate form. Cainozioc (Kalimnan series). Upper

beds, Muddy Creek. Ex. Dennant Coll. x 8.
34. — Nassa spiraliscahra, sp. nov. Holotype. Mallee Bore,

No. 8, 199-204 feet, x 4.
36. — Marginella praeformicula, sp. nov. Holotype. Mallee

Bore, No. 8, 180-199 feet. x 4.
36. — Terehra profunda, sp. nov. Holotype. Mallee Bore, No.

10, 225-230 feet, x 4.
37. — Pleurotoma (Drillia) dilecfoides, sp. nov. Holotype.

Cainozoic (Kalimnan series). Gippsland Lakes. Ex.

Dennant coll. x 4.

Proc. K.S. Victoria, 1914. Plate XXIV.

All (ii;uios n;iti

Vi..1..ri;i. l-.H I. I'lal.. XXV.

Proc. R.S. Victoi-iii, 191J-. Plate XX VI.

All tijLtiires natural si/A-.

1," S VintnriM, I;H 1 l'l;,N. \ W 1 1 .

:X., ad. nut. liel.

Proc. K.S. Victoria, 191 1. Plate XX VI 11.

F.C., ad. iiat. del.

rPRoc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 26 (X.S.). Pt. II., 1914.]

Art. XXW.—On the Geolorjn and Petrolo<j>j of the Distrirt
between Lili/dale and Mount Dandenong.

By MORRIS M0RRI8, M.Sc.

(Formerly Kernot Resoai-ch Scholar, and Caroline Kay Scholar in Geoloiiy,
University of Melbourne.)

(With Plates XXIX., XXX. and XXXI.)

[Read 13th Noveiiil)er, 1913.]

Contents.

I. The Introduction.

II. Previous Work.

III. The Upper Silurian Sediments.

IV. The Late Palaeozoic I^jneoixs System.

A.— V^oLCANic Phase.

(a) Lower Toscanite Series.

(b) Upper Toscanite Series.
fc) Lower Dacite Series.

(d) Middle Dacite Series.

(e) Upper Dacite Series.

(= Hypersthone Dacite Series.)

B. — Plutonic Phase.
C. — Htpabyssal Phase.

(a) The Differentiated Dykes.

(b) 'J'he Undifferentiated Dykes.

D.— The Volcanic Succession.

K. — Nomenclature of the Igneous Rocks.
V. Faults.
VI. The Tertiary lyjneous System.
VII. Summary.
VIII. Bibliography.
IX. Description of Plates.

I.— Introduction.

The area to be described lies about 2.3 miles east of Melbourne.
It is a rectangular block of some 36 square miles, with its southern
base line passing east and west across the Trig Station on Mt. Dande-

332 Morris Morris:

nong, and its northern boundary running in a similar direction
about one mile north of Lilydale. Lateially, it reaches from about
Mooroolbark in the west to near Wandin in the east.

From Mt. Dandenong one looks eastward across the Woori-
Yallock basin to the closely related mountains of Healesville and
Warburton, northwards to the Dividing Range, beyond the alluvial
flats of the Yarra. and westwards and southwards across a dissected
plain, sloping towards the coast line.

It was found necessary to extend the mapping in various direc-
tions beyond the limits above defined, but such extensions are
omitted, and wdll only be referred to when necessary to illustrate
features that already appear in the circumscribed area.

II. — Previous Work.

In 1856 Sir A. II. (J. Selwyn (1) made a brief description of Cave
Hill, near Lilydale, where he found "the entrance to a cave 120
feet deep," which eventually became the site of Mr. Mitchell's lime-
stone quarry.

In 1892-3 Rev. A. W. (Jresswell, M.A. (3, i), wrote two papers, both
of which deal almost solely with the fossiliferous contents of the
Cave Hill limestones.

It was not till six years later that any work was connnenced on
the stratigraphy of the district. In 1899 the late V. R. Stirling (8)
published a brief description, and made a map, of Cave Hill and of
a narrow strip of the district contiguous with it eastward as far as.
Lilydale, and westward across the railway line, where it embraces
a small residual plateau capped with basalt. He failed, however, to
recognise the important series of igneous rocks which flank Cave
Hill on the east, and which, togetlier with those of an earlier
series, form the surfaci: rock of Lilydale. These he called meta-
morphosed Silurian strata, being betrayed by a most deceptive
resemblance which they bear to an indurated shale.

These two igneous series possil)iy bt-loiig to the opening move-
ments of a great cycle of igneous activity, which culminated in the
piling up of the Dandenong Rages. The remains of this system.
which occupy the greater part of the area icpresented <in the nia{>.
foi-m the most conspicuous feature of the district, and will l)e the
chief subject of this paper.

During 1910 I mapped and descril)e(l the aiea eontained in a
triangle, whose apices are Mooroolbark, Lilydale and Evelyn.
The present map and p;iper are an extension of these earlier unpub-
lished observations.

Geology of Lily dale. 333^

Stratigraphirdl ( '/as.<ip'r(ff/o/i .—The mcks of tlie- district fall into
four groups : —

1. A sedinientai-v series of tlie Upper Silurian epoch.

2. An igneous series of the Later Palaeozoic { ?) period.
•'). An igneous series of the Early Tertiary (?) period.
4. An alluvial series. Recent.

III. -The Upper Silurian Sediments.

Prof. Gregoiy ( lU) sulxliviiUd the Silurian of Victoria into a Lower
or Melbournian Series, and an Upper or Yeringian Series. The
Lilydale Silurians belong to. and form the type deposits of, the
Upper Silurian, whirh were ealled Yeringian. after the parish
where Lilydale is situated.

Between .Melhouiiic and Warlnirton. the Silurians are apparently
folded into two great synilines. In one of these, ealled by Prof.
Gregory. " tlie Lilydale Synclinal."" the Upper Silurians of the-
area untk'i- i-eview iiavc been pieserved. This great syncline-
extends from the Waiiandyte anticline on the west, through Lily
dale and Yering. to th^ Woori Yallock basin on the east.

Lithological C /i a racfers.— The Yeringians are marine deposits,
whose character varies with increasing distance from the old Silu-
rian shore line. They vary Ijetween the conglomerates of Cave Hill,
the sandstones and quaitzites of Gruyere. the limestones of Mr.
Mitchell's quarry, and the uiudstones and shales of Mooroolbaik
and other places.

The Limestones. — There are two outcro|)s of limestone at Cave
Hill, the one an occurrence about 80 yards square in Mr. Mitchell'*-
quarry, the other a small outcrop al)out 4 feet s(iuare in the rail-
way cutting, about ."'tdd yards south of the quarry. The well-foinied
strata of the quarry di]) tast (8) at about 50 deg.. and strike a few
degrees east of north. Their eastern limit is determined by a thick
bed of quartzite. wiiich overlies them conforirial)ly. Their westein
limit is concealed undei- an overburden of basalt. (Plate XXX. ^
Fig. 1.)

This limestone formation has been incompletely deseribed by
Sir A. R. C. Selwyn (1). R. A. F. Murray (7). A. W. Cresswell
(2, 3. 4). and V. R. Stirling (8). Its abundant fossiliferous con
tents have been investigated by Sir F. McCoy, R. Ethridge. jun. ;
G. B. Pritchard, F. Chapman, and A. W. Cresswell.

Sir F. McCoy referred them to the Upper Silurian on palfeonto-
logical evidence (7).

3;U Morris Morris:

Similar limestone formations occur in the Upper Silurian at
Waratah Bay, Tyers River, Buchan River, Thomson River (between
Walhalla and Toongabbie). Loyola, and Delatite River near Mans-
field.

According to Murray (7) all these are lithologically similar, being
in each case crystalline rocks, and full of crinoid stems, replaced
by ('aCOj. " The limestones are found in some cases to lie
undoubted lenticular intercalations."

Macroscopically examined, the Cave Hill limestone is a dark
bluish gray, compact, crystalline, and medium grained rock. Fresh
specimens do not readily exhibit their organic remains, but in
weathered specimens, Hydrozoa, represented mainly by Favosites
grandipora and Heliolites. and Brachiopoda, represented especially
by Atrypa reticularis, occur in some cases perhaps as abundantly
as Crinoidea.

Microscopic Examination. — The thin slices examined are crowdc'd
with fossil remains of all sizes, most of which appear to belong to
the Hydrozoa. Their outlines are broad and daik, probably owing
to impurities, but the interior is generally occupied by calcite. The
whole is cemented together by interstitial calcite. A grain of quartz
appears occasionally. Dolomite is rather common. It occurs in
small rusty-coloured patches, and is identified by staining.

The signs of thermal metamorphism are entirely absent. The
rock owes its crystalline structure to metasomatism chiefly, and
possibly in some degree to stresses set up during the folding of the
beds.

The Gave Hill Quart zites and Conglomerates. — This bed, which
is not less than 70 feet thick, overlies the limestones of Mr.
Mitchell's quarry conformably on the east, and forms their upper
limit. Owing to its superior resistance to the forces of erosion, it
is a prominent surface feature, forming the eastern flank of Cave
Hill, and a neighbouring eminence, immediately south of Cave Hill.

At Cave Hill, the bed is a quartzite. Going south, it gradually
develops into a loosely consolidated conglomerate, consisting of
quartz pebbles set in a matrix of granular quartz. The pebbles art,
•easily separated from the matrix.

Under the microscope, the quartzite is seen to consist of lounded
grains of quartz chiefly, and a little felspar, most of wliich show
i\odulose extinction. The large interstices are often occupied by a
fine matrix, some of which appears to liavc been produced in situ
by the mylonitization of the grains. Much of tiie matrix seems
to be a silicious cement, which is fic<iuently ferruginous. The

(ieoUxjii of Li I (/(/(lie. 335

inusaii- stiuclure of the theinuil iuetaiii<^i[)hisni is fiitiicly absent
It is therefore evident that consolidation here, as in thf liniestont
has been due chiefly to metasomatism, and possiljly also in somc^
degree to dynamic metamorphism during the folding of tlu' \k'(\s.
This result is interesting inasmuch as thermal metamoipliism is tlu;
only process which Murray (7) and Stirling (8) suggested to account
for their alteration. The only instance of thermal nietamorphisnk
of the Silurian, that I have seen in the district, occurs along the
eastern shoulder of the Dandenong Kange, where the sedimentaries
have been converted into a hornfels.

South of Cave Hill the quartzites increase their dimensions gradu-
ally, spreading westwards, and giving place as they do so to a fine-
grained sandstone. (See Fig. 6, Plate XXX.)

The limestone Ixmlder in the railway cutting is flanked imme-
diately on the east by these easterly dipping sandstones. Assuming
that it is in sifii, this Ijoulder appears to form part of the thin end
of a lenticular limestone formation, related to the Cave Hill strata
as per Fig. 6. In this case, assuming the absence of faulting, the
western limit of the Cave Hill formation lies as far to the west of
the quarry as the railway line, and possibly beyond it.

The colonies of marine organisms, which formed the limestones,,
perished through the accumulation of sands, initiated probably by
a movement of uplift. But the same sands which killed them have^
preserved their remains. Defended behind this quartzite rampart,
and sheltered by a roof of basalt, the limestones have escaped
destruction.

The prevalence of other quartzite and sandstone ridges to the
north-east, in Gruyere. where they rise abruptly above the flats of
the Yarra, together with the occasional presence of conglomerate,
probably indicates the inception and progress of those movements-
of elevation, which caused the last retreat of the Silurian sea.

The disposition of the Gruyere ridges appears to be causally re-
lated to the strike and folding of the beds. (See Fig 5, Plate XXX. >
They occur in two pairs, and each pair may be arranged along a
straight line, parallel to the strike of the beds, and therefore to
each other. Both lines strike 16 degrees east of north. (This
easterly divergence is matched between Lilydale and Coldstream
by a strike of 47 degrees to 53 degrees east of north, thus indicating
a strong lateral easterly thrust in the Silurians north of Lilydale.
Just east of Evelyn the strike diverges 38 degrees east of north.)
The eastern pair both have a crescentic shape, with the crescent
opening northwards. Of the western pair the northern one is also

■'3^6 Morris MorrU :

in the form of a crescent, but it opens to the south. These phenomena
may be explained on the hypothesis, that the eastern pair lie along
an anticlinal axis, and the western pair alon*,' a synclinal axis, the
fold in both cases pitching south.

Further, it is owing mainly to these resistant ridges that tlie
Yarra has had to take such a long bend to the north after leaving
the course set for it in the Warburton Gorge.

IV. — Late Palaeozoic Igneous System.

The great revival of igneous activity which occuned at many
centres of Victoria in the late Palaeozoic, and produced, among
■other formations, the Snowy River Porphyries, the Strathbogies.
and Mt. Macedon, developed in the district under review, into a
cycle of three phases — a volcanic phase, including probably five
series (of which the last three formed the Dandenong Ranges), a
plutonic phase, and a hypabyssal phase.

Distribution. — The whole system has the foiiii of a rough
triangle, with its l)roken apex between Lilydale and Wandin. From
this place, it extends south for twenty miles to the Gippsland i-ail-
way line, near to which its broad base of about 15 miles is spread
out between Dandenong and Pakenham. A line connecting
Emerald with a point two miles south of Ferutree Gully divides
this triangle into two parts, and, roughly speaking, the southern
part contains the plutonic outcrops, <ind the northern part the
volcanic rocks of the system.

This map and paper is chiefly occupied with the northern ex-
tremity of the volcanic series, and as this area, though small,
•contains all the series of the system, it therefore supplies material
for the description of the whole cycle.

Relation to the Siliir/a/is:. — The part of the system shown on the
map is girdled on three sides by the Silurians, of which those on
the west dip east, and those on the east dip west. The uptujiied
edges of the Silurians dipping at a high angle may be seen almost
in contact with the overlying igneous rocks at a (juarry about Ij
miles from Lilydale, along the railway line to Coldstream, and
also at a small quarry about 200 yards north-east of Gave Hill. Tlie
igneous rocks therefoi-e occupy a denuded syncline.

A. — The Volcanic Phase.
The volcanii' rocks are represented by five series. Using Hatch's
classification, but with reasonable elasticity, these series are as
follows, naming them in the order of extrusion : —

Geohxjn oj Lih/Jolf. .V67

<i The Lnwt'i' 'I'dSL-aiiiti' st-ries.

h Tlif I'pper Tdscanite series.

r Tlic Lower Dat-ite series (passing up iiitu a fia<.niitMitaI st-iies).

(I 'I'lie Middle Dacite series.

f Till' I'jipfr or Hyperstliene Daeite seiies.

For the sake of economy in spaee. when referring to these series,
the aliDve letters — a, h. r. r/. and e are freiiuently used instead of
givinu t lie whole name.

(I. Tlif Litiifi- Toxfdiiitr Srr/is.

This is a eomplex series of lavas alternating.' with laminated for-
mations, which ouf^ht probably to be I'etjardeii as a l)anded effusive
rock.

Field reldtioiit;. The sei'ies forms a rouj^fh are reaching from
Lilydale to Avithin a mile of Wandin. bounded on its north and
■convex side by the alluvium and Silurians of tlie Yarra basin, and
embracing on its concave side the next series (/>) in the system.
It is best developed on the west liml). where it forms the surface
rock of the greater part of Lilydale, and also the prominent ridges
just outside of the town on the north-east. It also occurs in
small patches along the western edge of the system, even
as far south as Montrose. There are two small patches of it east
of Mooroolbark, one an inlier in tlie next series (h). and the othe;'
an outlier on the Silurians. It. therefore, had a wide distribution.
Owing, probably, to denudation, it becomes less conspicuous going
east from Lilydale, and occurs there only in discontinuous areas.

Stratigraphical Relationship. — (i.) Its wide distribution, and its
invariable association with series 6, show that these two adjacent
series were co-extensive over a large area, (ii.) The chemical evi-
dence show that a and h are inseparable. The one must, therefore,
lie immediately, either above or below the other, (iii.) a is in many
cases immediately underlain by the Silurians, and h is visibly in
one place, and over a large area may be proved to be, overlain
immediately by the series c. Therefore, since a cannot lie above 6,
it must be below it. This conclusion is further supported by the
arrangement of vesicles in series a, in the lailway cutting behind
Lilydale, so as if continued to dip beneath the adjacent series, h.
This conclusion is corroborated also by the apparent superposition
of a high conical hill of series 6 on a low platform of series a, which
flanks the former on the north and west.

Taking this evidence together, it seems safe to conclude that a
is older than h.

N

338 Morris Morris:

I'etrological Characters. — In the field, the members of this serie*
appear so heterogeneous as to seem capable of further subdivision.
But the microscopic evidence shows that they belong to one family.
They agree in bearing phenocrysts of felspar, and a ground mass full
of orthoclase, but with relatively little (juart/. They differ in.
the structure of the ground mass, and in the nature and amount
of ferro-magnesian minei-als present.

Three types have been selected for description, (1) from the base
of the series, (2) from the middle (3) from the top.

1. The Basal Member. — Specimen from quarry, allot. 24, north
end. A hard, brittle, bluish-gray streaky rock, fine grained, with
occasional phenocrysts of felspar.

Under the miscroscope, it is found that idiomorphic phenocrysta
of plagioclase (probably oligoclase) are sparingly developed, and
arranged parallel to the flow structures of the ground mass, which
consists chiefly of felspar miciolites. set in a sparse cryptocrystal-
line matrix. These microlites are of two kinds — (a) very minute
laths of plagioclase (probably oligoclase), (b) larger and rhombic
or square-shaped crystals of orthoclase. Orthoclase is greatly in
excess of plagioclase in the ground mass, and apparently of the
phenocrysts also. This is due to the high percentage of alkalis
present (viz., 6.98 per cent.). Of CaO there is 1.95 per cent., most
of which has combined with COg without being removed, This-
is clear from the presence of 1.80 per cent, of CaO in the next
series (6), which is nearly identical in chemical composition, and
containa no CO5. Iron oxide in the rectangular grains occur spar-
ingly. Sericitic material and some secondary quartz leached from
the matrix, occupy original vesicles or planes of weakness, and give
the rock a .streaky appearance. The specific gravity of this rock is
2.489. The chemical analysis is given later.

Its industrial value as metal for roads and ballasts is due to its
hardness, to its brittleness rendering it easy of preparation, and
to the absence of unstable mincials. It is ('xtfiisivcly quarried for
this purpose.

2. The Middle Member. — Specimen from railway cutting behind
Lilydale. Like the basal member, except that it is not brittle, but,
on the contrary, exceedingly tough, and also much more vesicular
and streaky.

Phenocrysts of plagioclase. ortlioclase (sul)ordinate), and biotite
in large flakes, are present, the latter being much decomposed, and
the alteration products fill the original steam pores. One small
phenocryst was found with the colour, pleochroism. cleavage, extinc-

(.'col <,;/,/ ,,J Lilii<hih'.. 839

tion, and j)()luris;it ion iharattors of hyj)i'rstheiiL'. Iron oxide,
apatite, and zitcoiis (uciir as accessories. 'J'lie ground mass is
like that of the l)asal inendjer, except that the orthoclase is not
idioniorphic, but allotrioniorphic. It envelopes the laths of plagio-
clase, and occupies the interstitial spaces so continuously that
there is but little glassy base present. As the orthoclase has
crystallised from various centres, it produces an extinction effect
resembling strain shadows. Pronounced tluxional arrangement of
laths and phenocrysts occurs. Granular chlorite and biotite are
present, and also a little quartz.

The spec. grav. is 2.6'2 (for least altered specimens).

It forms the surface rock of the chief part of Lilydale, and also
constitutes a big part of the hills, -which overlook the town on the
north-east.

3. Upper Member. — Specimen from Allot. 24, .south end. A
gray slate-coloured rock, fine grained, hard and tough, showing
felspar phenocrysts with fluxion al arrangement. Idiomorphic
phenocrysts of plagioclase (probably labradorite) are common ;
apatite, zircon, and iron oxide rather frequent. The ground mass
is like that of the middle member, and consists of microlites (prob-
ably oligoclase), surrounded by optically continuous patches of
orthoclase. Elongated streaky areas of sericitic material abundant,
and this, together with secondary quartz, occupies what seem to 1)8
original vesicles, or planes of weakness.

Spec. grav. 2.65.

Chemical and Mineralogical Characteristics. — The three members
of the series agree in the relatively small amount of primary
quartz present, considering the high SiOo contents (68 per cent.),
and also in the prevalence of orthoclase in the ground mass, account-
ing for- the high alkali contents (6.98 per cent.). They differ
chiefly in the structure of the ground mass. In the basal member,
the orthoclase formed regular-shaped crystals, and these set in a
cryptocrystalline base, give the rock its brittle character. In the
other mem])eis, the orthoclase crystallised more extensively, the
patches from various centres moulding themselves on one another,
and occupying the interstitial spaces so fully that but little base
remains. These rocks are therefore very tough.

The abundance of orthoclase, and the subordinate quantity of
quartz, in the ground mass of this series, has been effected by the
assistance of mineralisers. especially water, of whose plentiful
supply the vesicles bear evidence. This is further discussed below.

340 il/or/-;.s Morris:

The high percentage of silica (OS per ct-nt.), ainl of alkalis (().*.)8
per cent.), constitute this i-ock a tdscaiiite. aocnnling to HatrlTs
classitication.

I'he Giolof/lcal Map. — This series is coloured Silurian on Sehvvn's
sketch map, and on the geological map of Victoria, having been
regarded as altered sediments by Murray (7) and Stirling (8). The
latter coloured this and the succeeding series (b) Silurian in his
map of Lilydale, and shows in his section a hypothetical trappean
mass under the township to account foi- their alteration.

h. The Upper Tat'caiiitf Sfr/'eg.

The visible distribution of this series lesenibles a sliepherd's
crook, the crook bending east at Lilydale. and enclosing the succeed-
ing series of the system. From Lilydale, where it forms part of the
surface rock, it runs south for seven miles, forming a narrow stiip
between the Silurians and the Lower Daeite series (c).

Petrolor/ical Cliaracfer. — The whole series is characteristically
homogeneous. The only variations are due to the alteration of
effusive and explosive phases. The explosive types, varying from
lapilli to agglomerate, are generally preserved in the form of
hills, and some of these are probably close to, if not on the sites
of, the volcanic vents. They are well developed opposite the Sal-
vation Army farm, near Bayswater, and near Montrose. In the
extreme northern part of its distribution, these fragmental types
occur almost continuously over a large area, and they appear to
become increasingly coarse towards a pair of high conical hills as
centre, where the agglomerate contains fragments as big as a man's
head. I, therefore, regard these two hills as denuded necks of
Devonian toscanite volcanoes, and have marked them as such on the
map.

The following is a description of the normal effusive rock when
fresh : —

Macroscopic. — A blue-black, non-vesicular, compact, exceedingly
fine-grained, brittle rock, intricately traversed by joint planes,
and showing rather sparingly lustrous phenocrysts of felspar.

Microscopic. — Phenocrysts consist of plagioclase, .some of which is
determined to be oligoclase and andesine, idiomorplic, but some-
times corroded; glassy sanidine subordinate; biotite occasionally in
small flakes ; apatite, zircon, rutile, and rectangular crystals of
iron oxide. The ground mass is microcrystalline. It contains a

Geulogy of Lily dale. '.i4 1

Sittle quartz and a good deal of felspar microlites, giving extinction
singles from 0 deg. for the majority, up to .'}() deg. for the rest.
.(Some of the former may be orthoclase.) Flow-structure is slightly
indicated by the general parallel arrrangenients of microlites and
phenocrysts. Granular green slightly altered l)i(jnte is abundant.

Spec. grav. 2.66.

Owing probably to the easy passage offered to water along its
intricate network of joint planes, the whole series has l>eeii
.subjected to such extensive alteration that it resembles more a
whitish baked shale than an igneous rock. Previous writers (R. A.
F. Murray (7) and V. R. Stirling (S)) have regarded it as meta-
morphosed Silurian. In this extremely altered condition, the
ielspar phenocrysts have disappeared, leaving rectangular cavities.
The ground mass is felsitic. but shows much granular secondary
.quartz, veined by strings of the same mineral. In the freshest
specimens the specific gravity is 2.66; in the altered type, it ig
2.37, a loss of nearly 11 per cent.

The altered type of this series provides the chief road metal of the
•district, a use for which it is well adapted. Being rather brittle, it
is easily prepared, and. while providing binding material, its
•condition as an ultimate decomposition product tends to prohibit
.the formation of dust and mud.

Chemical and Miner alogical Composition. — The chemical
analysis of a member of this series is given later, and is practically
identical with that of the preceding series (a). Silica (69.9 per
cent.) and alkalis (6.9 per cent.) are both high, constituting the
j-ock a toscanite like its predecessor. But, unlike its predecessor,
the ground mass is abundant. It is glassy or niicrociystalline, and
it contains but little orthoclase.

Comparison of the toscanites {a and h). — The first two series,
then, are toscanites. In each case quartz never appeal- in pheno-
crysts, and only to a comparatively small extent in the ground
inass. But although their chemical composition is practically tlie
^same, there is a fundamental mineralogical difference between
them, which prevents their being called facies of the same seiies.
This difference, which as a rule appears so plainly on comparing
.the hand specimens, inheres in the ground mass. In the first
-series (a), the ground mass is often practically holocrystalline.
owing to the abundance of orthoclase; in the second series (6), it is
•often almost non-crystalline, and orthoclase seems sparse or absent
•\vhile minute flakes of biotite are frequent. There can be no doubt
rthat this difference was due to the fact that mineralisers, chiefiv

342 Morris Morris.-

water, were abundant in the first series (a), and almost absent from
seiies b. Steam vesicles are often prevalent in the first series; they
are entirely absent from the second.

Unlike most of the plagioclase felspars, orthoclase, and also'
quartz, cannot be produced artificially from simple fusion, except
with the aid of water or other mineralisers. The water functions
chemically as a catalyser. and physically as a flux, reducing the
viscosity of the magma, and lowering the freezing points of its
constituent minerals. It is well known that a simple fusion of the
constituents of orthoclase becomes extremely viscous in the neigh-
bourhood of its melting point. Harker (19) remarks, " It is easy
to believe that the presence of a small amount of water may so
reduce such viscosity as to enable the alkali felspar to crystallise
freely. ' "

We may, therefore, conclude that the presence of water in the
first magma (a), enabled orthoclase to crystallise freely, while its
absence from the second magma (b) restricted the process. Since
the mineralisers must be regarded as an integral part of the rock
magma, the reason for separating the first two series is obvious.

Evidence of Fo/infio^t. — In the quarry of Allot. 22c on the west
limb of the system, series b acquires a very sight banded character,
which is only discernible on a polished surface. This feature, in
an accentuated form, is quite common in the lower series (a).

Specimens of series a from Allot. 23* show two sets of banding
intersecting at a very small angle. In thin sections, the bands are-
seen to be occupied by the ordinary ground mass, and by abundant
grains of a sericitic mineral, which is clearly secondary. The
phenocrysts, and the few microlites which occur, are arranged with
their long axes approximately parallel to the banding. The
phenocrysts show scarcely any sign of strain shadows; therefore,
the banding was not produced by earth movements after consolida-
tion. It must be explained, then, either as the bedding planes of a
tuff or as foliation due to movement during consolidation. The
parallel arrangement of the microlites and phenocrysts with refer-
ence to the banding, and the presence of two sets of bands, offer
support to the latter hypothesis, and point to the possibility of these
rocks having been involved to some extent in the last stage of the-
folding movements. This conclusion serves to con-oborate the
petrographic evidence in favour of the Lower Devonian age of th&
rocks of this system.

(jeobxjn of Lihi<liile. 34y

c. Tilt- Loiitr Ddctite. Serie.'<: —

This series is associated with its successor. " 'I'he Middle Dat ite
.Series," {d), by strong affinities, Avhicli pL'ue the pair in sharp eon
trast with the first series, (a and />). whiih are also closely affiliated.

This series is characterised by al)uiidant phenocrysts of ipiartz.
and some of felspar and biotite, all set in a glassy to crypocrystal-
Jine ground mass. The series consists chiefly of lavas, charged with
fragments of this and other igneous material, and of hornfels. In
the weathered sections, exposed along the railway line l)etween Lily-
dale and Evelyn, this included material is well exhibited. Tlie
fragments vary from the smallest size to that of a man's head. All
•this points to an alteiiiation of explosive and effusive phases, I'esult-
ing in the incorporation In- the lava flows of showers of fragments.

Towards the close of the series the effusive phases disappeared,
and it finished with a facies that is entirely fragmeutal. These
rocks are best developed between Montrose and Evelyn on four lofty
a-idges, which run out fi-om the main Dandenong Range northwards
towards Olinda Creek. They vary from a coarse agglomerate to
■dun-coloured lapilli, containing no visil)le mineials. The latter
•occur always higher up than the foi-mer, and were probably tlie
Jast phase of the series. For convenience, these fragnientals are
referred to as "The Dandenong Agglomerates." (Plate XXX.,
Fig. 2.)

Close to the place where the Evelyn fault crosses Olinda Creek,
the upper part of this fragmental series has been faulted down to
stream level, and there tlie agghmieiate is very coarse. One frag-
jnent measured fully 12 in. in diam.. and it and others were more
rounded than angular. There is little doubt that this place marks
a centre of eruption. This is rendered still more likely Ijy the
proximity of the hornfels, fragments of which are so numerous in
the effusive facies of this series. This site is marked as a volcanio
centre on the map.

Stratigrnphiral Felnf ion ships. — The Lower Dacite Series may
be seen in a hill secrion about A mile south-east of Lilydale. Allot
292, superposed on the Upper Toscanite Series, (6), and containing
numerous fragments of the latter near the junction. It is. there-
fore, younger than (h). (See Plate XXX.. Fig. 1.)

If anyone starts from Olinda Creek to climb the noith flank of
Mt. Dandenong, he will pass up in order over the following rocks :
— (1) The Lower Dacite Series, finishing with the fragmental rocks
named above, "the Dandenong Agglomerates"; next, (2V the

;U4 . Morris Morris:

Middle Dacite Series; and. lastly (•)), the Upper or Hyperstheiie-
Daeite Series, whieli is the normal Daeite. (Plate XXX.. Fi^'.
'.].) No cliff section o( these junctions is known, hut in every
instance the iit)ove (jrder of ascent was the observed order.

It is probable that in the first instance the junctions between
these series occupied about the same level east and w^est right along
the north flaidv of the range, Init. owing to the downthrow of the
Evelyn and the Olinda faults at its north-east extremity, the Middle
Daeite Series (d) has been depressed to form the bed of Olinda
Creek at that place, and the ITpper Daeite Series (e) is also found
at a low level in the fault valley. (Plate XXX., Fig. 2.)

Pefroloff/ra/ CJtaracter. — This is a dark, slate-coloured, compact,
lirittle rock, showing phenocrysts of quartz freely, felspar less so,
hiotite in hexagonal tiakes. pyrites and garnets occasionally, and
numerous fragments, mostly igneous, the rest sedimentary.

Phenocrysts consist of quartz and orthoclase, idiomoiphic. gene-
rally corroded, and often brecciated owing to flow movement. The
quartz is more alnuidant than orthoclase, the latter often shows
rhombic sections, with diagonal extinction. Plagioclase is subor-
dinate to ortlioclase. is idiomorphic. and apparently ranges from
oligoclase to laliradorite ; l)iotite occurs in grains and flakes,
bleached, and flexed by flow movement; garnet is common, often
chloritised ; iron oxide is seen in irregular grains, and there is
also a secondary oxide associated with and derived from tlie l)iotite;
apatite and zircon aie present as accessories.

The ground mass is abundant, glassy to cryjitoci-ystalline. and
lines of flow fre(iuently are well developed, with fragments of the
phenocr_vsts corresponding therel^o. Numerous inclusions of vol-
canic material and hornfels are present.

(Jheinicdl Com position . — In this rock the sub-alkali character is-
pronounced. It is mucli I'icher in CaO and MgO, and poorer in
alkalis than tlie toscanite series. It lias over 68 per cent, of SiOj,
and is, therefoi'e. a daeite.

V^)\■ these and other reasons, whicli appear latei'. this series has
been called " The Lower Daeite Series."

t1,—Tht Miihllc Darifr Serirs.

If wt. regai-d the Dandeiiongs as built up cf three layers, then
the prcsnit series (//) ((institutes the srcund layei'. except at the
north-east corner, wliere it has been faulted down to stream level.
It rises, abruptly, in most cases, above the " Dandenong Agglome-

(ieohKjjf (>i Lihjihde. ."{45

rates. ■■ and is ctowiuiI hy tlir r]i|>fr Daciti' Series. (>). (Piute
XXX.. Fig. :i.)

Coiupared with tlir Lnwfi- Seiies (rj. tlie roek is lighter in eolour.
more porphyritif. ainl thei-efoi-e more crystalline, and it contains
no fragmental material. It has fewer (juartz phenocrysts, but in
its earlier stages more felsjiai- (plagioclase heing greatly in excess
of orthoclase, whereas in series (<•) tlic iever.se is the case), and
ferro-magnesian minerals in about the same proportion.

It is distinguished from the Upper Dacite (t) by its abundant
quartz and felspar phenocrysts, especially the formei-.

Towards the top of the sei'ies. i.e., a}ipioai-hing its junttion with
the I'pper Dacite. the phenocrysts of ((uart/ and felspar become
fewer and much larger. The lock also becomes darker, and acquires
a certain outward resemblance to the I'pper Dacite. lint notwith-
standing this evidence of gradual differentiation within the series,
there is no dithculty, excepl where landslips have masked the
conditions, in drawintr a sharp boundary line with the I'pper
Dacite. The two series air quite distinct.

St raf i graph iced Relaf ioimJii p. — Wherever this series is in con-
tact with the .series <\ the former occupies the higher level.
Wherever it is in contact with the Upper Dacite (e). it occupies
the lower level. Tliis general testimony of superposition indicates
that the order c. d . r . was tin- order i>i extrusion. For reasons
given later, the Upper Dacite must be regarded as the last of tlie
volcanic system, and the above older may be taken as confirmed.

Fetroloyical Description. — The lower type is a gray rock, show-
ing very numerous ])lieiio( rysts of felspar, quartz, and biotite.
naming them in the order of decreasing abundance. The ])heno-
crysts consist of (|uait/.. idionioijihic. and often corroded; plagio-
clase (lal)ra<loiite chiefly i. /.onf<l. idiotiiorphic. though often frac-
tured, and .sometimes containing small inclusions of sphene ; ortho-
clase in clear rhombic crystals, e.xt ingiiishing diagonally; })lagio-
clase in excess or orthoclase; liiotite. He.xcd into conformity with the
flow line.s; and pyro.xeiie ( .' ) much altered, identified mainly l)y the
Ix)undaries, giving extinction angk's of 22 iU'^s- to '-V.) deg. (Jarnet
is common ; ajtatite and zircon not iinconimon ; ilmenite acces-
sory, rin' glassy ground-iiiass is obseuied by myriad fragments of
the phenocrysts. f laet ined Ity tlow movements, and now arranged
in coiifoiiiiity with the well-marked tlow lines.

in the uppei- type of this series, quartz and felspar are in fewer
but larger phenocrysts; deeply zoned plagioclase is still in excess
of orthoclase; garnet is less abundant, if not al)sent ; biotite is

346 Morris Morris:

more fragmentary, and intenst-ly pleocliroic. There is also a
micaceous dust shinunering tlnough a ground mass composed of a
granular maze of quartz, felspar, and biotite. and a glassy residue.
The flexure of the biotite and the coi'responding arrangement of
the other fragments indicate marked How structure. Ilmenite is
still abundant.

e. — The U 2) per or H ypersthene, or formal Dacite Series.

This is the last and probably the gi'eatast series of the system.
Though occupying only the upper portion or crest of the Dande-
nongs in the north, it extends over 10 miles south, passing beyond
the Gembrook railway line as far as the granodiorite, and at the
same time spreading west as far as Lower Ferntree Gully, and east
to Monbulk and Emerald.

This normal Dacite is distinguished from the preceding series
thus : — Its porphyritic character is much less apparent, the pheno-
crysts being small, Avhile quartz phenocrysts are very seldom seen ;
hypersthene is very abundant, though it appears to be quite absent
from the preceding series, except possibly the first. Even in the
series immediately underlying the normal Dacite, I have not found
one occurrence of hypersthene. Orthoclase is present, but in a
much lower ratio to plagioclase.

This dacite shows no difference from the r]>wt'V dacite
described by H. ('. Richards (16), except that here lutile sometimes
occurs in well-formed ciystals.

Schistose Dacite.- — In certain places, secondary biotite has formed
in clusters, surrounding the hypersthene to some extent, and the
ilmenite to a greater extent. At Mt. Dandenong this alteration is
not easily noticeable, but going east towards the Evelyn fault valley,
it becomes more marked, and on the highest ))art of the hornfels
ridge, that forms the eastern wall of tliis valley, tliere are a few
small i-esidual ])atches of schistose dacite. Of tliese patches, one at
least is almost, if not (|uite, isolated by the Silui'ian hornfels from
the main mass of the dacite of the Dandenongs on tlie west of the
valley. Other i)atclies run down the eastern sloi>e of the valley into
the alluvium. It is clear, therefore, that the normal dacite rests on
the Silurian as a lava How. (See Plate XXX., Fig. 4.)

Orii/iit of the Schistose Dticite. — Tliese i)atches of dacite are not
all equally altered. In some of tliem the schistose structure is
emphatic; in others, it is si'arcely peice])tible in hand specimens.
The following reasons present, themselves for attributing their con-
dition to plutonic and hypabyssal intrusions of granodiorite : —

(icohxjil of Liltl<liil<'. Ml

1. The dose pioxiniity ui intrusions of gijinodioiite poiplix iv
in the subjacent Silurian, at lower levels than the schistose rock,
suggests tliat the alteration is dut- l<> those ami lii<l<lcn plutonic
intrusions.

2. The Silurians beneath the schistose dacite have Vjeen alti-icl
into hornt'els, which is an extreme product ot" thermal meta-
niorphism, and it is impossible to doubt that the altered dacite
must be referred to the same cause as the horufels.

Regarding the irregularity of the distribution of schistosity thai
has been noted in the small area under discussion, the prevalenif of
the big granodiorite dykes suggests the explanation that tliese
anomalies are due to the unequal distance of the dacite from these
intrusions, and possibly also to their unequal distance from the
cooling surface.

B.— The Plutonh- Piiask.

The dacite forms a sliarp junction with the granodiorite. soiiih
of the Gembrook railway line, and for six or seven miles along the
contact, the former has been converted int<j a band of gneiss, pene-
trated in several places by veins of pegmatite and quartz. For
these reasons. Prof. Skeats (13), in describing the above meta-
niorphism of the dacite, concludes that tlie dacite is older than the
granodiorite. Corroborative evidence obtained by Prof. Skeats at
Macedon. Warbiirton. Xyora, and Maivsville, confirms this con-
clusion.

Comparison of the chemical analyses of the dacite and of the
granodiorite has shown that they are almost identical in composi-
tion, and are therefore leferable to the same source, and to the
same period. (13).

C. — TiiK IIypabyss.vl Ph.\sk.
In the district shown on the map, two gioups of dykes stand
out prominently, one along tlie western ])order of the volcanic
rocks, the other along the eastern bordei-. Tlie former group are
characteristically basic, the latter intermediate in chemical com-
position. For reasons given below, the former are treated as
'differentiated, and the latter as undifferentiated dykes.

a. — The Differentiated Dykes.

These form a group of four along the western border of the
system. They all penetrate the volcanic rocks, but two of them lie
outside the area of the map. They may all be called Augite Olivine

348 Morris Morris:

Dolerite Dykes, but they fall into two pairs owing to a marked
difference in structure, viz.. ophitic and non-ophitic.

The Non-Ophitic Dykes comprise a dyke lying just outside the
south-west corner of the area mapped, viz., in Allot. 48, and the
dyke shown off Cambridge-road in Allot 23^1. The former has a
width of at least 4 to 6 feet, and was traced for 50 yards, the
latter is not less than 10 feet wide, and was traced for about 100
yards.

These are dark, tine-grained basaltic rocks, with no minerals
discernible in hand specimens. Augite occurs in grains through
the ground mass, and in larger crystals, with frequent twinning,
olivine is now represented by its pseudomorphs. Iron oxide is very
abundant, with shape and lustre of magnetite, but the prevalence
of leucoxene-like alteration product suggests that the rock is.
titaniferous, and that some ilmenite is present. Laths of plagio-
clase (chiefly labradorite) are common, apatite occurs sparingly.
Ground mass consists of granular matter set in eryptucrystaline tu'

The Ophitic Dykes comprise a dyke in Allot. 40b, and a dyke
lying outside the map, where it penetrates a small residual of the
series (a).

The former is a dark compact rock, showing large phenociysts
of augite, and long thin laths of felspar. This augite is greeti,
generally zoned, and showing composite structure, often moulded
on idiomorphic olivine, and penetrated by laths of basic plagio-
cluse. Augite also in long purple, slightly pleochroic crystals, sug-
gesting a titaniferous variety. Iron oxide is very abundant.

The latter is also a dark compact rock, but with much smallci'
crystals of augite and olivine. Its structure answeis the descrip-
tion of the previous lock as far as the relations of augite, olivine
and felspar laths t(j one another are concerned. But there is alsa
an al)undance of another mineral occupying interstices, mouded on
tlie augite and olivine, and often enclosing the plagiodase laths.
It has two cleavages, one perfect, is biaxial and negative, with low
pol. colours, and a ref. index between 1.494 and 1.510. and does
not gelatinise with H.Cl. tliougli if is decomposed by it. It thus
has the iiualities of Stibiti'. .Mtiiough it has the appearance of a
priiuiiry mineral, especially as the rock sliows no other signs of
allei atioii, it eertaiiily owes its oiigin to the pneuniatolytie action
of steam upon a giound mass whose remains are now only spar-
ingly developed, and which was elose to plagiodase fel})ar in its
constituents and proportions.

Geology of Lilyrlole. 349'

In direction these l)asif dykes diverge a few degrees west of noitli.
the divergente being greatest in the southernmost of them.

Regarding their (n/c. it is dithcult to decide whether they are
rehtted to the Devonian cyck' or to the Tertiary basaltic eruptions.
But the folloAving considerations favour the foinu-r view : —

1. The neighbouiing basahs contain no augite except in the
ground mass, whereas the dykes are full of piicnocrysts.

'2. Tlie close association of the dykes in eai-h case with the
Devonian igneous rocks.

.'3. The directions of the dykes are consistent with the hypothesis
tliat ttiey are part of a radiating system from some centre in tlie
Dandenongs.

If this view l)e right, they nuist be regarded as dirt'erentiated
dykes, representing possibly the complementary products of the
acid lavas which appeared in the earlier part of the volcanic jdiase.

What appears to be a pair of complementary dykes is marked at
the foot of the north slope of the Dandenongs in the Lower Dacite
Series, adjacent to Olinda Creek in Allot 7.^. The two dykes out-
crop within 10 yards of each other, but the outcrop is too limited
to determine their direction.

The Basic Complementary dyke is a Doleiite. It is a l)luish-black.
tough, fine-grained rock, showing abundant pyrites. It contains
laths and idiomorphic phenocrysts of plagioclase (mainly lal)ra-
dorite). and pseudomorphs of two other minerals, one apparently
after a pyroxene, and showing ophitic structure, the other aftei-
olivine. Iron oxide is common, pyrites abundant, and calcite
occurs in the vesicles. The ground mass is cry})tocrystalline. and
shows no flow structure.

The Acid Complement;iry ilyke is a light gi-ay i)oi])liyritie iock.
crowded with phenocrysts of (piartz, and streaked with small, elon-
gated, white aieas. due to the occupation of vesicles by secondai-y
minei-als. It contains phenoeiysts of quartz, idiomorphic, but
often eorroded ; ortlioelase. with S(|uare or rliond)ic outlines and
diagonal extinction; plagioclase (andes.-lal>rad.) ; biotite in flakes-
flexed in conformity with the flow lines, and often containing the-
sagenite wel) of rutite needles. Apatite and ziiTon in good pro-
portions. Besides the orthoelase phenocrysts. there are alsc,
numerous orthoclases of similar shape, but of progressively smallei-
size, till those of the ground mass are reached, which is ])acked ftdl
of them.

Between Lilydale and Kvelyn two dykes are visilile in sections of
the railway eiitting. one (Allot. 26) about 20 feet wide, the other

■350 Morris Morris:

(Allot 30'^). 5 feet wide. Both are nmcli decomposed, the latttT
being now a soft, gritty rubljle. Both strike about ."} deg. west of
north.

b. — The Undifferentiated Dykes.

These dykes all occur either penetrating, or closely associated
with, the remains of the igneous rocks that form a broken border
along the eastern side of the Evelyn fault.

They fall into two divisions : (1) the Wandin dyke. (2) the grano-
■diorite porphyries.

(1) The Wandin Dyke. — This dyke lies aljout 1| miles due west
■of Wandin (Allot. 33* and 3) in the series h. It outcrops spora-
dically for H miles, and with an average width of about 45
to 50 feet. It bears a very close resemblance to the propylitizt-d
Dacite dyke of the Macedon district (one mile Avest of Hesket) (1.")).
The chemical analysis of the latter is probably very close to that
of the former, and has been used for that reason in the variation
diagram, Avhere it conforms very w^ell with the curves.

This is a granitic-looking rock, with numerous phenocrysts of
felspar and dark biotite, set in a fine ground mass.

There are large idiomorphic phenocrysts of zoned plagioclase,
biotite, and probably another mineral now chloritised. Smaller
irregular-shaped crystals of orthoclase are numerous. The rest of
the rock consists of a micrographic intergrowth of quartz and ortho-
clase, Avhich surrounds the phenocrysts. The plagioclase is sharply
marked off from the eutectic corona, but the orthoclase often passes
into it by a gradual transition. Apatite is common; zircon and
magnetite are sparingly present. The granophyric structure, which
is due to pneumatolytic action on the ground mass, supports
Becker's suggestion, " that the ground mass of a porphyritic rock
tends to approximately eutectic composition. ''i

(2) The Granodiorite Porphyries. — These form a group of dykes,
lying west of South Wandin, on the high hornfels shoulder of the
Dandenongs between Olinda Creek and the Evelyn fault. As ilia
structure here contains several interesting features, a more par-
ticular description is given. (Plate XXX., Figs. 3 and 4.) The
Evelyn fault is marked in this part by a deep depression, which
•develops into two valleys, one north, the other south of a small
watesrshed in the depiession. The dacite is sharply severed from
the hornfels by these two fault valleys, except at the watershed,

1. See (19) p. -264.

Geolo(/l/ of Lihidah. 35 F.

where, aiid a little to the south of which, the Dacite is found lyiiij;
on till.' top of the hornfels ridge, as much as 200 yards east of thr
fault. It differs, however, from the Dacite west of the fault in thrc
respects : —

i. It forms residual patches on the hornfels.

ii. It is schistose, and in some cases intensely so.

iii. It is closely associated with the tiranndiorite-poriihyiy dykes.
which occur \rx the hornfels at lower levels than the schistose dacite,.
and which, togethei- with the plutonic mass they represent, are
responsible for the production of the schists and liornfels. A
boulder of the dyke rock was found in the gneissic dacite. But
whether this was an included fragment, or the head of a hidden
dyke, could not be determined. The presence of other dykes tends
to favour the latter view. But, in any case, it is clear that the
dykes, though possibly to a small extent simultaneous with the
dacite. were in the main later thaii it.

These dykes are mineralogically similar, but they vary in the-
coarseness of the ground mass from a type about three times coarser
than the Dacite up to a type where the minerals of the ground
mass are nearly as coarse as the phenocrysts. This latter type is
developed on a very large scale in a deep valley in north-east corner
of block 920b.

The following is a composite description of the connnonest types
found.

Phenocrysts of plagioclase are abundant, quartz not so common,
biotite is abundant, and subordinate orthoclase. Biotite, asso-
ciated sometimes with a little muscovite, is often arranged in
radiating bunches. (Ground mass consists of quartz and orthoclase
mainly, the latter often in square or rhombic sections, with diagonal
extinction. l)ut plagioclase, and flakes of biotite are also present.
Apatite, zircon, iron oxide, and pyrite (intimately associated with
biotite) are present as accessories.

Relation to the Dacite. — We may safely assume that these dyke
rocks and the associated dacite were derived from the same magma
basin. In the Dacite. the ground mass contains quartz and felspar
in proportions of about 20 per cent, to 13 per cent. (16). In the
dykes, this quartz and felspar form crystals whose size increases as
the rock becomes more hypaljyssal, until a type is reached where it
is hard to distinguish the crystals of the second generation from,
those of the first. It, therefore, appears that the only true pheno-
crysts in these dykes, and possibly in the deeper-seated plutonic rock
also, are the more basic felspars, some of the quartz and biotite, and

352 Morris Morris:

the accessories. The liypeisthene, which is practically confined to
the dacite or superficial rock, and even tlien is unstable in the
presence of heat, changing over into Ijiotite, is probahly not a true
phenocryst, but a crystal of the second generation, resembling, in
this respect, the olivine of basalts, ^ which attains such a size owing
to its power of spontaneous ci-ystallisati(in, and to its rapid rate of
growth.

Other undifferentiated dykes, viz.. hornblende porphyrite, found
by Prof. Skeats (13) near Aura, Ijoth in the granodiorite and in
the dacite, are regarded by him as " genetically connected with the
granodiorite, and as forming one of the later incidents connected
with the plutonic rock."

The dykes marked on tlie map show indications of a radial
-arrangement with reference to some centre in tlie Dandenongs.
Further observation of dykes on the south-west and south-east
flanks of the Range are needed to be certain about it.

D. — Thk V^olcanic Succession.

The following rock analysis have been made through the kindness
•of Mr. E. J. Dunn, by the officers of the Geological .Survey
Laboratory : —

A

B

c

D

SiO.,

.

68.19

69.93

68.73

65.83

Al^Oa

14.98

15.14

13.16

14.89

Fe^Oa

0.74

1.30

1.17

0.73

FeO

2.74

2.33

2.74

4.63

MgO

0.29

0.26

1.22

1.88

CaO

1.95

1.80

3.03

3.13

Xa,0

3.34

3.36

2.30

2.12

K2O

3.64

3 55

2.59

2.32

H.2O

1.40

0.83

1.86

2.41

H20 = (100°C) -

0.14

0.07

0.09

0.17

CO.,

1.93

nil

1.50

0.47

Ti02

0.20

0.20

0.50

0.89

P2O:,

0.05

0.03

0.17

0.16

Cr.O;,

uil

nil

nil

trace

MnO

0.08

0 05

0.09

0. 10

NiO

nil

nil

0.01

0.01

CoO

nil

nil

nil

nil

BaO

0.27

0.30

0.20

0.13

bi,0

nil

trace

trace

nil

S

trace

trace

0.18

0.10

1. See (19) p.

218.

Ge.ologij of Llli/ihih

SO:,

A
nil

ti'Ace

nil
triure

C
nil
trace

!>
nil
trace

'I'otal
LessO= -

99.9 1

99.15

99.54

.07

99.97
.04

Total

Sp. Gravity

99 94
2.652 -

99.15
2.658 -

99.47
2.687 -

99.93
2.702

A. Lowt'r Toscanite. Specimen from quarry Ini. \.E. of Lilydale, allot. 21.

N. en<l.
R. Uppt'r 'I'oscanile. Specimen from ((uarry aliout I in. K. of MoorooHcirk.

allot. 22c.
•C. Lower Dacite. Specimen from railway ciittiiuj,- between Lilydale tiud

Evelyn, allot. 30c.
D. MidiH.' Dacite. Specimen from Dandenoni>- Range, N.E. flank.

-maiilTE (3)

354 Morris Morris:

Taking KicliarcLs' analysis (16) of tlie Hypersthene Dacite at
Upwey, in addition to the above four, we are thus provided with
a complete set, representing each of the five volcanic series. The
variation diagram has been prepared from these analyses, and I
have also introduced analyses of the following closely-related dacitic
rocks of the Macedon district, described by Skeats and Summers
(15), viz : —

M^, Dacite, Braemai' House.

M2, Granodiorite, Braemar House.

M3, Dacite, Hesket.

M"*, Grandodiorite, Baringo.

The petrological affinities of the Macedon and the Dandenong-
districts are indicated by the conformity of the analyses of the
former with the curves of those of the latter, as far as the three
Dacite Series (c. d and t) are concerned. These all form a serial
group. The two toscanites {a and 6), however, fall together on
curves of their own. It is. therefore, obvious that either they have
pursued an independent line of differentiation in the same cycle, or
else, that they belong to some period older than the dacites.

In the absence of other evidence, I have preferred the former view
for the following reasons: — (1) The distribution of a and h is such
as to keep them everywhere in the closest association with the three-
other series. (2) The chemical analyses show family characteristics
between the two groups, e.g.. they both have a very high percentage
of BaO, indicating probably a barium felspar throughout the four
series; further, the series all fall in or near the sub-alkali division.

Order of extrusion. — The variation diagram shows that a and h
form an inseparable pair. For reasons set forth earlier, a is
regarded as being older than h; c has been found superposed on b.
This gives us the order, «, 6, c. For the reasons given below, e
must be regarded as the last, and d, the penultimate, series of the-
cycle. Therefore, the order must be a, h. r, d. e. and this is the-
order which is everywhere indicated by the evidence of super-
position.

Magmatic different iatiou . — There aj)pears to lie little d()ul)t that
these five series, excepting possil)ly the toscanites, are consan-
guineous. They are, therefore, regarded as the differentiation pro-
ducts of a primordial magma, which there are the following
reasons for lielieving to have had a chemical composition, similar
to that of the Upper or Eypersthene Dacite Series (p), and the
Granodiorite, and the Wandin Dyke : —

1. The above three rocks represent respectively tlie volcanic,.

Geoloyn of Li/ifdalr. 365

plutdiiic. and hypalAssal phases of the eyele, and they occurred in
that ordiT. 'J'hr (.hriuical composition of these three types is
practically the same. It is clcai'. then, that after the extrusion of
the tirst four- series of the volcanic cycle, the magma remained
unchanged, not only throughout the last series of the volcanic phase,
though that series probably exceeds in magnitude all the previous
ones added together. l)ut also throughout the plutonic and hypa-
byssal phases to the cud of the cycle.

2. These three types also l)ear the same relationship to one
another in the Maccdon district, wliere no differentiated rocks of
tlie dacite family have l)een found.

.'1 There are immense developments of normal dacite, sometimes
associated with granodiorite, in the neighbouring mountains be-
tween Healesville and Warburton, the Black's Spur, and the Cer-
berean Ranges.

With these reasons for regarding the Upper Dacite as representing
the undifferentiated magma, there remain but four volcanic series
whicli are differentiated, viz., a, b, c, and d.

By both mineralogical and chemical evidence these four series are
resolved into two pairs. In the first pair (a and h) quartz is absent,
except in the ground mass. In tlie second pair (r and d) it is abun-
dant. In the variation diagram, the second pair fall with the
Upper Dacite (e), the Granodiorite, and the Wandin Dyke, on the
same curves. But the first pair fall on separate curves, being richer
in SiU^,. AI0O3, and alkalis, but poorer in oxides of Ca, Mg, and
Fe, than the second pair.

It thus appears that, if the toscanite be admitted to this cycle,
there must have been an early separation of the magma into two-
parts.

One of these redivided, forming two magmas (a and b), almost
identical in chem. composition, except that a was much richer in
HrjO than 6, with the result that though chemically similar, they
are mineralogically different.

The other part, which was richer in basic constituents, and
though poorer in SiO^, contained much free quartz, divided into
two series (c and d), such that the latter, containing more of the
basic constituents, and more water, produced a rock more crystal-
line than the former, and containing less quartz, but more felspar
and ferro-magnesin minerals.

Examples of the differentiation of andesitic magmas have been
described by Judd (21), and by Teall and Lagorio. The latter
observers remark that the older of crystallisation is such that the

356 Morris MorrlM:

magma becomes pi-ogressively more aeid. In tlir Damleiioiigs, lio\v-
ever. the order of exti-usioii was progiessively less aeid. This order
is also exemplified in the Buohan district (12), where the L.
Devonian igneous activity opened with ([uai'tz porphyries and
rhvolites, and closed in some cases with andesites.

e. NOMENCI.ATUKK OF THP: I(;NKOrS KoCKS.

There can be no doubt that a true classification ought to be genea-
logical, and it should also provide a nomenclature that would make
it possible to give a generic name to all the meml)ers of any family
of rocks, which have been produced by modification during descent
from the same parent magma.

If we accept Hatch's classification, as it stands, then, in the case
before us. the plutonic rock of tlie Belgrave i-ailway line is too poor
in SiO^ [63.85 per cent. (Richards), and 64.41 per cent. (Plant)]
to be called a granodiorite.

Further, taking the five volcanic series, the Upper series, hitherto
called the " Hypersthene Dacite," would l)e the only one of the five
which w-as not a dacite. No analysis has appeared, where its SiO^
rises to 66 per cent. But, as all tliese series belong to one family,
and that of obvious dacitic character, Hatch's boundary line should
be elastic enough to enable us to give them all the same family
name. Series e is therefore called the " Upper Dacite Series."

The first two series, containing nearly 7 per cent, of alkalis, and
nearly 70 per cent, of SiOo. form a paii- of alkali dacites. As the
ground mass of the first is full of orthoclase. while that of the later
is microcrystalline, I proposed at first to name them respectively,
" Orthoclase Alkali Dacite Series," and " Micvoi-rystalline Alkaline
Dacite Series." For the sake of simplicity, however. 1 have called
them " The Lower," and " The Upper Toscanite Series," in con-
formity with the existing classification, though there is nothing in
those names to indicate any consaTiguineity of these with the re-
maining three series.

In view of these two toscanites (alkali dacites), in which no quartz
is to be seen except in the ground mass, wliere it is not greatly de-
veloped, it seems inadvisable to phue too mmh reliance on Hatch's
rule that dacites are minei-alogically distinguished from andesites
by the presence of quartz.

The last three volcanic series have been named for simplicity,
" Lower," " Middle," and " Upper Dacite Series " resi)ect ively.

Geology of Lily dale 357

V. -Faults.

The map shows a narrow band of the series h along the western
edge of the system, between the silurian, with which it foruis a
broken border on the west, and the series c, with which it forms a
very regular junction on the east. This latter junction has such
uniform persistence in direction over a course of seven miles, as
to need explanation, especially as it is matched about two miles to
the east by another very uniform, tliough arcuate lx)undary, w^hich
marks the eastern limit of the igneous system, and is for a large
part of its course parallel to its western fellow.

Of these two junctions three explanations j^resent themselves.
They are either—

1. Natural boundaries, or,

2. Fold junctions, or
W. Fault junctions.

1. The first fails to explain in the case of either of them the
uniformity of direction over a long distance, w'hich contrasts so
conspicuously with the many indisputable natural boundaries in
the map. And when the two cases are taken together, its inade-
quacy is still more apparent.

2. Regarding the second, it has been shown that these igneous
rocks lie unconformably on the upturned edges of the Silurians.
If, therefore, the igneous rocks were involved in the folding pro-
cesses, it can only have been to a small extent, so small that the
resultant folds would be too shallow to account for the uniform
junctions in question.

3. The evidence points strongly to the view that they are fault
junctions. I have, therefore, interpreted them from this point of
view, referring to the western junction as the Montrose fault, and
the eastern one as the Evelyji fault.

The Montrose Fault. — This junction has l)een mapped for seven
miles from the Salvation Army farm near Bayswater to Lilydale,
and, excepting a small bulge westward, between Montrose and the
Olinda Creek, its course throughout may be represented by a line
which is very regular and persistent in direction. The junction is
not visible all the way, but wherever it can be seen, it conforms to
this line.

The series h, which lies along the west of the junction for the
whole distance, may be seen outside of Lilydale, on the east of the
junction, underlying the series r. which also contains many in-
cluded fragments of it at its base. It follows, therefore, that if

lU

;jo8 Morris Morris:

tlie fault exists, tlie downthrow must have been on the east, where-
the younger rock, viz., series c, is preserved.

The Evelijn Fault. — The Montrose fault, which skirts the western,
wall of the Dandenongs, is matched along the eastern wall by another
junction, which marks the igneous rocks off sharply against the-
Silurians on the east. This junction passes Evelyn about half a mile-
to the east. From this point it runs a little east of north, keep-
ing parallel with the Montrose fault, two miles away to the west,
and like it, separating the series c on the w^est from series h, or,.
Avhere this has been denuded away, from the Silurians, on the east.
Tracing it south from Evelyn (Plate XXX., Figs, 4, 5), it ends
abruptly at the Olinda Creek, but starts again some 250 yards to
the east, whence it runs in a direction a little west of south, cutting
across the eastern shoulder of the Dandenongs, and severing dacite
from hornfels. .fVfter trending about half a mile in this manner,
it bears east again, and recovers a course which would conform
with the arcuate continuation of the junction, if it had crossed
Olinda Creek directly. It therefore appears to have been faulted
out of its path at the Olinda Creek.

The path of the junction across the Dandenongs is marked by a
deep depression, referred to in this paper as the ICvelyn Fault
Valley. For half a mile south of Olinda Creek, this depression
is steep and narrow. (Plate XXX., Fig 4a, Sect. AB). Further
south, it forms an equally deep but very broad valley, the two-
valleys being separated by a small watershed in the depression.
(See Fig. 4a, Sect. CD.) The broad valley opens out southward"
upon the upper course of Olinda Creek. I have not traced the-
junction south of this point, but on consulting a map of the Woori
Yallock basin, by J. Easton, whose map practically begins where
mine ends, it appears that if this line is continued in the same
direction to Monbulk, it will still mark off the dacites on the west
from the Silurians on the east. On the other hand, if the junction
were continued at its northern extremity, across the Yarra. it wouM
pass along the eastern wall of the western pair of quartzite ridges
described earlier. (Plate XXX., Fig. 5.) The Stringy Bark Creek,
on crossing this junction in its north-west course, is immediately
lost in a wide marsh. The Yarra also, on crossing the place where
this junction would occur, expands into an extensive marsh on the
left bank.

Here then is a line separating various kinds of rock, and yet
maintaining a uniform arcuate direction for many miles. Evi-
dence of depression on the west of it exists at Olinda Creek. (Plate

G>'<)lo<i,i of f/ihiihih'. .'559

XXX., Fig. 2), and also, if we regard it as continued to the Yairu,
in the two marshy areas above i-eferred to. The theory that it is
a normal junction, though satisfactory for section CD, across the
Fault Valley above referred to, appears to be inconsi.stent with
seetioii AH. wluMf tlie valley is iidt brdinl. but deep and nari'ow,
the junction Ijeing neaily vt-rtirnl. 'i'lie fault tlieory is therefore
supported, not only l)y the persistence of dii(.'(.tion, and the evi-
dence of depression on the western side, bot also by the nature of
this valley, which 1 have theiefore tailed the " Evelyn Fault
Valley."

The downthrow of this fault would be, of course,, on the west,
where the younger rocks are in every case preserved.

Taking the combined high probabilities of the Montrose, and the
Evelyn faults, it is difficult to avoid the conclusion that a large
rectangular block, including at least the northern part of the Dan-
•denong mountains, has foundei-ed lietween these two fault planes.
(Plate XXX.. Figs. 1 and .'5.)

Some six months after I had mapped the northern part of the
Montrose fault, Mr. J. T. Jutson published, his valuable paper on
the Physiography of the Yarra (18). He postidates. though, with
a query, what he calls the Dandenong fault, running along the
western edge of the Dandenong Range, in the path of the Montrose
fault, and continuous in the south with the faidt discovered by
Sir A. R. C. Selwyn, near Frankston (18). He also coiitinues the
Brushby Creek fault southwards in the same manner. Between
these two fault planes, he believes, a bloek has lieen relatively de-
pressed, producing in the South the Carrum Swamp, and. a por-
tion of Port Phillip, and in the north, the Croydon Senkungsfeld.

The fresh evidence educed in this paper points to the need ot'
certain modifications of this theory : —

The Croydon Senkungsfeld has been relatively depressed, as he
says, against the Brushy ('reek fault scarp, but not against the
Dandenong Mountains. On the contrary, if the senkungsfeld ex-
tends so far eavst, then the Dandenongs have been faulted dowii
against the senkungfeld. Since the relative depression occurred, in^r
on the west of the fault plane, as Mr. Jutson has postulated, bu'
on the east, the Dandenongs possess their present height, not be-
■cause of these dislocations, but in spite of them. For this reason
I am unable to agree with Mr. Jutson 's theory of a Dandenong
fault, forming the eastern boundary of the (^-oydon Senkungsfeld.

Seeing that there is very prol)ably at least one fault (Monti-ose
fault), coasting the western wall of the Dandenongs. it remains to

360 Afoi-rts Morris:

consider wliether. although it be the reverse of wiiat Mr. Jutson
pustuhited. it may not. as he believes, bv a northern continuation,
of Selwyn's fault. If it may, then we must imagine a see-saw
movement on an east and west axis, south of which, if the beds
Were depressed, then north of it they must have been elevated, and
vice-versa.

Now, this see-saw movement could have occurred on the east of
the fault pane, or on the west of it. It did not occur on the west
of it, for the senkungsfelder iii the north, and the Carrum Swamp
in the south, indicate a depression at both ends of the block. It
can only have occurred, therefore, if it occurred at all, on the
east of it, the sinking of the Dandenongs in the north being
balanced in the south by a rising of the granitic areas of Morn-
ington peninsula.

The presence of the small l>asalt-capped plateau lying west of
Cave Hill, Lilydale, suggests the possibility of its being the eastern
boundary of the Croydon Senkungsfeld. In this case, if the bound-
ary were determined by a fault, that fault would lie one and a half
or two miles west of the Montrose fault.

T/ie Olinda Fault. — It has already been noted that where the
Evelyn fault meets Olinda Creek, it appeals to have l)een heaved
out of its course about 250 yards to the east, with the result that
the series d is noAv found at the foot of the high clifis of hornfels
and series c on the north bank of Olinda Creek, which occupies
the junction. (Plate XXX., Fig. 4.) The existence of this Olinda
fault is supported by all the evidence in favour of the Evelyn fault.
If, therefore, the latter be taken as established, the former must be
also. The downthrow was on the mountain side, where the igneous
rocks are preserved against the silurians.

Above the Evelyn fault, the Olinda Cieek valley is veiy young.
It is marked by rapids and waterfalls, the latter having receded
more than one mile above the fault, lielow the fault the valley
widens, so that the stream meanders through wide alluvial flats.
This rejuvenation of the stream has probably resulted in its cap-
turing much of the headwaters of Stringy Baik Creek.

VI, — The Tertiary Igneous System.

I have taken Stirling's boundaries for the t)asalt. The basalt
lies upon the silurians, capping a small plateau west of the railway
line, between Lilydale and Mooroolbark. At Cave Hill it occupies
an old river channel, whose sands lie between it and the limestone.

(ieologii of Lihjdide. 361

Here it is limited l)y tiie (|uart/ite.s. which evidently formed the
eastern bank of this channel. It nowhere transgresses the igneous
rocks of the Devonian cycle to the east, which prohalily foinicd high
giound when the basalt was poured out.

Macroscopically. it is a dark, non-vc.-jiculai-. very tough, tine-
grained rock, with small crystals of g'ccu olivine.

Microscopically, olivine is abundant in large, regular crystals,
and a few large laths of a basic plagioclase are set in a ground
mass, composed of felspar laths, lath-shaped augite, granular
olivine, and abundant rectangular magnetite, and interstitial
glass.

The reference of this basalt to the older or newer series is by no
means easy. Petrologically two criteria are used, viz. : —

Both tests are inconclusive, but they tend to place the Lilydale
basalt in the older series. In the quarry north of Cave Hill, in
allot. 301, the basalt is very decomposed. Added to this, the
extensive circumdenudation. which is apparent, tends to favour the
older age.

Source.— T'\\\ now. no undoubted vent f)f the older basalt has been
found. At Lilydale. in the basaltic plateau, just referred to, there
is a crater-like depression breached towards the north-east, which
being regarded as a vent Ijy the residents, is therefore known as
"Crater Hill." Settioiis on the adjoining roadside resemble
tuffaceous deposits. On the opposite side of the road, there is
another larger depression opening on the north-west side. In a hole
sunk in the bottom of this basin to a depth of about thirty feet,
the l)asalt is present all the way. The rock on the rim of the basin
has all the appearance of a decomposed fragmental rock. Further
evidence is needed, before concluding that the place was an erup-
tive centre.

In conclusion, 1 wish to thank Professor Skeats, who has dis-
cussed the problenis witli me from time to time, both in the field
and in the laboratory; also Mr. H. J. Grayson, for kindly prepar-
ing the micro photogiaphs. and some very thin rock sections; and
also Mr. E. J. Dunn, who jici-mitted me to liave four rocks analysed
by .Messrs. Uayly and Hall, in tlic gcoIoLMcal Survey's laboratory.

VII. Summary.

The following are the most important new results contributed
in this paper : —

I. The district between Lilydale and .Mount Daiidenong has been
mapped petrologically for tlie first time, with the exception of the

362 Morris Morris.-

narrow strip from Lilydale across Cave Hill, which was done
by V. R. Stirling. Some of his boundaries, and those of the
geological map of Victoria, ijublished by the (Teological Survey De-
partment, have undergone important alterations during revision.

2. A denuded synclinal fold of the Yeringian (U. Sil.) series
forms the basal rock of the district. Their strike is normally north
and south, but in the area north-east of a line joining Lilydale and
Evelyn, it is diverted 40 deg. or 50 deg. to the east.

The prevalence of littoral facies probably marks the close uf the
Silurian invasion.

The alteration of sonie facies into quartzite has been caused, not
by thermal metamphorism, but by metasomatic processes, aided
probably by folding stresses.

3. Upon this sedimentary floor, lies a stack of igneous rocks,
which have lieen linked up into one system with those of the
Dandenong Ranges.

These rocks are regarded as representing the volcanic phase of an
igneous cycle, which was completed by plutonic and hvpabvssal
phases.

Representative specimens selected from tlie tliree phases have been
described and compared.

The volcanic rocks are resolved into five series, and these series
are regarded as being consanguineous.

The chemical composition of the first four series Avas determined
by means of analyses specially made by Messrs. Bayly and Hall.

Variation diagrams have been made from these and other analyses
of rocks, selected from each of the three phases of the cycle.

The bearing of this evidence on the differentiation of the parent
magma is discussed. The differentiation was progressively less
acid.

The composition of the parent magma of the differentiated vol-
canic series is shown to be represented by the last series of the phase
(viz., Hypersthene Dacite), which remained on the whole un-
changed throughout tlie |)lutoiiic and liypal)yssal phases of the
cycle. It was sub-alkali, and between acid and intermediate in
composition.

Of the volcanic series, the first foui-. which are differentiated,
fall naturally into two pairs : —

(i) A pair of toscanites (or alkali daciti's). These ai'e clu'iiiiially
identical, but mineralogically dissiiiiilai'.

This difference is attributed to mineralisers (especially H.,0),
present in the Lower, but absent from the Upper.

I

Geoloi/i/ of IJIi/i/iilf'. 3^3

(ii.) The second pair have a sub-alkali LDinpositiori; and art- uaiinMl
Lower and Middle Dacite Series respect ivrly. Thev differ cliieHy
in the ratio of ground mass to phenocivsts.

The Middle Series was followed by the Upper oi- Hypersthene
Dacite Series, which brought the volcanic phase to an end.

All the rocks of the system, except the two toscanites, conform
U> the same serial curves in variation diagram. Tlie toscanites fall
•on curves of their own. The (luestion is, therefore, raised, whether
.they should be admitted to the cycle, oi- leferred to some earlier
•date.

Evidence is presented foi- the sites of two eruptive centres, which
are marked on the Map.

Evidence of foliation in the two toseanites, together with its
absence from the remaining series is diseussed especially with
reference to the Devonian folding movements.

The dykes are of two kinds, differentiated and undifferentiated.
There are signs of radial groupings with reference to some centre
in the Dandenongs.

The undifferentiated dykes appear to be closely associatefl with
the plutonic rock, which occurs, on the one hand, about one mile
south of the Belgrave railway line, where it outcrops extensively,
and, on the other hand, on the eastern slioulder of Mt. Dandenong,
where it is invisible. In both cases it has converted the contiguous
dacite into a schistose type, and in the latter case, it has also con-
verted the Silurians into a hornfels. and has sent out large
apophyses, which outcrop in the hornfels below the schistose dacite.

This residual patch of schistose dacite, resting upon the hornfels
is clear evidence of the volcanic nature of the Hypersthene Dacite.

The type of alteration here is similar to that, described by Piof.
Skeats, in the district south of Upwey and Belgrave.

" The Wandin Dyke " shows a type of propylitization simihu- to
that near Hesket (Mt. Macedon), and described by Skeats and
♦Summers.

In a dolerite dyke near Mooroolbark the groiind mass has been
secondarily altered to stilbite.

4. Evidence is discussed for placing a fault along each of two
long uniform junctions, running parallel (X.K. and S.W.) for
some distance, one east, the other west, of the Dandenongs. Theic
seems little reason to doubt that a great block, including the
northern part of the Dandenongs, has subsided between these twn
fault-planes. Evidence is presented for another fault — the Olinda
iault.

864 Morris Morris :

."). The influence of these faults on the physiograpliy of the dis-
trict is described.

6. The tertiary basaltic eruptions are represented by a patch of
olivine basalt, capping a small residual plateau aboxit one mile west
of Lilydale. This rock is described, and its age is discussed.

VIII.— Bibliogr»aphy.

1. Sehvyn, Sir A. K. ('. Geol. Surv. Vic, Report I8r)6, Votes antT

Proc. Leg. Couii.. Vic, 1855-6, Vol. ii., Pt. 1 (Map and
Section).

2. Creswell, A. W. The Victorian Naturalist, 1885, Vol. ii.. P. ;3;}.

3. Creswell, A. W. Proc Roy. Soc Vic, 1892. Vol. v. (New

Series), P. 38-44.

4. Creswell, A. W. Proc Roy Soc Vic, 1893, Vol. vi.. P. 156-

159.

5. Danvers-Power, F. Notes on the late landslip in tlie Dande-

nong Ranges, Vic A.A.A.S., Vol. ix., Hobart (1892) Mtg.,
P. 337.

6. (iriffiths, G. S. The Genh.gy of Melbourne, A.A.A.S. Handbook

of Melb. (1890) Mtg., P. 38.

7. Murray, R. A. V. " Geology and Physical Geography," 1895

Edn., Pp. 22-3, 33, 36-7, 43-7.

8. Stirling, V. R. " Geol. Rep. on Lilydale District." Geol. Surv.

Vic. Monthly Prog. Rep. No. I. (New Series) 1899. Pp,
10-11 (with map).

9. Gregory, J. W. " Geology of Mt. Macedon." Pioc Roy. Soc

Vic, 1901, Vol. 14. Pp. 209-221.

10. Gregory, J. W. " The Heathcotian — a preordovician series."

Proc Roy. Soc. Vic, 1902, Vol. 15, P. 170-173.
ii. Jenkins, H. C. Report of the Government Metallurgist for tlie
year 1901. Ann. Ucp. of Sec. for Mines. Vic. for year
1901, P. 37.

12. Skeats, E. W. " The Volcanic llock^ of Victoria." A.A.A.S.,

Vol. xii., Brisbane Mtg., 1909.

13. Skeats, E. W. "Gneisses and Dacites of the Daudenong Dis-

trict." Quart. Jnurn. Geol. Soc. Vol. Ixvi.. lOlO. Pj.. 450-
169.

11. Skeats. E. W. "On the Gneis.ses and Altered Dacites of the

Dandenong Distiict (Victoria) and their relations to the
Dacites and Granodiorites of tlie area. Geol. Mag. Dec v..
Vol. vii., P. 134. 1910.

I'r...- I,'.S. V

1 I'lnlc W'lX.

Vv<u-. R.S. Yi,-t.

ni-. Plate XXX.

f>J,,&.U ^.^.^j^^.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 19U. Plate XXXI.

r:

1:

'^Wi — ' IJ^ ''?i /^ ^

4- LJ

s "2

Mi.

^ .3 55 •!• \i

4"^ 4 J"
Jl I ®

Geology of LUydale. ;i65-

]."). Skeats. E. W.. and Smunicrs, H. S. "The (ieology and

Petrology of the MiUL'don District. Bulletin of the Geol.

Surv. of Vic. 11)12.
M). Kichards, H. (_'. " On llif Separation and Analysis of

Minerals in the Dacite of Mt. Dandenong, Victoria." Proe.

Roy. Soc, Vic, n.s.. Vol. xxi.. Pt. ii.. Pp. 528-5:19, 1909.

17. (Iriffiths. G. S. "The Geology of Mell)ourne."' A.A.A.S.

Handbook of Melbourne (1890) ,Mtg., P. ;}8.

18. Jutson, J. T. " A Contribution to the Physiography of the-

Yarra Kiver and Dandenong Ck. Basins. Victoria." Prnc.
Roy. Soc. Vic, Vol. xxiii.. New Series. Pt. i.. 1911.
l;). Harker. A. "The Natural History of Igneous Rocks. 19()!>.

20. Hatch. F. H. "Text Book of Petrology." 1909.

21. Judd. J. W. "The Natural History of Lavas, as illustrated

by the Materials ejected from Krakatoa." Geol. Mag., 188'^.
Pp. l-ll.

IX.— DESCRIPTION OF PLATES.

Plate XXIX.

Fig. 1. — Photomicrograph of tlie Lower Toscanite Series, x 29,

polarised light, showing ground-mass composed of ortho-

dase, and microlites of plagioclase. the latter with parallel

arrangement.
Fig. 2. — Photomicrograph of the Upper- Toscanite Series, x 29,

polarised light, showing microcrvstalline ground-mass, and

the jjarallel arrangement of the phenocrysts of plagioclass

with the few microlites that occur.
Fig. 3. — Photomicrograph of the Lower Dacite Series, x 21,

polarised light, showing fiactured phenocrysts of quartz.

orthoclase, plagioclase. and biotite set in a glassy base;

also showing an included fragment of hornfels.
Fig. 4. — Photomicrograph of the Middle Dacite Series, x 21,

polarised light, showing phenocrysts of quartz, felspar.

and biotite. in a fine ground-mass, shimmering with

biotite.
Fig. 5. — Photomicrograpli uf a granodiorite porphyry dyke.

X 21, polarised light, showing phenocrysts of biotite

and zoned plagioclase set in a coarse dacitic ground-mass.
Fig. 6. — Photomicrograph of the Schistose Dacite, x 21, polarised

light, showing the hypersthene in process of alteration to

biotite, and the foliation of the latter.

M^ Morris Moi-rU: Qeologij of Lilt/dale.

Plate XXX.

Fig. 1. — Transverse section from Cave Hill to Stringy Bark Ck.,
showing the relations of the Silurians to the Oldei- Basalt,
and to the two toscanites; the Montrose and the Evelyn
faults, and the Wandin dyke.

Fig. 2. — Transverse section along the northern slojje of rlie Dande-
nong Range, showing the absence of fragment al facies at
the foot of Mt. Dan'denong, 'and the relations of the rocks
at Olinda Ck.

Fig. 3. — Transverse section across Mt. Dandenong (summit), show-
ing all the series of the vocanic phase, the relations of the
schistose dacite to the hornfels and grandiorite porphyry
intrusions, and the Montrose and the Evelyn faults.

Fig. 4. — Map illustrating the course of the Evelyn Fault over tlie
Dandenong Range.

Fig. 4a. — Diagrammatic transverse sections of the Evelyn Fault
Valley at the places marked in Fig. 4.

Fig. 5. — Map to illustrate the Gruyere Quartzite Ridges and other
physiographical features.

Fig. 6. — Map to illustrate the probable relations of Limestones and
Sandstones beneath the Basalt at Cave Hill, near Lilydale.

Plate XXXI.

Geological map of the area between Lilydale and Mount Dande-
nong.

[Pkoc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.S.), I't. II.. li»l-t_;.

Akt. XXl.ll. -7'Ac E.ssentlid Oil from the leaves of Ayonls^
fiexuosa.

iJv W. K. PAIiKY, l'..Sc.

(Victoriiin Cioverninent Kesearch Scholar).
[Read 11th December, l9Vi].

Ayonis fltd'uosa, D.C. (N.O. MyrtaceaeJ is a tree of low but ver}^
foliaceous appearance abounding in South-Western Australia, where
it is known as " Willow Myrtle,'' or sometimes as " Peppermint."

Being somewhat ornamental, it is frequently grown in streets with,
species of eucalypts.

The narrow, coriaceous leaves are covered with numerous oil-
glands, and when crushed emit an odour similar to that from many
species of eucalpts.

Baron von Mueller in describing this tree in his " Select Extra-
Tropical Plants.'' mentions that it j-ields an oil of " high antiseptic-
value.'' but no record has been found of any systematic examina-
tion of this oil, and the present paper aims at doing for this im-
portant oil-yielding tree what has already been done for most of oui-
eucalypts.

By courtesy of Mr. J. Cronin, the director, supplies of the leaves
were obtained from the Melbourne Botanic Gardens. Although the-
trees there are not in their natural habitat, the conditions of growth
were not considered sufficiently abnormal to have any appreciable
effect on the oil; in fact, it is probable that, as in the eucalypts,
species is the naain factor determining the character of the oil, and
that climate, soil, etc., have but little effect. The age of the tree and
the season of collection do, however, appear to have some slight
influence on the yield and composition of the oil.

For this reason supplies of leaves were obtained at different
seasons of the year; the first in March, 1913 — early autumn — and
the second in July. 1913 — mid-winter. The former was distilled the-
day after cutting, and the second after a delay of about a week.
This delay has been shown, by experiments carried out in connec-
tion with a similar investigation, to be of much less consequence
than might be supposed.

:368 R. E. Farri/ .-

Altogether about 17 ounces of the oil were obtained from the dis-
tillation of slightly over one Imndredweight of leaves, and the
jield, physical properties and composition of the two samples showed
only insignficant differences. [Vide Table I.]

The Crude Oil.

The crude oil is of a greenish colour, closely resembling in
.appearance that of E. globulus, l>ut its odour is quite distinctive,
suggesting cineol, cymene and a phenol as some of the constituents.
It is soluble in less than its own volume of 80 per cent, alcohol, but
requires four volumes of 70 per cent, alcohol.

In addition to the tw^o above-mentioned samples of oil, a tliird,
distilled some -32 years ago, and which was possibly the sample
described by Baron von Mueller, was obtained from the Botanic
'Gai-dens Museum.

TABLE I.

Physical Properties of Oils from Ayonis flexuosa.

Oil.

Date of Collection.

Yield.

al5°

;u,15°

8l5-

Cineol.

I.

- March, 1913 -

1.0 Ve •

- +5.3°

- 1.4657 •

- .9U0 ■

- 72.2°/,

1(a).

- March, 1913 -

—

+ 5.3° ■

- 1.4654 -

.905 -

■ 72.5°/,

II.

- July, 1913

o.87o ■

+ 4.6° •

■ 1.4701 ■

• .90S ■

• 62.0°/,

III.

- About 1881

—

+ 3.8° ■

- 1.4686 -

■ .917 ■

• 79.1°/,

Oil 1(a). is a portion of oil I., from which the phenol has been
removed. The cineol has been estimated by absorption in a satur-
ated aqueous solution of resorcin — a method that has proved more
satisfactory in our experience than the older phosphoric acid
method.

Cleared Oil.

Tlie first sample of oil obtained — the autumn collection — was then
investigated.

Phenols. — It was first treated to remove phenols. To do this I'if)
c.c. of the oil were shaken with a normal aqueous solution of sodium
hydroxide until the phenols were dissolved ; the aqueous solution was
then separated, shaken out with ether to remove adhering oil, and
then acidified. The separated phenols were extracted with ether
and evaporated to a constant weight. The phenol was a dark
yellowish-brown liquid, with a smell, strongly suggesting creosote.
It was almost insolubU' in water, but dissolved easily in 80 per cent.

Extent iiil Oil of A (JO,

369

alcohol. The addition of aqueous ferric chloride solution to this
alcoholic .solution produced a red coloration. Also a drop of strong
nitric acid, added to a ^eak aqueous solution, caused a magenta
coloration. There was. however, insufficient phenol to allow of any
further examination.

Aldehi/c/es. — The next step in the exanii nation was the i.solation
and identification of aldehydes. The oil. after the removal of the
phenol, was well washed with water and then treated with a satui--
ated a<|ueou.s solution of sodium l)isulphite. with repeated shakings
for several hours. No crystalline cuiiipimnd was formed, and tlie
.aqueous portion on investigation showed no traces of any' aldeliydic
■compound having been formed. Similai- examinations of the
fractions boiling below 170 deg. C. and al)ove 190 deg. C. respec-
tivelv also gave negative results, so there can be no doubt that
aldehydes, so often occurring in and depreciating the value of
.eucalyptus oils, are absent from this oil.

! ! i I .

.HO

f
^

fid

^

/

o CleEL-rel Ol.1.

40

/

% GTu.cLe

Qui.

■20

_^

H

160" Cent. 180' -200'

Temperature of Oil Distilliii'r.

Fractional Dif<t Hint ion.

To isolate, as far as possible, the remaining constituents iif the
oil, fractional distillation was resorted to. The cleared oil was
fractionated to identify the substances present in the oil. The crude
oil was also fractionated and the physical properties of the fractions
•examined [vide Table II.]. The accompanying graph shows the
■distillation curves for both crude and cleared oils.

370

R. E. I'arry,

TABLE ri.

I'hysicdl Properties of Fractions.

Teiiiperatiii'

/X1.V

^ Cineot.

015° Content of

Fraction.

r.

-below 170° -

5.5 c.c. -

_

■ 1.4641 -

.893

- 2.7 c.c.

ij.

- 170^-174° -

12.0 c.c. ■

■ +8°.l -

• 1.4649 -

.897 •

- 7.7 c.c.

III.

- 174°-r/>s° -

■ 13.0 c.c.

- + 3°.0

- 1.4650 -

.906

- 9.1 c.c.

IV.

- 178^-187" ■

• 12.0 c.c. •

- +0°.8 ■

- 1.4658 -

.911

- 8.0 c.c.

V.

- lS7°-227° ■

5.5 c.c.

_

- 1.4738 -

.916

- 6.1 c.c.

VI.

- above 227° -

2.0 c.c. ■

• - ■

■ - -

- ■

■ 0.8 c.c.

Whole Oil

50.0 c.c.

- 1.4657

.900

35.0 c.c.

A table of this kind is extremely useful in pointing' out possible
constituents. For instance, fraction IV. is practically optically
inactive, and yet on determining its cineol content we have
accounted for only two-thirds of the fraction. This suggests the
presence of another optically inactive substance of about the same
boiling point as cineol. and further investigation confii'ms this.

/(lent ificaf ion of Chief Const it ueiitx.

Cineol. — As stated earlier, the camphoraceous odour of cineol is
noticeable in the crude oil. To confirm its presence, syrupy phos-
phoric acid was poured on to the oil in a test tube — equal quantities
of each — and the mixture shaken up and held under a running tap
fur a minute, when it solidified, proving the presence of cineol.
This test also proved the absence of aromadendrene, as the solid was
wliite. for, if it were present, a brownish-red coloration would
have been produced. For the quantitative estimation of cineol. the
resorcin method was used. The results obtained were : — In whole
oil. 72.2 per cent. In fractions. 70 per cent. A phosphoric acid
estimation was also carried out, giving slightly lower results, l)ut
not sufficiently diffei-ent to cast any doubt on the moi-e consistent
resoicin results.

I'inene. — Fi-actioiis I.. II. and III. of the cleared oil was sepa-
rately decineolised by resorcin. The residues from fractions I. and
II. had distinct pinene odours, and were therefore tested for pinene
thus : 2 c.c. of the oil were cooled ; 7 c.c. t)f Amyl nitrite were added
and then 4 c.c. of glacial acetic acid. The mixture was then cooled
with ice and kept cooled while pfinal parts of glacial acetic acid and
concentrated hydrochloric aiid wen- added, drop by drop, with
stirring, as long as the licpiid was blue in colour. Crystals gradu-

h'ssciiliol Oil of Aijiutis fexuosa. 'ill

ally sepai-att'd out until there was a fairly heavy preeiptate of
piiieiii' nifruscn-hloiide, proviiii^f tlie presence of piiioiie in the
oil.

Ci/meiie. — The residue of fraction III., above mentioned, consisting
of ."5.5 e.c, had a lemon-like odour, strongly suggestive of cyniene.
It was oxidised by heating on a water-bath with 6 gms. of potassium
})ermanganate and 180 gms. of water, until the reaction was com-
plete, shown by the absence of oil on the surface of the aqueous
solution. The oxide formed was filtered off and evaporated to dry-
ness. The potassium salt was then boiled out with alcohol and
eva})orated, the residue being dissolved in water and acidified. The
separated acid was re-crystallised from alcohol and melted at 155
deg. C, thus showing that it was p-oxyisopropyl-benzoic acid, and
thereby proving the prior presence of cymene in the oil.

.To I'hellnndrene. — Phellandrene is absent, a fact proved by the
following test : — 2 cc. of the oil were taken, and 3 c.c. of saturated
af^ueous solution of potassium nitrite were added, without mixing.
Then ten drops of glacial acetic acid were slowly added, and the
test tube, containing this, put aside to stand. No crystals formed,
therefore there is no phellandrene in the oil.

Esters.- — ^The saponification number found by the usual method is
7.5. which is equivalent to 2.6 per cent, of an ester, having the
composition CmHi„0.

Alcohol. — Acetylation h\ the ordinary method gave 7.6 per cent,
of an alcohol, having the composition CioHi^O.

To Free Acid. — There is no free acid in the oil, which is shown
by shaking a known weight of the oil with a measured quantity of
alcoholic sodium hydroxide solution for a minute and then titrating
l)aek with a standard acid.

SuMJrAHY.

The main constituents of the oil are, therefore, cineol, cymene and
pinene. It also contains small amounts of alcohol, phenol and
ester, but no phellandrene. aroraadendrene, aldehyde or free acid.

It has a very pleasant odour, and owing to its high content of
cineol'. should pi'ove commercially valuable. The abundance of
trees in certain districts, and their foliaceous habits of growth
allow of an extremely economical collection of leaves. The percen'
ago yield, though not high, is sufficiently large to make a payable
proposition, and so. taking all these factors into consideration,
there is scope for the development of a new industiy in South-
Western Australia.

372 li. E. Fair//: Essential Oil of Agon is fiexiiosa.

The supply of leaves in Melbouinf unt'ortunately being restricted,
this investigation was not so complete as the author should have
wished; but if this paper causes an increased interest in a well-
known but little investigated tree and its products, he will feel
amply repaid.

Finally, he has to thank Professor Masson and Dr. Heber Green,
of the Chemistry Department, University of Melbourne, for the
kindly interest taken and generous assistance given in the prosecu-
tion of this research.

[Pboc. Kot. Soc. Victoria, 26 (N.S.), Pt. II., 1914.]

Art. XXIV. — On a Volcanic Aggionierate, containing glaciated
pebbles, at Kangaroo Gully, near Bendigo.

By ERNEST W. SKEATS, D.Sc, A.R.C.S., F.G.S.

( Professor of Geology and Mineralogy, Univer.sity of Melbourne.)

(With Plate XXXII.)
[Bead 11th December, 1913.]

Introduction.

This communication is concerned witli the nature and origin of
A I'emarkable rock outcropping in Kangaroo Gully about four and
-a-half miles S.W. of Bendigo. My attention was first called to it.
-and some of its peculiarities described to me by one of my former
students, Mr. E. C. Dyason, B.Sc, B.M.E., towards the end of the
year 1905. In his company and that of Mr. H. S. Whitelaw, of the
Geological Survey of Victoria, I visited and examined the locality
in January, 1906. A second visit was made by Mr. Dyason and
myself in March, 1906. In 1907 and again in 1911 I revisited the
area, and completed the field observations recorded below. I have
delayed pul)licatioii in the hope that further field work and reflec-
tion might enable me to give a satisfactory explanation of the origin
of the occurrence. A completely satisfactory solution of all the
problems has not occurred to me, but as the sections exposed in the
gully are becoming more obscure, I now place the facts on record
before the opportunity for other geologists to examine the exposures
in the field is lost.

Previous Literature.

In 1873 Mr. Keginald Miinay made a sketch geological map
of the Sandhurst (Bendigo) district, which included the area under
discussion. The alluvial gold-bearing deposits of Kangaroo and
Opossum Gullies are indicated on all copies of the map, but the copy
in the geological department of the University shows no indica-
tion of the conglomerate or agglomerate. A lopy in the Geological

374 E. W. Skeats:

Survey Office at Bendigo, however, shows the boundaries of the-
conglomerate approximately 'defined.

The only written account of the conglomerate I have been able
to find occurs in the Report on the Bendigo Gold Field, page 6, by
Mr. E. J. Dunn. F.G.S.. published by the Geological Survey of
Victoria in 1892. and a second part in 1896. As Mr. Dunn's
description, though important, is brief. I record it in full. It is
headed. " Glacial Conglomerate " : —

" On the west side of Kangaroo Gully, and opposite Opossum
Gully, an outlier, a few chains in length, and from one to two-
chains in width, of conglomerate that is referable to the same age
as the Wild Duck Creek conglomerate, occurs; it does not appear
to be of any great depth, and in age may be of Permian or later
date. In a more or less clayey matrix, in part rudely stratified,
and in indurated fine gravel are well rounded masses of quartzite
derived from Devonian conglomerates, hard grey sandstones in
angular blocks, small fragments of schist, etc., the pebbles and
fragments with the larger axes as frequently nearly vertical as
horizontal. Veins of pale yellow chalcedony occur, penetrating the-
clayey matrix; no other outlier was noticed in the vicinity of a
similar character. The conglomerate is very distinct from and in
no way to be confounded with the tertiary conglomerates ; it is the
last vestige of what may have been a very extensive deposit."

Mr. F. L. Stillwell, M.Sc, in a paper on the monchiquite dykes
of the Bendigo goldfield. Pioc. Roy. Soc, Vic, Vol. xxv. (New^
Series), Part 1, 1912, p. 9, in discussing their age, refers to one-
dyke cutting the conglomerate of Kangaroo Gully.

In view of the volcanic nature of the matrix of this occurrence
at Kangaroo Gully, it is interesting to note that some of the earlier
geologists in South Africa described the Permo-Carboniferous
glacial comglomerate (the Dwyka conglomerate) as of volcanic origin.

A. G. Bain, in Q.J. Geol. Soc, 1845, p. 315, described the rock
as a claystone-porphyry, and believed it to be the product of an-
enormous volcano. D. Draper, in Q.J. Geol. Soc, Vol. 50, 1894,
pp. 554-555, discussed the origin of the Dwyka conglomerate, and
quoted a letter from Dr. G. A. F. Mobengraff, in which the latter
stated that he had studied the rock " in situ," and by microscopic
sections. He said : " The Dwyka conglomerate gives me the
impression of a volcanic tuff (I mean a probably Permian diabase-
tuff) full of fragments of older rocks."

Tho hypothesis of the volcanic origin of the Dwyka conglomerate-
is now. I believe, entirely abandoned in favour of a direct glacial:

Glacial Ka/iujaroo didbi. 375

origin. Rock sections which 1 liave made t'loni iiuite)ial collected by
me at Riverton, neai- Giahanistown, and elsewhere in South Africa,
■certainly contain pebbles of igneous rocks, but, the matrix is free
from volcanic material, and has the angidar and typical chai'acters
of a normal glacial conglomerate.

Position of the Deposit.

The deposit is best found l)y going about 3^ miles about S.W.
from Bendigo along the Bendigo Creek to its junction with Kanga-
roo Gully at Kangaroo Flat. A further 1^ miles almost due south
along Kangaroo Gully, brings one- to its junction with an eastern
tributary called Opossum Gully, and the north end of the deposit
in question is seen in section on the Avest bank of Kangaroo Gully,
about 120 yards south of its junction wdth Opossum Gully. The
outcrop is roughly elliptical (see sketch map), the longer axis of
the ellipse coinciding almost with the bed of the creek occupying
Kangaroo Gully. The deposit is about 400 yards in length from
north to south, and the width varies from about 40 to 70 vards.

Nature of Outcrop of Deposit, and Relations of
Surrounding Rocks.

In places the deposit is masked by recent river alluvium. l)ut
generally the rock outcrops at the surface above creek level, and
has been exposed probably as the lesult of alluvial mining.' One
or two small gullies running east and west cut through the deposit
on the west side of Kangai;oo Guly. and in one of these the deposit
is seen in contact with vertical Ordovician slates and sandstones.
The junction of the two rocks is almost vertical, and both rocks are
overlain unconformably by recent alluvial material or hill wash.

Since Mr. Dunn's examination of the deposit two parties of
miners, presumably under the' belief that the deposit was super-
ficial, and that alluvial gold would be found below it. have sunk
two shafts and a bore into the deposit.

1'he nxisT iioftherly shaft (shown at F <iii map), and referre<l to
in this paper as the main shaft, is 2 feet by 5 feet in cross section,
and 24 feet deep.

376

E. F. Hhmt^.

SKETCH GEOL. MAP SHOWING THE
GLACIAL DEPOSIT IN KANGAROO GULLY

/)/(u.v/urti.

GlcLcia/

/^\ial hm. Hor. Scole-- Sin.'=imile.

Sketo^i Seci-ion along li^e^'B. Serh SmU:- 1m ''?O0ft.

Fig. 1.

Gl((vi(i,l KaiKfuroo (rail//. 377

S.S.E of the niaiii sliaft a hole was put dnwu at l{ on map to a
depth of 104 feet. I>y two miners named Murphy and Husst. while
still further S.S.K. at S. on the map. another shaft, sunk i)y
other iniwers, named Jeidvins and Bielski, penetrates the deposit
for 55 feet, and by l)orin<j: a fui-ther K) feet a deptli of 65 feet was
reached.

AH these shafts and hores eontinued in the deposit t(j the lowest
depths reached, when sinking was abandoned.

The relations of the deposit to the Ordovician rocks is peculiar.
Tlie shallow section in the E. and W. Lrully, cuttin},^ the deposit
shows an almost vertical contact between the two formations.
Further evidence of a sinular kind occurs near the bore at R on
the map. Eighteen yards S.W. of i\ie bore Ordovician slates and
sandstones outcrop on the west side of the gully. Tliey strike north
12 deg. west, and dip exactly at 80 deg. Since the bore penetrated
the deposit for 104 feet, without reaching the Ordovician, it follows
tliat the angle of contact between the deposit and the Ordovician
must exceed 60 deg. The average strike of the Ordovician rocks
near the deposit is north 10 deg. -20 deg. west. On the west side
of the gully the rocks dip west at high angles, and on the east side
they dip east at from 50 deg. -70 deg., as shown on map. An
anticlinal fold or line of centre country therefore runs almost
parallel with Kangaroo Gully, and the north-west part of the
outcrop of the deposit crosses the axial line. This line is evidently
the s(uitherly continuation of the Bird's line of reef. The shaft of
the Bird's mine lies 15 deg. west of true north from the deposit in
Kangaroo (iully. Along this axial line a monchi([uite dyke cuts tlie
dei>osit as shown on the map at the north-west part of the outcrop.
The dyke is about 1 foot wide, and has been traced on the surface
for about '{O yards. The strike of the dyke is north 14 deg. west,
and the dijj is nearly vertical. l)ut really at a high angle to the-
east. It is to be noted tliat the area occupied by Ordovician rocks-
on the map is left unshaded.

Some patches of r])per Tertiary sands, clays, and ironstones
occur to the south-west of the deposit, as shown on the map, and
are also indicated at the points A and B on the map. A is a small
patch exposed in a dam; B is ii'onstoiK' from a small dam. while
(' lepresents a shaft sunk -lit feet in Ordovician sandstone.

378 E. W. Skeafs:

Distribution and Nature of Pebbles in the Deposit.

The vertical section exposed in the main shaft at F on the map
shows from above downwards.

Silt, 18 inches.

Gravelly wash, part angular, part rounded — 2 feet — 2 feet 6
inches.

Volcanic agglomerate, with a few large pebbles and scattered
rounded quartz grains — IS) feet — 19 feet 6 inches.

At shaft S, sunk by Jenkins and Beilski, the surface material
tontained many jiebbles, but the material brought up in sinking
the shaft consists almost entirely of fragmental volcanic material
with small quartz grains scattered through it. Some fragments of
altered Ordovician sandstone occur, and one of these is described
later. It was reported to me that a large boulder was found near
the bottom of the shaft, but of this I have no personal knowledge.
The surface outcrops of the deposit generally show no bedding or
sorting of the material, and contain abundant pebbles, some angu-
lar, some rounded, and some facetted, of various rocks, including
quartzites, shales, and vein quartz. The pel)bles occur with their
longer axes irregularly disposed. In places rude bedding of the
material is indicated principally by bands of varying colour. Mr.
Dunn lias referred to the occurrence of veins of chalcedony in the
deposit. I found one such piece, evidently formed since the
■deposit, filling a cavity in the material and showing concentric
banding, indicating deposition from solution.

The distribution of the pebbles suggests that they are only abun-
dant near the surface. Mr. Dyason and myself, however, descended
tlie main sliaft at F on tlie map. and found. eml)edded two inches in
the wall of the shaft 1!) feet l)elow the surface, a (juartzitc pcl)l)le,
which is polislied and facetted and almost certainly of glacial origin.
Minute, rounded and angular quai-tz grains are not uncommon in
the volcanic niatri.x wherevci' we I'xaniinrd it. .Vniong the (luai'tzite
pebbles in the siiperhcial part of the de])osit a number wen' found
which, while rounded, were also ))olished as if l»y glacial attion.
while one shown in Plate xxxii.. Fig. 1 is a (piartzite pebble, not
only definitely facetted but showing on one face distinct glacial
striations. Thei'c vnn be no dou])t theiefoie that Mr. Dunn was
right in descril)ing the pel)bles as glacial, although he did not
obtain evidence, such as is described above, of facetting and stria-
tion among the pebbles.

Glacial Kangaroo (juUi). 879

Peti''Ograp!iical Characters of the Matrix of the Deposit.

As soon as 1 saw the deposit, even tlie superticial portion, I
recognised tiie great resemblance of the matrix to an nltra-basie
volcanic agglomerate. In hand specimen it is in snww ways com-
parable to the material tilling the volcanic neck at tlie Pennant
Hills, near Sydney, New South Wales.

The microscopic and chemical evidence, it will be seen, entirely
supports this view of its origin. As an example of the matrix at the
surface one may cite an agglomerate (Plate xxxii., Fig. 2), occur-
ring 40 yards south of the north end of the deposit. Glacial pebbles
occur in this material. Under the microscope, (Sections No. 1009),
there are seen large fragments of angular quartz, more or less cor-
roded, and of Oidovician shale. Some secondary quartz filling
<avities in the rock or replacing primary minerals can also be
distinguished. The bulk of the rock consists of larger and smaller
fragments of a very basic volcanic rock embedded in a finer volcanic
paste or cement. Both fi-agments and cement are much altered,
so that the ruck is stained and impregnated with red oxide of
iron.

The minerals present in the rock are olivine, now represented by
pseudomorphs in serpentine, biotite in long lath-shaped crystals,
now bleached and partially altered to liydromica, augite (?), pos-
sibly represented by granular iron-stained crystals, magnetite or
ilmenite, and a base which is almost isotropic, and may i-epresent
glass or possibly analcite. The rock is essentially an olivine-
biotite-nionchiquite agglomerate, with fragments of quartz and
Oidovician sediments. It resembles closely the monchiquite dyke
which inter.sects the deposit, but differs mainly in tlie paucity or
absence of augite.

As examples of the nature of the deposit below the surface, the
following specimens may be described : —

Specimen from the main shaft (Section No. 1010), (Plate xxxii..
Fig. 3). For chemical analysis, see below.

The rock is much altered. Porphyi-itic pseudomorphs in serpen-
tine after olivine are abundant, the ground-mass showing granules
and prismatic purple needles of titaniferous augite, and a colour-
less to brown isotropic matrix, which may be glass or analcite.
Small water-worn and angular quartz grains occur, and are cor-
roded, and some show a reaction rim, including minute prismatic
needle.s, possible of hornblende. Some secondary silica occurs in
the form of quartz and chalcedonic infiUings or replacements. The

380 E. W. Skeats:

rock is essentially an altered olivine nionchiquite, with larger and
smaller foreign pebbles.

Fragments from Bore at F, occurring round the l)ore hole, deptli
unknown (Section No. 1020).

This rock is essentially similar to the last described. It is
j)orphyritic and hyalopilitic, contains phenocrysts of altered olivine,
and in the ground-mass purple prismatic titaniferous augite, with
extinction angle of 40 deg.-46 deg., abundant minute magnetite
or ilmenite crystals, and the remainder consists of brown isotropic
material, probably glass. One corroded fragment of quartz is
embedded in the rock. The rock is a fragment of an olivine
nionchiquite.

The nionchiquite dyke cutting the deposit at its north-west end
has the following microscopic cliaracters, (Section, No. lOll).
(Plate xxxii., Fig. 4). For chemical analysis, see below.

The olivine crystals occur as serpentine pseudomorphs. Abun-
dant faintly purple augite needks, probably titaniferous, extinc-
tion angle 40 deg. -46 deg., and lath-shaped brown biotite crystals
occur, but magnetite is practically absent. Some of the cavitites in
the rock are lined with secondary chalcedony, and filled with pale
serpentine. The ground-mass is colourless and isotropic, and may
be glass or analcite.

The rock is an Olivine-Monchiquite.

From Jenkins and Bielski's shaft (S. on map) a large fragment of
rock was found in the heap surrounding the shaft. Its nature was
not at first recognised, but the chemical analysis quoted below, and
the evidence in section under the microscope show that it is a frag-
ment of Ordovician sandstone, which became embedded in the
volcanic material.

In Section No. 1014, it consists of angular and sub-angular
quartz fragments in a felspathic and micaceous cement. A band of
argillaceous material partly iron-stained, and partly changed to
chlorite occurs in one part of the section. The lock is an altered
felspathit: sandstone.

The Chemical Characters of the Rocks

Analyses of the fi-agmental rock from the main shaft were made
by Mr. T. H. Plante, B.Sc. and of the nionchiquite dyke, and the
fragment of ordovician sandstone from Jenkins and Bielski's shaft
by Mr. H. C. Kichards. M.Sc. Mr. E. O. Thiele. M.Sc, redetm-
niined for me the alkalies in the fragmental roik from the main

Glacial Kangaroo Gidbj. 38 F

shiiit. All these gentleintn were, at the time the analyses were made,
atlvunced students in the Geological department of the University.
Their results are as follow : —

A. — Analysis of volcanic fragniental rock from main shaft, jjy T.
H. Plante, B.Sc. ; alkalies in above by E. 0. Thiele. M.Sc.

B. — Analysis of nionchitiuite dyke, penetrating deixisit in
Kangaroo Gully, by H. C. Richards. M.Sc.

(J. — Analysis of Ordovician fragment, from Jenkins and Bielski's
shaft, by H. C. Richards, M.Sc.

D. — Analysis of monchiquite, fioni Central Red, White and
Blue mine. Sheepshead line, by F. L. Stillwell, M.Sc. (Quoted
from Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.. Vol. xxv. (new series). Part i.. li)12.

p. 1.;

A

B

c

i>

SiO., -

41.42

41.15

64.87

- 40.92

Ti02 -

6.58

5.62

-

2.41

6.57

A1,0. -

14.86

10.54

-

13.82

1!.34

FeaO. -

13.H6

13.21

-

3.95

.54

FeO

1 = 3.50

KeO = 12.SIG

CaO -

2.72

10.70

-

tr.

9.28

M-0 -

0.3S

7.28

-

1.23

7.78
MnO = 0.13

K,0 -

3. 30

2.18

-

5.70

1.94

NaaO -

10.20

0.99

1.78

3.27

F2O.-, = 0.51

H,0- -

S 5.42 :

7.25 Loss on
ignition

= 2.40

0.64

H2O+ -

(

2 15

.

1.77

CO, -

2. 40

0.60

-

2.82

Total - 100.64 101.67 99.66 100.47

Certain comments on the analyses are necessary. In tlie first
place both A and B are very altered i-ocks. This may be legarded
as explaining the high-water content (mostly in the serpentine), and
the amount of CO^ present in the rock. As the locks were sfv
altered, all the iron present was determined as Fe^Og. Allowing
for these points, it will be noticed that there is a close resemblance
in the analyses of the monchiquite dyke from Kangaroo Gully
analysed by Mr. Richards, and that of the Central Red White and
Blue mine analysed later by Mr. Stillwell.

The comparison between analyses A and B brings out some
interesting points, and one very puzzling one. The percentages of
silica, titanium oxide, and ferric oxide in the two rocks are so
similar as to leave no doubt that the rocks were originallv essen-

382 E. W. Skeats:

tiallj similar. This implies that the fiagmental rock from the main
shaft had originally the composition of an olivine-monchiquite.
The mici-oscopic evidence quoted above entirely supports this con-
clusion. However, the subsequent alteration of the two rocks has
apparently been different.' Whereas the content of lime, magnesia,
jind the alkalies in B, the monchiquite dyke, is quite normal for
such a rock, the proportions in the fragmental rock are absolutely
abnormal, the alkaline earths totalling only three per cent., while
the alkalies total thirteen and a-half per cent. This implies the
removal of the bulk of the alkaline earths present in the fresh rock,
and the introduction of about 10 per cent, of alkalies, principally
soda. At first I refused to credit the results of the analysis. Mr.
Plante, however, determined the alkalies twice, and obtained a total
of 12 to 14 per cent, for the determinations. At a later date Mr.
Thiele re-determined the alkalies, and his results are includeil
above. The microscopic examination fails to indicate in what
mineral form the alkalies are present in the rock. There are nu
felspars, and while analcite may be present there is nothing in the
appearance of the section to suggest its presence in large quantity.
I am not aware of any similar type of alteration in an igneous
rock having been previously recorded. There seems to be no doubt
of the original nature of the rock, and of its present composition ;
the alteration has occurred, but I am quite unprepared to suggest
the chemical and mineralogical changes by which the alteration has
l>een effected.

The Origin and Age of the Deposit.

The evidence of tlie mode of occui icnre of the deposit shows a
probably vertical contact with the Ordovician. while the microsroijic
and chemical evidence shows that the bulk of the material, especially
below the surface, consists essentially of fragments of an ultra-
basis volcanic rock, a monchiquite agglomerate. The relations
are suggested in the sketch section accompanying the geological
map. (Figure in text.) Further, the chemical and miscrocopical
evidence shows the closest relations between the agglomerate and
the monchiquite dyke penetrating it. Elsewhere^ Mr. Stiliwell has
suggested a correlation between the iiionclii(iuite dyke of Bendigo
and elsewhere in Victoria, and some of tlic limburgites of the
Macedon district, 2 which are not older tlian mid-Kainozoic. and

1 Stilluell op. cit.

2 Skeats and Sumniei'.s. Geolo<,'.v and Petrolojiry of the Macedon District, Bulletin '.'4. (Jeol.
.Survey of Victoria, 1912.

may l)e younger. If this correlation is correct, and it suoms jMuh-
able, the agglomerate of Kangaroo Gully, from its ix'semblaiKc lO'
the monchiquites, Avouhl l)e i-eferi-ed to the same age, i.e., nf)t older
than the mid-Kainozoic.

The evidence of the glaciated pel)liles in the deposit, liowever. is
important. We know df only one glacial period in Victoria, and
that is of Permo-Cailjonifei-ous age. Two alternativt- explanations:
of this remarkable association of glacial pel)V>les in a monchi(|uite
agglomerate suggest themselves, but neither is put forwaid with any
great confidence.

On the one hand we may picture the agglomerate as at least of
Permo-Carboniferous age, possibly older. The passage of the-
Permo-Carboniferous ice sheet over the area may have involved the
ploughing uj) of the uppei- part of the ag<rlomerate, and glaciated
jicljbles, witli hner (pnutz grains, might in this way be embedded
in the upper part of the deposit, where, in fact, they are most
jdentiful. As against this view we have the negative evidence
that no other volcanic rocks of this chai'acter of Permo-Carlxin-
iferous, or pre-Permo-Carboniferous age, are known in Victoria,
and the positive evidence that their known chemical and petrologicaf
analogies in Victoria are not older than mid-Kainozoic.

The alternative explanation is not without difficulties, but .seems
to me to be at any rate less improbable.

According to this view, one would picture the Bendigo Ordovician
area partly covered by Permo-Carboniferous glacial conglomerate
in mid-Kainozoic time. A volcano of explosive type reached the
.tjurface in Kangaroo Gully, bursting through the glacial conglome-
rate, and ejecting monchiquite agglomerate. Some of the glacial-
pebbles and finer material would be likely to become incorporated
in this way in the agglomerate. Subsequent denudation of the
area has removed all traces of the glacial deposit, except those
pebbles which had become incorporated in the monchi(|uite agglome-
rate.

It may be suggested that the pebbles, while glacial, are derived'
not immediately from a Permo-Carboniferous glacial deposit,
but have been handed down to a Kainozoic or recent river gravel,
and have become incorporated in the agglomerate in comparatively
recent times. This view I have considered and rejected, as a close
examination of adjoining Kainozoic and recent river gravels showed
a complete absence of glaciated pebbles, and a marked difference in
lithological characters. On the whole, but with considerable
diffidence, I think that the least unlikely hypothesis is the second

:384 E. ^Y. Sknds:

•one stated, that the deposit is essentially a Kainozuie iiioiiehiquite
.agglomerate, formed from an explosive type of volcano, which.
-bursting through a deposit of Permo-('arl)oniferous glacial con-
glomerate, incorporated a certain p)-oportion of glaciated pehbles
and finer deti'itus among the volcanic ejectamenta. and that
subsequent denudation of the area has removed all the glacial
material except where the neck of the volcano is now exposed to view
in Kangai'oo Gully.

Summary.

A volcanic agglonierate, contaiiiiii<i- glaciated pebbles, and in-
vaded l)y a monchiquite dyke occui-s at Kangaroo Gully, near
Bendigo. It junctions nearly vertically with Ordovician slates and
sandstones, and appeal's to be the outci-op of a volcanic pipe, ellij)-
tical in outline, and stretching X.X.W. and S.S.E., aljout | mile
long, and 40-70 yards bioad. The pipe has been peneti'ated by
shafts and bores to 104 feet. The bulk of the material consists of
monchiquite agglomerate similar petrologically to the dyke which
penetrates it. Chemical analyses show some similarities to the
dyke, but it is abnormally low in alkaline earths (3 per cent.), and
abnormally high (13.5 per cent.) in alkalies. These results appear
to be due to obscure subsequent alteration of the rock.

The agglomerate, especially near the outcrop, contains abundant
pebbles, some of which are definitely glaciated, and contains
scattered grains of quartz, apparently throughout. After consider-
ing various alternative explanations of tlie mode of occurrence, it
is suggested as not improbal)le that in mid-Kainozoic times explosive
volcanic activity formed a vent, which penetrated a deposit of
Permo-Carboniferous glacial matt-rial, and incorj^orated some
glacial pebbles with its fragmental ejectamenta. Subsequent
denudation removed all traces of glacial material, except Avheie it
was embedded in the neck of the volcano.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXII.

Fig. 1. — Facetted and striated glacial ([uartzite pebl)le fiom out-
crop of deposit in Kangaroo (iully. About s natural size.

Fig. 2. — Photomicrogiapli, Section Xo. 100!). x 25 diameters.
•Vgglomerate type of deposit, in which glaciated pebbles
(iccnr. 'I'jic section shows anguhir and corroded (piartz,
and fragments of monchiciuitc and (juartzite in a volcanic
nnitrix. Forty yards south of noi-th end of deposit.

Pr..c. H.S. Vi.-tofiM. I'.ll I I'hilr \X \

(iUu-ial KoiHjaroo (rulli/. 380

Fi,L^ •"). -l'lint<.Hiiii()ora).li. Section N... lolo. x 2") diainuters.
.\I(iii(lii(Hiitc' tyjif of luatrix. cdut aiiiiii^ <:laciatf(] pebbles.
The seetidii shows altered olivine, au^'ite and nia^nt'tite,
with an^ulai- and eoi'idded (jiiarrz fra^Miients, and sojne
seeondarv i|Uaitz. Material from main shaft, Kan^^aroo
(Jully.

Fiy-. 4. — PhotomieidMiaph, Sei-ti(.n No. Kill, x 47 diameters.
Altered olivine monehicjuite, witii augite. biotite, etc. Dyke
penetratinfj: deposit near north end of outcrop, Kan^:ar()o
(hdly.

Note. — The numbers of the rock sections have reference to the
collection in the (Teoloyii-al Deiiaitment of the IJniversitv.

[Proc. Roy. Soc. V^ictokia, 26 (N.S.), Pt. II., 1914.]

Akt. XXV. — I'/ii/siography of the Mansfield Districl..
\\\ chahle:8 FENNER, B.Sc.

(Keriiot Research Scholar in Geology, Universitj' of Melbourne.)
[Read Uth December, 1913.]

Contents.

I. Introduction. Area dealt with, etc.
II. Previous Literature.

III. Rivers and Creeks.

(Ij General Description.
(2) Detailed Accounts.

(a) Blue Range Creek.

(b) Bridge Creeic.

(c) Wild Dog and Hack Creeks.

(d) Broken River.

(e) Ford's Creek.

(f) Delatite River.

(g) Goulburn River.

IV. Mountains and Hills.

(1) General Description.

(2) Detailed Accounts.

(a) Tohnie Highlands.

(b) " The Hilltops" and Gallows Hill.

(c) Mount Battery.

(d) Mount Terry and Springfield Hills.

(e) South Blue Range.

(f) Cave Hill.

(g) The Paps.

(li) The Darlingf'ord Hills.
(i) Mount Buller.
( j ) Mount Tinibertop.

V. Other Features.

(a) Barjarg Gap.

(b) Power's Lookout.

(c) Junction of Delatite and Goul))urn Rivers.
VI. Progres.sive Physiography of the Upper Goulburn.

I.— Inti^oduction.

The area dealt with in this paper may be roughly defined as that
embraced in the cential and eastern portions of the Shire of
Mansfield. The parishes include — Nillahcootie, Ducran, Duerau
East. Maindample, Barwite, Gonzaga, Mansfield, Beolite, Merrijig,
Wappan, Loyola, Delatite, etc.

rhlisioiiniplni of the Mansjield District. 387

During 1913 I spent sonu- niontlis collecting data on the geology
and physiography of the district, and this paper embodies the
material collected under the latter head.

Physiographically. the Mansfield area is intciesting, for at least
three reasons : —

(a) It forms a part of the basin of the westward draining upper
Goulburn River, the latter l)eing an area of coiiiplcx relief, and
witli many fine rivers.

(b) A variety of rock types. Iwtli igneous and sedimentary,
occurs, and a corresponding variety of physiographic types is
found.

(c) Tlie sedimentary rocks are of various ages, with complex
faulting, bringing further variety of physiographic features.

The upper Goulburn basin has moved several Victorian
geographers to make specvdations concerning it. It is distinctly
impressive in Victorian mappings as the largest westerly draining
valley in the State, and is easily noted, not only on contour maps,
but on rainfall, })opulation. and railway charts. The following
detailed account of the Mansfield portion may help toward th^
elucidation of the bigger problems of the upper Goulburn.

II. — Previous Literature.

While there are no records of previous physiogiaphic work in
the Mansfield district, the following papers have been found very
useful and suggestive : —

(a) Griffiths Taylor. — " Physiography of Eastern Australia,"

Com. Bureau Meteorology. Bull. No. 8. 1911.

(b) Jutson, J. T. — " Physiography of the Yarra River."

Proc. Rov. Soc. Vic, Aug:.. 1908.

III.— Rivers and Creeks.

(1) — General Description. — (See fig. 1.)
In the nortii. Broken River, rising in the highlands that form the
western boundary of the upper King, flows westerly, receiving the
Bridge and Blue Range Creeks on the northern side. When it
reaches the parish of Nillahcootic. it takes a sudden turn north-
ward, and passes out through the Barjarg Gap. thence away over
the Murray plains, past Benalla, where it divides into two streams.
Further south. Ford's Creek rises in the low Springfield hills, east
of Mansfield, flows west through Mansfield, and then south across
Quartzite ridge to the Delatite. Burnt Creek and Howe's Creek

13

388

Charles Fenner

Fig. 1. — Map of the Mansfield district, with approximate
indicate main roads.

felief ; the dotted lines

follow similar, though sliorter, courses. The Dclntite River rises in
the elevated knot of granite and silurian countiv about Mount
Buller, flows westerly, closely approaches tlie (Toull)urn at a low
wind gap (Brack's Gap), then turns north. utkI then westerly, to
the Brankeet Creek, where the Delatite takes a sliarp turn south-,
ward, flowing into the Goulburn at the Sugarldaf. The Howqua
is somewhat parallel with the Delatite, but lises further east, near
Mt. Howitt. It flows west, junctioning witli the (Toulburn before
the latter has taken the westerly turn. S(Mitli of ttie latitude of the
of the Howqua, the following streams aie distinctly northward
flowing: — Goulburn, Big, Jerusalem, Rubicon, .\cheron. Yea, and
King Parrot Creek.

(2) — Detailed Accounf.
((t) Blue Ranc/c Cnelc. — This jirt'tty stream tluws through interest-
ing wooded country in the western ]iait of the Tuhiiie Highlands.
The valley is V-shaped, and has a fairly stee]) grade. The cour.se

Pliysiograpky of the M(cnsjield District.

389

of the stream is almost wholly along the margin of the granitic-
mass of the North Blue Range. The latter was evidently a residiial
previous to the deposition of the lower carboniferous mudstones, and
the present valley is due to the selective' erosion of the softer rock
along the junction. (See Fig. 6.)

(b) Bridge Creek. — This is the other important northern tributarv
of the Broken River. The valley is in the level-bedded carboniferous
mudstones, and in its various gorges and cliffs the influence of the
rectangular joint planes of the mudstones is very evident. Of tlie
many surveyed i-aihvay routes to Tolmie, one is up this valley, but
owing to topographical immaturity, the engineering difficulties
prove a stumbling block.

(c) Wild Dog and Back Creeks. — These lie further to the north-
west, and are lioth picturesque streams flowing through country of
granite and indurated slates. Falls 150 feet high are mapped as
occurring on both streams. Those on Wild Dog Creek are very
fine in winter, and the aneroid under good conditions registered
300 feet from the base to the summit of the falls. Both streams are
suggestive of " boat-hook bends." but whether they here bear the
significance attached to such bends is not evident.

(d) Broken .ff?'rer.— Taylor, in his " Physiography of Eastern
Australia," says. " An interesting problem awaits the Victorian
student at Barjarg on the Broken River."' As will be seen from

>< )<. X X. K

><. K X / X
X X X >^ X

A >. /< >v X

A = present cniirse ;

:old cour.^t

Fig. 2, the upper Broken and Ford's Creek are parallel streams
for a large part of their journey, both flowing in wide valleys in
the soft Battery sandstones. As may be noted on any topographic
map of the State, the upper Broken is within the natural mountain
boundaries of the upper (Toulbuni. .\ line of low hills separates

13a

390 CitaiieH Fenner:

Ford's Creek and tlie Broken l\ivei-, and these gradually become
lower as we go west. At the point (Fig. '2) where the Broken River

bW

iMilarg-ed diatjraujmatic section along dotted hne B m Fig.

takes its sharp northerly turn, there is no divide whatever. (See-
Fig. 3.) An examination of the area makes it quite evident that
the upper Broken River originally flowed south-west through the
Black swamp, and on to the Goulburn. There is a gentle slope
south-west from the " elbow of capture," and deposits of coarse
river pebbles (quartzites, black cherts and porphyry) also occur
These deposits have been opened up for road making, and are quite
similar to those of the present Broken River. The capture has been
made by a small stream heading back through the Barjarg Gap. The
two signs of recent capture, as set out by W. M. Davis, l are to be
found : (a) a trench (about 90 feet deep in this case) above and
below the elbow of capture ; (b) the absence of a small tributary at
the elbow. The river, on turning north, passes through the
Barjarg Gap, a striking valley, which will be considered later.

(e) Ford's Creek. — This small stream rises in the low Springfield
hills, east of Mansfield, flows for some ten miles west across the
Battery sandstones, and then turns south-west, cutting across the
strike of the silurian to the Delatite. Its interest lies in the fact
that, like the upper Delatite, the stream cuts through a very hard
ridge of thick quartzite, really a continuation of the South Blue
Range. (See Fig. 1.) It would appear to be a " superimposed
stream," having had its south-westerly direction prior to the
denudation that has left the quartzites standing as a low, but very
definite and continuous ridge. The roads to Loyola and Jamieson
take advantage of these two gaps.

(/) Delatite River. — This rises in the highlands about Mount
BuUer, and is snow-fed for a large part of the year. It flows west,
and, while in the region of granites and hardened slates, the valley
is steep, rugged, and V-shaped. (See Fig. 4.) Upon entering the
level-bedded carboniferous sandstanes, the valley is wide and

1 Geog^raphk-al Essays, p. 602.

J^hijsl<)(/iuip/i 1/ of the M(tn>ificld District.

391

Fig. i. -S)iowing the natme of the Delatite Valley in (i.) Granites and
slates; (ii). Soft level-bedded mudstones ; (iii.) Silurian shah's.

terraced, showing here the intiuence of the rock cm the " age " of
the valley. Crossing Quartzite Ridge the river is again narrowed,
and when it fairly enters the folded siluiian sliaies, we have a
return to a more V-shaped valley as diagrammed in Fig. 4.
Taylori refers to " the extraordinary path followed by the Delatite;
it seems to be heading straight for the Strathbogie Ranges, and then
•flows sharply south to junction with the Goulburn."

((/) Goidhurn River. — For the fii-st forty miles the (ioull)urii Hows
-almost north. After receiving the Howqua. it turns west; it is
joined by the Delatite on the north, and the Big River on the south;
passes through a narrow valley at the Sugarloaf, thence flowing

Fig. 5. — Map of the Chief Rivers and Divides (dotted) related to the
Upper Goulburn Eiver.

Physiography of Eastern Aust, 1911.

^92 Charles Fenner:

westerly to Trawool, where it again turns north to the Murray. It
is evident from its varied course (Fig. 5) that it has suffered many
changes, since its present valley is far from .being the harmoniously
branched whole that follows from the uninterrupted development of
a large river through a long period of time. (See Fig. 5). As
stated, the upper Goulburn has attracted much attention.

Skeats (Records A.A.A.S., Brisbane, 1909), suggests that the
divides have been determined by differential denudation, being
mainly outlined by plutonic masses. Jutson (Proc. Roy. See, Vic,
1911) agrees and believes that the Goulburn has enlarged its terri-
tory at the expense of the Yarra and Thompson Rivers. Gregory
(Geog. of Vict.) regards the middle Goulburn as a lately developed
stream that has captured the King Parrot, Yea and Acheron Rivers
from the Yarra valley. Taylor (Physiography Eastern Australia)
suggests that the old divide ran from Torbreck to Howitt.

In the absence of reliable topographical maps, and in view of the
large area concerned, combined with the rugged and unsettled
nature of most of it, it is very difficult to arrive at the truth of the
matter. Certainly most maps are misleading, the hachures usually
failing to distinguish between comparatively low hills and high
resistant mountains. Important ridges are sometimes left out of
the maps altogether. In support of the idea that the Goulburn
originally flowed north through Barjarg Gap (see Fig. 10), the
following considerations may be advanced : —

(i.) Such a course would bring the Goulburn into a harmonious
parallelism with other Vict, rivers draining to the Murray.

(ii.) The Barjarg Gap is itself evidence of a highly significant
nature.

(iii.) Other gaps such as Brack's Gap (see Fig. 1) also occur, an<i
may matk the old valley.

(iv.) There is a definite north and south mass of highlands which
would appear to have been the old western boundary of this valley.
These are the Cerberean Range, continued north through the Puzzl©
Range to the Strathbogies. Through these highlands the only exit
westerly is by the narrow valley at the Sugarloaf, west of Darling-
ford. (See Kiii-. •").}

IV.— Mountains and Hills.

1 . — General Dcxrn'ption.
In the northern part of the area (Fig. 1) are the Tolmie liigh-
lauds. These extend from the Barjarg Gap on the west to the

Physloijra/ilii/ o/' the MaiLsJieLd Didrict. 393

upper King River on the east, and are in places over 3000 feet in
height. Northerly, they slope to the Murray plains, and, on the
south, end suddenly in a fairly well defined fault scarp. In the
centre of the wide lower cai-boniferous valley of Mansfield arises
Mt. Battery (1760 ft.j and Mt. Terry. This country is all settled,
and utilised for dairying and grazing.

Bounding the Mansfield valley, and running N.W.-S.E., is the
South Blue Range, with its continuation, the Quartzite Ridge.
Further south is the dissected silurian peneplain.

To the East of Mansfield there is a magnificent mountain skyline,
including " Graves' Country " (Bainbridge Range), Mt. Buller
(o911 ft.), and Mt. Timl)ertop. or Warrambat (4230 ft.).

2. — Detailed Accounts.

(a) Tolmie Highlands. — This interesting group is apparently a
residual tableland of an average height of over 2000 ft. In the
south it is in a youthful stage of dissection. In the west, Mt.
Samaria and the North Blue Range are of intensely folded and
hardened silurian slates, largely intruded by granitic rocks. The

BflSflLT
"HILLTOPS'

Fig. 6. — Diagrauuuatic section throu^^h the Southern part of Tolmie
Hii^h lands.

southern portion is mainly of level-l)cdded purple Battery mud-
stones and sandstones. To the north, it is mapped as dacite and
porphyry, while conglomerates and sandstones occur again on the
East. Volcanic rocks, apparently of both older and newer series,
also occur.

The southfi-n boundary of these highlands has been referred to
as a fault line. The evidence may be summed up as follows : —

(i.) Slickensided idcks occur, but not abundantly.

(ii.) The ascent fiom the comparatively low country about Mans-
geld to Tolmie is very steep, rising over 1600 ft. in four miles by
the best road.

(iii.) The nature of tlie denudation on the two sides of the Broken
River presents an extreme contrast.

394

Charle)^ Fe nner :

North Side.

South Side.

i.

Deep V shaped valleys.

Wide, open, level country.

ii.

Sti-eams at high grade.

Streams almost at base level.

iii.

Cliffs and waterfalls.

iv.

Timbered and thinly populated.

Cleared an<l well settled.

Added to this is other evidence on the eastern and southern mar-
gins of what may be called the Mansfield Senkungsfeld, which will
be dealt with further on.

(b) — "The Ilillfops^' and Gallows Hill. — The chief product of
Tolmie is potatoes, grown in the rich volcanic soil of the hilltops.
From one such farm, about 3000 ft. above sea level, the owner
stated that it cost £2 7s. 6d. per ton to place his potatoes on the
Melbourne njarket, owing to transjiort difficuties. Although Nature
has provided Tolmie with patches of excellent soil, she has given
a physiography which is severely against progress. The hilltops of
older basalt are similar to those occurring in many other places
in Vic. (See Fig. 6.) This leads to the anomaly of cultivated hills
and heavily-timbered valleys.

Gallows Hill is the only "hill of accumulation "' known in the
district. The accompanying diagram (Fig. G) shows the main
features of the southern part of the Tolmie highlands.

(c) Mount Battery. — This hill (1760 ft.) is an interesting example
of the influence of internal structure on external form. The level-
bedded rocks give it its flat top and characteristic and numerous
ledges and scarp faces. (Fig. 10.)

((I) Mt. Terr// and Spriiii/field J/ ills. — These are in the lower
carboniferous sandstones east from Battery, and present an abso-
lutely different appearance. They have a fairly steep dip westerly,
and the difference in tlie topography thus brought about is striking.
(Fig. 7). It appears that tlie eastern boundary of the Mansfield

MT BATTERY

MT TERRY

FIl!-. 7.— Section tn.sh..\vst

Alts. ItMtl.

d 'l\

senkungsfeld, iiistead of rupturing and faulting, has " sagged
down as may l)e seen lookin<j: noi-thwnrd fioin lii<;(imar.

P}i!jsio<jrai>li;i of the Manstidd District. 395

'(e) Soiif/i lihir Roinji'. — Tliduuli lint hi^^l), this faii^'f prcsciiis a
barrier between MaiisJield uixl the rouulry to the sdutli. The gapis
utilised for roads are where tlie Dehitite and Kord's Creek ctit
throu<^h the rid<.^e. There is another gap ealled Moidvey (jully,
apparently formed l)y the etittin;^' haek of two streams, Init this is
not mucli used. The determining feature of this range is a series
■of quartzite beds usually dipping at a high angle. Massive con-
glomerates also occur at " The Cliffs " and " The Caves," and tliree
of the highest peaks are due to the presence of plutonic rocks. In
its lower parts, the range is composed of a series of hogbacks. It
is further interesting, physiographically, as the southern boundary
of the Mansfield .senkungsfeld. Intense slickensidi's. with abundant.
well-polished surfaces, have Ijeen traced for IT) miles along tlie
j-ange.

(/) Cave Hill. etc. — An interesting knot of hills occurs south
of Mansfield in the S. Blue range; the cliief points may be noted as
follows : — Cave Hill : Largely porphyry, witli level Battery sand-
stone above. Monkey Hill : A eentrocline of red sandstone, the
beds dripping inwards in all directions at about 45 deg. The Look-
out and Porphyry Peak, dominant points in the range, are of quartz-
porphyry.

((,/) The yV/As-.— These twin hills, over 2(l()() ft. higli, rise ijuite
suddenly from the flats to north and east. The rock throughout
is quite uniformly of silurian slates. The physiography on the
east is less mature than on the west, and with further knowledge of
the surrounding physiography these hills will probably be found
very significant.

(h) The Darlingford Hills. — These are of silurian slates, and
are typically of the Sugarloaf type; somewhat conical. This is
apparently due to the occurrence of more resistant vertical beds,
combined with valleys cutting across the strike. The hard beds
which have determined the hills may be noted outcropping even
from a long distance.

(i) Mf. Butler. — About 25 miles eastward from Mansfield, one of
the most important knots in Victoria culminates in the pinnacle of
Mt. Buller (5911 ft.). Although Buller is the highest peak of this
knot, Mt. Howitt (5715 ft.) is more important physiographically.
(See H in Fig. 5.) To the west and east of Bidler occur areas of
purple sandstones, these presumably having been denuded away
from the intervening area. Their absence is, however, of long
standing, dating back prior to the older basalt flows! (Fig. 8.)
The older basalt, which occurs on Mount Btdler, preserves one of the

596

Charles Fenner.-

highest early tertiarv valleys thus formed in Victoria. Similar
basalt occurs on Mt. Howitt, V)ut here the underlying rock consists
of purple nuidstone. The rivers on either side of Mt. Buller at

MT-BULL&R z^-^-

Fio-. S. — Diagraininaticj section from North to South through ^It. Biiller
(6911 feet).

present flow in valleys 4000 feet below the old valley preserved under
the Older Basalt. Since the latter rocks occur in conjunction with
fossiliferous beds otherwhere in Victoria, the fact may form tlie l)asis'
for some estimation of the amount of erosion in tertiary times.
Similar evidence occurs at the Dargo High Plains. Mt. Feathertop,
etc.

(j) Mt. Timhertoj). — This mountain, nearer Mansfield and more-
easily accessible than Buller, has a somewhat complex structure.
(Fig. 9.) Its table-top is a long, narrow outlier of level-ljedded.

Fig- 9. — biat4raniniatio sections sliowini^ structure of Mt. Timhert(->p.

coarse sandstones. The summit is 1600 ft. lower than that of Mt.
Buller, and since it is of easily weathered material, it will not be
long, " as the earth views time," before the sandstones will have
disappeared from Timl)ertop, as they have done furthi'r along the
ridge, exposing tlie more resistant underlying volcanics.

V. Other- Features.

{(I) Barjarfi nap. (See Fig. lO.). — This outline sketch is suffi-
cient to show that the gap is a very important one. Summers!

(ieolot,'}- Proposed Nillahcootiu Water Conservation Area. Proc. Roy. Society Victoria, 1908.

Physiography of the Mansfield District.

39:

describes the extremely resistant nature of the rucks at this point.
It appears impossible that the small Broken Hiver carved this valley.
As has already been mentioned, it is not nidikely this feature once-
formed the outlet of the northward-flowing Goulbuin.

STPkflrHBOC-(G Rfl.

d

Viff. 10. — Barjaro- Gap as seen from the South.

(h) "Potter's Lookout." — The diagram (Fig. 11) indicates a
phase of the physiography of the upper King River. For several
miles the coarse, level-bedded conglomerates cap the tableland.
The conglomerate is traversed by joint planes, and it is due to the
widening of one stich crack that we have the rugged scenic effects
of '' Power's Lookout."

POWEPv'S LOOK-OUT

Fig. 11. — Erosion of King's Valley at Power's Lookout.

(c) Junction of Delatite and Goulhurn. — A survey has recently
been conducted by the Water Supply Department with a view to
constructing a weir at the Sugarloaf. below the junction of the
Delatite and Goulburn. By the courtesy of Mr. R. Comer, who-
was in charge of the survey party. I have been supplied with much
valual)le information bearing on the probable history of the Goul-
burn. The survey records show that of the two streams at the junc-
tion, the more northerly was originally the stronger stream,
which is consistent with Fig. 15. Large deposits of alluvium have
been proved to occur here also. The gap through which the
river flows is very narrow, and V-shaped, the sides sloping up
practically 1 in 1. to well over 1000 feet on either side. The plans
also show indications that the GoulVjurn originally flowed northward
through Brack's Gap.

398

Charles Fenner

VI.— Progressive Physiography of the Area.

At least three of the great defonnative movements that liave
affected this area have left very definite traces in the folded strata
of the various ages. These are shown in Fig. 12. The lowest of the
three diagrams represents the intense crumpling and faulting under-
gone by the upper ordovician, as seen on a small scale in the face of
the phosphate mine near Mansfield. Howitti has mapped the strike
of these rocks as trending N.W.-S.E. The central diagram is an
ideal section through the Loyola hills, where the folding, though
steep, is less severe than in the ordovician. The strike is regularly
N.W.-S.E. The topmost of the three figures represents a long, low
fold in the lower carb., as seen in section on the Broken River at
Nillahcootie. The folding in these Battery beds is generally very
slight; although there is much deviation, the general dip is. as
stated by Dunn,2 gently S.W. This gives a third N.W.-S.E. strike.

LOWER c/saB.

OKPOVIC J AN

Vxg. 12.--St'Ctioiis slidwing tlui comparative folding of
strata of different ages.

1 Report on Phosphate of Alumina Berts near Mansfield, Rec. Geo. .Siir. Victoria I, t, UXKi.
•2 Reports of .Mininjj Registrars. Dec, 18S9, p. 69.

Pliy^iiogrdpJtu of t/ie Mansfield Dintrict. y9i>

It is interestiug tu note that the post-ord., post-silmiaii. and \>nsi-
lower-fai'buiiifeious deformations appear, in this aixa. in ha>e con-
sistently folded the beds with X.W.-S.E. axes.

The general trend of the tertiaiy crust movements here are more-
dithcult to determine. The reading of the recent physiographic
history is greatly retarded Ijy the absence of a reliable contour maj).
Since physiography is a science of mucii economic value, it may
be fitting here to add another voice to the increasing demand for a
Federal Contour Survey.

The upper Goulburn Valley has already been discussed in this
paper, and evidence has been adduced toward proving that the
present ujjper Goulburn consists of the headwaters of two original
northward-flowing streams. By means of the diagrams (Figs. 13-
to 16), endeavour will be made to elaborate this theory. While
there is no doubt that differential denudation has played a large
part in the formation of this valley, it is very proVjable that another
factor was block-faulting, similai' to that proved by Hart for the
western part of the Victorian Divide, and similar also to that which
has dominated the physiography of the neighbouring area of south-
eastern New South Wales. (Taylor.) Jutson has also shoAvn that
faulting has played a part in the formation of the adjacent valley
of the Yarra.

The inharmonious arrangement of the Goulburn and its tribu-
taries has already been pointed out. The sharp northward bend of
the Broken River at Barjarg (Fig. 2) has been noted by many
physiographers; old maps of Victoria, indeed, show that certain
cartographers had rearranged the mountain chains^ in order to
make this feature look more normal. Further, the discordant
nature of the windings of the lower Delatite before entering the
Goulburn (Fig. 1) is surely significant of some important crustal
movement. We may accept the main divide of Victoria as being
a physiographic feature of very long standing, say, back to early
tertiary times. Of this physiography we have some remnant in the
older basalt cappings of central and eastern V^ictoria. From such
relics, of whose relative heights we have unfortunately little know-
ledge, it would seem to be an impossibility to reconstruct, even
very roughly, those ancient river systems. Especially so, when we
consider the disturbed state of eastern Australia in late tertiary
times, and the fact that, as shown in Fig. 8, streams such as the
Howqua have eroded their valleys over 4000 ft. in very hard rock
since the older basalt period.

1 Map of Victoria by J. Bartholomew.

400 Charles Fenner:

In the following description prominence is given to block-fault-
ing to account for the physiography, and it may be -well to sum up
the strong evidence in favour of this.

(a) Hart has demonstrated ])l(>ck-faulting in the Western Divide
.(Grampians, Pyi'enees, etc.); tliese faults run roughly north and
.south with the blocks tilted upwaid in the ea.st. and downward in
the western part.

(b) Taylor proves that similar features have played a very
imjiortant part in the physiography of South-eastern New South
IVales.

(c) The area under discussion, where closely examined, gives
•clear evidence of extensive faulting.

(d) Slickensides are abundant here, being traceable for 15 miles
along one fault line.

(e) Tlie mapped outline of tlie granite of the southern Strath-
bogies is very suggestive. (See (4eol. Map of Vict.).

The collecting of stratigraphic data to prove this block-faulting
would be. with tlie present knowledge of the area concerned, prac-
tically an impossibility. It can only be said that the physiographi-:
evidence is such as to give rise to the hope that future strati-
graphical research here will give a final proof to tlie tlieoi-y of
block-faulting.

We may assume two huge fault-blocks in the area concerned ; one
with its high eastern part running north and south in the neigh-
bourhood of Mt. Buller. and dipping westward to the base of the
next block, whose uptilted edges are indicated by the CerV)eiean
and Puzzle Ranges.

To the sinking of the eastern block may be perhaps attributed the
preservation of the lower carboniferous beds of Mansfield, while the
only relic of similar beds on the fault-block to the w^est may l:)e the
small patch of sandstones and mudstones of the Cathedral Range.

Fig. 13 is an endeavour to represent the present upper Goulburn
Valley as it would appear if it had quietly developed as a western
flowing stream, without the interference of crustal changes during
its career. A comparison of this figure with the actual upper
■Goulburn (Fig. 16) will be interesting.

Fig. 16 shows the two northward flowing streams which have Wvw
postulated, the eastern one passing through the Barjarg Gap. lioth
streams have a tendency to drainage from the eastward, wliich
would bo a natural consequence of the tilting of the ))lock. This
tendency to receive the chief tributaries from the east is notiifal)le
in many of our present northern strenms.

Ph)/siogr(iph)/ of flie Mansfield District.

4(11

■H

-\ 1

V v><

%'

:ri

^

f!:^

"'

v-41.

,„,„^„.

i:^'-

15.

Fig. 13. — The Upper Goiilburn as it would have been had it developed un-
interruptedly as a western flowing river.

Figs. 14 and 15. — (with Section A B). Reconstruction of the rivers as out-
lined in the context.

Fig 16. — The Goulburn as it is to-day.

In Fig. 15 it is pictured that, in the progressive movement of the
fault blocks, the country has " sagged " along a central E. and W.
line. This would cause the river to relinquish its northern valley
and dam up against the tilted edge of the next l:)lock. Through the
least I'esistant part of this range the river would then cut its way
{Fig. 15). and thus take up its journey westward.

Later a northward flowing stream, heading back through the
Barjarg Gap, captured the Broken River, and we have the present
physiography as outlined in Fig. 16.

It is suggestive and instructive to know that when the goldfields
opened at Wood's Point and Jamieson. on the Goulburn. bullock-
drivers with their waggon loads of provisions u.sed to make the
journey from Benalla, south through the Barjarg Gap, on to the
Delatite. across Brack's Gap, and southward up the valley of the
Goulburn. This is approximately the cour.se of the stream as
indicated in the foregoing paragraphs.

402 C. Fenner: Physiography of the Mansfield District.

In conclusion, while no prol)leins are solved in this paper, slightl}"
more definiteness has been given to those already known, and a
collection of material is presented which may help future workers in
the area.

I am greatly indebted to Professor Skeats for his kind visits to
me at Mansfield, and for his guidance and suggestions. Thanks
are also due to the many residents of Mansfield who helped me to
see as much as possible of the district during my stay there. The-
" Geographical Essays " of Professor W. M. Davis have been a con-
stant source of inspiration.

1 N J ) K X.

>/■ veil- rienern ntnl species ore printed in italics.

Aciinthochitos exilis, 79

Acanthochites kiuil)€ri, 79

Acicnemis spilonota, 226

Age and Physiog-raphio Relations
of tlie Older Ha^salta, 45

Aglaoplicnia breviiostris, 135

Agonis flexiiosa, 367

Alysicarpus Jongifoliiis, 153

Alysiearpus rugo.sus, 153

Animodiscus ocalis, 170

A msinckia lycopsoides, 1

Aniycterides, Notes on. Part 1, 243

Analyses of Rocks. 265, 268, 278,
284, 292, 352, 381

Autedou prutoinaci'incina, 179

Antedon, sp., 180

Anthoceras myostotidoa, 1

Anthropology, 202

Arcoperna recens, 87

Arcopcrna scapha, 307

Artic«nis renins, 212

Atelicus atroplius, 224

Atelicus ferrugineus, 225

Atelicus inaequalis, 225

Atrypa aspera, 108

Atrypa fimhriata. 109

Atrypa reticularis, var. drcurrens,
107

Atylosia marmorata, 153
Australian Coleoptera, Pt. II., 211

Australian Hydroids, Pt. 11., 14

Caker, R. T., 148, 298

Bale, W. M., 114

Bassia lanicuspis, 1

Bauhinia Cunninghamii, 153

Bendigo — On a Volcanic Agglomer-
ate containing glaciated
pebbles, 373

liitter Pit and Sensitivity to Poi-
sons, 2nd Paper, 12

Bitter Pit and Sensitivity to Poi-
sons, 3rd Paper, 228

Bolk's baseline, 202

Bossiaea phylloclada, 154

Botany. 1, 12. 148, 228. 298

Brachysenia ("liambcrsii. 154-

Brizopyrnm acutifloruni, 2

Biichner. L. W. G., 202

Bullinella protumida. 79

Bullinella pygniaea. 79

Bullinella pygmaea, var. scnlpfa, 69

Bundoora, 45

Cadulus acuminatus, 315

Cadulus angustior, 80

C'adulus gibbosus, 80

Cadulus spretus, 80

Calyptraea hnlimnae. 320

Canavalia obstusifolia, 154

C'apulus devotns. 75

Cardamine hirsuta. 1

Cardita calva, 310

Cardita cavatica, 85

Cardita delicata, 85

Cardita spinulosa, 310

Carpentaria proteitormis, 171

Cassia Chatelainiana, 154

Cassia concinna, 154

Cassia desolata, 154

Cassia ereniophila, 154

Cassia eremophila, var. platypoda.

154
Cassia leptoclada, 154
Cassia sophora, 154
Cassia Sturtii, 155
Cassia venusta, 155
Cassis contusa, 324
Cassis (Semicassisj, siibgranosa. 324
Catalogue of the Marine Shells of

Victoria — Additions to, 71
Celtis pliilippinensis, 2
Cerithium torrii, 323
Chaetogaster australis, 89
Chaetogaster, On Two New Species,

88
Chaetogaster rictoriett.'iia, 94
Chapman, F., 57, 99, 166, 301
Chilomenes maculata, 227
Chlaniydopsis. 213
Chlaniydopsis aqilis, 216
Chlamydopsis detedi, 215
Chlaniydopsis inaeriualis, 217
Chlamydopsis sirrioIU.;. 217
Chemistry, 367
Chione mesodesma. 82
Chonetes bipartitn, 104
(,'ingulina insignis. 76
Clanculus sp. aff. aloysii, 316
Claviporella sp., 184
Clorinda linguifera. var. wilkini^oni,

106
Coleoptera, Pt. II. On AHsli'nli;iii

and Tasmanian, 211.
Cunchidiuni knightii, 105
Condylocardia tcnmcostae. 309
Corbula coxi, 312
Corbula ephamilla, 313
Crania pulclieUoides, 101
Crasstellite.s kingicoloides, 307
Cx'ossea cai-inata, 75
Croseea natiooides, 75
Crossotarsus rireviUeae, 226
Crotalaria Cunninghamii. 155
Crotalaria dissitiflora. 155
Crotalaria linifolia. 155
Crotalaria Mitchelli, 155
Crotalaria retusa
Crotalaria trifolia-strum, 156
Cucullaea corioensis, 302
Cuna atkinsoni. 85
Cuna comma, 84
Cuna concentrica, 84. 308
Cuna edentata. 84
Cuna particula, 85
Cuspidaria alta. 81

14

404

ProrcediiKjs of the Ruijal Sociciy.

Cuspidaria brazieri, 81
Cyanoetegia iiiicropliylla, 2
Cyclostrema harriettae, 318
Cyclostrema homalon, 75, 318
Cymatiuni cohimnarium, 72
Cymatium kauipylum, 71
Cyrilla dalli, 86
Cyrtina suh-hiplimta, 109
C'ytisus linifolius, 2
Daphne! la triscriata, 74
Dasytea hlackburni, 223
Dasytes hourgeoisi, 223
Dasytes helmsi, 223
Dasytes julesi, 223
Davies, 0. B., 88
'Deep Boring in the Mallee — New
and Rare Fossils obtained in,
Pt. 1., 166
Deep Boring in the Mallee — New
and Rare Fossils obtained in.
Part II., 301
Dentalinni aratum, 314
Dentalinm virgula, 80
Desmazeria acntiflora, 2
Desniodiiim Miielleri, 156
iDitrupa cornea, var. constrichi,

183
Ditrupa cornea, var. wornibetiensi,

183
Dodonaea, triqnetra, 3
Dinris pnnctata, var. alba, 3
Donax kenyoniavn, 312
Drillia dilectoides, 327
Drillia lacteola, 74
Drillia nenia, 74
Drillia saxea, 74
Drillia schontanica, 73
Echinocyanius (Scutellina), patella,

181
EctatntnmipliiUi. 214
Fctorisma graunlata, 81
Eglisia triplicata, 76
Eragrostis acntiflora
Erycina niicans, 311
Erythrina vespcrtilio, 156
Erythropblacnni Laboucherii, 156
Essential Oil from the Leaves of

Agonis flexnosa, 367
Estimation of Position and Slojjo
of Foramen Occipitale Magnnni,
202
Encalvtns frnticetornm, 148, 208
Encalytns Perriniana, 3
Eucalyptns polybractea, 148, 298
Encalyptns Sniithii, 3
Enchelus baccatus, 316
Enlima pimiuicula, 319
Knthria tabida, 72
Ewart, A. .1., 1, 12, 152, 2'J8
Fasciolaria an.stralasia, vav. Imkcr

72
Fenner, C, 386
Ferguson, E. W., 243
Flemingia lineata, 156
Flora of Australia, No. 20. 1

Flora of Australia, No. 21, 152
Flora of the Northern Territory,

153
Foramen Occipitale Magnum — Esti-
mation of Position of, 202
Foraminifera, 169

Fossil Vohites of Table Cape Be.ls, 192
Frondicularia hirifera, 171
Gabriel, C. J., 67, 71, 301
Galium Gaudichaudi, 4
Gari menkeana, 81
Gastrolobinm grandiflorum, 156
Gastrolobium Laytonii, 4
Gatliff, J. H., 67, 71
Gandinia fragilis
Geology, 46, 57, 256, 331, .373, 386
Glaciated pebbles, 373
Glycimeris maccoyi, 303
Gnaphaloides uliginosum, 4
Gomphrena involucrata, 5
Goniocidaris ep., 181
Goulburn Upper, 386
Greensborough, 45
Gypidula ricinride, 106
(iypina howchini, 173
Haiicornaria axcuata, 141
Halicornaria superba, 145
Hebella cylindrica, 120
Hebella scandens, 117
Heidelberg, 57
Holcotrochns crenulatus, 174
Hovea longifolia var. aspera, 5
Hydra viridis, 116
Indigofera australis, 5
Tndigofera boviperda, 157
Indigofera brevidens, 157
Indigofera enneaphylla, 157
Tndigofera haplophylla, 157
Indigofera linifolia, 157
Isis compressa. 178
Isoetes Drummondii, 5
Isofcropis avijenfpa, 157
Ivanhoe, 45

Jacksonia anniiiahi-, 158
.Taeksonia dilatata, 159

.Jackson ia odontoclada, 159
.Taeksonia rainosissinia, 1,59

Jutson, J. T., 45, 57

Kangaroo Flat, 373

Kangaroo Gi^onnd, 45

Tvactuca .sea viola, 6

T.ains alleni, 222

Laius, (\ — ij\ipiti(n'<< 220

Lains luirlrrl, 219

1-ains nnnut.iis. 221

Lanijiyris australis. 223

Ix-a. A. M., 311

T.eda fortis, 86

Leda hnttoni. 303
. I.eda miliacoa, 86

Lei)idoi)]eiu-ns t'oluninarins. 7S

Lcjjralia gii)pslandii. 185

Leptaena ihoniboidalis. 101

T,o)!taena i luunhoidalis, var. un-
data. 104

lad,

405

Leucosyriux recta, 7J.

Lilydalc and Mount l)aii(knoiig —

On the (jifc^logy and IVtrology

of, 331
Lima muriayi, 87
Ijiiuopsis nibricata, 302
Linioselhi aquatica, 6
Liiiaria Polisseriana, (>
Linaria vulgaris, 6
I.iotia dennanti, 31.")
Lilliophyllum (■'), sjx, IH'J
Lithothamniou, aff. liclieiioidL's, 168
Lithothaumion, spp., ItiS
Lithothamniou ramosissiiauni, KKi
Lotus australis, 159
Lyctus iiiipreesiib, 219
Lytocarpus auritus, 138
Macedon Disitrict, 256
Majaselhv lunata, 188
Ma'ideu, J. H., 148, 298
Malice — New aud Karc Fossils from

Deep Boring, Pt. I., 165
Mallec — New and Rax-c Fossils from

Deep Boring, Pt. II., 301
Mansfield District — Physiography

of the, 386
Marginella gabrieli, 73
Marginella gatliffi, 73
Marginella hordeacea, 325
Marginella praefurmicula, 326
Marine Shells of Victoria — Addi-
tions to Calatogue, 71
Meretrix regularis, 82
Microcala filiforniis, 6
Microcala qiiadraugularis, 6
Mici'omyrtus microphylla, 7
Mirbella oxyclada, 159
Misoijhrice hobleri, 225
Mitra stadialis, 73
Modiola linea, 86
Modolia niultifida, 7
Molhisca — New Species of Victorian

Marine, 67
Mopsea hamiltoni, 177
Mopea tinisoni, 175
Mordella promiscua, 22 1
Mordellifitena longii:cs, 224
Morris, M., 331
Morrison, A., 152
Mount Cooper, 47, 51
Mount Dandenong, 331
Myagrum jK-ifoliatum, 7
Nassa splridiscahnt, 325
Natica confrdcerm, 65
Natica schoutanica, 75
Natica subinfundibuhim, var.

ci'aasa, 321
Natica tasraanica, 63
Nectcrosoma costipcnno, 211
Nematophyllum Hookeri, 163
Neocarphurus piJnsiprnnis, 222.
Neosyagrius cordipennis, 224
New and Rare Fossils from Ihe

Mallee Bores. Pt. 1.. 166.: Pt.

II., 301.

New or Little-knoNvn Victorian

Fossils, 99
New Species of Victoria Marine

MoUusca, 67
Nillumbik PeneiDlain, 54
Northern Territory — The Flora of,

152
Nucula beachportensis, 86
Nucula obli(j[Ua, 301
Ocholissa hunieralis, 219
Occurrence of Felsite Dyke, near

Heidelberg, 57
Odostoniia nugatoria, 76
Older Basalts of (ireensborough, 15
Olearia speciosa, 7
Onoba bassiana, 322
Onoba chrysalida, 322
Operculiua venosa, 173
Orbitolites complanatus, 170
Orchestes perpusillus, 226
Orcus niollipes, 227
Orectosoelis, 213
Palaeontology, 99, 165, 192, 301
Parry, R. E", 367
Pecteu nnirrayanus, 3(i(j
Peunaria wilsoni, 116
Peutagonaster sp. 180
Persoouia juniperina, var, .sr/i(T(/, 8
Petaloetyles labicheoides. var. cas-

soides, 159
Pelatostyle.s labicheoides var.

//I iciophyUa, 160
Phaseolus Mungo, 160
Flu'idoliphila, 214
Pheidoliphila ntinuta, 214
Phenacolepas calva
Philobrya pectinata, 87
Physiogi-apliy of the Mansfield Dis-
trict, 386
Pithecolobium raoniliferum, 160
Pleurotoma ( Di-illia) dilectoides, 327
Pluniularia badia, 135
Phunularia campanula, 133
Polyphrades biplagiatus, 224
Polystomella striatopiinctata, var.

'ernlufa., 173
Porina gracilis, 185
Potentilla recta, 8
Pritchard, G. B., 63, 192 .
Psalidura helmlsi, 247
Psalidura intermedia, 246
Psalidura irrasa, 245
Psalidura inira var. edenensis. 243
Psalidura taylmi, 244
Psoralea badocana, 161
Psoralea cinerea, 161
Psoralea leucantha, 161
Psoralea Ivteosa, 161
P.soralea patens, 162
Psoralea pustulata. 162
Ptychosema trifoliolatuni, 162
Pulvinulina calabra. 172
Piilvinulina scabricula, 172
Pyraniidella jonesiana, 319
Ranuneuhis aai'dous, 8

14A

406

Prucee< lings of the Roijcl Socictij: In<Je.>

Rapistrum rugosuiUj 8

Rees, Eeitha, 1

Eeesia, 9

Reesia erecba, 9

Revision of the Fossil Volutes of

Table Cajje Beds, 192
■Rhamplius perpusillus, 226
Rhynchosia minimaj 162
Rissoa aiibtraliae, 78
Rissua bicolor, 69
Riseoa columuaria, 78
Rissoa iilocincta, 78
Rissoa qatliffiana, 321
Rissoa iravadioides, 67
Rissoa iravadoides, 76
Rissoa jaujuceusis, 77.
Rissoa pyraniidata, 77
Rissoa rubicimda, 77
Rissoa sclioutanica
Rissoa verconis, var. apicilatu, 68
Rifisoa verconis, var. apicilata, 77
Rissoa wilsonensis, 68
Rissoa wilsoneiisis, 77
Rissoa (Ouoba), bassiaiia, 322
Rissoa (Onaba), chrysalida, 322
Rochefortia donaciformis, 311
Sclerorimus aniyctemides, 254
Selenaria marginata, var. spiralis,

184
Semicassis subgrauosa, 324
Senecio Daltoni, 9
Serpula ouyensis, 182
Sertularia acanthostonia, 131
Sertularia diverges, 131
Sertularia loculosa, 121
'Sertularia margiuata, 125
Sertularia inuelleri, 133
(Sertularia tenuis, 129
Sertularia turbinata
Sesbaiiia aculeata, 162
Sesbauia grandiilora, 162
Silurian Bracliiopoda, 99
Siphonotreta plkatellu, 10().
Skeats, E. W., 373
Spirifer lilydalensis, 110.
Spirorbis lieliciformis, 184
Staeliys arvensis, U)
Stratlibogit's, 258
Sugarloal Jiill, Ileidulberg, 57
Summers, Jl. S., 256
Swaiusona Burkei, 163
Swainsoiia oroboides, 163
Swainsona sp., 163
Table ("ape Beds, Tasmania, 192
Talaurinus alaticornus, 249
Talaurinus aiujustus, 250
''I'alauriinis carinafus, 253
Talaurinus anrfusus, 247
Talaurinus tumeri. 251
Talaurinus vitUcollis, 249
Tasmanian C'oleoplera, Pt. 11., 211
Teinosloniii dcprrssula, 317
Tcinostonia pukherrriina, 317
Tellina diluia, 82
TenijjJi'stonia Hookeri, 163
Tephrosia Hlipes, 163

Tepluosia fiammea, 163
Tephrosia phaeosperma, 163
Tephrosia pabescens, 163
Tephrosia purjjurea, 164
Tephrosia uniovulata, 164
Terebra profunda, 326.
Terebraitella acutirostra, 186
Terebratella portlandica, 187
Terebratuliua fliudersi, 186
Thyasira fiexuosa, 82
Thechia alternata, 225
Trelliiia liowchiui, 169
Trigonia lamarcki, 304
Trigonia margaritacea, var. auu-

ticostata, 305
Trophon rccurvatus, 71
Trophon sinij^lex, 71
Tunica prolifera, 10
TurbouilJa tiara, 76
Turbonilla weeahensis, 320
Turritella circumligata, 323
Turritella microsoopica, 75
Turritella pagodula, 323
Uraria cylindracca, 164
Urena lobata, 10
Verbascum Blattaria, 10
Victorian Fossils, 99, 165, 192, 30l
Victorian Igneous Rocks — On the
Origin and Relationship of
some, 256
Volcanic agglomerate, 373
Voluta altioostata, 199
Voluta ancilloides, 196
Voluta anticingulata, 192
Volnta anticingiilata, var. indivi.'~a,

193
Voluta anticingulata, var. persul-

cata, 193
Voluta. atkinsoni, 198
Voluta iialli, 198
Voluta lirata, 197
Voluta maccoyii, 196
Voluta macroptera, 199
Voluta mortoni, 195
Voluta papillosa, 72
Voluta pellita, 198
Voluta spenceri, 198
Voluta stephensi, 195
Voluta stroi)hodon, var. brevispira,

194
Volnta stropliodon, var. stolida,

194
Voluta tateana, 195
Voluta weldii, 193
Voluta weldii, var. (iiKjustior, 104
Voluta weldii, var. interinedia, 193
Voluta wynyardensis, 200
Volutes, Fossils of Table Capo Beds,

192
Westringia ercmicola, 10
Westriugia rigida, 10
Xanthophaea, 211
Xystrocera virescens, 227
Zygophyllum ovatuni, 10
Zoology, 67, 71, 88, 114, 211, 243
Zornia dijjhylla, 164

END OF VOLUME XXVI.
I'akt II. Published Makoh, 1914.]

Publications of the Royal Society of Victor'ia, and
of the Societies amalgamdtted with it.

Victorian Tnsi-itutk for the Advancement of Science.
Transacticjiis. Vo]. ], 18r)5.

Philosophical Society of Victoria.
Transactions. Vol. 1. 1855.

T/ie^e two Societies iiieti amalgamated and />ecame : —

Philosophical Institute of Victoria.
Transactions. A^'ols. 1-4.

T/ie Society then became : —

Hovai. Society of Victoria.

Ti-ansactions and Proceedings (V^ol. 5, entitled Transac-
tions). (8vo). Vols. 5-24.

Transactions. (4to). Vols. 1, 2, 3 {Pt. 1 only was pub-
li.shed), 4, 5. 1888-1909.

Proceedings (New Series). (8vo). Vols. 1 .1888

Microscopical Society of Victoria.

Journal ( V^ol. 1, Pt. 1, entitled Quarterly Journal). Vol. 1
(Pts. 1 to 4), 2 (Pt. 1), title page and index [ali
pul)lished\ 1879-82.

\The Society then combined ivith the Koyal Society op Victoria]

No'i'E. — Most of the iiohones published before i8go are out
of print.

PROCEEDINGS

§opI ^ukid of ^irtona.

^ VOL. XXVI. {New Semes).
PART I.

luj L I B R A '-* Y ■ —

Edileii under (hi Authority of the V^^Ncit. " j ^

■^.■—^Jt*. / ■^

/:

ISSUED SEPTEMBER, 1913.

(Coutiiiiiiiig I'apers read before the Society during the months of
March to July, IQ'S)-

THK AU1IIOK8 UK IIIK SKVKRAL I'APKRS AKK SKVERAI.LY HKSPONSIKI.B COlt It

HfiUNIlXRHS OK TIIR OriNlOSS OIVBN ASO FOR TIIK ACC1IRA( Y OK TIIR

STArKMSNTS MADH TIIBRKIN.

MELBOUKNE :
FORD & SON, PRINTERS, DRUMMOND STREET, CARLTON.

1913.

Publications of the Royal Society of Victoria, and
of the Societies amalgamated with it.

Victorian Ikstitutk for the Advancement of Scirxcr.
Transactions. Vol. 1 I'^on.

Philosophical Society of Victoria.
Transactions. Vol. 1. 1855.

These tivo Societies then anialgaviatid and became : —

Philosophical Institute of Victoria.
Transactions. Vols. 1-4.

The Society then became : —

Royal Society of Victoria.

Transactions and Proceedings (Vol. 5, entitled Transac-
tions). (8vo). Vols. 5-24.

Transactions. (4to). Vols. 1, 2, 3 (Pt. 1 only was pub-
lished), 4, 5. 1888-1909.

Proceedings (New Series). (8vo). Vols. 1 .1888

Microscopical Society of Victori.^.

Journal (Vol. 1, Pt. 1, entitled Quarterly JouruHl). Vol. 1
(Pts. 1 to 4), 2 (Pt. 1), title page and index [all
published]. 1879-82.

[The Society then combined with the Royal Society of VicroKiAJ

Note. — Most of the volumes published before i8go ate out
of print.

PROCEEDINGS

oniil ^orietij of firtorla.

VOFi. XXVI. (Niiw Series).

PART TI.

E,///e</ under the Authority oj the Council. f^^Jf I ' ^ ^ '^

-<^\ >..

ISSUlil) MARCH, 1914.

(Coiittiiiiiiig f'a/iers rend before the Society liiiriii/; the months of
Septemher to December, igis).

rUR AlilllOKS OK IMK SKVKKAL I'Al'KK* AKK SKVKRAM.V KKBCoNBIKr.K KOK IM»

HOISnVKMH <iy IHK oriNIilNS OIVKN AND KOR TIIK AdI'HACV r>y rilK

STATKMKSTS MAOK TIIBRKIN.

MELHUUKNI-::
KORD & SOX. FRINTER.S, DRUMMOND .STKKKT. (.ARLTUN.

19U.

fujLlBRARylS

^Vk^

Publications of the Royal Society of Victoria, and
of the Societies amalgamated with it.

Victorian Institute for the Advancement of Soienck.
Transactions. Vol. 1. 1855.

Philosophical Society of Victoria.
Transactions. Vol. 1. 1855.

These hvo Societies then amalgamated and became : —

Philosophical Institute of Victoria.
Transactions. Vols. 1-4.

The Society then became : —

lloYAL Society of Victoria.

Transactions and Proceedings (Vol. 5, entitled Transac-
tions). (8vo). Vols. 5-24.

Transactions. (4to). Vols. 1, 2, 3 (Pt. 1 only was pub-
lished), 4, 5. 1888-1909.

Proceedings (New Series). (8vo). Vols. 1 .1888 ,

Microscopical Society op Victoria.

Journal (Vol. 1, Pt. 1, t-;/////^^ Quarterly Journal). Vol. 1
(Pts. 1 to 4), 2 (Pt. 1), title page and index [all
published]. 1879-82.

[The Society then combined with the Royal Society of Victoria]

Note. — Most of the volumes published be/ore rSgo are out
of print.

w

MB

II :i
5

Li A m II II JJI:I
WHSE 00607

mmm'mmimmWmmHMmim